Surf Manual English

ICEM Surf 2015.
Reference Manual
October 2015
Dassault Systmes 2015.

All rights reserved.
Legal Notices and Contact
Copyright Information
Copyright 2015 Dassault Systmes. All Rights Reserved.

User and training documentation from ICEM is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a
license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. ICEM hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make
such limited copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, as may be necessary for internal/personal use only and all
such copies shall be made in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed to the licensed user. Any
copy made shall include the full ICEM copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by ICEM to the licensed user from time to time.
This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including, but not limited to, electronic media, or
transmitted or made publicly available by any means whatsoever without the prior written consent of ICEM and no authorization is granted to make
copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not, in any circumstances, be
construed as a warranty or commitment by ICEM. ICEM neither assumes nor accepts any responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies
howsoever arising that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under a written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and commercial and
intellectual proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or
distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with
written prior approval from ICEM. PLEASE NOTE THAT UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN
CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trade Marks of Dassault Systmes or a Subsidiary

CATIA, ICEM, ICEM Surf, ICEM DDN and ICEM Shape Design are trade marks or registered trade marks of Dassault Systmes or its subsidiaries
in the US and/or other countries.
Third-Party Trade Marks

3Dconnexion, the 3Dconnexion logo, and other 3Dconnexion marks are owned by 3Dconnexion and may be registered. Adobe is a registered
trade mark of Adobe Systems inc.. AIX is a trade mark or registered trade mark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United
States and other countries. AMD, ATI and FIREGL are registered trade marks of Advanced Micro Devices. Barco is a registered trade mark of
Barco nv. HP-UX is a registered trade mark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. NX I-DEAS is a trade mark or registered trade mark of UGS Corp..
IRIX is a registered trade mark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. Linux is a registered trade mark of Linus Torvalds. Netscape and the Netscape N and
Ship's Wheel logos are registered trade marks of Netscape Communications Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. NVIDIA is a registered
trade mark of NVIDIA Corporation. Sun Solaris is a trade mark or registered trade mark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT,
Windows 2000, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP, Windows XP Professional, Visual Basic, and the Visual Basic logo are registered trade
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. SuSE and its logo are registered trade marks of Novell inc.. Wacom is
a registered trade mark of Wacom Company, Ltd.
All other trademarks or product names are property of their respective owners.
Licensed Third-Party Technology Information

Certain ICEM software products contain licensed third-party technology: FLEXnet and FLEXlm are registered trade marks of Flexera Software Inc..
LightWork Libraries are copyrighted by LightWork Design 1990-2004. Pro/ENGINEER, CDRS, 3DPAINT are copyrighted by
Parametric Technology Corporation. The CADverter for Catia and Unigraphics are copyrighted by Theorem Solutions Ltd.
WinX11 library license information

Portions related to the WinX11 library are Copyright (c) 1994 Software Research Associates, Inc. under the following license:
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation,
and that the name of Software Research Associates not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
written prior permission. Software Research Associates makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided as is without express or implied warranty.
TIFF Image I/O library license information

Portions related to the TIFF Image I/O library are Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler / Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. under the
following license:
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software
and related supporting documentation, and that the name of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to
distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE TIFF LIBRARY IS PROVIDED BY SAM LEFFLER AND SILICON GRAPHICS AS-IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
JPEG Image I/O library license information
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions related to the JPEG Image I/O library are Copyright (C) 1991-
1998, Thomas G. Lane.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b)
(OCT'95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN'95), is provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For
procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT'88) or Commercial
Computer Software-Restricted Rights at
FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN'87) or FAR 52.227-14 (ALT III), as applicable. 032603
Registered office:
10, Rue Marcel Dassault
78140 Vlizy-Villacoublay Tel: + 33 1 61 62 61 62
FRANCE Fax: + 33 1 70 73 43 63
Contact Information
Homepage
http://www.3ds.com/products-services/catia/portfolio
License Keys
http://www.3ds.com/terms/software-keys/
Sales
http://www.3ds.com/how-to-buy/contact-sales
Technical Support
http://www.3ds.com/support-training/
You can also contact a local office, for native speaking first level support. Please find the contact details below.
Germany: Italy:
Dassault Systmes Deutschland GmbH Hannover Dassault Systmes Italia

Ksterstrae 8 Via Rossini 1/A
30519 Hannover 20020 Lainate
Germany Italy
Phone: +49 (0)511 9848 6 Phone: +39 0 233 43061

Fax: +49 (0)511 9848 810 Fax: +39 0 233 430645
France:
Dassault Systmes
10, Rue Marcel Dassault
CS 40501
78946 Vlizy Villacoublay, Cedex
France
Phone: +33 1 6162 7203
USA & Canada: Asia & Pacific:
Dassault Systmes Americas Dassault Systmes K.K.

300 Galleria Officecentre Dr. Pier City Shibaura Bldg 10F
Suite 305 3-18-1 Kaigan, Minato-ku
Southfield, MI 48034 108-0022 Tokyo
USA Japan
Phone: +1 248 351 0741 Phone: +81 (0)3 5442 6040

Fax: +1 248 351 0917 Fax: +81 (0)3 5442 4040
CONTENTS
Contents
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
1 Documentation and online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
1.1 Documentation in PDF format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

1.2 Online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
1.2.1 The menu Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
1.2.2 Contents of the online help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
2 General control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
2.1 Starting and terminating ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

2.2 Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
2.3 Function and control keys and mouse buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.4 The function windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
2.4.1 Setting function parameters and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
2.4.2 Standard functions in the window footer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
2.4.3 Notation of angle specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
2.4.4 User-defined settings in service functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
2.5 The symbols in the graphic area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
2.5.1 General usage of the mouse buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
2.5.2 The 3D Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2.5.3 The plane symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2.5.4 The Move Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
2.5.5 The clipping plane and turn table symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
2.5.6 The image symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
2.5.7 The light source symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
2.5.8 The point symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
2.5.9 The vector symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
2.5.10 The coordinate axes symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
2.5.11 The grid symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
2.5.12 General options in the context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
2.6 View manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
2.6.1 View manipulation by mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
2.6.2 View manipulation by keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
2.6.3 The magnifying glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
2.7 Mousewarp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
2.8 External devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
3 User interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
3.1 Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

3.2 Service functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
4 Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
4.1 General information about the selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

4.2 Object selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
4.2.1 Selection of incomplete molecules or parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
4.2.2 Object Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
4.2.3 Chain selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
5
CONTENTS
4.2.4 Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

4.3 Position selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
4.4 Vector selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
4.5 Region selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
4.5.1 Selection (Region) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
4.5.2 Selection (Scan Region). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
5 The menu File General functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
5.1 General information about input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

5.1.1 File formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
5.1.3 ICEM Surf data base (DB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
5.1.4 Naming conventions for CAD data exchange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
5.1.5 Conversion tables for CAD data exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
5.1.5.1 ASCII Part <> ICEM Surf DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
5.1.5.2 VDA/FS <> ICEM Surf DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
5.1.5.3 IGES <> ICEM Surf DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
5.1.5.4 Catia V4 <> ICEM Surf DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
5.1.5.5 Unigraphics <> ICEM Surf DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.2 File browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5.3 Integration of ICEM Surf in PDM systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
5.4 File Reference Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
5.4.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
5.4.2 The main menu Reference Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
5.4.3 The context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
5.4.3.1 Context menu for group nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
5.4.3.2 Context menu for groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
5.4.3.3 Context menu for files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5.5 File Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
5.6 File New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
5.7 File Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
5.8 File Save as... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
5.9 File Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
5.9.1 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
5.9.2 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.9.3 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
5.9.4 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
5.9.5 Example for the creation of a plot file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
5.9.6 Assigning plot colours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
5.10 File Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
5.11 File Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
5.12 File Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
5.13 File Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.14 File Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.15 File Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
5.16 File Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
6 The menu File Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
6.1 Import ICEM DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

6.1.1 Import ICEM DB Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
6.1.2 Import ICEM DB Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
6
CONTENTS
6.2 Import IGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

6.3 Import VDA/FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
6.4 Import ASCII Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
6.5 Import Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
6.6 Import 3DPAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
6.7 Import Raw Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
6.8 Import CDRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
6.9 Import Catia V4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
6.10 Import Catia V5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
6.11 Import Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
6.12 Import Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
6.13 Import STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
6.14 Import EDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
7 eThe menu File Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
7.1 General export options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

7.2 Export ICEM DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
7.2.1 Export ICEM DB Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
7.2.2 Export ICEM DB Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
7.2.3 Export ICEM DB Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
7.3 Export Legacy formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
7.3.1 Export DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
7.3.2 Export EDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
7.3.2.1 Export EDF Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
7.3.2.2 Export EDF Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
7.3.2.3 Export EDF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
7.3.3 Export Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
7.4 Export 3DXML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
7.5 Export Catia V4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
7.5.1 Export Catia V4 Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
7.5.2 Export Catia V4 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
7.5.3 Export Catia V4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
7.5.4 Edit Catia V4 Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
7.6 Export Catia V5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
7.6.1 Export Catia V5 Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
7.6.2 Export Catia V5 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
7.6.3 Edit Catia V5 Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
7.7 Export Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
7.7.1 Export Unigraphics NX Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
7.7.2 Export Unigraphics NX Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
7.7.3 Export Unigraphics NX Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
7.7.4 Edit Unigraphics NX Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
7.8 Export Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
7.8.1 Export Unigraphics Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
7.8.2 Export Unigraphics Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
7.9 Export IGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
7.9.1 Export IGES Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
7.9.2 Export IGES Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
7.10 Export VDA/FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
7.10.1 Export VDA/FS Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
7.10.2 Export VDA/FS Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
7.11 Export 3DPAINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
7
CONTENTS
7.12 Export ASCII Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

7.12.1 Export ASCII Parts Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
7.12.2 Export ASCII Parts Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
7.13 Export CDRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
7.14 Export Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
7.14.1 Export Inventor Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
7.14.2 Export Inventor Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
7.14.3 Export Inventor NURBS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
7.15 Export PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
7.16 Export Raw Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
7.17 Export Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
7.17.1 Export Scan Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
7.17.2 Export Scan Scan Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
7.18 Export STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
7.18.1 Export STL Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
7.18.2 Export STL Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
7.19 Export Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
7.19.1 Export Image Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
7.19.2 Export Image Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
7.20 Export VRML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
7.20.1 Export VRML Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
7.20.2 Export VRML Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
8 The menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
9 The menu Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
9.1 Objects Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

9.2 Objects Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
9.3 Objects Structure Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
9.3.1 How to use the structure editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
9.3.2 The options in the menu Edit ICEM DB Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
9.4 Objects Object Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
9.4.1 The context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
9.4.1.1 Context menu for lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
9.4.1.2 Context menu for the creation of a new part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
9.4.1.3 Context menus for parts, molecules, and atoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
9.4.1.4 Context menu on part and molecule nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
9.4.1.5 Context menu for the display of the object table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
9.4.2 The submenus for extended information on atoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
9.4.3 The submenu Tessellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
10 The menu Diagnoses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
10.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

10.2 Diagnoses Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
10.2.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
10.2.2 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
10.2.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
10.3 Diagnoses Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
10.3.1 Surface Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
10.3.1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
10.3.1.2 Topology of Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
8
CONTENTS
10.3.1.3 Patches/Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

10.3.1.4 Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
10.3.2 Curve Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
10.3.3 Scan Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
10.3.4 Safety Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
10.3.4.2 Safety Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
10.3.4.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
10.3.5 Flat Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
10.3.5.1 What is a flat region? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
10.3.5.2 What are the verification methods used in the diagnosis Flat Region? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
10.3.5.3 Which importance has the rotation angle? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
10.3.5.4 How is the subsequent deviation diagnosis used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
10.3.5.5 What is the recommended operating procedure for the diagnosis? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
10.3.5.6 The menu Flat Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
10.3.6 Dynamic Distance Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
10.3.6.1 The menu Dynamic Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
10.3.6.2 The context menu for the point position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
10.3.7 Visual Surface Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
10.3.8 Nominal Actual Value Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
10.4 Diagnoses Diagnoses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
10.4.1 Diagnoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
10.4.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
10.5 Diagnoses Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
10.5.1 Object Diagnoses Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
10.5.2 Object Diagnoses Local. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
10.5.3 Object Diagnoses Global. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
10.5.4 Object Diagnoses Mass Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
10.6 Diagnoses Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
10.6.1 Context Diagnoses Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
10.6.2 Context Diagnoses Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
10.6.2.2 The main menu Diagnosis Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
10.6.2.3 The submenu Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
10.6.3 Context Diagnoses Min/Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
10.6.4 Context Diagnoses Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
10.6.4.2 The main menu Diagnosis Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
10.6.4.3 The context menu for the dynamic diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
10.6.5 Context Diagnoses Levelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
10.6.6 Context Diagnoses Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
10.6.7 Context Diagnoses Matching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
10.6.8 Context Diagnoses Surface-Surface Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
10.7 Diagnoses Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
10.7.1 Shape Diagnoses Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
10.7.1.1 Course of reflection and highlight lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
10.7.1.2 Position of the light source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
10.7.1.3 Principle of the reflection diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
10.7.1.4 The menu Diagnosis Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
10.7.2 Shape Diagnosis Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
10.7.3 Shape Diagnoses Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
10.7.4 Shape Diagnoses Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
9
CONTENTS

10.7.4.2 The menu Diagnosis Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
10.7.4.3 The submenu Curvature Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
10.7.4.4 The context menu Inspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
10.7.5 Shape Diagnoses Inflection Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
10.7.6 Shape Diagnoses Normals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
10.8 Global Diagnoses functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
11 The menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
11.1 Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

11.2 Display Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
11.2.1 General display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
11.2.2 Display properties of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
11.3 Display View/Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
11.3.1 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
11.3.2 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
11.3.3 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
11.3.4 Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
11.3.4.1 Technical working principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
11.3.4.2 The Stereo tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
11.4 Display View Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
11.4.1 View Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
11.4.2 Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
11.4.3 Modify Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
11.5 Display Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
11.6 Display Clipping Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
11.7 Display Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
11.8 Display Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
11.9 Display Coordinate Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
11.10 Display Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
11.10.1 Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
11.10.1.1 The submenu for selecting materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
11.10.2 Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
11.10.3 Textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
11.10.4 Shadows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
11.10.5 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
11.11 Display Texture Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
11.12 Display Colours. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
11.12.1 Colour models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
11.12.1.1 The RGB colour model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
11.12.1.2 The HLS colour model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
11.12.2 The submenu Colour Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
11.13 Display Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
11.13.1 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
11.13.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
11.13.3 Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
11.13.4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
11.13.5 Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
11.13.6 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
11.14 Display Background Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
11.14.2 The menu Background Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
10
CONTENTS
11.14.3 The submenu Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

11.14.4 Adjusting background images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
11.15 Display Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
11.15.1 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
11.15.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
11.15.3 Shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
11.15.4 HDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
11.15.5 Lens Flares. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
11.15.6 Ambient Occlusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
11.15.7 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
11.16 Display Turn Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
11.17 Display Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
11.17.1 Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
11.17.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
11.17.3 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
11.17.4 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
11.18 Display Depth of Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
11.19 Display Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
11.20 Display Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
11.21 Display Tessellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
11.21.1 Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
11.21.2 Individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
11.21.2.1 The submenu Tessellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
11.22 Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
11.23 Display Graphics Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
12 The menu Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
12.1 Windows Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

12.1.1 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
12.1.2 Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
12.1.3 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
12.1.4 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
12.1.5 RT Render (Realtime Renderer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
12.1.6 RefMan (Reference Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
12.1.7 Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
12.2 Windows Texture Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
12.3 Windows Reference File Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
12.4 Windows Logical File Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
12.5 Windows Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
12.5.1 The menu Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
12.5.2 Availability of the license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
12.6 Windows Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
12.7 Windows Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
12.8 Windows Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
12.9 Windows 3Dconnexion Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
12.10 Windows Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
12.11 Windows Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
12.12 Windows Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
12.13 Windows Straighten Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
11
CONTENTS
13 Point and control point modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
14 Raw Data creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
14.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

14.2 Raw Data creation Discrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
14.3 Raw Data creation Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
14.4 Raw Data creation On Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
14.5 Raw Data creation Scan Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
14.6 Raw Data creation Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
15 Raw Data modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
15.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

15.2 Raw Data modification Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
15.3 Raw Data Modification Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
15.4 Raw Data modification Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
15.5 Raw Data modification Refine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
15.6 Raw Data modification Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
15.7 Raw Data modification Divide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
15.8 Raw Data modification Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
15.9 Raw Data modification Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
16 Scan creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
16.1 Scans in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

16.2 Preview import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
16.3 Scan creation Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
16.3.1 Scan Previewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
16.3.2 Preview Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
16.3.3 Preview Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
16.4 Scan creation Triangulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
16.5 Scan creation Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
16.6 Scan creation Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
16.7 Scan creation Feature Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
17 Scan modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
17.1 Scans in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

17.2 Scan modification Edit Facets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
17.2.1 Fill Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
17.2.2 Create Facets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
17.2.3 Edge Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
17.3 Scan modification Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
17.4 Scan modification Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
17.5 Scan modification Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
17.6 Scan modification Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
17.7 Scan Modification Refine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
17.8 Scan modification Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
17.9 Scan modification Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
17.10 Scan modification Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
17.11 Scan modification Facet Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
17.12 Scan modification Clay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
12
CONTENTS
18 Curve segment creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
18.1 Curves in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

18.1.2 Bezier curve segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
18.1.3 B-Spline and NURBS curve segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
18.1.4 Straight lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
18.1.5 Circles and arc segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
18.2 Curve segment creation By 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
18.3 Curve segment creation Iso-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
18.4 Curve segment creation Styling Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
18.5 Curve segment creation Blend (connecting curve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
18.6 Curve segment creation Intersection Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
18.7 Curve segment creation Design Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
18.8 Curve segment creation Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
18.9 Curve segment creation Circle and Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
18.10 Curve segment creation Conic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
19 Curve segment modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

19.2 Curve segment modification Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
19.3 Curve segment modification Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
19.4 Curve segment modification Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
19.4.1 Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
19.4.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
19.5 Curve segment modification Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
19.6 Curve segment modification Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
19.7 Curve segment modification Circle and Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
20 Curve creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

20.2 Curve creation Interpolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
20.3 Curve creation Approximate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
20.3.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
20.3.2 Approximate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
20.3.3 Parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
20.4 Curve creation 2 x 2D (3D Curve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
20.5 Curve creation Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
20.5.2 The main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
20.5.3 The Parameter menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
20.6 Curve creation Connecting Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
20.7 Curve creation Curve Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
20.8 Curve creation Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
20.9 Curve creation Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
20.10 Curve creation Reapproximate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
20.11 Curve creation Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
20.12 Curve creation Technical Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
21 Curve modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

21.2 Curve modification Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
13
CONTENTS
21.3 Curve modification Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

21.4 Curve modification Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
21.5 Curve modification Curve Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
21.6 Curve modification Smooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
21.6.1 Smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
21.7 Curve modification Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
21.7.2 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
21.8 Converting Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
21.9 Curve modification Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
21.10 Curve modification Data Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
22 Patch creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
22.1 Surfaces in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445

22.1.2 Bezier patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
22.1.3 B-Spline and NURBS patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
22.1.4 Trimmed patches (faces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
22.2 Patch creation By 4 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
22.3 Patch creation By Raw Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
22.3.2 Raw Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
22.4 Patch creation By Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
22.4.2 Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
22.5 Patch creation By Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
22.5.2 Patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
22.6 Patch creation Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
22.7 Patch creation Corner Blend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
22.7.1 Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
22.7.2 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
22.7.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
22.7.4 Local Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
22.8 Patch creation Blend (Connecting Patch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
22.8.2 Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
22.8.3 Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
22.8.4 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
22.8.5 Local diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
22.9 Patch creation Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
22.9.2 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
22.9.3 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
22.10 Patch creation Ruled Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
22.11 Patch creation Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
22.12 Patch creation Surface of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
14
CONTENTS

22.12.2 Information about the function usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
22.12.3 Surface of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
22.12.4 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
22.12.5 Local diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
22.13 Patch creation Barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
22.13.1 Local diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
23 Patch modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
23.1 Patch modification Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482

23.2 Patch modification Control Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
23.3 Patch modification Matching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
23.3.1 Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
23.3.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
23.3.3 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
23.4 Patch modification Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
23.5 Patch modification Refit Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
23.6 Patch modification Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
23.7 Patch modification Smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
23.8 Patch modification Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
23.8.2 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
23.8.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
23.9 Patch modification Face Untrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
23.10 Patch modification Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
24 Surface creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506

24.2 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
24.2.1 General Information about Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
24.2.2 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
24.3 Surface creation Global Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
24.4 Surface creation Global Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
24.4.2 Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
24.4.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
24.4.4 Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
24.4.5 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
24.4.6 The Submenu Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
24.5 Surface creation By Curves (N-Sided Blend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
24.6 Surface creation Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
24.6.2 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
24.6.2.1 General options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
24.6.2.2 Options for the moving frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
24.6.3 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
24.6.4 Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
24.6.5 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
24.6.6 Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
24.7 Surface creation Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
15
CONTENTS
24.7.2 Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538

24.7.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
24.7.4 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
24.8 Surface creation Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
24.8.1 Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
24.8.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
24.8.3 Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
24.8.4 Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
24.8.5 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
24.9 Surface creation Duct Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
24.10 Surface creation Accelerated Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
24.11 Surface creation Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
24.11.1 Flanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
24.11.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
24.11.3 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
24.12 Surface creation Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
24.13 Surface creation Fillet Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
24.14 Surface creation Addenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
24.14.2 Addenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
24.14.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
24.14.4 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
24.15 Surface creation Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
24.15.2 Gap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
24.15.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
24.15.4 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
24.16 Surface creation Global Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
24.17 Surface creation Advanced Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
24.17.1 Fillet+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
24.17.1.1 Creating fillet surfaces with variable radii/chord lengths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
24.17.2 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
24.17.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
24.17.4 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
24.17.5 Local Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
24.18 Surface creation Tri-Tangent Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
24.18.1 Fillet3T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
24.18.2 Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
24.18.3 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
24.18.4 Local Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
24.19 Surface creation Global Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
24.19.1 Global Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
24.19.2 Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
24.19.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
25 Surface modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609

25.2 Surface modification Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
25.3 Surface modification Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
25.4 Surface modification Matching (Multiple Matching) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
25.5 Surface modification Refit Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
25.6 Surface modification Feature Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
16
CONTENTS
25.7 Surface modification Crowning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617

25.8 Surface modification Smooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
25.9 Surface modification Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
25.9.2 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
25.10 Surface modification Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
25.11 Surface modification Data Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
25.12 Surface modification Addenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
25.13 Surface modification Global Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
26 Unified Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
26.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626

26.2 Object types in Unified Modelling and their combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
26.3 The main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
26.4 Display of the objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
26.5 Creation of the objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
26.6 Extended options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
26.6.1 Extended options for the Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
26.6.1.1 Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
26.6.1.2 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
26.6.1.3 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
26.6.2 Extended options for the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
26.6.2.1 Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
26.6.2.2 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
26.6.2.3 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
26.6.2.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
26.6.3 Extended options for the Projection base. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
26.6.3.2 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
26.6.3.3 Scan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
26.6.3.4 Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
26.6.3.5 Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
26.7 Point and control point modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
26.7.2 The menu Point/Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
26.7.3 Shortcuts for the point and control point modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
26.8 Feature Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .663
26.9 Crowning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
26.10 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
26.11 Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
26.11.1 The menu Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
26.11.2 The submenu Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
26.12 The context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
26.12.2 The context menu for curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
26.12.3 The context menu for patches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
26.12.4 The context menu for faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
26.12.5 The context menu for raw data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
26.12.6 The context menu for scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
26.12.7 The context menu for volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
26.12.8 The submenu Order of curves, patches, faces, and volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
17
CONTENTS
26.12.9 The submenu Smooth of curves, patches and raw data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
26.12.10 The submenu Smooth of raw data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
26.12.11 The submenu Smooth of scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
26.12.12 The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
26.12.13 The submenu Segmentation of raw data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
26.12.14 The submenu Topology of face edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
27 Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
27.1 The Transformation area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681

27.2 Move Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
27.3 Move Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
27.4 Move Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
27.5 Move Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
27.6 Move Global Extrapolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
27.7 Move Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
27.8 Move 2 Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
27.9 Move Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
27.10 Move Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
27.10.1 Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
27.10.2 Iterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
27.10.3 Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
27.11 Move Extrapolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
28 Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
29 Tips and tricks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
29.1 How to change the order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698

29.2 How to quickly create surfaces with Unified Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
29.3 How to align control points with Unified Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .701
29.4 How to make a wheel arch wider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
29.5 How to deal with apparently flat spots after Blend creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736
18
TABLES
List of Tables
Table 1 Default assignment of the function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Table 2 Control keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Table 3 Notation of angle specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Table 4 View manipulation by mouse and control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Table 5 View manipulation by control and arrow keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Table 6 Shortcuts for the object selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Table 7 Shortcuts for the position selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Table 8 File formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Table 9 Naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Table 10 Name processing in ICEM Surf files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Table 11 Conversion from ASCII Part to ICEM Surf DB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Table 12 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to ASCII Part. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Table 13 Conversion from VDA/FS to ICEM Surf DB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Table 14 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to VDA/FS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Table 15 Conversion from IGES to ICEM Surf DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Table 16 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to IGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Table 17 Conversion from Catia V4 to ICEM Surf DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Table 18 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to Catia V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Table 19 Conversion from Unigraphics to ICEM Surf DB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Table 20 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to Unigraphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Table 21 Interpretation of the clearance diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Table 22 Licenses for general and geometry functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Table 23 Licenses for interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Table 24 Academia and Student licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Table 25 Functions in the window Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Table 26 Function assignment to the right mouse button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Table 27 Comparison of NURBS and Bezier curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Table 28 Definition of the term Deviation for each kind of face edge creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Table 29 Functionality of the approximation types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Table 30 Radius parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
19
DOCUMENTATION AND ONLINE HELP
1
1 Documentation and online help
ICEM Surf is supplied with detailed documentation in form of an online help as well as PDF files.
1.1 Documentation in PDF format

The ICEM Surf documentation as well as additional manuals for auxiliary software are available in PDF format for printing:
PDF files Contents
whats_new_*.pdf Enhancements and changes in the current ICEM Surf version.
read_this_first_*.pdf Information on system requirements, installation, platform and software configuration, as well as
licensing.
surf_manual_*.pdf ICEM Surf Reference manual.
first_steps_*.pdf First steps with ICEM Surf a short introduction.
quick_reference_*.pdf Quick reference for the general handling and for the Module Unified Modelling.
catia.pdf, iges.pdf, Reference Manuals for the interfaces Catia, DXF, IGES, Unigraphics, and VDA/FS (in English lan-
unigraphics.pdf, vdafs.pdf guage only).
icem_viewer_*.pdf Reference manual for the presentation freeware ICEM Viewer (download in the Internet at http://
www.3ds.com/support/documentation/resource-library/).
NOTE:
Except for the reference manuals for the interfaces, the above listed manuals are available in English, German, and French. The sign *
here means english, german, or french.
1.2 Online documentation
The online help can be activated via the pull-down menu Help Help Topics or as context-sensitive help with the button in the footers of the
function windows.
1.2.1 The menu Help

In the pull-down menu Help the following functions are available:
Help Topics
Activating the online help with the start page.
Whats new?
Activating the online help with the start page of the volume Whats New.
ICEM Online
Activating the website http://www.3ds.com/products-services/catia/portfolio/icem-surf/icem-surf-overview/.
About ICEM Surf

In this window you will find the following information:
Current version number,
build number,
build date, and
copyright information
1.2.2 Contents of the online help

The online help includes the volumes:
1. About the Help
About the Help contains a description and operation instructions of the online help.
2. Whats New
In Whats New gives an overview of the enhancements and changes compared to the previous ICEM Surf version.
20
CONTENTS OF THE ONLINE HELP
1
3. Software and License Configuration

In Software and License Configuration you will find detailed information about scope of delivery, system requirements, configuration, and
licensing of ICEM Surf.
4. First Steps
First Steps gives you a short introduction to ICEM Surf.
5. Reference Manual
The Reference Manual gives a details description of the general and geometry functions of ICEM Surf.
6. Quick Reference
In the Quick Reference for the general handling, you will find e. g. an overview of the components of the user interface, of the view manipula-
tion, control keys, and key shortcuts.
The Quick Reference Unified Modelling summarizes the functionality of the individual menus and submenus of this module.
7. Glossary
In the Glossary you will find an explanation of the terms used in context with ICEM Surf.
8. Legal Information and Contact
This volume contains the Copyright Information as well as contact addresses for Licenses, Hotline, and Sales.
21
GENERAL CONTROL FUNCTIONS
2
2 General control functions
In the following sections will be described functions for the general handling of ICEM Surf.
2.1 Starting and terminating ICEM Surf
Program start
By default, you can start ICEM Surf via Start Programs. You will find further information about program starting possibilities in your Windows
documentation.
Terminate ICEM Surf:
via the function File Exit in the pull down menu, or
using the shortcut Ctrl+Q.
For further information on all available start options please refer to section ICEMSurf in the file read_this_first_*.pdf.
Automatic license release

An automatic license release time can be defined for the operation of ICEM Surf. For detailed information please refer to section ICEMSurf in the
file read_this_first_*.pdf.
Recovery after system abort without saving

If the program is aborted, ICEM Surf can be restarted and the current state of work can be restored.
In the Recovery of ICEM Surf window you can choose between:
Yes
ICEM Surf is restarted immediately and the last state of work of the ICEM Surf session as well as of the Reference Manager session is
restored.
Yes, remove session file

ICEM Surf is restarted immediately, but only the last state of work of the ICEM Surf session is restored, whereas the Reference Manager ses-
sion file is deleted. This option is only available if the Reference Manager was active with a session file.
Cancel ICEM Surf

ICEM Surf is terminated. A query appears by which you can choose the conditions for the next start.
In addition to the geometry data the following data are also restored:
Clipping planes created with Display Clipping Plane,
environment images loaded with Display Environment,
background images loaded with Display Background Image,
last setting used in Display Turn Table,
animations created with Display Animation.
2.2 Toolbar
The toolbar allows faster access to frequently used functions.
On the Style tab of the Windows Preferences menu, display and positioning options for the toolbar are available.
The icons activate the following functions:
File New
File Open
File Save
File Save as...
File Plot
22
FUNCTION AND CONTROL KEYS AND MOUSE BUTTONS
2
Cut
Copy
Paste
DB, Display and Activation of the existing lists (see The menu List). The current list is
Lists highlighted.
The Context menu for the lists containing options of the Lists menu can be acti-
vated with the right mouse button.
Create new list
Move list display to the left/right
Expand pull-down menu with all lists
NOTE:
The data loaded in the cache memory with Cut and Copy remain in the cache memory also after closing the current data base und
thus can be used in different sessions.
Objects cannot be cut if they were selected from functions of the following menus:
Diagnoses
Create
Modify
Display
In these cases, the objects are copied into the clipboard, and a corresponding message appears.
Context menu for the lists
This context menu contains the options of the List function.
ListCopy and ListMove functionality

As in the toolbar no selection of source and target lists is available, this functionality is used as follows:
The current list is always the source list.
1. Select the target list by activating the context menu with the right mouse button on a inactive list. In the context menu, the options for cop-
ying and moving from the source to the target list and vice versa are now available.
2. After selecting one of these options the object selection is activated and you can select the objects to be copied/moved.
3. After terminating the selection the selected objects are copied/moved to the target list.
If the Apply immediately option is activated, the target list automatically becomes the current list.
2.3 Function and control keys and mouse buttons

Function keys
The function keys in the keyboard have the following default assignment:
23
FUNCTION AND CONTROL KEYS AND MOUSE BUTTONS
2
Table 1 Default assignment of the function keys
Key Function Description
F1 Shading Shading On/Off
F2 Auto Min/Max Automatic Min/Max
F3 View Change from current view to previous view
F4 Perspective Central Perspective on/off
F5 Anim On/Off Animation of the Geometry on/off: Continuous rotation of the geometry around the Y-axis
F6 Original Symmetry: Display of the original half
F7 Mirror Symmetry: Display of the mirrored half
F8 Both Symmetry: Display of both halves
F9 C-CtrlP On/Off Display of control points of selected curves on/off
F10 P-CtrlP On/Off Display of control points of selected patches on/off
F11 Plane Symbol Plane symbol on/off
F12 Deselection Deselection of all elements
This default setting can be modified with the function Windows Keyboard(see page 342).
Sticker for the keyboard
On the last page Function Keys of the PDF file quick_reference_english.pdf in the installation directory of ICEM Surf you will find an icon
bar with the default assignment of the function keys which you can print, cut out and stick onto your keyboard.
Control keys
The following control keys are available for the global system control:
Table 2 Control keys
Key Function
ScrollLock Blanks/unblanks the pull-down-menu and the function blocks
Pause Activating/Deactivating the menu Windows Status (see page 342).
Arrow keys In graphic area Slow movement of the mouse cursor.
In function windows Moving in text fields (see Text field in section 2.4.1 Setting
function parameters and options on page 25).
Shift In graphic area View manipulation (see section 2.6 View manipulation on
page 41)
In lists and tables Marking all lines in the region between the first and second selec-
tion with the left mouse button (e. g. in the file browsers and
selection windows).
Ctrl In graphic area View manipulation (see section 2.6 View manipulation on
page 41)
In lists and tables Selection of individual not successive lines with the left mouse
button.
Mouse buttons
In ICEM Surf, the mouse buttons have the following functions:
All mouse buttons:
View manipulations (see section 2.6.1 View manipulation by mouse on page 41)
Manipulation of the symbols in the graphics area (see section 2.5.1 General usage of the mouse buttons on page 28)
Right mouse button:
Activating context menus.
Mouse wheel:
Scrolling in all selection lists
24
THE FUNCTION WINDOWS
2
Zoom in the graphics area

Moving thumb wheels (see Thumb wheel on page 26)
2.4 The function windows

The following sections describe the selection of function parameters and options and the standard functions in the bottom line of the function win-
dows.
2.4.1 Setting function parameters and options

For setting parameters and options in the function windows, the following elements are used:
Button
A button can be clicked with the mouse to start an action.
Check box
With a check button options are switched on and off. A check box consists of several check buttons which can be switched on and off inde-
pendently.
Radio box
A radio box consists of several radio buttons which are interdependent. Only one radio button can be switched on.
Popup menu
In a popup menu you can select one option from a predefined set of options.
A popup menu is expanded by clicking onto it with the left mouse button. Move the cursor to the desired option while keeping the left mouse
button pressed. Releasing the mouse button will activate the option and the popup menu will be collapsed.
Text field
In an text field you can enter texts and digits and edit them using the keyboard and mouse. Two types of text fields are available:
Dynamic: The input will be executed without confirmation.
Non-dynamic: The input has to be confirmed with Enter, Ctrl + M or Ctrl + J
The following table indicates the keys and shortcuts which can be used in the text fields.
Home Cursor in column 1.
End Cursor in last column.
Delete Delete character right of the cursor.
Insert Insert Blank.
Backspace: or Delete character left of the cursor.

Ctrl + H
Move cursor to the previous or next text field.

or
or Move cursor one position to the left or right.
Ctrl + X Cut and buffer the selected text of the text field.
Ctrl + C Copy and buffer the selected text of the text field.
Ctrl + V Paste buffer contents.
Tab or Move cursor to the next text field and select text.
Ctrl + I
25
STANDARD FUNCTIONS IN THE WINDOW FOOTER
2
Esc or Clear active text field.

Ctrl + [
Enter or Execute input (only in non-dynamic text fields in windows without OK button).
Ctrl + M or
Ctrl + J
Keypad / Insert /.
Keypad * Insert *.
Keypad - Insert -.
Keypad + Insert +.
Keypad . Insert ..
Keypad 0-9 Insert 0- 9.
A balloon help indicating the valid value range is available for all those text fields, where you can enter numerical values.
Slider
A slider can be manipulated interactively with the mouse to set a value. It consists of a vertical or horizontal bar and a knob that moves on the
bar. If, as an alternative, the corresponding value can be set numerically in an text field, the knob will automatically be set to the position cor-
responding to this value.
Thumb wheel
To change a value, the thumb wheel can be rotated using the left mouse button or the mouse wheel.
Selection lists and tables
In selection lists and tables you can e. g. select files in the file browser, user-defined settings in the service functions, or objects to be selected
with the object selection.
If in the list/table the contents is only partly visible, you can use the scroll bar or the mouse wheel to move it.
If several items can be selected, you can use for the selection the control keys Shift and Ctrl (see Table 2 Control keys on page 24).
Frameless label
A frameless label can be a structuring header for a group of options or parameters or it may display alphanumeric data which cannot be mod-
ified.
Balloon-Help
A balloon help is available for every button labelled with an icon, i. e. if you move the cursor onto the button, a small window with a short
description of the function appears. This is also true for text fields, in which numerical values can be entered.
The Balloon Help can be switched on and off in the menu Windows Preferences (see page 326).
2.4.2 Standard functions in the window footer

In the lower area of the function windows, the footer, are standard functions which have the same meaning in all windows.
Cancel
Abort the function and close window. All function windows with a standard footer can also be closed with Esc. The window must be active, i. e.
the cursor must be within the window area.
Help
Activate the on-line help window for the current function.
Restore Variables
Reset of all options and parameters in the current function window to their original settings.
26
NOTATION OF ANGLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
Restore Window Position
Reset of the current function window to its default position.
UV Display On/Off
When carrying out geometry functions for patch creation and modification, the U/V direction of selected patches can be displayed in the
graphics area.
OK
Execution of the function. Instead of the OK button you may also use the Enter key or the shortcut Ctrl + M.
Apply
Apply the parameters set in the function window.
Apply immediately
Modifications of options or parameters in the current function window will be executed immediately without confirming with OK.
Continue
Reactivate the function.
Alternative
Computation and display of further solutions.
Exit
This button terminates a function. In this case the button only blanks the corresponding function window.
Enter
If the character for the enter-key is displayed after the option name in a button, the option can be executed by pressing this key. In most cases
the enter-key is used instead of the OK button.
Extending/reducing the menu
Extending or reducing the display of a function windows.
2.4.3 Notation of angle specifications

In ICEM Surf you can enter angle values both in angle and decimal notation. The angle input is independent from the Angle Display Format set
in the menu Windows Preferences (see page 326). In case of the angle notation angle values are entered in degrees, minutes, and seconds,
in case of the decimal notation in decimal numbers with up to 4 decimal places.
IMPORTANT!
Please note that the decimal notation is applied when entering a point in the angle value, and that the digits after the point do not mean min-
utes but decimal places! Therefore, for entering degree in angle notation, you only must use the corresponding symbol or the letter o,
but not the point.
In the following table are listed the different input possibilities as well as their notations and meanings:
Table 3 Notation of angle specifications
Input Possibility Notation Angle Value
Degrees, minutes, 50 50
seconds
159 or 1o59 1 59 min
15859 or 1o5859 1 58 min 59 sec
Decimal numbers 2.0 2
1.25 1 15 min
1.252 1 15 min 7,2 sec
1.2525 1 15 min 9 sec
2.4.4 User-defined settings in service functions

In some service and geometry functions, you can save the current settings under a name. The following submenus are used for these user-
defined settings:
27
THE SYMBOLS IN THE GRAPHIC AREA
2
Save
The name of the setting to be saved is entered in the text field. A setting already saved can be overwritten by selecting its name in the list,
which will then be displayed in the text field.
Rename
The name of a saved setting can be changed in the text field. The list is only used for the display of the saved settings, a selection is not pos-
sible.
Delete
In the selection list you can select one or several settings to be deleted. Entries in the text field can be selected by wildcards.
NOTE:
Predefined standard settings, e. g. standard views and planes cannot be renamed or deleted. Standard materials cannot be deleted,
but renamed.
For selecting settings in the lists see also Shift and Ctrl in Table 2 Control keys on page 24.
2.5 The symbols in the graphic area

In the graphic area different types of symbols are available which can be manipulated with the mouse. In general, they can be moved along axes
or rotated on circles. If a symbol can be manipulated in different ways, in addition to the mouse buttons the manipulation possibilities can be con-
trolled by handles displayed as white circles.
handles
The cursor shape changes depending on the symbol and the handle. Moreover, for all symbols except the 3D symbol context menus with addi-
tional symbol manipulation options are available.
2.5.1 General usage of the mouse buttons

When manipulating the symbols in the graphic area the mouse buttons generally have the following functions:
Left mouse button
Rotate
The rotation of the symbol is determined by latitudinal and longitudinal circles The centre of rotation cannot be changed. The dashed part
of the circle lines indicate the hidden area.
28
THE 3D SYMBOL
2
Translate
The symbol can only be moved along the axes of a coordinate system which can be set via the context menus (see option Coordinate
System section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41).
Middle mouse button
Rotate
The symbol can be rotated around an arbitrary axis. Also in this case the centre of rotation cannot be changed.
Translate
The symbol can be freely moved in the view plane.
NOTE:
If for symbols Mousewarp and/or Snap, Length Snap, Angle Snap is switched on, mousewarp as well as snap functions will automat-
ically be deactivated for manipulations in the graphic area with the middle mouse button, so that the middle mouse button always allows
a rapid and completely free movement.
Right mouse button
Activating the context menu. The cursor must be positioned at a handle and have the shape belonging to the symbol.
Deviations from these mouse button functions are pointed out in the description of the individual symbols.
2.5.2 The 3D Symbol

With this symbol you can rotate the view. The centre of rotation of the symbol is the intersection point of the three axes, the centre of rotation of
the view the reference point (= origin of the screen coordinate system). The 3D symbol cannot be moved.
To manipulate the symbol click with the mouse onto one of the axis ends.
Y X
The right mouse button has not function.
2.5.3 The plane symbol

The plane symbol represents a local coordinate system. You will find the options for defining and managing user-defined planes in the menu Dis-
play Plane (see page 265).
The name of the current plane is displayed at the symbol origin.
In the following function the plane symbol can be blanked and unblanked:
Function key F11,
in the menu Display Plane,
in the menu Display Options, or
in the menu Windows Panel
For the plane symbol the following manipulation possibilities are available:
29
THE PLANE SYMBOL
2
Rotate
To rotate the symbol click onto the handle at one of the axis ends.
Z
Y X
Plane XY
Depending on the axis selected with the right mouse button will be activated the context menu X-Axis, Y-Axis, or Normal (see section 2.5.12
General options in the context menus on page 41). In addition, the option Axis from the menu Display Plane (see page 265) is availa-
ble, with which the direction of the selected axis can be changed via the vector selection.
Invert
Click with the left mouse button onto the handle in the middle of a plane axis to invert the direction and to exchange the other two axes.
Z
X Y
Y X
Plane XY Plane XY
The middle and right mouse buttons have no function.
Move
Click onto the handle at the origin of the plane symbol to move the plane along the local coordinate axes.
Y X Z
Y X
Plane XY
With the right mouse button will be activated the context menu Current Plane (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on
page 41). In addition, the following options are available:
Parameter
This option is only available in the context menu Current Plane of the work plane symbol.
With this option the window Parameter is activated, in which the current coordinate values of the position (Attach Point) and the three
axes (X-Axis, Y-Axis, and Normal) of the work plane are displayed and can be modified.
30
THE MOVE SYMBOL
2
Modify Plane
Normal
The direction of the plane normal (Z axis) can be re-defined by the vector selection.
3 Points
The position and orientation of the plane are defined by three points.
Trace
Alignment of the X or Y axis along a trace line defined by specification of two points.
Curve
The plane origin will be set onto a curve or edge and the plane normal adjusted tangentially. The normal direction depends on the
parameterisation of the curve or direction of the surface normal.
Approx
The work plane is computed as balance plane of the selected geometry. The centre of gravity is the plane origin.
Select Plane
Activation of the plane selection list. The first five planes can be directly selected. If more than five planes are defined, the complete plane
selection list can be activated by .
Save Plane
The current work plane can be saved.
Name
The name of the current plane can be blanked and unblanked.
Reset size
If the plane symbol has been scaled, you can use this option to reset the symbol to the default size.
All Texts
In functions where several plane symbols are used, the display of the plane names can be globally switched on and off.
Scale
Click with the left mouse button onto the handle at the corner of the plane symbol to scale it proportionally. The middle mouse button can be
used for a non-proportional scaling.
Z X
Plane XY
The right mouse buttons has no function.
2.5.4 The Move Symbol

The move symbol is used in the Move Dynamic and Unified Modelling Move functions.
The manipulation types of the move symbol can be activated and deactivated via the menu. At the symbol, only the handles of the activated
manipulation types are available.
At the handles of the manipulation types Translate and Scale you can activate context menus with the right mouse button. For the description of
the options please refer to sections 2.5.3 The plane symbol on page 29 and 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41.
31
THE CLIPPING PLANE AND TURN TABLE SYMBOL
2
Translate
Depending on the mouse button used, the geometry is moved along the selected axis (left mouse button) or freely (middle mouse button).
Rotate
Rotates the geometry around the selected axis. Middle mouse button has no function.
Invert
Inverting an axis mirrors the geometry. Middle mouse button has no function.
The mirror plane is formed by the axis (= mirror plane normal) and the symbols origin.
Scale
Two handle types are available for scaling:

Axis handles:
Left mouse button: Scales the geometry in X, Y, or Z direction.
Middle mouse button: Scales the geometry in all directions.
Plane handles: Scales the geometry in the XZ, YZ, or XY plane. Middle mouse button has no function.
In addition, the scaling factor is displayed and updated dynamically when scaling.
NOTE:
The scaling factors value range is from 0.01 to 1000. A scale factor smaller than 1 shrinks, a scale factor larger than 1 extends the
geometry.
2.5.5 The clipping plane and turn table symbol

These symbols are activated with the functions Display Clipping Plane (see page 268) and Display Turn Table (see page 313).
In addition to the general options (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41) in the context menus Direction and
Attachment Point of the clipping plane symbol the following options are available:
Save Plane
The current clipping plane will be saved as work plane.
Save Section
This option is only available if Sections in the menu Clipping Plane (see page 269) is active.
The temporary section at the clipping plane position will be saved.
Offset
A second clipping plane in a specified distance to the first one is activated. The geometry is only displayed with the two clipping planes.
32
THE CLIPPING PLANE AND TURN TABLE SYMBOL
2
Offset: <offset value>

The current offset distance can be modified in the window Distance.
Translation
If under Coordinate System the option Local is active, the coordinate system of the clipping plane symbol is used for the translation. In this
case, the translation direction can be specified.
All
The symbol can be moved in all directions.
Normal
The symbol can be moved in direction of the Z axis only.
Clipping Plane
The symbol can be moved in the XY plane only.
Name
The number of the current clipping plane can be blanked and unblanked.
All Texts
The display of the numbers of all clipping planes can be globally switched on and off.
The context menus of the turn table symbol have no special options.
For the clipping plane and turn table symbol the following manipulation possibilities are available:
Rotate
To rotate the symbol click onto the handle at the tip of the normal vector arrow.
With the right mouse button will be activated the context menu Direction (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on
page 41).
Invert
To invert the direction, click with the left mouse button onto the handle in the middle of the normal vector arrow.
33
THE IMAGE SYMBOL
2
Move
To move the symbol, click onto the handle at its origin.
With the right mouse button will be activated the context menu Attachment Point (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus
on page 41).
2.5.6 The image symbol

The image symbol is used for the manipulation of background images (see section 11.14 Display Background Image on page 294) and planar
texture projections (see section 11.11 Display Texture Projection on page 279). The image symbol can be scaled and moved.
Depending on the cursor position you can activate different context menus using the right mouse button (see The options of the context menu
<Image> on page 35 and General options in the context menus on page 41).
Translating a background image
Click an arbitrary position on the active background image to move the image. The cursor has the shape .
Click the Image Centre symbol to move the image centre. The cursor shape changes to .
Click the 3D Image Centre symbol to move the 3D image centre. The cursor shape changes to .
Figure 1 Background Image Symbol
3D Image Centre
Image Centre
Symbol
Scale
Moving a planar texture image

The Image Centre of texture image used with the Texture Mapping methods Planar and Cylindrical can be moved in the same way as a
background image.
The 3D Image Centre is only available for background images.
The image can be moved by the symbol at the image edge. X and Y texture dimensions are displayed at the edges and updated dynam-
ically when scaling.
34
THE IMAGE SYMBOL
2
Figure 2 Symbol Texture Projection Planar and Cylindrical
Scale
The image symbol has handles at the corners as well as in the middle of the edges with different functionality.
Keep aspect ratio when scaling:
Click with the left mouse button onto a handle on a corner or
with the middle mouse button on a handle in the middle of an edge of the image symbol.
Change aspect ratio when scaling:
Free scaling in all directions:
Click with the middle mouse button on a corner.
Scaling in X or Y direction:
Click the left mouse button on a handle in the middle of an edge of the image symbol.
With the right mouse button you can activate the context menu <Image> (see The options of the context menu <Image> on page 35).
The options of the context menu <Image>
Read Image
Only available in Display Background Image.
The file browser is activated to load another background image.
Change Active Image: 1, 2, 3, 4

Selecting a number in the popup menu will activate the corresponding background image which can then be modified. Only unblanked back-
ground images (check buttons Images in the function Display Background Image switched on) can be selected. The numbers of blanked
background images are dimmed.
By default, the numbers are assigned to the following background image planes:
1 S Side View (= XZ-Plane)
2 T Top View (= XY-Plane)
3 R Rear View (= YZ-Plane)
4 Current Plane
Display Image: On/Off

The image assigned to the current symbol can be blanked and unblanked.
Original Aspect Ratio

If the display of the image is unproportional due to unequal scaling with the middle mouse button or specification of independent values for
width and height, the original aspect ratio can be restored using this option.
Transparency
In the window Transparency you can specify a transparency value for the current image.
Lightness
In the window Lightness you can specify a lightness degree for the current image.
35
THE LIGHT SOURCE SYMBOLS
2
Plane Symbol
Only available in Display Texture Projection.
Instead of the image symbol will be displayed the temporary plane symbol of the current texture plane. With the option Modify Image in the
menu Display Texture Projection you can switch back to the image symbol.
Set Image Plane to Plane

The image plane is rotated to the current work plane.
Set Image Plane to View

The image plane is rotated to the current view plane.
Set Plane to Image Plane

The current work plane is rotated into the image plane.
Set View to Image Plane

The current view plane is rotated into the image plane.
2.5.7 The light source symbols

The light source types and their properties can be set in the menu Display Light(see page 300).
At the symbols are displayed numbers corresponding to the position of the light sources in the Light source table.
Apart from the general options (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41), in the context menus of the light source
symbols the following options are additionally available:
Direction
The direction of Beam and Spot light sources can be defined via the vector selection.
Invert
The direction of Beam and Spot light sources is inverted.
Colour / Intensity
In the window Colour / Intensity you can change the colour of a light source via the colour button and the intensity via the slider or the text
field. In the colour field on the right side the intensity value set is displayed optically.
The intensity of a light source can also be changed with the option Intensity from the menu Windows Mouse (see page 346).
Emitting: On/Off
The light emission can be switched off for the light sources Beam, Point, and Spot.
Dependent
The dependency of the current Beam light source from the model coordinate system can be switched on and off (see also option Dependent
in the menu Display Light on page 264).
Shadow: None, Soft , Hard

Setting of shadows for the current light source. When activating the option Soft the window Softness is opened, where you can set the soft-
ness degree. See also the tab Shadow on page 304 of the function Display Light.
Name
The number of the current light source can be blanked and unblanked.
All Texts
The display of the numbers of all light source symbols can be globally switched on and off.
The different light source types can be manipulated as follows:
Beam
The parallel light source Beam can only be rotated.
36
THE LIGHT SOURCE SYMBOLS
2
page 41).
Point
The Point light source can only be moved.
Z
Y X
With the right mouse button will be activated the context menu Point Light (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on
page 41).
Spot
For the Spot light source the following manipulation possibilities are available:
Rotate
Click onto the handle at the rear end to rotate the symbol.
page 41).
Move
Click onto the handle at the front end to move the symbol along the coordinate axes or freely.
Z
Y X
With the right mouse button will be activated the context menu Spot Light (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on
page 41).
Move along the Light Beam
Click with the left mouse button onto the handle in the middle of the symbol to move it along the light beam.
37
THE POINT SYMBOL
2
Modify Target Point

To modify the target use the handle at the end of the line.
Modify Angle and Sharpness

To modify the dihedral angle use the handle on the exterior circle and the interior handle on the pentagon to modify the sharpness.
2.5.8 The point symbol

A point symbol represents a coordinate point in model space. The point symbol is used e. g. for the display of a centre of rotation, base points, or
curve segment end points.
The point symbol can only be moved.
Depending on the function with which the point symbol is used with the right mouse button are activated the context menus Point or Centre of
Rotation (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41).
For the modification of base points or curve segment end points the following option are additionally available:
Insert
Inserting a new base point in the middle between the selected base point and the next base point in the selection order.
Remove
Removing the selected base point.
In the context menu of the point symbol used at text positions (see function Display Text on page 322) the following options are additionally
available:
Text Anchor
The position of the last set text anchor can be modified.
New Text Anchor

To the text at the selected point another text anchor can be added.
Delete
The text at the selected point is deleted.
Delete All
All texts saved in the data base are deleted.
2.5.9 The vector symbol

The vector symbol is activated with functions in which a direction vector has to be defined.
38
THE VECTOR SYMBOL
2
For the vector symbol generally the manipulation possibilities rotate, invert, move, and scale (change vector length) are available. With the right
mouse button different context menus can be activated. Which manipulation possibilities and context menus are offered, depends on the function
with which the vector symbol has been activated.
Rotate
To rotate the symbol click onto the handle at the vector arrow tip.
3253
With the right mouse button will be activated a context menu in which in addition to general options (see section 2.5.12 General options in the
context menus on page 41), the following special options are available:
Direction
The direction of the current vector can be modified using the vector selection.
Select Plane
The direction is defined by the normal direction of the selected plane.
Save Plane
A plane with the current direction as normal is created and saved with the specified name. The current plane will not be changed.
Numerical
The current angle can be displayed at the symbol and edited. This option is only available, if an angle or angle range is defined, e. g. in
case of surfaces of revolution or flanges.
To change an angle numerically, position the cursor on the left side at the beginning of the numerical value. The cursor must have the
shape . With a mouse click can be activated a text field, in which you can enter another angle.
IMPORTANT!
Please note the notation of angle specifications. Angles can be specified in degrees, minutes, and seconds (e. g. 115 or 1o15 = 1
degree 15 minutes) or decimal numbers with up to 4 decimal places (e. g. 1.25 = 1 degree 15 minutes). Please refer also to
section 2.4.3 Notation of angle specifications on page 27 for further information.
Invert
To invert the vector direction, click with the left mouse button onto the handle in the middle of a vector arrow.
+ left mouse button
The right mouse button has no function.
Move
To move the symbol, click onto the handle at the attachment point.
With the right mouse button will be activated the context menu Point or Attachment Point.
39
THE COORDINATE AXES SYMBOLS
2
Moving in vector direction

To move the symbol in vector direction click with the middle mouse button onto the handle in the middle of the vector symbol.
+ middle mouse button
The right mouse button has no function.
Scale (changing the vector length)

Scalable vector symbols have two additional handles. To scale the symbol, click with the left mouse button onto one of the handles at the
base of the arrow head triangle.
200
With the right mouse button will be activated a context menu with vector length setting options. In addition to general options ((see
section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41), the following special options are available:
Length
In the Vector Length window, the length of the current vector can be specified numerically.
Numerical
The current vector length can be displayed at the vector symbol and edited. To change the numerical value at the symbol, position the
cursor on the left side at the beginning of the numerical value. The cursor must have the shape . With a mouse click can be activated a
text field, in which you can enter another length
2.5.10 The coordinate axes symbols

The coordinate axes 2D and 3D can be activated with the special functions Coordinate Axes 2D and Coordinate Axes 3D.
The coordinate axes symbols can only be moved. Click onto the handle at the coordinate axes origin.
Z Z
Y 1000 1500
X Y X
500 1000
-1000
-1000 -500 0.0 500 1000 -500
0.0 500
0.0 500 1000
-500 0.0
-1000 -500
Coordinate Axes 2D Coordinate Axes 3D
In the context menus Coordinate Axes 2D and Coordinate Axes 3D is in addition to the general options (see section 2.5.12 General options in the
context menus on page 41) the option Toggle 2D/3D available, with which you can toggle between 2D and 3D coordinate axes.
2.5.11 The grid symbol

The grid symbol is activated with the function Display Grid (see page 270).
In addition to the general options (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41) in the context menu Grid of the grid
symbol the option Auto Min/Max is available, with which the grid size can be automatically adapted to the geometry. The distance of the grid to
the geometry is the double value of the longest dimension of the geometry and measured from the centre point of the Auto Min/Max block of the
geometry.
40
GENERAL OPTIONS IN THE CONTEXT MENUS
2
The grid symbol can only be moved. Click onto the handle at the origin.
2.5.12 General options in the context menus

For the symbols in the graphic area (except the 3D symbol) context menus are available, which can be activated with the right mouse button after
positioning the cursor onto a handle. In case of symbols with several handles the context menus may vary depending on the handle. In the follow-
ing the general options available in most context menus will be described. Special options will be described in the sections about the individual
symbols.
Position
The position selection will be activated to select a new symbol position.
Coordinate System
For moving the corresponding symbol along coordinate axes the axes of the coordinate system set here will be used.
NOTE:
The options Local and Plane are only different in functions where another local coordinate system than the current work plane can
be defined (e. g. Clipping Plane or Texture Projection).
Mousewarp
With this option the function Mousewarp will be activated for the corresponding symbol (see section .2.7 Mousewarp on page 43).
Mousewarp-Factor
If Mousewarp is active, the factor (translation ratio of the mouse movement) specified here will be used for the corresponding symbol.
Snap, Length Snap, Angle Snap

The symbol will be moved or rotated in increments specified in Snap Spacing.
Snap Spacing, Angle Spacing

If one of the options Snap or Angle Snap is active, the increment value specified here will be used when moving the symbol.
NOTE:
Except for the light sources, the settings of the Snap options are used globally for all symbols.
Properties
With this option you can activate the menu related to the current symbol.
2.6 View manipulation

The views of the geometry in the graphic area can be rotated, moved, and scaled using the mouse or the keyboard.
2.6.1 View manipulation by mouse

For manipulating views (Rotate, Translate, Zoom) you can use the mouse buttons as well as the mouse wheel in combination with the Shift and
Ctrl keys.
Another view manipulation possibility with the right mouse button offers the Windows Mouse function.
IMPORTANT!
Pay attention to the key sequence when using the key combination Shift+Ctrl! Pressing the keys in reverse sequence will activate the mag-
nifying glass.
The following functions are assigned to the mouse buttons:
41
VIEW MANIPULATION BY KEYBOARD
2
Table 4 View manipulation by mouse and control keys
Shift Shift + Ctrl
Left Arbitrary Rotation of the view. Rotation of the view about the Xt- or Yt-axis (screen
mouse button (Except navigation mode Walk: only rotation around the coordinates).
Yt-axis)
The positioning of the centre of rotation depends on the setting in the popup menu Centre of Rotation (Navigation
tab of the function Display View/Navigation (see page 258) or the special functions block).
Middle Arbitrary translation of the view. Translation of the view on the X- or Y-axis (screen coor-
mouse button dinates).
Right Zoom and rotation about the Zt-axis (screen coordi- Zoom or rotation about the Zt-axis (screen coordinates).
mouse button nates).
The manipulation type depends on the Navigation Mode set in the corresponding popup menu in the Navigation tab
of the function Display View/Navigation (see page 258) or the special functions block.
Vertical Horizontal
mouse movement mouse movement
Zoom Rotation
Free
move forward/backward no Rotation

Walk
move forward/backward no Rotation

Fly
Zoom Rotation
Turn Head
Mouse wheel without key combination

Zoom In/Zoom Out the view by changing the Zoom Factor.
with Strg
Zoom In/Zoom Out view by changing the distance to the Eye Position.
NOTE:
For zooming, also the mouse wheel can be used.
With the function Windows Mouse (see page 346) the view can also be manipulated with the right mouse button.
2.6.2 View manipulation by keyboard

For view manipulations control and arrow keys are used:
Table 5 View manipulation by control and arrow keys
Key Combination Description
Shift + arrow keys Continuous rotation around screen axes.
Ctrl + arrow keys Results in a 90 flapping by model axes.
Ctrl + Alt + arrow keys Results in a 90 flapping by screen axes.
Ctrl + Shift Activates the magnifying glass
2.6.3 The magnifying glass

The magnifying glass is activated by the key combination Ctrl+Shift.
IMPORTANT!
Pay attention to the key sequence! If the keys are pressed in reverse sequence, the view manipulation is activated.
Please note the following rules for the magnifying glass window:
42
MOUSEWARP
2
Zoom Factor
If in a zoom factor greater than 1 is set, the geometry in the magnifying glass window is magnified by the indicated factor, e. g. to check a detail
of the geometry.
If the zoom factor is less than 1, the geometry in the magnifying glass window will be scaled down, e. g. to get an overview of the complete
geometry.
Cursor keys
When the magnifying glass window is active, the cursor keys have the following functions:
Left Arrow
The size of the magnifying glass window is reduced.
Right Arrow
The size of the magnifying glass window is increased.
Down Arrow
The geometry in the magnifying glass window is scaled down.
Up Arrow
The geometry in the magnifying glass window is magnified.
2.7 Mousewarp
With the function Mousewarp you may modify the translation ratio between mouse movement and movement on the screen, e. g. in functions with
dynamic curve and surface (control) point modification or for the manipulation of symbols in the graphic area.
For the dynamic point or control point modification Mousewarp can be activated with the right mouse button when
a function for dynamic point or control point modification is active,
the option Express is switched on, and
the geometry object to be modified is switched on.
For the manipulation of symbols in the graphic area Mousewarp is activated in the context menus.
Using the slider you may set a translation factor between 1 and 100. Setting the factor 1 means that the point movement corresponds exactly to
the cursor movement (transition ratio 1:1). With the factor 2 the distance the point moves will only be half the distance of the cursor movement.
The higher the translation factor, the shorter the point movement towards the cursor movement. This way, you can carry out very small point
movements with high precision.
2.8 External devices

ICEM Surf supports several input devices. Apart from monitor, keyboard and mouse you may also use the following CAD-typical input devices:
Button Box (see function Windows Keyboard on page 342),
3D motion controller from 3Dconnexion (see function Windows 3Dconnexion Device on page 343),
eventually other devices like Scanner etc.
After the connection of the devices to the workstation, the system must be informed at which port the device has been installed. Eventually, a
driver program has to be installed.
For detailed installation instructions please refer to the hardware documentation and the documentation of your operating system
43
USER INTERFACE
3
3 User interface
The user interface consists of the following areas:
info line Angle Of View Navigation Mode
Toolbar pull down menu zoom factors mouse button

assignment
graphics area
special functions
status line
service functions geometry functions
Info line
In the info line, the following information are displayed:
1. ICEM Surf X.X.X
2. DB (data base)
3. List
4. Part
5. Scaling (only in Parallel Perspective).
6. Temporary display when changing the View, Plane, Navigation Mode, or Centre of Rotation by using a shortcut.
Pull down menu

Via the pull down menu you can activate the geometry and service functions.
Display of zoom factors

The horizontal and vertical scaling values are displayed in the text fields Zoom and may be modified. This function is also accessible in the
menu Display View/Navigation.
If the special function Display with Different Scaling (see page 48) is active, you may enter different scaling values.
Angle Of View
Display of the current angle of view.
Navigation Mode
Display of the activated navigation mode. The display is updated dynamically when switching to another mode.
Display of the current mouse button assignment

The mouse button assignment is displayed in the view manipulation and in the graphic mode.
The view manipulation is activated with the keys Shift and Shift+Ctrl. In the view manipulation the text fields indicate the functions RxRy for
rotation, TxTy for translation, and RzZo for zoom (see also section 2.6 View manipulation on page 41).
The graphic mode is active, when a geometry or service function has been activated. At the same time, the cross hair cursor appears. The
mouse buttons may have the following assignment:
Selc (Selection)
The graphical position or object selection is made with the left mouse button.
44
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
3
OK
The selection may also be confirmed by the middle mouse button instead of clicking onto the OK button in the selection window.
Undo/Redo
After having executed a function, the assignment of the middle mouse button automatically changes to Undo. Pressing the middle mouse
button will undo the last operation and Undo will change to Redo.
The toggling display between operation and **** in the middle field indicates that an Undo/Redo operation is running and no other func-
tions can be carried out.
Show
During the selection the selection window can be blanked and unblanked with the right mouse button.
Warp
(Mousewarp)
For dynamic modifications of points and control points the context menu for the mouse sensitivity control can be blanked and unblanked
with the right mouse button (see section 2.7 Mousewarp on page 43).
Cont
(Context)
Activation of a context menu.
Graphic area
In the graphic area the geometry is displayed and can be manipulated.
Special functions
With the special functions you can control the views and define axes. For a detailed description please refer to section 3.1 Special Functions
on page 45.
Service functions
For a detailed description of the service functions please refer to section 3.2 Service functions on page 49 as well as to the chapters of the
corresponding menu points.
Geometry functions
The geometry functions are divided into two areas:
the main functions for the creation (left buttons) and modification (right buttons) of geometry objects and
the subfunctions belonging to the main functions.
Figure 3 Geometry functions
Main Functions
(Create | Modify))
Subfunctions
Patch Raw Data

Surface Scan
Curve Segment Unified Modelling
Curve Symmetry | Move
The main and subfunctions are described in detail in 14 Raw Data creation on page 349 to 27 Move on page 681.
Status line
In the status line are displayed selection prompts and system status messages.
3.1 Special Functions

In the special functions bar at the right side of the screen the following functions are available:
Display Options
Activation of the function Display Options (see page 247).
Reference Manager
Activation of the function File Reference Manager (see page 78).
45
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
3
Environment
Activation of the function Display Environment (see page 286).
Light
Activation of the function Display Light (see page 300).
Material
Activation of the function Display Material (see page 270).
Standard views and work planes

Using the following icons you can set the standard views and work planes.
setting of the setting of the current

current standard view standard work plane
View: S Side View Plane: S Side View (XZ)
View: T Top View Plane: T Top View (XY)
View: F Front View Plane: F Front View (-YZ)
View: R Rear View Plane: R Rear View (YZ)
Plane
With this popup menu the standard planes Plane YX and Plane XY as well as all user-defined work planes can be activated (see also func-
tion Display Plane on page 265).
View
With this popup menu the standard views Standard (Standard Perspective), View YX (Front Rotated), View XY (Rear Rotated) as well as all
user-defined views can be activated (see function Display View/Navigation on page 253).
In the popup menu 20 views or planes are displayed at maximum. If more than 20 planes or views are defined, activate to obtain a complete
separate selection list.
Set View to Current Plane
The view plane is rotated around the Centre of Rotation into the current work plane. The Centre of Rotation becomes the Reference Point of
the new view.
Set Plane to Current View
The work plane is rotated into the current view plane.
Set view mode

Switch to Parallel Perspective
The view set to Parallel Perspective with the values defined in the Definition tab of the function Display View/Navigation
46
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
3

Switch to Central Perspective
The view set to Central Perspective with the values defined in the Definition tab of the function Display View/Navigation
Set Navigation Mode

This popup menu is only available, if Central Perspective is active.
Free
Walk
Fly
Turn Head
The options in the following popup menus Choose Rotation Centre Mode and Set Navigation Mode are also available in the Navigation tab
function Display View/Navigation (see page 258), and are described in detail in the corresponding section.
Choose Rotation Centre Mode
Centre of Geometry
Dynamic
Rigid
Reference Point
Mirror
Activation of the function Display Mirror (see page 269).
Zoom Out, Zoom In
With this special function you can zoom with a user-defined Zoom Factor which can be set in the function Windows Preferences (see
page 327).
A zoom factor larger than 1 will reduce the display by using the minus button (reference distance divided by factor) and magnify by using the
plus button (reference distance multiplied by factor).
A factor smaller than 1 will reverse the functionality of the icons.
Display with Equal Scaling
Activation of the proportional display.
47
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
3
Display with Different Scaling
Activation of the unproportional display.

After activation of this icon you can set a display with different scaling
numerically by entering different values in the text fields Zoom in the user interface (see Display of zoom factors on page 44) or
graphically by selecting a zoomed detail with different scaling (Select Zoomed Detail with Different Scaling).
A display with different scaling allows e. g. a more comfortable control point modification or evaluation of curvature or deviation diagnoses.
Figure 4 Display of a curvature diagnosis with equal and different scaling
Display with Equal Scaling
Display with Different Scaling
Select Zoomed Detail with Equal Scaling
Magnification of a detail with equal scaling by region selection. Using this function will automatically activate the Display with Equal Scaling.
Use the mouse to draw a rectangle around the region to be magnified. The selected region will be scaled in way that its side with the longer
extent will, according to the direction, fit the complete screen width or height.
Select Zoomed Detail with Different Scaling
Magnification of a detail with different scaling by region selection. Using this function will automatically activate the Display with Different
Scaling.
Use the mouse to draw a rectangle around the region to be magnified. The selected region will be scaled in way that it fits the complete
screen width and height.
Auto Min/Max
With this function the display of the geometry is scaled to fit the screen. The scaling depends on the setting of the icons Display with Equal
Scaling and Display with Different Scaling.
48
SERVICE FUNCTIONS
3
Identification
Clicking onto this icon you will obtain information about geometry objects. If you move the cross hair cursor over geometry objects while keep-
ing the left mouse button pressed, the objects touched by the cursor will be highlighted and displayed with their part and molecule name as
well as the atom number. The function will be aborted by pressing the right mouse button (see also function Object Diagnoses Identifica-
tion on page 206).
Set Tessellation
Clicking onto this icon will activate the window of the function Display Tessellation. Here you can specify, whether shaded surfaces shall
have coarse or fine triangles. Coarse triangles result in better graphic performance. Fine triangles result in a higher display quality.
For a description of the parameter menu please refer to section 11.21 Display Tessellation on page 319.
Set Position of Coordinate Axes
With this icon the origin of the coordinate axes can be defined by selecting the desired position.
Coordinate Axes 2D
With this icon, 2D coordinate axes parallel to the screen coordinate axes will be displayed. The function Coordinate Axes is also available in
the Pull-Down-Menu Display.
Coordinate Axes 3D
With this icon dimensioned coordinate allowing to estimate the model data are activated. The 2D coordinate system indicates the correspond-
ing world coordinates in the current view.
For the description of the manipulation possibilities and the context menus of the coordinate axes symbols please refer to the sections 2.5.10
The coordinate axes symbols on page 40, and 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41.
3.2 Service functions

The service functions include functions for geometry management, view control and diagnoses. All service functions can also be activated in the
pull down menu.
NOTE:
When using the buttons in the service functions block you can open several service function windows by pressing the Ctrl key.
Plane Display Object Manager

View Objects Freeze
Sections Delete Undo

List Diagnosis Edit Structures
For a detailed description of the functions please refer to the following sections:
11.5 Display Plane on page 265,
11.3 Display View/Navigation on page 253,
11.2 Display Display on page 249,
9.2 Objects Objects on page 158,
9.4 Objects Object Manager on page 161,
8 The menu List on page 156,
10.2 Diagnoses Sections on page 169,
10.4 Diagnoses Diagnoses on page 204,
49
SERVICE FUNCTIONS
3
9.1 Objects Delete on page 158.

9.3 Objects Structure Editor on page 159.
The functions Freeze and Undo are described in the following section.
Freeze and global Undo

The functions Freeze and Undo can also be activated in the pull-down menu Modify.
During a running global Freeze or Undo the ICEM Surf user interface is disabled.
Freeze
Freeze generates a temporary saved version to which you can return within an ICEM Surf session using the global Undo. The temporarily
saved version will be overwritten each time you activate the Freeze function, i. e. you can only return to the last saved version.
Undo
This function carries out a global Undo, i. e. all modifications done since the last freeze will be undone.
IMPORTANT!
The temporary saved version is only available during the current session and does not substitute the saving of the data base with File
Save!
After a global Undo, the modifications undone cannot be restored.
50
SELECTION
4
4 Selection
In the selection function of ICEM Surf four different selection types are available:
Selection of objects, e. g. for modifying geometry objects,
Selection of positions, e. g. for creating points or geometry objects from points,
Selection of vectors for determining a direction,
Selection of a region for selecting by one step several objects within a defined region.
The different selections are carried out with the help of the corresponding selection windows which are described in detail in the following sec-
tions.
4.1 General information about the selection

The selection can be carried out by mouse or keyboard shortcuts. For the usage of the selection function the following information is important:
Activation
Activating a function requiring a selection automatically activates the corresponding selection window.
Confirmation
Before you can continue working with the activated function, the selection must be terminated either
by clicking onto the OK-Button, or
by pressing the middle mouse button (exception: scan region selection, see section 4.5.2 Selection (Scan Region) on page 62).
In some cases the selection window is closed automatically, and a manual confirmation is not necessary.
Aborting
There are two possibilities to abort a selection:
Click onto the minus button in the footer of the selection window, or
Press the Ctrl-key and the middle mouse button simultaneously.
Multiple selection
You can select several objects by
clicking in succession onto the individual objects, or
by drawing up a rectangle with the left mouse button including all objects to be selected. By this multiple selection all objects are selected
which are located at least partially within the rectangle and belong to the object types activated in the object type list of the selection win-
dow.
For the selection of multiple objects or scan regions in some functions can also be activated a general or special (for scan regions) region
selection, for which own windows with additional options are available (see section 4.5 Region selection on page 61).
Selection in shaded display

In shaded display only the visible objects can be selected. If e. g. a curve is hidden behind a shaded patch, the curve has to be made visible
by changing the view before you can select it.
Mirrored objects
Mirrored objects cannot be selected. In shaded display, mirrored elements, which cannot be selected, are displayed in another colour in the
selection mode after activating geometry functions.
Mirrored
Original
Selection of labels
To select a label pick it at the lower left corner.
Blanking and unblanking the selection windows

Each selection window can be blanked and unblanked using the right mouse button.
51
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE SELECTION
4
NOTE:
A blanked selection window does not mean that is it inactive. If e. g. in the menu Windows Selection the display of the windows
is switched off (see options Windows on page 329), they are not automatically displayed when activating a function, but neverthe-
less are active and can be unblanked with the right mouse button.
Object type list

Each selection window contains a list of object types, the selection of which is generally possible in the activated function. In the window
Selection (Object) the object types are indented according to their hierarchy (parts, molecules, atoms).
The selection is restricted to marked objects. Use the left mouse button for marking a single object type and additionally the Shift or Ctrl key
for marking or cancel the marking of further object types.
Selection of geometry objects, materials, colours, and positions

To select geometry objects, materials, colours, and positions three possibilities are available:
With the left mouse button,
with the space key, and
with shortcuts (see table below).
NOTE:
For all three possibilities the cursor must be positioned on the object to be selected.
In case of materials only surface elements can be selected. The shading must be switched on.
In case of colours only curve elements can be selected.
In the following table all available shortcuts are listed:
Table 6 Shortcuts for the object selection
Sorted by Keys Sorted by Data Types
Key Data Type Data Type Key
0 Volume Arc s
a Bezier/Arc Bezier Patch p
a Bezier Segment Bezier Segment a
a Curve Segment Bezier/Arc a
a NURBS Segment Colour n
e Raw Data Segment Curve k
f Surface Curve Segment a
j Scan Set Face t
k Curve Line l
l Line Material m
m Material NURBS Patch p
n Colour NURBS Segment a
p Patch Part x
p Bezier Patch Patch p
p NURBS Patch Point q
q Point Raw Data Contour r
r Raw Data Contour Raw Data Segment e
s Arc Scan v
t Face Scan Set j
v Scan Sections y
x Part Surface f
y Sections Volume 0
NOTE:
In the object selection, using the Shift key + shortcut the corresponding object types can be deselected.
With n and m all objects with the same colour or material are selected.
52
OBJECT SELECTION
4
Table 7 Shortcuts for the position selection
Sorted by Keys Sorted by Data Types
Key Data Type Data Type Key
. Grid Point Arc Length b

, Control Point (C) Bezier Edge g
a Curve Segment Bezier Patch p
b Arc Length Centre Point z
c End Point Control Point (C) ,
d Diagnosis Data Control Point (P) o
d Diagnoses Corner Point h
e Raw Data Segment Curve Segment a
g Bezier Edge Diagnoses d
g Edge Diagnosis Data d
g NURBS Edge Edge g
h Corner Point Edge-End Point y
i Face Edge End Point c
i Face Edge End Point Face t
o Control Point (P) Face Edge i
p Patch Face Edge End Point i
p Bezier Patch Face Edge Segment u
p NURBS Patch Grid Point .
q Point NURBS Edge g
t Face NURBS Patch p
u Face Edge Segment Patch p
v Scan Plane Point w
w Plane Point Point q
y Edge-End Point Raw Data Segment e
z Centre Point Scan v
4.2 Object selection

The window Selection (Object) is activated, when the selection of geometry objects or diagnosis data is necessary to execute a function.
Apart from the Object type list described above the following options are available:
53
OBJECT SELECTION
4
The menu Selection (Object)
Extended
In the Extended-mode all object types of the lowest hierarchy are admitted for selection.
Deselection
Selected objects are deselected.
Objects being part of a selected higher level object can be deselected individually. For example, individual atoms of a selected molecule or
part can be deselected without deselecting the whole molecule or part.
The settings in the object type list and in Date, Filter, Table and All remain active.
Further deselection possibilities:
Click the object to be deselected while pressing the Ctrl key.
Position the cursor on the object to be deselected while pressing the Shift key + shortcut of the object type.
Single
Only a single object can be selected. A multiple selection by drawing up a rectangle is not possible.
For this option the filters Snap and Depth (see page 328) from the menu Windows Selection have no effect.
Region Out
All objects lying outside of the specified region are selected.
Bezier, NURBS
Only objects in Bezier or NURBS representation can be selected.
These options are only available, if the object types Curve Segment, Edge or Patch are admitted for selection.
Shell, Chain
The chain selection can be used to select successively curves and surfaces, which are connected within a maximum gap tolerance and bend
angle. Clicking the button Shell will activate the chain selection of patches and faces, and the button Chain the chain selection of curve seg-
ments.
For a detailed description of the menu Chain selection please refer to section 4.2.3 Chain selection on page 57).
Material
The selection can be restricted to one or several materials. The button will be highlighted if materials are selected.
54
OBJECT SELECTION
4
Selection
Selecting the Material button activates the Material Selection submenu. Two possibilities are available to select materials to which the
selection shall be restricted:
selection of the corresponding geometry objects in the graphics area or
via the The submenu for selecting materials which can be activated with the button in the footer.
For each material selected a button with the material colour and the material name will be inserted into the submenu Material Selection.
After determination of the materials the actual geometry object selection can be done.
Deselection
For deselecting materials two possibilities are available.
Select the corresponding material button in the subwindow Material Selection, or
select a corresponding geometry object in the graphic area while pressing the Ctrl key.
Colour
This option concerns the colours of curves and edges (wire frame display).
The selection can be restricted to one or several colours. The button will be highlighted if colours are selected.a
Selection
After having activated the colour selection you can select in the graphic area geometry objects, to the colour of which the selection shall
be restricted. For each colour selected a colour button will be inserted into the submenu Colour Selection.
Deselection
For deselecting colours two possibilities are available.
Select the corresponding colour button in the subwindow Colour Selection, or
select a corresponding geometry object in the graphic area while pressing the Ctrl key.
Date
The objects are selected by beginning and end date of the last modification.
Filter
The objects can be filtered by names and atom ranges.

Filter
The names are separately indicated by part (1st filter), molecule (2nd filter) and atom (3rd filter). If there is no entry or a * in the text fields,
all objects admitted for selection are selected.
You can specify either the exact names or use the wildcard character * to define any kind of name range.
These name masks only affect the object type activated in the object type window.
Range
The selection can be restricted to an atom range. If you want to select, for instance, the patches 1 to 3 belonging to a surface, in the first
text field has to be indicated 1 and in the second field 3.
If in both text fields is indicated 0, all atoms are selected.
55
SELECTION OF INCOMPLETE MOLECULES OR PARTS
4
Table
This button activates a selection table with a list of all selectable objects. In the graphic area marked objects are displayed in the Show-mode
(see page 329).
A single object is selected by clicking twice onto the name in the selection table. Using the keys Ctrl or Ctrl + Shift you can select several
objects.
The options Filter and Range have the same function as in the above described option Filter. Apart from the text fields for Part, Molecule,
and Atom is offered a fourth field for Edge.
All
With this option all objects of the specified object types are selected.
4.2.1 Selection of incomplete molecules or parts

User-defined lists created in the function Lists may contain incomplete molecules or parts, i. e. not all objects belonging to a molecule or part
belong to the current list. These objects can only be displayed if the option Background Objects in the List function window is activated.
If an incomplete molecule or part is selected, the window Confirm with the following options appears:
Discard
Incomplete molecules/parts are not selected.
Select visible
All visible objects of the incomplete molecule/part are selected.
Select
The complete molecule/part including the objects not belonging to the current list is selected.
This option is only available if in the List function window the option Background Objects is activated, in order to display all additionally
selected objects which are also treated when executing the corresponding function.
4.2.2 Object Selection Table

This object selection table (not to confound with the object selection table which is activated using Table in the selection windows) will be acti-
vated,
if in case of a Multiple selection more objects are concerned than allowed for the function to be executed,
if in case of a single selection it is not clear which object shall be selected (e. g. in case of objects being situated one upon the other), and
if in case of a Chain selection several possibilities to continue the chain are available.
The table includes all objects currently concerned, the marked object in the graphic area being displayed in the Show-mode.
In case of a blanked selection table (Selection Table in the check box Windows in the menu Selection switched off) the selection of the objects
in the list can be activated by using the mouse. Press
56
CHAIN SELECTION
4
the left mouse button to activate the objects in descending order, or

Ctrl + left mouse button to activate the objects in ascending order, and
terminate the selection with the middle mouse button.
NOTE:
In this object selection table a multiple selection is not possible.
4.2.3 Chain selection

The submenu Chain selection is activated by the buttons Shell (chain selection of patches and faces) or Chain (chain selection of curve seg-
ments) in the menu Selection (Object).
General usage of the chain selection
Creating a chain selection

To create a chain selection, you can either select a start and an end element, or a start element only and start the chain selection by the but-
ton . After selection of the start element the chain selection will be continued at that end of the start element lying closer to the selection
position. The selection direction will be displayed by an arrow. In case of a closed chain the start element will also be selected as end ele-
ment.
The chain selection automatically continues running until
the chain end is reached, or
the chain branches out. In this case the Object Selection Table will be activated in which you can select the element, with which the
chain selection shall be continued. If this selection is aborted, the chain selection will be terminated at the branching.
Modifying a chain selection

To shorten a chain, click onto an element which shall be defined as new end element of the chain.
To modify the run of the chain with several possibilities to continue, select the first element of the branch desired. The chain selection will be
continued in the selected branch.
Terminating/aborting a chain selection

When all elements of the chain are selected, the selection can be terminated with the middle mouse button or the OK button, as usual.
The running selection of chain can be interrupted with the Escape key.
The submenu Chain selection
Apart from the Object type list described above the following options are available:
Extended, Bezier, NURBS

See section 4.2 Object selection on page 53.
Gap
Display of the admissible gap between adjacent chain members. The display is rounded off to two decimal places.
Angle
Display of the admissible bend angle between adjacent chain members. The display is rounded off to two places.
For the bend angle the following conditions can be specified:
Should
In case of a definite continuation the angle will not be verified.
In case of several continuation possibilities but only one lying within the admissible angle, the chain will automatically be continued with
the corresponding element.
In case of several continuation possibilities lying within the admissible angle, these possibilities will be offered for selection.
In case of several continuation possibilities but none within the admissible angle, these possibilities are also offered for selection.
Must
The chain selection will only be continued if the angle is within the admissible range.
Auto
If in a selection chain several elements can be selected for the continuation of the chain selection, the chain will be automatically continued at
the element belonging to the same atom or molecule.
57
SET
4
If, e. g., the previously selected element is a patch or face edge segment, the selection will be continued with the following segment of the
same patch or face (same atom). If the previously selected element is a curve segment, the chain selection will be continued with the next
curve segment of the same curve (same molecule).
Invert direction
If the chain selection is possible in two directions, the direction may be inverted by this button.
Cancel
The current selection will be cancelled.
Last element
The last element in the chain will be deselected.
Next element
The next element in the chain will be selected.
Automatic
Activation of the automatic chain creation. All elements until the end of the chain will be selected. It is not necessary to select an end element
of the selection chain.
4.2.4 Set
The expandible part of the Selection (Object) window, allowing for selection sets to be created and saved.
Important information about Selection Sets

Selection sets are independent from functions.
Selection sets containing object types which are not valid for the current selection can be selected nevertheless, however, only the permitted
object types will be taken into account. All filters (object types, materials, colours) will be applied.
The state of the window Selection (Object) (extended/not extended) is saved in the preferences and can be reset using the button Restore
in the Preferences tab.
Using Selections Sets
Display elements of a selection set

Upon the first click on a selection set in the list, the geometry objects assigned to this set will be highlighted in the graphics area.
Select elements of a selection set

Upon the second click on this set, the objects will be added to the selection.
Deselection
If Deselection is active, selection sets can be deselected in the same way.
4.3 Position selection

The window Selection (Position) is activated, when a position has to be defined. The position can be selected e. g. on the current work plane, a
geometry object, an edge, or a corner or end point.
Positions have to be selected to specify e. g. the origin of a vector, to create a patch or curve from points, or to compute the distance between two
points.
Depending on the activated function the window Selection (Position) may appear in two different variants:
a) With most functions the complete selection window appears. The point position may be selected arbitrarily in space. The object type list con-
tains all selectable types and always remains unchanged.
b) In some cases (e. g. in the diagnosis functions Distance or Angle) only the selection of points on determined objects is admitted. The pos-
sibilities to refer to a certain coordinate system as well as to specify individual point coordinates and increment values are not available. In the
object type list only the currently selectable objects are indicated, i. e. it varies from case to case.
58
POSITION SELECTION
4
The menu Selection (Position) to select arbitrary point positions
The menu Selection (Position) to select defined objects
Apart from the object type list described above this selection window offers the following options:
Extended
In the Extended-mode all object types marked in the object type list are admitted for selection.
Arc Length
With this selection type you can define points on curves or surface edges with a specified distance to the curve end next to the pick position.
Pressing the button Arc Length activates the submenu Arc Length with the following options:
Relative
With this option a point with a relative distance to the curve end will be defined, i e. the desired ratio to the complete length of the curve
has to be indicated. Special case: 0.5 = curve centre point.
Absolute
With this option a point with an absolute distance to the curve end will be defined.
Curves, Edges
The selection can be restricted to only curves and/or only edges.
Plane
The selected or computed position is projected onto the current work plane.
Single
Only a single object can be selected. A multiple selection by drawing up a rectangle is not possible.
For this option the filters Snap and Depth (see page 328) from the menu Windows Selection have no effect.
59
VECTOR SELECTION
4
Selection of the coordinate system

Model
The coordinate values refer to the model coordinate system.
Plane
The coordinate values refer to the coordinate system of the current work plane.
View
The coordinate values refer to the coordinate system of the current view.
Point
In the text fields the coordinates of the last selected position are displayed. A new position can be defined by entering the desired point coor-
dinates.
Increment
For the next position computation you may define increment values (offset values) relative to the current point coordinates.
Apply
Using Apply a point is created, the values in Point updated, and the increment values set to 0.000.
4.4 Vector selection

The window Selection (Vector) appears, if a direction definition is needed to execute a function. In addition, after activating the vector selection the
direction vector is displayed in the graphic area an can be modified directly via the handles of the vector symbol (see section 2.5.9 The vector
symbol on page 38).
NOTE:
If the vector symbol does not appear after activating the option, it is probable that it cannot be seen only in the current scaling. In this
case, activate the button Auto Min/Max.
During the vector symbol manipulation the window Selection (Vector) will be unblanked and can be unblanked by reactivating the
option requiring a vector selection.
The following definition types are available for the vector selection:
The menu Selection (Vector)
Normal
The vector runs in normal direction of a selected patch or face point, or has its position in the centre of a circle perpendicular to the circle
plane.
Tangent
The vector runs in tangent direction of a selected edge or curve point.
2 Points
The vector points from the first selected point to the second.
3 Points
The vector runs in normal direction of a temporary plane defined by selecting three points
P-Normal
(Principal Normal)
The vector runs in principal normal direction of an edge or curve segment.
60
REGION SELECTION
4
The normals of a curve form a group of planes of vectors. In case of a curvature the principal normal is the vector in direction of the corre-
sponding curvature centre point.
In case of a straight line as principal normal is offered the vector lying parallel to the current work plane (and perpendicular to the work plane
normal and the curve tangent).
U-Tangent, V-Tangent
The vector runs in the direction of the u- or v-tangent of a selected patch or face point.
The following additional options and parameters are available:
Extended
In the Extended-mode the vector directions Normal and Tangent are preselected in the selection list.
Invert
The vector will be displayed with inverted direction.
Light
A vector is defined in direction of the current light source.
Plane
A vector is defined in direction of the current work plane normal.
Length/Angle
In the upper text field, you can define the vector length and in the middle and bottom text fields the vector direction via spheric angles in the
latitudinal and longitudinal circles.
In the fields Vector the corresponding coordinate values are displayed and automatically updated when modifying the length and angle val-
ues.
Selection of the coordinate system

Model
The vector will be defined relative to the model coordinate system.
Plane
The vector will be defined relative to the coordinate system of the current work plane.
View
The vector will be defined in coordinates of the current view, e. g. [0,0,1] in view direction onto the screen.
Point
The attachment point of the vector is displayed and can be modified depending on the current coordinate system.
When activating the button, the Extended-mode will be switched off, so that you can select in the graphic area an arbitrary point position.
X, Y, Z/D
By clicking onto the buttons X, Y, or Z resp. D (Depth), the vector will be defined in the appropriate axis direction of the current coordinate sys-
tem.
Vector
You can define the vector direction by entering coordinate values in the text fields.
In the fields Length/Angle the corresponding length and angle values are displayed and automatically updated when modifying the coordi-
nate values.
4.5 Region selection

In the region selection are selected several objects within a specified region similar to the Multiple selection described above. Unlike the multiple
selection the region selection is carried out in an own selection window with additional options. In some scan modification functions is activated
for the selection of scan regions the special selection window Selection (Scan Region).
The windows Selection (Region) andSelection (Scan Region) are activated by the buttons Region in the corresponding functions.
4.5.1 Selection (Region)
61
SELECTION (SCAN REGION)
4
Selection modes
Rectangle
All objects within a drawn rectangle will be selected.
Polygon
All objects within a drawn polygon will be selected. The selection is terminated with the middle mouse button. The selection window will
be closed by clicking again the middle mouse button.
Ellipse
All objects within a drawn ellipse will be selected.
Free Style
The region to be selected can be defined by a freehand line.
If you click again the option Region in the corresponding function window, the region selection will be cancelled and restarted.
Region Out
All objects lying outside of the region defined with Rectangle or Polygon will be selected.
All
All objects are selected.
4.5.2 Selection (Scan Region)

In this special selection window for the selection of scan regions are offered further selection modes in addition to Rectangle and Polygon (see
also section 26.6.3.3 Scan Region on page 652).
NOTE:
In the scan region selection the last selection operation can be undone. The Undo/Redo function is assigned to the middle mouse button,
which, for this reason, cannot be used to terminate the selection.
With the left mouse button you can expand the selection region.
The OK function will be re-assigned to the middle mouse button after blanking the selection window with the right mouse button.
62
4
Selection modes
Rectangle
All scan points and facets within a drawn rectangle will be selected.
Polygon
All scan points and facets within a drawn polygon will be selected. The selection is terminated with the middle mouse button.
Ellipse
All scan points and facets within a drawn ellipse will be selected. Using the Ctrl key will generate a circle.
Free Style
The region to be selected can be defined by a freehand line.
63
4
Flat Region, Max. Angle
A scan point is to be selected. The system calculates the scan region around this point where the normals do not vary by more than the
angle tolerance specified in Max. Angle. That means that sharp bends in the scan are recognized, and regions with a choosen maximum
change in normals can be visualized.
Topology Region
Starting from a point to be selected all facets topologically contiguous will be selected.
Express, Radius
A scan point is to be selected. The system calculates the scan region around this point within the radius specified in Radius. This selec-
tion mode can be carried out by moving the mouse across the scan region with left mouse button pressed.
Radius
Shading
The selected scan regions can be displayed shaded.
64
4
Symbols
Setting the point symbol used for the display of scan points.
Colour
Colour setting for scan points. Scan points will only be displayed if Shading is switched off.
Material
Material setting for shaded display of the selected facets (Shading switched on).
Deselection
Selected scan regions can be deselected individually. For the deselection is used the current selection mode.
Region Out
All scan points and facets outside the defined region will be selected.
Create
The selection can be reactivated according to the setting in the popup menu.
Reset
Global deselection of all selected scan regions.
Invert
The selection will be inverted.
All
All scan points and facets will be selected.
65
THE MENU FILE GENERAL FUNCTIONS
5
5 The menu File General functions
5.1 General information about input and output

In the menu File common file management functions are available, such as functions for saving, renaming, and deleting data bases, for printing or
plotting created geometry, as well as for data exchange with other CAD and NC systems.
5.1.1 File formats

ICEM Surf are used the following file formats for data storage, printing or plotting the geometry, data exchange with other CAD and NC systems,
in import of images:
Table 8 File formats
File Extension Description Usage with Functions
3DPAINT *.obj Object File File Export 3DPAINT

File Import 3DPAINT
*.dmt Material File
File format for direct data exchange with the
3D design software 3DPAINT
3DXML *.3dxml XML-based format for quick and easy sharing File Export 3DXML
of 3D data.
ASCII Part *.ipa Internal ICEM exchange format for direct File Include/Import ASCII Part
transmission of all geometrical ICEM Surf File Write/Export ASCII Part
data types within the ICEM product family.
Catia *.model File format for direct data exchange with the File Import Catia V4
CAD system Catia. File Export Catia V4
File Import Catia V5
File Export Catia V5
CDRSS *.dsn (Scene File), File Import CDRSS

File Export CDRSS
*.igs (IGES File),
Display Environment
*.dmt (Material File), Display Light
*.dlg (Light File),
*.drm (Room File).
File formats for the exchange of geometry
data together with material, light, and environ-
ment settings with the 3D design software
CDRS.
DB *.kddat Database standard format of previous ICEM ICEM Surf

Surf versions.
EDF *.edf (External Data Format) File Include/Import EDF

In EDF files the ICEM Surf geometry data, File Write/Export EDF
hierarchy and list attributes, display variants, Display Material
views, view planes, sections, etc. are stored.
These files are e. g. used to combine and
compress data base files.
ESF see Scan (ESF).
HDR *.hdr (High Dynamic Range) Display Material

Special image file format with large luminosity Display Texture Projection
range. Display Environment
ICEM DB *.icem ICEM data base format generally used in ICEM Surf general
ICEM products. See also section 5.1.2 ICEM File Include/Import ICEM DB
data base (ICEM DB) on page 67. File Write/Export ICEM DB
IGES *.igs (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) File Include/Import IGES

Standard file format developed in USA and File Write/Export IGES
supported by ANSI (American National Stand-
ards Institute) for data exchange between dif-
ferent CAD/CAM systems.
Inventor *.iv 3D graphic data in Open Inventor 2.1 ASCII File Export Inventor
Format
66
ICEM DATA BASE (ICEM DB)
5
File Extension Description Usage with Functions
JPEG *.jpg (Joint Photographic Experts Group) Display Material

File format for pixel images. Display Texture Projection
Display Environment
Display Background Image
PostScript *.ps PostScript is a page description language File Export PostScript

(programming language describing a page
with fonts and graphics) developed by the
company Adobe for the output on printers.
PowerMILL *.tri File format for direct data exchange with the File Export PowerMILL
3D CAM software PowerMILL.
Raw Data ASCII file with point coordinates of the File Import Raw Data
selected raw data contours and/or File Export Raw Data
scans.
Ref File Paths *.rfp (reference file path) Windows Reference File Paths
ASCII files in which reference file paths are
saved, which can be loaded into the reference
file path list of the function Windows Refer-
ence File Paths.
Scan (ESF) *.esf (ESF = External Scan Format) File Include/Import Scan
ESF files store information about scans (point File Write/Export Scan
clouds with an arbitrary structure and a very Create Scan Preview
high number of points). These information
include point coordinates and facet data.
Session File *.rms (Reference Manager Session File) File Reference Manager
Session file of the Reference Manager with
reference and import information (see also
section Reference Manager session file in
the manual ICEM Surf, ICEM Plotserver and
FLEXlm).
STL *.stl (Stereolithography) File Import STL

Files with measuring data in STL format File Export STL
Create Scan Preview
TIFF *.tif (Tagged Image File Format) File Snapshot

File format for pixel images. File Export TIFF
File Export CDRS
Display Material
Display Texture Projection
Display Environment
Display Animation
Unigraphics *.prt File format for direct data exchange with the File Import Unigraphics
CAD system Unigraphics. File Export Unigraphics
File Import Unigraphics NX
File Export Unigraphics NX
VDA/FS *.vda (Verband der Automobil-Industrie/Flchen- File Include/Import VDA/FS

schnittstelle = surface interface) File Write/Export VDA/FS
VDA-FS is a standard file format for the data
exchange between different CAD/CAM sys-
tems.
Viewer *.vf (Viewer File) File Export Viewer
VRML *.wrl 3D graphic data in VRML 2.0 or 97 format File Export VRML
xyz ASCII files describing point clouds. They con- Create Scan Preview
tain point coordinates and information about
the structure of the point clouds.
5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB)

The ICEM DB is a data base format used in ICEM products. Compared to the ICEM Surf data base it allows a more flexible geometry data man-
agement as well as an optimised data exchange with Catia V4 and Catia V5. Therefore, the ICEM DB format is used with the import and export
functions Catia V4 and Catia V5 (see sections about these functions from page 106 and from page 127).
In the following you will find an overview of the features of the ICEM DB as well as the differences to the ICEM Surf DB:
File Names
The names of the ICEM DB files have the extension *.icem.
67
ICEM DATA BASE (ICEM DB)
5
Data Structure
The Part/Molecule/Atom hierarchy is replaced by a more flexible hierarchical data structure, in which the objects are combined in groups
instead of molecules. Contrary to the molecules groups can be arbitrarily nested and contain different object types. Objects and groups can
be on the same hierarchy level. Every ICEM DB contains a root group DB as highest level parent group containing all existing child groups
and elements.
Figure 5 Data structure in the ICEM DB
Geometry Object Types

Geometry objects are not divided into atoms and molecules, but all geometry objects are considered as individual entities.
The segments of a curve can be joined to a Curve Composite and patches and faces to a surface cluster, called Shell in the ICEM DB.
Shells can also be joined to a cluster, a so-called Body. Composite curves and shells are also considered as individual entities (atoms). To be
defined as Curve Composite or Shell, the geometry objects must be topologically contiguous. Curves have to be connected at the ends. In
case of patches and faces partially connected edges are allowed.
Layer
In addition to the lists known from the ICEM Surf data base in the ICEM DB are used layers. Layers are special elements which represent a
grouping of displayable objects. In an ICEM DB can be defined up to 1023 layers. The layer structure differs in the following points to the list
structure:
The display of more than one layer at the same time is possible. In the list structure, only one list can be active.
A geometry object can only be assigned to one layer, whereas the contents of lists may overlap.
Figure 6 ICEM DB layer
Figure 7 Schematic display of the ICEM DB layer structure
68
ICEM SURF DATA BASE (DB)
5
Figure 8 For comparison: schematic display of the ICEM Surf DB list structure
File Format
The ICEM DB can also be saved in Binary and ASCII format. The ASCII format has been extended and will replace the EDF format.
The ICEM DB supports a limited downward compatibility.
With the ICEM DB it will be possible to load more than one data base at the same time.
In ICEM Surf, the ICEM DB based data exchange offers the following advantages:
Import/Export ICEM DB
For the image files used for the active environment, the active special reflection image, as well as all background image sets from the func-
tions Display Environment and Display Background Image are also transferred image information like file name, position, and size. If
the ICEM DB is imported into ICEM Surf in another environment, the corresponding image files must be saved here in the same path. Even-
tually, the path must also be added in the menu Texture Paths.
Data Exchange with Catia
For the retrieval of parameters for the Catia translators are used directive files instead of scripts.
Via the directive files can be controlled the availability of options in the Catia import and export functions of ICEM Surf.
The import and export of skins (CatiaV4) and surface joins (CatiaV5) can be controlled directly via the ICEM DB based import and export
functions in ICEM Surf.
ICEM Surf work planes can be converted to Catia axis systems and vice versa.
The ICEM DB based data exchange offers different possibilities to transfer geometry objects into the list and part structure of ICEM Surf
or into the layer structure of Catia.
5.1.3 ICEM Surf data base (DB)

The geometry data types within an ICEM Surf data base are hierarchically structured in parts, molecules, and atoms. A molecule can only contain
atoms of the same type (Surfaces, Curves, etc.).
Figure 9 Hierarchy of the geometry data
Surface 1
Surface 2
Surface 3
Patch
Part 1
Part 2 Curve 1
Curve 2
Part 3 Curve 3
Molecule Curve Segment
Molecule
Geometry Raw Data Contour 1
Molecule Raw Data Contour 2
Raw Data Contour 3
Molecule Raw D. Segment
data base
Scan Set 1
Scan Set 2
Scan Set 3
Scan
69
NAMING CONVENTIONS FOR CAD DATA EXCHANGE
5
This hierarchical order allows the selection of all elements assigned to a part or molecule with one step.
The structure of parts and molecules can be modified in the object manager (see function Objects Object Manager on page 161).
data base filters

As in many cases, it is useful and necessary to display only a subset of the complete data base on the screen, ICEM Surf provides two filter func-
tions allowing you to control the display of the data.
lists displaying only a part of the geometry objects (see function The menu List on page 156) and
display variants or display parameters (see function The menu Display on page 247).
5.1.4 Naming conventions for CAD data exchange

For the data exchange with other CAD systems the following naming conventions are to be observed:
Table 9 Naming conventions
ICEM Surf Objects maximum length: 128 characters including extension and separating
point
upper and lower case letters, digits as well as - and _ allowed
Exceptions: \ / : * < > ? |
case sensitive
not allowed:
blanks at beginning and end,
. or # at beginning
DB File Names name conventions under Windows are valid

maximum length: 64 characters
upper and lower case letters, digits well as special characters . , - _ +
allowed
VDA/FS Element and Set Names maximum length: 8 characters

upper and lower case letters allowed
no special characters
first character must be upper case
VDA/FS File Names name conventions under Windows are valid

upper and lower case letters as well as digits allowed
only usage of the special characters . , - _ + = # recommended
IGES Element Names two arrays with 8 alphanumeric characters and 8 digits
the first array may contain upper and lower case letters, digits, as well as
any special character
IGES File Names name conventions under Windows are valid

upper and lower case letters as well as digits allowed
only usage of the special characters . , - _ + = # recommended
ICEM DDN Entity Names maximum length: 10 characters

upper and lower case letters, digits and any special character allowed
Individual naming
Within ICEM Surf, names of read elements may be changed slightly to give them unambiguous, individual names. For example, this is true for
Including with the parameter combination Geometry and Part (see section 6.2 Import IGES on page 99). Elements read in from IGES
files without name will get default names.
Remove name length limits

In elder ICEM Surf versions the name length was limited to 8 characters. For this reason, ICEM DB, DB, and EDF files saved in the current
version may be incompatible to elder ICEM Surf versions with name restriction. ICEM DB, DB, and EDF files from previous versions always
can be read in newer versions.
The following table gives an overview over the compatibility of the databases to elder versions.
70
CONVERSION TABLES FOR CAD DATA EXCHANGE
5
Table 10 Name processing in ICEM Surf files
Version EDF DB (*.kddat) ICEM DB (*.icem) ICEM DB (*.icem)

version 2 version 1
Write in All names are reduced Names with more than 8 Names with more than 8 All names are reduced
4.13.n to 8 characters when characters remain characters remain to 8 characters when
being saved. unchanged. unchanged. being saved.
Read in readable readable readable readable

4.13.n
Read in readable not readable readable readable

4.12.n Names for Part, Mole-
cule, Sections, Display
Variants, View Layout,
and Selection Set are
reduced to 8 characters
when being read.
Read in readable not readable readable readable

4.11.2.5 All names are reduced
to 8 characters when
being read.
Read in readable not readable not readable readable

4.11.2.4 and previous
5.1.5 Conversion tables for CAD data exchange

It is not possible to convert all information between the different CAD Data Exchange Formats without a certain loss of information. The following
tables show which objects are converted in which way.
5.1.5.1 ASCII Part <> ICEM Surf DB
Table 11 Conversion from ASCII Part to ICEM Surf DB
ASCII Part ICEM Surf DB

(type number in brackets)
Point (1) Point
Line (2) Curve Segment
Arc/Circle (3) Curve Segment/Arc/Circle
Composite Curve (6) Curve Segment
Point Set(8) Curve Segment
3D-Spline (9) Curve Segment
Machining Curve (10) Raw Data Segment
B-Spline-Surface (26) Patch
Surface of Revolution (19) Patch/Face
Cylinder (20 Patch/Face
Regular Surface (21) Patch/Face
Trimmed Surface (27) Face
B-Spline-Curve (31) Curve Segment
71
5
Table 12 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to ASCII Part
ICEM Surf DB ASCII Part

Point Point (1)
Curve Segment/Circle/Arc Arc/Circle (3)
Raw Data Segment Machining Curve (10)
Patch B-Spline-Surface (26)
Trimmed Patch (Face) Trimmed Surface (27)
Curve Segment B-Spline-Curve (31)
5.1.5.2 VDA/FS <> ICEM Surf DB
Table 13 Conversion from VDA/FS to ICEM Surf DB
VDA/FS ICEM Surf DB Option/Directive
Circle Curve Segment/Arc/Circle Standard
Cons
surface curve
2D-polynomials Curve Segment(s)
Curve Curve Segment Standard
Curve Curve Segment *DEFINE,LINE
Curve Curve Segment *DEFINE,LINE/CURVE
Face Face Standard
Point Point Standard
Pset Point(s) Standard
Pset Raw Data Segment *DEFINE,PSEQ
Pset (2 points) Curve Segment *DEFINE,LINE/PSET
Pset Curve Segment *DEFINE,SPLINE/TOL
MDI (point vector) Raw Data Segment Standard
Surf Patch Standard
Surf of cons/face Patch Standard
Table 14 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to VDA/FS
ICEM Surf DB VDA/FS Option/Directive
Point Point Standard
Raw Data Segment Pset or MDI Standard
Curve Segment/Arc/Circle Circle Standard
Curve Segment/Arc/Circle Curve *CONVERT,CIRCLE
Curve Segment Curve Standard
Patch Surf Standard
Face Face Standard
72
5
5.1.5.3 IGES <> ICEM Surf DB
Table 15 Conversion from IGES to ICEM Surf DB
IGES ICEM Surf DB

Circular Arc (100) Curve Segment/Arc/Circle
Composite Curve (102) Curve Segment(s)
Copious Data (106, Forms 1-3, 11-13, 63) Raw Data Segment
Plane (108, Form +1, Bounded Plane) Face
Parametric Spline (112, Forms see below)
1 Linear Curve Segment
2 Quadratic Curve Segment
3 Cubic Curve Segment
4 Wilson-Fowler (2D)
4 Wilson-Fowler (3D) Curve Segment
5 Modified Wilson-Fowler (2D)
5 Modified Wilson-Fowler (3D) Curve Segment
6 B-Spline Curve Segment
Parametric Spline Surface (114) Patch
Point (116) Point
Rational B-Spline Curve (126) Curve Segment
Rational B-Spline Surface (128) Patch
Trimmed Surface (144) Trimmed Patch (Face)
Ruled Surface (119) Patch/Face
Surface of Revolution (120) Patch/Face
Tabulated Cylinder (122) Patch/Face
Table 16 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to IGES
ICEM Surf DB IGES

Curve Segment/Arc/Circle Circular Arc (100)
Raw Data Segment Copious Data (106, Forms 11-13)
Curve Segment Rational B-Spline Curve (126)

Standard or
*CONVERT,NURBS_CURVE=NONE
Curve Segment (cubic, non-rational) Parametric Spline Curve (112)

*CONVERT,NURBS_CURVE=EXACT
Patch Rational B-Spline Surface (128)

Standard or
*CONVERT,NURBS_SURFACE=NONE
Patch (bi-cubic, non-rational) Parametric Spline Surface (114)

*CONVERT,NURBS_SURFACE=EXACT
Point Point (116)
Face Trimmed Surface (144)
73
5
5.1.5.4 Catia V4 <> ICEM Surf DB
Table 17 Conversion from Catia V4 to ICEM Surf DB
Catia V4 ICEM Surf DB

Point (1) Point
Curve (3) Curve Segment

B-Spline Curve (3)
NURBS Curve (46)
Plane (4) Patch
Surface (5) Patch

B-Spline Surface (5)
NURBS Surface (47)
Face (6) Face
Skin (13) Face
Solid (17) Face

(only Brep form; CSG form and faceted form are not sup- (for each face of the solid)
ported)
Volume (17) Face

(for each face of the solid)
Circle (20) Curve Segment/Arc/Circle
Composite Curve (24) Curve Segment(s)
Skd (35) Face
Cst (14) Raw Data Segment
Axis (8) Work Plane
Table 18 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to Catia V4
ICEM Surf DB Catia V4

Point Point (1)
Curve Segment/Arc/Circle Circle (20)
Raw Data Segment Lines (2)

Curve (3)
Cst (14)
Patch Surface (5)

Plane (4)
Face Face (6)

Plane Face (?)
Curve Segment Curve (3)

NURBS Curve (46)
Work Plane Axis (8)
74
FILE BROWSER
5
5.1.5.5 Unigraphics <> ICEM Surf DB
Table 19 Conversion from Unigraphics to ICEM Surf DB
Unigraphics ICEM Surf DB

Point (2) Point
Circle (5) Curve Segment/Arc/Circle
Conic (Ellipse) (6.2) Curve Segment
Conic (Parabola) (6.3) Curve Segment
Conic (Hyperbola) (6.4) Curve Segment
BCurve (9) Curve Segment
BSurf (43) Patch
Plane (46) Patch (only if Keep Planes is switched on)
Plane (underlying surface of a face) B-Spline Patch (only if Planes + Smart Rename is switched
on)
Solid Body (70) Face
Sheet Body (70) Face
Table 20 Conversion from ICEM Surf DB to Unigraphics
ICEM Surf DB Unigraphics

Point Point (2)
Curve Segment/Circle/Arc Circle (5)
Raw Data Segment
Patch BSurf (43)
Trimmed Patch (Face) Solid/Sheet Body (70)
Curve Segment BCurve (31)
5.2 File browser

The file browser consists of two areas. The ratio between the upper and lower area can be changed. In the upper area you find the project or
directory selection functions, in the lower area the file selection functions. In the header is indicated the function by which the file browser has
been activated.
NOTE:
Contrary to other ICEM Surf function windows, the file browser window remains active also if the cursor position is outside the window.
75
FILE BROWSER
5
File browser
change
Ratio
Directory
Display of the path.
Using the path button under the path indication you may directly change into an arbitrary subdirectory.
Directory list
In addition to the subdirectories of the current directories and available drives the defined logical file paths marked with :: are listed at first and
can be activated by double click.
With .. you can change to the parent directory.
Edit Directory
This button opens the submenu Directory, where you can enter the path of another directory.
Create Directory
A new directory with the specified name is created in the current path.
Logical File Path

With this button, the current path can be saved as logical file path. After activating the button, the window Logical File Path with a text field in
which a name can be specified for the file path. By default, the text field indicates the name of the current directory.
After clicking OK, the new logical path is added to the directory list as well as to the list of logical paths in the window Logical File Paths (see
section 12.4 Windows Logical File Paths on page 337).
History
In this popup menu you can directly reselect up to ten of the last selected paths including those used in previous sessions.
The histories for all File Open and File Import menus are now handled within the file browser only. For File Save and File Export the
histories are handled locally within their menus.
Favourites
If in the preferences file site_defaults.txt a list of favourites is defined, the paths included in this list will be available in this popup menu. The
favourites are defined in the line
filebrowser.global_favorites:[tab]<path name(s)>
The creation and management of this list should be reserved to the system administration.
NOTE:
When starting ICEM Surf, the favourites are written from the preferences file site_defaults.txt into the preferences file
local_defaults.txt. After restarting ICEM Surf, the site_defaults.txt eventually changed by system administration are not
read again or overwritten by the values set in local_defaults.txt respectively.
The (changed) values set by system administration in the site_defaults.txt can be restored with Site Preferences: Restore in
the menu Windows Preferences Preferences. However, in this case the user-defined favourites set in the
local_defaults.txt will get lost.
Hidden Directories/Files
In the project and file lists the display of hidden directories and files can be activated.
76
INTEGRATION OF ICEM SURF IN PDM SYSTEMS
5
Preview
A preview of the following file types can be displayed, if they are selected in the file selection list:
ICEM Surf data bases saved with Preview,
EDF files saved with Preview,
ICEM DB files, and
TIFF, JPEG, and HDR files.
For TIFF, JPEG, and HDR files the image size in pixel is displayed in the Balloon-Help.
Files
This line contains options for the file display in the File selection table.
Type
Only the file type set in this popup menu is displayed in the file selection table. Which file types are offered for selection in the popup menu
depends on the activated function.
When using the option All, the files of all types that can be opened are displayed.
Filter
With this option, the file display may be restricted by indicating wildcard characters. Available wildcard characters are * for any number
of letters and ? for exactly one character.
Long Listing
Off (default setting)
Only Name, Size, Type, and Date are displayed.
On
The following information about the files are displayed:
1. File name
2. File size
3. File type
4. Date and time of the last modification
5. User and group name
6. Access permissions
NOTE:
The display of the long listing needs longer computing time. Therefore, it should only be used if needed.
No Check
On
All files with extension of the selected file type in the name and all other files without extension are displayed. Selected files without
extension are checked explicitly when pressing OK or double clicking onto the file name.
Off
only the files with the extension of the switched file type are displayed.
File selection table

The files in the current project are listed in the file selection table. Only files of the file type specified at Type will be listed.
By clicking onto the buttons Name, Size, Type, Date, U (User Name), and G (Group Name) in the column title, the files in the selection table
can be sorted ascending and descending by the selected criterion. The current sorting is indicated by highlighting the corresponding button,
and the sorting direction by an arrow.
File
In the text field will be displayed the file selected in the list. By entering a new name you may create a new file.
NOTE:
The text field can also be edited if the cursor is outside the window. The file browser window remains active until it is closed or
another function is activated.
Except for Catia files, the length of the file names (including extensions) is restricted to 128 characters. The maximal length of Catia files is 80
characters.
When entering file names you may also use wildcard characters (see also option Filter). In the file selection list, all files are marked the
names of which contain the strings which are not replaced by wildcard characters.
5.3 Integration of ICEM Surf in PDM systems

ICEM Surf offers an interface by which the program can be integrated into different PDM systems. After selection of a file within the PDM system,
it will be loaded in the current ICEM Surf session. A license is required for executing this functionality.
IMPORTANT!
For a description of the prerequisites for running ICEM Surf in PDM mode, please refer to the section PDM integration in the manual
ICEM Surf, ICEM Plotserver and FLEXlm.
The proceeding to open a file from a PDM system is as follows:
77
FILE REFERENCE MANAGER
5
1. The user has to start ICEM Surf with the start option -server <port number> to run the program in PDM mode. The port number can be an
arbitrary value between 5000 and 9999 to be choosen by the user.
2. The program ICEMServer is started in background mode as ICEM Surf process. This program waits for requests to execute an action in ICEM
Surf, i. e. to open or import a file. Requests are transmitted from the program ICEMClient to ICEMServer.
3. The user has now to start the program ICEMClient providing that an action can be executed in ICEM Surf. This call should be integrated into
the PDM system, however, it can also be done via a command shell. The required start options are:
ICEMClient <host name> <port number> -open_file|-open_db <file path> [-wait]
By combining host name and port number, the ICEM Surf session where the action shall be executed will be identified. Both values must be
set. <host name> is the name of the host where the relevant ICEM Surf session has been started. <port number> must correspond with the
value -server <port number> that has been entered for the start of ICEM Surf. It is not required that ICEMClient runs on the same host or
under the same user name as ICEM Surf.
4. ICEMClient informs ICEMServer that an action shall be carried out in ICEM Surf: open_file or open_db.
5. If the parameter -wait is set, ICEMClient waits for a result from ICEM Surf. This result will be the return code of the client program.
6. ICEMServer realizes that there is a request from ICEMClient.
7. Thereupon, a window will be opened in ICEM Surf containing the path of the file:
By pressing the OK button, the file can be opened resp. imported.This button will only be active, if ICEM Surf can process the file.
8. ICEMClient is terminated after ICEM Surf received the request.
The programs ICEMServer and ICEMClient are located in the directory:
<installation directory>\win_b64\code\bin
By the open_file request, ICEM Surf data bases and reference manager session files can be opened, as well as files of all formats supported by
ICEM Surf can be imported or read into the reference manager. For this, the following rules apply:
An ICEM Surf data base can replace the current data base.
A file, if it is not an ICEM Surf data base or session file, will be imported in ICEM Surf, if the reference manager is not opened. After confirma-
tion with OK, the corresponding function window for importing the file will automatically be activated.
If the reference manager is open, the file will be loaded in the current session. If it is a session file, its files will be loaded in the current ses-
sion.
A session file can only be loaded if the reference manager is not opened. After confirmation with OK, the function window for the reference
manager will automatically be activated.
If a file is saved in ICEM Surf, the PDM system must be informed. For this, a batch program has to be generated at customer site called
ICEM_pdm_request. This program must be stored in the following directory:
<installation directory>\win_b64\code\bin
The program has to be implemented as executable.
This program requires the following start parameter:
ICEM_pdm_request -save_file <file name> <format>
After saving a file in ICEM Surf, the program is started and will pass on a message to the PDM system. It will be started only if ICEM Surf is run-
ning in PDM mode.
You will find examples for ICEM_pdm_request in the appendix of the manual ICEM Surf, ICEM Plotserver and FLEXlm.
5.4 File Reference Manager
5.4.1 General information

The reference manager can be activated:
via File Reference Manager (to open a session already saved),
via File Preview (to read in files of different formats), or
with the icon in the special functions block (to open a session already saved).
Using the reference manager, several data bases and/or files of different formats can be referenced from ICEM Surf and displayed. Initially, the
data are not imported into the data base, but this can be realized by an Import option.
Session file and reference files

A reference manager session can be saved as session file. A session file can contain any number of reference files owning information on import,
geometry transformation, display variants, as well as materials and colours.
Session files have the extension .rms.
The menu Windows Reference File Paths administrates the paths of the directories where the files referenced in the session files are
searched.
78
THE MAIN MENU REFERENCE MANAGER
5
A session file can be loaded either interactively via the reference manager with Session Open or with the parameter -P when starting ICEM
Surf.
Session files of the reference manager are configurable for the application of PDM systems. For information on this, please refer to in the manual
Software configuration in chapter ICEM Surf, section PDM integration.
Properties of the reference files

The geometry elements of referenced files can be made visible or invisible. Individual colours and materials, as well as a tessellation tolerance
can be applied. Moreover, the objects of referenced files can be moved with several moving functions. When moving and duplicating, the copies
represent a graphical display only. The objects are not registered in the data base as moving and duplicating is only carried out in the reference
manager.
Variants
The current settings of visibility, transformation, colour, material, and tessellation tolerance can be saved as variant. This enables the user to
prepare different design variants for visualization. The active variant is saved in the session file and reloaded when opening the reference man-
ager next time.
Name and variant of the current session are displayed in the info line of the ICEM Surf window.
Geometry import
The displayed geometry objects can be imported completely or partially from the reference manager into the data base, and retrieved again from
the data base.
NOTE:
Geometry objects of the type Point cannot be referenced and imported.
Groups
A group structure can be built up via the list of reference files. Sub-groups up to 1000 levels can be created. A group of reference files can be used
to change properties such as visibility, colour, material, and tessellation tolerance for all members of a group.
If all files of a group have the same colour or material, this property is also assigned to the group.
A group can be duplicated in a way that the group structure is kept (function Move Translate, option Duplicate). To do this, the selection type
Reference Group has to be activated in the selection window. The group name in the reference manager menu derives from the original name.
Reference files and groups of reference files are summarized as reference elements.
5.4.2 The main menu Reference Manager
Session
The following options are available for the use of session files:
Open
Opens a session which has already been saved.
If, via this button, another session file is read into a session file that is already open, both sessions files will be merged. Both active and
passive files of the second session will be read in (see Reference), however, its variants will be ignored (see Variants).
79
5
If a file that is referenced in the session file to be opened could not be found, a window will be activated where you can enter a new path
(see menu Windows Reference File Paths).
As Group
Inserts a session file as a group.
In this case, a new group with the name of the session file will be created and all references will be saved under this group node.
No Import
The possibility of importing files into the data base is suppressed when opening a session file.
New
Creates a new session.
Save
Saves the session with the files read in and variants generated if it has already been saved.
Save as...
Saves the current session under a new or existing name.
Pack
Via this option it is possible to compress in one file all geometries, materials, textures, etc. that are referenced in the current session. For
this, you have to specify an empty or not existing directory where the following files are saved in:
current data base as ICEM DB,
all textures and Bump Map files, as well as
all reference files.
Moreover, a session file session.rms is generated in this directory, where the animations are saved in addition, and which can be used
for re-importing. When re-importing via session.rms, the data base is handled as an import file, i. e. diagnoses and display attributes will
not be taken over.
Group->Folder
If the option is switched on, a directory structure corresponding to the group structure is created when packing a session. The files con-
tained in a group are saved in a sub-directory of the same name.
If a file is not included in a group, it is saved on the highest directory level. If a file is included several times in the session, the location of
the first file (file with the lowest copy number) is used.
Variants
The current settings of reference files (see List and properties of the reference files) can be saved as Variants.
With the icon in the footer the Reference Manager menu can be shrinked to the variants list only.
The following options are available for variants:
Save as...
Saves the current variant under a new name.
Save
Saves the current variant if it has already been saved.
Rename
Renames the marked variant.
Delete
Deletes variants.
Contents
The contents of the current session can be modified with the following options:
Include
Reads in reference files into the reference manager.
TIP:
Files can also be included via Drag & Drop into the main menu Reference Manager.
With the following options you can specify the geometry objects to be included from a reference file:
List DB
Reads in the entire data base.
Current List
Reads in the current list of a reference file.
Only the current list will be read in from a data base or EDF file. This information will also be saved in the session file. If a file is loaded
several times, the list filter from the first file will be adopted. So it is not possible to load on the first import only the current list from a
file and on the next import from the same file the entire data base.
Select Lists
Reads in the selected list(s) of a reference file.
If multiple lists are selected, one reference entity is created for each list. If no list is selected, the entire data base is read in.
The selection is saved in the session file.
With the Create Variants check button, a variant with the same name is created for each selected list. Only the reference files corre-
sponding to the selection are visible in this variant.
80
5
Select Structure
Reads in the selected parts or molecules of a reference file.
If multiple parts or molecules are selected, one reference entity is created for each part or molecules. If nothing is selected, the entire
data base is read in.
The selection is saved in the session file.
With the Create Variants check button, a variant with the same name is created for each selected part or molecule. Only the refer-
ence files corresponding to the selection are visible in this variant.
Reload
Reloads reference elements, e. g. after modifications in the files.
Delete
Deletes reference elements.
All geometry objects that are belonging to this reference element or have been read in from the same reference file into the reference
manager session will be removed from the session.
Show
All invisible reference elements are shown in a list, and the associated geometry objects are made temporarily visible in the graphics. The
visible elements are made temporarily invisible. Reference elements can be selected for showing via the list in the menu or in the graph-
ics.
Hide
All visible reference elements are shown in a list and can be selected for hiding via this list or in the graphics.
Center Graph
If the button is pressed, a geometry object can be selected in the graphics. The associated reference file is highlighted in the file list of the
menu, and the list is centred to this file. If the file belongs to a group, the group will be opened.
Preferences
The menu Windows Preferences, RefMan (Reference Manager) tab is opened.
Geometry
Geometry objects of reference files can be imported from the reference manager into the data base and retrieved again from the data base.
Import
Geometry objects can be selected and imported into the data base.
The objects are duplicated, they exist as reference geometry and as objects of the data base. To see the objects in the data base, the ref-
erenced geometry can be made invisible by, for instance, switching off the check button Display: On.
Structure
If this check button is switched on, the part and molecule structure is also imported into the data base. The original names are saved
in the reference manager.
Restore
Geometry objects which have been imported into the data base can be removed from the data base within the same session.
When activating the button, all objects once imported from a reference file will initially be highlighted in the data base. From this set of
objects you can now select those that shall be deleted.
TIP:
This function allows simple addendas on objects of a reference. At first, the required objects are imported, and the addenda is
done. Afterwards, the objects will be disposed with the Delete function.
Display
Each file is characterized by three features: visibility of the geometry, colour, material, as well as transformation status.
On
The displayed elements can be made visible or invisible.
RM Display, Indiv. Display
(Reference Manager Display, Individual Display)
For individual or several files or groups can be choosen in each variant whether the colours and materials set in the menu Reference
Manager or the individual display attributes (Colour, Material, or Tolerances) set in the menu Display will be used.
After activating the button, files and groups can be selected via a selection list or directly in the graphics area.
Tessellation
A new tessellation tolerance can be assigned at once to multiple files (see section 11.21.2.1 The submenu Tessellation on page 322).
Group
The following options are available for groups:
Create
Creates a group.
A group can be defined as active group in the table of reference files either by clicking on it with the left mouse button, or via the Context
menu for groups, option Activate. All files included and all groups created afterwards will then be sorted into the active group.
An active group can be deactivated by clicking on it again with the left mouse button or via the context menu.
Rename
Renames a group.
81
5
Add
Adds reference elements to a group.
Remove
Removes reference elements from a group.
Dismantle
Dismantles a group.
During Exit
The following setting is considered during Exit of the reference manager:
Keep Mater.
(Keep Materials)
On: All materials imported by the references will be kept in the data base.
Off: Unused imported materials will not be exported during Save or Export as ICEM DB, and will be removed at the end of the ses-
sion.
List and properties of the reference files
The function window menu can be expanded with the icon in the footer. All data bases and files read in as reference, as well as the cre-
ated groups with their properties are listed in a table in the expandible part.
The following options are available here:

Reference
The display of the files and groups can be switched on or off individually with the check buttons before the file names (active and passive
files/groups). With the check button in the header of the table all referenced elements are switched on or off globally.
After clicking on a reference with the left mouse button, the file it will be highlighted, and a balloon help indicating file name and path, as
well as the current tessellation setting will be displayed.
If a group structure exists, the group nodes are represented by a plus or minus symbol. By clicking with the right mouse button in a group
node you can activate a context menu where various options for expanding and collapsing the groups (see section 5.4.3.1 Context menu
for group nodes on page 83).
By clicking with the right mouse button in a group or file line you can activate a context menu where various options for the group or file
are offered (see sections 5.4.3.2 Context menu for groups on page 83 and 5.4.3.3 Context menu for files on page 84).
Sort Method: Name, Colour, Material
The reference elements can be sorted by file, colour, or material name.
Filter
The display of reference elements in the list can be filtered via a text field. Use:
? to match any single character,
* to match any sequence of zero or x characters (example: ab* matches all strings starting with ab), and
[xy] to match any single character specified by the set x, , y (example: [ab]* matches all strings starting with a or b).
RM Display
(Reference Manager Display)
The display can be toggled for individual or files or groups (see options RM Display, Indiv. Display, page 81).
Move
The objects of a reference file can be manipulated with the functions Move Rotate, Translate, Scale, Mirror, 2 Planes.
NOTE:
For the selection of the objects in the move functions, the object type Reference Group resp. Reference Part must be activated in
the window Selection (Object).
The transformation can be activated or reset via the check buttons in the table.
Colour, Material
With the colour and material icons in the table header, default settings can be specified which are used when inserting a file with several
colours and materials.
With the icons in the separate table lines, individual colours and materials are assigned to the geometry objects of the reference files. The
colour can be modified via a selection table. The material can be modified via a submenu (see section 11.10.1.1 The submenu for select-
ing materials on page 273).
82
THE CONTEXT MENUS
5
If a group includes elements having different colours and materials, the group icon will be a multi-coloured icon.
Tess.
(Tessellation)
With the icon you can assign an individual tessellation tolerance to the reference elements. The tolerance can be modified via a sub-
menu (see section 11.21.2.1 The submenu Tessellation on page 322). The tolerance set here will then be used in either case.
If a tolerance is deleted, the display tolerance defined in the menu Display Tessellation is used again.
Different tolerances can be assigned to a reference file for different variants. The tolerances are saved in the Variants.
Hiding and terminating the Reference Manager
Hide
Hides the window Reference Manager. The geometry remains on the screen. The Reference Manager can be unblanked again via File
Reference Manager or by the icon in the block of special functions.
Exit
Terminates the Reference Manager. If the session file has been modified, a request appears, whether the file shall be saved or not.
5.4.3 The context menus

Various context menus are available for groups and reference files.
5.4.3.1 Context menu for group nodes

Clicking with the right mouse button in a group node activates the following context menu:
Expand Group
Expands the marked group.
Expand all
Expands all groups.
Collapse Group
Collapses the marked group.
Collapse all
Collapses all groups.
5.4.3.2 Context menu for groups

Clicking with the right mouse button in a group line (outside a group node) activates the following context menu:
Activate/Deactivate
Activates/deactivates the marked group.
83
FILE OPEN
5
The active group will be highlighted in the list. If a group is active, all files included and all groups created afterwards will be sorted into this
group.
Rename
Renames the marked group.
Add Members
Adds reference elements to the marked group.
Remove Members
Removes reference elements from the marked group.
Dismantle
Dismantles the marked group.
Reload
Reloads all reference elements of the marked group.
Delete
Deletes all reference elements of the marked group from the session.
Save
Saves the marked group as session file if it has already been saved.
Save as...
Saves the marked group as session file under a new name.
Reframe On
Scales the display of the geometry objects of a group to fit the screen.
Import
Imports the whole group (including all sub-groups) into the data base.
5.4.3.3 Context menu for files

Clicking with the right mouse button in a file line activates the following context menu:
Add to Group
Adds the marked reference file to a choosen group.
Remove from Group

Removes the marked reference file from the associated group.
Reload
Reloads the marked reference file.
Replace
Replaces the marked reference file.
The variant attributes of the old file and the group structure will be maintained.
Delete
Deletes the marked reference file from the session.
Reframe On
Scales the display of the geometry objects of a reference file to fit the screen.
Import
Imports the whole reference file into the data base.
5.5 File Open

Apart from the pull down menu the function File Open can also be activated by the shortcut Ctrl-O.
84
FILE NEW
5
After activating the function you can open via the file browser files of different types. In case of other types than ICEM DB the Import menu for the
file type concerned is activated. For the description of the Import functions please refer to chapter 6 The menu File Import on page 92.
The loading process of an ICEM DB consists of two steps:
1. In the first step, the ICEM DB is loaded into the runtime memory and the status of the loading process is displayed in a progress bar.
2. In the second step the runtime environment is initialized. This includes setting up the geometry display and other information such as lists,
views, work planes, etc. Another progress bar indicates the current initialization step, e. g. Initialisation: Display.
The database is only available for processing after termination of both steps.
Loading and importing files with Drag & Drop

Files can be loaded or imported by dragging them into the graphics area. The graphics area must already be open.
The window Confirm will be activated:
Open
ICEM DB (*.icem)
The data base dragged into the graphics area is opened and the previous data base closed with or without saving.
ICEM Surf data bases (*.kddat) can only be loaded separately.
Other file types
If a single file is dragged into the graphics area, after activating Open the window Save Current Data Base? appears in addition to the
window of the corresponding Import function. You may change the settings in the Import window or open the file directly by confirming
with Yes or No in the window Save Current Data Base?.
If several files of the same type are dragged into the graphics area, Open has the same function as Import.
Import
The data is imported into the current data base by the corresponding Import function (see chapter 6 The menu File Import on page 92).
ICEM Surf data bases (*.kddat) cannot be imported.
5.6 File New

Apart from the pull down menu the function File New can also be activated by the shortcut Ctrl-N.
A new empty data base is created. If in the function Windows Preferences the option Starting Database is active, the specified starting data
base is loaded.
When creating a new data base the current data base will be closed. To avoid any loss of data, you are asked whether the current data base shall
be saved before being closed.
5.7 File Save

Apart from the pull down menu the function File Save can also be activated by the shortcut Ctrl-S.
The data base is saved in the current path.
The menuSave as... ICEM DB
File
File name and path can be entered in the text field or set via the file browser.
4.12, 4.11
Only available for saving an ICEM DB file (*.icem).
Select the ICEM Surf version to which the saved data base shall be compatible. Default setting is 4.12. After using the option 4.11, 4.12 is
automatically reactivated.
Binary, ASCII
Only available for saving a DB file (*.kddat).
ICEM Surf data bases can be saved in binary as well as in ASCII format. Files saved in binary format are slightly larger. However, writing and
reading processes run faster, because no conversion is necessary to transfer data from the computer-internal Binary format to ASCII format.
data bases in ASCII format are useful for the transfer via data networks.
For the following options Backup, Increment, Compress, and Preview you can define standard settings the Windows Preferences function.
85
FILE SAVE AS...
5
Backup
When saving a data base a backup file (*.bak) is created or the existing backup file updated
Increment
Each saving of the data base is written into a separate file. To the file names are added consecutive numbers as suffix.
Compress
ICEM Surf performs a clean up of the data base, i. e, inconsistencies will be removed as far as possible. Information no longer needed will not
be written to the DB file.
Preview
When saving the data base a TIFF image of the current view is created, which will be displayed in the file browser as Preview of the data
base.
5.8 File Save as...

Apart from the pull down menu the function File Save as... can also be activated by the shortcut Alt-S.
The file browser opens to save the current file under another name as ICEM DB (*.icem) or DB (*.kddat).
5.9 File Plot

This function can also be activated by the shortcut Ctrl-P.
With this function you can plot the views displayed on the screen. The data to be plot is first written into a plot file with the format CGM (Computer
Graphics Metafile).
The generated plot file can then be converted by a post processor into an output device-specific format (e. g. HPGL or PostScript).
The postprocessor used as well as further converting and printing commands for the generation of an output device-specific format are specified
in the plot configuration file
plotter.configuration
in the directory
<installation directory>\win_b64\reffiles
For detailed information about this file please refer to the chapter Plot configuration in the manual ICEM Surf, ICEM Plotserver and FLEXlm.
NOTE:
Views which have been scaled unequally with the option Select Zoomed Detail with Different Scaling in the special functions block will
also be plotted in the display with unequal scaling.
The menu Plot includes the tabs Plot, File, Preferences, and Parameter described in the following sections.
5.9.1 Plot
In this tab the plotter and output options can be set.
Plotter, Paper Size

In the popup menu you can select a plotter. The menu entries can be modified in the configuration file plotter.configuration. The paper size
of the current plotter is displayed next to the popup menu.
Plot Scaling
In this popup menu you may select a plot scale. Apart from the standardized scale sequence the following options are additionally available:
Input
In the submenu Plot Scaling you can specify a user-defined plot scaling. The plot scaling always refers to the X axis of the current view.
NOTE:
To be able to plot, the plot scaling should be defined to include the complete contents of the screen. If the contents of the screen is
larger than the paper size, after confirming with OK the message Plot size does not fit into paper size. Plot anyway? appears. In
the graphic area the part of the image which will appear on the sheet is displayed in a rectangle. Always the part of the screen
within this rectangle will be plotted.
If only one view is active, you can move and scale the geometry to fit the rectangle before answering the message.
86
FILE
5
If a view layout with several views is active, you can move views lying outside the plotable area into the rectangle with the option
Translate in the Modification tab of the function Display View Layout (see page 265). In this case, the option Dynamic in the
menu Display View Layout (see page 263) should be used.
Auto
In the submenu Plot Frame you can set as paper size a DIN standard format or the Paper Size of the current plotter. The plot scaling will
be automatically calculated. With the setting Paper Size the geometry will be scaled to fit the paper size.
Update
With this option the plot size is recalculated and the display right to the button updated.
Detail
After activating this button, only the activated view is displayed, in which a detail to be plotted can be selected graphically. Activating again the
button will return to the complete display of the view.
View Layout
Using this button you activate the view layout window also accessible in the menu Display View Layout (see page 262).
Divide Front/Back
ICEM Surf generates a plot file displaying only the front half of the geometry. This function only works in the standard views F Front View
and R Rear View (see also Standard views and work planes on page 46).
Plane X
If Divide Front/Back is switched on, the back half of the geometry in the current view is blanked starting at the X coordinate indicated in the
text field.
Grid
A grid of labelled lines with the distance specified at Spacing is generated in the plot file. The grid is not displayed on the screen.
NOTE:
A plot grid will only be output if the geometry is displayed in a standard view.
Spacing
If Grid is switched on, the distance of the plot grid lines can be defined.
Black and White, Coloured

If a colour plotter is selected you can specify whether the printout shall be in black and white or coloured.
5.9.2 File
This tab includes options for the plot file creation.
File
Via the button File the file browser is activated where you can determine the name and project under which the plot file shall be saved.
In the text field the name and path of the current plot file is displayed and can be modified.
Close
If the plot file remains open in order to add further data (option Close File After Plot inactive), you can close it with this button after comple-
tion.
Close File After Plot

The plot file will automatically be closed after the plot operation.
5.9.3 Preferences
In this menu you can specify values for the output of text, markers, and lines.
87
PARAMETER
5
Text Size (mm): Small, Large, Grid

You may specify a character size for geometry and plot grid labels.
Point Size (mm): Small, Large

You may specify marker sizes for small and large points. The sizes in the text fields Small and Large refer to the corresponding settings in the
menu Display Display (see section 11.2.2 Display properties of objects on page 251).
Line Widths (mm)

Another line width can be assigned to lines used in ICEM Surf. These line widths are serially numbered. The line widths specified in mm in the
text fields are assigned to the corresponding numbers.
NOTE:
These line widths are only relevant for the CGM format.
5.9.4 Parameter
In this tab are selected the views and elements to be written into the plot file.
Views
In this check box you can select the views to be plotted.
Entities: Surfaces, Curves, Raw Data, Points

You may select which data types shall be written into the plot file.
Sections
The menu Diagnoses Sections (see page 169) is activated.
Line Width
With this popup menu you can set six different line widths.
In the CGM format these line widths correspond to the values set in Line Widths (mm) in the tab Preferences.
If in the tab Plot the option Black and White is active, in the NPFILE format will be assigned pen numbers, so that line widths can also be
plotted via the corresponding DHCEXT files.
In case of coloured NPFILE format (option Coloured) colour indices are assigned to the pen numbers.
Assign
The line width set is assigned to the selected objects.
After the plot operation the line widths will be reset to the default values.
NOTE:
The line widths are only displayed in the graphic area, if the option Individual in the menus Display and Display Options is active.
Therefore, this option is automatically switched on when assigning line widths.
88
EXAMPLE FOR THE CREATION OF A PLOT FILE
5
5.9.5 Example for the creation of a plot file

After having activated OK, the corresponding information is written into the plot file. If the option Close File After Plot is active, the plot file will be
closed without any further query. If the option is switched off, the window Confirm with the query Close Plot File? is displayed after having acti-
vated OK. If you click onto No, the file remains open, and you can add by several steps further geometry information to the existing plot informa-
tion in the plot file. This way, you can create a plot file with different sections in different views, as described in the following example:
1. Activate the function File Plot and via the button View Layout in the tab Plot the function Display View Layout. Create a view layout with
several views, e. g. Front View, Side View, Top View and a perspective view (Central or Switch to Central Perspective).
2. Close the menu View Layout and return to the Plot menu. Choose a plotter in the corresponding popup menu in the Plot tab.
3. Activate in the popup menu Plot Scaling with the option Auto the submenu Plot Frame and choose the option Paper Size.
4. Change to the tab File and specify name and path of the plot file using the button File or the text field.
5. Switch off the option Close File After Plot.
6. Change to the tab Parameter and activate all views in the check box Views.
7. Press the OK button and click onto No in the window Confirm Close Plot File.
8. Activate with the button Sections the menu Diagnoses Sections and create sections in X, Y, or Z direction. The sections are displayed in
all views of the view layout. Close the menu Sections and return to the menu Plot.
9. Activate in the check box Views one or several views which shall be plotted with sections. The sections will be written into the plot file in the
selected views only. Click onto Yes in the window Confirm Close Plot File. The plot file will be closed and the plot operation terminated.
5.9.6 Assigning plot colours

With the function Display Colours (see page 283), you can assign to the geometry objects colours for plotting.
To define plot colours, carry out the following steps:
1. Activate the menu Plot and select a plotter. For selected plotter have to be defined colours in the file plotter.configuration.
2. Activate with Ctrl-F the menu Colours and assign different colours to the entities. According to the entry (CO=BRGb) in the plot configuration file
you may choose between four colours. To test all colours, the plot configuration file should contain the entry CO=BWRGYCMb.
5.10 File Snapshot

You can create a TIFF image of the views displayed in the graphic window. Name and path of the TIFF file can be specified in the menu Windows
Preferences in the text field Snapshot filename (see page 327).
The TIFF image output depends on the setting of the option Use Export Image settings in the menu Windows Preferences:
On
No individual settings for image size, resolution, anti-aliasing, etc. are used. The image size corresponds to the size of the graphic window,
e. g. image and window have the same number of pixel.
Off
For the TIFF image output the settings of the function Export Image (see page 150) are used.
5.11 File Comment

With this function a text editor will be started where you can enter comments and notes to the current data base. The comment file will be saved
in the current project in the directory /kddat under the name <data base name>.comment. If you delete the data base, the comment file will also
be deleted.
5.12 File Protocol

With this function you can load an editor with the protocols of the last imported and exported files.
89
FILE PREVIEW
5
5.13 File Preview

Using this function you can preview files of different formats.
Point Clouds
You can select a point cloud (xyz file) and a preview session. The preview import menu and the preview editing menu will then be displayed
(see sections 16.2 Preview import on page 360 and 16.3 Scan creation Preview on page 361). The new geometry information will be
added to the existing geometry information. It is therefore recommended to open a new empty data base before using this function.
RefMan
The file browser will be opened. You may select one or several ICEM Surf data bases or files which shall be displayed with the reference man-
ager (see section 5.4 File Reference Manager on page 78).
5.14 File Delete

With this function you can delete projects and files.
Select in the file browser the file or project to be deleted by double click. Afterwards, the window Delete appears where you have to confirm
again the deleting command. With the buttons Files you can reactivate the file browser to select other projects or files for deleting.
5.15 File Rename

With Rename first the file browser is activated for selecting a data base. The current data base is preselected and can be renamed during the cur-
rent session. After having confirmed with OK the window Rename appears, where you can enter a new file name in the corresponding text field.
90
FILE EXIT
5
NOTE:
Please note that when saving the data base is saved under the new file name.
5.16 File Exit

ICEM Surf can be terminated by the function File Exit or the shortcut Ctrl + Q
91
THE MENU FILE IMPORT
6
6 The menu File Import
Using the function File Import you can include files of different types in ICEM Surf. During the import of ICEM DB, IGES, VDA/FS, ASCII Part,
Catia, and Unigraphics files the window Status Import with a status bar and a Cancel button appears.
After having activated the Import function the file browser is activated, in which you can select with File: Type (see also section 5.2 File browser
on page 75) the format to be imported.
After having confirmed the settings in the file browser with OK the Import menu of the corresponding file type will be activated. You will find a
detailed description of these menus in the following sections.
NOTE:
Please pay attention to the Naming conventions for CAD data exchange on page 70 and Conversion tables for CAD data exchange on
page 71.
6.1 Import ICEM DB

With this function you can convert data bases in ICEM DB format to ICEM Surf data bases. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format
please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on page 67.
The menu Import ICEM DB includes the tabs Entities and Geometry described in the following sections.
File selection and protocol output options are available on both tabs.
File Selection
Activation of the file browser for another file import. The files to be imported are displayed in the frame left to the icon.
Protocol
Activation of a text editor showing the protocol file created during the import operation. The protocol file contains statistic data and eventual
error messages.
6.1.1 Import ICEM DB Entities
92
IMPORT ICEM DB ENTITIES
6
Entities/Doubles
In the columns Entities and Doubles is specified which entity types shall be imported and how name conflicts shall be resolved.
Geometry
All geometry objects of the type activated in the check box Objects on the Geometry tab are read in. The following settings are possible for
the export of geometry objects:
Doubles
Rename
All geometry objects are imported. In case of molecules with identical names the parent parts will be renamed.
Replace
All geometry objects are imported and objects with identical names are replaced, if they belong to the current list.
Skip
Geometry objects with identical names are not imported.
Map Groups: Top Down, Bottom up
This popup menu is available for the import of geometry objects. Here, you can specify, whether for the translation of the group names to
the Part/Molecule/Atom structure the group hierarchy shall be considered in descending or ascending direction.
NOTE:
If a Shell is converted to a molecule by one of the options Mol. (by no.) or Mol. (by name), the name specification of these options
takes priority. In this case, only the parent part will get the name of the corresponding group.
Text
The texts of the Display Text function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Diagnosis
The Diagnoses saved in the ICEM DB are imported (see chapter 10 The menu Diagnoses on page 169).
DisV
(Display Variants)
All user-defined display variants from the list Variant of the Display Display function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
NOTE:
If the import of display variants is deactivated, only colour assignments are imported.
Settings of the Display Options function are not imported. For the import of these setting, the File Open function must be
used.
To resolve name conflicts the following options are available in the popup menu Doubles:
Rename
All entities are imported and entities with identical names renamed.
Replace
All entities are imported and entities with identical names in the data base will be replaced.
Skip
Entities with identical names are not imported.
Smart Rename
Entities with identical names are only imported and renamed, if they are not identical with the entities already existing in the data base.
The import can be controlled with the following options:
Check button
If the check buttons is deactivated, the current colour is removed (corresponds to the option /Remove individual Colour in the colour
submenu).
In this case, the settings in the imported file are used without changes, i. e.:
geometry objects with individual colour are imported without changes,

to geometry objects without individual colour no colour is assigned.
The popup menu is disabled.
If the check button is activated, the colour import can be controlled with the following options in the popup menu:

Current Colour
The current colour is assigned to geometry objects depending on the setting in the popup menu.
By default, the current colour is taken from the Object Manager. A selection different from the Object Manager setting is marked with *.
93
6
Keep individual
(Keep individual)
Geometry objects with individual colours are imported without changes.
To geometry objects without individual colour the colour selected with the Current Material button is assigned.
All
The colour specified with the material button is used for all geometry objects.
Planes
All user-defined display variants from the list Planes of the Display Planes function saved in the ICEM DB are imported. For resolving
name conflicts see DisV.
Views
All user-defined views from the list Views of the Display View/Navigation function saved in the ICEM DB are imported. For resolving name
conflicts see DisV.
Materials
All materials from the Material table of the Display Material function saved in the ICEM DB are imported. For resolving name conflicts see
DisV.
Following options can also be selected for the material import:
As read only
All materials is assigned this status when being imported. If this option is switched off, the current status of the materials remains
unchanged.
Only used Materials
(Only used Materials)
The behaviour of this option depends on the imported geometry or the settings on the Geometry, respectively:
Import of surface elements such as Scans, Patches, Faces, Shell, and Body active:
Only those materials referenced/used by the imported element types are imported.
Import of curve elements, i. e. none of the surface element options is active:
No materials are imported.
No Import of geometry (option Geometry Off:
All materials used by the surface elements of the imported ICEM DB are imported.
The material import can be controlled with the following options:
Check button
If the check buttons is deactivated, the current material is removed (corresponds to the option /Remove individual Material in the
material submenu).
geometry objects with individual materials are imported without changes,

to geometry objects without individual material no material is assigned.
If the check button is activated, the material import can be controlled with the following options in the popup menu:

Current Material
The current material is assigned to geometry objects depending on the setting in the popup menu.
By default, the current material is taken from the Object Manager. A selection different from the Object Manager setting is marked with *.
Keep individual
(Keep individual)
Geometry objects with individual materials are imported without changes.
To geometry objects without individual material the material selected with the Current Material button is assigned.
All
The material specified with the material button is used for all geometry objects.
Texture Groups
The settings of the Display Texture Projection function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Mirror Groups
The settings of the Display Mirror function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Environment
The environments from the Display Environment function saved in the ICEM DB are imported. For resolving name conflicts see DisV.
Image information of a special reflection image saved in the ICEM DB are also imported.
94
6
Background Image
The background image sets from the Display Background Image function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Background images only stored in the original ICEM Surf DB in the default set SET are assigned to the current viewport when being
exported to an ICEM DB. When re-importing the ICEM DB, this set will also be read in as current set.
NOTE:
As only the file names and not the paths of the image files for texture groups, environments, and background image sets are saved in
the ICEM DB, it is recommendable to insert the corresponding paths in the Windows Texture Paths function before the import operation.
Turn Table
The settings of the Display Turn Table function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Selection Set
The selection sets saved in the ICEM DB are imported (see Set on page 227).
HDR Lights
The HDR lighting scenarios of the Display Light HDR function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Transformation
Transformation operations from the Move functions saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Animation
Animations from the Display Animation function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Clipping Plane
Clipping planes from the Display Clipping Plane function saved in the ICEM DB are imported.
Lists
The lists are imported from the ICEM DB to the ICEM Surf data base with the corresponding assignments of the geometry objects. In addi-
tion, all objects of the ICEM DB are added to the current list.
If the option is switched off, all geometry objects are added to the List DB and the current list.
For the resolution of name conflicts the following options are available in the popup menu Doubles:
Rename
All lists are imported and lists with identical names renamed.
Append
The geometry objects assigned to the list to be imported are added to the list with the identical name in the ICEM Surf data base.
Layer
Layers are imported from the ICEM DB and, depending on the setting in the popup menu Doubles, converted to lists or parts. With the
options of this popup menu the naming conditions of the lists and parts are also specified.
List (by no.)

(List (by number))
Each layer is converted to a list with a name composed of the Prefix specified and the layer number.
List (by name)
Each layer is converted to a list with identical name.
Part (by no.)
(Part (by number))
Each layer is converted to a part with a name composed of the Prefix specified and the layer number.
Part (by name)
Each layer is converted to a part with identical name.
Part/Mol. (by name)
(Part/Molecule (by name))
All layers of an imported file are converted to one part. For each layer is created per object type one molecule with the name of the layer.
Part/Mol. (by no.)
(Part/Molecule (by number))
All layers of an imported file are converted to one part. For each layer is created per object type one molecule with the name composed of
the specified Prefix and the layer number.
P./M.+List (by nm)
(Part/Molecule and List (by name))
In addition to the conversion to parts and molecules, for each layer with equal name is created a list with the layer name. Each list con-
tains all molecules from all layers with equal name.
95
IMPORT ICEM DB GEOMETRY
6
P./M.+List (by no.)

(Part/Molecule and List (by number))
In addition to the conversion to parts and molecules, for each layer with equal name is created a list with a name composed of the speci-
fied Prefix and the layer number.
Figure 10 Importing Layers with the option P./M.+List (by no.) and the Prefix LY
ICEM Surf-DB
Geometry Lists
(with option Append)
ICEM DB 1 Part 1 DB all objects
Layer no 5 Patch List LY5 (Layer no 5 from ICEM DB 1 + 2):
Face LY5 LY7 LY5
Curve List LY6 (Layer no 6 from ICEM DB 2):
Layer no 7 Patch List LY7 (Layer no 7 from ICEM DB 1):
ICEM DB 2 Part 2
Layer no 5 Patch
Curve
LY5 LY5 LY6
Layer no 6 Curve
If the data base contains lists with identical names, you can specify in List/Doubles how the name conflict shall be resolved. Parts with iden-
tical names are automatically renamed.
6.1.2 Import ICEM DB Geometry
Objects
You can select the object types to be imported.
96
6
NOTE:
If the object types Curve Composite, Shell, and Body are switched off, nothing will be imported, i. e. neither the element clusters nor the
individual elements assigned to them.
With the additional options Curves and Faces, the individual elements are imported into ICEM Surf without topological information.
With the additional options Mol. (by no.) and Mol. (by name), the elements are imported into ICEM Surf as cluster with topological informa-
tion.
Date, time, and owner of parts, molecules, and atoms are also read from the ICEM DB file.
For the objects Curves, Patches, Faces, Curve Composite, Shell, and Body the following options are available for the conversion:
Curves, Patches
NURBS -> Bezier

When being imported, single-segment NURBS curves and patches can be converted to Bezier.
Faces
Faces -> Patches

Conversion of trivial faces to patches. Trivial faces are trimmed patches whose trim curves are identical with the patch edge/s of the
underlying patch within the tolerance.
NOTE:
Faces with more than four trim curves are not converted to patches, even if the edges are identical with the underlying patch
edges. Such faces can result, for example, if surfaces with patches having only partially connected edges are converted to shells.
(See also option Export Curve Composites, Export Shells on page 123 in the Options tab of the function File Export ICEM
DB)
Tolerance
If the distance between the edges of the underlying patch and the trim curves of the face is larger than specified, the face will remain
unchanged, even if Faces > Patches is switched on. The tolerance may have values between 1-9 and 1.0.
3D Curves
Attached 3D trim curves of faces will also be translated.
Curve Composite
Curves
Each group to which one ore several composite curves are assigned, is converted to a molecule with the name of the ICEM DB group. All
curves of the composite curves belonging to the group are assigned to this molecule, i. e. the composite curves are dissolved. The parent
part of the molecule will have the name of the next parent group (see also figure 11 on page 98).
If a composite curve is assigned to no group except the root group DB, the parent part and molecule will have the name of the root
group: Part DB > molecule DB.
Mol. (by no.)
(Molecule (by number))
Each composite curve is converted to a molecule with a name composed of the Prefix specified and a consecutive number. The parent
part will have the name of the group to which the composite curve is assigned (see also figure 12 on page 98).
The prefix must have 4 characters (plus consecutive number), e. g. CCUR1.
Mol. (by name)
(Molecule (by name))
Each composite curve is converted to a molecule with identical name. The parent part will have the name of the group to which the com-
posite curve is assigned.
Shell
Faces
Each group to which one ore several shells are assigned, is converted to a molecule with the name of the ICEM DB group. All faces of the
shells belonging to the group are assigned to this molecule, i. e. the shells are dissolved.
Depending on the setting in the popup menu Map Groups: Top Down, Bottom up in the tab Entities the parent part of the molecule will
have the name of the next parent group (Bottom up) or the highest level group (Top Down. The figure below shows the result of a con-
version with the setting Bottom up.
97
6
Figure 11 Conversion with the option Faces
Mol. (by no.)

Each shell is converted to a molecule with a name composed of the Prefix specified and a consecutive number. The parent part will have
the name of the group to which the shell is assigned.
The prefix must have 4 characters (plus consecutive number), e. g. SHLL1.
Figure 12 Conversion with the option Mol. (by no.)
Mol. (by name)

Each shell is converted to a molecule with identical name. The parent part will have the name of the group to which the shell is assigned.
Body
Faces
Each group to which one ore several bodies are assigned, is converted to a part with the name of the ICEM DB group.
Part (by no.)
(Part (by number))
Each body is converted to a part with a name composed of the Prefix specified and a consecutive number.
The prefix must have 4 characters (plus consecutive number), e. g. BODY1.
Part (by name)
Each body is converted to a part with identical name.
98
IMPORT IGES
6
6.2 Import IGES
NOTE:
For the export of IGES files from Catia / ICEM Shape Design for the import in ICEM Surf, the option B-Spline for Curve and surface type
on the Tools > Options > Compatibility > Iges tab should be activated in order that 2D curves are exported and can be recalculated with-
out errors during the import in ICEM Surf.
The menu Import IGES
from IGES
With the options in this radio box you can determine how the objects imported into ICEM Surf shall be structured.
Geometry
One ICEM Surf Part with the name of the included file will be created.
Level, Colour and Pen
Option Part active

One ICEM Surf Part will be created for each Level, Colour or Pen. The first two letters of the names of the created ICEM Surf parts
and lists indicate the type of the included structure: (LV = Level, CL = Colour, PN = Pen) followed by the level, colour, or pen number.
If several source files have been included via the File Selection , an alphabetical identification is added to the part and list names
to distinguish the source files.
Option Molecule active
One ICEM Surf part with the name of the included file will be created.
Type
Option Part active

An ICEM Surf part will be created for each ICEM Surf molecule type. The created ICEM Surf part will be named according to the mol-
ecule type: PNT (points), RAW (raw data contours), CRV (curves), and SRF (surfaces). If several source files have been included via
the File Selection , an alphabetical identification is added to the part and list names to distinguish the source files.
99
IMPORT IGES
6
An ICEM Surf part with the name of the included file will be created.
Blanked
Entities blanked in the IGES files are also read in.
to SURF:
Part
For each element from the file to be included one ICEM Surf molecule will be created.
The molecules are named according to the elements. The original element names will be preserved.
Molecule
For all elements of an ICEM Surf molecule type one ICEM Surf molecule will be created.
According to the molecule type the first letters of the molecule names are PNT (points), RAW (raw data), CRV (curves) or SRF (surfaces)
List
For the included files are created lists with the following structure:
Geometry 1 ICEM Surf list with the name of the included file
Level, Colour and Pen 1 ICEM Surf list per level, colour, or pen. The first letters of the list names indicate the file
type: LV..., CL..., PN...
Set 1 ICEM Surf list per set with the name of the set
Type up to 4 ICEM Surf lists (one per molecule type): PNT..., RAW..., CRV..., SRF...
Objects
Conversion
If the object types Curves, Patches, and Faces are selected for being exported, for the conversion the following additional options are available:
Curves and Patches
Convert all
All NURBS elements and regular surfaces are internally converted, and read into ICEM Surf.
Bezier/B-Spline/NURBS
According to the setting elements or generator elements are converted to single-segment (Bezier), multi-segment (B-Spline), or rational
B-splines (NURBS).
Arc Convert.
(Arc Conversion)
For Curves only.
If the option is switched off, the arcs are not converted, but saved as arcs in ICEM Surf.
If the option is switched on, the arcs are converted according to the setting in the popup menu Bezier/B-Spline/NURBS into single-seg-
ment, multi-segment, or rational B-spline curves.
NURBS -> Bezier
NURBS curves and patches are automatically converted to Bezier. We recommend this switch setting, since some modelling functions
within ICEM Surf cannot process NURBS curves.
In case of converting NURBS patches a great number of small Bezier patches may result which you can combine to larger patches using
the function Patch creation By Patches (see page 454).
Faces
Faces -> Patches

Conversion of trivial faces to patches. Trivial faces are trimmed patches whose trim curves are identical with the patch edge/s of the
underlying patch within the tolerance.
Tolerance
If the distance between the edges of the underlying patch and the trim curves of the face is larger than specified, the face will remain
unchanged, even if Faces > Patches is switched on. The tolerance may have values between 1-9 and 1.0.
Standard
The standard directive file will be used for the conversion from IGES to ICEM Surf. You will find the directive file
import_standard_directive_iges in the directory <installation directory>\win_b64\reffiles.
Directive: <path name of the directive file>

For the conversion, a user-defined directive file can be selected. The directives of the default directive file must also be set.
100
IMPORT VDA/FS
6
NOTE:
Please refer to the reference manual ICEM IGES Translator for further information about directives for IGES files (iges.pdf).
Current
The colours/materials selected with the colour and material buttons Current Colour and Current Material are applied to all imported
geometry objects.
If no current colour/material is selected (check buttons deactivated), no graphic properties are assigned to the imported geometry objects.
By default, the current colour/material is taken from the Object Manager. A selection different from the Object Manager setting is marked with
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
6.3 Import VDA/FS

The options for the import of VDA/FS files are also used in the functions Import IGES and described in the corresponding section (see
page 99).
The following options are additionally available:
The menu Import VDA/FS
from VDA/FS: Set

A VDA/FS set corresponds to a level.
Option Part active

An ICEM Surf part will be created for each VDA/FS set with the set name. If the VDA/FS file does not contain set names, the set and thus
the ICEM Surf part will get the default name BSE0001. Arcs and Points as well as elements not associated to a set will get default names.
One ICEM Surf part with the name of the included file will be created.
Standard
The standard directive file will be used for the conversion from IGES or VDA/FS to ICEM Surf. You will find the directive file
import_standard_directive_vda in the directory \<installation directory\win_b64\reffiles.

For the conversion, a user-defined directive file can be selected. The directives of the default directive file must also be set.
NOTE:
Please refer to the reference manual ICEM TVDA Translator for further information about directives for VDA/FS files (vdafs.pdf).
101
IMPORT ASCII PARTS
6
6.4 Import ASCII Parts

The options for the import of ASCII Part files are also used in the functions Import IGES and described in the corresponding section (see
page 99).
The radio box from ASCII Part contains an additional option Structure. If it is active, the part structure of ASCII Part or IGES files which are writ-
ten with ICEM Surf will be preserved. The options Part and Molecule cannot be activated.
In addition, the option Planes to import work planes is available.
The menu Import ASCII Part
6.5 Import Scan
The menu Import Scan
Current
geometry objects.
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
102
IMPORT 3DPAINT
6
6.6 Import 3DPAINT
The menu Import 3DPAINT
Current
geometry objects.
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
6.7 Import Raw Data

With this function you can import files of different formats with point coordinates of raw data or scans. Based on the membership to raw data seg-
ments or scan lines the lines with point coordinates are usually ordered in structure blocks. The first line of a structure block may contain structure
information such as the name of the following raw data segment or the number of points of the following scan line. After this structure information
the coordinate lines follow.
During the import is checked line per line whether the format fits with the format option settings (see The Submenu Format on page 104). If the
option Skip Errors is switched off, the import is aborted in case of lines which cannot be processed and the file is only checked for further errors.
With the help of the protocol file you can check whether the error line do not contain important information and can be ignored with Skip Errors
during the next import.
The menu Import Raw Data
Format
With this button you can activate the format window where you can specify the format options for the file import (see The Submenu Format
on page 104).
Skip Errors
During the import all lines are ignored which do not fit with the format options and cannot be processed.
NOTE:
If Skip Errors is switched on, important lines (e. g. lines with coordinates) may be ignored. This can be checked in the protocol file.
Edit File
The file can be modified in an editor to correct eventually lines which cannot be processed.
103
IMPORT RAW DATA
6
Current
geometry objects.
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
The Submenu Format
Import Format
This subwindow displays the effect of the format options specified in the lower part of the window Format. It shows the filter that will be used
to import the raw data or xyz file.
File View
This subwindow shows the first ten lines of the selected raw data or xyz file. The file structure must match in both sub windows. If this is not
the case, you may either modify the file in the editor (option Edit File) or try a new import with Skip Errors.
Text
Header
In the text field can be defined a special header line which can be processed during the import.
Comment
In the file to be imported lines can be marked as comment by putting the character specified in the text field at the beginning of the line.
Separation
Row
The file lines can be separated by a sequence of the character specified in the text field. These lines will be identified and ignored.
Column
With the characters specified in the text fields may be defined columns for the individual coordinates of a line. During the import the sep-
arator characters are removed and only the point coordinates read in.
NOTE:
The following characters are not allowed: + - . 0123456789.
104
IMPORT CDRS
6
Structure
Contour Name
This option was created for the import of raw data. ICEM Surf supposes that the first line of each structure block contains the following
information: the part name, the name of the raw data contour and the number of the raw data segment. This information is taken from the
original file and written into the ICEM Surf data base. Both, part name and contour name must have a length of exactly 8 characters which
eventually have to be filled with blanks. The three components of the line must be separated from each other by a / character.
If this function has been accessed from File Preview Point Clouds, a new scan line will be created for each new structure block.
The switches Point Set and Contour Number cannot be activated, if this option is active.
Point Set
ICEM Surf supposes that the first line of each structure block contains the number of points in the structure block. The block ends at the
next line indicating a number of points.
This switch can only be activated if Contour Name is not active.
Contour Number
A structure block is defined by a number indicated before the point coordinates. In the subwindow Import Format this is the number 9. All
points with the same number form a structure block which is read in as a raw data segment or a scan line.
This switch can only be activated if Contour Name is not active.
Point Number
If this switch is active, an ordinal number is indicated before the coordinates of each point. In the subwindow Import Format this is indi-
cated by the numbers 1 and 2.
Data
Point
The coordinate line must only contain the three point coordinates and eventually the point number or block number and column separa-
tors.
Only coordinate lines containing exactly three coordinates will be imported.
Point + Vector
The coordinate line must only contain only the three point coordinates and three vector coordinates for that point and eventually the point
number or contour number and column separators. The vector coordinates are not yet processed in ICEM Surf.
Only coordinate lines containing exactly six coordinates will be imported.
6.8 Import CDRS

With this function you may import rendering settings from the program CDRS which apart from the Geometry contain material, light, and environ-
ment settings.
The menu Import CDRS
Scene
With the following options you can choose which of the files listed in the Scene file shall be imported:
Geometry
The IGES file *.igs with the geometry in IGES format is imported.
Material
The Material file *.dmt with material settings is imported. The settings will be adopted in the function Display Material).
Light
The Light file *.dlg with material settings is imported. The settings will be adopted in the function Display Light).
Room
The Room file *.drm with material settings is imported. The settings will be adopted in the function Display Environment).
NOTE:
The options can only be activated if the corresponding files are listed in the Scene file.
105
IMPORT CATIA V4
6
Current
The colour import can be controlled with the following options:
Check button
submenu).


Current Colour
Keep individual
(Keep individual)
All
An analogue popup menu is available to control the material import.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
NOTE:
A protocol file will only be generated if Geometry is switched on.
6.9 Import Catia V4

The import of Catia V4 files is carried out via the ICEM DB format, i. e. internally the Catia V4 file first is converted to an ICEM DB file and then to
an ICEM Surf data base. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on
page 67.
For the ICEM DB based conversion the directive file catiav4_to_kddat.directive is used.
Moreover, via the directive file pre- and postprocessing executables can be activated for the data exchange.
For detailed information about directive files, pre- and postprocessing as well as data exchange with the utility icutility, please refer to chapter
Interfaces the manual Software configuration.
The menu Import Catia V4
106
IMPORT CATIA V4
6
In the columns from Catia V4 and to SURF you can select the entities to be imported from the Catia V4 file and determine how they shall be
structured and named in the ICEM Surf data base.
Layer
Depending of the setting in the popup menu in the column to SURF, the layers from the Catia V4 file are converted as follows:
List (by no.)

(List (by number))
The layers are converted to lists with names composed of the prefix specified in the directive file catiav4_to_kddat.directive and the
corresponding layer number. All parts and molecules will have the default name Db.
Part (by no.)
(Part (by number))
The layers are converted to parts with names composed of the prefix specified in the directive file and the corresponding layer number.
The geometry objects assigned to the parts are structured into molecules by object type. All molecules will have the default name Db.
Part/Mol. (by no.)
All layers of an imported file are converted to one part. For each layer is created per object type one molecule with the name composed
of the prefix specified in the directive file and the layer number.
P./M.+List (by no.)
In addition to the conversion to parts and molecules, for each layer with equal number is created a list with a name composed of the prefix
and the layer number (see figure 12 on page 98).
Skin
If this option is switched off, nothing will be imported, i. e. neither skins nor the individual surfaces assigned to them.
Catia V4 skins are read into ICEM Surf as faces. The structure and naming conditions for the created parts and molecules can be set in the
popup menu in the column to SURF as follows:
Faces
With this option, the individual surfaces of a skin are imported into ICEM Surf as faces without topological information (see figure 11 on
page 98).
The faces are assigned to a part and a molecule with the name Db.
In case of re-exporting them to Catia they will only be reconverted to Skins if they are defined as individual molecule and in the menu Edit
Catia V4 Structures is specified that this molecule shall be exported as Skin.
Mol. (by no.)
With this option, a skin is imported into ICEM Surf as face cluster with topological information (see figure 12 on page 98).
The faces are assigned to a molecule with a name composed of the prefix Skin and a consecutive number.
In case of re-exporting the faces to Catia, they will be reconverted to Skins.
Mol. (by name)
With this option, the topological information will also be preserved.
The faces are assigned to a molecule with the name of the Skin.
In case of re-exporting them to Catia, they will be reconverted to Skins as in the molecule is specified that these faces shall be exported
as Skins.
AXS
With this option Catia V4 axis systems can be imported and converted to ICEM Surf work planes.
Planes
With this option, free planes are imported in ICEM Surf as work planes, if in the directive file catiav4_to_kddat.directive the option
free_planes_to_srfs is set to no. If free_planes_to_srfs is set to yes, the planes are imported in ICEM Surf as B-Spline Patches.
If in the data base already exist work planes with identical names, you can specify via the popup menu in the column to SURF how name conflicts
shall be resolved.
Rename
All planes are imported. If in the data base already exist planes with identical names, the imported planes will be renamed.
Replace
Planes with identical names will be imported and will replace the corresponding existing planes.
Skip
Planes with identical names will not be imported.
Smart Rename
Planes with identical names will only be imported if they are not identical with the planes already existing the data base.
3D Curves
107
IMPORT CATIA V5
6
V4-Drawings
If this option is switched on, the statement ON ALL DRA is written into the Mask file to import Drawings from Catia V4.
Model No.
(Model Number)
A Catia file may contain several data bases. With the number specified in the text field will be addressed the corresponding data base. If you
specify a higher number than the number of data bases existing in the selected file, this will be indicated in the protocol.
Objects
Current
geometry objects.
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
6.10 Import Catia V5

For the data exchange with Catia V5 / ICEM Shape Design (ISD) and ICEM Surf, two translators are available: the Theorem Translator and Catia
ISD Translator offering more data exchange possibilities.
IMPORTANT!
Both translators require a Catia V5 installation.

The Catia ISD Translator additionally requires the installation of the ICEM Shape Design workbench (in case of Catia V5 R19 AddIn or
AddIn Lite).
For using the Theorem Translator you need an additional license!
The import of Catia V5 files is carried out via the ICEM DB format, i. e. internally the Catia V5 file first is converted to an ICEM DB file and then to
an ICEM Surf data base. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on
page 67.
For the ICEM DB based conversion the directive file catiav5_to_kddat.directive is used. Moreover, via the directive file pre- and postprocess-
ing executables can be activated for the data exchange. For detailed information about directive files, pre- and postprocessing as well as data
exchange with the utility icutility, please refer to chapter Interfaces the manual Software configuration.
For information about the installation of the translator, please refer to the file read_this_first_*.pdf, chapter Installation and deinstallation,
section Installation of the Catia V5 Translator.
For detailed information about the import of Catia V5 files please refer to the reference manual ICEM Catia Direct Interface (catia.pdf).
108
IMPORT CATIA V5
6
The menu Import Catia V5
Translator: Catia ISD / Theorem

Via this popup menu you can choose the translator type.
The Catia ISD Translator allows to import also Scans, Display Sets, Selection Sets, Light Sources, and Colours.
Moreover, this translator allows the import of CATProducts. In this case, the CATProduct will be flatten to a temporary CATPart.
The available options in this menu depend on the activated translator.
In the columns from Catia V5 and to SURF you can select the entities to be imported from the Catia V5 file and determine how they shall be
Layer
Depending of the setting in the popup menu in the column to SURF, the layers from the Catia V5 file are converted as follows:
List (by no.)

(List (by number))
The layers are converted to lists with names composed of the prefix specified in the directive file catiav5_to_kddat.directive and the
corresponding layer number. All parts and molecules will have the default name Db.
Part (by no.)
(Part (by number))
Part/Mol. (by no.)
P./M.+List (by no.)
Curve Join
Catia V5 Curve Joins are read into ICEM Surf as curve segments.
If this option is switched off, nothing will be imported, i. e. neither curve joins nor the individual curve segments assigned to them.
The structure and naming conditions for the created parts and molecules can be set in the popup menu in the column to SURF as follows:
Curves
With this option, the individual curve segments of a curve join are imported into ICEM Surf without topological information (see figure 11
on page 98).
The curves are assigned to a part and a molecule with the name Db.
In case of re-exporting them to Catia they will only be reconverted to Curve Joins if they are defined as individual molecule and in the
menu Edit Catia V5 Structures is specified that this molecule shall be exported as Curve Join.
109
IMPORT CATIA V5
6
Mol. (by no.)

With this option, a curve join is imported into ICEM Surf as curve cluster with topological information (see figure 12 on page 98).
The curves are assigned to a molecule with a name composed of the prefix specified in the directive file kddat_to_catiav5.directive
and a consecutive number.
In case of re-exporting the curves to Catia, they will be reconverted to Curve Joins.
Mol. (by name)
The curves are assigned to a molecule with the name of the Curve Join.
In case of re-exporting them to Catia, they will be reconverted to Curve Joins as in the molecule is specified that these curves shall be
exported as Curve Joins.
Surface Join
Catia V5 Surface Joins are read into ICEM Surf as faces.
If this option is switched off, nothing will be imported, i. e. neither surface joins nor the individual surfaces assigned to them.
The structure and naming conditions for the created parts and molecules can be set in the popup menu in the column to SURF as follows:
Faces
With this option, the individual surfaces of a surface join are imported into ICEM Surf as faces without topological information (see figure
11 on page 98).
The faces are assigned to a part and a molecule with the name Db.
In case of re-exporting them to Catia they will only be reconverted to Surface Joins if they are defined as individual molecule and in the
menu Edit Catia V5 Structures is specified that this molecule shall be exported as Surface Join.
Mol. (by no.)
With this option, a surface join is imported into ICEM Surf as face cluster with topological information (see figure 12 on page 98).
The faces are assigned to a molecule with a name composed of the prefix specified in the directive file kddat_to_catiav5.directive
and a consecutive number.
In case of re-exporting the faces to Catia, they will be reconverted to Surface Joins.
Mol. (by name)
The faces are assigned to a molecule with the name of the Surface Join.
In case of re-exporting them to Catia, they will be reconverted to Surface Joins as in the molecule is specified that these faces shall be
exported as Surface Joins.
AXS
With this option Catia V5 axis systems can be imported and converted to ICEM Surf work planes.
Planes
With this option, free planes are imported in ICEM Surf as work planes, if in the directive file catiav4_to_kddat.directive the option
free_planes_to_srfs is set to no. If free_planes_to_srfs is set to yes, the planes are imported in ICEM Surf as B-Spline Patches.
If in the data base already exist work planes with identical names, you can specify via the popup menu in the column to SURF how name conflicts
shall be resolved.
Rename
Replace
Skip
Smart Rename
Display Set
Only available for Catia ISD Translator.
Catia V5 display sets are converted to ICEM Surf Lists.
Selection Set
Catia V5 selection sets are converted to ICEM Surf selection sets.
Light
The light sources defined in the Catia V5 workbench ICEM Shape Design are mapped to the current ICEM Surf light source table.
110
IMPORT CATIA V5
6
Text
Catia V5 texts with leader are converted to ICEM Surf text with Text Anchor.
NOTE:
Only texts attached to an object with leader can be imported into the ICEM DB.
In the Catia ICEM Shape Design workbench, a text can have multiple leaders to one object. In this case, only the first leader
will be imported to the ICEM DB.
Views
Catia V5 views (Cameras) are converted to ICEM Surf views.
Colour
The colour import can be controlled with the following options:
Check button
submenu).


Current Colour
Keep individual
(Keep individual)
All
Materials
In the text field Texture Path available for imported materials can be indicated the directory into which the texture images of the materials
shall be saved as TIFF files. The path is automatically added to the Texture Path List. If no texture path is indicated, no textures are
imported.
The following material properties supported in Catia are not supported in the ICEM DB format:
physical material properties such as material weight and density,

the RGB colour used for transparency,
hardware rendering types such as external shader,
the texture mapping type Adaptive Mapping.
For the Catia mapping types Spherical Mapping, Cylindrical Mapping, and Cubical Mapping are used in ICEM Surf the mapping methods
Cylindrical (Catia), Spherical(Catia), Cubic (Catia).
The material import can be controlled with the following options:
Check button
If the check buttons is deactivated, the current material is removed (corresponds to the option /Remove individual Material in the
material submenu).
geometry objects with individual materials are imported without changes,

to geometry objects without individual material no material is assigned.
If the check button is activated, the material import can be controlled with the following options in the popup menu:

Current Material
The current material is assigned to geometry objects depending on the setting in the popup menu.
By default, the current material is taken from the Object Manager. A selection different from the Object Manager setting is marked with *.
Keep individual
(Keep individual)
Geometry objects with individual materials are imported without changes.
111
IMPORT UNIGRAPHICS NX
6
To geometry objects without individual material the material selected with the Current Material button is assigned.
All
The material specified with the material button is used for all geometry objects.
Objects
You can select the object types to be imported. When using the Catia ISD Translator, the check button Scan can be activated for the import of
scans.
Face Transfer
3D Curves
Only available for Theorem Translator.
Crop Underl. Surf.
(Crop Underlying Surface)
Underlying surfaces can be cropped at face boundaries.
Attributes: Colour
The graphics colour property of the corresponding object will be mapped to an Individual colour of an ICEM Surf element. For this, the current
colour table from ICEM Surf will be used (see section 11.12 Display Colours on page 283).
Hidden Geometry
(Hidden Geometry)
With this option, also elements are imported which are set to No Show mode in the Catia V5/ICEM Shape Design file.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
6.11 Import Unigraphics NX

The import of Unigraphics files is carried out via the ICEM DB format, i. e. internally the Unigraphics file first is converted to an ICEM DB file and
then to an ICEM Surf data base. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on
page 67.
For the ICEM DB based conversion the directive file ug_to_kddat.directive is used.
NOTE:
For using the Unigraphics interface you need a Unigraphics license! The Unigraphics translator can only be started from ICEM Surf if
some environment variables are set. For detailed information please refer to the file read_this_first_*.pdf, chapter Installation and
deinstallation, section Settings for the Unigraphics Translator.
For detailed information about the import of Unigraphics files please refer to the reference manual ICEM Unigraphics Direct Interface
(unigraphics.pdf).
112
IMPORT UNIGRAPHICS NX
6
The menu Import Unigraphics NX
In the columns from UG NX and to SURF you can select the entities to be imported from the Unigraphics file and determine how they shall be
Layer
Depending of the setting in the popup menu in the column to SURF, the layers from the Unigraphics file are converted as follows:
List (by no.)

(List (by number))
The layers are converted to lists with names composed of the prefix specified in the directive file ug_to_kddat.directive and the corre-
sponding layer number. All parts and molecules will have the default name Db.
Part (by no.)
(Part (by number))
Part/Mol. (by no.)
P./M.+List (by no.)
Sheet Body
If this option is switched off, nothing will be imported, i. e. neither sheet bodies joins nor the individual surfaces assigned to them.
Unigraphics Sheet Bodies are read into ICEM Surf as faces. The structure and naming conditions for the created parts and molecules can be
set in the popup menu in the column to SURF as follows:
Faces
With this option, the individual surfaces of a Sheet Body are imported into ICEM Surf as faces without topological information (see figure
11 on page 98).
The faces are assigned to a part and a molecule with the name Db. In case of re-exporting them to Unigraphics they will only be recon-
verted to Sheet Bodies if they are defined as individual molecule and in the menu Edit Unigraphics NX Structures is specified that this
molecule shall be exported as Body.
Mol. (by no.)
With this option, a Sheet Body is imported into ICEM Surf as face cluster with topological information (see figure 12 on page 98).
The faces are assigned to a molecule with a name composed of the prefix BODY and a consecutive number. In case of re-exporting the
faces to Unigraphics, they will be reconverted to Sheet Bodies.
Mol. (by name)
The faces are assigned to a molecule with the name of the Sheet Body. In case of re-exporting them to Unigraphics, they will be recon-
verted to Sheet Bodies as in the molecule is specified that these faces shall be exported as Sheet Bodies.
Objects
113
IMPORT UNIGRAPHICS
6
Planes
With this option Unigraphics axis systems can be imported and converted to ICEM Surf work planes. If in the data base already exist work
planes with identical names, you can specify via the popup menu in the column to SURF how name conflicts shall be resolved.
Rename
Replace
Skip
Smart Rename
Blanked
Entities blanked in the IGES files are also read in.
With the following options, you can determine which layers shall be imported:
Layers on
Only the layers within the range indicated in the text field are imported, e. g. 1-5. You can indicate one range only.
Layers off
Only the layers outside the range indicated in the text field are imported.
Current
geometry objects.
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
6.12 Import Unigraphics

The options for the import of Unigraphics files are also used in the Import IGES function and are described in the corresponding section (see
page 99.
NOTE:
The option Layer corresponds to the option Level for IGES files.
For detailed information about the import of Unigraphics files please refer to the reference manual ICEM Unigraphics Direct Interface
(unigraphics.pdf).
114
IMPORT STL
6
The menu Import Unigraphics
Keep Planes
In Catia and other CAD Systems two different types of planes are available. The Workspace is a local coordinate system and corresponds
to the work plane in ICEM Surf. In addition, these systems offer the design entity Plane, which is defined as surface with infinite expansion.
These plane-surfaces can also be trimmed.
With this option untrimmed plane-surfaces are converted in ICEM Surf to 2 x 2 Bezier patches having a size of 1 x 1 mm.
With this option the plane-surfaces described above are imported into ICEM Surf and converted to ICEM Surf patches or faces as follows:
Plane-Surfaces
Plane-surfaces are converted to 2 x 2 Bezier patches having a size of 1 x 1 mm.
Plane-Faces
Plane-faces are converted to 2 x 2 Faces. Internally, first are imported the trim curves as well as the plane-surfaces as 2 x 2 Bezier
patches having a size of 1 x 1 mm. Before the trim operation, the patches are scaled until the trim curves lie within the patch boundaries.
Mini Objects
From a Unigraphics file can be imported short segments.
Current
geometry objects.
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
6.13 Import STL
The menu Import STL
115
IMPORT STL
6
Facet Colour
Colours which can be saved in binary STL files in the 16 free bits for each facet are imported.
Three modes can be selected:
1. Skip
No colour information is read.
IMPORTANT
This option must be set if no colours are defined in the STL file. Otherwise, the colour black will be assigned to each facet.
2. RGB
The colour information is read as follows:
Red value: bits 0-4

Green value: bits 5-9
Blue value: bits 10-14
3. BGR
The colour information is saved in the bits in opposite order:
Blue value: bits 0-4

Green value: bits 5-9
Red value: bits 10-14
Bit with index 15 is ignored.
Change Facet Orient.

(Change Facet Orientation)
The facet normals are adjusted.
Current
geometry objects.
*.
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
116
IMPORT EDF
6
6.14 Import EDF
The menu Import EDF
Entities
Geometry
All geometry objects of the type activated in the check box Objects are read in.
Display Variants, Planes, Views, Texture Groups, Materials
For the import can be selected Display Variants, Planes, Views, Texture Groups, and Materials.
NOTE CONCERNING THE IMPORT OF MATERIALS:
If in the data base an identical material already exists, the material of the EDF file will be ignored.
If in the data base a material with equal name but not identical exists, the material of the EDF file will be renamed and added
to the list of materials.
If materials are renamed when being imported, the old name will be used as prefix to which successive numbers will be added.
Their assignment to the imported geometry objects will be preserved.
Lists
The lists of the EDF file are imported including their geometry object assignments. In addition, all geometry objects of the EDF file are
added to the current list.
If the option is switched off, all geometry objects are only added to the current list and the List DB.
The colour and material import with the DisV und Materials options can be controlled with the following options:
Check button
submenu).


Current Colour
Keep individual
(Keep individual)
All
For the material import control, an analog popup menu is available:
117
IMPORT EDF
6
Doubles
If name conflicts due to identically named entities in the EDF file and in the current data base occur when reading in geometry, you can spec-
ify how these name conflicts shall be resolved.
Rename
All entities are imported and entities with identical names renamed. In case of geometry objects will be renamed the part to which the
molecules with identical names are assigned.
Replace
All entities are imported and entities with identical names in the data base will be replaced. Geometry objects are replaced if they belong
to the current list.
Skip
Entities with identical names are not imported.
Only used Materials

This option is only available for the import of Materials.
The behaviour of this option depends on the imported geometry or the settings on the Geometry, respectively:
Import of surface elements such as Scans, Patches, and Faces active:

Import of curve elements, i. e. none of the surface element options is active:
No materials are imported.
No Import of geometry (option Geometry Off:
All materials used by the surface elements of the imported ICEM DB are imported.
Objects
File Selection
Protocol
error messages.
118
ETHE MENU FILE EXPORT
7
7 The menu File Export
Using the function File Export ICEM Surf data can be exported to different file types. During the export the window Status Export with a status
bar and a Cancel button appears.
NOTE:
Please pay attention to the Naming conventions for CAD data exchange on page 70.
For the export of files has to be selected first the file type in the pull down menu File Export. Afterwards, the corresponding menu will be acti-
vated.
File name and path can be specified directly in the corresponding export menu. The setting will be preserved until another file name and/or path
is specified.
You will find a detailed description of the export functions in the following sections.
7.1 General export options

The following options are available in most of the export functions:
File
File name and path can be entered in the text field or set via the file browser.
Selection of the objects to be exported

Almost all export menus contain this radio box with options to specify the objects to be exported:
List DB
All objects in the ICEM Surf data base will be exported.
Current List
All objects in the current list will be exported.
Select
Only selected objects will be exported. The object selection will be activated when clicking onto the OK button or the icon Edit Structures
(export functions ICEM DB, Catia V4, and Catia V5).
Background Objects
This option is only available, if Current List is active.
The Background Objects (see page 157) belonging to the list will also be exported.
Protocol
During the export operation a protocol file with statistic data and eventual error messages is created and can be displayed in a text editor.
7.2 Export ICEM DB

With this function you can convert ICEM Surf data bases to data bases in ICEM DB format. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format
please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on page 67.
The menu Export ICEM DB includes the tabs Entities, Geometry, and Options. The options File, List DB, Current List, Select, Background
Objects, and Protocol available in all tabs are described in section General Export Options on page 119.
The following special options are available on all tabs:
Edit Structures
Activates the menu Edit ICEM DB Structures.
Preview: Topology
For the curves and surfaces to be converted to ICEM DB curve composites and shells, a topology diagnosis can be computed and displayed.
For detailed information about the structure editor and the topology diagnosis please refer to section 9.3 Objects Structure Editor on page 159.
The list function include in this menu the following additional option:
Empty Lists
Also empty lists are exported.
119
EXPORT ICEM DB ENTITIES
7
7.2.1 Export ICEM DB Entities
Geometry
All geometry objects of the type activated in the Geometry tab are exported.
Text
The texts defined in the Display Text function are exported.
Diagnosis
The Diagnoses defined in the data base (see chapter 10 The menu Diagnoses on page 169) are exported.
DisV
(Display Variants)
All user-defined display variants from the list Variant of the Display Display function are exported.
If this option is deactivated, colour assignments are exported in case of exporting to ICEM DB files version 4.12 (setting 4.12 in the radio box
Version on the Options tab).
Planes
All user-defined display variants from the list Planes of the Display Planes function are exported.
Views
All user-defined views from the list Views of the Display View/Navigation function are exported.
Materials
Materials (including the standard materials) from the Material table of the Display Material function are exported.
Apart from the material definitions, the assignments to the geometry will also be exported. If no individual material has been assigned to
patches, faces, or scans, the corresponding standard material will be assigned.
In the material names the usage of special characters is allowed.
Following options can also be selected for the material export:
As read only
All materials is assigned this status when being exported. If this option is switched off, the current status of the materials remains
unchanged.
Only used Materials
The behaviour of this option depends on the exported geometry or the settings on the Geometry, respectively:
Export of surface elements such as Scans, Patches, and Faces active:
Export of curve elements, i. e. none of the surface element options is active:
No materials are exported.
No export of geometry (option Geometry Off:
All materials used by the surface elements of the exported ICEM DB are exported.
120
EXPORT ICEM DB GEOMETRY
7
Texture Groups
The names of the image files used for textures as well as the texture groups defined with the option Group + of the Display Texture Pro-
jection function are exported.
Mirror Groups
The settings defined in the Display Mirror function are exported.
Environment
The names and image information of the environment defined in the Display Environment function will be exported.
File name and image information of a special reflection image are also exported with this option.
Background Image
The background image sets defined in the Display Background Image function are exported.
File names and image information of all background image sets will be exported. Background images only stored in the default set SET are
assigned to the current viewport in the ICEM DB.
Turn Table
The settings defined in the Display Turn Table function are exported.
Selection Set
Saved selection sets (see Set on page 227 are exported.
HDR Lights
HDR Lights saved with the Display Light HDR function are exported.
Transformation
Transformation operations saved with the Move functions are exported.
Animation
Animations saved with the Display Animation function are exported.
Clipping Plane
Clipping planes saved with the Display Clipping Plane function are exported.
7.2.2 Export ICEM DB Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following ICEM DB object types:
ICEM Surf Object Type ICEM DB Object Type
Points Point
121
EXPORT ICEM DB OPTIONS
7
ICEM Surf Object Type ICEM DB Object Type
Raw Data Raw Data
Curves Curve
Scans Scan
Patches Surface
Faces Face
Date, time, and owner of parts, molecules, and atoms are also written into the ICEM DB file.
7.2.3 Export ICEM DB Options
Format: Binary, ASCII

Only available for ICEM DB files version 4.11.
ICEM data bases can be saved in binary as well as in ASCII format. Files saved in binary format are smaller. Writing and reading processes
run faster, because no conversion is necessary to transfer data from the computer-internal Binary format to ASCII format.
Version
In this radio box you can select the ICEM Surf version to which the saved data base shall be compatible. Default setting is 4.12. After using
the 4.11 option, 4.12 is automatically reactivated.
The radio box Format: Binary/ASCII is only available for the option 4.11. ICEM DB 4.12 files can only be saved in Binary format.
Preview
When exporting an ICEM DB, a TIFF image is created as preview for the file browser.
Layer
Apart from lists, layers are used in the ICEM DB for the management of geometry objects. With this option you can specify how geometry
objects shall be integrated into the layer structure of the ICEM DB.
NOTE:
As an ICEM DB may include 1023 layers at maximum, the layers created during the export must not exceed this number.
The Prefix text field is case-sensitive.
Default Layer
All geometry objects are assigned to a layer with the number specified in Default No.
by List Name
For each list except the List DB a layer with the list name is created.
If a geometry object belongs to several lists, it will be assigned to the layer created from the first list containing the object.
Objects which only belong to the List DB are assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default No.
122
EXPORT LEGACY FORMATS
7
by List Number
This option can be used if the ICEM Surf data base contains lists with names composed of the specified Prefix and a consecutive number
as suffix. For each list, a layer with the suffix number of the corresponding list will be created.
Objects which only belong to the List DB or to lists with other names, are assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default
No.
by Part Name
For each part, a layer with the part name is created.
by Part Number
If the ICEM Surf data base contains parts with names composed of the specified Prefix and a consecutive number as suffix, for each part
a layer with the suffix number of the corresponding part will be created.
Parts with other names will be assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default No.
by Part/Mol. Name
(by Part/Molecule Name)
For each part and molecule name, a layer with a name composed of the part and molecule name will be created.
by Part/Mol. Nr.
(by Part/Molecule Number)
If the ICEM Surf data base contains parts and molecules with names composed of the specified Prefix and a consecutive number as suf-
fix, for each part and molecule name a layer with a consecutive number and the corresponding molecule name will be created.
Parts and molecules with other names will be assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default No.
by Entity Type
A layer will be created for each object type (Raw Data, Scans, Curves, Surfaces).
Export Image Information

If this option is switched on, all image information, i. e. all texture, environment, and background images referenced in the ICEM Surf DB are
copied into a directory, whose name is derived from the name of the ICEM DB target file. Example: If the ICEM DB name is abc.icem, in the
same directory of the file the following subdirectories are created:
abc_images/texture for texture files,
abc_images/environment for environment images, and
abc_images/background for background images.
When importing the ICEM DB, the corresponding directories are automatically added to the texture path list in the function Windows Tex-
ture Paths.
3D Curves
Export Curve Composites, Export Shells

Curves and surfaces with topologically contiguous curve segments and patches can be converted to curve composites and shells. With the
icon you can activate the function Objects Structure Editor to define the properties of the shells and curve composites.
NOTE:
For the definition of a shell, partially connected patch or face edges are allowed. As a shell can only contain faces, the patches of a
surface exported as a shell are automatically trimmed at their own edges. In case of partially connected edges it is possible that
faces with more than four trim curves are created (see figure below). These faces cannot be automatically re-converted to patches
when re-exporting the surface using the option Faces -> Patches (see page 97) in the Geometry tab of the function Import
ICEM DB, as patches always must have exactly four edges.
created face edges at

a partially connected
patch edge
7.3 Export Legacy formats
7.3.1 Export DB
Corresponds to the function File Save.
7.3.2 Export EDF

ICEM Surf has its own external data interface. a complete ICEM Surf data base or part of it can be written to an EDF file. the EDF format can be
used for the following purposes:
123
EXPORT EDF
7
data compression
the EDF format only saves the geometrical information (no topology information and diagnosis data). therefore, you can use the EDF format
to compress data. however, some data (e. g diagnosis data) will go lost.
as an alternative, data can be compressed using the program icutility or the function File Exit Save as Kddat with Compress. the out-
put format will be again a data base file.
icutility runs as a batch program and can be used (e. g. over night) to compress and clean up (see below) data records. for a detailed
description please refer to the section icutility in the manual ICEM Surf, ICEM Plotserver and FLEXlm.
Clean up
In all cases, the existing data base will be cleaned up, i. e., inconsistencies will be eliminated as far as possible. Information no longer needed
will not be written to the EDF or DB file.
Merging data bases

As an EDF file can be read into an existing data base, data bases can be merged.
The menu Export EDF includes the tabs Entities, Geometry, and Format. The options File, List DB, Current List, Select, Background
Objects, and Protocol available in all tabs are described in section General Export Options on page 119.
7.3.2.1 Export EDF Entities
Geometry
All geometry objects of the type activated in the tab Export EDF Geometry are exported.
DisV (Display Variants), Planes, Views, Materials, Texture Groups

For the export can be selected Display Variants, Planes, Views, Materials, and Texture Groups.
NOTE CONCERNING THE EXPORT OF MATERIALS:

Apart from the material definitions will also be exported the assignments to the geometry. If to patches, faces, or scans no indi-
vidual material has been assigned, the corresponding standard material will be assigned.
The five standard materials are also exported.
The names of materials assigned to scans will also be exported.
In the material names the usage of special characters is allowed.
7.3.2.2 Export EDF Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following EDF object types:
124
EXPORT VIEWER
7
ICEM Surf Object Type EDF Object Type
Points Point
Raw Data Raw Data
Curves Curve
Scans Scan
Patches Surface
Faces Face
7.3.2.3 Export EDF Format
EDF 3.2.0
The EDF file created can be read in ICEM Surf 3.2 and elder versions.
EDF 3.3.0-4.5.1
The EDF file created can be read in ICEM Surf 3.3 until 4.5.1.
EDF 4.6.0
The EDF file created can be read in ICEM Surf 4.6.0.
Preview
When writing the EDF file a TIFF image of the current view is created, which will be displayed in the file browser as Preview of the EDF file.
7.3.3 Export Viewer

With this function you can export data bases for the ICEM Viewer, a tool used for viewing ICEM Surf data bases. It is provided together with ICEM
Surf and uses the file format *.vf (Viewer File).
NOTE:
For this export function you need the license SURFVIEW for the module Surf Viewer (see 12.5 Windows Licenses on page 338). The
ICEM Viewer is freeware.
For the export of data bases to Viewer files the following information is important:
Only the graphical display is exported, but not geometry. The export works according to the Wysiwyg method, i. e. the data base is exported
in the current display (e. g. with current light settings, materials, textures, environments, etc.).
Referenced image files (e. g. when using the functions Environment or Textures), the image files will be located in the same directory as the
Viewer file after the export.
To export the diagnoses Safety Analysis and Flat Region, the menus must remain activated during the export, as the diagnoses are deleted
after terminating the functions.
The size of the Viewer file created depends on the current tessellation. A fine tessellation creates larger files, which will increase the duration
of the export operation as well as the loading time of the Viewer file in the ICEM Viewer. Therefore, it is recommended to check, whether the
quality desired can also be obtained with a more coarse tessellation (see also section 11.21 Display Tessellation on page 319).
125
EXPORT 3DXML
7
The menu Export Viewer
File
See General Export Options, page 119.
Texture
Export of the textures defined in the function Display Texture Projection (see page 279).
Environment
Export of the 3D environment defined in the function Display Environment (see page 286), including the reflection image (see Special
Reflection Image, page 289).
7.4 Export 3DXML

3DXML (EXtensible Markup Language) is a universal, lightweight XML based format enabling you to capture and share live, accurate 3D data
quickly and easily.
3DXML compresses highly complex data, provides rapid file transmission and shorter load times while maintaining the exact geometry of the files
exchanged.
Unlike other formats, 3DXML is fully based on standard XML. Therefore, any software program will be able to read, write, and enrich 3DXML con-
tents using standard tools.
IMPORTANT !
The export in 3DXML files is done via ImageMagick which is not part of the ICEM Surf installation but has to be installed manually (see
section 6.1.3 Installation of ImageMagick for Inventor and VRML Export on page 100).
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following 3DXML object types:
ICEM Surf Object Type 3DXML Object Type
Points Points
Lines PSet
Raw Data PSet
Curves PSet
Scans TriangleStrip
Patches TriangleStrip
Faces TriangleStrip
126
EXPORT CATIA V4
7
Structure to be exported
The options in this popup menu determine up to which level the structure information of the geometry shall be exported. In the 3D XML Player
the specified structure depth is displayed in the tree. According to the setting, you can, for example, select in the 3D XML Player individual
parts or molecules in order to blank and unblank them or to reframe them on screen size.
Structure Depth DB
The data base is exported without structure information and the tree in the 3D XML Player has only one level.
Structure Depth Part
The Part structure is read into the 3DXML file. The tree in the 3D XML Player includes two levels, in the second level are displayed the
individual parts of the geometry.
Strct. Depth Molecule
(Structure Depth Molecule)
The Molecule structure is also read into the 3DXML file. The tree in the 3D XML Player includes three levels, in the third level are addition-
ally displayed the molecules of the geometry.
7.5 Export Catia V4

The export of Catia V4 files is carried out via the ICEM DB format, i. e. internally the ICEM Surf data base first is converted to an ICEM DB file and
then to a Catia V4 file. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on page 67.
For the ICEM DB-based conversion the directive file kddat_to_catiav4.directive is used.
The following options are available on all tabs:
File, List DB, Current List, Select, Background Objects, Protocol

See General export options on page 119.
Edit Structures
Activates the menu Edit Catia V4 Structures.
Preview: Topology
For the curves and surfaces to be converted to Catia V4 skins, a topology diagnosis can be computed and displayed.
For detailed information about the structure editor and the topology diagnosis please refer to sections 7.5.4 Edit Catia V4 Structures on
page 130, and 9.3 Objects Structure Editor on page 159.
7.5.1 Export Catia V4 Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following Catia object types:
127
EXPORT CATIA V4 CONVERSION
7
ICEM Surf Object Type Catia V4 Object Type
Points Point
Raw Data NURBS

Lines
CST
Curves Curve / Arc
Patches Surface
Face
Faces Face
7.5.2 Export Catia V4 Conversion
Faces
For the display of a face limitation, the target systems in contrast to ICEM Surf also store the 3D trim curve in addition to the 2D curve in
the face data record. The 2D curves are always translated without being changed. The 3D curves are translated, if one of the following
options is active:
3D Curves
Attached 3D trim curves of faces will always be translated without being changed.
Curves / Patches
NURBS -> NURBS
If this option is switched on, all rational B-splines (surfaces and curves) not being part of a face are transferred to Catia as rational enti-
ties. Only NURBS being part of a face are converted to normal B-splines with the tolerance specified by Rational Conv.Tol.. If Rational
Conv.Tol. is switched off, an order 9 or 9 x 9 will always be created.
Rational Conv.Tol., Tolerance
(Rational Conversion Tolerance)
For the export to Catia NURBS elements have to be converted to B-splines, as in Catia no rational B-splines are used. With this option the
conversion tolerance is specified.
Depending on the specified exactness the rational curves/surfaces will be replaced by non-rational curves up to the order 9 (in case of
surfaces 9 x 9).
Patches/Faces
2 x 2 > Plane
2 x 2 Bezier patches are converted to Catia planes (Plane-Surfaces).
128
EXPORT CATIA V4 OPTIONS
7
7.5.3 Export Catia V4 Options
Model Space
The Catia Model Space can be specified. This parameter is used in Catia for the internal tolerance model.
Start Part
Using this button you may select a Catia start part. A start part usually contains display modes, colours, fonts, a model space, etc.
If no start part has been selected, the model space has to be specified as minimum configuration.
Format: Catia Model/Catia Export

Selection of the Catia file format. Depending on the selected format, the Catia files will have the extension *.model or *.export.
Planes > AXS

All ICEM Surf Planes will be exported and converted to Catia axis systems.
Layer
With this option you can specify how geometry objects shall be integrated into the layer structure of the Catia V4 file.
NOTE:
The Prefix text field is case-sensitive.
In Catia V4, 254 layers (Layer no. 0-253) can be defined at maximum. If a larger number of layers would be produced with the
popup menu setting used, the insertion of the objects of the supernumerous layers will be restarted with layer no. 0.
Default Layer
All geometry objects are assigned to a layer with the number specified in Default No.
by List Name
For each list except the List DB a layer with the list name is created.
If a geometry object belongs to several lists, it will be assigned to the layer created from the first list containing the object.
Objects which only belong to the List DB are assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default No.
by List Number
(by List Number)
This option can be used if the ICEM Surf data base contains lists with names composed of the specified Prefix and a consecutive number
as suffix. For each list, a layer with the suffix number of the corresponding list will be created.
Objects which only belong to the List DB or to lists with other names, are assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default
No.
by Part Name
For each part, a layer with the part name is created.
by Part Number
(by Part Number)
If the ICEM Surf data base contains parts with names composed of the specified Prefix and a consecutive number as suffix, for each part
a layer with the suffix number of the corresponding part will be created.
Parts with other names will be assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default No.
by Part/Mol. Name
(by Part/Molecule Name)
For each part and molecule name, a layer with a name composed of the part and molecule name will be created.
by Part/Mol. Nr.
(by Part/Molecule Number)
If the ICEM Surf data base contains parts and molecules with names composed of the specified Prefix and a consecutive number as suf-
fix, for each part and molecule name a layer with a consecutive number and the corresponding molecule name will be created.
129
EDIT CATIA V4 STRUCTURES
7
Parts and molecules with other names will be assigned to a default layer with the number specified in Default No.
by Entity Type
A layer will be created for each object type (Raw Data, Scans, Curves, Surfaces).
Export Skins
Surfaces with topologically contiguous patches can be converted to skins. With the icon you can activate the menu Edit Catia V4 Struc-
tures to define the properties of the skins.
7.5.4 Edit Catia V4 Structures
ICEM Surf Surfaces composed of topologically contiguous patches can be converted to skins. The topology conditions are defined by means of
sewing tolerances. The skins created from the individual surfaces can be named individually.
To enable the conversion of ICEM Surf Surfaces to skins having particular attributes, the menu Edit Catia V4 Structures allows to create and edit
the required structure data. For detailed instructions on how to use the structure editor, please refer to section 9.3.1 How to use the structure edi-
tor on page 159.
NOTE:
The Edit Catia V4 Structures menu can be activated only if relevant types of geometry objects are checked for the export, i. e. at least
one of the options Patches or Faces in the Geometry tab must be switched on.
Which of the selected objects are adopted in the table of the Edit Catia V4 Structures menu depends on how the options List DB,
Current List, and Select are set (see page 119).
The settings are not restricted to the function where they are being activated, they are also used in all the export functions allowing to
edit structures.
The menu Edit Catia V4 Structures basically corresponds to the menu Edit ICEM DB Structures of the function Objects Structure Editor (see
page 159), except for the following differences:
As only surfaces can be converted for the export to Catia V4, this menu does not include the object type filter (All/Curves/Surfaces).
The check button allowing to activate/inactivate the creation of structure data is called Skin in this menu.
With Tolerance can be specified a position tolerance. The number of points used to compute the tolerance is defined in the directive file
kddat_to_catiav4.directive.
In the topology diagnosis Preview: Topology conflicts can be displayed which especially may occur in the data exchange with Catia V4
(see section 7.6.3 Edit Catia V5 Structures on page 133
7.6 Export Catia V5

For the data exchange with Catia V5 / ICEM Shape Design (ISD) and ICEM Surf, two translators are available: the Theorem Translator and Catia
ISD Translator offering more data exchange possibilities.
IMPORTANT!
Both translators require a Catia V5 installation.
The Catia ISD Translator additionally requires the installation of the ICEM Shape Design workbench (in case of Catia V5 R19 AddIn or
AddIn Lite).
For using the Theorem Translator you need an additional license!
The export to Catia V5 files is carried out via the ICEM DB format, i. e. internally the ICEM Surf data base first is converted to an ICEM DB file and
then to a Catia V5 file. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on page 67.
For the ICEM DB based conversion the directive file kddat_to_catiav5.directive is used. Moreover, via the directive file pre- and postprocess-
ing executables can be activated for the data exchange. For detailed information about directive files, pre- and postprocessing as well as data
exchange with the utility icutility, please refer to chapter Interfaces the manual Software configuration.
For information about the installation of the translator, please refer to the file read_this_first_*.pdf, chapter Installation and deinstallation,
section Installation of the Catia V5 Translator.
For detailed information about the export of Catia V5 files using the Theorem Translator please refer to the reference manual ICEM Catia Direct
Interface (catia.pdf).
130
EXPORT CATIA V5 GEOMETRY
7

Edit Structures
Activates the menu Edit Catia V5 Structures.
Preview: Topology
For the curves and surfaces to be converted to Catia V5 curve and surface joins a topology diagnosis can be computed and displayed.
For detailed information about the structure editor and the topology diagnosis please refer to sections 7.6.3 Edit Catia V5 Structures on
7.6.1 Export Catia V5 Geometry
NOTE:
The available options in the popup menus Raw Data und Scans depend on the activated translator type (see Translator: Catia ISD / The-
orem).
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following Catia object types:
ICEM Surf object type Catia V5 object type
Theorem Translator Catia ISD Translator
Points Point Point
Lines
Raw Data NURBS Wire of Lines

Wire of Lines Point Clouds
Curves Curve / Arc Curve / Arc
Scans Triangle Mesh

Point Clouds
Patches Surface Surface

Face Face
Faces Face Face
2 x 2 > Plane
Only available for Theorem Translator.
2 x 2 Bezier patches are converted to Catia planes (Plane-Surfaces).
131
EXPORT CATIA V5 OPTIONS
7
7.6.2 Export Catia V5 Options
Translator: Catia ISD / Theorem

Via this popup menu you can choose the translator type.
The Catia ISD Translator allows to export also Scans, Selection Sets, Lists, Light Sources, and Colours.
The available options on the Geometry and Options tab depend on the activated translator.
The following ICEM Surf Entities can be selected for the export and converted to the following Catia Entities:
ICEM Surf element Catia V5 element
Theorem Translator Catia ISD Translator
Planes AXS (Axis System) Planes

AXS (Axis System)
3D Curves Face boundaries
Curve Join Join Curve Join

Wire)
Curves
Surface Join Join Surface Join

Shell)
Surfaces
Selection Set Selection Set
List Display Set
Light ISD Light Sources
Materials Materials
Text Text with Leader
Colour Individual colours will be mapped to

the graphics colour property of the
corresponding object. For this, the
current colour table from ICEM Surf
will be used (see section 11.12 Dis-
play Colours on page 283).
NOTE:
Curve Join, Surface Join
With the icon you can activate the menu Edit Catia V5 Structures to define the properties of the curve and surface joins.
Materials
The current temporary .surf directory, e. g. C:\Users\<user name\AppData\Local\Temp\.surf_<user name>\<file
name>_images\texture\*.tif is used as texture path. Therefore, the texture images must be saved before terminating the session.
132
EDIT CATIA V5 STRUCTURES
7
The mapping method Standard and the method Fixed internally used for scans are not supported in Catia.
The display of the ICEM Surf mapping methods Cylindrical, Spherical, and Cubic is different in Catia. Therefore, it is recommended
to use for the export the mapping methods Cylindrical (Catia), Spherical(Catia), Cubic (Catia).
Text
In the Catia ICEM Shape Design workbench, texts cannot be attached to point clouds.
Moreover, a text cannot be attached to two different objects. In this case, the text will be exported twice.
7.6.3 Edit Catia V5 Structures
ICEM Surf Curves and Surfaces composed of topologically contiguous curve segments and patches can be converted to Catia V5 curve joins and
surface joins. The topology conditions are defined by means of sewing tolerances. The curve and surface joins created from the individual curves
and surfaces can be named individually.
To enable the conversion of ICEM Surf Curves and Surfaces to Catia V5 curve and surface joins having particular attributes, the menu Edit Catia
V5 Structures allows to create and edit the required structure data. For detailed instructions on how to use the structure editor, please refer to
section 9.3.1 How to use the structure editor on page 159.
NOTE:
The Edit Catia V5 Structures menu can be activated only if relevant types of geometry objects are checked for the export, i. e. at least
one of the options Curves, Patches or Faces in the Geometry tab must be switched on.
Which of the selected objects are adopted in the table of the Edit Catia V5 Structures menu depends on how the options List DB, Cur-
rent List, and Select are set (see page 119).
The settings are not restricted to the function where they are being activated, they are also used in all export functions allowing to edit
structures.
The menu Edit Catia V5 Structures basically corresponds to the menu Edit ICEM DB Structures of the function Objects Structure Editor (see
page 159), except for the following differences:
The check button allowing to activate/inactivate the creation of structure data is called Join for surfaces as well as for curves. The object types
can only be distinguished by the icons for Curve Join and for Surface Join.
The number of points used to compute the position tolerance is defined in the directive file kddat_to_catiav5.directive.
A tessellation tolerance cannot be specified.
In the topology diagnosis Preview: Topology conflicts can be displayed which especially may occur in the data exchange with Catia V5:
Asterisk
End points of the topologically contiguous curve regions.
Red marking
Points and edges at which the topological conditions necessary for the export are not met.
The labels of objects which for a publication must be assigned to a molecule with another name, are displayed in red.
Example: In the figure below the preview indicates two conflicts:
Conflict 1:
A surface will not be read as Surface Join in Catia V5, if two adjacent patches have only one point of contact.
Conflict 2:
A surface will not be read as Surface Join in Catia V5, if more than two patches have a common edge or contact point, as in this case the
next adjacent patch cannot be defined unambiguously.
133
EXPORT UNIGRAPHICS NX
7
Figure 13 Preview of a Catia V5 Surface Join
7.7 Export Unigraphics NX

The export of Unigraphics files is carried out via the ICEM DB format, i. e. internally the ICEM Surf data base first is converted to an ICEM DB file
and then to a Unigraphics file. For detailed information about the ICEM DB format please refer to section 5.1.2 ICEM data base (ICEM DB) on
page 67.
For the ICEM DB-based conversion the directive file kddat_to_ug.directive is used.
NOTE:
For detailed information about the export of Unigraphics files please refer to the reference manual ICEM Unigraphics Direct Interface
(unigraphics.pdf).

Edit structures
Activates the menu Edit Unigraphics NX Structures (see section 7.7.4 Edit Unigraphics NX Structures on page 136).
Preview: Topology
For the surfaces to be converted to Unigraphics Sheet Bodies, a topology diagnosis can be computed and displayed.
For detailed information about the structure editor and the topology diagnosis please refer to sections 7.7.4 Edit Unigraphics NX Structures on
7.7.1 Export Unigraphics NX Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following Unigraphics object types:
134
EXPORT UNIGRAPHICS NX CONVERSION
7
ICEM Surf Object Type Unigraphics Object Type
Points Point
Raw Data Lines
Curves B-Spline / Arc
Patches B-Spline
Faces Sheet Body
7.7.2 Export Unigraphics NX Conversion
Faces 3D Curves
Patches/Faces
2 x 2 -> Plane
2 x 2 Bezier patches are converted to Unigraphics planes.
7.7.3 Export Unigraphics NX Options
Planes > CSYS

All ICEM Surf Planes will be exported and converted to Unigraphics axis systems.
Layer
See option Layer on page 129.
Export Sheet Bodies
Surfaces with topologically contiguous patches can be converted to sheet bodies. With the icon you can activate the menu Edit Unigraph-
ics NX Structures to define the properties of the sheet bodies.
135
EDIT UNIGRAPHICS NX STRUCTURES
7
7.7.4 Edit Unigraphics NX Structures
ICEM Surf Surfaces composed of topologically contiguous patches can be converted to sheet bodies. The topology conditions are defined by
means of sewing tolerances. The sheet bodies created from the individual surfaces can be named individually.
To enable the conversion of ICEM Surf Surfaces to sheet bodies having particular attributes, the menu Edit Unigraphics Structures allows to cre-
ate and edit the required structure data. For detailed instructions on how to use the structure editor, please refer to section 9.3.1 How to use the
structure editor on page 159.
NOTE:
The Edit Unigraphics NX Structures menu can be activated only if relevant types of geometry objects are checked for the export, i. e.
at least one of the options Patches or Faces in the Geometry tab must be switched on.
Which of the selected objects are adopted in the table of the Edit Unigraphics NX Structures menu depends on how the options List
DB, Current List, and Select are set (see page 119).
The settings are not restricted to the function where they are being activated, they are also used in all the export functions allowing to
edit structures.
The menu Edit Unigraphics NX Structures basically corresponds to the menu Edit ICEM DB Structures of the function Objects Structure Edi-
tor (see page 159), except for the following differences:
As only surfaces can be converted for the export to Unigraphics, this menu does not include the object type filter (All/Curves/Surfaces).
The check button allowing to activate/inactivate the creation of structure data is called Body in this menu.
With Tolerance can be specified a position tolerance. The number of points used to compute the tolerance is defined in the directive file
to_ug.directive.
In the topology diagnosis Preview: Topology conflicts can be displayed which especially may occur in the data exchange with Unigraph-
ics (see section 7.6.3 Edit Catia V5 Structures on page 133
7.8 Export Unigraphics

The options File, List DB, Current List, Select, Background Objects, and Protocol are described in section General Export Options on
page 119.
NOTE:
You will find the conversion tables for the data exchange between ICEM Surf and Unigraphics in section 5.1.5.5 Unigraphics <> ICEM
Surf DB on page 75.
For detailed information about the export of Unigraphics files please refer to the reference manual ICEM Unigraphics Direct Interface
(unigraphics.pdf).
136
EXPORT UNIGRAPHICS GEOMETRY
7
7.8.1 Export Unigraphics Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following Unigraphics object types:
ICEM Surf Object Type Unigraphics Object Type
Points Point
Raw Data Lines
Patches B-Spline
Faces Sheet Body
7.8.2 Export Unigraphics Conversion
Faces
In contrast to ICEM Surf, for the display of the face limitation, in the target systems is stored the 3D trim curve in addition to the 2D curve in
the face data record. The 2D curves are always translated without being changed. The 3D curves are translated, if one of the following
options is active:
Refit 3D, Tolerance
(Refit 3D Trim Curves)
If the deviation between 3D and 2D curve exceeds the icem_tol Tolerance set, the 3D curve will be reapproximated.
3D Curves
Attached 3D trim curves of faces will always be translated without being changed.
7.9 Export IGES

page 119.
137
EXPORT IGES GEOMETRY
7
7.9.1 Export IGES Geometry
You may select which of the geometry object types available for the export shall be written. You will find the conversion tables for the data
exchange between ICEM Surf and IGES in section 5.1.5.3 IGES <> ICEM Surf DB on page 73.
7.9.2 Export IGES Options
Output:
Single
The data will be written into a single file.
Multiple
The data will be written to several files. For each ICEM Surf part a separate file will be created.
Name Prefix
This option is only available, if Multiple is active.
With the name prefix, the naming of the exported files is defined:
On
A new file name can be specified which is used as prefix of the ICEM Surf part name: <file name>.<part name>.
Off
The files will get the names of the corresponding ICEM Surf parts without a name prefix.

Off
For the conversion from ICEM Surf to IGES a standard directive file will be used. You will find the directive file
export_standard_directive_iges in the directory \<installation directory\win_b64\reffiles.
On
For the conversion, a user-defined directive file can be selected. File name and path can be directly entered into the text field or selected
via the file browser.
NOTE:
Please refer to the reference manual ICEM IGES Translator for further information about directives for IGES files (iges.pdf).
138
EXPORT VDA/FS
7
7.10 Export VDA/FS

page 119.
7.10.1 Export VDA/FS Geometry
You may select which of the geometry object types available for the export shall be written. You will find the conversion tables for the data
exchange between ICEM Surf and VDA/FS in section 5.1.5.2 VDA/FS <> ICEM Surf DB on page 72.
7.10.2 Export VDA/FS Options
Output:
Single
Multiple
Name Prefix
This option is only available, if Multiple is active.
On
Off

Off
A standard directive file will be used for the conversion from ICEM Surf to VDA/FS. You will find the directive file
export_standard_directive_vda in the directory \<installation directory\win_b64\reffiles.
139
EXPORT 3DPAINT
7
On
For the conversion, a user-defined directive file can be selected. File name and path can be directly entered into the text field or selected
via the file browser.
NOTE:
Please refer to the reference manual ICEM TVDA Translator for further information about directives for VDA/FS files (vdafs.pdf).
Header
You may activate an editor with the directive file. In the front area of this file a header is prepared, where you can enter individual information.
The header information will be copied into the VDA/FS file.
7.11 Export 3DPAINT

page 119.
When exporting data to 3DPAINT an object file (*.obj) with the geometry data as well as a material file (*.dmt) with material settings are created.
IMPORTANT!
The materials are exported with the current tessellation setting (see function 11.21 Display Tessellation on page 319).
Export 3DPAINT Geometry
Geometry objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following 3DPAINT object types:
ICEM Surf Object Type 3DPAINT Object Type
Scans FaceSet
Patches FaceSet
Faces FaceSet
Texture Projection
The menu Display Texture Projection is activated (see section .11.11 Display Texture Projection on page 279).
The texture coordinates for an object will be exported to 3DPAINT, if
to the object is assigned another projection method than Standard with default values, or
the material, to which the object is assigned, has an active texture or bump map.
7.12 Export ASCII Parts

page 119.
140
EXPORT ASCII PARTS GEOMETRY
7
7.12.1 Export ASCII Parts Geometry
You may select which of the geometry object types available for the export shall be written. Behind the arrows is displayed in which object types
the entities will be converted.
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted into the following ASCII Part object types:
ICEM Surf Object Type ASCII Part Object Type
Points Point
Raw Data Machining Curve
Patches B-Spline
Faces Face
NOTE:
You will find the conversion tables for the data exchange between ICEM Surf and ASCII Parts in section 5.1.5.1 ASCII Part <>
ICEM Surf DB on page 71.
7.12.2 Export ASCII Parts Options
Output:
Single
Multiple
141
EXPORT CDRS
7
Name Prefix
This option is only available, if Multipleis active.
On
Off
Format
ICEM_DDN 3.1
The ASCII Part file will be written in the format of ICEM DDN 3.1.
NOTE:
The maximum number of segments for B-spline curves and surfaces is 64. This means, that e. g. trimmed patches (faces) will
be ignored, if the underlying surface is a B-spline surface with more than 64 segments.
For further processing in ICEM DDN 3.1 the admissible number of entities is limited to 130,000.
ICEM_DDN 3.2
The ASCII Part file will be written in the format of ICEM DDN 3.2. B-spline curves and surfaces may have an unlimited number of seg-
ments.
NOTE:
For further processing in ICEM DDN 3.2 or 3.3 the admissible number of entities is limited to 262,143.
7.13 Export CDRS

With this function you may export rendering settings for reading them into the program CDRS. Depending on the settings the following files are
created:
Scene file *.dsn
Contains a list of the created files with the geometry and settings of the functions Material, Light, and Environment. From this file CDRS
obtains the information which data are saved in which file.
Example:
V1.000000
model_file "cdrss.igs"
light_file "cdrss.dlg"
material_file "cdrss.dmt"
room_file "cdrss.drm"
IGES file *.igs
contains the geometry in IGES format.
Material File *.dmt
Contains the settings of the function Display Material (see page 270)
Light File *.dlg
Contains the settings of the function Display Light (see page 300)
Room File *.drm
Contains the settings of the function Display Environment (see page 286)
TIFF Files*.tif
Contain the TIFF images activated for the environment block (see function Display Environment on page 286)
NOTE:
As in the functions Material, Light, and Environment only a subset of the possible settings in CDRS is available, CDRS default values are
used for missing settings.
142
EXPORT INVENTOR
7
Export CDRS
File
See General Export Options on page 119.
NOTE:
A protocol file will only be generated if IGES is switched on.
Scene
With the option, the Scene file is created.
This option can only be switched on, if at least one of the options IGES, Material, Light, and Room is active.
IGES
The geometry is exported in IGES format. For the export will be used the standard directive file (see option Directive: <path name of the
directive file> in the menu File Export IGES, page 138)
Material
The settings of the function Display Material are exported.
Light
The settings of the function Display Light are exported.
Room
The settings of the function Display Environment are exported.
TIFF
The images activated for the environment block are exported and the created *.tif files indicated in the file list.
This option can only be activated, if Room is switched on, as the links to the TIFF images are not included into the Scene file (*.dsn) but
into the Room file (*.drm) with the environment settings.
7.14 Export Inventor

This function creates a file with 3D graphic data in Open Inventor 2.1 ASCII Format, which is also supported by several VRML applications (Virtual
Reality Markup Language).
IMPORTANT !
The export in Inventor files is done via ImageMagick which is not part of the ICEM Surf installation but has to be installed manually (see
page 119.
143
EXPORT INVENTOR GEOMETRY
7
7.14.1 Export Inventor Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following Inventor object types:
ICEM Surf Object Type Inventor Object Type
Points PSet
Lines PSet
LineSet
NURBS Curve
Raw Data PSet

LineSet
NURBS Curve
Curves PSet
LineSet
NURBS Curve
Scans PSet
TriangleStrip
FaceSet
Patches PSet
TriangleStrip
FaceSet
NURBS Surface
Faces PSet
TriangleStrip
FaceSet
NURBS Surf/Profile
Information about the Inventor object types:
PSet
The objects are exported as point sets. From points are created single-element point sets.
NOTE:
Scans which should be exported as FaceSet or TriangleStrip, but do not contain any facets, will be exported as Point Sets.
Patches or faces which should be exported as FaceSet or TriangleStrip, but the faceting of which do not provide facets, will
also be exported as Point Sets.
In both cases a corresponding warning will be written into the Protocol.
LineSet
Lines, raw data, and curves are exported as polygon lines. From straight lines are created polygon lines with only two points (start and end
point).
NURBS Curve
From the lines, raw data, and curves are computed NURBS curves.
TriangleStrip
From scans, patches, and faces are computed triangle strips (for this see information on the scan type Compress, page 358).
FaceSet
Scans, patches and faces are exported as normal facet models. Triangle strips are only created during the import into Inventor.
144
EXPORT INVENTOR TEXTURE
7
NURBS Surface
Patches are exported in NURBS representation.
NURBS Surf/Profile
NURBS Surf/Profile
Faces are exported in NURBS representation and face edges as profile curves.
NOTE:
The export of geometry in NURBS representation needs high computing capacity.
7.14.2 Export Inventor Texture
File format
Specification of the file format for the texture. The formats JPEG, PNG, SGI RGB, and TIFF are available.
NOTE:
By default Inventor only supports SGI RGB. The ivview can also display JPEG, however, due to the missing alpha channel
the display may change. More recent Inventor libraries also support PNG and TIFF.
When exporting NURBS surfaces textures are only exported if they are projected with the mapping method Planar. In this
case will also be exported the plane used as well as the settings concerning size and position of the texture.
If textures projected with other mapping methods are exported, a warning will be written into the protocol file, as for the other
methods no equivalent exists in the standard Inventor format.
Directory name
Specification of the directory, in which the texture file shall be written. If not yet existing, a directory with the name specified for the Inventor file
to be exported will be created in the directory set by File.
7.14.3 Export Inventor NURBS
Limitation To Order 8
The order of NURBS surfaces will be limited to 8.
This option should be switched off, if the exported data shall be used in other applications which can process NURBS surfaces with higher
orders.
Close Loop Gaps

Gaps between 2D trim curves on faces will be closed.
This option should be switched off, if the exported data shall be used in other applications which can process faces with 2D trim curves not
completely closed.
145
EXPORT POSTSCRIPT
7
7.15 Export PostScript

With this function can be created a PostScript image of all views displayed on the screen.
Please note the following restrictions for the PostScript output:
One of the most important advantages of the PostScript format is the capability to save two-dimensional images independently from the reso-
lution.
In contrast to formats like TIFF it is not necessary to know the printer resolution. Unfortunately, the resolution independent format cannot be
used for all parts of the ICEM Surf geometry. For this reason, the output of the background image and all textures (environment block, reflec-
tion image) is suppressed.
Transparent surfaces are not supported.
Intersecting surfaces are not correctly displayed, as PostScript does not support a Z buffer.
Hidden surfaces are not suppressed before the output. This does not falsify the image, but causes an unnecessary large PostScript file.
Therefore, we recommend to unblank hidden parts of the geometry before the PostScript output, e. g. with the help of lists.
If, in certain cases, these restrictions are balanced by the advantages of the PostScript format, we recommend to use the TIFF export function
instead.
Export PostScript
File
Format: User-defined, DIN A4,

Setting of the image size. You may choose different american or german standard formats or a user-defined size. In the text fields Width and
Height the measures are indicated corresponding to the specified unit.
Width, Height in Pixel, cm or Inch

The current image size is indicated in pixel, cm, or inch. If you change the unit, only the corresponding values are recalculated. The format
setting will not be changed.
For a user-defined image size you can specify individual values. The popup menu Format switches automatically to User-Defined.
PostScript, EPS
You may choose between PostScript or EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) format. The difference between these two formats is that in EPS files
the text and/or image information has a form which allows its integration into a PostScript document as a unit. Moreover, many text processing
and graphic software offer the possibility to include EPS image files.
Greyscale
The output image will be in greyscale.
Rotate by 90
The image is rotated by 90 (counter clockwise).
As in contrast to a paper sheet the graphic window has landscape format, this option allows a better usage of the place on portrait format
paper sheets.
Shading Quality: Off, Poor, Average, Good, Optimal

Shaded PostScript images can be exported with different shading quality. For the shading the surfaces are triangulated, i. e. divided into fac-
ets. The size of these facets determines the image quality: the finer the tessellation, i. e. the smaller the facets, the higher the quality.
7.16 Export Raw Data

This function creates an ASCII file which contains the point coordinates of the selected raw data contours and/or scans.
Apart from the export of the plain point coordinates you can create groups or structure blocks according to their membership of raw data seg-
ments or scan lines. The first line of such a structure block may contain structure information such as the name of the following raw data segment
or the number of points of the following scan line. After this structure information the coordinate lines follow.
146
EXPORT RAW DATA
7
The options File, List DB, Current List, Select, and Background Objects are described in section General Export Options on page 119.
Export Raw Data Geometry
Raw Data, Scans > Raw Data

You may select whether raw data and/or scans shall be written.
Format
Using this button you can activate the window for the specification of the output format (see next section).
The submenu Format
Export Format
All specifications are displayed and can be adopted in WYSIWYG.
Header
If this option is switched on, the text indicated in the text field next to Header will be written to the raw data or xyz file.
Contour Name
For every raw data contour or scan the name can be output.
Point Number
In addition to the point coordinates the point number can be output.
Separation-Row
A separating line between the points can be created to improve the readability.
Column Width
This option determines the column width (it reserves a gap for writing the coordinates). For each coordinate you may reserve between 1 and
20 characters. The table width will be adopted accordingly.
147
EXPORT SCAN
7
Decimal Places
The number of digits after the decimal point can be modified here.
Separation Row
If the option Separation-Row described above is switched on, the separating line will be created with the character indicated in this text field.
Separation Column
The character in this text field will be written after the x- and the y coordinates of the points to create a column separation.
7.17 Export Scan

page 119.
7.17.1 Export Scan Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to facets:
ICEM Surf Object Type Scan Object Type
Scans FaceSet
Patches FaceSet
Faces FaceSet
7.17.2 Export Scan Scan Type
Facet Type: Point Based, Edge Based

For each facet in the SCAN file you can save the identification numbers of the corner points or edges.
Point Type: Point, Point + Vector

In the SCAN file can be saved for each point the 3D coordinates only or additionally the direction of the surface normal vector.
148
EXPORT STL
7
7.18 Export STL

page 119.
7.18.1 Export STL Geometry
Geometry Objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to STL facets:
ICEM Surf Object Type STL Object Type
Scans FaceSet
Patches FaceSet
Faces FaceSet
IMPORTANT!
Scans, Patches, and Faces are exported with the current tessellation setting (see function 11.21 Display Tessellation on
page 319).
7.18.2 Export STL Options
Output
Single
Creates a single file as output with all objects to be exported.
Per Atom, Per Molecule, Per Part
Creates one file per structure type. In addition, the Name Prefix option is available.
149
EXPORT IMAGE
7
If Name Prefix is switched off, the file names a composed hierarchically of the names of the selected structure types: <Teil-
name>.<Moleklname>.<Atomname>.stl.
With Name Prefix, a prefix is additionally used which you can specify in the File text field: <Prfix>.<Teilname>.<Molekl-
name>.<Atomname>.stl.
IMPORTANT!
When exporting, no case-sensitivity is applied on the Part and Molecule names! Therefore, do not use multiple names being only
different in upper and lower case usage.
Format: Binary, ASCII

You may choose whether the files shall be written in Binary or ASCII format.
Change Facet Orientation

The facet normals are adjusted.
7.19 Export Image

With this function can be created an image file of the views displayed on the screen.
7.19.1 Export Image Image
File
Type
The images can be created in TIFF or JPEG format.
Format
Setting of the image size:
User-defined
Specification of a user-defined image size.
Graphics Window
The image size corresponds to the size of the graphic window, e. g. image and window have the same number of pixel.
DIN A4
You may choose different american or german standard formats in portrait or landscape mode.
In the text fields Width and Height the measures are indicated corresponding to the specified unit.
Width, Height in Pixel, cm or Inch

The current image size is indicated in pixel, cm, or inch. If you change the unit, only the corresponding values are recalculated. The format
setting will not be changed.
For a user-defined image size you can specify individual values. The popup menu Format switches automatically to User-Defined.
Resolution in Pixel/cm, Pixel/Inch

In popup menu Resolution the following pre-defined resolution settings for the image to be exported can be selected:
150
EXPORT IMAGE IMAGE
7
Presetting Resolution Resolution

(in Pixel/Inch) (in Pixel/cm)
User-defined
Low 100 39
Mean 300 118
High 600 236
The resolution for the current setting is displayed in the text field.
After changing the resolution the image size (Width and Height) is adapted, so that the image format remains unchanged with respect to the
resolution.
If in the text field a non-pre-defined resolution is indicated, the option User-defined will automatically be activated in the popup menu.
If no presetting has been used previously, the option User-defined will be used by default with the last known resolution value.
The selected presetting for the resolution is saved in the preference file local_defaults.txt.
The measuring unit pixel/inch corresponds to the indication in DPI (= Dots Per Inch) used for printers.
The default setting is Pixel/Inch.
Segments
In the text fields x and y can be defined the number of segments in horizontal and vertical direction. For each segment will be generated a file.
The segment numbers are added to the file names (see figure 14).
NOTE:
The number of segments in each direction is limited to 10.
The individual segments cannot exceed a width and height of 100 000 pixel.
Figure 14 Output of a segmented image
y image_1_2.tif image_2_2.tif image_3_2.tif
image_1_1.tif image_2_1.tif image_3_1.tif
Constant Ratio
If this option is switched on, the proportions of the image will be preserved. If, e. g. the width is modified, the value of the height will be
adapted in a way that the ratio width/height remains constant.
Compression
The Image file can be saved compressed.
Quality
This option is only available for JPEG images. For the compression can be specified a quality value.
File List
In case of an output of a segmented image the names of the files which will be generated are indicated in this list.
151
EXPORT IMAGE OPTIONS
7
7.19.2 Export Image Options
Image
The following options specify image properties:
Greyscale
The created Image file will be in greyscale, i. e. it will not contain coloured image points. This will considerably reduce the file size. More-
over, the background colour is set to white. These TIFF files are especially suitable for the output on black/white printers.
Transp. Background
(Transparent Background)
Only available for the format TIFF.
When creating TIFF images, the background colour set in the menu Display Colours will be replaced by an alpha canal. The corre-
sponding areas will be transparent in the image.
Scale
Off
The created image will only include the screen detail within the dimensions specified in Format.
image detail with created image

default dimensions 500 x 400
152
EXPORT VRML
7
On
The complete screen content will be scaled to fit into the specified dimensions.
Anti-Alias
With this option the image is internally computed with a higher resolution. Groups of 9 of the computed image points are merged to one
pixel to be saved (super sample technique).
The computing time for the output is approximately proportional to the number of INTERNALLY created image points, i. e. if this option is
active, the computing time will increase by a factor 9.
Gamma Correction
This option is only available, if the graphics card supports gamma correction.
The Anti-Alias option can be used with gamma correction to obtain best possible image quality.
Scale line width
This option increases the line width.
The scaling of the line width is calculated from the ratio of the Resolution set on the Image tab to the display resolution. The line width in
the exported image approximately corresponds to the display in the graphics area.
The line width cannot be smaller than 1, therefore, this option has no effect if for the export a smaller resolution than the display resolution
is used.
Scale line width Off Scale line width On
Show
With these options, you can select elements to be displayed in the exported image.
NOTE:
The elements are only displayed in the image, if their display is also activated in the graphics area, e. g. in the function Display
Options.
7.20 Export VRML

The Virtual Reality Markup Language is a description language originally based on Open Inventor (see also function Export Inventor on
page 143) for 3D models and scenes in the World Wide Web. To display VRML files special external VRML browsers or plug-ins for general
WWW browsers are available in the Internet.
The files generated with this function have the format VRML 2.0 or 97, respectively.
153
EXPORT VRML GEOMETRY
7
IMPORTANT !
The export in VRML files is done via ImageMagick which is not part of the ICEM Surf installation but has to be installed manually (see
page 119.
7.20.1 Export VRML Geometry
Geometry objects
The following ICEM Surf geometry objects can be selected for the export and converted to the following VRML object types (see also informa-
tion about PSet, LineSet, and FaceSet in section 7.14.1 Export Inventor Geometry on page 144:
ICEM Surf Object Type VRML Object Type
Points PSet
Lines PSet
LineSet
Raw Data PSet

LineSet
Curves PSet
LineSet
Scans PSet
FaceSet
Patches PSet
FaceSet
Faces PSet
FaceSet
7.20.2 Export VRML Texture
File Format
Specification of the file format for the texture. The formats JPEG, PNG, and TIFF are available.
154
EXPORT VRML TEXTURE
7
Directory Name
Specification of the directory, in which the texture file shall be written. If not yet existing, a directory with the name specified for the VRML file
to be exported will be created in the directory set by File.
155
THE MENU LIST
8
8 The menu List
Apart from the pull down menu this function can also be activated by the icon in the service functions block.
The options of this menu are also available in the Toolbar.
Lists can be compared with filters in which you may create different display sets so that the display of geometry objects can be restricted to sub-
sets.You can assign part, molecules, as well as individual atoms to a list (see also section 5.1.3 ICEM Surf data base (DB) on page 69).
Every data base contains the standard list DB with all geometry objects, all further user-defined lists contain individual objects and are a subset of
the List DB.
Example: You have several geometry objects assigned to part1 and the molecules 1 to 4. If you want to see only molecules 1 and 2 on the
screen, copy these molecules into a list (filter).
It is not possible to display several lists at the same time. On the other hand, the contents of individual lists may overlap, i. e. an geometry object
may be existing in several lists.
Figure 15 List structure
The menu List:
New
A new empty list with the name indicated in the submenu Save will be created (see also section 2.4.4 User-defined settings in service func-
tions on page 27).
Detail
With this option a temporary list will be created in which you can copy details from the current list for precise processing.
Click onto the button Detail and select in the current list the objects to be copied in the temporary list.
The temporary list will be deleted after having changed into another list.
Rename, Delete
To Rename and Delete user-defined lists corresponding submenus are activated (see also section 2.4.4 User-defined settings in service
functions on page 27).
Current List <List Name>

In this selection list all saved lists are displayed and can be activated as current list by double click.
By single click a list is selected for the options Delete or Rename.
156
THE MENU LIST
8
Background Objects
With this option the atoms of a molecule not included into the current list are displayed as background objects in another colour.
Remove
Elements can be removed from a list by selection. Removed atoms will then be background objects. Please note that the molecules being
parent of the removed atoms will still belong to the current list.
Retrieve
Background objects, i. e. atoms of a molecule which do not belong to the list, can be included into the current list by selection. Background
Objects is automatically switched on when activating this option.
Complete
All atoms existing as background objects in the current list will be included.
ListMove
With this option you can move elements to another list. Before activating the option select the desired Target List. After having moved the ele-
ments, the target list will be the current list if the check button Apply immediately is switched on.
This option is not available for the list DB.
ListCopy
Elements can be copied to another list. This option works analogously to ListMove.
All
The complete geometry of the current list will be copied (using ListCopy) or moved (using ListMove) to the target list.
Auto Min/Max
(Automatic Min/Max)
After each change of the list an Auto Min/Max can be automatically applied.
Apply immediately
If this check button is active, a list change to the target list will be carried out after moving or copying elements (ListMove or ListCopy).
157
THE MENU OBJECTS
9
9 The menu Objects
9.1 Objects Delete

Geometry objects can be deleted as follows:
In the Graphics Area

1. Activate
the button in the service functions block, or

the pull down menu Objects Delete.
2. Select objects in the graphics area.
3. Terminate the selection with OK.
In the Part Editor
1. Activate the button in the service functions block or the pull down menu Objects Object Manager (see page 161).
2. Select the objects to be deleted in the object editor.
3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and click on Delete.
9.2 Objects Objects
The menu Objects Objects can also be activated by the icon in the service functions block.
Objects may be renamed, and assigned or copied from one data hierarchy level to another using this function. The objects are selected graphi-
cally.
If you want to specify naming rules before creating objects, please use the Object Manager (see section 9.4 Objects Object Manager on
page 161).
The menu Objects
Current Objects: Select

The objects to be renamed, copied or assigned may be selected graphically and will appear in the selection list.
The functions Assign and Copy refer to all elements in the selection list, Rename only to one object selected in the list.
Target Object
The current objects can be assigned or copied to the part/molecule of the selected target object. The part and molecule names of the target
object are displayed in the text fields Assign and Copy.
Surface/Curve/Contour/Point Set/Scan Set/Part

You may select the data type for the target object. At any time, the current molecule is set as target object (see also section 9.4 Objects
Object Manager on page 161).
Keep Name
On
The part and molecule names set in the text fields Assign/Copy are not overwritten when switching to another geometry object type.
Off
The part and molecule names set are adopted from the name editor when opening the window or changing the popup menu setting (see
section 9.4 Objects Object Manager on page 161).
Assign, Copy
Possible assign and copy actions are:
Atom > different Molecule,
Molecule > different Part,
158
OBJECTS STRUCTURE EDITOR
9
Molecule > different Molecule, and

Part > different Part.
If the buttons Assign or Copy are switched on while the selection list is empty, the selection will be activated. Selected elements will then
directly be assigned or copied.
In the text fields belonging to the functions Assign and Copy you can specify the part and molecule names of the target object. If no target object
with the specified name exists, a new target object is created.
Name
In these text fields, the part and molecule name as well as the atom number of the object selected in the selection list are displayed. You may
rename the object.
9.3 Objects Structure Editor

ICEM Surf Curves and Surfaces composed of topologically contiguous curve segments and patches can be exported as ICEM DB shells and
curve composites. The topology conditions are defined by means of sewing tolerances. The shells and curve composites created from the individ-
ual curves and surfaces can be named individually.
To enable the conversion of ICEM Surf Curves and Surfaces to ICEM DB shells and curve composites having particular attributes, the menu Edit
ICEM DB Structures allows to create and edit the required structure data.
NOTE:
The structure editor is also available with slightly changed functionality for Export Catia V4, Export Catia V5, and Export Unigraph-
ics NX. The settings are not restricted to the function where they are being activated, they are also used in all the export functions using the
structure editor.
9.3.1 How to use the structure editor

Activating the menu Edit ICEM DB Structures
If the menu ICEM DB Edit Structures is activated via the pull-down menu or the icon in the service functions block, all elements
included in the data base are displayed in the structure table.
The menu can also be activated directly in the functions Export ICEM DB with the icon . In this case, the objects displayed in the struc-
ture table depend on the setting of the options List DB, Current List and Select (see section 7.1 General export options on page 119).
Creating structure data

To create structure data, the following steps need to be carried out:
1. In the table of the Edit Structures menu, select a curve or surface molecule from which a Curve Composite or a Shell is to be created.
2. Activate the check button Shell/Crv. A name will be created based on the molecule name of the selected object, and a standard tolerance
will be set. The text fields then become active, displaying the current name and tolerance value.
3. Enter an individual name and/or tolerance value in the text fields Name and Position.
4. Compute a topology diagnosis using Preview: Topology (see page 119) and modify the tolerance as required if conflicts are identified.
5. Click on OK to adopt the structure data in the data base.
Editing structure data

Editing a Name:
Select an object and enter a new name in the text field Name of the option Shell.
Editing the Tolerance value:
Select one or several objects and enter a new value in the text field Tolerance. The new value will be assigned to all selected objects.
Deleting structure data

To delete structure data, select the object concerned in the table, delete the structure name in the text field, and confirm with OK.
NOTE:
If additional objects are selected (multiple selection) and edited without deleting the structure permanently with OK, it will be
restored after having edited and confirmed with OK.
159
THE OPTIONS IN THE MENU EDIT ICEM DB STRUCTURES
9
9.3.2 The options in the menu Edit ICEM DB Structures
The menu Edit ICEM DB Structures
Filters
The upper line of the menu offers the following filters for displaying the items in the structure table:
All, Curves, Surfaces
The table displays either all geometry objects or curves or surfaces only.
Filter: Part/Molecule
The display of parts and molecules can be restricted by specifying a string which the names must contain or by using wildcard characters.
Available wildcard characters are * for any number of characters and ? for exactly one character.
Select
You may graphically select the molecule for which you want to create structure data.
Structure table
This table lists the geometry objects and their properties, depending on the filter settings. It shows the following information for each molecule:
Part/Molecule
Part and molecule names of the ICEM Surf Curves and Surfaces.
Type
ICEM Surf object type: Curve (Crv) or Surface (Srf).
Name
Displays the current name of the topological unit to be created. A plus or minus sign indicates whether or not a Curve Composite or Shell
will be created. Per default, an initial name based on the molecule name will be proposed, which can then be edited in the text field Name.
Position
Displays the current position tolerance value. Under the following conditions geometry objects are defined as a Curve Composite or Shell:
Curves are considered to be topologically contiguous if the distance between the end points of two curve segments is smaller than
the specified value.
Patches and Faces are considered to be topologically contiguous if the distance between a point on a patch or face edge and the
nearest point on the adjacent edge is smaller than the specified value.
Per default, 25 points are used for the tolerance check. If the option Tangent is switched off, an internally defined angle tolerance will be
used.
The value can be edited in the text field Position of the option Shell/Crv.
Tangent
Displays the individual angle tolerance settings. The plus or minus sign indicates whether an individual angle tolerance is used. The cur-
rent tolerance value is indicated in brackets.
Under the following conditions geometry objects are defined as a Curve Composite or Shell:
Curves are considered to be topologically contiguous if the deviation angle of the tangents through the end points does not exceed
the specified value.
Patches and Facesare considered to be topologically contiguous if the angle deviation between the tangents through a point on a
patch/face edge and the nearest point on the adjacent patch/face edge is smaller than the value specified. The angle is calculated
independently from the normal orientation of the patches/faces.
In the line Shell/Crv you can switch on and off the usage of the individual angle tolerance with the option Tangent and change the value
in the text field.
Tessellation
Display of the topological tessellation settings.
The first plus or minus sign indicates whether the display of the topological tessellation is active.
The second plus or minus sign indicates whether the individual tessellation tolerance (displayed in brackets) is used.
160
OBJECTS OBJECT MANAGER
9
In the line Shell/Crv you can switch on and off the usage of the display of the topological tessellation with the option Tess. and specify an
individual tolerance in the text field.
Shell | Crv
Activates/inactivates the creation of structure data for the export. Activation of the check button requires at least one object in the structure
table to be selected.
Once the check button has been activated, the following text fields become active and show the values of the item that was selected first in
the structure table:
Name
The name of a topological unit must be unique and can therefore be edited only if only a single object has been selected in the table.
Position
Specifying of the position tolerance.
Tangent
Activating and specifying of the individual angle tolerance.
Display
Only available for surfaces.
Activating the display of the topological tessellation.
NOTE:
To display the topological tessellation, the option Topology (see page 321) in the menu Display Tessellation Global must
also be switched on.
Individual Tesselation
Activating and specifying the individual tessellation tolerance. If the individual tolerance is switched off, the tolerance specified for Shad-
ing (see page 320) in the menu Display Tessellation Global will be used.
NOTE:
To display the topological tessellation with the individual tolerance, the option Individual (see page 250) in the menu Display
Display must be switched on.
Several objects can be selected to activate and edit the tolerances. Per default, the text fields show the settings of the object selected first.
Clicking on OK confirms the new values and assigns them to all selected objects.
Preview: Topology
This option allows to compute and display a topology diagnosis of the curves and surfaces to be converted to curve composites and shells.
The markings in the preview have the following meaning:
Blue marking
Topologically contiguous curves and the exterior edges of the topologically contiguous regions of surfaces.
Yellow marking
For the deviation calculation of the position continuity tolerance are used more points than for the definition of the topologically contiguous
geometry. Therefore, apart from regions not fulfilling the topology conditions, critical regions are also displayed, where the tolerance is
kept and the geometry objects can be exported as topologically contiguous entities, but problems risk to arise during further processing.
9.4 Objects Object Manager

The object manager is a tool for managing geometry models and structuring them by parts and molecules.
The object manager can be activated:
by the icon in the service functions block,

via the pull down menu Objects Object Manager, or
by the shortcut Ctrl-T.
The object manager provides filter options for controlling the object display, graphical selection, tree structure, group management, possibility of
quick object attribute modification, as well as context menus for easily structuring the objects.
161
9
The menu Object Manager
Filter: Scans, Points, Raw Data, Curves, Surfaces

Specification which type of objects shall be displayed in the table.
Part, Molecule
Input of a string which the part or molecule name must contain. Only these objects will then be displayed in the table. The wildcards * and ?
are supported.
List
The objects of the marked list are displayed in the object manager. By a second click, the marked list becomes the current list and is labelled
by a blue sphere. If the list has changed via the Toolbar (see page 22), the object manager is adapted accordingly.
A context menu is opened by clicking a list with the right mouse button (see section 9.4.1.1 Context menu for lists on page 164).
Update
Updates the object table, e. g. after using a geometry function.
Select
Graphical selection of the objects.
In the lower part of the function window, the geometry objects found according to the set filter are listed as a tree structure (part molecule
atom). Only the objects of the marked list are displayed. After clicking an object with the left mouse button it will be highlighted in the menu and as
well as in the graphics. If a molecule or part is clicked, all associated atoms are highlighted. The current part or molecule is marked with a blue
sphere.
The following information are given in the menu area:
Object
Listing all geometry objects of the data base.
Colour, Material, Tessellation

Individual attributes can be assigned to geometry objects.
Click on the colour, material, or tessellation icon within the object line. The colour can be modified via a selection table. Material and tessella-
tion can be modified via submenus (see section 11.10.1.1 The submenu for selecting materials on page 273, and 11.21.2.1 The submenu
Tessellation on page 322).
NOTES:
The selection of Material is only available for surfaces and scans.
No default materials are available in the material table. To assign individual materials you have to define them before in the menu
Display Material (see page 270).
The submenu for Tessellation is only available for surfaces and curves.
Via nodes for parts and molecules, these attributes can be defined for all inferior objects in one step.
NOTE:
Individual attributes can be assigned to multiple atoms in one step as well. Click on the desired objects with left mouse button and
Shift key pressed, or keep left mouse button pressed while pulling the mouse.
The available icons for Colour, Material, and Tessellation have the following meaning:
For atoms: No individual attributes are assigned to objects.

For parts/molecules: No atom of a part or molecule has individual attributes.
162
9
For atoms: Individual attributes are assigned to objects.

For parts/molecules: All atoms of a part or molecule have the same attributes.
Different attributes are assigned to the atoms of a molecule or part.
User, Date
Name of the user who created the object, date and time of the object creation.
C
(Complete)
Declaration whether the part/molecule is completely included in the choosen (x) or not.
If you widen the function window with the mouse, further object information will be visible on the right hand side:
Scans, Points, Raw Data, Curves, Surfaces

Individual information on parts, molecules, and atoms are given in this area.
Parts
1. value = number of molecules (scan sets, point sets, raw data contours, curves or surfaces) belonging to the part
2. value (in brackets) = total number of atoms (scans, points, raw data segments, curve segments or patches) belonging
to the molecules
Molecules
number of atoms belonging to each molecule:

for scan sets the number of scans,
for point sets the number of points,
for raw data the number of raw data segments,
for curves the number of curve segments, and
for surfaces the number of patches and/or faces.
Atoms
Scans:
Declaration whether structured scan data have been read in (S), i. e., all scans consist of scan lines
Number of scan lines
Number of points
Number of facets
Raw data:
Number of points of the raw data segment
Curves:
Bezier or NURBS/B-Spline curve segment

Order
Number of segments
Surfaces:
Face or patch
Bezier or NURBS/B-Spline patch
Order in longitudinal and cross direction
Number of segments in longitudinal and cross direction
163
THE CONTEXT MENUS
9
Extended information on atoms are made available by double-clicking on an atom. Depending on the object type, a submenu with additional infor-
mation is opened (see section 9.4.2 The submenus for extended information on atoms on page 167).
By clicking with right mouse button in a table line you can activate a context menu offering various functions for the selected part, molecule, or
atom (see section 9.4.1 The context menus on page 164).
The display of the table can be personalized. A context menu is activated by clicking with the right mouse button on a column in the table heading
(see section 9.4.1.5 Context menu for the display of the object table on page 166).
The column width can be adapted by dragging the separators in the table heading.
The shortcuts Ctrl-X, Ctrl-C, and Ctrl-V can be used. It is possible to create a copy of an object at the same place.
Below the table you will find options for naming and assigning objects.
Current Part
Selection and display of the currently active part.
Current Scan Set/Point Set/Raw Data/Curve/Surface

Selection and display of the currently active molecule, according to the object type set in the upper left corner of the menu.
Create a new part with the same name prefix.

Create a new molecule with the same name prefix.
The current part/molecule name will be used for naming newly created objects by using it as prefix and adding a consecutive number.
When creating new objects, these objects will be inserted into the current part and molecule. A newly created part or molecule will automatically
be activated as current object, and the names are displayed.
A part/molecule can additionally be activated with the context menu option Current.
Current Colour, Current Material

Use of individual colours/an individual material for newly-created objects:
Colour/material is defined: All newly-created objects get the set colour/material as individual colour/material.
Colour/material is not defined: No individual colour/material is assigned to newly-created objects.
9.4.1 The context menus

9.4.1.1 Context menu for lists
The following context menu is available for lists:
Current
Activates and marks a list as current list.
ListMove/ListCopy source list -> target list

Moves or copies elements from the current list (source list) to the choosen list (target list). Elements can be selected in the objects table or in
the graphics. Afterwards, the target list becomes the current list if the check button Apply immediately is switched on.
All
Moves or copies all elements of the current list to the target list.
Apply immediately
Carries out a list change to the target list after moving or copying elements.
164
THE CONTEXT MENUS
9
Auto Min/Max
(Automatic Min/Max)
Automatic execution of Auto Min/Max after a list change (see page 48).
New
Creates a new list.
Rename
Renames the list.
Delete
Deletes the list.
Complete
Includes all atoms existing as background objects in the current list.
Background Objects
Displays the atoms of a molecule not included in the current list as background objects.
9.4.1.2 Context menu for the creation of a new part

For the current list, a context menu is available in the object table by clicking with the right mouse button outside the tree structure. It only contains
a New Part option.
9.4.1.3 Context menus for parts, molecules, and atoms

The following context menus are available for objects in the tree structure:
Context menu for parts and molecules
Context menu for atoms
Current
Activates a part/molecule. Their names are then displayed in the menu.
Cut
Cuts the marked object.
Copy
Copies the marked object.
165
THE CONTEXT MENUS
9
Paste
This option is only available for parts and molecules.
Pastes the cut or copied object into another superior object.
NOTE:
Atom numbers may change if atoms are pasted into existing not empty molecules.
Paste+List
(Paste with List Information)
Pastes the cut or copied object into another superior object the related list information being transferred in addition.
New: Part, Molecule

Creates an new part or molecule (within the part under the mouse cursor).
NOTE:
After Freeze or Save of the data base, all parts and molecules which do not contain atoms will be deleted.
Rename
This option is only available for parts and molecules.
Renames the part or molecule
Delete
Deletes the marked object from the data base.
Reframe On
Scales the display of the marked objects to fit the screen.
New Part from Selection

Opens an edit field to enter a part name, creates a new part, and moves the marked objects into this part.
Detail List
Copies all marked objects in a temporary list.
Remove from List

Removes all marked objects from the current list. Removed atoms become background objects, their parent molecules still belong to the list.
Retrieve
Includes all background objects of incompletely selected molecules or parts in the current list.
If all selected elements are completely included in the current list, this option is deactivated.
9.4.1.4 Context menu on part and molecule nodes

A context menu is activated by clicking with the right mouse button on the plus or minus symbol in front of a part or molecule name:
Expand Parts
Expands the parts.
Expand all
Expands all elements.
Collapse Molecules
Collapses the molecules.
Collapse all
Collapses all elements.
These options are also available in the context menu of the table column Object.
9.4.1.5 Context menu for the display of the object table

The columns of the object table can be hidden or shown via a context menu.
166
THE SUBMENUS FOR EXTENDED INFORMATION ON ATOMS
9
Hide column
Hides the column selected with the right mouse button.
Show all columns

Shows all columns.
Show column
Selection of the column to be shown.
The context menu of the table column Object contains additional options for expanding and collapsing the elements (see section 9.4.1.4 Context
menu on part and molecule nodes on page 166).
9.4.2 The submenus for extended information on atoms

Extended information on a specific atom are offered in a submenu by double-clicking on this atom. According to the object type, different sub-
menus are available.
All submenus contain the complete path of the atom with part and molecule, as well as the following type-specific data and options:
Submenu Scan
Ordinal number.
Indication whether the scan line is structured, i. e., whether it consists of polygons (x) or not (no indication).
Number of points of the scan line.
Submenu Points
Point coordinates.
The coordinates can be modified by entering absolute values (X:/Y:/Z:) or offset values (X+/Y+/Z+).
Submenu Raw Data Segment
Raw data contours.

The coordinates of a selected point (or several points) can be modified by entering absolute values (X:/Y:/Z:) or offset values (X+/Y+/Z+).
167
THE SUBMENU TESSELLATION
9
Submenu Curve Segment
Control point coordinates.

For straight lines (Bezier curve segment of order 2): start and end point.
For circles and arcs: centre point coordinates, radius, as well as start and end angle.
The coordinates of a selected point (or several points) can be modified by entering absolute values (X:/Y:/Z:) or offset values (X+/Y+/Z+)
(except for NURBS/B-Spline curve segments).
Submenu Patch
Control point coordinates.

The coordinates of a selected point (or several points) can be modified by entering absolute values (X:/Y:/Z:) or offset values (X+/Y+/Z+)
(except for NURBS/B-Spline patches).
U or V can be used to select all points of a row in cross or longitudinal direction, All to select all points of a patch.
9.4.3 The submenu Tessellation
After activating the tessellation button , the submenu Tessellation will be opened for setting an individual tessellation tolerance. For a descrip-
tion of the options available here, please refer to section 11.21 Display Tessellation on page 319:
Shading
(see page 320)
Wire Frame
(see page 320)
Equal Tolerances
(see page 321)
Delete
Individual tolerance is deleted, the normal display tolerance will be used.
168
THE MENU DIAGNOSES
10
10 The menu Diagnoses
10.1 General information

The diagnostic functions provide information on geometry objects. All diagnoses can be carried out in parallel to the geometry functions. After
each creation or modification of geometry data, the diagnoses are automatically updated, they operate associatively. Additionally, most of the
diagnoses are dynamic functions, i. e. they are permanently re-computed during a geometry modification.
NOTE FOR DIAGNOSES ON SELECTIVELY MIRRORED ELEMENTS:

If selective mirroring has been defined (see section 11.7 Display Mirror on page 269) and selected for a diagnosis, the diagnosis will
only be carried out on the geometry elements, but NOT on the selectively mirrored elements.
10.2 Diagnoses Sections

This function can be activated:
using the icon in the service functions block,

via the pull down menu Diagnoses Sections, as well as
with the shortcut Ctrl-Y.
Sections are created by intersecting surfaces or scans with one or several parallel planes. A set of sections simultaneously created by a single
operation is referred to as a group of sections.
The following section types can be created:
X, Y and Z sections,
sections parallel to the current work plane, and
true sections.
Since sections are diagnostic lines they can be approximated by Bezier curves using the function Curve creation Approximate (see
page 419).
Figure 16 Z-Sections of a patch in different views
Top View Central Perspective

Y Z
Z X Y X
Side View Z Front View

Z
Y X Y X
The menu consists of the tabs Sections and Parameter, which are described in the following sections.
169
SECTIONS
10
10.2.2 Sections
All generated groups of sections are displayed in a selection list. They can be switched on and off individually by highlighting the name and click-
ing onto it again or via the check button Visible. Activated sections will be marked with a star.
New
The group of sections marked in the selection list will be modified according to the currently set parameters when re-executing the function. If
a new section shall be created with the next function execution, the button New has to be activated first.
Rename
The sections are consecutively numbered when they are generated, and can be renamed using this button.
Delete
Deleting sections by selecting one or several groups of sections.
Delete All
Deleting all generated sections.
Graphical
Deleting individual intersection lines by graphical selection.
Sort
The list of sections can be sorted alphabetically.
On/Off
The generated sections can be globally switched on and off with this button. Either all sections will be marked in the list with a star and dis-
played in the data base, or none of the sections will be marked and displayed.
If the intersection lines are switched off, dynamic geometry modifications and other functions are accelerated, as the sections do not perma-
nently have to be re-computed.
Labels
The display of the coordinate values of the diagnosis lines of all sections groups can be switched on and off.
Visible
The groups of sections available in the selection list can be switched on and off individually via this check button.
Colour of section group
Different colours can be assigned to the individual groups of sections. The default colour with which all generated sections are initially dis-
played can be defined on the Parameter tab (see Default Colour, page 174).
Section type
The computation of the sections is started by highlighting one of the section types available and clicking on OK. The sections are created
according to the specified number or increment or at discrete positions (see Number and position of the sections, page 171)
X, Y, Z
The section planes are parallel to the YZ, XZ or XY plane of the specified coordinate system (see options System: Model, Plane, View,
page 171).
Plane
The section planes are parallel to the current work plane. Moreover, the plane to be used can be defined as a trace plane or via 3 points
(see Definition of a plane in the parameter menu, page 173).
NOTE:
If the number of sections (Count) is set to 1 (see page 171) for the option Plane, possibly no intersection line is created. The rea-
son for this is that the attachment point of the work plane is not moved in this case, i. e. no parallel plane is generated. If the plane
in its current position does not intersect the surfaces, no section is created.
170
SECTIONS
10
True
The normal plane to the curve tangent in a point on a patch or face edge or on a curve is created. The intersection line between surface
and normal plane is the true section in this point.
Figure 17 True section
normal plane
intersection line
curve tangent
Figure 18 Example for true sections
Curve +
For true sections, one or several curves can be selected via these buttons. The sections will be created along these curves.
Plane
This option is only available if the current section is of type Plane.
Using this button, the current work plane is set to the definition plane of the section. With this it is possible to modify saved sections.
System: Model, Plane, View

The sections can be generated with respect to the model coordinate system or the coordinate system of the work or view plane.
NOTE:
When generating true sections in the work or view plane, sections are created which represent straight lines in the respective
plane. This is especially suitable for applications where sections shall be created in a drawing plane.
These options cannot be choosen for the section type Plane. In this case, the current work plane will always be used for the computation.
Number and position of the sections

Count
The number of sections indicated here will be regularly distributed within the Min/Max box defining the section range (see also Min/Max
in the parameter menu, page 173).
NOTE:
Please pay attention to the note for the section type Plane (see page 170)!
In addition, this field displays the current number of intersection lines of the group of sections which has just been generated or which is
marked in the selection list.
Increment
Within the section range, the sections are created with the distance specified here.
NOTE:
By entering full tens, hundreds or thousands the Min/Max coordinates will also be set to these values.
Discrete
The sections will be created at discrete positions which can be defined with the option Graphical + or via the submenu Discrete in the
parameter menu (see page 173).
171
SECTIONS
10
Graphical +
Using this option you may graphically select discrete positions at which the section planes shall pass.
Additional points can be selected using the + button.
Arc Length
Display of the length of the intersection lines. After activation of this option, the sections must be recomputed.
Figure 19 Display of the arc length
l=163.6
l=182.9
l=193.3
l=192.3
Symm
(Symmetric)
This option is only available for section types Y, Plane, and True.
All section planes are mirrored at the y=0 plane. These mirrored section planes are then used for computation in addition to the unchanged
section planes.
All
The sections will be calculated on all surfaces and scans.
Set
The sections will only be calculated on selected surfaces and scans combined in a set.
Select +
Surfaces and scans can be selected for a new set using these buttons.
Dynamic section
A section plane may be moved dynamically through the selected surfaces or scans.
For X, Y, Z sections, the distance between section plane and coordinate origin will be dynamically indicated in the graphics. For sections of
the type Plane you will see the distance between section and work plane. The arc length will be shown for true sections (type True).
Using the middle mouse button you can create an intersection line at the current position of the dynamic section plane.
NOTE:
The plane will be displaced by moving cursor up and down with left mouse button pressed.
Dynamic
After choosing the desired parameters, activate this check button and click on OK. The plane will be displayed and can be moved. The
plane is generally placed in the centre of the selected objects, for dynamic true sections at the beginning of the selected curve, and, when
selecting a point, it will be set in this point.
NOTE:
This option is not available for referenced data (see section 5.4 File Reference Manager on page 78).
Point
If this option is additionally switched on, a point may be selected through which the section plane shall pass. For this, activate the check
button, confirm with OK and select a point.
Curvature diagnosis
Additionally, a curvature diagnosis can be carried out for sections on surfaces.
Curvature
After selection of a section type, activate this check button and click on OK. The curvatures along the sections will be calculated and dis-
played.
Invert
The curvature diagnosis will be inverted.
Scaling
Scaling factor for the curvature display. If the factor = 1, the values are displayed in a scale of 1:1.
172
PARAMETER
10
10.2.3 Parameter
Additional parameters for the group of sections marked in the selection list in the main menu are available here. The computation will be started
by clicking on OK.
Discrete
If a group of sections is marked in the selection list of the main menu, the coordinate values of the section plane normals are displayed in this
submenu.
Moreover, you may specify the coordinate values for the creation of sections at discrete positions (see option Discrete, page 171).
Delete
Deleting a section.
Insert
Adding a new coordinate above the current position in the list.
Append
Adding a new coordinate ate the end of the list.
Definition of a plane
For the section type Plane in the main menu, the plane to be used can be defined via the following options.
Trace
Definition of a plane as trace plane. The X axis of this plane is defined by two points to be selected, the Y axis points out of the screen.
Points
Definition of a plane via points.
Three points minimum have to be selected to define a plane, but you may also select more than three points. If you select more than three
points, the best plane possible will be computed.
Section range
This popup menu specifies the section range of the marked section group. The coordinate values in the text fields refer to the section plane
normal (e. g. the X coordinate for X sections).
Min/Max
(Minimum/Maximum)
The section range is defined by a Min/Max box completely including the selected objects.
In the text fields, the Min/Max coordinate values are displayed. If in the main menu the option Increment is active, the values are rounded
up to integers. When modifying the values and confirming with OK, the popup switches automatically to the option Manual.
173
PARAMETER
10
Figure 20 Min/Max box
Manual
The section range can be restricted by specifying coordinate values in the text fields.
NOTE:
In case of planar sections (Plane active in the main menu), no section will be displayed if the range specified is too small.
Figure 21 Restricted section range
X sections
Max
Min
2 Points
Beginning and end of the section range is defined by selecting two points.
Diagnosis on Scans
An individual colour can be specified for diagnoses on scans.
Entity Color
Sections can be displayed individually in the current colour of the geometry element.
Default Colour
The default colour with which all generated sections are initially displayed can be defined here.
2D Projection
This option is only available for the section types Plane and True.
3D intersection curves can be projected into a view plane parallel to one of the main coordinate axes. This simulates a method of the classical
car body design.
174
PARAMETER
10
Figure 22 Projected section
Figure 23 Projection of a true section into the view plane
Z selected point
Y X
1st projection 2nd projection
AL = work line
AE = work plane
During the 1st projection of the true section the intersection curve coincides with the
trace curve (tangent at the curve in the selected point), since the section plane is
normal to the current view plane.
During the 2nd projection the section plane is rotated by 90 around the trace, in a
way that the true section becomes visible in the view plane.
Clipping Plane
A temporary section will be displayed in the current clipping plane. This option has the same functionality as the option Sections in the menu
Display Clipping Plane (see page 269). It is only available if at least one clipping plane is defined, and the option Dynamic on the Sec-
tions tab is switched off.
NOTE:
If this option is switched on, only a temporary section in the clipping plane can be created and saved as plane section. For creating
other sections the option must be switched off.
Scale Sections
X, Y, Z sections can be displayed with an offset to separate them from each other allowing a better visual check. In the text fields, the display
offset of the sections is specified in x- and y-direction of the screen view.
175
DIAGNOSES CHECK
10
Figure 24 Scaled X sections
Z X sections
Y X
NOTE:
For this function you should choose an appropriate view parallel to one of the main coordinate axes.
Z
scaled X sections
Y X
Z100 Z100
Z0 Z0
Y-
Y100 Y0 Y-100
Tolerance
The sections are calculated with the tolerance specified here. A point is retained if the perpendicular distance to the connecting line of its
adjacent points is larger than this value.
Saved Version
If the geometry is modified compared with the last version saved with Freeze, the change of the sections can be displayed using the check
button Saved Version (see also section Freeze and global Undo on page 50). The intersection lines of the saved version will be displayed in
red, the lines of the modified version in yellow.
Visible
see page 170
10.3 Diagnoses Check

Topological information for surfaces, curves and scans may be generated using these diagnosis functions.
10.3.1 Surface Check

10.3.1.1 General information
Surfaces can be checked for different criteria.
NOTE:
The checking results exist only temporarily and are deleted as soon as you exit the function. If you want to update the diagnosis after a
geometry modification (see option Update), the menu must be kept open during the modification.
Included in delivery is the batch program Surfdb_check.exe that can be used for an external check of ICEM Surf data bases. The check parame-
ters to be defined in this program correspond to the options of the diagnosis functions Diagnoses Check Surface Check and Curve Check.
For a description of the batch program please refer to surfdb_check in the manual Software configuration.
The menu consists of the tabs Topology of Surfaces, Patches/Faces, and Faces which are described in the following sections.
176
SURFACE CHECK
10
10.3.1.2 Topology of Surfaces
Topology Regions
All surfaces with a distance from each other which is smaller than the specified tolerance are searched for. These surfaces are neighboured
building up a topology region. These regions can be displayed graphically with the check button.
For getting neighbourhood information for surfaces, the Topology Regions within the specified tolerance are always searched for at first, also
with deactivated option. All checks are calculated within these regions.
If no topology regions can be found, all the other activated checks will produce no result. You will only get a check result for the position conti-
nuity, for example, if the tolerance value for Topology Regions is larger than the minimum tolerance value for Position.
TIP:
Always switch on the option Topology Regions, and you will see immediately whether regions were found. Change the tolerance,
if required, to get a result, e. g. for the position continuity.
Figure 25 Creation and display of topology regions
Position, Tangent, Curvature

The surface edges within the topology regions will be checked for position, normal and curvature continuity.
177
SURFACE CHECK
10
Figure 26 Continuity check of surfaces
gap
a) position
continuity
b) normal continuity
angle
overlap
c) curvature continuity
radius 1
radius 2
The edges at which the current distance, angle or curvature lies within the specified range (specification of values for Min, Max) will be
marked. The maximum values will be indicated.
Figure 27 Display of the checking results regarding position and normal continuity
0.036 0.012 0.023

0.049 0o31
0.023
0o44
max. distances
0.015
0o36
max. normal deviations
examination distance: Min = 0.01, Max = 0.05

examination angle: Min = 03, Max = 045
Count
The number of points at which the position, normal or curvature continuity is to be checked along the edges can be determined.
Segment Boundary
With this option, the surfaces themselves can be checked for tangent and curvature discontinuities. For this, ranges of values can be specified
at Tangent and Curvature.
T-Connection
With this option, all T-connections in patch clusters are marked, where the misalignment between the corner points lies within the tolerance
range specified.
The regions where a misalignment between the selected topologically contiguous surfaces is diagnosed are displayed in the graphic area as
blue spheres. Each misalignment region is named with the prefix T_CON and a consecutive number.
NOTE:
Please note that you should specify values for the tolerance range that are falling considerably below the dimensions of the sur-
faces to be checked. If edge lengths of checked surfaces are lying within the tolerance range, these edges are output as T-connec-
tion. This result may be undesirable.
178
SURFACE CHECK
10
Figure 28 Graphical display of misalignment regions
In addition, to each misalignment region the following information are written into the protocol file:
++misalignment region: T-CON_01
++PART/SURFACE/3 <-> PART/SURFACE/2
center (x,y,z): -24.1297, 0, 8.95555
radius: 0.259637
Line 1: Name of the misalignment region.
NOTE:
The names of the misalignment regions only refer to the current diagnosis result and are temporary. Every time when the diagnosis
is carried out, the consecutive numbering of the names restarts with 01. Therefore, after geometry modifications name conflicts
with the results of a previous diagnoses are unavoidable.
Line 2: Names of the surfaces selected for the diagnosis.
Lines 3 and 4: 3D coordinates of the centre and radius of the misalignment region.
Select
After activating this button the objects can be selected.
Create Result List

All objects found depending on the set check criterion will be isolated in a separate list. After naming the new list it will automatically be acti-
vated as current list.
Update
If the geometry was modified during the surface check and the menu was open meanwhile, the diagnosis can be updated using this function.
Protocol
The results of the surface check are written in a protocol file. Via the button Protocol, this file may be displayed.
10.3.1.3 Patches/Faces
179
SURFACE CHECK
10
Patches
Mini Edges
All edges with a shorter length are marked (see figure 29 on page 180).
Patches/Faces
Max. Order
(Maximum Order)
All patches with a higher order are marked.
Max. Segments
(Maximum number of Segments)
All B-Spline patches with a larger number of segments are marked.
Duplicate
(Duplicate Objects)
All duplicate objects are marked. Objects with identical edges lying on top of each other are recognized. Moreover, patches lying within
another patch are found via a tolerance, i. e. patches lying on top of each other, but whose edges are not identical.
If a result list is created, you can choose between the following options:
All
All duplicate patches/faces are collected in the result list.
All but smallest
All duplicate patches/faces except for the smallest object are collected in the result list.
All but largest
All duplicate patches/faces except for the largest object are collected in the result list.
Mini Objects
All objects with a smaller surface area are marked.
Figure 29 Mini objects and mini edges
PART/SURFACE4/4/1
PART/SURFACE3/1
mini edge
mini patch
Normal Turn Down

Irregularities of the normals, e. g. in the degenerated edge of a triangular patch, can be found with this option.
Figure 30 Normal Turn Down in a triangular patch
Select
(see page 179)
Update
(see page 179)
180
SURFACE CHECK
10
Create Result List

(see page 179)
Protocol
(see page 179)
10.3.1.4 Faces
NOTE:
The diagnosis objects specified here correspond to the following ICEM Surf object types:
edge = face edge segment
loop = face edge
Tiny Edge
All face edge segments with a shorter length are marked.
Large Edge Gaps

Neighboured face edge segments having a distance from each other that is larger than the specified tolerance are marked. The face edge is
not closed in these cases, but shows gaps.
181
SURFACE CHECK
10
Non Tangent Edge

B-Spline face edge segments can have bends at their inner segment boundaries. Face edge segments having a tangent deviation that is
larger than the specified tolerance are marked.
Intersecting Loops
Face edges touching or intersecting other face edges within the specified tolerance are indicated.
Self Intersecting Loop

Face edges touching or intersecting themselves within the specified tolerance are indicated.
NOTE:
Executing the diagnosis with this option leads to a considerably lower performance.
Edge Exceeds Underlying Surface

Face edge segments exceeding the underlying surface are marked.
Base Patch Duplicates

If several identical base patches of faces exist, all base patches concerned are marked.
Select
(see page 179)
Update
(see page 179)
Create Result List

(see page 179)
Protocol
(see page 179)
182
CURVE CHECK
10
10.3.2 Curve Check

Curves can be checked for different criteria.
NOTE:
Included in delivery is the batch program Surfdb_check.exe that can be used for an external check of ICEM Surf data bases. The check parame-
ters to be defined in this program correspond to the options of the diagnosis functions Diagnoses Check Surface Check and Curve Check.
For a description of the batch program please refer to surfdb_check in the manual Release Notes and Installation Instructions.
The menu Curve Check
Select
After activating this button the curves can be selected.
Update
If the geometry was modified during the curve check and the menu was open meanwhile, the diagnosis can be updated using this function.
Topology Regions
For the checking operations, all curves with a distance from each other which is smaller than the specified tolerance are searched for. These
curves are neighboured and are combined to one region.
If Topology Regions is active, the boundaries between the individual topological regions are marked graphically.

The curves will be checked for position, tangent and curvature continuity.
The values Min, Max define a range for the examination distance, angle and curvature. The current values will be indicated.
Self Intersection
The curves are checked for selfintersection. The tolerance is used for the segmentation of the curves and as maximum distance between
curve points.
Duplicate Objects
All duplicate curves (curves with identical edges lying on top of each other) are marked (yellow).
NOTE:
Only duplicate curves showing exactly the same description are found. This means that features like curve type and control point
distribution must be congruent in order that the curves can be recognized by the diagnosis. An exception here is the parameter
flow, that means that curves can be inverse to be recognized.
Mini Objects
All curves which have a smaller arc length than specified here are marked (red, with element name).
Create Result List

All curves found depending on the set check criterion will be isolated in a separate list. After naming the new list it will automatically be acti-
vated as current list.
Protocol
The results of the curve check are written in a protocol file. Via the button Protocol, this file may be displayed.
183
SCAN CHECK
10
10.3.3 Scan Check

Scans can be checked for different criteria.
NOTE:
The menu Scan Check
Select
After activating this button the scans can be selected.
Region
The region selection will be activated.
Update
If the geometry was modified during the scan check and the menu was open meanwhile, the diagnosis can be updated using this function.
Points Without Facets

Points can be found which are not corner points of a facet.
These points can then be removed using the button Rep (Repair).
Multiple Points
All points are displayed having a distance from each other which is smaller than the specified tolerance.
The detected adjacent points can be merged using the button Rep (Repair). The position of the new point will be one of the found points,
edge points preferred.
Multi-Used Edges
Edges at which more than two facet edges coincide will be indicated.
Figure 31 Multi-used edge
common edge of
three facets
Boundary Edges
With the following options, boundary edges of scans may be found. Boundary edges are edges to which exactly one facet is attached.
Boundaries
All boundary edges, including the inner boundaries, are found.
184
SAFETY ANALYSIS
10
Inner Boundaries
Inner boundaries are special boundary edges. Knots (corner points) of boundary edges are calculated which are lying on other boundary
edges within a specified tolerance. The boundary edges coinciding in this way will be displayed and can be merged using the button Rep
(Repair).
Figure 32 Inner boundaries of a scan
toler-
coinciding boundary after executing Repair

edges (inner boundaries)
Short Edges
Facet edges which are shorter than the specified value are located.
The detected edges are removed using the button Rep (Repair).
Overlap
Facets can be found overlapping each other, and having a distance from each other which is smaller than the specified tolerance.
Using the button Rep (Repair), the determined regions can be refacetted.
10.3.4 Safety Analysis

Increased demands on the passive safety for automobiles are affecting to an increasing degree the protective properties in potential regions of
head impact at the exterior and interior of a vehicle. The Safety Analysis has been developed especially for the requirements of the automobile
industry. It can be used to detect sharp edges and corners at a 3D model that may cause injuries.
A sphere simulating a human head with a radius to be defined is used as test object. The region of the selected surface cluster where the sphere
is rolled along, will be checked for curvature radii below a minimum value. Critical zones are marked in red. Afterwards, the detected areas should
be remodelled until they meet the required safety standards.
Figure 33 Principle of the Safety Analysis
geometry to be checked
(option Curvature Radius)
internal sphere for the computa-

tion (option Radius)
185
SAFETY ANALYSIS
10
Figure 34 Diagnosis result at an instrument panel
Interpretation of the diagnosis result

The diagnosis will be displayed in the following colours:
Colour Meaning
Red The curvature radius is lying below the minimum, sharp edges/corners are found.
Green The curvature radius is lying above the minimum, sharp edges/corners are not found here.
Blue The sphere does not touch the geometry, no radius check is done here.
NOTE:
The diagnosis result can be adulterated by duplicate surfaces. In order to eliminate this source of error, use the diagnosis Diagnoses
Check Surface Check, option Duplicate (see page 180).
Proceeding of the diagnosis

1. Select the geometry to be checked and make the required settings.
2. According to the set Normal Orientation (see page 190), one or several green vector symbols will appear. The vectors are pointing in the
direction of the centre point of the test sphere to be rolled.
3. The vectors shall be oriented in a way that the internal sphere is rolling at the right side of the model. If this is not the case, the direction can
be inverted by clicking on the handle in the middle of the vector symbol
4. Start the diagnosis with OK.
5. If the method Automatic (see page 190) is set for the normal orientation, and the selected geometry consists of several discontiguous
regions, it may happen that the diagnosis cannot be calculated in one step for the whole geometry.
In this case, the normal for the region(s) has/that have not yet been calculated must be defined. For this, a request for the next region will
appear. A red vector symbol represents the current normal direction that can be inverted if required.
The diagnosis is continued with the button Continue. This procedure will be repeated, if required, until the whole geometry is calculated.
6. Subsequently, further radii can be defined at Additional Safety Radii (see page 187).
7. Afterwards, you can optionally carry out a search for sharp bends and topological edges (options Sharp Bend and Edge).
The menu consists of the tabs Safety Analysis and Parameter, which are described in the following sections.
186
SAFETY ANALYSIS
10
10.3.4.2 Safety Analysis
Select +
Reactivates the selection of the surface geometry to be checked.
Continue
Continuation of the diagnosis after having aligned the normal direction of a region.
Radius
Radius of the sphere. A standard head has an assumed radius of 80 resp. 85 mm.
Curvature Radius
All geometry regions with curvatures being lower than this radius will be marked as critical in red.
You can define additional curvature radii on the Parameter tab.
Tolerance
Tolerance for the tesselation.
The selected surfaces will be tessellated in a way that the facet distance from the original surface is within the tolerance value.
Length
Maximum length of facet sides for the tesselation.
The selected surfaces will be tessellated in a way that the length of the facet sides, regardless of the surface curvature, is not larger than this
value.
Display
Sharp Bend
Detection of sharp bends.
Edge
Detection of topological edges.
Edge, Shading
Display mode for the diagnosis result. You can choose between display of facet edges and shaded display.
10.3.4.3 Parameter
Additional Safety Radii

Optionally you can specify additional curvature radii.
187
SAFETY ANALYSIS
10
An example geometry shall illustrate these options. The following figure show diagnosis results with different curvature radii at first without
definition of additional safety radii:
Curvature Radius 2.0 mm
no red regions
red regions
red regions
Separation
A second curvature radius can be defined, and a surface can be selected as separating surface. The geometry areas in the direction of
the surface normal on the one hand and in opposition to this normal on the other hand will then be checked with different radii.
The second curvature radius specified here will take effect on that side of the separating surface which is determined by the displayed
surface normal vector.
The following figure illustrates the position of the separating surface in the example geometry:
separating surface
To execute a diagnosis with a separation, you have to operate as follows for the example:
1. Select the geometry to be checked and set the required curvature radius on the Safety Analysis tab (e. g. 3.0 mm).
188
SAFETY ANALYSIS
10
2. Click on the button Separation and select the separating surface. Invert the direction vector so that it points to the right direction.
direction vector of the

separating surface
direction vector of the
check geometry
3. Enter the desired second radius (e. g. 5.0 mm).

5. On that side of the separating surface that is defined by the vector, the curvature radius 5.0 will take effect, on the other side 3.0.
In the following figure you can see that only two independent parts have remained of the red zone of the circle edge. The shaded dis-
play makes this particularly clear.
red zones at the

circle edge
Individual
Individual curvature radii can be defined for the diagnosis at separate patches.
NOTE:
The number of definable radii is restricted to 99.
To process the example geometry applying individual radii, operate as follows:
1. Enter the desired individual radius (e. g. 2.0 mm).
2. Click on the button Individual and select the patches that shall be checked with an individual curvature radius. In the example, the
red strip on the right side of the geometry are selected.
189
SAFETY ANALYSIS
10
4. The previously red strips will become green. The individual curvature radii are displayed in the graphics.
5. The individual radii can be modified subsequently.
Normal Orientation
These options can be used to set the convergence direction of the internal sphere. For this, the patch normals of the selected geometry will
be aligned. The displayed vectors point in the direction of the centre point of the sphere.
Automatic
The normals will be aligned automatically across topology boundaries, if possible. This method can be used in most application
instances, and is therefore set as default.
The following figure shows a geometry with two independent topological regions (for illustration in shaded display with different colours):
190
SAFETY ANALYSIS
10
The diagnosis will be calculated across the topological gap without problems:
If the normals cannot be aligned automatically across several discontiguous regions, they have to be aligned for each single region (for
this see Proceeding of the diagnosis on page 186).
SPECIAL CASE:
In some special cases, a diagnosis mistake can appear with the automatic method. This can occur, for example, if the internal
sphere, when rolling along a topology region, does not touch the neighboured region in no position on the currently processed
region. In this case, the automatic will possibly not align the normal of the neighboured region correctly.
In order to achieve a reasonable diagnosis result also in these cases, some more options are available here for the normal orienta-
tion.
Manual
An appropriate vector is displayed for each topological geometry region allowing to define the convergence direction independently for
each region.
The figure shows the normal vectors of both topology regions (for illustration in shaded display):
The following figure shows two possibilities of manually aligning the two normals:
191
FLAT REGION
10
NOTE:
The number of topology regions is restricted to 99 for this method.
Original
The convergence direction is assumed for each patch in the direction of its natural normal. If the normals of the patches have all the same
orientation, the diagnosis will produce a continuous result.
Inverted
The convergence direction is assumed for each patch contrary to its natural normal.
10.3.5 Flat Region

10.3.5.1 What is a flat region?
Car body parts need to have a certain minimum curvature. In surface areas that fail to meet this requirement, the sheet metal tends to spring back
elastically after the forming process, so that the desired shape and aesthetics are not achieved in the manufacturing process. Exceedingly flat
areas, therefore, need to be identified and adjusted before manufacturing the press tools.
Diagnosis interpretation
With this diagnosis, those critical areas can be graphically highlighted. Through suitable parameter settings you can discover whether the flatness
is in one direction, or if there are regions where the panel is flat in several or even in all directions
192
FLAT REGION
10
Figure 35 Example for a result of the Diagnosis Flat Region
areas to be examined
more closely
Tessellation: Length 50.0

Diagnosis Chord: Length 100.0, Distance 0.1
Rotation Angle 10
The result is a red-green diagnosis that first of all enables only a qualitative assessment. The following can be realised:
Colour Meaning
Red The set criterion for the minimum curvature is not met in a specified sector (see section 10.3.5.3 Which
importance has the rotation angle? on page 195). The area has to be examined more closely. It is the
user who has to decide whether it is a flat region or not.
Green The criterion is met, there is no danger.
Using the subsequent manual deviation diagnosis you can additionally make a qualitative evaluation as this diagnosis also shows the actual cur-
vature.
Definition of flatness
Experience has shown that the minimum curvature radius should be approximately 12500 mm. This corresponds to a minimum distance from the
geometry of 0.1 mm over a chord length of 100 mm. These are the default settings of the options Length, Distance (see page 201), and Radius
(see page 201) in the function window.
The minimum curvature radius is defined by length and distance:
Figure 36 Definition of the minimum curvature radius
a) convex surface
Distance = Length = 100 mm

0.1 mm
Radius
= 12500 mm
b) concave surface
Length
Distance
Flat region check in practice

The ruler/disk method is used in the car body manufacturing. To concave parts applies: If you move a ruler with a length of 100 mm across the
car body surface, a minimum gap of 0.1 mm should remain between the surface and the middle of the ruler, no matter where you place it. To con-
vex parts applies: If you place the middle of the ruler tangentially on any surface point, the gap remaining between the surface and the ends of the
ruler should be at least the amount of 0.1 mm.
193
FLAT REGION
10
See also Figure 37 Principle of the ruler/disk method on page 194.
10.3.5.2 What are the verification methods used in the diagnosis Flat Region?
The diagnosis offers the ruler/disk method, and additionally a method performing a local check (options under Diagnosis), which are described in
the following.
In addition, you can execute a subsequent manual deviation diagnosis (option Diagnosis Distance) that enables an accurate assessment of the
curvature situation at a specific surface point.
Ruler/disk method (Chord)

Mode of operation
The virtual ruler with a length of e. g. 100 mm is placed with its centre point tangentially on the surface to be verified and revolved about the
centre point. The rotation axis coincides with the surface normal at this point. The rotation defines a planar disk with a radius of 50 mm touch-
ing exactly one facet point.
The system now checks for this point whether when revolving the ruler the curvature lies below a specified minimum value at each posi-
tion within the sector defined by the Rotation Angle. Only if this is the case in the entire sector, the point will be displayed in red.
This procedure is executed for each individual facet point of the surface.
Whether a point is displayed in red depends on the specified rotation angle. At 1 a point can be red, at 10 green.
For a detailed description and illustrative figures about the definition of the rotation angle, please refer to Which importance has the rotation
angle? on page 195.
Figure 37 Principle of the ruler/disk method
actual distance < actual distance >

minimum distance minimum distance
a) section through a concave surface area
length (default: 100 mm)

disk radius (50 mm) rotation
axis
minimum distance
(editable, default: 0.1 mm)
b) section through a convex surface area
Advantages and disadvantages

As the surfaces are analysed as a whole, i. e. across patch boundaries, the ruler/disk method delivers a very precise result, but is considera-
bly slower than the local method. Saddle points and other flat regions which are not relevant for sheet metal forming are not found but only
real flat regions (see Figure 38 Diagnosis result with the ruler/disk method on page 195).
Local method (Local)

Mode of operation
You can specify a curvature radius that shall not be exceeded, e. g. 12500 mm. In an infinitely small area around the evaluated facet point, the
system mathematically calculates the actual curvature in the appropriate point and compares it with the defined minimum curvature. If the
minimum curvature is kept, the point will be displayed in green. Whether the point is displayed in red depends on the set rotation angle.
Topological relations are not relevant, i. e. the check is done only on the current patch.
Advantages and disadvantages
The local method is set as default in the menu because it delivers a considerably quicker result than the ruler/disk method due to the faster
facet creation. If all areas are displayed in green, there is maximum certainty that no flat regions exist.
194
FLAT REGION
10
Red areas point out areas that have to be examined more closely. Not only real flat regions but also saddle points which are not relevant for
the sheet metal forming process are detected (see Figure 39 Diagnosis result with the local method on page 195). Moreover, the results at
boundaries between two patches (flat patch patch with a stronger curvature) may be misleading. If areas having no relevance for the form-
ing process should be excluded, the ruler/disk method has to be used.
Comparison of the verification methods

The following figures illustrate the different results of both verification methods. They show a surface that contains saddle points. The ruler/disk
method does not find these areas, whereas the local method finds them.
Figure 38 Diagnosis result with the ruler/disk method
Diagnosis: Chord
Length: 100.0 mm
Distance: 0.1 mm
Rotation Angle: 1
considered area
The diagnosis does not show any red

regions within the considered area.
Figure 39 Diagnosis result with the local method
Diagnosis: Local
Radius: 12500 mm
Rotation Angle: 1
considered area
1
1. The diagnosis shows red regions within

the considered area.
2. The manual deviation diagno-

sis (Diagnosis Distance) detects
a saddle point. 2
10.3.5.3 Which importance has the rotation angle?

Flat regions can be in one, or several and all directions. With the Rotation Angle you can determine which type of flatness is considered to be a
risk. Thus you are deciding which opening angle of the ruler (sector) is the threshold at which sheet metal forming becomes problematic. Such a
sector is identified by rotating the ruler tangentially about its centre point where it touches the surface, starting at the minimum curvature direction
and pivoting to the left and right of this direction as far as exceedingly small curvatures are encountered. Only if this is the case at each position of
the ruler within the sector, the point will be displayed in red.
195
FLAT REGION
10
Figure 40 Definition of a sector of directions with the option Rotation Angle
The following types of flat regions are distinguished:

Flatness in one direction (Rotation Angle = 1)
At a rotation angle of 1 (slider position at the very left), the investigated surface point will be marked in red if the ruler revolving about its cen-
tre point detects a curvature value below the defined minimum in even a single direction (within this small sector of 1). Using this initial value
will result in a maximum number of red regions.
If the curvature of the material is less than the minimum curvature in only one direction, e. g. surfaces having the curvature of a cylinder, this
may still be perfectly acceptable.
Figure 41 Rotation Angle = 1
2
main direction of the
flatness = minimum cur-
vature direction
1. Identification of regions
to be examined more
closely
2. Execution of the manual

deviation method (Diagnosis
Distance) in a point
Flatness in a sector of directions (Rotation Angle between 1 and 180)

Sheet metal forming problems often do not arise until there is flatness not only in one direction, but in a sector of directions.
The rotation from the direction of the minimum curvature direction to the left and right of e. g. 15 degrees results in a sector of 30 that can
be swept by the rotating ruler without encountering the required minimum curvature value. If you increase the rotation angle, the number of
areas marked in red decreases.
196
FLAT REGION
10
1. Identification of regions
to be examined more
closely
Rotation Angle 2. Execution of the manual

main direction of the deviation method (Diagnosis
(sector) = 30
flatness = minimum cur- Distance) in a point
vature direction
Flatness in all directions (Rotation Angle = 180)

The extreme case, i. e. a perfectly flat region, exists if the ruler can fully revolve about its rotation axis (sector of 360) without encountering
the minimum curvature value at any position. Such regions are always critical and should be avoided by all means.
If you define a rotation angle of 180 (slider position at the very right), the diagnosis should not show any red region at all if the evaluated part
is ok.
diagnosis does not detect any

perfectly flat region
10.3.5.4 How is the subsequent deviation diagnosis used?

The manual coloured deviation diagnosis is an add-on to the Ruler/disk method (Chord) (see page 194). The difference between a Bzier surface
replacing the disk and the surface covered by the disk will be measured by comparing the surfaces. This method enables a both qualitative and
quantitative assessment of the curvature situation at the investigated surface point.
As the facetisation of the surface model is displayed, you may additionally assess whether the selected side length of the tessellation makes
sense in relation to the disk.
Proceeding of the deviation diagnosis

1. Carry out the diagnosis with the desired parameters: Ruler/disk method (Chord) or Local method (Local).
2. Activate the button Diagnosis Distance.
197
FLAT REGION
10
3. Click in the area displayed in red which you want to investigate more closely.
4. A disk is placed with its centre point directly in the facet point that has been picked (distance = 0 in the centre point). The disk radius results
from the specified Length of the virtual ruler (50 mm at a default length of 100 mm). The disk radius adapts in its position to the underlying
surfaces as good as possible. The disk normal is aligned at the surface normal in the point.
5. The coloured deviation diagnosis is shown on the circular surface. It is a real deviation diagnosis, but with an inverted colour display com-
pared to the function Context Diagnoses Deviation (see page 211). All points being nearer to the underlying surface than the specified
value for Distance (default = 0.1 mm) will be displayed in red, the points further from the surface than that value in green.
The minimum curvature radius is represented by a vector arrow.
6. The disk can be moved across the surface at its centre point (left mouse button at the vector origin). In addition, the vector length, and thus
the disk radius, can be modified (left mouse button at the handle on the arrow tip). This also changes the value Length in the text field.
Figure 44 Manual disk diagnosis
minimum curva-
ture direction
moving
changing
changingradius
radius
Interpretation of the diagnosis result

The direction of the smallest curvature, the flat region, in the selected surface point (centre point of the disk) is represented by a vector symbol
(minimum curvature direction). It corresponds to the main direction of the red area.
The shortest distance between disk and surface is measured and displayed in the following colours:
Colour Marked Points
Red all surface points with the property: measured distance < set value
Green all surface points with the property: measured distance > = set value
Blue no result (the disk protrudes the surface edge)
At the arrow tip, that means at the disk edge and in the direction of the minimum curvature, the amount of the deviation between the circular
periphery and the corresponding surface point is determined and displayed as numerical value.
Flatness becomes critical not until the red area touches the circular periphery, and the curvature values are below the minimum curvature in the
entire sector.
198
FLAT REGION
10
Figure 45 Detection of a critical area with the deviation diagnosis
measured distance (0.159689) > measured distance (0.069473) <

set value (0.1) set value (0.1)
=> uncritical area => critical area
The critical rotation angle can be identified from the size of the red sector. If the disk radius is modified, the criterion for the minimum curvature
changes as well leading to a different diagnosis result.
Figure 46 Modification of the disk radius
sector of
sector of flat- flatness
ness
default setting: manipulation at the handles:

disk radius = 50 mm disk radius = 25 mm
> Length (Chord) = 100 mm > Length (Chord) = 50 mm
=> critical rotation angle appr. 40 => critical rotation angle appr. 80
10.3.5.5 What is the recommended operating procedure for the diagnosis?

1. Set the facet model density for the surface:
Tessellation with Tol = 0.1 or Length = 20 to 50 mm.
2. First use the Local method (Local) (see page 194) as it gives you a quick result:
Diagnosis Local with Radius = 12500 mm
Please be aware that the results of this verification method may be misleading! For a small model (less amount of data) it is recommended to
use the Ruler/disk method (Chord) (see page 194) right from the start.
3. Start the check with a Rotation Angle = 1 (flatness in one direction).
If all surfaces are displayed in green, there is maximum certainty that no flat region exists.
But with this setting you will usually find a relatively large quantity of red areas, which, however, do not necessarily represent a risk.
Gradually move the slider towards the right until it reaches the end. You will thereby modify the rotation angle and can watch how the diagno-
sis changes. A Rotation Angle = 180 will provide the perfectly flat regions (flatness in all directions).
4. If red regions are found at the critical rotation angle which you have defined, you should use the Ruler/disk method (Chord) (see page 194)
afterwards to exclude saddle points and other uncritical areas:
Diagnosis Chord with Length = 100 mm and Distance = 0.1
5. Change the tessellation, if required.
6. If you additionally want to get an assessment of the curvature situation at a specific surface point, use the subsequent deviation diagnosis
(Diagnosis Distance) where the disk will be replaced by a Bzier patch (see Proceeding of the deviation diagnosis on page 197).
199
FLAT REGION
10
NOTE:
The manual diagnosis also runs faster with the setting Local.
10.3.5.6 The menu Flat Region
Select +
The selection of the surface geometry to be checked will be reactivated.
Diagnosis Distance
The manual coloured deviation diagnosis activated via this button is an add-on to the Ruler/disk method (Chord) (see page 194).
Several deviation diagnoses can be carried out. Clicking on the minus button will delete the last diagnosis computed.
For a detailed description of this method including the diagnosis interpretation, as well as illustrating figures, please refer to How is the sub-
sequent deviation diagnosis used? on page 197.
Tessellation
The diagnosis is based on triangulated data. That means that surfaces are converted into a facet model before they are checked (see also
section 16.4 Scan creation Triangulation on page 363).
Length
Maximum length of the facets, regardless of the surface curvature.
Flat regions are identified precisely with this method, however, it requires more computing time. The smaller the value for the facet length,
the more precise, but also slower is the computation.
Tol
(Tolerance)
Maximum deviation of the facet model from the surface for a curvature dependent tessellation.
The surfaces are subdivided into smaller facets until the distance of the planar facets from the surfaces is smaller than this value. Through
this, large facets are created on areas with a lower curvature, and smaller ones on surfaces with a stronger curvature. This method deliv-
ers a quick result, but in flat regions it may lead to results that are hard to interpret.
Figure 47 Tessellation methods
Length Tol
Diagnosis
Two diagnosis methods are available: the ruler/disk method (Chord) and the local method (Local).
For a detailed description of both methods please refer to What are the verification methods used in the diagnosis Flat Region? on
page 194.
200
DYNAMIC DISTANCE DIAGNOSIS
10
For performance reasons it is recommendable to start the computation with Local (default setting). This method delivers a considerably
quicker result than Chord. If all surfaces are marked in green, there are definitely no flat regions. If red areas are found, you should definitely
use Chord afterwards in order to exclude saddle points and other uncritical areas. This method delivers a very precise result, but is consider-
ably slower than Local.
The subsequent deviation diagnosis (see Diagnosis Distance) also runs faster with the setting Local (see also Proceeding of the deviation
diagnosis on page 197).
Edge, Shading
Display mode for the diagnosis result: You may choose between display of the facet edges computed with the Tessellation option and
shaded display.
Length, Distance
Length of the virtual ruler (cord) and minimum distance between ruler and geometry for Chord. These parameters define the minimum curva-
ture. Please refer to Flat region check in practice on page 193, and Ruler/disk method (Chord) on page 194.
Radius
Minimum curvature radius for Local. Please refer to Definition of flatness on page 193, and Local method (Local) on page 194.
Rotation Angle
With this slider you can determine, which type of flatness shall be found. The system checks within the sector defined by the rotation angle
whether the minimum curvature is kept.
For a detailed description of the rotation angle definition including illustrative figures please refer to Which importance has the rotation
angle? on page 195.
The angle of rotation can also be specified directly in the text field.
The following table shows how the rotation angle should be set in order to find the different types of flatness:
Flatness Type Slider Position Rotation Angle Figure
flat regions in one direction at the very left 1 Figure 41 Rotation Angle = 1
on page 196
flat regions in a sector of direc- between left and between 1 and Figure 42 Rotation Angle = 15
tions right end 180 on page 197
perfectly flat regions at the very right 180 Figure 43 Rotation Angle = 180
on page 197
10.3.6 Dynamic Distance Diagnosis

10.3.6.1 The menu Dynamic Distance
With this diagnosis function, the distance between two curves can be dynamically computed and displayed. After selection of object and refer-
ence curve, a distance value is displayed in the graphic area and in the function window in addition to the minimum and maximum value. This
value can be moved dynamically along the first selected curve (see figure below). A context menu for manipulating the point position can be acti-
vated with the right mouse button containing, apart from general options, some special features for the dynamic distance diagnosis (see
section 10.3.6.2 The context menu for the point position on page 202).
Figure 48 Dynamic distance diagnosis
Dist: 9.6027
Dist:
Dist: 9.1169
reference curve
current point
position
Min: 9.0316
Max: 14.437
object curve
201
VISUAL SURFACE COMPARISON
10
Select
Reactivates the selection of one or several contiguous curves as object and reference.
Object, Reference
Object and reference curves can be selected separately.
Gap
Display of the admissible gap between two successive curves to be considered as one curve.
Distance, Maximum, Minimum

Numerical display of the distance value at the current position, as well as the maximum and minimum distance value.
Model: 3D
Display of the 3D distance in X, Y, and Z direction of the coordinate system set via the option Model in the context menu.
OK
The geometry is reread, and the diagnosis is recomputed.
10.3.6.2 The context menu for the point position

Apart from general options (see section 2.5.8 The point symbol on page 38), some special features for the dynamic distance diagnosis are avail-
able:
Edge Swap
Object and reference curve will be exchanged, and the diagnosis will be recomputed.
Maximum, Minimum
The maximum or minimum distance value will be searched and displayed as current point position.
Reset
Maximum and minimum are set to the current point position. The values will be recomputed referring to that region of the object curve only
along which the point will subsequently be moved.
Save
The distance at the current point position will be saved by creating a straight line.
Deviation, Optimal Distance

Specification of a desired optimum distance value, as well as a deviation from this value that shall be tolerated. All distance values lying within
the defined range (Optimal Distance Deviation) will be displayed green.
Deviation: Model, Plane, View

Setting the coordinate system used for the deviation calculation.
10.3.7 Visual Surface Comparison

This diagnosis can be used to compare two sets of data via the transparency of the assigned materials.
Select elements as Object and Reference. These elements will either get a different material, or a copy of their original material. The colour of the
materials can be defined in the menu. After having quit the function, the elements will get back their previous material.
The transparency value will initially be set to 0.5 for both materials. Moving the slider to the right will increase the transparency value for the object
material, while simultaneously decreasing the value for the reference material. Moving the slider to the left will have the reverse effect.
NOTE:
When changing the tessellation or display parameters, or modifying an element during the function execution, the element will get back its
original material. If you want to continue with the visual surface comparison afterwards, you have to press OK once. Then the temporary
material will be assigned to all elements.
202
NOMINAL ACTUAL VALUE COMPARISON
10
The menu Visual Surface Comparison
Object, Reference
Selection of the elements for the two data sets.
With the button +, you can subsequently select additional elements.
Material colour
Selection of the colour for Object and Reference.
Keep Materials
The selected geometry elements will be displayed with their original materials. For this purpose, the original materials will be duplicated, and
the modifications of the transparency will be done on this copy. The materials of the data base will not be modified.
Transparency slider
Controls the transparency of both materials.
If the slider is on the left stop position, the object material is not transparent (Transparency 0) and the reference material completely transpar-
ent (Transparency 1). If the slider is on the right stop position, the object material is completely transparent and the reference material not
transparent.
The slider can be moved to the stop positions by pressing the material icons.
10.3.8 Nominal Actual Value Comparison

With this diagnosis function, you can execute a detailed deviation diagnosis between an object and a reference. For this, points are regularly dis-
tributed on the object, and projected on the reference. The computation of the deviation is carried out as coloured diagnosis. Deviation values that
are defined by specifying a minimum and a maximum value are assigned to the colours for the shading. After executing the diagnosis, the distri-
bution of the deviation values according to the displayed colours will be shown in the menu.
The general functionality corresponds to those of the coloured deviation diagnosis (see section 10.6.2 Context Diagnoses Deviation on
page 211).
The menu Nominal Actual Value Comparison
203
DIAGNOSES DIAGNOSES
10
Select
Reactivates the selection.
Object, Reference
Separate selection of object and reference.
Update
If the geometry was modified and the menu was open meanwhile, the diagnosis can be updated using this button.
Symmetric
The deviation values will be distributed symmetrically around Zero. The maximum absolute value with plus sign will be assigned to the upper
limit of the tolerance range, the value with minus sign to the lower limit.
Remember
If this option is switched on, the selection set will be kept. You can leave the diagnosis function, carry out other functions, and return to the
diagnosis without having to re-select the geometry elements here.
Range of values for the deviation

Deviation values that are calculated by specifying a minimum and a maximum value are assigned to the colours for the shading. These values
can then be changed by means of the thumb wheels.
The distribution of the deviation values according to the displayed colours can be seen in the fields behind the thumb wheels.
Outside
Percentage of the deviation values lying outside the defined range.
Maximum Deviation
In the graphics area, the value of the maximum deviation is displayed.
Count
The number of points specified here will be projected. The points are regularly distributed (on patches and faces in u and v direction).
If a Nominal Actual Value Comparison shall be carried out on faces, additional points will be computed on the face edges. Their number is
controlled via the display tolerance. Modify this value, if required, in the menu Display Tessellation (see page 319).
NOTE:
The diagnosis has to be carried out again to activate the modified display tolerance.
Identification
Via this button you can numerically visualize the deviation value at certain points. For this, select a point on the object. The value will be dis-
played in the graphics and in the menu.
10.4 Diagnoses Diagnoses

The control window containing all available diagnostic functions Diagnoses Diagnoses can be activated:
via the pull down menu,
by the icon in the service functions block, as well as

with the shortcut Ctrl-D.
The menu consists of the tabs Diagnoses and Parameter, which are described in the following sections.
10.4.1 Diagnoses
The menus will be opened by clicking on the labelled buttons. After generation of a diagnosis, the corresponding button remains active as long as
the diagnosis is not deleted. The display of existing diagnoses can be switched on and off using the check buttons. Individual colours can be
assigned to context and shape diagnoses. For each shape diagnosis, a check button is available for displaying the diagnosis in the current colour
of the geometry element.
The Diagnoses tab consists of four areas:
Object Diagnoses
provide statistic information on a selected object (see section 10.5 Diagnoses Object on page 206).
204
PARAMETER
10
Context Diagnoses
display relations between several objects graphically (see section 10.6 Diagnoses Context on page 210).
Shape Diagnoses
provide information on the geometrical shape of selected objects (see section 10.7 Diagnoses Shape on page 230).
General Diagnostic Functions

See section 10.8 Global Diagnoses functions on page 246.
10.4.2 Parameter
General display parameters for diagnoses can be specified on this tab.
Diagnosis on Scans
An individual colour can be specified for diagnoses on scans.
Curvature values
Display of curvature values in diagnoses.
If Radius of Curvature is switched on, the curvature radius r (see figure 49) will be displayed, in case of Curvature the reciprocal value 1/r
(see figure 50). In both cases, the curvature radii are numerically indicated.
205
DIAGNOSES OBJECT
10
Figure 49 Display of the curvature radius
curvature radius r
PN:187.8
PN:176.7
PN:166.8 4
PN:157.9
numerical display of
the curvature radii
Figure 50 Display of the curvature
curvature 1/r
numerical display of
the curvature radii
PN:187.8
PN:176.7
PN:166.8
PN:157.9
Visibility of values
Display of diagnosis values in the graphics area for shaded surfaces.
Hidden: If a numerical value lies behind a shaded surface, it is partially or completely hidden.
Always visible: The numerical values are displayed in front of the surfaces and thus always visible.
10.5 Diagnoses Object

Object diagnoses provide statistic information on selected objects.
10.5.1 Object Diagnoses Identification

The identification diagnosis can be used to display type (e. g. Part/Surface/Patch) and hierarchical structure (e. g. Part Name/Surface Name/
Patch Number) of geometry objects. Several objects may be selected in succession.
A dynamic object identification can be carried out using the function Identification in the special functions block (see section 3.1 Special Func-
tions on page 45).
10.5.2 Object Diagnoses Local

The local object diagnosis displays the identification diagnosis and additionally calculates all geometrical information for a point on an object. The
selected point will be marked with P1. Several points may be selected in succession.
The following information are given in detail.
206
OBJECT DIAGNOSES LOCAL
10
for curve points:
curve parameter t
coordinate values
curvature radius
tangent direction
for patch and face points:
parameter value in U and V direction

coordinate values
minimum and maximum curvature radius
surface normal direction
for scan points:
point number
coordinate values
normal direction
for raw data points:
point number
coordinate values
for plane points:
point type
coordinate values
207
OBJECT DIAGNOSES GLOBAL
10
for circle centre points:
coordinate values of the centre point
10.5.3 Object Diagnoses Global

The global object diagnosis displays the identification diagnosis and calculates geometrical information for an object. Several objects may be
selected in succession. The diagnosis is dynamic: it is permanently re-computed during a geometry modification.
The following information are given in detail.
patches, faces and surfaces:
for patches, faces and surfaces:

Minimum and maximum curvature radius, its position is displayed on the object in the graphics area.
surface area
material thickness and volume
weight and specific weight
Material thickness and specific weight can be edited.
only for patches and faces:
order in U and V direction
number of segments (only for NURBS/B-Spline patches and faces)
only for surfaces:
maximum orders of the patches and faces
number of patches and faces
for scans:
Scan Type: Point Based, Edge Based, or Compress (for this see section Scan types on page 358)
number of points
number of facets
for scan sets:
total number of points of all scans

number of scans
208
OBJECT DIAGNOSES MASS PROPERTIES
10
for raw data segments:
arc length
number of points of the segment
for raw data contours:
number of segments and points

arc length across all segments
for circles and arcs:
arc length
centre point
radius
begin and end angle
for straight lines:
length
coordinates of begin and end point
for curve segments, curves and patch or face edges:
arc length
order
minimum and maximum curvature radius, its position is displayed on the object in the graphics area.
NOTE:
These information are not given for circles and lines as selected curve segments.
For curves consisting only of one circle, the circle information are displayed without the curvature position. For curves consisting of
several objects including circles and lines, the curvature positions are set to the centre of the circle resp. the beginning of the line if
the minimum/maximum curvature radius is to be found here.
number of segments (only for curves)
10.5.4 Object Diagnoses Mass Properties

Using this diagnosis, the volume and centre of gravity of a solid can be calculated and indicated.
209
DIAGNOSES CONTEXT
10
The menu Mass Properties
Select +
The selection will be reactivated. Additional surfaces may be selected with the + button.
Gravity Centre, Volume

The coordinates for the centre of gravity and the volume will be specified here.
NOTE:
The centre of gravity will be displayed temporarily in the graphics area. To permanently save the point you may use the function
Curve segment creation Design Points (see page 397) with the selection of diagnosis data.
Distance (Topo)
(Distance (Topology))
This value is used for the generation of topology regions. Surfaces are recognized as being neighboured if their distance from each other is
smaller than this value.
Tessellation
The solid is faceted according to the specified values (see section 11.21 Display Tessellation on page 319).
10.6 Diagnoses Context

Context diagnoses graphically display relations between different objects.
10.6.1 Context Diagnoses Distance

The distance between any two positions on one or two objects is computed and displayed.
Figure 51 Distance diagnosis
3D distance
.P1
3D:116.9072
.P2
The menu Diagnosis Distance
Select
A new selection will be carried out.
210
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES DEVIATION
10
1st Point, 2nd Point

The first or second point of a just created diagnostic line can be re-selected.
Multiple
Several diagnoses may be generated.
Direction: X, Y, Z, 3D
The deviation in X, Y or Z direction or the 3D deviation will be displayed.
Immediately after a diagnosis has been generated, the distance in another coordinate direction may be computed (only if Multiple is switched
off).
2D-Distance (View), 2D-Distance (Plane)

The 2D distance in the current view or plane will be indicated.
10.6.2 Context Diagnoses Deviation

The deviation of an object from a reference object can be calculated. During modifications, for example, curves and surfaces may permanently be
compared with the raw data or scans on which they have been created. The minimum and/or maximum deviation (as absolute value) is displayed.
During the deviation diagnosis, several points which are regularly distributed across the object are projected onto the reference object. For raw
data, however, all points are projected. The projection can be carried out in the direction of the surface or work plane normal.
NOTE:
In addition to this functionality, another deviation diagnosis is available in Unified Modelling (ProjBase Extended Diagnosis). Both
diagnoses are using different computation algorithms if non-triangulated scans are involved, and give therefore different results. For
detailed information on this please refer to Deviation diagnosis on page 656.
If Bar is active as display type, the absolute deviation of the object from the reference object is displayed by deviation vectors (see figure below).
Figure 52 Deviation diagnosis with display of the vectors
patch
3D:4.875
3D:3.83
3D:2.63
3D:1.071
raw data contours
For patches or faces as object and patches, faces or scans as reference object you may carry out a dynamic coloured diagnosis via the display
type Colour (see figure below). This makes it possible to evaluate the course of the object compared to the reference object. For this diagnosis,
five deviation values are assigned to the colours of a colour range (see also section The submenu Tolerance on page 214).
211
10
Figure 53 Coloured deviation diagnosis
IMPORTANT!
If a coloured deviation diagnosis is to be carried out, the shading must be switched off for surfaces and the display of the facets for scans in
the menu Display Display (see section 11.2 Display Display on page 249).
In areas where nothing could be projected, a maximum deviation value will be assumed (see figure below).
Figure 54 Coloured deviation diagnosis showing an area without projection
area without projection
Scan as reference object

For the diagnosis of a patch or face, points are projected from the scan onto the object. For scans with a low point density or non-faceted scans
this often leads to areas where no points can be projected, and which therefore seem to be defective (see figure below).
Figure 55 Coloured deviation diagnosis of a patch from a scan
scan
patch
In this case, decrease the number of points to be projected (option Count) and/or the display tolerance for face edges (in the menu Display
Tessellation, see page 319).
NOTE:
The main menu Diagnosis Deviation and The submenu Tolerance are described in the following sections.
212
10
10.6.2.2 The main menu Diagnosis Deviation
Select
The selection will be reactivated.
Object, Reference
Object and reference object can be selected separately.
Multiple
Display All
This option can only be activated for the display type Bar.
The calculation of the deviation is successful if the surface or work plane normals intersect the reference object in the selected points.
OFF
Only these deviations which have been successfully calculated are displayed.
ON
The deviations which did not lead to a result are displayed as well.
Count
The number of points specified here will be projected. The points are regularly distributed (on patches and faces in u and v direction).
The deviation vectors are displayed according to the setting of Display All.
If a coloured diagnosis shall be carried out on faces, additional points will be computed on the face edges. Their number is controlled via the
display tolerance. Modify this value, if required, in the menu Display Tessellation (see page 319).
NOTE:
Scaling
Scaling factor for the display of the deviation vectors. The value can only be activated for the display type Bar. If the factor is 1, the values are
displayed in a scale of 1:1.
Region
Display Type Bar active:
Deviations within the minimum and maximum tolerance specified here will be displayed.
Display Type Colour active:
A minimum and maximum deviation value can be specified for the colour range in a sub-menu (see section The submenu Tolerance on
page 214).
Projection
These options have only an effect if the object and/or reference object is a patch or face.
Norm
(Normal)
The points are projected in normal direction of the reference surface.
Generally, the normal of the object (patch or face) determines the projection direction. If the object is a curve, raw data segment, scan or
point, and the reference object a patch, face or scan, the normal of the reference surface will be used as projection direction.
Plane
The points are projected in normal direction of the current work plane.
Display Type
The type of the display can be set.
You may switch between the display types, if you first carry out a selection and a diagnosis using the option Colour.
Bar
The absolute deviation values are displayed by vectors.
Colour
With this option the course of the deviation of a patch or face from a reference patch, face or scan can be displayed and evaluated by
means of a coloured shading.
213
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES MIN/MAX
10
After activation of the option Colour, the window Tolerance will be opened.
Edge, Shading
For a coloured diagnosis on surfaces you can choose between display of facet edges and shaded display.
System, Direction
The deviation in X, Y or Z/Depth direction of the specified coordinate system or the 3D deviation will be calculated and displayed. The coordi-
nate system to be used for this can be specified.
Coordinate System Speci- Direction: X, Y, Z/Depth Direction: 3D

fied
Model specified coordinate system is valid for 3D deviation is calculated in space

(model coordinate system) calculating the X, Y or Z/depth coordi- (no projection)
nate of the deviation
Plane 3D deviation is projected into the
(work plane) specified plane
View
(view plane)
Min, Max
(Minimum, Maximum)
The minimum and/or maximum deviation will be displayed.
10.6.2.3 The submenu Tolerance
Deviation values to be defined in the main menu via Region are assigned to the different colours. Specify a minimum and maximum value
between which three additional values are calculated.
The positive direction of the deviation values corresponds to the patch or face normal direction.
Update
After execution of the diagnosis, the upper and lower limit of the tolerance range is set to the computed maximum and minimum value.
Symmetric
This option is only available if Update is switched on.
The deviation values will be distributed symmetrically around Zero. The maximum absolute value with plus sign will be assigned to the upper
limit of the tolerance range, the value with minus sign to the lower limit.
NOTE:
The update will only be carried out after clicking on OK in the main menu.
10.6.3 Context Diagnoses Min/Max

The minimum and/or maximum distances between two objects are computed.
214
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES CLEARANCE
10
Figure 56 Min/Max diagnosis
distance in Y direction
Y:0.113
Y:0.4122
The menu Diagnosis Min/Max
Select
A new selection will be carried out.
NOTE:
A different order of selection of the objects usually produces different results, since other points are used for the calculation.
1st Object, 2nd Object

Both objects may be selected separately.
Multiple
Several diagnoses can be generated.
Count
The number of points specified here will be used for the calculation. The points are regularly distributed (on patches and faces in U and V
direction).
Min, Max
(Minimum, Maximum)
The minimum and/or maximum distance is displayed.
The distance in X, Y or Z direction or the 3D distance will be displayed.
10.6.4 Context Diagnoses Clearance

The outer edge of a patch cluster is often filleted with a certain radius. The clearance is the shortest distance between the edge fillets of two adja-
cent patch clusters. According to the perspective, the gap seems to be wider or narrower (see figure 57). This diagnosis function can be used to
check how the gap looks from a certain view, and whether it is homogenous, that means whether the distance between the adjacent patch clus-
ters is always equal along the gap length. For this purpose, true section through the surfaces are generated along a spine curve by means of
which distance values between object and reference surface are calculated.
215
10
Figure 57 Concept of clearance
clearance between fil-

leted surfaces
section through
the geometry
different clearance
according to
perspective
view =
section plane
In the following is described the workflow of the clearance diagnosis. The individual steps are illustrated in figure 58.
1. Select surfaces as object and reference, as well as a a suitable curve as spine curve.
2. True sections are computed through all object and reference surfaces.
For this, the specified number of section planes is generated along the spine curve. When choosing the coordinate system Plane or View, the
section planes are adjusted in a way that they will be normal to the work resp. view plane.
3. Points are then regularly distributed on each individual intersection line on the object surfaces. The number of sections can be defined as well.
For the setting Plane or View, the intersection lines on the object and reference will afterwards be projected into the work resp. view plane.
4. For each point, the most proximate point of the appropriate intersection line on the reference surface will be searched. This results in the min-
imum distance value between the surfaces along the section in the set coordinate system.
These minimum distance values are computed for each individual true section and displayed graphically as bars or in coloured representa-
tion.
By setting View, the silhouette lines in the current view plane can be displayed in this way (for this see option System, page 219).
5. From these values, the minimum and/or maximum value will be computed and numerically indicated afterwards.
216
10
Figure 58 Principle of the Diagnosis Clearance (System: Model, Display Type: Bar)
true sections
(option Count)
spine curve
maximum of all
distance values
minimum of all
distance values
section through
the geometry
distributed points
(option Steps)
section line on section line on

the object the reference
minimum distance value

view = along the considered sec-
section plane tion line
The main menu Diagnosis Clearance and The context menu for the dynamic diagnosis are described in the following sections.
10.6.4.2 The main menu Diagnosis Clearance
Select
Object, Reference
The object and reference surfaces can be selected separately.
Curve
The spine curve along which the true sections are calculated can be selected separately.
217
10
There is the possibility to use only a part of the selected spine curve for the calculation. For this, activate the check button below the button
Part..
If you have selected several curves that are not connected, the region can only be specified via the two text fields. Entering values
between 0 and 1 defines a relative range that will be applied to each individual curve.
If you have selected a single curve or several connected curves, the region can also be defined via the text fields. In this case, the param-
eter range will be applied to the whole (connected) curve. In addition, the curve can be restricted by graphical selection via the button
Part. (Partial). Select two points on the curve. The region marked through this, will be turned into relative values that will be displayed in
the text fields.
For a dynamic diagnosis (option Dynamic) you cannot restrict the spine curve.
Count
Number of true sections which are calculated along the selected spine curve. This corresponds to the number of values displayed after the
computation.
For a dynamic diagnosis (option Dynamic), the number of saved distance values is shown here.
Steps
Number of points which are regularly distributed on each generated intersection line on the object surfaces.
Scaling
Scaling factor for the display of the distance values.
Dynamic
After activating this check button you can execute a dynamic clearance diagnosis. A plane symbol representing the current section plane is
displayed at the spine curve. The calculated distance value at the current position will be displayed numerically and through a line.
The plane can be moved along the spine curve tangent.
A context menu for manipulating the plane can be activated with the right mouse button containing, apart from general options, some special
features for the dynamic clearance diagnosis (see section 10.6.4.3 The context menu for the dynamic diagnosis on page 222).
When using the option Range, values that are lying within the defined range are not displayed with the non-dynamic diagnosis. With the
dynamic diagnosis, these values are marked with an R in front of the distance value.
Specification of values for the clearance

Without definition of clearance values, the computed total distance values will be displayed (see figure 59 on page 220). However, you can
specify values for a desired clearance. In this case, the deviations from the determined values are calculated and displayed. According to the
set display type, either bars on the object, or a colour information is the output result. For the interpretation of the graphical display of the diag-
nosis result please refer to Table 21 Interpretation of the clearance diagnosis on page 219.
For the diagnosis, you can only switch on one of these options at a time, and not both at the same time.
Range
Specification of a value range for the optimum gap. Only those values that are lying outside of the defined range are taken into consider-
ation.
The numerical display at the object indicates the minimum and/or maximum distance value that is independent from the defined range
(see figure 60 on page 221).
Optimal Gap
Specification of a particular value for the optimum gap.
At the object will be indicated the optimum value, as well as the minimum and/or maximum deviation from the optimum. If the correspond-
ing deviation value is lying below the optimum, it will be displayed with a negative sign. If the value is lying above the optimum, it will be
indicated with a positive sign (see figure 61 on page 222).
Additionally, Delta values can be specified for the Optimal Gap. They define a value range that has the same effect as Range:
Optimal Gap Delta Min = lower range limit
Optimal Gap + Delta Max = upper range limit
Display Type
The diagnosis computes a 3D framework of bars that can be visualized in through different methods.
For a dynamic diagnosis (option Dynamic) you cannot choose the display type. The bar representation will always be used in this case.
Bar
Output of the diagnosis result as bar information. The displayed lines correlate with the individual 3D distance values.
Colour
Output of the diagnosis result as colour information. For this, colours are distributed on the 3D bars framework. The coloured display
always shows the ratio
of a measured value to the minimum (WITHOUT Range or Optimal Gap),
of a measured value to the next range limit (WITH Range), or
of a measured value to the optimum (WITH Optimal Gap).
The following applies:
System: Model
The 3D distance values are used.
System: View/Plane
The 2D values calculated by projection of the 3D values into the work or view plane are used.
The diagnosis result is to be interpreted as follows:
218
10
Table 21 Interpretation of the clearance diagnosis
Display of the Length Direction Colour Figure

values (3D Framework) (3D Framework)
Without usage of the options Range or Optimal Gap: figure 59 on

page 220
all values 3D distance values positive direction green: distance values up
to the minimum
red: distance value from

the minimum up
Usage of the option Range or the options Optimal Gap and Delta: figure 60 on
page 221
values within the =0
range (connection of the adja-
cent values)
values below the = deviation from the lower negative direction green
range range limit
values above the = deviation from the positive direction red

range upper range limit
Usage of the option Optimal Gap without Delta: figure 61 on

page 222
values below the = deviation from the opti- negative direction green
optimum mum
values above the positive direction red

optimum
System
Specification of the coordinate system for the computation of the clearance value. The coordinate system is used for adjusting the section
planes and for projecting the intersection lines.
When choosing Model, no projections are carried out.
When choosing View, the lines at the object and reference surfaces that are connecting the distance values are nearly identical with the split
lines of these surfaces when setting View and Angle = 0 (see section 10.7.3 Shape Diagnoses Split on page 236). These lines represent
the silhouette lines in the current view plane.
Direction
Here you can define the component of the minimum and/or maximum distance to be computed and displayed numerically:
the coordinate X, Y resp. Z/Depth, or
the 3D value.
Min, Max
(Minimum, Maximum)
One distance value is generated for each true section through object and reference. From all distance values, the minimum and/or maximum
value will be computed and can be numerically indicated.
219
10
Figure 59 Clearance diagnosis without options Range or Optimal Gap
Range/Optimal
Gap: OFF
Count: 25
Scaling: 1
System: Model
Direction: 3D
220
10
Figure 60 Clearance diagnosis with option Range
Range: 9.15 ... 9.25

Count: 25
Scaling: 25
System: Model
Direction: 3D
221
10
Figure 61 Clearance diagnosis with option Optimal Gap
Optimal Gap: 9.1

Count: 25
Scaling: 25
System: Model
Direction: 3D
Administration of diagnosis groups

In the lower expandible part of the menu you will find options for managing the generated diagnosis groups.
Selection list
All generated diagnosis groups are displayed in a selection list. They can be switched on and off individually by highlighting the name and
clicking on it again, or via the check button Visible. Activated diagnoses groups will be marked with a star.
When using the global diagnosis function On/Off for switching on/off all diagnoses (see section 10.8 Global Diagnoses functions on
page 246), only the Levelling diagnosis groups that are switched on in this selection list will be shown or hidden.
New
The diagnosis group marked in the selection list will be modified according to the currently set parameters when reexecuting the function. If a
new diagnosis group shall be created with the next function execution, the button New has to be activated first.
Rename
Renaming diagnosis groups. The diagnosis groups get the name Clear (Clearance) and a consecutive number after execution.
Delete
Deleting individual diagnosis groups.
Delete All
Deleting all diagnosis groups.
On/Off
The generated diagnosis groups can be globally switched on and off with this button. The setting, whether the diagnosis groups are switched
visible or invisible will not be changed with this option.
Visible
The diagnosis groups available in the selection list can be switched on and off individually via this check button.
10.6.4.3 The context menu for the dynamic diagnosis

Apart from general options (see section 2.5.3 The plane symbol on page 29), some special features for the dynamic clearance diagnosis (option
Dynamic) are available in the context menu of the plane symbol:
222
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES LEVELLING
10
Position
Any selected position will be projected on the current spine curve. The plane will then be set to this position.
NOTE:
If you have selected as spine curve several curves that are not connected, you have at first to set the plane to the desired curve
using the option Next curve. Only after this you can select a new position on this curve with Position.
Save
Saving the distance value at the current position.
When executing this option for the first time, a new diagnosis group is created (see section Administration of diagnosis groups on page 222.
Any further value will be added to this diagnosis group when saving it.
NOTE:
Saving the first value and creating a new diagnosis group can also be done with the OK button.
When saving a new value, all other values already included in the diagnosis group will be recomputed according to the currently set parame-
ters, and the display will be updated.
Next curve
If you have selected as spine curve several curves that are not connected, the plane will be set to the beginning of the next curve. If you have
selected a single curve or several connected curves, the plane will be set to the beginning of the curve.
Previous curve
If you have selected as spine curve several curves that are not connected, the plane will be set to the end of the previous curve. If you have
selected a single curve or several connected curves, the plane will be set to the end of the curve.
10.6.5 Context Diagnoses Levelling

In addition to the clearance diagnosis (see section 10.6.4 Context Diagnoses Clearance on page 215), it is possible to check adjacent filleted
patch clusters for their level differences resp. gap width. Different methods of extending the selected geometry objects the are available for com-
puting the deviation between object and reference:
No Extension of the Object/Reference
Extension of an Object or Reference Edge
Extension of a Reference Surface (Tangential)
The diagnosis result is output as a bar information. A coloured diagnosis can be executed for the extension methods No Extension and Tangen-
tial.
The menu Diagnosis Levelling
Select
Object, Reference
The object and reference surfaces can be selected separately.
Count
The number of points specified here will be regularly distributed on the object (for patches and faces in u and v direction), and projected onto
the reference.
Scaling
Scaling factor for the display of the deviation values.
Range
Specification of a value range for an optimum deviation. Only those deviation values that are lying outside of the defined range are taken into
consideration. The numerical display indicates the minimum and/or maximum deviation value that is independent from the defined range.
223
10
Obj. Extension, Ref. Extension

(Object Extension, Reference Extension)
For determining their level difference or gap width, object and reference can be extended by the following methods:
No Extension of the Object/Reference
Object and/or reference will be extended. The deviation is computed directly in relation to the selected geometry object.
Extension of an Object or Reference Edge
Edges selected as object and/or reference will be moved forward in a way that a theoretical edge is resulting. Afterwards, this theoretical
edge is used for calculating the deviation.
You can choose between two methods for determining the theoretical edge:
Edge (Maximally)
The edge will be moved maximally. For each point on the selected edge, the point on the opposite patch or face edge is searched
along the iso-line. The tangents in both points are created and their intersection point is computed (see figure 62, a). The connection
of all intersection points results in the theoretical edge.
Edge
The edge is moved forward in way that the tangents form an angle of 90. For each point on the selected edge, that point is searched
along the iso-line where the tangent raised in this point is perpendicular to the tangent of the edge point (see figure 62, b). If an angle
of 90 cannot be found, the same result as with Edge (Maximally) will be obtained.
Figure 62 Finding the theoretical edge
a) Extension method Edge (Maximally)

theoretical
edge
object
= patch edge/ reference
face edge (here: edge,
patch/
No Extension)
face
b) Extension method Edge
Extension of a Reference Surface (Tangential)

The edges of patches/faces selected as reference will be extended tangentially. If possible, the points distributed on the object are pro-
jected perpendicularly onto the reference. If this is not possible, the projection is done onto the tangential extension of the reference.
The following figures show diagnosis results using different extension methods.
224
10
Figure 63 Diagnosis Levelling with extended surface
reference object
section through
the geometry
tangential
extension
deviation
reference patch
(Extension Tangential) object patch
(No Extension)
view =
section plane
Figure 64 Diagnosis Levelling with extended edge
theoretical
edge
object
= fillet edge
curve
reference
= curve
section through
the geometry
theoretical
edge
deviation
object curve reference curve

(Extension Edge) (No Extension)
view =
section plane
225
10
Figure 65 Diagnosis Levelling with extended edge and extended surface
theoretical
object edge
= fillet edge
curve reference
= patch
section through
the geometry
theoretical
edge
deviation
object curve tangential reference patch

(Extension Edge) extension (Extension Tangential)
view =
section plane
Display Type
The diagnosis computes a 3D framework of bars that can be visualized in through different methods:
Bar
Output of the diagnosis result as bar information. The displayed lines correlate with the individual 3D deviation values.
Colour
Output of the diagnosis result as colour information. Fro this, colours are distributed on the 3D bars framework. Deviations in normal
direction of the reference are displayed red, deviations in opposite direction are displayed green.
A coloured diagnosis is only available if as extension method is set None for the object and None or Tangential for the reference (see
Obj. Extension, Ref. Extension, page 224).
System, Direction
Here you can define, which component of the minimum and/or maximum deviation shall be computed and displayed numerically, and which
coordinate system shall be used for this.
Coordinate System Speci- Direction: X, Y, Z/Depth Direction: 3D

fied
Model specified coordinate system is valid for 3D deviation is calculated in space

(model coordinate system) calculating the X, Y, or Z/Depth coordi- (no projection)
nate of the deviation
Plane 3D deviation is projected into the
(work plane) specified plane
View
(view plane)
Min, Max
(Minimum, Maximum)
The minimum and/or maximum deviation will be displayed numerically.
226
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES ANGLE
10
Administration of diagnosis groups

In the lower expandible part of the menu you will find options for managing the generated diagnosis groups.
Selection List
All generated diagnosis groups are displayed in a selection list. They can be switched on and off individually by highlighting the name and
clicking on it again, or via the check button Visible. Activated diagnoses groups will be marked with a star.
When using the global diagnosis function On/Off for switching on/off all diagnoses (see section 10.8 Global Diagnoses functions on
page 246), only the Levelling diagnosis groups that are switched on in this selection list will be shown or hidden.
New
The diagnosis group marked in the selection list will be modified according to the currently set parameters when reexecuting the function. If a
new diagnosis group shall be created with the next function execution, the button New has to be activated first.
Rename
Renaming diagnosis groups. The diagnosis groups get the name Level (Levelling) and a consecutive number after execution.
Delete
Deleting individual diagnosis groups.
Delete All
Deleting all diagnosis groups.
On/Off
The generated diagnosis groups can be globally switched on and off with this button. The setting, whether the diagnosis groups are switched
visible or invisible will not be changed with this option.
Visible
The diagnosis groups available in the selection list can be switched on and off individually via this check button.
10.6.6 Context Diagnoses Angle

The angle between two vectors will be determined with this function. The vectors may be defined:
as normal vector of a surface,
as tangent vector of a curve, or
by two points.
In addition, the second vector may run parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis resp. Depth of
the model coordinate system,
the current work plane, or
the current view plane.
The begin point of the second vector is moved to that of the first vector.
Figure 66 Angle diagnosis
Y X
1st vector = tangent in

an edge point
2nd vector = X axis of

the work plane 46o55
The menu Diagnosis Angle
Select
The selection of the vectors will be reactivated.
227
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES MATCHING
10
NOTE:
A graphical selection is only possible if Normal, Tangent or 2 Points is activated.
1st Vector, 2nd Vector

The vectors may be selected separately.
Multiple
Below the buttons 1st Vector and 2nd Vector, the definition options for the vectors are available in popup menus.
Definition of the 1st vector

The first vector may be defined by the following directions:
Normal
Normal in a selected surface point.
Tangent
Tangent in a selected curve point or patch/face edge point.
2 Points
Two points to be selected.
Definition of the 2nd vector

The second vector may be defined
by one of the given directions Normal, Tangent, 2 Points (see Definition of the 1st vector), or
by the X, Y or Z axis resp. Depth of the set coordinate system (see table below).
Specified Coordinate Sys- Vector Direction: Coordinate Axis:

tem Normal, Tangent, 2 Points X, Y, Z/Depth
Model second vector is defined in 3D space (no pro- specified coordinate system is
(model coordinate system) jection) valid for determining the X, Y, or Z
axis resp. depth
Plane both vectors are projected into the specified
(work plane) plane
View
(view plane)
10.6.7 Context Diagnoses Matching

The transition quality between two neighboured patch or face edges or curve segments will be computed and displayed. In addition, matchings
into the interior of patches and faces can be examined.
Figure 67 Matching diagnosis
maximum posi- maximum nor-

tion deviation mal deviation
0.0
0o4
0.0774
curvature values maximum curva-

ture deviation
228
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES MATCHING
10
The menu Diagnosis Matching
Select
A new selection of connecting edge and reference object can be carried out.
Connecting Edge, Reference

Connecting edge and reference object can be selected separately. If a matching into the interior of a patch or face is to be examined, the
patch/face has to be selected as reference.
Figure 68 Diagnosis for a matching into the interior of a patch
reference patch
0.9227
0.9191
connecting edge
Topology
All patches and faces being neighboured within the tolerance specified at Distance (Topo) are searched for. Afterwards, the matching diag-
nosis will automatically be carried out for each pair of neighboured edges.
For this operation activate the button Topology and select the objects.
Multiple
Count
The number of points specified here will be used for calculating the deviations along the connecting edge and comparing them.
Type: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

The position deviation, tangent or normal deviation (for surface edges), curvature deviation (as ratio of the absolute curvature values of the
neighboured surface edges), and/or torsion deviation of the selected objects will be displayed.
Graph
Graphical display of the deviations individually for each matching type.
Scaling (text fields and thumb wheels)
Scaling factor for the display of the deviations. If the factor = 1, the values are displayed in a scale of 1:1.
For a detailed mathematical description of the matching diagnoses, please refer to Appendix 1: Matching diagnosis.
Distance (Topo)
Objects having a larger distance from each other than the value specified here will not be considered as being neighboured. The distance is
calculated at three points on each edge.
Min, Max
(Minimum, Maximum)
The minimum and/or maximum deviations will be indicated.
229
CONTEXT DIAGNOSES SURFACE-SURFACE INTERSECTION
10
10.6.8 Context Diagnoses Surface-Surface Intersection

The intersection curve of surfaces or scans can be computed and displayed. Each combination of the geometry objects available in the selection
window can be taken for the computation.
Figure 69 Diagnosis surface-surface intersection
intersection curve
The menu Diagnosis Surface-Surface Intersection
Select
A new selection of the objects will be carried out.
1st Object, 2nd Object

The two objects can be selected separately.
Multiple
Tolerance
The precision of the calculation of the intersection curve can be specified.
For patches and faces (not for scans), the curvature distribution along the intersection curve can additionally be computed and displayed. Accord-
ing to the setting in the menu Diagnoses Diagnoses, Parameter tab, either the curvature radii (r) or the curvatures (1/r) are displayed (see
section 10.4.2 Parameter on page 205). The following options are available:
Curvature
With this option you may determine, whether the curvature distribution shall be displayed or not.
Count
Number of points along the intersection curve at which the curvature shall be computed.
Invert
The display of the curvature direction will be inverted.
Scaling
Scaling factor for displaying the curvature vectors. If the factor = 1, the values are displayed in a scale of 1:1.
Min, Max
(Minimum/Maximum)
The minimum and/or maximum curvature radius of the curve will be displayed.
10.7 Diagnoses Shape

Shape diagnoses provide information on the geometrical shape of objects.
Selection in shape diagnoses

In all menus of the shape diagnoses (except for the curvature diagnosis) the following options are available:
230
SHAPE DIAGNOSES REFLECTION
10
All
Diagnostic lines are created on all objects.
Set
The diagnoses will only be calculated on selected objects combined in a set.
Select +
Objects can be selected for a new set using these buttons.
The information which objects the set consists of and whether All or Set is active is passed on to the other shape diagnoses. In this way it is
possible to carry out different diagnoses for the same set without having to re-select the objects each time or to change the setting of the
options.
10.7.1 Shape Diagnoses Reflection

Reflection lines are created with this diagnosis allowing an exact evaluation of surfaces.
10.7.1.1 Course of reflection and highlight lines

Reflection lines are created by reflections of rod-shaped light sources on surfaces. Their course illustrates the shape of the surface and the quality
of surface matchings. Generally, the following cases can be distinguished (this is also true for highlight lines, see section 10.7.2 Shape Diagnosis
Highlight on page 235):
Figure 70 Course of reflection and highlight lines
connected patches reflection or

highlight line
gap
offset
bend
continu-
ous course
Gap
Gaps between patches can mostly be recognized by an interrupted diagnostic line.
Offset
An offset in a reflection or highlight line shows an irregularity of a tangent or normal.
The offset quantity which can be tolerated depends on the corresponding part. An irregularity in the roof area of a vehicle, e. g., would be
noticed immediately, however, the same defect in a smaller part possibly not. The course of the diagnostic line is the decisive factor: a small
offset can be tolerated if it is only a continuous line.
Bend
Bends within the reflection or highlight line mean tangent but no curvature continuity.
Bends cannot be tolerated. They indicate that the diagnostic line is not continuous.
Continuous Course
The diagnostic line is continuous at the patch matching. However, not the curvature continuity at the patch edge point is decisive, but the con-
tinuous course of the curve across several patches.
10.7.1.2 Position of the light source

Generally, it depends on the position of the light source, whether the correct course of the reflection or highlight line can be recognized and eval-
uated (see option Light Vector: X, Y, Z, Light Src., Vector, Highlight).
The figure below shows a patch matching with a gap. If the X direction is used as light direction, the diagnostic lines appear to be continuous.
However, if the Z direction is set as light direction, an offset can be seen in the individual lines.
231
10
Figure 71 Dependency on the direction of the light source
Y X
light source in X direction light source in Z direction
10.7.1.3 Principle of the reflection diagnosis

The rod-shaped light source emits rays of light in radial direction. A single ray of light is reflected on the surface in a specified or computed point.
The reflection ray is a straight line starting at that surface point and passing through a determined eye point. The coordinates of the eye point can
be specified via Display View/Navigation, Definition (see section 11.3 Display View/Navigation on page 253).
The angle between ray of light and surface normal represents the angle of incidence, that one between surface normal and reflection ray is the
angle of reflection. The reflection law applies to the creation of reflection lines:
angle of incidence = angle of reflection
There are the following possibilities of creating reflection lines:
Single
With this option, an individual surface point has to be determined by selection. Therefore, the angle of reflection (= angle between reflection
ray and surface normal in this point) is defined. In addition, the direction of the light source and its distance from the selected surface point are
specified.
The following steps are carried out:
1. Finding the light source
a) Starting at the eye point, the ray of view (reflection ray) meets the surface point. The reflection ray and the surface normal form the
angle of reflection.
b) The ray is reflected with the same angle (angle of incidence) in the direction of the light source. The light source is a straight line
located at the specified distance from the surface point (see figure below).
Figure 72 Finding the light source
surface normal ray of light
angle of angle of
reflection incidence light source
eye
point
specified distance
between surface point and
light source
surface point
reflection ray
(ray of view)
2. Computing further points of the reflection line

a) The light source will be triangulated.
b) Further points will be computed on the surface with the specified distance from the light source. These points form the reflection line
(see figure below).
232
10
Figure 73 Creation of the reflection line using the option Single
direction of the
light source
reflection line
view
plane
specified
surface point
creation of further points with

the same distance from the
light source
Area
In this case, two points are to be selected on the surface. The specified point number will be distributed regularly on the connecting curve
between the two points. A light source and a reflection line will be computed for each point (see figure 75).
Light Lines
With this option different from the option Single the light source(s) to be used has/have to be selected. Starting at the selected light
source, all surface points are computed at which the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection (see figures 74 and 76).
Figure 74 Creation of a reflection line using the option Light Lines
specified light source
computed points
reflection line
10.7.1.4 The menu Diagnosis Reflection

The options of the menu correspond to the options of the function Shape Diagnosis Highlight and are described for both functions in the fol-
lowing.
All, Set, Select

The diagnostic lines are computed on all or just on a set of selected patches or faces. For a description of the options please refer to Selec-
tion in shape diagnoses on page 230.
233
10
Area, 1st Point, 2nd Point

The area in which the diagnosis lines are to be generated can be determined by selecting two surface points (see figure below). Both points
can also be selected separately.
Figure 75 Reflection diagnosis with the option Area
area determined by two

surface points
reflection lines
If you select only one surface point, only one diagnosis line will be created passing through that point.
Single
Individual surface points can be selected. A diagnosis line will be computed for each point passing exactly through that point (see figure 73).
Light L.
This option is only available for the generation of reflection lines.
Via the vector selection menu you can select any number of straight lines as light sources for the computation of the reflection lines (see fig-
ures 74 and 76).
Figure 76 Reflection diagnosis with the option Light Lines
lines created on a
planar patch
reflection lines
Count
The number of diagnosis lines to be generated may be specified. If individual points have been selected via Single, their number will be
entered into the text field.
Light Vector: X, Y, Z, Light Src., Vector, Highlight

(Light Vector: X, Y, Z, Light Source, Vector, Highlight)
The rod-shaped light source for creating the diagnosis lines is represented by the light vector. The light source, i. e. the light vector, emits rays
of light in radial direction, similar to a neon tube. These rays of light are reflected on the surface.
The light vector may be:
parallel to a world coordinate axis (X, Y or Z)
in the direction of the current light source (Light Src.)
parallel (Beam) or spot light source (Spot):
The vector points to the light source.
point light source (Point)
The vector from the light source to the view centre will be used.
For defining light sources please read section 11.15 Display Light on page 300.
a vector to be specified (Vector)
234
SHAPE DIAGNOSIS HIGHLIGHT
10
in view-dependent highlight direction (Highlight)

When changing the values in the text fields, the popup menu will automatically be set to Vector.
Distance
This option is only available for the generation of reflection lines.
The distance between light source and selected surface point may be specified.
Step Size
The diagnosis lines are computed as point sequence with the specified step size. The step size defines the radius of the area where the next
point will be searched.
Figure 77 Parameter Step Size
reflection or
highlight line
search areas
step size
Tolerance
The points of the diagnosis lines will be calculated with the specified tolerance.
Saved Version
If the geometry is modified compared with the last version saved with Freeze, the change of the diagnosis lines can be displayed using the
option Saved Version (see also section Freeze and global Undo on page 50). The diagnosis lines of the saved version will be displayed in
red, those one of the modified version in yellow.
10.7.2 Shape Diagnosis Highlight

With the highlight diagnosis lines of equal lightness are displayed on surfaces. These lines connect the surface points where the angle of inci-
dence of the light is constant, they are called Isophotes. The brightest reflection occurs at an angle of incidence = 90.
For the computation of the isophotes all points will be determined in which the surface normal has the same direction. The angle between light
direction and surface normal is constant (see figure below).
The course of highlight lines illustrates like reflection lines the shape of the surface and the quality of surface matchings. Please read also the
information on the Course of reflection and highlight lines on page 231, and the Position of the light source on page 231.
In contrast to the reflection diagnosis, the highlight diagnosis does not depend on the view direction.
Figure 78 Principle of the highlight diagnosis
angle between surface

normal and light direction
58o4 58o4
highlight lines 58o4
surface normal
light direction
58o4
light source
On shaded surfaces courses of brightness can be created using the function Display Highlight, Coloured (see section 11.19 Display High-
light on page 317).
235
SHAPE DIAGNOSES SPLIT
10
The menu Diagnosis Highlight
The options in this menu are identical with the options of the reflection diagnosis (see section 10.7.1.4 The menu Diagnosis Reflection on
page 233).
10.7.3 Shape Diagnoses Split

This diagnosis computes and displays split and silhouette lines. Silhouette lines are lines separating the visible part of a model from its invisible
part in a particular view. The split line separates the splittable part of a surface from its non-splittable part. If no split line exists, the surface is split-
table.
The drawing vector determining the split direction, and the split angle can be defined. The silhouette lines are displayed when the split angle is 0.
Figure 79 Split Line
Y X
drawing vector in = direction of the

Z direction light source
split line
non-splittable
splittable part
part
IMPORTANT!
Before carrying out the split diagnosis the surface normals have to be adjusted to the exterior using the function Surface modification
Invert.
With the highlight surface diagnosis (Display Highlight, Split) the splittable and non-splittable regions of the geometry are displayed in different
colours (see figure 137 on page 319). In this way it is possible to visualize critical regions and to avoid damages by taking appropriate measures.
The menu Diagnosis Split Line
All, Set, Select

Split Angle
The following options are available for the definition of the split angle:
Angle
The split angle (0 to 90) can be specified. If the angle is set to 0, the silhouette lines are displayed.
IMPORTANT!
Invert, Both
These options are only active if the Angle is not equal 0.
Both OFF:
The direction of the drawing vector can be inverted with Invert.
236
SHAPE DIAGNOSES CURVATURE
10
Both ON:
The split lines are computed with positive, as well as negative drawing vector.
Zero Line
This option is only active if the Angle is not equal 0.
In addition to the split lines calculated with the specified split angle, the silhouette lines of the geometry (Angle = 0) can be displayed in
the choosen colour.
Split Direction
Define the split direction.
Plane
The drawing vector shows in the direction of the work plane.
View
The drawing vector shows in the direction of the current view plane.
2 Points
The normal vectors of the two selected surface points define the plane.
Vector
The drawing vector may be specified via the Vector selection (see page 60).
Light Src.
(Light Source)
The current light source will be used for defining the split direction:
parallel (Beam) or spot light source (Spot):
The vector points to the light source.
point light source (Point):
The vector from the light source to the view centre will be used.
For defining light sources please read section 11.15 Display Light on page 300.
Highlight
The drawing vector shows in the view-dependent highlight direction.
When changing the values in the text fields, the popup menu will automatically be set to Vector.
Step Size
The split and silhouette lines are calculated as point sequence with the step size specified (see figure 77 on page 235).
Tolerance
The points of the split and silhouette lines are computed using this tolerance value. The default is 0.0001.
Saved Version
If the geometry is modified compared with the last version saved with Freeze, the change of the split and silhouette lines can be displayed
using the option Saved Version (see also section Freeze and global Undo on page 50). The lines of the saved version will be displayed in
10.7.4 Shape Diagnoses Curvature

Curvature values can be computed for curves and surfaces. According to the setting in the menu Diagnoses Diagnoses, Parameter tab, either
the curvature radii (r) or the curvatures (1/r) are displayed (see section 10.4.2 Parameter on page 205). However, the values always indicate the
radius. A large numeric value therefore stands for a small curvature.
The curvature along a curve may be displayed in different directions.
Figure 80 Curvature diagnosis of a curve
Z
YZ:178.4
Y X
YZ:29.48
maximum and minimum curvature
radii in X direction
Curvature values of surfaces are calculated on iso-lines, and displayed normal to the surface.
237
10
Figure 81 Curvature diagnosis of a patch with display of the vectors
PN: 1238
PN: 1242
PN: 1245
PN: 1249
display of the
maximum curvature radii
Alternatively to the display of curvatures or curvature radii as vectors, you may carry out a dynamic coloured diagnosis for surfaces. This makes it
possible to evaluate the course of the curvature on the object.
The following figure shows the coloured diagnosis of a patch using the option Iso-Curve. The curvatures are displayed. To illustrate the colour
gradient, and through this the course of the curvature, the curvature vectors are displayed additionally in the figure. The red colour in the centre of
the patch indicates, for example, a region with a large curvature. The curvature vectors are highest at this position.
Figure 82 Coloured curvature diagnosis (method Iso-Curve)
The curvature vectors were computed

with the diagnosis function Sections.
Displayed are the curvatures.
IMPORTANT!
If a coloured deviation diagnosis is to be carried out, the shading for surfaces must be switched off in the menu Display Display (see
section 11.2 Display Display on page 249).
With the diagnosis method Iso-Curve, you may get inflection lines as separation line between red and blue regions. For this, the radius must be
large enough when displaying the curvature, and small enough when displaying the curvature radii.
For the Gauss curvature, the switch of the quality can be shown by setting an appropriate curvature radius (see figure 85 on page 240).
The menu Diagnosis Curvature and The submenu Curvature Colours are described in the following sections.
10.7.4.2 The menu Diagnosis Curvature
238
10
Curve, Surface
After activating one of these buttons, new curves and/or surfaces can be selected for computing the curvature. With the button + you may
select additional elements.
Count
The number of points along the curve or iso-line at which the curvature shall be computed can be specified here.
By specifying the point number for a coloured curvature diagnosis, a mesh of iso-lines is defined on which the diagnosis will be computed.
Scaling
This value defines the scaling factor for displaying the curvature vectors. If the factor = 1, the values are displayed in a scale of 1:1.
The scaling has no influence for a coloured diagnosis.
Patch Normal
For a patch or face edge, the curvature will be displayed in normal direction of the patch or face.
Invert
The display of the curvature direction will be inverted. This setting has no effect on the coloured diagnosis.
Iso-Crv, Region
For the curvature diagnosis on surfaces, you may restrict that region where the diagnosis shall be computed. In this region, the curvatures are
computed on the specified number of iso-lines are.
The values have no influence for a coloured display.
U, V
For the curvature diagnosis on surfaces, the curvature values are calculated in V and/or U direction.
For a coloured diagnosis, these options are available for a computation with Iso-Curvature. For the diagnosis method Iso-Curve, only one
direction can be set.
Display Type
You may choose between the following display types for the curvature diagnosis:
Bar
Display of the absolute curvature values by vectors (see figure 81 on page 238).
Colour
Display of the curvature course for surfaces by means of a coloured display according to the set method Iso-Curve, Gauss, Min. Rad.,
Min. Curv, or Convex/Concave (see figure 82 on page 238).
Edge, Shading
For a coloured diagnosis on surfaces you can choose between display of facet edges and shaded display.
Diagnosis method
Different methods are offered for a coloured curvature diagnosis on surfaces.
After execution of the function, a submenu will be activated where a legend for the colour gradient, as well as an overview of the curvature dis-
tribution are available. Please refer to section 10.7.4.3 The submenu Curvature Colours on page 242 for a description of this menu, as well
as information on a more detailed evaluation of the generated colour gradient.
The following diagnosis methods are available:
Iso-Curve/Gauss
Iso-Curvature ON: Calculation of the iso curvature diagnosis.
The curvature diagnosis is computed on a mesh of iso-lines, and displayed along the whole surface using colours (see figure 82 on
page 238). The number of points of this mesh is determined at Count. The direction of the iso-lines is defined by setting U or V.
Principal Curvature ON: Calculation of the Gauss curvature diagnosis.
The Gauss curvature is the product of the two principal curvatures in a surface point. This is a qualitative diagnosis, by means of
which you may see whether a surface has a regular curvature (see figure 84 on page 240).
Three qualities are distinguished for displaying the Gauss curvature:
Sphere: The two principal curvatures have the same direction.
Saddle: The principal curvatures have an opposite direction.
Cylinder: There is no curvature in one direction.
Figure 83 Direction of the principal curvatures
sphere saddle cylinder

Generally, blue regions show principal curvatures with equal direction, and red regions opposite directions.
239
10
Figure 84 Diagnosis method Gauss with display of the curvature
region cylinder
region sphere
region saddle
If the curvature radius is set large enough when displaying the curvature, and small enough when displaying the curvature radius, a
separation line between red and blue regions can be seen (see figure below). At this line, the curvature quality switches.
Figure 85 Switch of curvature quality
Min. Rad.
(Minimum Radius)
If the curvature radius for surfaces may not fall below a defined value, this diagnosis method can be used. It does not display a colour gra-
dient, but only the colours red and green.
Green regions: The current radius is larger than the specified value.
Red regions: The current radius is smaller than the specified value.
Figure 86 Diagnosis method Minimum Radius
red regions: current radius is smaller

than minimum radius
green regions: minimum

radius is kept
Min. Curv
(Minimum Curvature)
If surfaces shall have a minimum curvature, this diagnosis method can be used. It displays only two colours, as well.
Green regions: The minimum curvature is kept.
Red regions: The current radius is larger than the determined value, i. e. the curvature is too small.
240
10
NOTE:
A reasonable value must be indicated for the curvature radius corresponding to the desired minimum curvature. You may, e. g.,
generate the chord at an imaginary surface part (see figure below). Desired is an overcrowning in the centre. The radius can be
determined from the chord length and the overcrowning value.
Figure 87 Determination of the curvature radius for the minimum curvature
surface
part
overcrowning (d)
l 2
d 2 + ---
2 chord (l)
curvature radius r = ------------------------
2d
TIP:
A diagnosis with the options Min. Rad. and Min. Curv can be carried out in U or V direction. For a global check, both directions
can be switched on. If red regions are displayed, however, the directions should be checked separately.
Convex/Concave
In each measuring point, the signs of the two curvature values are compared. The colour of the measured point is choosen as follows:
Blue if both values are convex (positive curvature).
Magenta if both values are concave (negative curvature).
Red if one value is convex and the other concave (one positive and one negative curvature).
Green if at least one curvature is near zero, that means below the corresponding curvature to a tolerance radius given by the user.
The minimum radius value is computed by comparing the absolute smaller radius values in each measuring point, the maximum radius
value by comparing the absolute larger values. This definition may lead to a minimum value at exact the same measuring point as the
maximum value for a patch.
Iso-Curvature, Principal Curvature

The coloured diagnosis on surfaces can be calculated on the basis of iso curvature or principal curvatures.
Iso-Curvature: Calculation of the values in U and/or V direction (check buttons U, V). If both directions are checked, the absolutely small-
est value is used for the diagnosis.
Principal Curvature: Calculation of the two principal curvature values (or radius values) in each measure point. The absolutely smallest
value is used for the diagnosis.
Max, Centre, Min

(Maximum, Centre, Minimum)
Diagnosis method Iso-Curve/Gauss active:
A colour gradient will be displayed. Radius values are assigned to the different colours.
Min/Max: These values determine the range for the colour distribution.
If Update (in the sub-menu Curvature Colours) is activated, Min and Max cannot be edited. If Symm or Symmetric is activated, Min
cannot be edited.
Centre: The first value is an absolute value defining the green region.
The second value is specified as relative value between 0.0 and 1.0. It defines the green region, determines its position, and divides
the colour gradient into two areas with linear colour distribution.
If in Diagnoses Diagnoses, Parameter tab, option Radius of Curvature is switched on (for analysing small radii, i. e. large curva-
tures, going to infinity), both values are available for Centre.
If Curvature is switched on (for analysing small curvatures, i. e. large radii, going to infinity), only the relative value for Centre can be
specified.
Diagnosis method Min. Rad. or Min. Curv active:
No colour gradient will be generated. Those regions in which the current radius is smaller (in the case Min. Rad.) or larger (in the case
Min. Curv) than the specified curvature radius are displayed red (see figure 86 on page 240).
Centre specifies the value for the curvature radius.
Diagnosis method Convex/Concave active:
Centre specifies the value for the curvature radius defining a flat region.
241
10
NOTES:
When using the thumb wheels, the diagnosis will be dynamically re-calculated. When modifying values in the edit fields, the diag-
nosis will only be re-computed after pressing OK.
Symm
(Symmetric)
The curvature values will be distributed symmetrically around Zero.
As soon as the check button is activated, the maximum absolute value with plus sign will be assigned to the upper limit of the tolerance range,
the value with minus sign to the lower limit.
The value for Max can be edited, the Min value will automatically be adapted.
Min, Max (check buttons)

(Minimum/Maximum)
The minimum and/or maximum curvature radii will be displayed.
If the Gauss curvature is displayed, the mean values will be indicated. If one of the diagnosis methods Min. Rad. or Min. Curv is executed,
the values of each individual patch or face are displayed numerically.
Labels
The labels of the minimum/maximum curvature radii in the graphics can be switched on or off.
For the curvature diagnosis on curves, the curvature radii in X, Y or Z direction, or the 3D values can be indicated. For this, the curvature is
computed in a way as if the curve had been projected into the corresponding plane (YZ, XZ or XY).
NOTE:
For a better evaluation of the curvature you should activate the corresponding view.
Inspect
After diagnosis computation, the curvature can additionally be evaluated at individual positions by moving the cursor across the geometry.
The curvature radius is numerically displayed.
If a diagnosis of the Convex/Concave mode is inspected, the curvature radii will be signed: a negative value indicates a concave curvature,
a positive value a convex curvature.
For vector display on curves or iso-lines (Bar), each position along a curve or iso-line can be evaluated. For coloured display (Colour), the
curvature can be checked at any position on the surface. Additionally, the following directions are shown:
For Iso-Curvature: The vectors display the iso directions. The larger vector shows in the direction in which the diagnosis is defined.
For Principal Curvature: The vectors display the minimum/maximum main curvature direction. The larger vector shows in minimum main
curvature direction as here is a larger curvature radius.
A context menu is available to save the inspection results, that means curvature values at specific positions, temporarily (see section 10.7.4.4
The context menu Inspect on page 244).
10.7.4.3 The submenu Curvature Colours
Legend
Alternatively to the vector display, a coloured diagnosis can be executed for surfaces which makes it possible to evaluate the course of the curva-
ture on the object (see display type Colour, page 239.
With the coloured curvature diagnosis, a colour gradient will be displayed. With Iso-Curve/Gauss, radius values are assigned to the colours. With
Convex/Concave, the colours specify whether there are convex, concave, or flat regions. For defining the radii, see Max, Centre, Min
(page 241).
No colour gradient will be generated for the diagnosis methods Min. Rad. and Min. Curv.
242
10
Update
If this check button is switched on, the upper and lower limit of the tolerance range is set to the computed maximum and minimum value after
execution of the diagnosis (clicking OK in the main menu).
The radius values for Max and Min in the main menu will be de-activated.
Symmetric
This checkpoint has the same functionality as option Symm in the main menu (see page 242) and a direct coupling with it.
The colour gradient for the two diagnosis methods has to be interpreted as follows:
Figure 88 Interpretation of the colour gradient for Iso-Curve/Gauss
Curvature Radius ON Curvature ON
R= R=0
+R (Iso-Curve) +1/R (Iso-Curve)

+1/R2 (Gauss) larger
+R2 (Gauss)
curvature
flat
larger flat
curvature
largest plane
R=0 R=
curvature
larger flat
curvature
flat larger
-R (Iso-Curve) -1/R (Iso-Curve) curvature
-R2 (Gauss) -1/R2 (Gauss)
R= R=0
R = specified curvature radius
NOTE:
Depending on what is displayed, the curvatures or the curvature radii, the colour gradients must be interpreted differently.
The positive curvature direction corresponds to the normal direction of the surface.
243
10
Figure 89 Interpretation of the colour gradient for Convex/Concave
Concave/Concave
Convex/Convex
Flat
Convex/Concave
Distribution
For all coloured diagnoses, the distribution of the curvature values according to the displayed colours can be seen in this overview.
10.7.4.4 The context menu Inspect
The current inspection is temporarily saved as long as the function window remains open.
Save
Saves the inspection values temporarily.
Hide
Hides the saved inspection values.
Show
Shows the saved inspection values.
Reset
Resets the saved inspection values.
244
SHAPE DIAGNOSES INFLECTION LINE
10
Small Radius/Large Radius

Displays the smaller or larger radius value of the two evaluated directions.
10.7.5 Shape Diagnoses Inflection Line

With this diagnosis lines are created on patches or surfaces connecting all surface points with the same curvature value in a specified direction.
For infinite curvature radius, i. e. curvature = 0, the lines connect the inflection points of the surface.
In the following, all lines with the same curvature will be called inflection lines.
The menu Diagnosis Inflection Line
All, Set, Select

Radius
Lines of the same curvature are created using the curvature radius specified here.
IMPORTANT!
This applies to values 0. When entering 0 (default), the curvature = 0, not the radius! In this case, the inflection points are con-
nected.
Step Size
The inflection lines will be calculated as point sequence with the step size specified here.
Tolerance
The points of the inflection lines are computed using this tolerance.
U, V
The curvatures in U and/or V direction of the iso-lines will be used for the computation of the inflection lines.
X, Y, Z
The curvatures in the YZ, XZ and/or XY plane will be used for the computation.
Plane, View
The curvatures in the work or view plane will be used for the computation of the inflection lines.
Saved Version
If the geometry is modified compared with the last version saved with Freeze, the change of the inflection lines can be displayed using the
option Saved Version (see also section Freeze and global Undo on page 50). The diagnostic lines of the saved version will be displayed in
10.7.6 Shape Diagnoses Normals

With this diagnosis, normal irregularities within patches/faces can be displayed, which may cause problems further on in the surface modelling
process (e. g. when using the functions Fillet, Flanges, Matching).
The menu Diagnosis Normals
All, Set, Select

245
GLOBAL DIAGNOSES FUNCTIONS
10
Number of Normals: U, V
The number of normals in cross and longitudinal direction may be specified.
Invert
The normal direction will be inverted.
Edge
Only the normals at the patch or face edges will be displayed.
Grid
The ends of the normals can be connected with each other.
One Normal
The surface normal will be displayed.
Length
The length of the normal vectors may be specified.
Saved Version
If the geometry is modified compared with the last version saved with Freeze, the change of the normals can be displayed using the option
Saved Version (see also section Freeze and global Undo on page 50). The normals of the saved version will be displayed in red, those one
of the modified version in yellow.
10.8 Global Diagnoses functions

The following global diagnosis functions can be activated via the pull-down menu Diagnoses or the control window Diagnoses Diagnoses
(see page 204):
Delete
After selecting one of the diagnostic types, all diagnostic lines of this type will be deleted.
Delete All
All diagnostic lines will be deleted.
Graphical
Individual diagnostic lines may be deleted by graphical selection.
On/Off
The display of all diagnoses may be switched on and off. If the diagnoses are switched off, dynamic geometry modifications and other func-
tions will be accelerated since the diagnoses must not permanently be re-computed.
246
THE MENU DISPLAY
11
11 The menu Display
The display menu offers different functions for the display and view control.
11.1 Display Options
Apart from the pull down menu this function can also be activated by the icon in the special functions block.
With this function you can activate current settings of different display functions.
The menu Display Options
Environment
Activating an environment. If in the menu Display Environment no environment has been defined, the default environment 1 will automati-
cally be loaded (see option History on page 293).
Light
The environment sides will be illuminated by the current light sources.
Shadows
On the environment sides will be mapped shadows caused by the light sources.
Soft
In the menu Display Light can be set hard or soft contours as Shadow Type. If this option is switched on, soft shadow contours are
displayed on the screen.
Update
In case of light source movements the shadow will be updated dynamically.
Reflections
The geometry will be reflected on the environment sides.
NOTE:
Light, shadows, and reflections are only displayed on the screen, if the corresponding options are activated in the parameter menu for the
environment images (see function Display Environment, section The parameter menu for the environment images on page 287).
Shading
Activating the option Shading in the menu Display Display.
247
DISPLAY OPTIONS
11
NOTE:
The activation of the shading depends on the switch position of Selected in the menu Display Display. If e. g. Selected is
switched on, shading will only be activated for selected surfaces.
Using the following check button you may activate different effects for the shading:
Textures
Activating the display of textures assigned to materials with the option Texture in the menu Display Material.
Bump Map
Activating the Bump Map effect for materials defined with Bump Map.
Self Shadows
If this option is switched on, shadows created by geometry objects on geometry objects are displayed, e. g. shadows of an exterior mirror
at the car body.
Figure 90 Self Shadows
NOTE:
This option is only available, if it is supported by the graphics card of your computer.
In the menu Windows Preferences you can choose different resolutions for dynamic manipulations and static views using
the option Self Shadows.
Soft
With this option, you can display self shadows with soft contours.
Reflection
A reflection image will be mirrored on shaded surfaces with the intensity set for the individual materials in the menu Display Material
Colours.
If in the menu Display Environment neither an environment nor a special reflection image have been loaded, the default environment 1
will automatically be activated and used as reflection image.
Clearpaint
Reflections are displayed with Clearpaint effect which simulates the reflecting properties of glossy materials like paint, glass, or
plastic. This effect is only created on materials, for which in the menu Display Material Colours a Refraction value > 1 is set.
Figure 91 The Clearpaint effect
Clearpaint Off
Clearpaint On
248
DISPLAY DISPLAY
11
Transparency
Shaded surfaces are displayed with the transparency set for the individual materials in the menu Display Material Colours.
Env. Lighting
(Environment Lighting)
Display of the environment lighting set in the menu Display Environment Light.
Lens Flares
Activating the display of lens flares set for point or spot light sources in the menu Display Light Lens Flares.
Glow
Display of the glow effect set in the menu Display Environment Light.
Highlight
Activating the highlight surface diagnoses currently set in the menu Display Highlight.
Individual
This option activates the display of individual assignments of
colours via the menu Display Colours,
materials via the menu Display Material, and
line widths via the Parameter tab of the menu File Plot.
If this option is switched off, all objects are displayed with the default materials, colours, and line widths.
Plane
Blanking and unblanking the plane symbol.
3D Symbol
Blanking and unblanking the 3D symbol.
BG Image
(Background Image)
Global blanking and unblanking background images loaded with the function Display Background Image.
Light
Blanking and unblanking the light source symbols.
Text
Blanking and unblanking texts inserted with the function Display Text.
Grid
Blanking and unblanking the grid set in the menu Display Grid.
Centre of Rotation
Blanking and unblanking the rotation origin symbol (see also 11.3.3 Navigation on page 258).
Clipping Plane
Blanking and unblanking the current clipping plane. In the menu Display Clipping Plane must be defined at least one clipping plane.
Stereo
Activating the function Display Stereo.
Line Anti-Alias
Activating the option Line Anti-Alias in the menu Display Display.
11.2 Display Display
Apart from the pull down menu this function can also be activated by the icon in the service functions block, or by the shortcut Ctrl-A.
With this function you can choose the object types to be displayed and determine their display characteristics. The individual settings can be
saved as display variants.
In case of surfaces and scans only the wire frame display, i. e. the display of the edges, is influenced and the shading can be switched on and
off. The surface colour and further material properties of shaded surfaces are set by assigning materials with the function Display Material (see
page 270).
The menu Display consists of three areas:
249
GENERAL DISPLAY OPTIONS
11
The menu Display
general display blank/unblank setting display characteristics

options object types
11.2.1 General display options

The general display options include options to set pre-defined or user-defined display variants.
Selected
Display and setting display properties of selected objects. The following settings cannot be changed for selected objects:
Blanking and unblanking the object types (Points, Raw Data, Curves, Surfaces, Scan).
Colour setting. Only one colour can be assigned to all selected object types which can be set in the menu Windows Selection with the
option Highlight 1-3 (see page 328).
Individual
This option activates the display of individual assignments of
colours via the menu Display Colours,
materials via the menu Display Material, and
line widths via the Parameter tab of the menu File Plot.
an individual tolerance Individual Tesselation for the topological tessellation in the menu Objects Structure Editor.
If this option is switched off, all objects are displayed with the default materials, colours, and line widths.
Variant
This option includes two selections lists. The first list contains predefined display variants, which can neither be deleted nor renamed. You can
save modifications of the settings with the option Save as user-defined variant with a new name.
The following predefined display variants are available:
Curve
Display of curves with marked segment boundaries and labelled curve segments.
Edge
Display of the edge curves of the patches and patch number.
Iso-Curve
Display of patch edges and one iso-curve in each direction.
CtrlP
Display of patch edges with control point mesh.
Shading
Shaded display of surfaces and scans.
Highlight
Shaded display of the surfaces and scans with Highlight diagnosis.
Hidden Lines
Display of surfaces and scans with hidden lines (see option Hidden Lines on page 251).
250
DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF OBJECTS
11
Scan
Display of scan points and lines.
Scan Facets
Display of scans in Flat shading.
Raw Data
Display of raw data without labels.
The second list contains the user-defined display variants. By default, this list contains the following display variants:
DB
This display variant is a basic display variant which is automatically created with every database and which can only be modified but nei-
ther deleted nor renamed.
SURF_AUX
This display variant saves the last used settings when saving the database and restores them when starting ICEM Surf again.
NOTE:
For user-defined display variants the name SURF_AUX must not be used, as this would cause data losses in case of exporting to
the ICEM DB format.
Save, Rename, Delete

To Save, Rename, and Delete user-defined display variants corresponding submenus are activated (see also section 2.4.4 User-defined
settings in service functions on page 27).
Line Anti-Alias
With this option curves and diagnostic lines can be displayed sharper and with less distinct staircase effect (anti-aliasing). In this case on
many machines the type of line is adjusted to full line.
Shading
Toggle for shaded display of surfaces.
With Scan
Switching on or off the shaded display of surfaces simultaneously switches on or off the display of scan facets (option Facets).
Hidden Lines
If this option is switched on, hidden lines in the view direction will not be displayed to allow a clearer display of wire frame models.
The following display options must be switched on for the usage of Hidden Lines:
Shading
For the usage of Hidden Lines for Surfaces:
display option Edges
Figure 92 Display with Hidden Lines
Hidden Lines and Shading Off Hidden Lines and Shading On
For the usage of Hidden Lines for Scans:

display option Facets with Edge or Shaded Edge
NOTE:
You cannot use different settings of Hidden Lines simultaneously for the selected and non-selected mode of a display variant.
11.2.2 Display properties of objects

In the columns Object, Line/Point, Labels, and Colour can be specified which object types shall be displayed with which properties.
251
DISPLAY PROPERTIES OF OBJECTS
11
Object
In this column you can switch on and off the display of the different object types.
In case of scans only structured scan lines can be displayed. In the table of atoms in the function Objects Object Manager (see page 161)
under the column S you can check whether scan lines are structured or not:
Line/Point
Points
Raw Data
Curves
Surfaces
Faces
Scans
In this column you can select the line fonts and point symbols for the corresponding object types. For curves and surfaces the check button
NURBS is also available to switch on and off the markers of NURBS segment boundaries.
In the menu Display you can only set line fonts. Different line widths can be set via the option Line Width (see page 88) in the tab Parameter
of the function File Plot. However, they are only displayed in the graphic area if the Plot window is open and the option Individual in the
Display window is switched on.
In case of Facets the line font is set for the edges (option Edge).
252
DISPLAY VIEW/NAVIGATION
11
Labels
Points
Raw Data
Curves
Surfaces
Faces
Scans
In addition to activating labels and selecting the label size (Small or Large) you can make the following settings in this column:
123
Blanking and unblanking the point numbers for Raw Data, Control Point, and Edge CtrlP. In case of Iso-Curves the labels of the
parameter values are displayed.
Transp.
Transparent
For CtrlP for Curves and Surfaces only.
When active, control points and control point polygons are visible which in case of shaded display would be hidden by the geometry.
Segment
Blanking and unblanking markers of segment boundaries for Raw Data, Curves, Surfaces, Faces, and Scans.

For Surfaces + Edges only.
Blanking and unblanking the display of the u direction of surfaces.
U, V
For Iso-Curves only.
Specifying the number of displayed iso-curves on surfaces.
Reduced
For Scan + Points only.
Reduction of the number of visible scan points.
Display of scan facets
For Scan + Facets only.
In this popup menu the following display variants for scan facets can be set:
Flat
For Flat Shading only one brightness and hue value is computed for each facet. Therefore, no brightness and colour course is cre-
ated, so that the transitions between the individual facets are visible.
Gouraud
For this shading method the brightness and hue values are computed at each corner of the (surface or scan) facet and linear interpo-
lated over the facet edges. The smooth transitions created by the brightness and colour course produce a high quality display, which,
however, also needs more computing time than the simple Flat shading.
Edge
Display of the facet edges.
Shad Edge
(Shaded Edge)
Display of the facet edges in shaded colours.
Colour
Setting of the colours of the corresponding object types.
11.3 Display View/Navigation

You can create user-defined views and save them for further use.
253
VIEW
11
Apart from the pull down menu this function can also be activated by the icon in the service functions block.
The function Display View/Navigation includes the tabs View, Definition, Navigation, and Stereo described in the following sections.
11.3.1 View

To Save, Rename, and Delete user-defined views corresponding submenus are activated (see also section 2.4.4 User-defined settings in
service functions on page 27).
Views
This selection list displays the standard views Standard (Standard Perspective), SideViewL (Side View Left), Front View (Front View),
SideViewR (Side View Right), Rear View (Rear View), Top View as well as all user-defined views. The views can be activated either in the
list by double clicking the name or in the special functions block in the popup menu View.
Geometry: Original, Mirrored, Both

In case of designing symmetric objects (symmetric to the Y=0-plane), only one half of the object is created. In this radio box you may specify
which half of the geometry (original, mirrored half, or both halves) shall be displayed.
By default, all geometry objects are mirrored symmetrically to the Y=0 plane. If with the function Display Mirror (see page 269) a selective
mirroring is defined, the settings specified in this function are used.
NOTE:
Mirrored objects cannot be selected. In shaded display, mirrored elements, which cannot be selected, are displayed in another col-
our in the selection mode after activating geometry functions.
Mirrored
Original
Perspective
Parallel
(Parallel Perspective)
The view set to Parallel Perspective with the values defined in the Definition tab.
The Parallel Perspective can also be activated with the icon in the special functions block.
In case of the parallel perspective the projection centre lies in infiniteness. The projection beams run parallel and pass with an equal angle
through the projection plane. Parallel edges of the geometry remain parallel.
254
VIEW
11
Figure 93 Parallel Perspective
projection plane (screen plane)

geometry object
intersection points
projection beams
= View Normal
X
Y
Reference Point
Projection
The Parallel Perspective is defined by the Reference Point, View Normal, Up Vector, and Zoom detail. Reference point, view normal, and
up vector are indicated in model coordinates. You can modify these values graphically via the buttons as well as numerically in the text fields.
Central
(Central Perspective)
The view set to Central Perspective with the values defined in the Definition tab.
The Central Perspective can also be activated with the icon in the special functions block.
NOTE:
The resulting view does not correspond to the standard perspective which can be activated in the popup menu View in the special
functions block! The parameters for the standard perspective are defined in the View tab of the function Windows Preferences
(see page 329).
In the view mode Central Perspective a perspective view of the geometry is created. Starting from the eye position (projection centre) the
projection beams run through all points of the geometry to be mapped and through the projection plane. The eye position has a finite distance
to the geometry, so that the projection beams pass through the plane with unequal angles. The image points are the intersection points of the
projection beams with the projection plane. In a central perspective view parallel horizontal edges of the geometry meet in vanishing points
lying on the horizon.
Figure 94 Display of horizontal edges in Central and Parallel Perspective
Central Perspective Parallel Perspective
The Central Perspective is defined by the Eye Position, Reference Point, Up Vector, and Angle Of View. Eye Position, Reference Point,
and Up Vector are indicated in model coordinates. You can modify these values graphically via the buttons as well as numerically in the text
fields.
255
DEFINITION
11
Figure 95 Central Perspective
geometry object
Reference Point
intersection points
Z projection beams
X
Y
Eye Position
Up Vector
Projection
Eye distance
11.3.2 Definition
Angle Of View
The Angle Of View defines the size of the field of view. The smaller the Angle Of View is, the smaller is the detail of the displayed geometry.
The Angle Of View is indicated in X direction.
Figure 96 Large and small Angle Of View
field of view
Angle Of View
Eye Position
Zoom
Display and definition of the zoom factors (see also Display of zoom factors on page 44 in the user interface).
Eye Position
The eye position is the point from which you look onto the geometry.
NOTE:
To position the eye point inside a geometry or an environment block a perspective view must be activated.
256
DEFINITION
11
View Normal
This option defines the direction of the projection beams.
Reference Point
The reference point is the point onto which you look. It is the origin of the view coordinate system, to which view rotations and scalings refer
and is located in the centre of the view.
Two options are available for reference point selection:
Ref. Point
Selecting a new reference point changes the view direction and the distance between reference point and eye position (= focus), i. e. the
projection plane is moved into the plane of the selected point.

Selecting a new reference point only changes the view direction, but not the distance between reference point and eye position.
Up Vector
The Up Vector defines which direction is up related to eye position and reference point.
Figure 97 Up Vector
Image Displ.
(Image Displacement)
The view is moved by the values specified in the text fields. The image displacement is saved in user-defined views and thus can be specified
individually for each saved view.
The values defined are also respected in the EDF and ICEM DB data exchange as well as in the File Plot function.
NOTE:
The value 0.5 moves the current image centre exactly to the screen edge.
257
NAVIGATION
11
11.3.3 Navigation
Centre of Rotation
The options for setting the centre of rotation can also be activated in the special functions block:
Centre of Geometry
The centre of the extreme value block of the geometry is used as centre of rotation.
Dynamic
When manipulating the view the centre of rotation is positioned onto the geometry at the point with the shortest distance between geometry
and cursor position. The position of the centre of rotation remains unchanged, until the keys Shift or Shift+Ctrl are released and pressed again
to select a new position.
Rigid
The centre of rotation can be fixed on a point. Its position can be changed by manipulating the symbol in the graphics area or via the context
menu (see section 2.5.8 The point symbol on page 38).
Reference Point
The reference point (= centre of the view) is used as centre of rotation.
In the settings Dynamic and Rigid the position can also be modified by moving the symbol in the graphic area and using the option Position in
the context menu Centre of Rotation (see 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41).
Symbol
Switching on and off the symbol in the graphic area.
Navigation Mode
The navigation modes influence the view manipulation using the mouse buttons and the keys Shift or Shift+Ctrl (see also Table 4 View manipula-
tion by mouse and control keys on page 42).
Except the navigation mode Free, this popup menu is only active, if a perspective view is switched on (Set view mode in the special functions
block or option Central (Central Perspective) in the View tab).
In addition to this menu, the navigation modes can also be activated in the special functions block (see Set Navigation Mode on page 47).
On the View tab of the Windows Preferences function, the navigation modes can be assigned to control keys (see Navigation Control on
page 330).
Free
This navigation mode can be used either in the Parallel Perspective as well as in the Central Perspective.
The usage of Gravity is optional.
With Shift + left mouse button, the view can be freely rotated around the Centre of Rotation.
With Shift + right mouse button, the Angle Of View, i. e. the image size is modified.
258
NAVIGATION
11
Figure 98 Principle sketch of the image size modification
Eye Position
Reference Point
Angle Of View
Figure 99 Views with different Angles of View
Angle Of View = 96 Angle Of View = 48
Angle Of View = 24 Angle Of View = 12
Walk
This navigation mode simulates the movement of the observer in the space.
The distance between eye position and reference point, the height of the eye position and the Angle Of View is fixed.
The Up Vector is aligned to the axis set by Gravity.
In the view manipulation with Shift + left mouse button, the eye position is moved on an imaginary circle around the Centre of Rotation. The
radius of the circle is defined by the distance between Eye Position and Reference Point.
259
NAVIGATION
11
Figure 100 Rotation of the Eye Position
With Shift + right mouse button, the observer moves forward and backward. The move direction depends on the setting of the Move to Cen-
tre of Rotation option on the View tab of the Windows Preferences function:
Off
The view is moved in direction of the reference point (see image below).
On
The view is moved in direction of the centre of rotation.
Figure 101 Principle sketch Walk in direction of the Reference Point (Move to Centre of Rotation option Off)
Eye Position
Reference Point
Angle Of View
Fly
This mode works like the Walk mode, with the difference that the height of the eye position is not fixed in the view manipulation with Shift + left
mouse button. That means, that the eye position is moved on an imaginary sphere instead of a circle.
Turn Head
In the view manipulation with Shift + left mouse button, the observer does not move himself, but only turns his head. The reference point is
moved on an imaginary sphere around the eye position.
260
STEREO
11
Figure 102 Rotation of the reference point
With Shift + right mouse button, the Angle Of View is modified as in the navigation mode Free.
The Up Vector is aligned to the axis set by Gravity.
NOTE:
The navigation modes Walk, Fly, and Turn Head are only available in the Central Perspective. When switching to Parallel Perspec-
tive, the navigation mode Free is automatically activated.
Only the navigation modes Walk and Fly allow to move inside geometry objects.
Gravity
The Up Vector is projected into the plane which is defined by the axis set and the axis defined by the Eye Position and Reference Point.
X, Y, Z
With these options, you can rotate the view plane to an arbitrary position by specifying numerical values.
In the text fields are specified angles, by which the view plane shall be rotated around the X, Y, and/or Z axis of the view coordinate system.
The basic position is the Top View T Top View with a rotation angle of 0 for all three axes. For a rotation in clockwise direction must be
specified negative rotation angles. In case of dynamic view manipulations the angle values will be updated automatically.
IMPORTANT!
11.3.4 Stereo
The Stereo function offers a 3-D display of the geometry. The 3-D picture can be viewed either on a projection screen or by means of special
glasses. This three-dimensional display offers a very realistic presentation of the geometry, which in many cases may save the generation of
physical prototypes.
The following visualization hardware is required for the projection of the stereo picture:
either shutter glasses (e. g. by StereoGraphics),
or a large projection screen with two beamers (special video projectors).
11.3.4.1 Technical working principle

The ICEM Surf Stereo function simultaneously generates two (perspective) views (for the left eye and right eye), which are allocated by the visu-
alization hardware to the spectators left and right eyes.
Both views are computed by ICEM Surf and displayed in the left and right stereo buffer (a special OpenGL enhancement for stereo functionality).
The left and right stereo buffers are read in consecutively and converted to a video signal by the workstation hardware. This video signal (also
referred to as field sequential) has a refresh rate of 90 to 120 hertz, and it alternately contains the pictures for the left and right eye. The video
signal can be output either to the screen or to the above mentioned visualization hardware.
All new SGI monitors support this special stereo mode. Without any additional visualization hardware, you will see both views in parallel.
Projection using shutter glasses

A small device with an infrared transmitter is connected to a specific output of your workstation (referred to as Video in the Owner's Manual).
The infrared transmitter will send an infrared signal each time the pictures for the left and right eyes are exchanged on screen.
As a result of the infrared signals received, the shutter glasses will always switch on the lens addressed by a particular video signal, and switch off
(i. e. darken) the other lens. You will see the left picture with your left eye and the right picture with your right eye. The pictures alternate so quickly
that due to the inertia of the eyes, both eyes see their respective pictures simultaneously.
The frequent alternations between dark phases and picture display may cause a slight flickering at the presentation with shutter glasses. The rea-
son for this is that the frequency at which this alternation is not perceptible may vary strongly from person to person. Whereas for some persons
the picture is flickering, it seems to be steady for others.
261
DISPLAY VIEW LAYOUT
11
Projection to a projection screen using beamers

A specific decoder is connected to the above mentioned special output of your computer (Video). The decoder splits the complete video signal
(which contains the pictures for both eyes) into two separate video signals one signal for the left picture, and one signal for the right picture.
The two video outputs of the decoder have to be connected to beamers (special video projectors), which will project the two pictures for the left
and right eyes to the projection screen. Both pictures must be strictly coincident, requiring a precise calibration of projection screen and beamers.
During the projection the light of the left picture is polarized perpendicular to the light of the right picture. Simple polarization glasses (cardboard
or plastic frame with thin plastic glasses) will filter the pictures for the spectator: You will see the left picture with your left eye and the right picture
with your right eye, because the polarization glasses will not transmit the respective other picture to the other eye. (Two polarization filters block
the light if their polarization directions are perpendicular to each other.) Since the picture is displayed permanently without being interrupted by
dark phases, a beamer presentation provides a steady picture.
11.3.4.2 The Stereo tab
On/Off
With this option the Stereo function can be switched on and off.
Eye Distance
By this option you can define the eye distance. (The specified value refers to a 1 : 1 scale.) The eye distance will change automatically
according to the zoom status, allowing for better zooming with a constant stereo effect.
Focal Length
Setting of the focal length (= distance between Eye Position and Reference Point).
This option is only available in the view mode Central Perspective and can be used independently from the availability of the stereo function.
Separation
This option allows you to reposition the left and right pictures with regard to each other in horizontal direction. Such a modification also has an
impact on the stereo effect.
Exchange Left Right

The views for the left and right eyes can be exchanged.
11.4 Display View Layout

Apart from the pull down menu the function Display View Layout can also be activated by the shortcut Ctrl-B.
In ICEM Surf several views can be simultaneously displayed on the screen (see figures 103 and 104, page 263). A combination of several views
is called view layout. Each view can be rotated, moved, or scaled in the corresponding view window.
For a view layout up to eight view windows can be created. The active view window is marked by a highlighted frame. A view will become the cur-
rent view by positioning the mouse cursor into this window and pressing the Shift key.
The function Display View Layout includes the tabs View Layout, Modification, and Modify Frame described in the following sections.
11.4.1 View Layout

In this tab the views for a view layout can be selected and the user-defined view layouts administrated.
262
VIEW LAYOUT
11

To Save, Rename, and Delete user-defined view layouts corresponding submenus are activated (see also section 2.4.4 User-defined set-
tings in service functions on page 27).
Selection List View Layout

In this selection list all user-defined view layouts are indicated and can be selected as current view layout.
The display variant SURF_AUX saves the last used settings when saving the database and restores them when starting ICEM Surf again
NOTE:
For user-defined view layouts the name SURF_AUX must not be used, as this would cause data losses in case of exporting to the
ICEM DB format.
Ratio
Screen
All view windows have the same size.
As the complete screen surface is used, this setting is especially appropriate for view manipulations or geometry modifications.
Figure 103 View Layout using the option Screen
Dynamic
The view windows sizes are adapted to the block of extreme values.
This setting is appropriate for plotting, as space-saving positioning of the view windows allows a more economical usage of the plotter
paper and large scale plots.
263
VIEW LAYOUT
11
Figure 104 View Layout using the option Dynamic
Dependent
In case of dynamic view manipulations the settings of the current view are adopted by all views.
NOTE:
The setting of this option will not be written into the data base when saving the view layout.
Views
With the following options you can specify which default views shall be displayed on the screen (see also Standard views and work planes
on page 46). Six views are available:
Figure 105 Standard views
Front View Side View Rear View
Front Rotated Top View Rear Rotated
264
MODIFICATION
11
Original, Mirror, Both

You can choose, whether the original half, the mirrored half, or both halves of the geometry shall be displayed.
11.4.2 Modification
This tab contains options for the manipulation of the views in view layout.
Translate
After activating this button the current view can be moved. The views are moved in steps according to the Spacing set in the menu Display
Grid (see page 270). You have two possibilities to move views:
Numerically:
Enter into the text fields Offset X: and Offset Y: the desired values and press the Enter-key. You can continue moving the view by
repeated pressing of the Enter-key.
The offset values will automatically be adapted to the Spacing set in the menu Display Grid.
Graphically:
Click onto the view in the graphic area and draw it to the desired position. The values in the text fields will dynamically be updated. The
function can be terminated with the right mouse button.
Detail
After activating this button you may define a detail of a view in the graphic area. Only this defined detail will be displayed in the view window.
The detail to be defined is not restricted to the area within the view frame, but may be also defined outside of the view boundary.
Duplicate
To duplicate a view first activate this option and then click onto the view to be duplicated.
Delete View
To delete a view first activate this option and then click onto the view to be deleted. ICEM Surf automatically changes to a new current view.
The last view cannot be deleted.
11.4.3 Modify Frame

In this tab you can specify an edge width of the graphic area. Eventually, the size of the view windows must be adapted.
11.5 Display Plane
Apart from the pull down menu, the function Display Plane can be activated by the icon in the service functions block.
To support the design of geometry objects you can create arbitrary work planes providing a local coordinate system. The local Xt and Yt axes of a
work plane span the plane, the Zt axis also called Depth is the plane normal. In ICEM Surf, work planes are always right handed. When
importing left handed planes from other applications, the normal will automatically be inverted.
The current work plane is displayed in the graphic area by the plane symbol and can be modified by graphical manipulation of the symbol (see
section 2.5.3 The plane symbol on page 29).
The current work plane is independent of the current view, however, a view can be activated as work plane, and vice versa (see options Set View
to Current Plane and Set Plane to Current View in the special functions block).
265
DISPLAY PLANE
11
The menu Plane

To Save, Rename, and Delete user-defined planes corresponding submenus are activated (see also section 2.4.4 User-defined settings in
service functions on page 27).
NOTE:
For planes the name SURF_AUX must not be used, as this would cause data losses in case of exporting to the ICEM DB format.
Planes
This selection list displays the standard planes Plane YX (Front Rotated) and Plane XY (Rear Rotated) as well as all user-defined planes.
The planes can be activated either in the list by double clicking the name or in the special functions block in the popup menu Plane.
Vector
Clicking onto this button activates the window Selection (Vector), in which you can determine the normal vector and origin of the work plane.
Attach Point
(Attachment Point)
A new origin of the current work plane can be selected to move the plane to a new position.
Points
The position and orientation of the plane are defined at least by three points (see figure 106 on page 266):
Point 1:
Definition of the plane origin.
Point 2:
Definition of the X axis direction (from the 1st point through the 2nd point)
Point 3:
Definition of the XY plane and thus the direction of the Y and Z axes.
Figure 106 Generation of work planes defined by three points
Zt
E Yt
P1
P3
P2
X
Z F1/1
Y
If more than three points are selected, the best plane possible will be computed.
Trace
A trace line is defined by specification of two points, along which the X or Y axis of the plane will be adjusted.
Point 1:
Definition of the plane origin.
Point 2:
Definition of the trace direction. Which axis will be aligned along the trace depends on the trace direction relative to the screen coordi-
nates:
The X axis will be aligned along the trace, if the angle between trace and screen X axis is smaller than 45, i e. the trace runs more in
horizontal direction.
266
DISPLAY PLANE
11
The Y axis will be aligned along the trace, if the angle between trace and screen X axis is larger than 45, i e. the trace runs more in
vertical direction.
Approx
(Approximate)
The work plane is computed as balance plane of the selected geometry. The centre of gravity is the plane origin.
Fix
The axis selected in the radio box X-Axis, Y-Axis, Normal will be fixed. The fixed axis influences the following options:
For the definition of a new axis direction with the buttons X-Axis, Y-Axis, and Normal one of the two other axes can be fixed.
For a rotation of the work plane with the option Rot the fixed axis will be used as axis of rotation.
To Invert the work plane, it will be rotated by 180 around the fixed axis.
X-Axis, Y-Axis, Normal

This button activates the vector selection window for defining a new vector for the corresponding axis. The plane origin will not be changed.
If no axis is fixed, the work plane is aligned in a way that the selected axis runs in direction of the new vector.
If an axis is fixed, a rotation around the fixed axis is carried out. The axis to be adjusted adopts the directional components of the selected
vector. The axis of rotation will be preserved.
Figure 107 Alignment of the work plane without and with fixed axis
Y X X
Z Y Z
X Y
Z
alignment of the X-axis normal

alignment of the X-axis nor-
original plane to the patch corner point with
mal to the patch corner point
fixed plane normal (Z)
Rot
(Rotation)
When using this option one of the axes must be fixed (see Fix). The fixed axis will be the axis of rotation, around which the current work plane
can be rotated by the angle specified in the text field.
inverts the rotation angle.
IMPORTANT!
Invert
When using this option also one of the axes must be fixed. The two axis not fixed will be inverted (rotation by 180) after clicking onto this but-
ton.
Depth
The distance of the current work plane from its base construction plane can be modified.
NOTE:
Coordinate-specifications relative to the plane always refer to the current work plane, i. e. the base plane translated by the depth
along its normal direction.
Symbol
This option blanks/unblanks the work plane symbol.
Auto
After activating the button the work plane will be set to the current view.
If the check button is also switched on, the work plane will be automatically updated when changing the view.
When fixing the centre of rotation with the option Rigid in the menu Display View/Navigation Navigation, the current work plane will
automatically be attached to the new centre of rotation.
267
DISPLAY CLIPPING PLANE
11
11.6 Display Clipping Plane

Using this function the geometry can be cut, i. e. made invisible, at any desired plane. The clipping plane can be moved dynamically through the
geometry. As the visible part of the geometry is always in normal direction of the clipping plane, only the Z axis (normal) is displayed.
A clipping plane is displayed as a symbol in the graphic area. For the description of the manipulation possibilities and context menus of the clip-
ping plane symbol please refer to the sections 2.5.5 The clipping plane and turn table symbol on page 32, and 2.5.12 General options in the
context menus on page 41.
The menu Clipping Plane
Clipping plane table

The clipping plane table contains the following information:
Plane
With the check button, the display of the clipping plane in the graphics area can be switched on and off.
In addition, the consecutive number as well as the vector coordinates of the plane normal are indicated.
Offset
With the check button, an offset can be defined. When the check button is activated, the offset distance is indicated in the column Dis-
tance and a second clipping plane symbol in yellow appears in the graphics area. Only the geometry within the specified offset distance
will be displayed.
Distance
The value can be modified in the Distance window which opens by clicking onto the value.
The distance can also be modified graphically by moving the plane symbol in the graphic area. In addition, the symbol can be rotated and
inverted synchronously to the clipping plane symbol (see section 2.5.5 The clipping plane and turn table symbol on page 32).
New
A new clipping plane is created.
NOTE:
The number of definable clipping planes depends on the machine used. In most cases can be defined up to 3 clipping planes.
By default, the clipping planes are created as follows:
1. The first clipping plane is set to the current work plane.
2. The second clipping plane lies normal to the XY plane of the first clipping plane. The plane normal runs parallel to the X axis of the first
clipping plane.
3. The third clipping plane lies normal to the XY planes of the first two clipping planes. The plane normal lies parallel to the Y axis of the first
clipping plane.
In order to create a distance between the clipping planes, the origins of the second and third clipping plane are moved by the default offset
value in direction of the corresponding normal.
If further planes can be defined, normal and origin of the current work plane are again used for the clipping plane definition.
Delete
The clipping plane marked in the table will be deleted.
On
All defined clipping planes are switched on or off globally.
Symbols/Offset Symbols
These options only blank and unblank the symbols of the defined clipping planes and offset planes. The geometry display remains
unchanged.
Colour, Offset Colour

You can assign an individual colour to the clipping planes as well as to the offset planes.
Popup menu Planes

The clipping plane marked in the table can be set to the current or a user-defined plane. If the selected clipping plane is active, the popup
menu is highlighted.
268
DISPLAY MIRROR
11
Plane -> Clip.

(Plane to Clipping Plane)
The workplane can be set to the current clipping plane (marked in the clipping plane table).
Sections
In the current clipping plane a temporary section will be displayed. Except the section type and the settings for dynamic sections the current
parameter settings in the menu Diagnoses Sections (see page 169) are applied. If, for example, the option Set is switched on, the tempo-
rary section will only be displayed on the selected geometry.
With the colour button, the colour of the sections can be changed.
With the option Save Section in the context menu Attachment Point the temporary section can be saved.
NOTE:
This option is only available, if the option Dynamic (see page 172) in the tab Sections of the function Diagnoses Sections
is switched off.
The section is only displayed for the current clipping plane.
The current clipping plane must be switched on.
In the functions Diagnoses Sections the following sections are set automatically:
In the Sections tab the options Plane and Discrete (see page 170) and in the Parameter tab the option Clipping Plane are switched on.
If a section is saved, in the Sections tab will either be created a new group of sections of the section type Plane, or the section will be
added to an already existing group of plane sections, if it is selected in the selection list.
As in case of several saved sections the section planes are not necessarily parallel, in the submenu Discrete (see option Discrete on
page 173 in the tab Parameter the coordinate values of the section plane normal of the saved section is always set to zero.
11.7 Display Mirror
The conventional mirror method mirrors all geometry elements and uses the symmetry plane Y=0. With this function, you can select individual
elements for mirroring and define an individual symmetry plane.
If a selective mirroring has been defined, with the options Geometry: Original, Mirrored, Both in the menu Display View/Navigation (also to
be activated by the functions keys F6, F7, F8) these individual settings are used instead of the default mirroring.
NOTE FOR DIAGNOSES ON SELECTIVELY MIRRORED ELEMENTS:

If selective mirroring has been defined and selected for a diagnosis, the diagnosis will only be carried out on the geometry elements, but
NOT on the selectively mirrored elements.
Figure 108 Selective mirroring
Default mirroring Y=0 Selective mirroring at individually

defined symmetry plane
The menu Mirror
Select +
Selection of the geometry elements, for which an individual mirroring shall be defined.
269
DISPLAY GRID
11
With + can be added further elements to the selection.
Plane
Definition of the mirror plane:
View
The view plane is used as mirror plane.
Plane
The current work plane is used as mirror plane.
User-defined
(User-defined)
By manipulating the plane symbol (see section 2.5.3 The plane symbol on page 29) you can define an arbitrary plane as mirror plane.
Reset
The mirroring will be reset to the default settings, i. e. the selection is cancelled and the symmetry plane set to Y=0.
11.8 Display Grid

With this function a grid can be activated which is aligned to the model coordinates and displayed in all views. It is used to estimate the propor-
tions of the geometry.
For the description of the manipulation possibilities and context menus of the grid symbol please refer to the sections 2.5.11 The grid symbol on
page 40 and 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41
The menu Grid
Grid
Blanking and unblanking the grid.
Grid in Plane
The grid line or symbols are displayed parallel to the Side View, Top View, or Front View plane.
Display
Display of Lines or Symbols. In the display of lines the zero lines are emphasized.
Spacing
The distance between the grid lines or symbols can be determined. This distance is used as magnetic grid when moving views. When gener-
ating view layouts the views are aligned according to this value.
11.9 Display Coordinate Axes
The function Coordinate Axes 2D will be displayed parallel to the screen coordinate axes (see special functions Coordinate Axes 2D on
page 49).
11.10 Display Material
Apart from the pull down menu this function can also be activated by the icon in the special functions block or by the shortcut Ctrl-M. It is
used to design the shaded display of surfaces and scans by assigning material characteristics.
IMPORTANT!
All modifications on the current material will be adopted immediately and cannot be undone. If you want to preserve the current settings,
you should first create a new material with the option Save and then modify the new material.
The function Display Material includes the tabs Material, Colours, Textures, and File described in the following sections.
The following displays and options are available in each tab:
Current Material
Display of the current material name.
270
MATERIAL
11
Preview
Preview of the properties of the selected material.
Select
The material of the selected object becomes the current material.
Assign
The current material is assigned to the selected objects.
After having assigned the material, the option Individual in the menu Display Display (see page page 250) is automatically switched on to
activate the display of the individual material settings.
11.10.1 Material
This tab contains options for general material administration.
Material table
In the material table all saved materials are indicated and can be activated as current material. The materials 1 to 5 are predefined standard
materials which can be modified and renamed, but neither assigned to another group nor deleted.
Clicking onto a column header sorts the table according the corresponding column in ascending or descending order and by date. The sorting
direction is displayed by a triangle. No triangle means that sorting is by date.
Context menus
Clicking onto the table header activates context menus for managing the materials. For the individual columns, different options are available
(see description of the columns).
All context menus contains the options New, Rename, Delete, and Export also available in the menu. The following options for column dis-
play settings are additionally available:
Hide column
The current column is hidden.
Show all columns
All hidden columns are unblanked.
Show column
Hidden columns can be unblanked individually.
271
MATERIAL
11
Material Filter
In the header of the columns Name, Type, and Group a filter function is available via a context menu:
In the text field is indicated the text string to be filtered. Available wildcard characters are * for any number of letters and ? for exactly one char-
acter. The check button activates or deactivates the filter.
Types and groups can be filtered via an additional check box. In addition to the defined types and groups the options All and <None> are
available: The option All activates/deactivates all types and groups. The option <None> filters all materials to which no type or group is
assigned. If a text filter is defined in addition, it is only applied to the activated types and groups, respectively.
Every setting modification must be confirmed by clicking the button.
After defining a filter the filter definition is displayed in the header of the corresponding column.
The table columns
Preview
A small preview allows an easy comparison of two or more materials without explicitly selecting them.
Right-clicking onto the preview icon also displays the material in the large preview in the upper left corner of the window without selecting
the material.
The context menu contains the special options Large, Medium, and Small to set the icon size.
Name
This column indicates the material names.
Right-clicking within the column activates a context menu with the options Rename, Delete, and Export.
Type
Materials can be categorized in types.
Right-clicking within the column activates the submenu Change Type allowing to create new types or select a type from a pre-defined set.
Group
Each material can be assigned to a group.
The selection list of the available groups includes all defined groups of the materials existing in the data base. You can create new groups
by entering a name in the text field.
Right-clicking within the column activates the submenu Change Group allowing to create new groups or assign the selected material to
an existing group.
The group of the default materials cannot be changed.

Read only
By default, the materials have the read and write status . In this column, a selected material can be set to read only by right-click-
ing onto the symbol. The material properties then can no longer be modified. To change properties of a read only material, a new material
with equal properties must be created, which can then again be modified.
Default materials cannot be set to read only.
Select, Assign
See page 271.
272
COLOURS
11
New
The submenu Save to create a new user-defined material with the current settings is activated.
Rename, Delete
To Rename and Delete user-defined materials, corresponding submenus are activated (see also section 2.4.4 User-defined settings in serv-
ice functions on page 27). If materials already assigned to objects are deleted, the default materials will automatically be assigned to these
objects.
Delete Unused
You can delete unused materials to clean up data base quickly.
11.10.1.1 The submenu for selecting materials

A submenu for assigning a material can be activated in some functions:
The options available here are described in section 11.10.1 Material on page 271. In addition, the following option can be available:
Remove individual Material

Removing the assigned material.
Select
Graphical selection of a material.
11.10.2 Colours
In this tab the material characteristics are determined.
273
COLOURS
11
Colour settings
With the following colour buttons The submenu Colour Selection (see page 285) is activated, in which the colour characteristics of the mate-
rial can be set in the colour models RGB and HLS. For each material, three colours are used:
Diffuse Colour
The diffuse colour is created by the light source types Beam, Point, and Spot. It creates the three-dimensional effect of the geometry.
Ambient Colour
The ambient colour is created by the light source type Ambient. With the ambient colour dark regions of the geometry are brightened.
Specular Colour
The specular colour is the colour is the colour of the diffuse reflection created by the light source types Beam, Point, and Spot on the
geometry.
274
TEXTURES
11
Reflection
The material will be assigned the capability to reflect an Environment or a Special Reflection Image (see function Display Environment,
page 286). If neither an environment nor a special reflection image has been defined, the standard Environment 1 will be reflected.
The reflection intensity can be adjusted by the slider or the text field.
With the option Reflection (see page 332) in the tab Realtime Renderer of the menu Windows Preferences the display quality of reflec-
tions of background images on the geometry can be optimised.
Transparency
The material will become transparent. The transparency intensity can be adjusted by the slider or the text field.
Shine
This shine factor controls the extent of the light source reflection on the geometry.
If Environment Lighting and Diffuse Reflection is used, this option influences the softness of the reflection. The lower this value is set, the
softer will be the reflection. If the highest value is set, the reflection will not be changed.
NOTE:
As the internal computation of the shininess value has been modified in the ICEM Surf version 4.0, in imported data bases or EDF
files from previous versions as well as in imported CDRS files the shininess value eventually must be adapted to obtain the same
shininess effect as in the original files.
Refraction
NOTE:
This option can only be used for reflecting materials (Reflection > 0).
In the menu Display Options, the option Reflection Clearpaint must be switched on.
The intensity of reflections on surfaces depends from the angle between view direction and surface normal. The Clearpaint effect created by
this method simulates the reflecting properties of glossy materials like paint, glass, or plastic. With the slider, you can control the intensity of
this effect.
Select, Assign
See page 271.
11.10.3 Textures
In this tab you can load TIFF, JPEG, or HDR images which can be projected onto materials as textures and/or bump maps.
NOTE:
The size of the images is limited to maximally 32 megapixel = ca. 6800 x 4700 Pixel. Larger image files will not be displayed in the
graphic area.
When exporting to the ICEM DB format only the names of the image files are written into the ICEM DB. Therefore, the texture paths
have to be re-inserted in the function Windows Texture Paths when importing the ICEM DB on another computer.
Texture
Loading and activating a texture. Textures are images projected by different methods onto surfaces and scans, similar to an adhesive film
which fits to the corresponding surface (see figure 109).
If no texture has been loaded, the file browser is activated by clicking onto the check button.
275
TEXTURES
11
If a texture already has been loaded, the corresponding image is displayed in the icon next to the check button. Clicking onto the icon will acti-
vate the file browser to load another image. The check button is now used for switching on and off the texture display.
NOTE:
In the material only the texture is saved, but not the projection type. The latter is assigned to the geometry.
To display the textured material on the geometry, the option Textures in the menu Display Options must be switched on.
The display quality of the texture projection also depends on the tessellation of the geometry (see function Display Tessel-
lation, page 319).
Bump Map
By Bump-Mapping an apparent 3-dimensional structure is created on the surface of objects. This is caused by interpreting lightness values of
a texture in a way that they are displayed as altitude differences on the object surface (see figure 109).
The functionality of the check button and the icon is the same as in the option Texture.
NOTE:
To display the Bump Map effect, the option Bump Map in the menu Display Options must be switched on.
For the Bump Map effect, only the light source 1 is used. The illuminating effect of further light sources on the material can be
made visible with the option Bump Map: Use all light sources in the menu Windows Preferences Realtime Renderer.
For bump maps the following parameters can be set:
Intensity
This option reacts to the bright/dark contrasts of the imported image: with a positive value bright areas are displayed as hollows and dark
areas as ridges. The value specified should be unequal zero, as otherwise no Bump Map effect will be obtained.
Softness
With this option can be set the softness of the relief contours.
The most realistic effect will be obtained by the combination of both Texture and Bump Map. The advantages of both methods produce an
almost photo realistic impression.
Figure 109 Effect of Texture and Bump Map
Display with Texture Display with Bump Map Display with Texture and
Bump Map
Library
With this button the file browser is activated, where you can load predefined textures from the directory figures.
Texture Projection
With this button the menu Display Texture Projection is activated, in which you can assign different projection types to objects with tex-
tures (see section) 11.11 Display Texture Projection on page 279).
Colour
With the options in this popup menu you can manipulate the texture colours.
original data:
texture image with white background texture image with transparent back-
(used for ground (used for
from Texture and from Material with alpha channel and
with alpha channel + Transparency
Geometry without Texture
276
SHADOWS
11
From Texture
The diffuse material colour will be completely replaced by the texture colours, the ambient and
specular colour remain unchanged.
From Material
The colours of material and texture are combined. The black parts of the texture colours remain
unchanged, whereas the white parts adopt the material colour. The brighter the texture colour is,
the more intensive it will be overlaid by the material colour.
Use alpha channel
This option can be used, if in the image file used as texture are defined apart from the colour chan-
nels (RGB, CYMK) also alpha channels which determine the transparency of the colours. On the
geometry appears the material colour in the transparent areas of the texture image.
Use alpha channel and Transparency
This option is also applicable for image files with alpha channels. In this case, in the transparent
areas of the texture image does not appear the material colour, but on the geometry these areas
are also displayed transparent.
NOTE:
For displaying the texture colours in menu Display Options, in addition to Shading the
options Textures and Transparency must be switched on.
Select, Assign
See page 271.
11.10.4 Shadows
The options of this tab define the shadow properties of a material.
277
FILE
11
Cast shadows
The material can cast shadows on materials and environment sides.
Receive shadows
Shadows cast from other objects are displayed on the material.
11.10.5 File
This tab contains options for the data exchange of materials via ICEM DB or EDF files.
Material File
Import
User-defined materials can be imported via ICEM DB and EDF files.
Export
User-defined materials can be exported via ICEM DB and EDF files.
History
This popup menu shows the paths last used for the import and export. The selected path will be used for the next import or export opera-
tion.
278
DISPLAY TEXTURE PROJECTION
11
Materials of same denom.

(Materials of same denominator)
If name conflicts due to identically named materials in the current data base occur when reading in materials, you can specify how this name
conflicts shall be resolved.
Rename
All elements will be imported. If in the data base materials with the same names already exist, the imported materials will be renamed by
adding consecutive numbers to their names.
Replace
Materials with the same name will be replaced.
Skip
The materials will not be imported in to the data base.
Select, Assign
See page 271.
Export materials as read only/

Import materials as read only
Materials are set to As read only status when being exported and imported. If the options are switched off, the current status of the materials
remains unchanged.
Only used Materials

Only used materials are exported into the ICEM DB or EDF file.
11.11 Display Texture Projection

In this menu the Mapping method, i. e. the projection type, of textures and its parameters are defined. As the mapping method is assigned to the
geometry and not to the material, you can assign e. g. to individual patches of a surface with identical material the same texture with different
mapping methods.
If with the buttons Select + or Group + objects are selected for the texture projection, the system checks whether the selection includes
objects to which no material with texture is assigned, and
objects imported from 3DPAINT having already fixed texture coordinates which would be deleted when using another mapping method.
If the selection includes objects with these properties, a message will appear indicating how much of the selected objects have no texture or fixed
texture coordinates. You can then either
abort the function,
deselect the objects without texture or with fixed texture coordinates (option Yes) or
select all objects (option No).
The menu Texture Projection
Select +
Deselection of all selected objects and reactivation of the selection.
279
11
If you used the Select button, the system not only checks whether all selected objects have a texture, but also whether they belong to the
same group of textures. In this case in the menu are displayed all current parameter settings and in the graphic area the coordinate system
set with the mapping method. If the objects belong to different groups or no group, the default parameters are displayed.
If the + button has been used, the last parameter setting is displayed.
Group +
All objects with textures being projected with the same mapping method and with the same parameter settings, are defined as a group. An
object can only belong to one group. If the object of a group is selected with the button Group, all other objects of the group will also be
selected, and the parameters are set to the values of this group.
Delete
For all selected objects the assignment of the mapping method with all parameters is deleted. The selected objects are displayed with the
mapping method Standard and do no longer belong to a group.
Delete All
For all objects the assignment of the mapping method with all parameters is deleted. To all objects the mapping method Standard will be
assigned and all groups are dissolved.
Mapping
To apply textures on a geometry, 2D texture coordinates are created. The different possibilities to distribute these coordinates onto the geom-
etry are called texture mapping methods. The selection of the most suitable mapping method depends on the geometry shape. Except for the
Standard mapping method must also be specified the coordinate system (View, Plane, or User-defined) to be used as projection base. The
projected texture image starts at the origin of the coordinate system used.
The following texture mapping methods can be selected:
Standard
For surfaces the texture coordinates are distributed in the u/v space and for scans on a balance plane which is adjusted to the scan posi-
tion and shape.
Planar
The texture coordinates are distributed in the XY plane of the current coordinate system. With the option Modify Image the projection can
be modified. This method is most suitable for flat geometry.
280
11
Cylindrical
With this mapping method the texture coordinates are projected onto an invisible cylinder. The cylinder axis will be the Z axis of the coor-
dinate system. The X and Y axes determine the position of the texture image on the cylinder in X and Y direction. This method is suitable
for geometry with cylindrical shape.
Spherical
With this method the texture coordinates are projected onto an invisible sphere. The centre point of the sphere will be at the origin of the
coordinate system set. The three axes determine the position of the texture image on the sphere. This method is suitable for geometry
with spherical shape.
Cubic
The cubic texture projection allows a plane projection onto the sides of a cuboid. The texture image is spanned in the three planes of the
texture coordinate system. This mapping method simplifies considerably the projection of a texture onto three-dimensional geometry, as
in many cases the texture can be projected with one step.
It is not only possible to modify the size of the texture image as already known from the planar texture projection, but also its extension at
the sides of each axis. For this modification type special vector symbols are available. The value displayed at the vector ends indicates
the factor by which the Size set in the menu Texture Projection is multiplied.
281
11
In the context menu Scale which is activated with the right mouse button, you can set the scaling mode with the following options:
Scale Proportionally
The scaling factors are modified equally, i. e. their ratio remain changed.
Scale Independently
The scaling factor is set individually for each direction. The factors for the other directions remain unchanged.
Cylindrical (Catia), Spherical(Catia), Cubic (Catia)
These mapping methods are provided for the data exchange with Catia. They are compatible with the corresponding methods in Catia
and thus allow a loss-free data exchange.
Coordinate system
This popup menu is only available for the mapping methods Plane, Cylindrical, Spherical and Cubic.
You can select the coordinate system to be used as projection base.
View
The view plane is used as projection base.
Plane
The current work plane is used as projection base.
User-defined
(User-defined)
The previous user-defined plane will be used as projection base.
The coordinate system is displayed in the graphic area in the shape of a temporary plane symbol and can be manipulated in the same way as
the normal plane symbol (see sections 2.5.3 The plane symbol on page 29 and 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41).
In addition to the general options the following special options are available in the context menus:
Set to Current Plane
If the plane symbol is used within a function (e. g. Texture Projection) to define a local coordinate system, the context menu contains this
option, by which the user-defined plane of the corresponding function can be set to the current work plane.
Modify Image
Activating the option Modify Image.
After having selected a coordinate system, the popup menu is automatically reset to the option User-defined, and the parameters of the
coordinate system used are saved until another coordinate system is selected with the options View or Plane. After reselection of the geom-
etry the last used coordinate system is displayed as temporary plane symbol, optionally with plane name.
The two following options Modify Image and Display Image are only available for the mapping methods Planar and Cubic.
Modify Image
After having selected a geometry, first the last used coordinate system is displayed as temporary plane symbol. When activating the option
Modify Image, instead of the plane symbol is displayed the image symbol, which you can now use to scale and move the texture image in the
XY plane. At the handles of the symbol you can activate with the right mouse button the context menu <Image>. For a detailed description of
its option please refer to section 2.5.6 The image symbol on page 34.
Display Image
The image symbol is displayed with the texture image.
Size
X, Y
For planar and cubic texture projections (mapping methods Planar and Cubic) you can determine the texture dimensions in X and Y
direction. In the graphic area the dimensions are also displayed at the image symbol.
Height
For a cylindrical projection (mapping method Cylindrical) the texture dimension is specified only in Y direction, i. e. the cylinder height.
The values are specified in mm. In the graphic area a vector symbol to manipulate the height is displayed (see also section 2.5.9 The
vector symbol on page 38).
Position
The texture can be moved in X and Y direction.
Rotate
The texture can be rotated.
Rotate Picture by 90 to the right, Rotate Picture by 90 to the left
The texture is rotated by 90 in the corresponding direction.
Horizontal Mirroring of Picture, Vertical Mirroring of Picture
The texture is mirrored in vertical or horizontal direction.
Repeat
Switch on and off multiple display of the texture image on a patch.
282
DISPLAY COLOURS
11
Check buttons X, Y
The display of the repetition can be switched on and off in X and/or Y direction.
Equally
The image is repeated in X and Y direction by the same value. To set the repetition value only the X slider and text field are available.
Slider and text fields X, Y
Specification of the repetition value.
11.12 Display Colours

Apart from the pull down menu the function Display Colours can also be activated by the shortcut Ctrl-F.
For the display of points and lines (wire frame display) 40 colours are available which can be freely defined.
NOTE:
The display of shaded surfaces can be modified with the function Display Material (see page 270).
The menu Colours
Object type list

The standard colours of the object types are defined by links to the Colour Table. In addition, you can also define individual links to the colour
table for single objects. These are only used, if in the menus Display Options and Display Display the option Individual is switched on.
To change the link of object types to a colour, the object types first have to be marked. Then you can assign another colour by selection in the
colour table. If all marked objects are linked to the same colour, it will be marked in the colour table.
NOTE:
The following object types cannot be assigned to another button in the colour table:
Auxiliary Object
Saved Version
Diagnosis Vector
Diagnosis Polygon
Background Objects
The colour of these object types can only be modified by changing the colour of the corresponding button in the submenu Colour
Selection (see section 11.12.2 The submenu Colour Selection on page 285).
Colour table
To change a colour, it must be marked in the colour table. A colour can be marked either by the option Select or by selecting an object type
with the colour to be changed in the object type list.
When clicking onto the marked colour the submenu Colour Selection (see page 285) will be activated. At the same time, in the object type list
all object types are marked which are linked to this colour and will be concerned by the modification.
Select
When activating this button all markings in the object type list will be deleted. A colour can now be marked by selection in the graphic area or
in the colour table.
283
COLOUR MODELS
11
Assign
The current colour will be assigned to all objects selected in the graphic area. These objects will then have an individual colour.
After having assigned the material, the check button Individual in the menus Display Display and Display Options is automatically
switched on to activate the display of the individual colour settings.
Delete
The assignment of an individual colour will be deleted for all objects selected in the graphic area. The objects will be displayed in the default
colour assigned to the corresponding object type in the menu Display Display.
Plot Colours
If this option is switched on, the menu displays the plot colours. Please refer to the section Assigning plot colours on page 89 for instructions
how to assign plot colours.
Unused Colours
If this option is switched on, in the colour table can only be selected colours which are not assigned to an object type.
11.12.1 Colour models

For colour definition, in ICEM Surf are used the colour models RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation).
11.12.1.1 The RGB colour model

In the RGB colour model, a colour is defined by adding the primary colours red, green, and blue to black (additive colour mixing method). The
RGB colour model can be represented as coordinate system forming a cube with the basic colours red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and magenta at
the eight corners, and the origin of which is black with the coordinate values 0.00, 0.00, 0.00. Each colour is defined by three coordinate values for
red, green, and blue. The range of values is 0.00 to 1.00. Low values create dark colours, high values light colours. If the primary colours red,
green, and blue have the same value, are created the colours black (0.00, 0.00, 0.00), white (1.00, 1.00, 1.00) or gray scales.
Figure 110 The RGB colour model
cyan (0.00,1.00,1.00) white (1.00,1.00,1.00)
green (0.00,1.00,0.00)
yellow (1.00,1.00,0.00) gray scales
blue (0.00,0.00,1.00)
magenta (1.00,0.00,1.00)
black (0.00,0.00,0.00) red (1.00,0.00,0.00)
11.12.1.2 The HLS colour model

In the HLS colour model a colour is defined by the parameters hue, lightness, and saturation. The HLS colour model is represented by a hexago-
nal double pyramid. At the corners of the basic sexangle are the basic colours red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and magenta, at the pyramids verti-
ces the colours black and white.
284
THE SUBMENU COLOUR SELECTION
11
Figure 111 The HLS colour model
white
L (height)
green yellow
H (angle)
S (distance)
cyan red
greyscale
blue magenta
black
Hue
The hue value is indicated as angle.
Lightness
The lightness of a colour is defined by the height of the value on the black-white-axis. The colour will be the lighter or darker, the larger the
white or black portion is. The lightness is indicated in values from 0.00 (100 % black) to 1.00 (100 % white). The pure colour without black and
white portions will be obtained with a value of 0.50.
Saturation
The saturation, i. e. the gray and colour portion of a colour, is defined by the distance of the value from the black-white-axis. The saturation is
also indicated in values from 0.00 (100 % grey) to 1.00 (full colour).
11.12.2 The submenu Colour Selection
The submenu Colour Selection can be activated by double clicking onto a colour button in the Colour table.
The colours can be defined in the colour fields in the left part of the menu or by the sliders and text fields in the right part. The two colour fields on
the top right show the modified and the previous colour. With all modifications in the menu the display of the colour fields, sliders, and text fields is
dynamically updated.
Colour selection in colour fields

A colour can be selected in the colour fields, if the specification of exact numerical values is not necessary.
The narrow colour field in the middle of the menu shows the range of values of the colour channel activated in the radio box. In case of the R,
G, B, L, and S channels the range of values is displayed as smooth gradient. In case of the H channel the colour spectrum is shown. The
channel value can be modified by moving the crossbar.
When activating the colour selection the H channel (colour angle) is set by default as active channel, as this channel offers the easiest way to
select the desired hue. Lightness and Saturation can then be set in the large colour field.
The large colour field shows all colours, which can be defined with the current value of the colour channel activated in the radio box:
If an R, G, or B channel is active, the large colour field shows all colours which can be defined with the fixed value of the active RGB chan-
nel within the ranges of values of the other two RGB channels.
If the H channel is active, the selected hue is displayed with all lightness and saturation degrees.
285
DISPLAY ENVIRONMENT
11
If the L channel is active, the complete colour spectrum is displayed with all saturation degrees.
If the S channel is active, the complete colour spectrum is displayed with all lightness degrees.
In the large colour field you can select a colour with the cross hair cursor without changing the current value of the active colour channel.
Colour selection with the sliders and text fields

With the sliders and text fields a colour can be defined by specifying numerical values.
11.13 Display Environment
With this function you can create an environment consisting of TIFF, JPEG, or HDR images, which can be used for the creation of photorealistic
renderings.
Moreover, you can read in special reflection images (stripes or grids) which are reflected in the geometry surface and can be used for a surface
diagnosis.
Figure 112 Environment with TIFF images
The function Display Environment includes the tabs Environment, Parameter, Reflection, Light, Shadow, and File described in the follow-
ing sections.
11.13.1 Environment
This tab contains options for the display of the environment block.
On
Activating the current environment. If no environment has yet been defined, the default environment 1 will be loaded.
286
ENVIRONMENT
11
NOTE:
By activating a central projection (see Central in the menu Display View/Navigation, page 255, or Set view mode ,
page 46, in the special functions block, the Eye Position will be positioned inside a closed environment block.
Symbol
The image symbol for the manipulation of the environment block can be blanked and unblanked.
Environment Images
Using these icons, you may load and activate images for the environment block.
NOTE:
The size of the images is limited to maximally 32 megapixel = ca. 6800 x 4700 Pixel. Larger image files will not be displayed in
the graphic area.
When exporting to the ICEM DB format only the names of the image files are written into the ICEM DB. Therefore, the texture
paths have to be re-inserted in the function Windows Texture Paths when importing the ICEM DB on another computer.
For further information on the image files please refer to Directory with image files the section Directory structure of the installation in the
manual Software configuration.
After selecting an icon, a parameter menu is activated. For detailed information of the available options please refer to the section The
parameter menu for the environment images on page 287.
Shape of the environment room

For the environment room, you can choose the following shapes:
Cuboid
The environment room has the classic rectangular shape with six sides.
Cylinder
The environment room has a cylindric shape. The cylinder cross section may also have the shape of an ellipse. For this variant, only the
environment images Top Image, Rear Image, and Bottom Image are used.
Sphere
The environment room has the shape of a sphere or an ellipse. For this variant, only the environment image Rear Image is used.
The following options allow to control the behaviour of the environment room when manipulating the view:
Model Space
When manipulating the view, the environment room is rotated with the geometry.
View Space
The environment room is fixed. When manipulating the view, the geometry is rotated independently from the environment room.
On
With these check buttons the corresponding environment sides may be switched on and off.
The parameter menu for the environment images

In this parameter menu the settings for the sides of the environment box (see Environment Images in the main menu) can be modified.
On
The environment images loaded is displayed on the corresponding side of the environment box.
File
Via the icon the file browser can be activated to load another environment image.
287
PARAMETER
11
In the text field the name and path of the current environment image file is displayed and can be modified.
Light
The activated environment side will be illuminated by the current light sources.
Shadows
On the activated environment side will be mapped the shadows caused by the light sources.
Shine
This shine factor controls the extent of the light source reflection on the environment image.
Reflections
The geometry will be reflected on the activated environment side. Using the slider, you may control the intensity of the reflection.
Bump Map
Via the file browser, you can load an image which is projected onto the environment image with Bump Map effect. With Intensity you can con-
trol the intensity of the bright/dark contrasts. (See also Bump Map in the function Display Material.)
NOTE:
To display the Bump Map effect, the option Bump Map in the menu Display Options must be switched on.
Repeat, Equally
On the activated environment side will be displayed the specified number of copies of the environment image in X and Y direction. The
number of copies can be modified dynamically using the slider or numerically using the text fields.
If the option Equally is switched on, the number of copies will always be equal in X and Y direction.
11.13.2 Parameter
In this tab you can set size and position of the environment block.
Auto Min/Max
If the check button is switched on, the option Auto Min/Max is automatically carried out with its current settings when loading a Room File.
Activating the button Auto Min/Max will adapt the environment box to the geometry depending on the setting of the check buttons Adjust
Position and Adjust Size.
Adjust Position
The environment box will be positioned in a way that the geometry is located on the floor in the middle of the environment box.
Adjust Size
The size of the environment box will be adapted to the geometry. The aspect ratio will be kept.
Hide Back Faces

With this option the back faces of the environment box hiding the geometry in the current view will be blanked.
Ignore Depth
The geometry is always displayed in the foreground.
Centre, Size
With these buttons you can change position and size of the environment box dynamically using the right mouse button. In addition, the text
fields allow a modification by entering numerical values.
Moreover, position and size can be modified by manipulating the temporary coordinate symbol in the centre of the environment block (see
sections 2.5.3 The plane symbol on page 29 and 2.5.9 The vector symbol on page 38).
TIP:
The environment block can be globally scaled by manipulating one of the vector symbols with the middle mouse button.
288
REFLECTION
11
X, Y, Z
The environment block can be rotated around the corresponding axis. The rotation can be carried out dynamically by using the thumb wheels
or numerically by entering the desired values into the text fields.
IMPORTANT!
11.13.3 Reflection
In this tab reflection and background images can be loaded.
Special Reflection Image

With this option a TIFF image which is mirrored in the geometry can be loaded and activated.
If no TIFF image has bee loaded yet, the file browser will be activated after clicking onto the check button to load a TIFF file and activate it as
reflection image. The icon can be used to load another reflection image.
IMPORTANT!
The size of the images is limited to maximally 32 megapixel = ca. 6800 x 4700 Pixel. Larger image files will not be displayed in
the graphic area.
For the reflection of an image on surfaces the following settings are necessary:
In the menu Display Options the option Reflection (see page 248) below Shading must be switched on.
In the menu Display Material (see page 275) the Reflection value for the displayed materials must be greater than 0.
Figure 113 Reflection on the Geometry
Spherical Reflection
The image to be reflected is projected onto a virtual sphere, the image information of which will then be mirrored in the geometry.
NOTE:
Depending on the machine type the spherical reflection can eventually be carried out with higher performance than the normal
reflection.
Window Background Image

Activating a background image. If no image has been loaded, the file browser will be activated after clicking the check button. The icon is used
to replace a background image already loaded by another one.
289
LIGHT
11
NOTE:
In order to fit the background, the image must have a size of 1280x1024 pixel.
The window background image not be projected onto the geometry as reflection image.
Figure 114 Using a window background image
11.13.4 Light
NOTE:
The options of this tab are only available, if they are supported by the graphics card of your computer.
Environment Lighting
This option is based on Image-based Lighting, a rendering method which uses the light emitted from environment images as light source. As
default the images of the current environment are used as light sources. If a Special Reflection Image is activated, it will be used as light
source.
Environment lighting is also used to calculate HDR environment images with the function Display Light HDR.
Intensity
For the intensity of the environment lighting, you can choose values between 0 and 1000.
Gamma
This slider influences lightness and colours.
290
LIGHT
11
Figure 115 Environment Lighting
Diffuse Reflection
This option has the effect of a soft focus, i. e. it influences the sharpness of the image reflected on the geometry. The lower the value specified
for Shine in the menu Display Material Colours, the softer is the reflection.
NOTE:
This option requires high computing capacity. To reduce the computing time, it is recommended to use either the option Approxi-
mate or to set for the option Reflection (see page 332) in the menu Windows Preferences Realtime Renderer a value < 256
x 256 for Quality.
The environment type Sphere also reduces the computing time, as the reflection has only to be computed for one image.
Approximate
With this option, the computing time can be considerably reduced also when using a high resolution. However, this results in a slightly
reduced display quality.
Shine
Only available, if Approximate is inactive.
The shine value set in the material menu is multiplied by the factor specified here. This option has no effect for materials for which the
shine factor is set to the highest value.
Diffuse Reflection On
291
SHADOW
11
Diffuse Reflection Off
Use all light sources

With this option, the light sources defined in the function Display Light are also used.
11.13.5 Shadow
In this tab, you can define a plane onto which the shadows are thrown. In the graphics area, the plane and image symbol for the graphic display
and manipulation of the plane position and shadow region are displayed.
Shadow Plane
Blank/unblank the shadow plane.
Position
Definition of the shadow plane by specifying coordinate values in the model coordinate system or by selecting an attachment point with the
button Position.
The position of the shadow plane can also be defined graphically by the plane symbol (see section 2.5.3 The plane symbol on page 29).
Size
Definition of the shadow plane dimension.
The dimension of the shadow plane can also be defined graphically by the image symbol (see section 2.5.6 The image symbol on page 34).
Use Self Shadow technique

If this option is active, the shadow created by the shadow plane is influenced by the Self Shadows and Soft options in the Display Options
window.
Auto Min/Max
If the check button is switched on, the option Auto Min/Max is automatically carried out with its current settings when activating the option
Shadow Plane.
Activating the button Auto Min/Max will adjust the shadow plane depending on the setting of the check buttons Adjust Position and Adjust
Size.
292
FILE
11
Adjust Position
The shadow plane will be positioned in a way that the geometry is located on the floor of the block of extreme values in the middle of the
shadow plane.
Adjust Size
The size of the shadow plane will be adapted to the geometry increasing the dimension by an internally defined factor.
11.13.6 File
This tab includes options for the import and export of environments.
Room File
Import
The file browser will be activated where you can load a CDRS room file (*.drm) as environment (see also function Import CDRS on
page 105).
Export
The file browser will be activated where you can save an environment in a CDRS room file (see also function Export CDRS on
page 142).
NOTE:
For the export the environment must be active (check button On in the tab Environment switched on).
History
Via this popup menu you may load directly six predefined standard environments as well as up to seven used user-defined environments
loaded last.
The following predefined default environments are available:
Environment 1
Environment 2
Environment 3
293
DISPLAY BACKGROUND IMAGE
11
Environment 4
Environment 5
Environment 6
11.14 Display Background Image

With this function can be loaded TIFF or JPEG files as background images on different planes. This can be used for creating geometry on the
basis of sketches loaded as background images (see example in section 11.14.4 Adjusting background images on page 297).
NOTE:
This function is not designed for visualisations. For this, the function Display Environment is available.
The size of the images is limited to maximally 32 megapixel = ca. 6800 x 4700 Pixel. Larger image files will not be displayed in the
graphic area.
For the display and manipulation of background images is used the image symbol. For detailed information about the image symbol manipulation
and the options in the context menus please refer to section 2.5.6 The image symbol on page 34.
In the background images in the three standard planes S Side View Left, T Top View, and R Rear View is displayed the projection of the 3D
Image Centre onto the corresponding plane as scaling centre point (Image Centre).
The scaling centre point is an auxiliary to adapt a background image, e. g. a sketch, to the geometry in the current view. The position of the scal-
ing centre point and the underlying point on the geometry remain unchanged when scaling the symbol.
294
THE MENU BACKGROUND IMAGE
11
Figure 116 Background image block
3D Image Centre
R Rear View Image Centre
S Side View
T Top View
11.14.2 The menu Background Image
New
The first background image plane S Side View Left is activated to load a background image. After having loaded the first background image,
Save becomes active, and you can already save the current setting as Set.
If loaded background images are not yet saved as Set, after clicking onto New first the submenu Save is activated.

To Save, Rename, and Delete background image sets the corresponding submenus are activated (see section 2.4.4 User-defined settings
in service functions on page 27).
SET
The loaded background images can be saved as set. If no set has been saved, the popup menu is dimmed and shows the default set with the
name SET. This default set is empty and cannot be deleted or renamed. If saved sets already exist, you have to reactivate SET in the popup
menu to save the current settings as a new set. Otherwise, the current set will be overwritten.
IMPORTANT!
Background Image sets can only be saved in ICEM DB format!
Images
Background images can be placed in three standard planes and one user-defined work plane. For each plane a check button and an icon are
available which have the following function:
Check Buttons:
Blanking/unblanking and activating/deactivating the background image.
NOTE:
With the option BG Image in the menu Display Options the background images can be blanked and unblanked globally.
Icons:
Loading a background image. To load a background image, the corresponding check button must be switched on.
295
THE SUBMENU IMAGE
11
The different display of the icons has the following meaning:

If no background image has yet been loaded, the icon is gray.
Clicking onto the icon activates the file browser to load a image and the parameter menu Image (see page 296). After having loaded
the image the icon shows the image loaded as thumbnail.
If a background image has already been loaded, clicking onto the icon only activates the parameter menu Image to modify the param-
eters or load another background image.
If the background image is only unblanked, the icon is highlighted:
If the background image is also active for being manipulated, the icon has a light gray background colour:
The check buttons and icons are assigned to the following planes:
S Side View Left
The position of the background image is in the XZ plane of the model coordinate system.
T Top View
The position of the background image is in the XY plane of the model coordinate system.
R Rear View
The position of the background image is in the YZ plane of the model coordinate system.
The background images load with the option described above form a three-sided block with the origin on the origin of the model coordinate
system.
Current Plane
The position of the background image is in the current work plane.
Dependent
The background images are scaled dependently, i. e. when manipulating one image symbol, the others are also scaled by the same factor.
NOTE:
This option does not influence the dependency from the model coordinate system as for light sources. The background images
always depend on the model coordinate system, i. e. they are rotated together with the geometry when manipulating the view.
Undo/Redo
In the footer of this menu a local Undo/Redo function is available allowing to undo and redo the last step carried out within this function.
11.14.3 The submenu Image
296
ADJUSTING BACKGROUND IMAGES
11
On
The display of the background image can be switched on and off.
File
Via the icon the file browser can be activated to load another background image.
In the text field the name and path of the current background image file is displayed and can be modified.
X, Y
Width and height of the background image can be modified.
Original Aspect Ratio

In case of unproportional display of the background image the original aspect ratio can be restored, or in case of modification of the height or
width the counter value will be adapted automatically.
Rotate
The background image including the frame will be rotated by 90 in the corresponding direction.
Flip
The background image is mirrored within the frame in vertical or horizontal direction.
Rotate
The background image can be rotated dynamically using the thumb wheel or numerically by specifying an angle in the text field.
Transparency
The background image can be displayed with transparency. The intensity can be modified with the slider.
Lightness
With this slider the degree of lightness of the background image can be modified.
11.14.4 Adjusting background images

The example described below will show you how to position and scale sketches imported as background images in order to use them for surface
creation.
As basis is used a data base with some auxiliary elements created with ICEM Surf which will be used for the adjustment of the background
images, as well as a set of three background images for the panes S Side View Left, T Top View, and R Rear View.
For adapting sketches to the car coordinate system the designer creates auxiliary lines to simplify the procedure. In the figures below these auxil-
iary lines are displayed in blue colour and have been created with ICEM Surf as straight lines.
Figure 117 Start situation
The following auxiliary elements are used in the data base:

Horizontal blue line:
The long horizontal line is the ground line on which the car shall stand.
U-like blue line:
Three straight lines defining the distance between centre point of the front wheel and centre point of the rear wheel (= 2000 mm) required for
scaling the image.
297
11
Green sphere:
The green sphere was created in the centre of the model or car coordinate system, i. e. according to car body construction conventions it indi-
cates the middle of the front axis.
Red symbols
In ICEM Surf the handles of the background image are displayed as white circles. To emphasize them in the figures, the handles are repre-
sented by the cursor symbols used in ICEM Surf in red colour.
Figure 118 Handles
Scale:
proportional with
left mouse but-
ton
Scale:
proportional with
middle mouse
button
Translate Scaling Centre Point (Image Centre)

left mouse button: on axes left mouse button: translate on axes
middle mouse button: free middle mouse button: free translation
Work steps
1. As first step the background image S Side View Left (XZ plane) will be adjusted. The image is translated until the green sphere coincides
with the centre point of the front wheel. For the translation the handle between a corner point and the middle of an image side will be used
(see figure above).
Figure 119 Translating the Background Image S Side View Left
Y X
2. The Image Centre (scaling centre point) is moved to the origin of the car body coordinate system (green sphere).
298
11
Figure 120 Move Image Centre to coordinate system origin
3. The Background Image is then proportionally scaled using the handle in the upper right corner, until the end point of the 2000 mm straight line
coincides with the centre point of the rear wheel.
Figure 121 Scaling Background Image S Side View Left
4. In the next step the background image plane T Top View (XY plane) is activated and the view rotated around the X axis until both back-
ground image planes are visible.
Figure 122 View with Background Image planes S Side View Left (xz plane) and T Top View (xy plane)
5. The Background Image T Top View is translated until the exterior points on both sketches, i. e. the point with the lowest X coordinate value
of the model coordinate system, have the same position on the X axis.
299
DISPLAY LIGHT
11
Figure 123 Translating Background Image T Top View (xy plane)
points with lowest

X coordinate value
6. In the Background Image T Top View the Image Centre is moved to the lowest X position.
Figure 124 Move Image Centre in Background Image T Top View
7. The Background Image T Top View is now scaled proportionally using the handle in the upper right corner until the car has the same length
in both background images.
Figure 125 Scaling Background Image T Top View
8. In the same way is proceeded to adjust the Background Image R Rear View (YZ plane).
11.15 Display Light
Apart from the pull down menu the function Display Light can also be activated by the icon in the special functions block or by the shortcut
Ctrl-L.
The geometry can be illuminated with different light source types. The effect of light and shadows creates the three-dimensional impression of the
geometry.
300
LIGHT
11
Figure 126 Effect of light sources
Except the light source type Ambient all light sources are displayed as symbols in the graphic area which can be manipulated (see section 2.5.7
The light source symbols on page 36).
The function Display Light includes the tabs Light, Parameter, Shadow, Lens Flares, and File described in the following sections.
11.15.1 Light
In this tab light sources are created and light source types assigned.
Type
With these icons you can select the type of the current light source.
Beam
Beam light sources produce parallel light from a constant direction (like sunlight). The wave angle on a determined plane is constant.
301
LIGHT
11
Point
Point light sources radiate light symmetrically into all directions (like a plain light bulb). The light beams have different wave angles on a
determined plane.
Spot
Spot light sources are defined by a direction vector, a light cone, the dihedral angle of which can be modified dynamically. The transition
to the environment can be hard or soft (see options Angle and Sharpness in the parameter menu on page 303. The light is similar to a
flashlight.
Ambient
Ambient light sources create dispersed light which uniformly shines from all sides and does not show the three-dimensional effect. Real-
istic effects can only be obtained together with Beam, Point, and Spot light sources.
Ambient light are not displayed by a symbol and cannot be manipulated except the colouring.
Light source table

The light source table contains all defined light sources. Apart from the light source type in this table is indicated whether the light source is
switched on (option On) and view dependent (option Dependent), and which Shadow Type is used.
The selected light source will become the current light source, i. e., its current parameter settings are displayed in the menu and can be mod-
ified.
New
A new light source with the current settings is created.
NOTE:
The number of definable light sources is limited to 8.
302
PARAMETER
11
Delete
You can delete light sources in the submenu Delete.
On
Switching on and off the current light source.
Symbols
The display of the symbols of the defined light sources can be switched on and off globally.
Dependent
This option is only available for the light source type Beam.
On
The light source depends on the model coordinate system, i. e. it will be rotated together with the geometry when manipulating the view.
Off
The light source is independent from the model coordinate system, i. e. in case of geometry rotations in the view manipulation its position
remains unchanged.
This option is also available in the Beam light source context menus.
Colour
In the submenu Colour Selection (see section 11.12.2 The submenu Colour Selection on page 285) you can define a colour for the current
light source.
Intensity
For the light source intensity, you can specify values between -100 and 100.
NOTE:
Light sources with negative intensity do not cast shadows.
Light sources with negative intensity are exported to ICEM DB files.
The data exchange with ICEM Viewer files is not supported. Light sources with negative intensity are reduced to a value range
between 0 and 100.
This function can also be assigned to the right mouse button (see Intensity in the menu Windows Mouse).
11.15.2 Parameter
In this tab you can set the direction vector for the current light source as well as the dihedral angle and the edge sharpness
Position
This option is only available for the light source types Point and Spot.
For the current light source can be selected a new position using the position selection. The current position coordinate values are indicated
after the button.
Target Point
This option is only available for the light source type Spot.
The direction of the current light source can be defined by selecting a target in the graphics area after activating the button or specifying coor-
dinate values in the text fields.
Direction
This option is only available for the light source types Beam and Spot.
For the current light source can be selected a new direction using the vector selection. With the button the direction coordinates of the light
source can be inverted. In the text fields you can specify numerical values for direction coordinates.
Angle
Setting of the angle of the spot light cone. In case of setting the Angle to 90 and the Sharpness to 0 a point light source with the same posi-
tion will result.
303
SHADOW
11
IMPORTANT!
Sharpness
Setting of the sharpness of the spot light cone. Higher values concentrate the light beam in the centre of the light cone.
11.15.3 Shadow
For the current light source can be set a hard or soft shadow. The display of shadows is particularly used for the creation of renderings.
Shadow Type
With this option shadows being caused by the current light source on the environment sides can be computed.
IMPORTANT!
When using this option, the following has to be observed:
For the environment sides on which shadows shall be computed, in the menu Display Environment the options Light and
Shadows (see page 288) in the parameter menu for environment images must be switched on.
On the screen, shadows are only displayed if in the menu Display Options the options Environment and Shadows (see
page 247) are switched on.
For the shadow type the following settings are available:
None
No shadow will be created.
Soft
The shadows will be created with soft contours. With the option Softness can be modified the degree of softness.
With the option Soft Shadows: High Quality (see page 333) in the tab Realtime Renderer of the menu Windows Preferences the
display quality of soft shadows can be optimised.
Hard
The shadows will be created with hard contours.
304
HDR
11
Softness
This option is only available for the Shadow Type Soft.
With this option the softness degree of shadow contours can be set dynamically or numerically.
Colour
The shadow colour can be specified.
Intensity, Auto
Definition of the shadow intensity. If several light sources are switched on, the intensity of intersecting shadows can be calculated automati-
cally with the option Auto.
11.15.4 HDR
With the options on this tab you can create HDR light sources, which can be used for creating complex lighting scenarios for realistic rendering
based on Environment Lighting (see page 290).
IMPORTANT!
The HDR lighting scenario can only be saved in ICEM DB files, e. g. via the Filetab.
Figure 127 Lighting scenario with OpenGL and HDR light sources
lighting scenario with OpenGL light sources lighting scenario with HDR light sources
lighting scenario with HDR and OpenGL light sources

NOTE:
In order to be able to use also OpenGL light sources, the option Use all light sources Light tab of the function Display Environment
must be active.
For a lighting scenario are first defined one or several HDR light sources. These light sources are area lights which are independent from the
OpenGL light sources generally used in the Display Light function.
From the HDR light sources is calculated an HDR image which is used as environment map for the environment lighting.
Activating a lighting scenario with HDR light sources (options On + Apply), an imaginary ball-shaped environment textured with the calculated
HDR image is created which is reflected by the geometry.
When activating a lighting scenario with HDR light sources, the HDR image is also used as special reflection image (instead of the reflection
image used with the option Special Reflection Image on the Reflection tab of the function Display Environment).
305
HDR
11
On
Activates the HDR light source options to create or modify a lighting scenario.
HDR light source table

The light source table shows all HDR light sources and their properties defined in the current lighting scenario. They can be individually
selected and modified.
The selected light source is highlighted in the table by a red frame.
The light source position can be modified via the Preview Sphere.
On
For each light source, a check button is available to toggle the light source in the scenario.
Type
The following light source types are available:
Circle
Ellipse
Rectangle
The light source type can be toggled by clicking onto the symbol.
Colour
This option activates The submenu Colour Selection to define the colour of the selected light source.
Symbol
This option toggles the symbol display on the Preview Sphere.
Preview Sphere
The Preview Sphere shows the environment sphere and position and shape of all HDR light sources defined in the scenario.
The selected light source is highlighted on the Preview Sphere by a red frame and can be moved using the left mouse button.
The view of the Preview Sphere can be rotated with the shift key and left mouse button. During view manipulation it is rotated synchronously
with the view. Conversely, the view remains unchanged when rotating the Preview Sphere. When restarting the view manipulation, the sphere
jumps back into the position synchronous to the current view.
306
HDR
11
New
A new light source is created.
Delete
The light source selected in the light source table is deleted.
Save Image
The environment image created with the current scenario can be saved as HDR image, which, for example, can be loaded as Special Reflec-
tion Image. The image size is specified with the option Reflection Quality on the Realtime Renderer tab of the function Windows Prefer-
ences (see page 332).
In the saved HDR image, only the light sources and if used the effect of the options Background and Ground are displayed. The geome-
try view is not saved. For saving the complete scenario as TIFF or JPEG file the Export Image function has to be used
Figure 128 HDR-Image without and with Background and Ground
Apply
Modified settings are only applied after activating this button.
In the Display Options window, the options Reflection and Environment Lighting are activated.
Light source parameters
Latitude/Longitude
The position of the selected light source can be defined numerically by entering the latitude and longitude coordinates in the text fields or
dynamically via the sliders.
Size X/Y
The dimensions of the current light source can be modified.
Intensity
The intensity of the current light source can be modified.
Gradient
Gradient influences the transition at the light source border. The higher the value, the smoother is the transition.
Figure 129 Light source gradient setting
HDR light source with low gradient HDR light source with high gradient
307
HDR
11
Rotate
The current light source can be rotated.
Background parameters
The following options have indirect influence onto the lighting scenario by inserting a background with or without ground. The settings influence
the lighting intensity and the display of reflections on the geometry.
Background
If no background image has been loaded, a greyscale is used for the environment sphere which may be used to influence the lighting inten-
sity. The values can be set from 0 (black) and 1 (white).
Figure 130 Background Intensity
Background with low Intensity Background with high Intensity

Image
Via the button Load, a background image in HDR, TIFF, or JPEG format can be loaded, which will be reflected by the geometry. In this
case, the slider manipulates the image intensity.
NOTE:
The background image is scaled to the size set by the option Reflection Quality on the Realtime Renderer tab of the function
Windows Preferences. This results in a loss of details in the background image when the HDR lighting texture is smaller than
the background image. Also the image size ratio is lost.
Figure 131 Usage of a background with image
Ground parameters
Ground
The check button toggles the display of the ground in the background reflection.
Intensity
The ground is displayed by a greyscale whose intensity can be set with the slider.
308
LENS FLARES
11
Figure 132 Ground Intensity
Ground with low Intensity Ground with high Intensity
Angle
The angle defines the ground height in the environment.
Figure 133 Ground Angle
Ground with negative Angle Ground with positive Angle
Gradient
Gradient influences the transition at the ground border.
Factor
Factor defines the transitions quality between ground and environment. The higher the value, the smoother the colour gradient. Using the
lowest value will create a more or less sharp boundary depending on the Width set.
Width
This slider sets the transition width.
Figure 134 Ground settings in HDR lighting scenarios
ground transition with low values ground transition with high values
for Factor and Width for Factor and Width
11.15.5 Lens Flares

Photographs may show lens flares if incident light reflects between the lenses of a camera objective. This effect is emulated by this function.
IMPORTANT!
In the menu Display Options the option Lens Flares must be switched on.
Lens flares can only be created with Point and Spot light sources.
The light source must beam in direction of the Eye Position.
309
LENS FLARES
11
Figure 135 Lens Flares
Lens Flare Type
Via this popup menu you may select different shapes and colours for the lens flares.
Visible Lights
Lens flares are only created with visible light sources.
Hidden Lights
Lens flares are also created with light sources lying outside the screen area.
Emitting Light
The light emission can be switched off for the light sources Beam, Point, and Spot.
Generating Lens Flares

The creation of lens flares can be switched off for the light sources Point and Spot.
Glow
Bright areas in reflecting geometry are outshone, thus creating a particularly intense glowing effect.
310
AMBIENT OCCLUSION
11
Figure 136 Special glowing effect with Glow
High Quality
The glowing effect is displayed with full resolution. When this option is inactive, the resolution can be reduced to half the value to improve per-
formance.
Intensity
The glowing effect can be intensified or attenuated.
Threshold
You may specify the degree of brightness beyond which the glowing effect shall be applied. This option takes effect only when Environment
Lighting is used.
11.15.6 Ambient Occlusion

Ambient shade, also referred to as ambient occlusion, is created by the indirect ambient light in 3D space and is computed independent of the
position of the light sources. This results in a particularly photorealistic display of the geometry.
Ambient Occlusion Off
Ambient Occlusion On
311
FILE
11
TIP:
To optimise the performance during the use of ambient shades, it is recommended to activate the Fast Dynamics option in the function
Display Tessellation.
Intensity
This option allows you to influence the intensity, i. e. the brightness of the ambient shade.
Attenuation
This option controls the impact of occluding geometry.
Radius
For computing the shade, the points of occluding geometry objects lying within the specified Radius are taken into account.
Only Shadow
This option allows you to hide the geometry and display the ambient shade only.
Sampling Quality
To control the digitizing quality you may specify the Number of Directions and the Number of Samples (= number of points on the direction
vector) for the computation of the ambient shade.
11.15.7 File
This tab includes options for the import and export of light sources.
312
DISPLAY TURN TABLE
11
Light File
Import
The file browser will be activated where you can load an ICEM DB (*.icem) or CDRS file (*.dlg) with light source settings (see also functions
Import ICEM DB on page 92, and Import CDRS on page 105).
Export
The file browser will be activated where you can save the light source settings in an ICEM DB or CDRS light file (see also functions Export
ICEM DB on page 119, and Export CDRS on page 142).
IMPORTANT!
HDR Lights can only be exported in ICEM DB files.
For the export in an ICEM DB file the option Light must be activated.
History
Via this popup menu you may load directly up to seven of the light files loaded last.
Replace
On
When importing light sources all existing light sources are deleted and replaced by the imported ones.
Off
The imported light sources are added to the existing ones.
NOTE:
If the maximum number of light sources (8) is exceeded when replacing or adding light sources, the rest of the light sources will not
be imported, and an error message will appear.
If an imported light source has the same name as another light source already saved in the data base, you can specify with this option,
whether the existing light source shall be overwritten (Replace On) or the imported light source shall be saved under a new name (Replace
Off).
Light
This option must be active for exporting the OpenGL light sources defined on the Light tab into an ICEM DB or CDRS file.
HDR Lights
This option must be active for exporting the HDR lighting scenario defined on the HDR tab into an ICEM DB or CDRS file.
11.16 Display Turn Table

With this function the geometry can be rotated continuously. After activating the function in the graphic area is displayed a rotation plane, the nor-
mal of which is used as axis of rotation. The axis of rotation vector can be manipulated graphically as described in section 2.5.5 The clipping
plane and turn table symbol on page 32.
After starting ICEM Surf the origin of the rotation plane is set by default on the centre of the block of extreme values, and the normal is adjusted in
direction of the Z axis of the model coordinate system.
The menu Turn Table
Current Plane
The rotation plane is set to the current work plane.
Start turn table with left or right rotation.
The rotation is interrupted at the current position.
313
DISPLAY ANIMATION
11
Stop turn table. The geometry will be reset to the original position.
NOTE:
When activating the turn table, the geometry will be moved in the space. Therefore, after stopping the turn table it will be reset to its
original position, as otherwise its position in the model coordinate system would have been modified.
Symbol
The turn table symbol can be blanked and unblanked.
rpm
(Rounds per minute)
Setting the rotation speed of the turn table.
Angle
The thumb wheel allows you to turn the turn table manually. This is also possible during the automatically running rotation.
The text field allows you to change the position by specifying another rotation angle.
Import, Export, History

Turn table settings can be imported and exported via ICEM DB files. In the popup menu History the ICEM DB files previously used for the
import are saved.
11.17 Display Animation

With this function you can create an animation composed from different views. When executing this function Standard Perspective (see View
on page 46) will automatically be switched on.
The function Display Animation includes the tabs Animation, Parameter, and Export, as well as the navigation bar available on all tabs,
described in the following sections.
11.17.1 Animation
The Animation tab includes options for inserting and managing views used to create an animation.
List of inserted views

In this list, all inserted views from which the animation will be created, are displayed as icons. By clicking onto the corresponding icon the
views can be activated in the graphic area. The icon will then be highlighted.
When playing an animation, the dynamic updating of the highlighted icons shows which view is currently used by the animation.
NOTE:
The inserted views are only saved in an ICEM DB from version 4.12.
In case of ICEM DB files of previous versions as well as DB files (*.kddat) the inserted views are only preserved during the current
session. To save them, they have to be exported to a current ICEM DB version using the function Export ICEM DB, (activate
Animation option on the Entities tab + Version: 4.12 option on the Options tab).
Insert
The current view is inserted into the list of views.
Update
The view of the highlighted icon will replaced by the current view.
Delete
The highlighted icon will be deleted from the list of views.
314
PARAMETER
11
Delete All
All inserted views will be deleted from the list of views.
For the description of the navigation bar please refer to section 11.3.3 Navigation on page 258.
11.17.2 Parameter
In this tab you can set parameters concerning the properties and quality of the animation.
Steps
This value specifies the number of steps with which the running animation will be moved from one view to the next one. The more steps are
specified, the slower will run the animation.
Playback
With this popup menu different Play modes can be set.
Stop at End
The animation runs from the first to the last view and then stops.
NOTE:
In this mode the animation can only be started, when the first view is active. Select the first icon in the Display Light in the tab
Animation or press the button .
Loop
The animation will be repeated until it is stopped with the button .

Swing
The animation will be played forward and backward until it is stopped with the button .
Smooth Factor
This value defines the transition quality between the views. The higher the Smooth Factor, the smoother the transitions between the views.
NOTE:
When using a high Smooth Factor the views in the animation may deviate from the original views.
Light
From the light source set can be adopted in the inserted views different settings of the position, intensity, and colour (see also section 11.15
Display Light on page 300).
For the description of the navigation bar please refer to section 11.17.4 Navigation on page 316.
11.17.3 Export
In this tab you can export the inserted views as TIFF files which can then be used for the creation of video files.
315
NAVIGATION
11
File
File name and path can be entered in the text field or set via the file browser ( ). The file name is used as prefix to which are added consec-
utive numbers.
Size
Setting of the image size (Width x Height).
On Screen
With this option you can create a hardware-accelerated TIFF output via a window on the screen. Depending on the graphics card the TIFF
output can be considerably accelerated.
Export TIFF, Parameter

For the export can be used either the settings of the function File Export Image (see page 150). With the button Parameter you can acti-
vate the menu of the function.
NOTE:
From these functions only the settings for the TIFF output are adopted. For file name and path as well as the image size the set-
tings in the tab Export are used.
Export
The export operation is started.
Cancel
The export operation is aborted.
For the description of the navigation bar please refer to the following section.
11.17.4 Navigation
The following navigation buttons are available in both tabs:
Go to the first view.
Go to the previous view.
Go to the next view.
Go to the last view.
Start animation.
Stop animation.
11.18 Display Depth of Field

With this function you can set the depth of field for renderings. The depth of field is the area with a sharp representation of the image. With this
function, you may create e. g. a rendering with blurred background.
316
DISPLAY HIGHLIGHT
11
The menu Depth of Field
On
The display of the depth of field can be switched on and off.
Aperture
The aperture controls the depth of field. A low aperture value means a narrow, a high value a broad depth of field. The larger the geometry,
the higher must be the aperture value to obtain a completely sharp representation of the geometry.
Distance
The focal length determines the distance between eye position and depth of field. It can be changed graphically by the thumb wheel or numer-
ically by the text field.
Auto
The distance between eye position and depth of field is equal to the distance between Eye Position and Reference Point.
Environment
With this check button you can determine whether also the images of the environment block (On) or only the geometry (Off) shall be displayed
with depth of field.
11.19 Display Highlight

With this function you can create a highlight surface diagnosis on shaded surfaces. For this, the option Shading or one of the display variants
Shading or Highlight in the menu Display Display (see page 249) must be activated.
The highlight surface diagnoses lines of equal lightness connect the surface points where the angle of incidence of the light is constant (see
figure 78 on page 235). These lines are called isophotes. The course of the isophotes illustrates the shape of the surface and the transition qual-
ity. For detailed information please refer to the section 10.7.1.1 Course of reflection and highlight lines on page 231.
The menu Highlight
On
Activation of the highlight surface diagnosis.
Symbol
Depending on the setting in the popup menu Projection, a light source symbol (Beam) or a local coordinate system (Cylinder) is displayed
in the graphics area.
The symbols can be manipulated to define the direction of the light beam or the cylinder axis. In addition, context menus are available. For
detailed information about the symbol manipulation and the options in the context menus, please refer to section 2.5.7 The light source sym-
bols on page 36.
Dependent
The direction of the light beam or the cylinder axis depends on the model coordinate system and is changing with view manipulations.
317
DISPLAY HIGHLIGHT
11
Anti-Alias
The edges of the Highlight lines can be smoothed by an anti-alias.
Colours
For the highlight surface diagnosis you may select different colour variants:
1. Highlight
The width of the brightness flow depends on the Shine. The brightness is amplified exponentially with increasing shine factor.
2. Coloured
The Highlight lines are displayed in different colours.

3. Black and White
The Highlight lines are displayed in black and white. The width of the Highlight lines is constant. A shine factor cannot be defined.
4. Split
With this option you can activate a graphic split diagnosis to determine the splittable areas of the geometry and to locate the transition
areas.
The surface normals should be aligned to the exterior (see also Parameter for the option Split: on page 318 and section 10.7.3 Shape
Diagnoses Split on page 236).
Projection
For the calculation of the Highlight lines, two modes can be used:
Beam
The Highlight lines are calculated directly from the light beam of the parallel light source.
Cylinder
The Highlight lines are created by reflection of stripes on the interior side of an imaginary cylinder around the geometry.
Colour Cycles
Setting of the number of highlights.
If the variant Highlight is active, you can activate the submenu Colour Selection (see page 285 to choose another colour for the Highlight
lines.
Transparency
The Highlight surface diagnosis can be set transparent.
Shine
Only available for the variant Highlight.
Setting of the highlight width.
Colour Clip
Setting of the brightness or colour transition quality. You can continuously change between a continuous brightness or colour transition or a
display of discrete brightness or colour edges allowing for a visually sharp demarcation.
Axis
For the projection type Beam, you can define the direction of the light beam and for Cylinder the cylinder axis.
Parameter for the option Split:
Split Angle
Setting of the split angle regarding the light source for the split diagnosis.
318
DISPLAY STEREO
11
Tolerance Angle
Setting of the greywash area or the transition area for the split diagnosis.
IMPORTANT!
Please note the notation of angle specifications. Angles can be specified in degrees, minutes, and seconds (e. g. 115 or 1o15 = 1 degree
15 minutes) or decimal numbers with up to 4 decimal places (e. g. 1.25 = 1 degree 15 minutes). Please refer also to section 2.4.3 Notation
of angle specifications on page 27 for further information.
For the split diagnosis, the following colours are used to display the different areas:
green splittable area
yellow transition area
red not splittable areas
Figure 137 Computation of splittable and non-splittable areas
n
n
l
l < S

(not splittable area)
n < < +
l (transition area)
+
n + <
l (splittable area)

:= 90 (l,n)
l= light / split direction (light source 1)

n= surface normal
= split angle
= tolerance angle
S= silhouette line
= angle between tangential plane and light beam
Splitting a component will cause friction in the transition region which can wear the mould and damage the component surface. With the graphical
split diagnoses you can visualize such critical regions and take the corresponding measures to avoid any damages.
11.20 Display Stereo

See section 11.3.4 Stereo on page 261
11.21 Display Tessellation
With the tessellation you can control the display quality and the performance for dynamic geometry manipulations.
Tessellation (or faceting) means the subdivision of shaded surfaces into small planar triangles (facets) and of curves into small straight line seg-
ments.
Coarse tessellation improves the graphics performance.
Fine tessellation improves the display quality. Using tolerances you can specify how fine the tessellation shall be.
319
GLOBAL
11
Figure 138 Rough and fine Tessellation
Boundary Display Off
Boundary Display On
The function Display Tessellation includes the tabs Global and Individual described in the following sections.
11.21.1 Global
In this tab the tessellation tolerances are set globally for all curve and surface elements.
Shading
This option is used for the shaded display of surface elements.
For the tessellation of surface elements will be used the absolute tolerance specified. The surfaces are subdivided into smaller surfaces until
the distance of the planar facets from the surfaces is smaller than the specified tolerance. This way, the tessellation will be curvature depend-
ent.
Wire Frame
This option will be used for wire frame display.
Specification of an absolute tolerance for the tessellation of curve elements. The tessellation will subdivide curves and edges into straight line
segments.
NOTE:
The wireframe tolerance now must not exceed the shading value. When specifying a higher value it will automatically be decreased
to the current shading values.
Triangles
The number of triangles (facets) used for the shaded display is indicated. (The triangles of patches/faces which are completely outside of the
displayed area are not counted.)
If the option Fast Dynamics is switched on, only the number of triangles used for patches/faces in fine faceting will be indicated.
320
GLOBAL
11
NOTE:
In the edge areas of the surfaces the number of Triangles used for shaded display also depends on the degree of tessellation of
the edge curves. Therefore, the number of triangles will also be recomputed when changing the tolerance for the tessellation of
curve elements in the option Wire Frame.
Equal Tolerances
If this option is switched on, for Wire Frame will be used the same tolerance as for Shading.
Topology
If this option is switched off, each patch or face is triangulated independently from the adjacent objects, so that small gaps may be visible at
the transitions.
If this option is switched on, a cluster of patches and/or faces is triangulated in a way that the facet structure is concordant at the edges of
adjacent geometry objects. The objects are quasi sewed at the common edges, so that no transitions are visible.
Off
Each patch or face is triangulated independently from the adjacent objects, so that small gaps may be visible at the transitions.
On
A cluster of patches and/or faces is triangulated in a way that the facet structure is concordant at the edges of adjacent geometry objects.
The objects are quasi sewed at the common edges, so that no transitions are visible.
NOTE:
To display the topological tessellation, the option Display in the line Shell/Crv in the menu Objects Structure Editor must
be switched on.
An individual tessellation tolerance can also be specified and activated in the menu Objects Structure Editor in the line
Shell/Crv with the option Individual Tesselation.
To avoid problems when selecting patches and faces, this option should be switched off when modelling geometry.
Graphics Cache
A higher visualization performance can be achieved for local geometry manipulations (rotating, moving, zooming).
If the data to be displayed is changed, the complete cache must be reorganized. Therefore, graphics cache is especially useful, if the same
data is to be viewed for a longer time (e. g. during presentations).
Adjust Normals
If this option is switched on, in shaded display all normals will be automatically adjusted to the exterior. This is the default setting. However,
the automatic adjustment of the normals will need more computation time.
If this option is switched off, the surface normals will not be automatically adjusted, and the performance is improved. As an additional diagno-
sis option, you can check the normal adjustment in shaded display.
Level Of Detail
This option only concerns shaded surfaces.
With this option up to 10 different tessellation level will be computed depending on the zoom factor. Based on the absolute tolerance set in
Shading for the tessellation levels will be computed increasing tolerance values in order to display shaded surfaces with a different number of
facets depending on the degree of magnification.
If e. g. a detail on a model is scaled to fit the whole screen, a large number of facets is needed for the best display quality. In this case, the
highest tessellation level with the lowest tolerance will be used. If the complete model is on the screen, for the display of the same detail is
now needed only a small number of facets. In this case, a low tessellation level with a high tolerance value will suffice. This way, Level Of
Detail allows to use a very low absolute tolerance value without a loss of performance.
Pixel Lighting
The lighting model used with pixel lighting improves the visualization of shaded surfaces with high curvature, which are not sufficiently tessel-
lated.
Instead of computing the triangle vertex only, the lighting for each pixel is computed with this method. This way, rendering errors produced by
insufficient tessellation are removed.
Pixel Lighting Off Pixel Lighting On
321
INDIVIDUAL
11
Fast Dynamics
This option only concerns shaded surfaces and scans.
If this option is switched on, a coarse tessellation will be used when moving and scaling the geometry in order to improve the performance
during the geometry manipulation. After having terminated the manipulation the tessellation level calculated with Level Of Detail will auto-
matically be used again.
The display of shaded scans will switch from a facet model to a point model to improve the performance during view manipulations
11.21.2 Individual
In this tab you can set individual tessellation tolerances for curve and surface elements. The individual settings will be applied, if in the menu Dis-
play Options or Display Display the option Individual is switched on.
NOTE:
The individual tessellation tolerances are also applied in a reference file, if the file contains such tolerances (see also section 5.4 File
Reference Manager on page 78).
The options Shading, Wire Frame, Triangles, and Equal Tolerances available in this tab are described in the section Global, page 320.
Deselection
All selected objects are deselected
Boundary Display
Instead of the shading the selected surfaces can also be displayed with the edges of the facets calculated for the tessellation.
Show
The current tessellation tolerances of the selected object are displayed in the text fields Shading and Wire Frame.
Assign
The current tessellation tolerances are assigned to the selected geometry objects as individual tolerances.
Reset to P1/P2
The selected objects are reset to the global tessellation tolerances.
11.21.2.1 The submenu Tessellation

A submenu for setting an individual tessellation tolerance can be activated in some functions:
The options available here are described in section 11.21.1 Global on page 320. In addition, the following option is available:
Delete
The individual tolerance is deleted, the normal display tolerance will be used.
11.22 Display Text

With this function you can add comments to geometry objects. A comment is composed of text element and one or several text anchors connect-
ing the text with one or several commented geometry objects.
322
DISPLAY TEXT
11
The menu Text
Manipulating text elements
Insert text
1. After activating the function or the button Text in the menu Text the position selection is activated to select the position of the text anchor
on the geometry object to be labelled.
2. After selection of the text anchor position can be selected the text position. Text and text anchor are connected by a line indicating to
which geometry object the text belongs.
3. At the text position, a text input window for text edition appears (see Edit text.
4. The input will be terminated by pressing the Enter key. The input window will be closed and the text inserted into the graphic area.
5. After having terminated the input the position selection will be reactivated to select a new position to insert further text.
After closing the Selection (Position) window, the symbols for further processing are available at all texts and text anchors (see Used
Symbols and Context menus.
The following operations can only be carried out if the menu Text is active.
Edit text
NOTE:
Text can only be edited when the Selection (Position) is closed.
A line is removed when its contents is completely deleted.
Texts inserted with Ctrl-V will include also line breaks.
Inserting text into an empty line will automatically create a new empty line. You can insert up to 10 text lines with 60 characters at maximum.
You can insert at maximum 60 characters (siehe Text field on page 25).
Editing possibilities in the text input window with control and mouse keys:
Tab
Changes to the next line.
Enter
Terminates the input. After inserting a new text anchor the position selection is reactivated after terminating the input.
Ctrl-Enter
Cursor position at line end.
Creates a new empty line.
Cursor position within the text of the current line:
Creates a new empty line with the text of the previous line from the cursor position.
Middle and left mouse button
Blanks/unblanks the text input window.
Abort input
The text input can be aborted by a mouse click on an arbitrary position in the graphic area outside the input window.
Modify text colour
With the colour button in the menu Text the colour selection window can be activated to select another text colour.
NOTE:
With the selection type Text and the option Assign in the menu Display Colours, an individual colour can be assigned to each
text. In the menu Display Display, the option Individual must be switched on to display individual colours.
Change font size

The font size is specified with the Small Font Size option on the View tab of the Windows Preferences function (see page 332).
Text Background
The Text Background option on the Style tab of the Windows Preferences blanks/unblanks a text background. You can specify the colour
with the Text Background option in the Display Colours menu.
Delete text
The easiest way to delete a text is clicking the mid point of the text anchor line.
You can also delete text via the Delete and Delete All Texts options.
Move text
The text can be moved by manipulating the point symbol at the line end or via the Position option in the context menu Point.
323
DISPLAY GRAPHICS MODES
11
Blanking and unblanking text

The texts can be blanked and unblanked with the check button in the menu Text of this function and with the check buttons Text in the menus
Display Options and Windows Panel.
Used Symbols
The point symbol at the text position moves the text.
Further symbols in the mid and at the end of the connecting line can be used to delete text or activate context menus. The functionalities at the
symbols are indicated by different cursor shapes.
Figure 139 Working with texts
activate text field
left mouse button: Translate

right mouse button: activate
Text Anchor context menu Point
right mouse button:
activate context Delete
menu Text Anchor
Context menus
The Point and Text Anchor context menus at text and text anchor position include the following options especially used in this function:
Position
Activates the position selection.
New Text Anchor

For each text element can be set several text anchors.
Delete
Point context menu: the text element is deleted.
Text Anchor context menu: If only one text anchor is defined, the text element is deleted completely. If several text anchors are set, only the
selected text anchor is deleted.
Delete All Texts

All text elements are deleted.
11.23 Display Graphics Modes

You may individually specify the anti-aliasing for the display variants Highlight and Stereo supported by the current hardware. For further infor-
mation please refer to the description of the functions Display Highlight, page 317 and Display Stereo, page 319.
The following situations are distinguished:
1. Normal Shading, Mono
Highlight + Stereo switched off
2. Normal Shading, Stereo
Highlight switched off + Stereo switched on
Additionally, the full-scene anti-aliasing can be configured for each of these combinations.
When ICEM Surf is started, appropriate settings which are supported by the current hardware are specified. If you have made individual settings
in the window Graphics Modes, they will be kept next time the program is started, in case they are supported as well by the hardware on which
ICEM Surf is started now.
The menu Graphics Modes
Different options are available according to the hardware equipment of the computer on which ICEM Surf is started. If the required hardware is not
available, the corresponding setting cannot be activated.
324
DISPLAY GRAPHICS MODES
11
Full Scene Anti-Alias

The method of anti-aliasing is not only applied to lines, but to the whole graphics scene displayed.
Off
Anti-aliasing will not be activated.
Hardware
This option can be set if a graphics card with supersampling or multisampling functionality is installed on your computer.
Depending on the graphics card different quality level are available for the anti-alias. You may, for example, choose a lower quality to
improve the performance.
325
THE MENU WINDOWS
12
12 The menu Windows
12.1 Windows Preferences

In the function Windows Preferences you can make different settings for ICEM Surf. The function includes the tabs Preferences, Selection,
View, Display, RT Render (Realtime Renderer), RefMan (Reference Manager) and Style which are described in the following sections.
12.1.1 Preferences
Language
(User Interface Language)
The user interface can be displayed in the languages German, English, French, and Japanese. The language can be changed via this popup
menu. The session has to be restarted to take the settings into account.
The current language setting remains unchanged when restoring the preferences using Restore.
Balloon-Help: Immediately, Delayed, Off

If you move the mouse cursor onto an icon, a short description of the function appears. The balloon help is displayed either immediately when
passing over a function button with the mouse, with a small delay, or it is switched off.
Beep
The output of beep signals can be switched on and off with this option.
Case sensitive
With this option, you can determine whether alphabetical sorting shall be case sensitive or not. This setting is used in all name lists, e. g. in
the file browser, Reference Manager, Object Manager, and Material menu.
You can use names which only differ in upper and lower cases for all objects which can be renamed.
Save
Backup, Increment, Preview, Compress
The settings of these options are used as standard settings in the File Save menu.
Reminder
The menu File Save will be activated regularly in order to remind saving the data base. In the text field, you can specify the interval. The
count will be restarted when opening the data base, when closing the window Save, and after changing the interval value.
DB Direct
The current data base will be loaded automatically at the next ICEM Surf start-up.
Use Multi-Threading
Multi-threading increases the calculation speed of tessellated data by creating them in parallel according to the Number of Threads specified
in the popup menu. Automatic the number of Threads used in the current session is automatically identified.
NOTE:
The number of threads set in the popup menu depends on the number of processors. The highest possible number of threads is 2
* number of processors.
Multi-threading improves the performance in case of shaded display in general and when toggling between display variants in the Reference
Manager.
326
PREFERENCES
12
Zoom Factor
Static
The zoom factor set here is used for the special function Zoom Out, Zoom In and the magnifying glass (see section 2.6.3 The magni-
fying glass on page 42).
Dynamic
The dynamic zoom factor is used for zooming in the graphics area using the mouse wheel.
The zoom factor can have values between 0.01 and 10.0.
Angle Display Format

With this option you can set the accuracy of the angle display. For the output of angles the following display formats can be selected:
degrees and minutes,
degrees, minutes, and seconds, as well as
decimal numbers with up to 4 decimal places.
NOTE:
The angle display format only controls the output of angles. The input of angles is independent from the angle display format (see
also section 2.4.3 Notation of angle specifications on page 27).
Cursor key rotation speed

This option allows you to set the rotation speed from 1 to 10 during view manipulation with Shift and arrow keys.
Starting Database
In the input field you may enter the name and path of a data base which will automatically be loaded as starting data base upon activation of
the function File New.
If the requested file cannot be opened when running File Open, the DB specified here will be opened instead. If no Starting Database is
defined, a new DB will be opened.
Snapshot filename
In this text field the name and path of the TIFF file which is created by the function File Snapshot can be specified. Using the icon you
can activate the file browser.
Increment
If the snapshot function is carried out several times, each snapshot is saved in a separate file. To the file names are added 6-digit consec-
utive numbers as suffix (e. g. name > name_000001).
Use Export Image settings
For the creation of an Image file, the settings of the function Export Image are used.
User Preferences
Restore
If you worked with original or company-own settings, you can reactivate with this option the last saved user-defined settings.
In the window Preferences Restore? you may choose, whether option and parameter settings (Variables) and/or window positions (Win-
dows) shall be restored.
NOTE:
The window positions can also be restored with the function Windows Straighten Up or the shortcut Ctrl-U.

Save
Option and parameter settings as well as the positions of the function windows can be saved in the file private_defaults.txt to use
them in subsequent sessions. Information which are already integrated in the current data base or the selected geometry (e. g. the order
of a surface) cannot be saved as preference.
Site Preferences: Restore

Company-own settings saved in the file site_defaults.txt can be reactivated with this function.
Preferences files
For a better understanding of the options User Preferences and Site Preferences, the preferences files will be explained in the following. For
detailed information about the contents and on setting environment variables for these files please refer to the sections Directory for files to be
configured by the user, Directory for preference files, and Environment variables for ICEM Surf in the manual Software configuration.
In the preferences files, different settings used by ICEM Surf are saved, e. g. options and parameters in the function windows and window posi-
tions. Apart from the default settings delivered with ICEM Surf you may use company-own or user-defined settings, which are saved in different
preferences files. These files are loaded when starting ICEM Surf and used with different priorities.
The preferences files are ASCII files and can be loaded in text editors. The following preferences files are used:
1. site_defaults.txt
Path: \<installation directory>\win_b64\reffiles
In this file company-own settings to be used by all ICEM Surf users in your company can be saved. The company-own settings can be acti-
vated by the function Site Preferences: Restore described above. The file site_defaults.txt is managed by the system administration and
therefore it should have exclusive access to this file.
327
SELECTION
12
This file is created in the directory reffiles when ICEM Surf is installed and is still empty at this moment. To create a site_defaults.txt-
file with company-own settings, the system administrator makes the necessary settings and saves them first in the preferences file
private_defaults.txt for user-defined settings (see next section). This file has then to be copied into the installation directory and renamed
to site_defaults.txt.
The file site_defaults.txt is loaded and evaluated second when starting ICEM Surf.
2. private_defaults.txt
Path: ..\<user>\AppData\Roaming\DassaultSystemes\ICEMSurf
This file contains user-defined settings which you defined with the function User Preferences: Save described above. This preferences file is
loaded and evaluated third when starting ICEM Surf.
3. local_defaults.txt
Path: ..\Users\<user>\AppData\Roaming\DassaultSystemes\ICEMSurf
This file will automatically be written when terminating an ICEM Surf session. It contains all modified settings compared with the factory, site,
and private defaults. This file is automatically loaded and evaluated as the fourth preferences file. Therefore, ICEM Surf will always be in the
state in which it was when you terminated your last session.
By default, the preferences files private_defaults.txt and local_defaults.txt are used. With the start options -private_def <path and
file name> and -local_def <path and file name>, you can also use other preferences files.
12.1.2 Selection
In this menu you can set preferences for the Selection.
Highlight 1-3
The colour set is assigned to selected elements. The colours are used in the selection order.
The colour button specifies the colour of the wire frame display of selected elements and the material button the colour of selected
shaded surfaces.
The Colour table activated with the colour buttons can be modified in the menu Display Colours.
Filter
Radius
In the text field, you can specify the current selection radius. The radius does not depend from the model or view but is measured as real
distance in mm on the screen.
If a selection radius is specified, a selection will also be carried out, if the cursor is not exactly positioned on the object to be selected, but
within the area defined by the selection radius.
Snap
Indication of the current snap radius. The maximum value must not exceed the value indicated in the text field. As with the Radius option,
also in this case the distance is measured in mm on the screen.
If several objects are hit within the specified selection radius, objects within the snap radius will be selected primarily. In this case, objects
visible in the wire frame model have priority to surface objects and the specifications corner and end point have priority to edge and
curve.
Example: If a curve lying on a patch shall be selected by clicking it by the mouse, in case of a deactivated snap radius the selection con-
cerns the curve as well as the patch and it has to be further specified by the object selection list being displayed in this case. If Snap Rad.
is switched on, only the curve will be selected if it is clicked within the adjusted snap radius, since the curve as visible object has priority
to the invisible interior of the patch.
Depth
If this option is switched on, the surface objects are filtered according to their depth (in the screen view). Only the objects lying on the top
or in front are offered. Please note that the snap radius has higher priority (see option Snap).
328
VIEW
12
NOTE:
The filters Snap and Depth are temporarily inactive if you
activate the option Single in the selection window or
use the keyboard shortcuts to specify the different object types.
Symbols inactive
In selection mode, the symbols in the graphics area are set inactive.
Windows
In this check box you can switch on and off the display of the corresponding selection windows. If the windows are active, the display can be
reactivated by pressing the right mouse button.
Object
Show Selection (Object) window.
Position
Show Selection (Position) window.
Vector
Show Selection (Vector) window. The following additional option is available to influence the display:
Length
For vector selections which only need the indication of a vector direction and no length specification, the value indicated in the text
field is used as default value for the vector length on the screen.
The specified value is multiplied with the current zoom factor displayed in the Zoom text fields in the upper frame of the ICEM Surf
user interface.
Chain
Show window Chain selection.
Selection Table
Show Selection Table window. The following additional options are available to influence the display:

Show
The entities selected in an object selection list are displayed in the colour specified here.
Labels
The entities selected in an object selection list can be displayed together with their labels.
Width
The entities selected in an object selection list are displayed with the line width indicated here.
Region
Show Selection (Region) and Selection (Scan Region) window.
Remember: Object, Position, Vector, Chain, Keyboard

If for a selection type the mode Remember is switched on, the last adjustment (incl. Extended) in the corresponding selection window is pre-
served until it is explicitly modified. If Remember is switched off or the adjustments are not admissible for the current function to be carried
out, the Extended mode is automatically switched on.
This means, that normally the Extended mode is switched on during the selection of objects, and if you selected an object via keyboard input,
the Extended mode remains switched on. Yet, if you set Keyboard, the Extended mode will be switched off, after you selected an object via
keyboard input. The type list in the window Selection (Object) only the object type which you selected the last time via keyboard will be high-
lighted, and if you want to select other objects using the mouse, you will only hit objects of the highlighted object type.
12.1.3 View
In this tab you can set parameters for a central perspective standard view and the screen resolution. The central perspective standard view can
be activated with Set Current View in this tab or in the popup menu View in the special functions block.
329
VIEW
12
Standard Perspective
Eye Position, Reference Point, Up Vector, Angle Of View
These options correspond to the options for defining a central perspective with the function Display View/Navigation and are
described in section 11.3.2 Definition on page 256.
Current View
Set Current View
The standard perspective with the current values will be activated.
Get Current View
The numerical values of the current view will be displayed in the text fields and adopted as permanent values.
Set Standard Views

Keep Projection
When switching from the Central Perspective to a standard view a central perspective view will be kept.
Automatic Min/Max
An automatic Min/Max will be carried out when switching to a standard view.
Navigation Control
On/Off
The upper left check button activates and deactivates the key assignment.
Control key assignment
These check buttons allow you to use the control keys Shift, Ctrl, and Alt for the navigation modes Free, Walk, Fly, and Turn Head.
The currently activated navigation mode is displayed in the special functions block as well as in the ICEM Surf user interface header (see
also User interface on page 44. In case of toggling to another mode using a control key, the display changes accordingly.
Move to Centre of Rotation
The Move to Centre of Rotation has only effect with the navigation modes Walk and Fly in combination with the centre of rotation set-
tings Dynamic or Rigid.
When moving forward and backward, the view is moved in direction of the centre of rotation instead of the reference point.
330
DISPLAY
12
12.1.4 Display
Resolution (ppi)
The screen resolution can be set with the following options:
System
The screen resolution set by the operating system is used.
NOTE:
For Windows Vista and newer versions, the physical resolution can no longer be detected from the system. If accurate values are
needed, please use the User-defined option to specify those values manually.
User-defined
You can specify user-defined horizontal and vertical values.
Square Pixels
For the user-defined screen resolution, the values are equalized to keep the original aspect ration.
Line Offset
This option influences the display quality of curve elements congruent with shaded surfaces. The highest value provides an optimised display.
Line Offset Off Line Offset 1.00

Preserve edges
Under certain conditions the shaded display of surfaces can also be influenced when using the Line Offset option. In these cases, you
may use this option to exclude any impacts on the shaded display.
331
RT RENDER (REALTIME RENDERER)
12
shaded display with Line Offset On and shaded display with Line Offset On and
Preserve edges Off Preserve edges On
Text Background
Text labels and texts in the functions Display Display (options Labels) and Display Text can be displayed with background. The colour is
specified with the Text Background option in the Display Colours menu.
Small Font Size

Defines the font size of texts inserted with the Display Text function.
Large Font Size

Defines the font size of the text labels activated in the Display Display function.
Full Window Crosshairs

Activates a large crosshair cursor with cursor lines until the graphics area borders.
12.1.5 RT Render (Realtime Renderer)

This tab includes options for optimising the display in Realtime Renderer properties.
Hardware, OpenGL:
Display of information about graphics hardware and OpenGL version.
Reflection
Quality
With this option you can set for reflecting materials the resolution with which the environment images shall be reflected on the geometry
(see Reflection in the tab Colours in the menu Display Material on page 275). The following values can be set:
64 x 64
128 x 128
256 x 256
512 x 512
1024 x 1024
2048 x 2048
332
RT RENDER (REALTIME RENDERER)
12
NOTE:
The resolution has only effect for the reflection of environment images, but not for the reflection of special reflection images.
The setting of this option has effect on the performance. Depending on the hardware the performance can decrease from a
certain threshold value.
Use Specular Colour
For reflections, the Specular Colour colour defined in the menu Display Material Colours is used.
Shadows of transparent Objects: Threshold

With this option can be specified, from which transparence value shadows of transparent objects shall be displayed (see Transparency in the
menu Display Material Colours).
Bump Map: Use all light sources

For the Bump Map effect, only the light source 1 is used. The illuminating effect of further light sources on the material can be made visible
with this option (see also Bump Map in the menu Display Material Textures.
Soft Shadows: High Quality

With this option the display quality of soft shadows can be enhanced (see Shadow Type: Soft in the menu Display Light Shadows).
Lighting: Local
The reflection of the light source on the geometry is moved depending on the view angle when manipulating the view.
Transparency: High Quality

The display of transparent materials on shaded surfaces overlapping each other is improved with this option.
Figure 140 Quality of transparency display
Transparency High Quality Off Transparency High Quality On
NOTE:
Self Shadows
With this option you can influence the display quality of self shadows and the performance during dynamic manipulations or when using static
views.
NOTE:
Self Shadows are only displayed if in the menu Display Options the option Self Shadows is switched on.
The resolution set affects the display quality and the performance. A high resolution provides a high display quality, but may on
the other hand reduce the performance.
Dyn
(Dynamic)
The resolution set here is used for all graphic manipulations by which self shadows will be changed, e. g. manipulation of views or inde-
pendent light sources.
As for such manipulations a better performance is more useful than a high display quality, the resolution must be equal or smaller than the
resolution for Stat. Therefore, the value for Dyn will automatically be adapted, if the value for Stat falls below the dynamic value.
Stat
(Static)
The resolution set here will be used for static views. In this case can be used a high resolution with the corresponding high display quality.
The resolution set here must be equal or higher than the resolution for Dyn. The value for Stat will automatically be adapted, if the value
for Dyn exceeds the static value.
333
REFMAN (REFERENCE MANAGER)
12
Figure 141 Display of Self Shadows with low and high resolution
Self Shadows with resolution Self Shadows with resolution

256 x 256 2048 x 2048
12.1.6 RefMan (Reference Manager)

This tab includes options for the display of files in Reference Manager.
Include File
Read only used materials
On: Only materials used in the database are imported when including a reference file.
Off: All materials are imported.
Geometry Import
Keep individual colours and materials of the elements from the Reference Manager
On: If RM Display is switched on in the menu Reference Manager, the imported objects get the colour and material from the Refer-
ence Manager. If RM Display is switched off, the objects are imported with their individual attributes.
Off: The objects are imported with their individual attributes.
Imported entities remain visible in the Reference Manager
Objects which are imported into the data base remain visible in the Reference Manager.
Deleted entities will automatically be restored in the Reference Manager
On: Objects which have been deleted in the data base are automatically be restored in the Reference Manager.
Off: The automatic display is suppressed.
Smart Rename Double Part Names
On: When importing geometry with part and molecule structure from the reference manager into the data base, part and molecule
names of the same name are smartly renamed. The imported reference geometry gets its own structure.
The option can only be set if an import with structure is possible.
Off: Geometry elements are included from the reference manager into data base parts or molecules of the same name.
334
STYLE
12
Move (duplicate)
Copy visibility as in original file
On: A duplicated reference file will be visible in a variant exactly if the original file is visible in this variant.
Off: All duplicated reference files will only be visible in the active variant and invisible in all other variants.
Transform all Variants
On: If elements of a reference file are manipulated via a move function without Duplicate, the transformation is assigned to all vari-
ants.
Off: The transformation is only assigned to the active variant.
12.1.7 Style
The options on this tab offer the possibility to configure the user interface display.
Predefined styles
You can choose the predefined styles Light Grey, Classic Grey, and Dark Grey via two popup menus with style names and icons. The
popup menus switch to User-defined in case of using individual settings.
Moreover, the following sliders are available to define a user-defined style:
Windows
Modifies the greyscale value of the function windows background colour.
Frame
Modifies the greyscale value of the graphics window frame.
Buttons
Modifies the intensity of the colour gradient from bright to dark in the buttons.
NOTE:
The grey scale value of the pull-down menu borders is at 40 % (0.40). If this value is used for both Windows and Frame, the border will be
no longer visible.
Text
Changes the text colour for the function block buttons
Shaded Background
The background in the graphics area appears with a colour gradient whose intensity can be set via the slider.
UI Scaling
For the usage of high resolution monitors (4K display) the ICEM Surf user interface display can be adapted for these monitors.
By default, the current control panel setting (System % option) is used
Icon Size Ratio

For UI objects and icons can be specified a zooming with a scaling factor from 1.0 to 5.0. The value 1.0 is default size.
335
WINDOWS TEXTURE PATHS
12
Toolbar
You can position the toolbar at top or bottom screen edge.

The check button blanks and unblanks the Toolbar.
Screen Layout
You can align the layout of the ICEM Surf window right or left justified.
12.2 Windows Texture Paths

In this menu are administrated the paths of the directories with images files. The following functions reference to external image files:
Display Material (options Texture and Bump Map)
Display Environment
When loading textures and background images in the functions Display Material and Display Background Image, the paths of image files
not yet saved are automatically added.
The menu Texture Paths
New
The file browser is activated, where you can enter a new texture path.
Delete
The selected path will be removed from the list. The three default paths cannot be deleted.
No Warning
The warning that texture files have not been not found, can be suppressed with this check button.
Texture Path List

If in the menu Display Material textures are selected via the file browser, the corresponding path is registered in the texture path list, pro-
vided that the path name does not yet exist in the list. The list includes three default paths:
The default figures directory,
the directory misc of the current project, and
the project basis (the directory superior to the project).
You can only modify the order of these default paths, but not delete them.
The texture path list can include up to 50 paths at maximum. Clicking onto a selected texture path will open the window Texture Paths, in
which you can edit the path.
336
WINDOWS REFERENCE FILE PATHS
12
Load
Reference file paths can be saved in *.rpf files (Ref File Paths) and loaded and inserted into the list using this option. Already existing refer-
ence file paths will be overwritten.
Save
The file browser is activated to save the current list of reference file paths in a *.rpf file.
Modifying the order
With these buttons you can modify the order of the entries in the texture path list. The selected entry will be moved in arrow direction.
TIP:
When selecting a material with textures and/or bump maps in the menu Display Material, the texture path list is searched in
descending order until a TIFF image with the corresponding name is found. Therefore, it is useful to set paths allowing a quick
access (e. g. of local directories) at the beginning of the list.
12.3 Windows Reference File Paths

In this menu are administrated the paths of the directories where the files referenced in the Reference Manager session files are searched (see
function File Reference Manager).
If a file referenced in a session file cannot be found, a window is activated where you can enter the new path. The specified reference file paths
are saved in the session and can be managed in this menu.
The menu Reference File Paths
New
The file browser is activated, where you can enter a new reference file path.
Delete
The selected path will be removed from the list.
Load
Reference file paths can be saved in *.rpf files (Ref File Paths) and loaded with this option and inserted into the list. Already existing refer-
ence file paths are overwritten.
Save
The file browser is activated to save the current list of reference file paths in an *.rpf file.
List of reference file paths

If paths have been specified when opening a session file in the Reference Manager, these paths are included in the list. Clicking onto a
selected reference file path will open a window where you can edit the path.
Modifying the order
With these buttons you can modify the order of the reference file paths in the list. The selected path will be moved in arrow direction.
When opening a Reference Manager session file with referenced files, this list will be searched in descending order until a file with the corre-
sponding name is found. Therefore, it is useful to set paths allowing a quick access (e. g. of local directories) at the beginning of the list.
12.4 Windows Logical File Paths

To make the navigation through the file system easier, this new function allows to define logical names for file paths which are available in the file
browser.
The logical paths appear in the file browser with :: before the path name, when a file shall be selected. A selected logical path will be extended,
so that files can be chosen from the corresponding directory. Logical paths can also be used in the functions Windows Texture Paths and Win-
dows Reference File Paths.
337
WINDOWS LICENSES
12
New
The file browser is activated, where you can enter a new logical file path.
Delete
The selected path will be removed from the list.
Sort
The logical file paths are automatically sorted in alphabetical order. In this order they also appear in the file browser.
List of logical file paths

In this list, all defined paths are displayed. Path and path name can be selected for modifications. After selection, a text field appears, in which
a new name or a new path can be indicated.
Modifying the order
With these buttons you can modify the order of the logical file paths in the list. The selected path will be moved in arrow direction.
12.5 Windows Licenses
12.5.1 The menu Licenses

The window Licenses shows a table with all available ICEM Surf modules including the following information:
Module (ICEM Surf module name with DSLS License Key)
Version/Max Rel. Date (Maximum Release Date)
Type (license type, e. g. Floating, Node Locked)
Available (number of available licenses)
Expiration/End date
In addition, for a part of the modules the license access for the current session may be activated and deactivated in order to enable other users to
access floating licenses which you currently do not use.
NOTE:
For functions and options, which are inactive due to missing licenses, the license required is indicated in the balloon help.
338
THE MENU LICENSES
12
The menu Licenses
License File:
Current path of the license server file.
The license server file is set with the environment variable DSLS_CONFIG. If the variable is not set, the default license server file %ALLUSER-
SPROFILE%\DassaultSystemes\Licenses\DSLicSrv.txt is used.
Automatic License Release:

All required licenses are automatically released if this value is reached, i. e. if the user was inactive within an ICEM Surf session for that
period of time.
For detailed information on defining the license server file with environment variables and setting an automatic license release time please refer to
ICEM Surf in the file read_this_first_*.pdf.
The use of the DSLS model within ICEM Surf is described in detail in DSLS licensing in the file read_this_first_*.pdf.
Warn ... day(s) before license expiration

When starting ICEM Surf, the user will be informed about the upcoming expiration of licenses by a warning message. The warning time can
be set to a value between 1 and 30 days.
License Preferences:
Save
The current license access setting is saved in the file <home directory>/private_defaults.txt.
Save immediately
The license access setting will be saved immediately after any change of the check button settings.
For detailed information about the preferences files please refer to the section Preferences files on page 327.
In the following tables the available modules are listed together with the corresponding license names and the functions included:
Table 22 Licenses for general and geometry functions
Module License feature Function
SURF Professional K24 Basic Module
339
THE MENU LICENSES
12
Realtime Renderer K62 File Export ICEM DB Entities:

Environment
Turn Table
File Import ICEM DB Entities:
Environment
Turn Table
Display Options:
Textures
Bump Map
Self Shadows
Self Shadows Soft
Reflection Clearpaint
Env. Lighting
Lens Flares
Display Material Colours:
Refraction
Display Material Textures
Display Texture Projection
Display Environment Light
Display Environment Shadow
Display Light HDR
Display Light Lens Flares
Glow
Display Light Ambient Occlusion
Display Turn Table
Display Animation
Display Depth of Field
Display View/Navigation Stereo
Magic K45 File Export ICEM DB Entities:

Environment
BG Image
Turn Table
File Import ICEM DB Entities:
Environment
BG Image
Turn Table
File Export Inventor
File Export PostScript
File Export VRML
Surface modification Point
Surface modification Control Point
Surface modification Refit Surfaces
Unified Modelling:
Extended options for the Reference
Create Taping
Volume
Display Material Colours:
Refraction
Display Environment
Display Stereo
Master K46 Surface creation Global Offset

Surface creation Global Blend
Surface creation Fillet Global
Surface creation Addenda
Surface modification Feature Design
Surface modification Crowning
Surface modification Addenda
Unified Modelling:
Extended options for the Reference
Feature Design
Display Highlight:
Split
Surface creation Global Fillet
340
AVAILABILITY OF THE LICENSE
12
Scan Modelling K72 File Export Scan

File Export STL
all functions for Scan creation and Scan modification
all functions for scan modification in Unified Modelling
Move Register
Unified Modelling Creation of the objects:
Quick Surfacing
Advanced Tools K76 Diagnoses Check Flat Region

Diagnoses Check Nominal Actual Value Comparison
Context Diagnoses Clearance
Context Diagnoses Levelling
Patch creation Corner Blend
Create Patch Surface of Revolution
Helix
Surface creation Tube
Surface creation Accelerated Surface
Create Surface Advanced Fillet
3 Radii
2 Chord Lengths
Surface creation Tri-Tangent Fillet
Safety Analysis K77 Diagnoses Check Safety Analysis
Surf Viewer K79 File Export Viewer
Table 23 Licenses for interfaces
K74 PLM Link K74 Running ICEM Surf in PDM mode (see page 77)
K27 UG Direct Interface K27 File Import Unigraphics NX

File Export Unigraphics NX
K21 CATIA V4 Direct K21 File Import Catia V4

Interface
K20 CATIA V5 Direct K20 File Import Catia V5

Interface
Table 24 Academia and Student licenses
Product License feature Usage
ICEM Surf for Academia K49 EDU ICEM Surf version for universities and design schools (see Educational and
student versions on
ICEM Surf Student Edition K49 STU ICEM Surf version for students page 93)
12.5.2 Availability of the license

If after a period of inactivity the user gets active again, some modules are possibly no longer available as the licenses were requested by another
user. An error message with a list of unavailable modules appears.
The value set for the license release time is displayed in the window Licenses at Automatic License Release:.
If the basic module (SURF Professional) or an add-on module is no longer available, the following window is activated after clicking OK:
341
WINDOWS STATUS
12
Exit without saving

Terminating ICEM Surf without saving any data.
Save and exit

Saving the DB and Reference Manager session file, if required, and terminating ICEM Surf.
Retry
The system tries to request the missing licenses again.
If the basic module can be reactivated, the user can go on working with ICEM Surf.
If one or more add-on modules cannot be reactivated, the window Licenses will be opened. The user can try to reactivate the missing modules by
clicking the appropriate check buttons.
12.6 Windows Status

ICEM Surf is a multi-tasking system, i. e. that several processes (= tasks) are activated at the same time.
With Windows Status or the key Pause the a window is opened, where the current status of all ICEM Surf tasks is indicated.
The menu Status
Possible task states are:
active
inactive OK
aborted KO
If a task has aborted, it can be killed by clicking on the button X. Save your data base. You can then terminate ICEM Surf, reactivate it and con-
tinue working with your data base.
Clicking on DB Status you may check your data base for consistency. If the label KO appears, errors have been found in the data base. You
should either save your data base via File Save as... with the option Compress or write an EDF file and include this EDF file into a new, empty
data base.
With the button Update the status will be recalculated.
12.7 Windows Keyboard

Frequently used functions can be assigned to the keys of the Button Box and to the function keys. In addition, you can combine the key assign-
ment with the control keys Ctrl, Shift, and Alt.
IMPORTANT!
Certain key combinations may already be reserved for shortcuts used by the operating system.
Therefore, the key combination Alt + F4 should not be used in Windows, as this will terminate ICEM Surf independent from the assign-
ment defined in this function.
342
WINDOWS CALCULATOR
12
The menu Keyboard
Button-Box
assignment
function key
assignment
The buttons in the upper area of the menu Keyboard are used for the Button Box keys and the buttons in the lower area for the function keys
F1F12. The current assignment is shown on the buttons.
Assignment
1. First choose Ctrl, Shift and/or Alt, if you want to combine the Button Box or function key with one or several control keys.
2. Click onto the button to which you want assign a function.
You can no choose a function either from the menu Tablet or from the pull-down menu.
NOTE:
The functions can only be assigned using the menu functions and not the functions blocks.
Delete assignment
To delete the assignment of a key, click onto the button Delete and select the corresponding button.
12.8 Windows Calculator

Using Windows Calculator you can access the functions of a calculator. The environment variable $SURF_CALCULATOR determines, which cal-
culator will be used.
12.9 Windows 3Dconnexion Device

With ICEM Surf you can use the 3D motion controller from 3Dconnexion for the manipulation of the light sources and your geometry in the 3D
space.
For the installation of the input device please refer to the documentation of the manufacturer. For further information and download of drivers
please refer to http://www.3dconnexion.com.
The keys 1 and 4 have the following functions:
Key 1 Centre of Rotation
As centre of rotation can be used the centre point of the block of extreme values of the geometry or the user-defined centre of rotation cur-
rently set in ICEM Surf.
Key 4 objects to be manipulated
Key 4 can be used to switch between geometry and light source manipulation.
The menu 3Dconnexion Device
In this menu you can set the Sensitivity. Low sensitivity means that the movement of the geometry is slower in relation to the movement of the
3D motion controller, in case of high sensitivity the geometry is moved faster.
343
WINDOWS PANEL
12
Global
The sensitivity is set globally for all manipulation types. The value range is from -5 to +5.
Rotation, Translation, Zoom

In addition to the global sensitivity, the sensitivity can be set individually for each manipulation type, i. e. the values are multiplied with the glo-
bal value. The value range is from -5 to +5.
Null Radius
The Null Radius controls the minimum amplitude of the 3D motion controller which is necessary for moving the geometry on the screen. The
value range is from 0 to 100.
Reset
The values are reset to the default settings.
12.10 Windows Panel

Apart from the pull down menu the function Windows Panel can also be activated by the PrintScreen key.
With this function you can directly activate frequently used options from the menus Display, List, and Diagnoses.
The menu Panel
Planes
Selection list with all saved work planes (see also function Display Plane, option Planes on page 266).
Views
Selection list with all saved views (see also function Display View/Navigation, option Views on page 254).
Parallel, Central
Activating the parallel or central perspective (see also function Display View/Navigation, options Parallel and Central on page 255)
Layouts
Selection list with all defined view layouts (see also function Display View Layout, option Selection List View Layout on page 263).
Variants
Selection lists with all pre-defined and user-defined display variants (see also function Display Display, option Variant on page 250).
Lists
Selection list with all saved lists (see also function List, option Current List <List Name> on page 156).
Background
Blanking and Unblanking background objects (see also function List, option Background Objects on page 157).
Sections, On/Off
Blanking and unblanking defined section groups (see also function Diagnoses Sections on page 169).
With the button On/Off all sections can be blanked/unblanked.
Diagnoses
Blanking and unblanking diagnoses Deviation, Matching, and Curvature (see also function Diagnoses Diagnoses on page 204).
With the button On/Off all defined diagnoses are blanked/unblanked.
Materials
Selection list with all saved materials (see also function Display Material, Material table on page 271).
Select
Selection of a surface, the material of which shall be set as current material.
Assign
Selection of the surface to which the colour selected in the table shall be assigned.
12.11 Windows Tablet

Functions which cannot be assigned to the function keys in the menu Windows Keyboard can also be activated directly in the menu Tablet.
344
WINDOWS TABLET
12
The menu Tablet
Table 25 Functions in the window Tablet
Function Description
O/S Command Input of operating system commands
Shading On/Off Shaded display of surfaces (can also be activated with the function key F1).
Min/Max Auto Automatic Min/Max (see also option Auto Min/Max on page 48).
Last View Change from current view to previous view.
Perspective+ Standard Perspective on/off (see also option Definition on page 256).
RotY On/Off Continuous rotation of the geometry around the Y-axis (also to be activated by the function key F5).
Original Symmetry: Display of the original half only (also to be activated by the function key F6).
Mirror Symmetry: Display of the mirrored half only (also to be activated by the function key F7).
Both Sides Symmetry: Display of both halves (also to be activated by the function key F8).
C-CtrlP On/Off Toggle for control points of selected curves (also to be activated by the function key F9).
P-CtrlP On/Off Toggle for control points of selected patches (also to be activated by the function key F10).
Plane On/Off Toggle for plane symbol (also to be activated by the function key F11).
Deselection Deselection of all elements for all functions (also to be activated by the function key F12).
Zoom 0.50 Zoom out the geometry by factor 0.5.
Zoom 2.00 Zoom in the geometry by factor 2.
Zoom Select Zoomed Detail with Equal Scaling.
Highlgt On/Off Activating the highlight surface diagnoses currently set in the menu Display Highlight.
Navigation+ Switch the navigation modes in the Navigation tab of the function Display View/Navigation.
Centre of Rot+ Switch the setting of the centre of rotation in the Navigation tab of the function Display View/Nav-
igation.
Plane Activating the selection list of the planes defined in the function Display Plane.
DisV Activating the selection list of the Display Variants defined in the function Display Display.
View+ Switch to the next/previous standard view.

View-
View Activating the selection list of the views defined in the function Display View/Navigation.
View Layout Activating the selection list of the view layouts defined in the functionDisplay View Layout.
Variant+ Switch to the next/previous defined variant in the function File Reference Manager.
Variant-
IMPORTANT!
If the current variant has been modified, it will not be saved when switching to another var-
iant!
345
WINDOWS MOUSE
12
Variant Activating the selection list of the variants defined in the current reference manager session (func-
tion File Reference Manager).
TurnT On/Off Starting the turn table (see function Display Turn Table on page 313). Clicking again onto the
button will stop the turn table.
Anim On/Off Start the animation. If no animation is defined, the function Display Depth of Field will be acti-
vated.
Clipp On/Off Switch on/off the clipping planes defined in the function Display Clipping Plane.
Screen Switch to full screen display (also possible with ScrollLock key)
Select Deselection of all selected objects and reactivating the selection.
12.12 Windows Mouse

Using this function you may assign functions for view and light source manipulation to the right mouse button. For further information and possibil-
ities of view and light source manipulation please refer to the following sections:
2.6 View manipulation on page 41
11.3 Display View/Navigation on page 253
11.15 Display Light on page 300
Table 26 Function assignment to the right mouse button
RotX Rotation of the geometry about the X axis
RotY Rotation of the geometry about the Y axis
RotZ Rotation of the geometry about the Z axis
TraX View translation in X direction
TraY View translation in Y direction
TraZ View translation in Z direction
Zoom Zooming
LRotX Rotation of the current light source about the X axis
LRotY Rotation of the current light source about the Y axis
LRotZ Rotation of the current light source about the Z axis
Intensity Modification of the intensity of the current light source
Focal Length Modification of the focal length of the central perspective
The activated function is highlighted in the menu Windows Mouse and appears in the Display of the current mouse button assignment.
12.13 Windows Straighten Up

Apart from the pull down menu the function Windows Straighten Up can also be carried out using the shortcut Ctrl-U.
With this function the function windows are reset to the position saved in the menu Windows Preferences with the option User Preferences:
Save (see also Preferences files on page 327).
346
POINT AND CONTROL POINT MODIFICATION
13
13 Point and control point modification
ICEM Surf can be modelled by moving their points and control points. The modification of points and control points has a different effect on the
geometry shape.
Point modification
The geometry object is directly modified by moving an object point. This method allows strong changes of the object shape. This method
allows strong deformations of the object, and, in general, more than one control point will be modified.
Control point modification

The geometry object is indirectly modified by moving its control points. The object shape will be less modified than by a point modification.
This allows a considerably more precise modelling of an object.
Figure 142 Point/control point modification by the same value
Curves Surfaces
point modification control point modification
original curve
modified curve
distance
old position > new position
sections

For the object types Curve Segments, Curves, Patches, and Surfaces, functions are available with which you can modify points and control
points.
On Raw Data and Scansyou can only move points. In addition, a dynamic modification with Express is not possible on Raw Data. As for the sur-
face point modification, scan points are modified via a reference surface.
Diagnoses: Activated diagnosis functions like sections and matching diagnoses are dynamically updated.
Selection: For the selection of points, control points, and positions, the general possibilities are available (see Selection of geometry objects,
materials, colours, and positions on page 52). An exception is the direction inversion with the Shift key in the option Delta Vector of the point
modification functions: in these cases, the key shortcuts cannot be used.
In the menus, the following general options for the point and control point modification are available:
Express
Dynamic point/control point movement: Select a point/control point of the geometry object and move the cursor while keeping the left mouse
button pressed.
The dynamic movement is parallel to the screen plane, if no additional geometrical (Tangent, Curvature) or directional (X, Y, Z, Depth)
restriction is set.
In case of control point modification, you can use the check button of the option Delta to restrict the movement radius of the control points to
the specified. value
For scans and surfaces, you can use the check button Normal to fix the direction of the point/control point movement in direction of the nor-
mal in the selected point position.
With the right mouse button you may activate the context menu Mousewarp (see page 43).
Point
Modification of the point/control point position by selecting a new position.
Select first a point/control point of the geometry object and then the new point position.
347
13
NOTE:
When moving a point, the cursor position must be within the selections radius set (option Radius in the Selection tab of the func-
tion Windows Preferences, page 328). Otherwise, no point will be selected.
When moving a control point, the cursor may be at any position. The control point lying next to the cursor position, will be selected
automatically.
Delta Vector, Delta

Modification of the point/control point position by defining a difference vector.
Define via the vector selection the direction of the point/control point movement. Select then the point/control point to be moved. The point will
be moved by the value specified in the text field Delta in the defined direction.
With or the shortcut/space key + Shift key, you can invert the direction of the difference vector.
NOTE:
In case of point modifications, the direction can be inverted via keyboard only with the space key + Shift key.
Fix: Model, Plane

When using the options Express and Point you may specify whether in case of defining locked coordinate directions the model coordinate
system (Model) or the local coordinate system of the current work plane (Plane) shall be valid.
According to the setting is displayed Z or Depth for the third coordinate direction.
X, Y, Z/Depth
The point/control point movement can be locked in one or two coordinate directions. In case of modifying the position via the vector selection
with the option Delta Vector locking coordinate directions has no effect.
348
RAW DATA CREATION
14
14 Raw Data creation
14.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf

By digitizing styling models using mechanical and optical measuring machines point data describing the surface of the styling model are obtained.
The mechanical tracing process produces structured point clouds with few points and a line structure: raw data contours.
The optical tracing process with a laser measuring machine or by photogrammetry produces unstructured point clouds with a large number of
points, known as scans (see 16 Scan creation on page 358 and 17 Scan modification on page 371).
Raw data are linearly structured. They cannot be meshed. To shade a surface which is described by raw data, the raw data have to be converted
to scans which can be triangulated.
Patches and curve segments may be created directly from raw data. The resulting approximation quality can be diagnosed using the distance.
Vice versa, diagnosis curves, like sections or reflection lines, may be converted to raw data contours.
14.2 Raw Data creation Discrete

The raw data contour is defined by selecting individual points. You may select points on objects, as well as plane points. Additionally, the point
coordinates can be entered numerically in the window Selection (Position). A created raw data contour can be smoothed afterwards.
Figure 143 Raw data creation Discrete
The menu Discrete
Select
Reactivates the selection. In order to generate several raw data contours you can start the selection of further points via this button. Terminate
the point selection for a raw data contour with OK in the window Selection (Position).
Smooth
After activation of the button Smooth, a curve segment is approximated from the contour created last. The function Curve modification
Smooth (see page 439), where the desired shape of the curve can be defined, will automatically be activated.
If you activate the check button in front of the button Smooth, the smoothing will immediately be carried out after terminating the selection
beginning with the next function execution.
14.3 Raw Data creation Express

A raw data contour will be created in the current work plane by moving the cursor with left mouse button pressed. The point density depends on
the graphics resolution and the specified step size. A created raw data contour can be smoothed afterwards.
Figure 144 Raw data creation Express
349
RAW DATA CREATION ON OBJECT
14
The menu Express
Select
(see page 349)
Smooth
(see page 349)
Step Size
The digitizing step size defines the minimum distance between two adjacent points. A new point will be created whenever this distance is
exceeded.
14.4 Raw Data creation On Object

Raw data contours can be created on geometry objects.
If raw data are to be created on a scan without scan lines, only one raw data contour will be generated. If the scan has scan lines, one raw data
segment will be created for each scan line, if Join Segments is switched off.
Figure 145 Raw data creation on patches and sections
section lines
patch edges
The menu Objects
Select
The objects to be used for the raw data creation can be re-selected.
Tessellation
The following tessellation methods are available for the creation of raw data on curves, curve segments, patch and face edges:
Equidistant
The points are distributed regularly within the parameter range. The raw data contour exactly represents the parameterisation of the orig-
inal curve.
Chordal
The points are computed and distributed in a way that the distance (chord length) between them is equal.
Curvature
The points are computed curvature dependent within the parameter range. More points are created in regions with a large curvature than
in flatter regions.
Points
The specification of this value is only required for the raw data creation on curves, curve segments and patch or face edges. The number of
raw data points specified here will be created.
On points sets, raw data contours, intersection lines and scans, one new raw data point will be created for each point of the original object.
350
RAW DATA CREATION SCAN SECTIONS
14
NURBS Segments, NURBS Bends

For NURBS curves, raw data points can be created additionally at the inner segment boundaries or at sharp bends. This may result in the cre-
ation of more raw data points than desired. Additionally, the point distribution will be restarted at each segment boundary or bend.
If points shall only be created at segment boundaries or bends, the following options must be set: Equidistant, NURBS Segments or
NURBS Bends and Points: 2.
Segm. Tol.
(Segment Tolerance)
If the distance between two adjacent raw data points is larger than the segment tolerance, they will be assigned to different raw data seg-
ments.
NOTE:
A raw data segment contains at least two points. If the distances of a point from both neighboured points are larger than the value
specified here, that point will be ignored.
Contour Tol.
(Contour Tolerance)
If the distance between the end points of two adjacent raw data segments is larger than the contour tolerance, they will be assigned to differ-
ent raw data contours.
Join Segments
ON
All segments of a raw data contour will be connected to form one single segment.
OFF
One raw data segment will be created on each segment of the selected object.
14.5 Raw Data creation Scan Sections

With this function, raw data points are created on X, Y or Z sections. For this, the intersection line is scanned in the selected coordinate direction
with a determined grid increment (Distance). Begin and end point of the intersection line are added.
NOTE:
The coordinate values refer to world coordinate system.
Figure 146 Scanning a z section
Y Y
Z X Z X
Distance = 10
intersection line
Distance = 10 Distance = 10
-50.0 0.0 50.0 -50.0 0.0 50.0

a) with fixed scanning direction b) with variable scanning direc-
(setting: X) tion (setting: Var.)
For detailed information on sections please refer to Diagnoses Sections (see page 169).
The menu Scan Sections
351
RAW DATA CREATION SECTIONS
14
Select
A new selection of the intersection lines may be carried out.
Direction
The coordinate direction to be used for scanning the section is determined.
fixed axis direction
If one of the two fixed coordinate directions is switched on (for example X or Y for Z-Sections), the grid will only be used for this coordi-
nate axis (see figure 146, case a).
Var.
(Variable)
Both coordinate axes will be incremented, and the scanning direction will automatically be computed depending on the slope of the sec-
tion curve. A more regular distribution of the raw data points will be achieved in this way (see figure 146, case b).
Distance
The grid increment may be specified.
Contour Tol.
(Contour Tolerance)
If the distance between the end points of two adjacent raw data segments is larger than the contour tolerance, they will be assigned to differ-
ent raw data contours.
Join Segments
ON
All segments of a raw data contour will be connected to form one single segment.
OFF
One raw data segment will be created on each segment of the selected object.
14.6 Raw Data creation Sections

With this function you may create raw data contours on scans in any section plane. The points are created at those positions where the section
planes intersect the facets.
Figure 147 Raw data creation using sections on a scan
Using sections, a surface can permanently be compared with the scan on which it has been created. This is done by creating a section on the sur-
face with the same parameter settings as on the scan.
For more information on sections please refer to Diagnoses Sections (see page 169).
The main menu Sections
Select
The scans may be re-selected.
352
RAW DATA CREATION SECTIONS
14
Region
The Region selection is activated (see page 61).
Type
The section type may be selected.
X, Y, Z
The section planes are parallel planes to the YZ-plane (X = const.), XZ-plane (Y = const.) or XY-plane (Z = const.).
Plane
The section planes are parallel to the current work plane.
NOTE:
If the number of sections (Count) is set to 1 (see page 171) for the option Plane, possibly no intersection line is created. The rea-
son for this is that the attachment point of the work plane is not moved in this case, i. e. no parallel plane is generated. If the plane
in its current position does not intersect the surfaces, no section is created.
True
The plane normal to the curve tangent in a point to be selected on a patch or face edge, or a curve is created. This plane will be used as
section plane.
See also figure 17 in the function Diagnoses Sections (see page 171).
Trace
The sections run parallel to a determined trace plane. The X axis of this plane is defined by two points to be selected, the Y axis points out
of the screen.
Tolerance
The sections are calculated with the tolerance specified here. A point is retained if the perpendicular distance to the connecting line of its
adjacent points is larger than this value.
Min/Max
(Minimum/Maximum)
Via Min/Max, the corresponding values of the block representing the extreme values will be displayed and can be edited. By changing these
values, the area where the sections are to be generated are restricted to a defined range (Min = lower boundary, Max = upper boundary).
See also figures 20 and 21 in the function Diagnoses Sections (see page 174).
The specified values refer to the section plane normal (e. g. for X-sections the X-coordinate value).
Discrete
A selection list shows the coordinate values of the section plane normals. These values can be edited numerically. For a description of the
options available please refer to Discrete in the function Diagnoses Sections (see page 173).
The number of coordinates is controlled by the settings of the options Count and Increment.
Count
This value determines the number of sections to be generated in the defined area. A regular distribution between the lower limit (Min) and
upper limit (Max) of the section range will be computed.
NOTE:
Please pay attention to the note for the section type Plane (see page 170)!
Increment
Beginning at the lower limit (Min) of the section range, sections will be added by a user-defined increment up to the upper limit (Max). The
number of sections results automatically.
NOTE:
If increment values of full tens, hundreds, or thousands are specified, the Min/Max values will also be set to such values.
Graphical
Via this option you may graphically select points through which the section planes shall pass.
353
RAW DATA MODIFICATION
15
15 Raw Data modification
15.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf

For general information on raw data, please refer to section 14.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf on page 349.
15.2 Raw Data modification Point

Using this function you may move points of a raw data contour.
The menu Move Point
Express, Point, Delta Vector, Delta, Fix: Model, Plane, X, Y, Z/Depth

For the description of the options of this menu please refer to 13 Point and control point modification on page 347.
15.3 Raw Data Modification Insert

Use the cursor for selecting a new position where a new raw data point shall be inserted. This position can also be determined on any geometry
object.
Select
Insert
Additional raw data points can be inserted after interrupting the function without having to reselect the raw data contour.
15.4 Raw Data modification Delete

Raw data points may be deleted.
The menu Delete
Select
Delete
Deletes raw data points.
Region OFF:
A single raw data point to be selected will be removed.
Region ON:
All points between two raw data points to be selected including these points will be deleted.
354
RAW DATA MODIFICATION REFINE
15
15.5 Raw Data modification Refine

Raw data segments can be refined. If the distance of two neighboured raw data points is larger than the specified value, new points are added
until the maximum distance is kept.
The menu Refine
Select
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
The maximum distance of the raw data points can be specified.
15.6 Raw Data modification Connect

With this function, two adjacent segments of a raw data contour can be connected (option Segments), or all segments within one or several
selected contours (option Global). The distance between the segment end points may not be larger than the specified value.
The menu Connect
Object, Reference
The raw data contours or segments may be reselected.
Segments
Two adjacent segments within a raw data contour are connected.
Global
You may select one or several raw data contours. The segments within each single contour will then be connected.
Tolerance
If the distance between two segments to be connected is smaller than this value, the segment end points will coincide.
Distance
Adjacent contours will only be connected if the minimum distance between them is smaller than this value.
15.7 Raw Data modification Divide

Using this function, you may insert new segment boundaries into a raw data contour thus creating several segments. In addition, raw data con-
tours can be divided into several contours.
The menu Divide
Select
355
RAW DATA MODIFICATION FILTER
15
Segments
A segment boundary will be inserted at a selected point of the raw data contour. Two segments will be created by that.
Global
By selecting a point on the raw data contour, it will be divided into two contours. The point is determined depending on the setting of the
option Segment Boundary.
Plane
The raw data contour will be divided at the work plane according to the setting of Intersection Point.
Segment Boundary
Definition of the dividing position for the setting Global.
ON
The contour will be divided at the nearest segment boundary.
OFF
The contour will be divided directly at the selected raw data point.
Intersection Point
Definition of the dividing position for the setting Plane.
ON
The raw data contour will be divided exactly at the point of intersection with the work plane, thus creating a new raw data point.
OFF
The contour will be divided at the last point before it intersects the work plane (in positive direction).
15.8 Raw Data modification Filter

With this function the number of points of a raw data contour can be reduced by filtering (see figure below). For this operation, the tolerance devi-
ation filter (2 D filter) is used which removes the raw data points in dependence on a filter tolerance and a deviation. The working principle of
this filter is described in detail in the section Tolerance deviation filter on page 378 (function Scan modification Filter).
If duplicate points shall be removed, in spite of the fact that gaps could occur in the remaining point sequence, the Point Tolerance should be set
to a sufficiently large value.
Figure 148 Filtering a raw data contour
original contour
filtered contour
The menu Filter
Select
Filter Tolerance
A point is deleted if the distance between the two remaining adjacent points (the gap) is smaller than the value specified here.
Deviation
A point is deleted if the perpendicular distance to the connecting line of its remaining adjacent points is smaller than this value.
356
RAW DATA MODIFICATION INVERT
15
15.9 Raw Data modification Invert

If a raw data segment has been selected, the order of the points within this segment is inverted. If you select a complete raw data contour, the
order of the segments, as well as the order of the points within the single segments are inverted.
The menu Invert
Select
The raw data contour or segment can be reselected.
357
SCAN CREATION
16
16 Scan creation
16.1 Scans in ICEM Surf
Generation of scans
By digitizing styling models using mechanical and optical measuring machines point data describing the surface of the styling model are obtained.
The mechanical tracing process produces structured point clouds with few points and a line structure: raw data contours (see 14 Raw Data cre-
ation on page 349 and 15 Raw Data modification on page 354).
The optical tracing process with a laser measuring machine or by photogrammetry produces unstructured point clouds with a large number of
points. For processing these Scans, ICEM Surf offers numerous functions to structure, filter, and triangulate the imported point clouds. The point
clouds prepared this way can then be used for the surface generation.
Figure 149 Faceted scan
Scan types
There are different representations of scans in ICEM Surf. These scan types are defined as follows:
Point Based
Each facet is described by the identification numbers of its 3 corner points.
Edge Based
Each facet is described by the identification numbers of its 3 edges. Additionally, the information is saved through which points each edge is
running.
Compress
The scan is fragmented in triangle strips. A triangle strip is a set of triangles where each triangle shares two vertices with the preceding trian-
gle. The first three indices define a triangle, each additional index defines another triangle combined with the two preceding indices. By this
representation, you can achieve a higher display performance.
The scan type, this means the representation of a scan, can change when processing it depending on different algorithms.
Scans in design process

The following figure shows where the scan processor is integrated in the design process with CAD systems:
358
SCANS IN ICEM SURF
16
Figure 150 Design process
physical Model
mechanical trac- optical tracing

ing process process
Digitizing
SCAN DATA
structured point unstructured point

clouds clouds
ICEM Surf
raw data functions scan processor
Surface creation with scans

The surface creation process consists of three sections:
1. Import of the scan data
According to the measuring machine used the scan data to be imported may be triangulated or not and saved in files of different format. For
the import you may use two functions:
File Import
The scan data are directly read into the data base. (see section 6.5 Import Scan on page 102).
With File Import can be imported scan data in the following file formats:
SCAN (ESF)
EDF
STL
File Preview Point Clouds
With this function the external scan data are pre-processed in the scan previewer before saving them in the data base (see sections 16.2
Preview import on page 360, and 16.3 Scan creation Preview on page 361).
With File Preview Point Clouds can be imported scan data in the following file formats:
SCAN (ESF)
STL
xyz (ASCII point clouds, no mesh)
Steinbichler AC (no mesh)
Hymarc (no mesh)
GOM ATOS, versions 4.3.3 and 4.4.3 (no mesh)
2. Scan Previewer
In the scan previewer the external scan can be filtered and subdivided before saving them in the data base. This way, the data quantity to be
processed in the data base will be reduced and the generation of a data hierarchy with molecules (Scan Sets) and atoms (Scans) simplified.
Moreover, some geometry functions are available which can be used to begin already with the surface creation on the external scan.
3. Data Base
Finally, in the data base all ICEM Surf functions are available for modelling, diagnoses and export of the geometry for further processing in
external programs.
The following figure shows the schematic representation of the work flow with the scan processor:
359
PREVIEW IMPORT
16
Figure 151 Working with the scan processor
triangulated untriangulated
scan data scan data
SCAN (ESF) SCAN (ESF)

Import xyz (ASCII)
STL
Steinbichler
Hymarc
GOM ATOS
Processing the Patch Creation

Point Clouds
Filter Sections
Scan Previewer Triangulate Feature Line
(external scan) Divide Projection
Merge Surface Refit
Save
Further Processing
Data Base
Modelling
(Scan Set, Scan)
Diagnoses
Modifications
Editing
Interfaces
16.2 Preview import

The procedure for the import of scan data with the function File Preview Point Clouds is as follows:
1. After having activated the function File Preview Point Clouds select in the window File Browser Import the scan file to be imported.
2. If you did not yet work with the scan previewer in the current ICEM Surf session, the window File Browser Preview appears. In this window
you can either
create a new preview by entering a new name in the text field File, or
add the scan data to be imported to an already existing preview by selecting a file name in the list of files.
After confirmation with OK the window Import Preview appears.
If you already worked with the scan previewer in the current ICEM Surf session, the window Import Preview is immediately activated together
with the last loaded preview directory. To load another preview or create a new one, you may activate the file browser by the button Preview.
3. With the options in the window Import Preview you can determine the import conditions and, if necessary, edit the files to be imported. The
option correspond to those of the function Import Raw Data (see page 103).
The buttons Format and Edit File can only be activated, if the file to be imported cannot be assigned to a file type.
After having imported the scan data the window Import Preview remains active for further data imports. If the import was successful, the file
name is deleted from the list of Files. If during the import any problems occurred, the name of the file concerned remains in the list. In this
case you should activate the Protocol to locate the error.
4. When creating a new preview a subdirectory with the specified name will be created in the directory Scan of the current project.
In the preview directory are saved binary files containing the following information:
data and structure of the original version (original.data, original.struc),
selected data (selected.data, selected.struc),
visible data (preview.data, preview.struc).
After the import of the scan data the window Scan Previewer appears (see following section).
360
SCAN CREATION PREVIEW
16
16.3 Scan creation Preview

For the description of a surface not all points produced by the measuring machines are needed. For example, flat areas of the scanned model
need considerably less points than areas with strong curvature change.
In the scan previewer you may reduce the number of points in the original file by filtering. This way, redundant information not needed for the sur-
face computation are suppressed and the performance improved.
The window Scan Previewer is either automatically activated after the import of the scan data as described above, or directly with the function
Create Scan Preview.
If you activate the Scan Previewer directly, the file browser appears for loading a preview already imported. If you already worked with the scan
previewer in the current ICEM Surf session, the last loaded preview directory is still active as current directory.
NOTE:
No data will go lost when leaving the scan previewer without saving. The currently visible preview data are only blanked and can be
unblanked by reactivating the scan previewer.
For a fast patch creation the following geometry functions are already available in the preview phase:
Create Scan Triangulation

Feature Line
Modify Scan Edit Facets

Delete
Filter
Invert
Create Raw Data Sections
Create Patch By 4 Points
Modify Patch Refit Patch
Create Curve Projection
The function Create Scan Preview includes the tabs Scan Previewer, Preview Contents, and Preview Filter described in the following sec-
tions.
16.3.1 Scan Previewer
Preview
With the button Preview you may choose another preview directory. The path of the current preview directory is indicated.
Save
With this function data from the current preview file can be saved as scans in the data base. The following parameters are available.
Preview
All displayed preview points are saved.
Active
All active, i. e. selected preview points are saved.
Original
All original points are saved, i. e. all points of the original files included in the current preview session.
DB, File
The points are written as scans either into the current data base (DB) or an ESF file (File).
361
PREVIEW CONTENTS
16
Remove
After the saving operation the active points can be removed from the original point set in the preview file to simplify the structuring of large
point sets.
In this case, the number of original points in the preview file will be unequal to the number of points in the original file.
File
Activation of the file browser. The path name of the saved file is displayed next to the button.
Original: Points, Facets

The number of points and facets read in from the original file is displayed. The number of original points and facets can be higher than the cur-
rent indication.
Active: Points, Facets

If you selected a subset of the original data quantity via the region selection (see option Region), the number of the selected, i e. active points
and facets is displayed.
Reset
With Reset the performed region selection will be undone. The preview points and facets will be deleted from the screen. Using the option
Filter you can then filter again according to the current option setting.
Preview: Points, Facets

The number of the currently visible points is displayed. Due to filtering it is equal to or smaller than the number of original points.
Reset
With Reset the filtering will be undone and the number of preview points set to zero.
Region
Using the Region selection (see page 61) you may select a subset of the original data quantity.
16.3.2 Preview Contents
In this window is indicated which original files you already read into the current preview directory and how much they have been reduced by filter-
ing and structured by selecting active regions.
Using Delete you can delete contents of individual original files from your current preview file.
NOTE:
A complete preview directory can only be deleted by the function File Delete, Preview.
16.3.3 Preview Filter
Using this function you can suppress redundant information from the original file by filtering.
IMPORTANT!
In case of triangulated scans filtering of points will delete the mesh!
This function corresponds to the function Scan modification Filter (see page 378).
362
SCAN CREATION TRIANGULATION
16
16.4 Scan creation Triangulation

In ICEM Surf, two triangulation algorithms have been implemented: the 2D triangulizer and the 3D triangulizer. Both triangulizers can be used
for processing scans with arbitrary structure (scattered data).
The triangulizers work as follows:
2D triangulizer
The selected scan is divided into parallel boxes according to the option settings. Each subset in the corresponding box is then triangulated
independently by computing a compensation plane and a 2D triangulation for the subset related to this plane.
In case of parts with undercut you have to select a sufficient number of boxes to enable the algorithm to mesh the geometry correctly.
The 2D triangulizer works faster, however, for complex geometries it may eventually not produce satisfying results. Therefore, it is appropri-
ate for simple geometry which can be clearly projected into a plane. This triangulizer will give you a first 3D impression of your scan.
Operation of the 3D triangulizer:

The 3D triangulizer works without dividing the scan into boxes and computes the mesh without projection. This allows to process surfaces
with complicated topology characteristics. The generated mesh will have no gaps. This algorithm is more complex than the 2D triangulizer,
so that the computation of large data quantities may be time-consuming.
On the other hand, the 3D triangulizer delivers better results and can also mesh complex geometries which cannot be clearly projected into
a plane, e. g. surfaces with strong curvature changes, closed surfaces, or undercuts.
If the scans contain a large number of scan points, you should reduce the data quantity with the function Scan modification Filter (see section
17.8 Scan modification Filter on page 378).
If several scans are selected, they are triangulated independently from each other. To get a coherent mesh, the scans may be merged before
computing the mesh with the function Scan modification Merge (see section 17.5 Scan modification Merge on page 376).
The triangulation uses the existing scan points. If you want to use the scans only to create surfaces, this mesh quality is sufficient. For the surface
generation you may compute sections on the created meshes, project curves on the scans, etc.
The menu Triangulation
Select
Selection of the scan to be triangulated.
2D
The 2D triangulizer will be used for triangulating the scans.
3D
The 3D triangulizer will be used for triangulating the scans.
Optimise
With the 3D triangulizer the resulting meshes can be optimised with regard to the surface curvature making existing structures more obvious.
Auto
Since most scan data no not contain explicit information about the distances of the measured points, the triangulation will be performed with
an internally computed edge length. After this triangulation the internally computed edge length will be displayed in the text field next to Max.
Edge Length as an orientation for another triangulation with the option Max. Edge Length and a user-defined edge length.
Max. Edge Length

(Maximum Edge Length)
The maximum edge length of the created facets is determined by this value. In case of a too large edge length, eventually existing holes will
be triangulated. In case of a too small edge length the geometry may not be completely meshed.
NOTE:
The edge length should be considerably larger than the minimum digitizing distance.
The following options are only available for the 2D triangulizer:
Overlap
The boxes can overlap to minimize gaps. The created facets are clipped in the middle of the overlapping area (see figure 152). As the usage
of this function needs more computing time, it is recommendable in case of large scans to execute the first computation without overlapping.
363
SCAN CREATION OBJECT
16
Figure 152 2d-triangulation with overlapping
middle of the
overlapping area
Points/Box
The point set is divided equidistantly in boxes in X, Y, and Z direction, so that no box contains more than the specified point quantity.
After the division of the point set, the internally computed result will be displayed in the fields No. of Boxes to indicate the box distribution for
later iterations.
No. of Boxes
(Number of Boxes)
Only if 2D is active.
You may explicitly choose the number of boxes in X, Y and Z direction the scan is to be divided to.
View
Only if 2D is active.
The 2D triangulation in each box is carried out using the current view plane instead of the individual compensation plane.
16.5 Scan creation Object

With this function you may create scans on existing geometry objects. Patches and faces are triangulated.
When creating scans on several patches will be created a scan with a contiguous topology, i. e. at contiguous patch edges will be created com-
mon facets. However, the quality of the created scan depends on the transition quality of the patch cluster.
One or more scan lines can be created on raw data segments (see option Divide).
For the scan creation may also be used point sets which are assigned to a single scan line.
The menu Object
Delete Object
The geometry object, on which the scan has been created before, will be deleted.
Select +
Selection of objects on which the scan shall be created. With + you can add further objects to the selection.
364
SCAN CREATION OBJECT
16
Surfaces
Isoparam.: U, V
(Isoparametric: U, V)
The system will compute U + 1 scan points in u direction and V + 1 scan points in v direction. The scan points will be distributed on the
surfaces in a parameter-equidistant way.
Absolute
The absolute tolerance specified here will be used for the tessellation. The surfaces are subdivided into smaller surfaces until the distance
of the planar facets from the surfaces is smaller than the specified tolerance. This way, the tessellation can be curvature dependent.
Normals
In addition to points and facets, the normals computed in the facet nodes can also be saved in the data base. This improves the perform-
ance and quality of the shaded display.
Figure 153 Effect of the option Normals, displayed by means of the Highlight Diagnosis
Scan saved without Scan saved with Normals

Normals
Compress
The scans are saved compressed. Due to the reduced data quantity, the performance for the shaded display is also improved.
NOTE:
Modifying the scans will delete the properties saved with the options Normals and Compress!
Topo
(Topology)
Equal to Absolute, the absolute tolerance is used with this option. If a cluster of several patches or faces connected to each other is
selected as original geometry, they are triangulated in a way that the facet structure is concordant at the edges of adjacent objects. This
way, gaps or overlaps in the original geometry can be avoided in the created scan.
Distance (Topo)
This option is only available, if Topo is active.
Specification of the absolute tolerance for the topological tessellation.
Raw Data
Divide
With this option a dividing mechanism for raw data can be activated, which can be influenced by the options Distance and Angle. By
dividing the raw data several scan lines will be created.
365
SCAN CREATION OFFSET
16
Distance
A new scan line will be created, if the distance between two points of the raw data segment is larger than the value specified here.
Angle
A new scan line will be created, if the angle between two consecutive tangents of the raw data segment is larger than the value specified
here.
IMPORTANT!
16.6 Scan creation Offset

With this function may be created an offset to a triangulated scan or scan set.
All points of the offset scan created in positive or negative normal direction have the same distance to the corresponding original scan.
Figure 154 Offset of a scan
SCAN/2
SCAN/1
The menu Offset
Select
After selection of scans or scan sets the normal vectors are displayed as arrows. If scan consists of several subsets, a separate normal vector
is displayed for each subset.
If a scan or subset contains individual facets with opposite orientation than the other facets of the scan or subset, the orientation of these fac-
ets is inverted. A corresponding message will appear, by which you are asked whether you want to save the scan. If you answer with yes, the
scan will be saved in the data base with the corrected orientation
Orientation
The offset direction depends on the normal orientation. With this option the normal orientation and thus the offset direction for the scans or
subsets can be inverted. To invert a normal vector click onto the origin of the vector arrow.
Duplicate
If this option is switched on, a copy of the original scan is created. To avoid unnecessarily large data quantities, this option is automatically
deactivated after an offset has been created.
Side Surfaces
With this option, additional facets are created between the edges of the original and offset scan, so that a solid results.
366
SCAN CREATION FEATURE LINE
16
Figure 155 Scan Offset with Side Surfaces
Scan Offset Scan Offset

Side Surfaces Off Side Surfaces On
Delta
Indication of the offset distance. Using the button , the offset direction may be inverted for all selected scans.
16.7 Scan creation Feature Line

Using this function, you can create characteristic or shape-defining curves and raw data contours (feature lines) on scans.
Feature Lines are created on the basis of characteristic mesh edges, which are displayed in regions specified with the corresponding popup
menu.
The proceeding is as follows:
1. When calling the function, first the object selection is activated. Select the scan on which feature lines shall be created.
If feature lines shall be calculated on a region of the scan only, you can select the region via the option Region.
NOTE:
Use the OK button in the window Selection (Scan Region) to terminate the selection. For this selection type, the Undo/Redo function is
assigned to the middle mouse button (see section 4.5.2 Selection (Scan Region) on page 62).
2. Select in the popup menu Characteristic Mesh Edges the mode for the mesh edges calculation.
3. Activate the option Create.
If the options Edge or Split Line are set, the mesh edges are calculated immediately and displayed on the scan.
When using the options Sharp Bend, Curvature, and Highlight, you first have to select a point on the scan, through which a character-
istic mesh edge shall run. After selection of the point all characteristic mesh edges with a value lying within the range specified by the
selected point are calculated (see Number of characteristic mesh edges on page 370).
4. Choose in the popup menu Bezier, B-Spline, Raw Data the desired element type.
5. You can now treat the characteristic mesh edges as follows:
Create curve elements
Choose one of the methods Express or Discrete to create a curve element on a characteristic mesh edge. The input will be terminated
by pressing the middle or right mouse button
Delete
Before terminating the input the curve element can be deleted by moving the cursor starting at the last created point backwards along the
curve element with Ctrl key and left mouse button pressed.
The menu Feature Line
Select
Selection of triangulated scans or scan sets.
Region
The Region selection will be activated (see page 61).
Characteristic Mesh Edges

The options in this popup menu specify how the characteristic mesh edges shall be computed on the scan.
367
16
Edge
Mesh boundaries will be marked as characteristic mesh edges.
After selection of a scan region with the option Region only the edges of the selected region will be marked as characteristic mesh edges.
This allows, for example, to calculate characteristic mesh edges on boundaries of flat regions.
Figure 156 Characteristic mesh edges on the boundary of a flat region
Flat Region
Sharp Bend
Mesh edges and sharp bends will be marked as characteristic mesh edges. As sharp bend are defined regions, in which the angle
between the facet normals is larger than the value set with the slider.
Figure 157 Feature Line Sharp Bend
sharp bends
Curvature
Points with the same curvature value are connected to a line.
Figure 158 Feature Line Curvature Line
curvature lines
selected point
368
16
Highlight
As characteristic mesh edge will be marked a highlight line. After having selected the scan, specify a point through which the highlight line
shall pass and activate the button Light to use the direction of the current light source for the computation of the highlight lines.
Figure 159 Feature Line Highlight
characteristic mesh
edges*
selected point
* For better visibility the ICEM Surf default colour for characteristic mesh edges
was modified.
Split Line
As characteristic mesh edges will be marked split lines. In the text field Angle can be specified a split angle between 0 and 90.
Figure 160 Feature Line Split Line
characteristic mesh
edges*
* For better visibility the ICEM Surf default colour for characteristic mesh edges
was modified.
Create
The feature lines will be created according to the setting in the popup menu Characteristic Mesh Edges. Except for the mesh edge types
Edge and Split Line you have to select a scan point after activation of this button.
Reset
The created feature lines will be removed.
Save
All visible feature lines are saved to the data base. For each internal feature line, a separate rawdata segment is created under the current
rawdata contour.
Express
After activating this button, you can create curve elements of the type set on the characteristic mesh edges by moving the cursor with the left
mouse button pressed. The input will be terminated by pressing the middle or right mouse button.
Discrete
The curve elements are created by selecting points.
NOTE:
The function of the buttons Express and Discrete is identical with Express ( ) and Points ( ) in the function Geometry
Create in Unified Modelling (see page 633).
369
16
Bezier, B-Spline, Raw Data

You may choose whether Bezier objects, B-Spline objects or raw data shall be created.
Order
The order of a Bezier- or B-Spline curve to be created can be specified. If a B-Spline curve is created, the order will be applied to each seg-
ment.
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
The raw data or curves are projected onto the projection base within the specified distance.
Filter
Only feature lines which contain at least the number of points specified here are displayed and recognized during further processing.
Segments
This option has only effect for the object type B-Spline.
B-Spline curves are created with the specified number of segments.
Number of characteristic mesh edges

If the options Sharp Bend, Curvature, or Highlight have been activated, you may use the slider to control the number of the displayed char-
acteristic mesh edges. The admissible range of values lies between the maximum and minimum value diagnosed on the scan. After selecting
a scan point, the slider will be set onto the value valid at the scan point. This value is displayed next to right text field. The value range adjust-
able with the slider is automatically set to plus/minus 5 of the current value and can be modified in the text fields.
NOTE:
When changing the value range in the text fields, the slider must be set to a value lying within the new admissible range which shall
be specified. If, e. g. the upper extreme value shall be decreased from 100 to 50, the current value set with the slider must not be
higher than 50, otherwise the new value will not be accepted and an error message output.
Light and split direction

For Highlight is specified the direction of the light beams and for Split Line the split direction:
X, Y, or Z direction (X, Y, Z),
normal direction of the work plane (Plane),
normal direction of the view plane (View),
direction of a vector (Vector).
Light
The direction of the current light source is defined as vector. The function of this button is identical with the option Light in the menu Selection
(Vector).
In case of modifying the light source position, the highlight or split lines are recomputed when activating this button.
Angle
Definition of a split angle.
This text field is only available, if a split line is marked as mesh edge (option Split Line).
IMPORTANT!
370
SCAN MODIFICATION
17
17 Scan modification
17.1 Scans in ICEM Surf

For general information on scans, please refer to section 16.1 Scans in ICEM Surf on page 358.
17.2 Scan modification Edit Facets

Using this function, additional facets may be created at the edge of an existing mesh and existing facets may be edited.
17.2.1 Fill Holes
Select
Selection of a triangulated scan.
Region
The Selection (Region) will be activated (see page 61).
Holes
It is indicated how many holes from the total number of holes in the selected scan or scan region have already been filled.
Fill All
All holes will be filled by one step.
< Fill >

Using this option the holes can be filled individually. With < and > you can change to the previous and next holes.
NOTE:
After having activated the options Fill All or < Fill > a preview of the filled holes is displayed. The holes are filled only after confirming with
OK.
Expand
Only available if < Fill > is active.
To improve an indistinct edge structure of holes, they can be expanded by deleting the facets at the hole boundary.
Figure 161 Improving the edge structure with the option Expand
Adapt
To obtain a more regular facet structure, the edge length of the facets created to fill the hole is adapted to the boundary facets.
Insert
Non-triangulated scan points will be triangulated.
On
Facets will only be created between the edge points.
371
CREATE FACETS
17
Figure 162 Filling holes without inserting
Off
In the hole area, facets will also be created between non-triangulated scan points.
Figure 163 Filling holes with inserting
Flip View
In most cases, hidden holes can be made visible by turning the view by 180.
Zoom Hole
If the view has been changed while working on it, you can go back to the original view of the hole.
17.2.2 Create Facets
Select
Create Facets
With this option, new facets may be created at the edge of an existing mesh by selecting the points which are to be triangulated. One or two
points must be edge points of the mesh. If a point in the interior of a mesh has been selected, the next edge point will be used instead.
Adapt, Insert
See Fill Holes on page 371.
17.2.3 Edge Swap
372
SCAN MODIFICATION DELETE
17
Select
Edge Swap
One edge of the existing mesh may be selected by clicking on it to invert its orientation.
Figure 164 Swapping edges
17.3 Scan modification Delete

With this function, points or facets of a scan may be deleted.
NOTE:
If smooth trimmed edges of the deleted areas are desired, you should use the function Scan modification Trim.
The menu Delete
Select
Selection of the scans to be deleted.
Region
The Selection (Scan Region) will be activated (see page 62).
Points, Facets
With this popup menu you can choose whether points and facets or facets only shall be deleted.
Points
In the selected region, the scan points as well as the corresponding facets will be deleted.
The region selection will include all facets with at least one node lying within the selected region.
Facets
Only the facets are deleted, the scan points will be preserved.
The region selection will include only facets with all nodes lying within the selected region. This allows to delete also single facets from a
scan.
NOTE:
For a better visibility of the selected facets it is recommended to switch on the Shading in the menu Selection (Scan Region).
17.4 Scan modification Trim

Analogously to patch trimming, a scan is trimmed at a limitation object which is projected onto the scan. After the trim operation all points will be
deleted in the inactive scan region, whereas depending on the settings facets can be preserved.
To create smooth edges, the point number and facet shape is adapted at the trimmed edges (see figure below).
373
SCAN MODIFICATION TRIM
17
Figure 165 Scan trimming
polygon as trim curve

active region
The menu Trim
Select
Limitation
For defining the limitation the following options are available:
Rectangle
As limitation a rectangle can be drawn in the view plane.

Polygon
As limitation a polygon can be drawn in the view plane. The polygon definition is terminated with the middle mouse button.
Plane
The current work plane will be used as limitation.

Curves / Surfaces
As limitation can be selected curve as well as surface elements.

Additional limitations can be selected using the button +.
For trimming at surfaces will be used the surface-surface-intersection (SSI) curve calculated before the trim operation.
For trimming at surfaces the following conditions must be fulfilled:
374
SCAN MODIFICATION TRIM
17
The calculated SSI curve must form a contiguous polygon. If, for example, internal gaps of a face split the curve, no trim operation can
be carried out.
non contiguous surface-

surface-intersection curve
The calculated SSI curve is projected onto the scan with the projection direction set via the option Plane. To be able to calculate an
optimised trim result, it should be guaranteed that the curve can be projected without undercuts.
calculated SSI curve
original geometry trim result using the original view with projection direc-
tion View (Plane Off)
calculated SSI curve
original geometry in view Side View trim result with projection in view
direction Side View
Plane
On
The selected limitation objects are projected onto the scan normal to the current work plane.
Off
The limitation objects are projected onto the scan in view direction.
Duplicate
The original scan will be duplicated before the trim operation.
Trim
After the trim operation, only the facets of the active region will be preserved.
Both
After the trim operation, the facets of both the active and inactive regions will be preserved. Thus, an individual scan is created for each
region.
Invert
After the trim operation, only the facets of the inactive region will be preserved.
375
SCAN MODIFICATION MERGE
17
Insert
Using this option, the scan will not be trimmed, but the selected limitation objects will be inserted into the scan. An edge running along the lim-
itation object is thus created on the scan.
Active Region +
The selection of the active region(s) will be reactivated. Additional active regions can be selected using the button +.
NOTE:
If the scan contains several topological regions, each region which shall be preserved must be selected as active region. The top-
ological regions are marked by yellow edges. In case of topological non-contiguous scans, these edges can also lie inside.
Figure 166 Scan with topological non-contiguous regions
Active Region 1
Active Region 2
trim curve
topological regions
Tolerance
With the tolerance you can determine the tessellation quality of the projection of limitation objects.
The limitation object, e. g. a curve, is projected onto the scan as a polygon with a determined number of points. The lower the indicated toler-
ance value, the higher will be the number of points calculated for the polygon and the more exactly will the trim edge match the limitation
object.
At the projection edge, apart from the indicated number of points additional points will be created at the intersection points facet edge/pro-
jected limitation object.
17.5 Scan modification Merge

With this function, several scans can be merged to form one single scan. Geometrical identical points are merged to one point. This is why the
number of points may change. The number of facets remains unchanged.
When merging scans, the topology will not be considered, i. e. the resulting scan may have several topological regions.
The menu Merge
Select
Reactivating the selection.
Target Object
The scans selected with the option Objects are assigned to the scan selected as Target Object. The resulting scan adopts the molecule
name of the target object.
Objects
The scans selected with this option will merge with the scan selected as target object.
17.6 Scan modification Divide

With this function, a scan or scan set may be divided.
NOTE:
If smooth trimmed edges of the divided areas are desired, you should use the function Modify Scan Trim with the option Both.
376
SCAN MODIFICATION REFINE
17
The menu Divide
Select
Selection of the scan or scan set to be divided.
Region
17.7 Scan Modification Refine

During refining, facets will be divided into smaller facets.
The menu Refine
Select
Selection of the scans to be modified.
Region
Activation of the region selection.
Max. Edge Length

(Maximum Edge Length)
For the modification, only those edges are taken into account which have edge lengths larger than the specified value.
Iterations
On
The system computes as many iterations as required until no edge exceeds the Maximum Edge Length.
NOTE:
If the resulting number of facets will be larger than the fourfold, a warning will be output and you have to confirm the function exe-
cution.
Off
Only one iteration is carried out. The Maximum Edge Length will not be kept, i. e. the edges of the resulting facets will be longer than the
specified value.
Figure 167 Refine with several Iterations
Original Scan Iterations Off Iterations On
Smooth
When smoothing, in regions with strong curvature facet points are moved in a way that the transitions between the facets are as plane as pos-
sible.
377
SCAN MODIFICATION FILTER
17
Figure 168 Refine with Smooth
Original Scan Smooth Off Smooth On
17.8 Scan modification Filter

With this function you can reduce the number of points and facets of a scan by filtering.
For filtering points two filters are used according to the current setting:
Tolerance deviation filter

The tolerance deviation filter is mainly used to filter structured point data, i. e. scan lines and raw data contours (see also function Raw Data
modification Filter on page 356). The points are only filtered in direction of the scan line/raw data contour.
With the tolerance deviation filter two different operations are carried out:
1. Filtering within a tolerance:
Starting from the first point of the scan line/raw data contour all points within the tolerance are filtered. The next remaining point will be the
reference point for the next filtering operation. This process will be repeated until the end of the scan line/raw data contour. The end point
of the line/contour is always preserved, even if it lies within the tolerance of the previous reference point (see figure below).
The tolerance filter mainly filters in flat areas. The higher the tolerance, the more points are deleted in flat areas.
Figure 169 Tolerance filter
starting point
Tolerance
next reference point
end point
last reference point
scan line/raw data contour

filtered points
remaining points
2. Filtering within a deviation
A connecting line will be created between two reference points used by the tolerance filter. All points within a distance from this connect-
ing line specified with the option Deviation are filtered (see figure below).
The deviation filter mainly filters in curved areas. The lower the deviation, the more points will remain in curved areas.
378
17
Figure 170 Deviation filter
starting point
reference point
Deviation
reference point
end point

filtered points
remaining points
The tolerance deviation filter is activated, if for filtering points the options Max. Number and Tolerance are used in combination with Devia-
tion.
3D distance filter
The 3D filter deletes all points around a reference point within a radius specified with the option Tolerance. The points in the filtered data will
be distributed regularly.
Using the 3D filter is useful for filtering unstructured point data. On structured point data the structure will get lost, as unlike the tolerance devi-
ation filter the 3D filter also filters orthogonally to the scan lines/raw data contours.
The 3D filter is activated, if for filtering points the option Tolerance is used in combination with Optimal.
Figure 171 3D filter
Tolerance
structured point data unstructured point data

filtered points
remaining points
The menu Filter
379
17
Select
Selection of the scan to be filtered.
Region
Points
Filtering points.
IMPORTANT!
In case of triangulated scans filtering of points will delete the mesh!
Facets
Filtering facets.
Max. Number
(Maximum Number)
Points
Specification of the maximum number of points which the scan/raw data contour shall contain.
First, the point data is filtered with the tolerance deviation filter using an internally computed tolerance and the specified deviation.
If, after filtering, the number of points is higher than the maximum number specified, the spare points will be deleted according to their
order within the scan, e. g. every 150th point, until the maximum number is obtained.
After the filtering operation, the tolerance internally used by the distance deviation filter will be displayed. The resulting deviation may
deviate from the specified value.
The results of filtering to a maximum point number will show a less distinctive differentiation between flat and curved areas as will be
obtained when filtering with a user-defined tolerance and deviation (see figure 173a, page 381).
Facets
The facets are sorted according to the edge length. The facets with the smallest edge lengths are deleted until the maximum number of
facets specified is achieved. With this setting the facets are filtered independently from curvatures (see figure 174a, page 381). The
resulting scan may deviate from the original shape.
Tolerance
Points
When filtering points the tolerance specifies the maximum admissible distance between two points.
Filtering with the Tolerance deviation filter (Deviation active)
Instead of an internally computed tolerance the tolerance deviation filter works with the specified tolerance and deviation.
With this setting, more points will be deleted in flat areas than in curved areas (see figure 173b, page 381).
Filtering with the 3D distance filter (Optimal active)
The points are filtered with the specified tolerance. With this setting, the filtering will be independent from curvatures (see figure 173c,
page 381).
Facets
When filtering facets with activated Tolerance only the specified deviation will be used.
The facets are filtered curvature-dependent, i. e. in flat areas the number of facets will be more reduced than in curved areas (see
figure 174b).
Deviation
Points
If the text field is active, the Tolerance deviation filter is used. The deviation specifies the perpendicular distance to the connecting line
between two reference points (see figure 170 on page 379).
Facets
When filtering facets with the option Tolerance the maximally admissible deviation between the original and the simplified mesh can be
specified.
380
SCAN MODIFICATION REPLACE
17
Figure 172 Filtering facets with maximum deviation
original mesh moved point

tolerance
modified mesh
Optimal
This option is only available for filtering points with the option Tolerance.
The 3D filter deletes all points around a reference point within a radius specified with Tolerance (see figure 173c).
Figure 173 Filtering points
original scan a) Max. Number + Deviation b) Tolerance + Deviation c) Tolerance + Optimal
Figure 174 Filtering facets
original scan: a) b)
number of facets: 1250 Max. Number: 100 Tolerance ON
Deviation: 0,1
resulting number of facets: 208
17.9 Scan modification Replace

The facets in the selected region of a scan will be replaced by tessellation of the selected surface.
NOTE:
The selected surface should not be larger than the scan, as the scan will be trimmed at the surface edges when replacing the facets.
381
SCAN MODIFICATION INVERT
17
Figure 175 Facets replaced by tessellation of a surface
Original Scan Scan with replaces Facets
The menu Replace
Select
Selection of the scan.
Region
The limitation of the selection to the region to be replaced is useful, as in this case the computation of the facets will be accelerated.
Surfaces
Selection of the surface.
Tessellation
With this option you can specify the tolerance for the admissible deviation from the selected surface. The facet size will be computed in a way
that the distance of the planar facets from the surface is smaller than the specified tolerance.
17.10 Scan modification Invert

With this function, the normal direction of a scans or subsets of scans may be inverted.
The menu Invert
Select
After selection of scans or scan sets the normal vectors are displayed as arrows. If a scan consists of several subsets, a separate normal vec-
tor is displayed for each subset.
If a scan or subset contains individual facets with opposite orientation than the other facets of the scan or subset, the orientation of these fac-
ets is inverted. A corresponding message will appear, by which you are asked whether you want to save the scan. If you answer with yes, the
scan will be saved in the data base with the corrected orientation
Orientation
The normal orientation of the selected scans or subsets can be inverted. To invert a normal vector click onto the origin of the vector arrow.
382
SCAN MODIFICATION FACET MODIFICATIONS
17
Figure 176 Orientation of scan normals
SCAN/1
subsets
normal vector
17.11 Scan modification Facet Modifications

With this function, the quality of scan facets can be improved.
The menu Facet Modifications
Select
Selection of scans or scan sets.
Region
Optimise
The facets are optimised by reorganising the edges. The points will be preserved. For the optimisation one of the following option has to be
activated:
Equi-Sided
The facets are optimised in a way that they are as much as possible equilateral.
Area
The facets are optimised in a way that the resulting surface will be as small as possible.
Curvature
The facets are optimised in a way that the curvature will be as little as possible.
Smooth
When smoothing, facet points are moved in a way that the transitions between the facets are as plane as possible. The following parameter
can be set for smoothing:
Max. Angle
(Maximum Angle)
Only areas are modified in which the angles between facet normals are smaller than the value specified. I. e. areas with strong curvature
changes will be disregarded and features like sharp bends preserved.
IMPORTANT!
Tolerance
This value specifies the maximum distance permitted between the original and modified mesh.
Iterations
To obtain the best result possible, the facets can be computed with several iterations.
383
SCAN MODIFICATION CLAY
17
17.12 Scan modification Clay

The module ICEM Surf Clay allows the virtual clay modelling on the basis of point clouds and facet models. Similar to the control point modifica-
tion of surfaces the scans are modified with the help of a reference surface. This modelling possibility has the following advantages:
Scans can be modelled globally and locally.
Apart from patches, scans can also be selected as reference surface.
During modelling, facets can be refined dynamically.
The modification region can be exactly defined.
ICEM Surf Clay is used for the visual shape process or feasibility studies before beginning the surface creation. After the preparatory process the
facet models can be converted into surface models.
The menu Clay
Most of the options in the window Clay correspond to the control point modification of surfaces and are described in detail in section 25.3 Surface
modification Control Point on page 610. In the following you will find an abbreviated description of the options.
Reference
Selection of a reference patch or scan.
Inactive
If the complete scan is selected, a virtual reference patch is computed, which according to the projection direction of its normal can be
located in different planes (see options Projection Direction: X, Y, Z, Plane, View, Vector, Normal).
NOTE:
To fix scan edges, the reference patch must be smaller or equal to the scan at the edges to be fixed.
If the scan edges shall be modified, the reference patch must exceed the scan at the edges to be modified.
If by the region selection only a part of the scan is selected, a virtual reference scan is computed at the selection position, which is lying
near the scan to be modelled.
Active
After having activated the button Reference you can select a patch or scan as reference. The reference object should not be smaller than
the surface.
If a reference patch or scan has been selected, the button is highlighted. You can deselect the patch or scan by reactivating the button
Reference and aborting the selection in the window Selection (Object).
Fixed Edges
In case of selecting a reference patch you may determine which patch edges shall not be changed during the modification.
Using the button + you may select additional edges.
Tangent
The tangents of the selected reference patch edges are also not modified.
Projection Direction: X, Y, Z, Plane, View, Vector, Normal

According to the setting this popup menu has different functions:
Reference inactive:
Specification of the projection direction of the reference surface normal.
Reference active:
Specification of the projection direction of the reference surface edges onto the scan when using the option Trim.
NOTE:
After activating the option Normal you are prompted to select a scan point the normal of which shall specify the projection direc-
tion.
The option Vector is then automatically activated in the popup menu and the normal direction in the selected point is indicated in
the text fields.
The alignment of the reference surface will be preserved until a new normal vector is defined.
Express, Point, Delta Vector, Delta

With the following options the movement direction of the selected control points of a reference patch can be specified:
384
17
Tangent
A single control point (Single) or a control point row (Row) can be moved on the control lines of the control point mesh (see figure 271 on
page 483).
Normal
The movement of one or several control points can be fixed in direction of the normal vector of the selected control point (see figure 273 on
page 483).
Offset
When moving a single control point, this option has the same effect as Normal.
When moving several control points, all control points concerned are moved in direction of their normal vector (see figure 272 on page 483).
Fix: Model, Plane, X, Y, Z/Depth

With the following options you may select the control points to be modified.
Single
Movement of a single control point.
Row
Movement of a control point row.
NOTE:
A control point row can only be selected at a reference patch.
All
Movement of all control points.
NOTE:
In case of a reference scan the bell-shaped function is set only in U direction.
Order: U, V
The order of the reference patch can be changed in U and V directions.
NOTE:
In case of a reference scan the order is set only in U direction.
Freeze, Undo
Modifications on the reference and the scan to be modified can be saved temporarily and undone.
Delta
When using the dynamic control point movement function Express, the movement radius of the control points is restricted to the specified
value.
Refine
The facets will be divided into smaller facets, if their edge length exceeds the value specified in the text field. Facet number and edge length
are adapted dynamically during modelling (see figure 180 on page 386).
Ref. Region
(Reference Region)
With this option, a temporary reference scan is created instead of a temporary reference patch via the Selection (Scan Region). This refer-
ence scan defines the region to be modified on the selected scan.
If a patch or scan has been selected as Reference before, this selection is cancelled.
Trim
This option is only available, if a patch or scan has been selected as Reference.
The reference geometry will be projected onto the scan in the specified direction (see options Projection Direction: X, Y, Z, Plane, View,
Vector, Normal). The modification region is trimmed exactly at the edges of the projected reference geometry. At the sharp bends created
this way the point number and facet shape will be adapted.
The effect of the different settings is shown in the following figures.
385
17
Figure 177 Projection of the reference surface
reference patch
projected
patch
Figure 178 Scan modification without trimming
Figure 179 Scan modification with trimming
Figure 180 Scan modification with trimming and refining
Translate
If this option is switched on, the scan will be moved also outside of the modification range when the edges of the reference geometry are mod-
ified.
Geometry
The reference patch can be modified without modelling the scan.
Region +
With the Selection (Scan Region), the region to be modified can be selected on the scan. The scan will exclusively be modified in this region.
386
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION
18
18 Curve segment creation
18.1 Curves in ICEM Surf

Curves consist of curve segments. The following curve types are distinguished:
Bezier curve segments
B-Spline and NURBS curve segments
Straight lines
Circles and arc segments
Recommendations for curves

Curves should be well shaped. Curves should not be wavelike.
Curves are usually defined in the form of scan data. A curve will be created from these original data by smoothing it. All control points of a
curve segment should lie on the same side of the segment.
The order should be as low as possible. At the beginning, use only 3 control points for a curve segment. A complex curve can be created from
curve segments with only three control points.
A curve can be created in one view and projected onto a surface in a way that a 3D curve will be generated.
A curve segment should not be S-shaped. If the original data has this shape, the segment ends must be lying on the inflection point. This
means that the S should be constructed using two curve segments, the location of the common segment end point being in the middle of the
S (inflection point).
A curve segment should begin when the curvature of the given data starts to increase dramatically.
The quality of the curve can be determined using the curvature diagnosis. If the quality is not acceptable, it can be improved by dynamically
modifying the control points.
18.1.2 Bezier curve segments

A (multi-segment) Bezier curve consists of one or several single-segment Bezier curves, which are referred to as Bezier curve segments within
ICEM Surf. They are always described with a parameterisation using control points without weights on the parameter interval [0,1].
A curve segment is defined by a Bezier polygon. The Bezier polygon connects the control points (Bezier points) whose positions control and indi-
rectly allow to judge the curve shape.
The number of control points is called the order of the Bezier curve segment. The order may have values between 2 and 16, which corresponds
to a polynom degree between a and 15.
Figure 181 Bezier curve segment
Bezier polygon
curve segment
of order 5
control points
You can model a Bezier curve segment by moving control points or by moving curve points. This always modifies the whole segment.
The number of control points, i. e. the order, is essential for the approximation quality. To match a Bezier curve segment with a certain continuity
to a neighboured segment, it is also necessary, to have enough degrees of freedom in terms of control points, especially if a segment is to be
simultaneously matched at both ends. Segments which are created with a too high order may have undesired waving and unsuitably positioned
control points. Thus, it can always be recommended to work with an order as low as possible. Usually the order is between 4 and 7.
18.1.3 B-Spline and NURBS curve segments

In ICEM Surf there is a distinction of B-spline curve segments (curves having control points without weights) and NURBS curve segments (curves
having control points with weights). In contrast with the single-segment Bzier curve segments these curve segments usually have several seg-
ments and a comparably low polynom degree. A B-spline or NURBS curve segment is described by a de Boor polygon. This polygon connects
the control points (de Boor points) whose positions control and indirectly allow to judge the curve shape.
387
STRAIGHT LINES
18
Figure 182 NURBS/B-Spline curve segment
curve segment of order 4

de Boor polygon
with 3 inner segments
inner segment boundaries

control points influencing only one segment
control points influencing several segments
NURBS curve segments have a parameterisation using control points with weights. This especially provides the opportunity to exactly describe
arc segments. With Bezier curve segments that have a parameterisation using control points without weights it is not possible to exactly describe
arcs.
You can model a B-spline or NURBS curve segment by moving control points. This modifies only inner segments of the curve segment.
In the handling of B-spline curves the segment boundaries are quite frequently used as degrees of freedom for the approximation of curve shapes
and to provide certain continuous matching transitions. Other systems often create segments which are subdivided into many very small seg-
ments. Such a mathematical description results in a rather large amount of data and these data cannot be further edited very easily. The segment
boundaries of the B-spline or NURBS curve segments are only displayed, if Segment is switched on in the display menu.
Table 27 Comparison of NURBS and Bezier curves
Bezier- Curve Segment Bezier Curve NURBS/B-Spline Curve Seg-

ment
general only one segment complex curve shapes possible only one segment
advantages
easy usage optimum number of control complex curve shapes possible
points possible for each curve
small amount of data segment exact description of arcs/circles
possible
easy usage
the quality of the segment transi-
tions can be explicitly determined
general dis- limited flexibility several segments common order for all segments
advantages
tendency towards waviness of the segment boundaries will not large amount of data when there
high order objects be automatically preserved dur- are many segments, thus difficult
ing modifications usage
tendency towards waviness of tendency towards waviness of

high order objects high order objects or objects with
many segments
means of control points or curve points control points or curve points control points
control in (always a modification of the (modification of a single segment (always a modification of seg-
ICEM Surf whole segment/curve) or several segments) ments instead of the whole curve)
or curve points (always modifica-
tion of all segments)
NOTE:
Generally, the order of a B-spline or NURBS curve segment is lower than the number of control points. If the order is equal to the number of
control points, the B-spline or NURBS curve is single-segment. Single-segment B-Spline curve segments can be converted to Bezier curve
segments.
If you split multi-segment B-Spline curves you get one Bezier curve segment per segment. A multi-segment B-Spline curve segment can
also be converted approximatively into one Bezier curve segment.
18.1.4 Straight lines

A straight line corresponds to a Bezier curve segment with an order of 2. The control points are both end points.
Several design and modification methods are available (see sections 18.8 Curve segment creation Line on page 398 and 19.6 Curve seg-
ment modification Line on page 414).
18.1.5 Circles and arc segments

Circles and arc segments are not defined by control points, but the following definition parameters are used:
centre point coordinates,
radius,
388
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION BY 2 POINTS
18
begin and end angle measured in a local coordinate system.
Figure 183 Arc segment
end angle
begin angle
radius
centre point
For circles and arcs there are also several design and modification methods available (see sections 18.9 Curve segment creation Circle and
Arc on page 400 and 19.7 Curve segment modification Circle and Arc on page 416).
For several functions in ICEM Surf, a circle or arc has to be converted into a Bezier curve segment. The definition parameters will be deleted. Two
possibilities are offered for this conversion:
approximative conversion:
Using this method, Bezier curve segments with the order 7 are created.
The approximative method is used by default in several modelling functions. The approximation quality depends on the size of the arc: the
smaller the arc, the more exact the approximation.
mathematically exact conversion:
Using this method, NURBS curve segments are created.
18.2 Curve segment creation By 2 Points

A curve segment is created between two points by linear interpolation.
The menu 2 Points
Select
The two points to be connected can be selected. The selection order defines the parameter direction of the curve segment.
The function remains active after its execution, so that you can select further points without having to reactivate the selection.
Modify
Via this button, the function Curve segment modification Control Point will be activated (see page 407).
Polygon
The end point of the first curve forms the beginning point of the second one. The next end point can be selected etc. Thus, polygons can be
created.
Order
The order of the created curve segment can be modified.
18.3 Curve segment creation Iso-Curve

Using this function, iso-lines of surfaces can be created as curve segments. After selection of the patch/face, a point is to be picked. If this point is
not located on the patch/face, it will be projected on it. At the position of this surface point, the two iso-lines can then be displayed alternately and
created. You may also generate multiple iso-lines with a defined distance from each other.
389
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION ISO-CURVE
18
Figure 184 Curve creation on isolines
The menu Iso-Curve
Select
Graphical
This option is only available if Multiple is switched off.
Via the button Graphical, a point can be selected at which the two potential iso-lines will be displayed. The point will be projected onto the
surface in the direction of the shortest distance, if required.
You may use the button to:
reselect the point if a curve has not yet been created with OK, or
select an additional point if a curve has already been created before (see button OK).
Multiple
OFF
Only a single curve may be created. This curve is located on one of the two iso-lines which has been selected by the picked point.
ON
The determined number of curves will be created on the surface with the specified parametrical distance from each other.
Count
If several curves shall be created (option Multiple active), their number can be specified.
Distance
If several curves shall be created (option Multiple active), the parametrical distance between them can be determined.
Distance = 0.0:
The iso-lines are distributed along the surface with equidistant parameter distances.
Distance > 0.0:
The specified value represents the parameter distance of the iso-lines. In this case, the selection position defines at which side the gener-
ation of the iso-lines shall start.
If you want to create several curves with a distance from each other which depends on the arc length of a patch/face edge, you have to gen-
erate the curves separately one after the other.
Use the option Graphical for this. Activate the button Arc Length in the window Selection (Position) and enter the desired value (see section
4.3 Position selection on page 58). Select the patch/face edge afterwards.
Gap
If a curve has been created on an iso-line, this iso-line can be continued on a neighboured patch/face, and a further curve can be created on
this patch/face (see button OK).
The value Gap specifies the maximum admissible distance between two sequenced iso-lines.
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
Minimum order of the curve to be created. If it is smaller than the order of the patch/face on which the curve will be generated, the order of
that patch/face will be adopted.
OK
The curve segment is created on the current iso-line. The patch/face remains selected. You can now
select a new patch/face on which the iso-line shall be continued, if possible, and a new curve will be created. This functionality is also
available for the creation of multiple curves (see option Multiple).
390
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION STYLING CORNER
18
select a further point via the button Graphical at which the iso-lines shall be generated.
18.4 Curve segment creation Styling Corner

This function allows to create a fillet curve which is computed between two existing curves with the specified radius.
After selection of the initial curves and confirming with OK the preview of the fillet curve is displayed in the graphics area. The fillet curve can be
modelled with the point symbols. With the icon in the window footer, the symbols can be blanked and unblanked.
With the right mouse button can be activated the context menus Acc Point (Accumulating Point) and Mean Point (for curve type Shape). For the
description of the context menu options please refer to the section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41.
Figure 185 Styling Corner
point symbol
Styling Corner mean point
(Centre Radius manipulation)
point symbols lead-in points

(Radius manipulation)
Curve Type
The curve type defines which criteria to choose as input for the fillet curve creation.
Depending on the curve type set, different options for the radius parameter definition are displayed in the window Styling Corner.
Arc
Circular arcs are created with a defined radius, the arc radius. The arc radius determines the position of the accumulating points of the styling
corner.
If the curve tangent vectors of the original curves at the ends of the arc are located in the same plane, tangent continuous transitions are real-
ized.
The radius is valid for the whole curve, the arc cannot be modified.
391
18
Figure 186 Circular arc as Styling Corner
Lead-in Point 1
arc radius
Lead-in Point 2
The following parameters can be specified:

Radius
The lead-in points of the styling corner into the selected curves are defined by the radius.
You can modify the radius either by entering another value in the text field or using the manipulators in the graphics area.
Blend
The result is a Bezier curve with tangent, curvature, or torsion continuity at the lead-in points.
For curvature continuity a Lead-in R 1/2 can be specified. The Styling Corner has a fix shape, the radius defines also the Centre Radius.
Radius
See curve type Circle.
Transition 1/2: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G
A Bezier curve with specified transition quality at the lead-in points will be created. The lead-in points are defined by the radius.
Lead-in R 1/2
(Lead-in Radius)
Only available for transition quality Curvature.
The lead-in radius can be modified. However, the curvature continuity at the transitions possibly may no longer be kept.
Order
Definition of the minimum order of the Styling Corner.
Shape
The result is a Bezier curve with tangent, curvature, or torsion continuity at the lead-in points.
For curvature continuity a Lead-in R 1/2 can be specified.
The Styling Corner has a variable shape, controllable via the Centre Radius or the symbols in the graphics area.
392
18
Figure 187 Shape Styling Corner with Centre Radius and Lead-in Radius
Lead-in Radius 1
Radius Lead-in Radius 2
Centre Radius

Radius
See curve type Circle.
Transition 1/2: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G
See curve type Blend.
Lead-in R 1/2
See curve type Blend.
Centre Radius
Only available for Tangent continuity and higher.
In case of an accumulating arc with tangent or curvature continuous transition to the original curves at the accumulating points the radius
in the middle of the fillet curve can be specified. The transition quality will be preserved.
Form Factor
Only available for Tangent continuity and higher.
The tangent length of the fillet curves is modified. The transitions to the original curves remain unchanged. Values smaller than 1 create
flat fillets, values higher than 1 steep fillets. An extreme form factor can create a loop.
Order
Definition of the minimum order of the Styling Corner.
Select
The selection will be reactivated. The original curves can be selected at an arbitrary point.
Curve 1, Curve 2
The two curves may be selected separately.
You can also select a single closed curve for the Styling Corner creation.
If several solutions are possible, the computed solution depends on the selection points on the curves or the selection point on the single
curve.
The Styling Corner is created in the quadrant with the smallest parameter distance of the Styling Corner end points to the selection points.
Surface
A surface can be selected as support. The result will be projected in normal direction onto this surface.
Limitation: Trim 1/2

Curve 1, Curve 2 can be trimmed at the corresponding end point of the created Styling Corner.
For trim operations, you can use in addition the following options:
Duplicate
The original curves will be duplicated before executing the trim operation.
Concatenate
Only available for fillet types Blend and Shape.
One multi-segment B-Spline curve results instead of several Bezier curve segments.
The original curves are preserved.
The following Diagnosis options are available in the windows footer:
393
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION BLEND (CONNECTING CURVE)
18
Diagnosis Surface
If an underlying Surface has been selected, the display of the deviation between the created curve and the underlying surface can be dis-
played in the function window as well as in the graphics area.
Check Min Radius

(Check Minimum Radius)
Checks the radius along the fillet curve. Areas in which the radius is not kept are displayed in red and areas keeping the radius are displayed
in green. The diagnosis is updated dynamically when modifying the curve using the point symbols.
18.5 Curve segment creation Blend (connecting curve)

This function generates a blend curve between two end points. You can select any geometry element for the end point, even face edges, for
example, or a position in the inner of a patch or face. The blend curve is created between the pick positions, It can be connected to the adjacent
elements with position, tangent, curvature, or torsion continuity.
If a point was selected on a patch, this point can be moved along the iso-lines.
Figure 188 Blend curve
End Point 1
End Point 2
With the vector symbols that are displayed at a tangent or curvature continuous matching, the tangent directions at the curve ends can be
inverted. By moving the control points along the tangent, as well as with the parameter Shape 1, Shape 2 you can modify the shape of the blend
curve.
Context menus for manipulating the point position Point 1 and Point 2 can be activated at the point symbols with the right mouse button.
394
18
The menu Blend
Select
A new selection of the two curve end points can be carried out between which the blend curve is to be generated.
End Point 1, End Point 2

The two end points can be selected separately.
If a position inside a surface is selected as curve end point and the blend curve is created for the first time, the system tries to automatically
align the tangents for the blend curve creation correctly.
Transition: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

The transition quality between blend and adjacent curve can be set for each end point. See also the description of the Transition Quality:
Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G, page 409.
Extrapol
(Extrapolate)
If this option is switched on, the blend end points are moved on an extrapolation of the adjacent curves.
Adopt
The tangent and curvature continuity can be adopted from any other curve. The position is adopted from the adjacent curve in either case. In
the case of a matching between End Point 1 and End Point 2 where a clear direction is not determined, you can define a direction via this
check button.
OFF
Position, tangent, or curvature are, according to the setting, adopted from the adjacent curve.
ON
For defining the tangent and curvature continuity, another curve can be selected. The tangent resp. curvature at the selected end of that
curve will then be assigned to the blend curve.
Free
The end points of the blend curve can be moved independent of the underlying geometry and freely in all three model coordinate directions.
Trim
When using Par 1, Par 2, the original curves will be trimmed at the end points of the connecting curve.
Duplicate
The original curves will be duplicated before trimming.
Order
The order of the blend curve can be set. The minimum order is defined by the specified transition quality at the beginning + the transition qual-
ity at the end, calculating 1 for Position, 2 for Tangent, and 3 for Curvature. Example: If at the beginning Position is set and Tangent at the
end, the minimum order will be 1 + 2 = 3.
TIP:
The order can also be entered directly via keyboard shortcuts (for this see section How to change the order on page 698 in Tips
and tricks).
Keep Shape
Free control points, i. e. control points not needed for the transition conditions, are recomputed and can be fixed in their position. The following
options are available to keep the curves shape when modifying control points:
Keep Shape Off: Free control points are re-computed and jump back.
Keep Shape On
Fix Free Off: Free control points of the modified blend curve are moved according to the current shape. They are moved by the
same value and in the same direction like those of the original blend curve. Order and shape of the modified blend curve are kept.
395
18
Fix Free On and Opp. Off: Free control points remain fix in their position and do not move.
Fix Free On and Opp. On: The control points opposite to the modified side are fixed. The Shape and Ratio values are re-com-
puted. The Couple options must be switched off.
The blend curve can be defined by the sliders. Three text fields belong to each slider. In the last text field the corresponding value can be entered
numerically. The values indicated in the fields before and directly behind the sliders are stretch factors determining the extrapolation limits in the
respective direction. If an extrapolation is not possible in one direction, no value can be entered into the corresponding text field.
Par 1, Par 2
(Parameter 1, Parameter 2)
A point on the adjacent curve with the parameter value specified here will be used as connection point of the blend curve.
After computation these values, the end points of the blend curve are lying at the pick positions. The sliders or the point symbols in the graph-
ics area can be used to move the end points of the blend curve along the adjacent curves, so that the blend curve will be extrapolated (see
figure below).
Figure 189 Extrapolation of the blend curve
a) blend curve after computation
b) extrapolated blend curve via Par 2

If the end points of the blend curve are moved beyond the end points of the adjacent curves, they follow an extrapolation of the adjacent
curves.
If a point was selected on a patch, this point can be moved along the iso-lines. The current direction U or V is displayed here.
The direction for moving a patch point along iso-lines can be switched from U to V, or vice versa
Offset 1, Offset 2
These options are only available if the Trim check buttons are switched on. If the curves are not trimmed, the sliders will have no effect.
With these sliders, the last control point of the input curves will be moved in normal direction thus adopting the course of curvature at the ends
of the original curves to the curvature trend of the blend curve (tension).
TIP:
These options are useful for treating apparently flat spots in the area of the end of the initial curves (see section 29.5 How to deal
with apparently flat spots after Blend creation on page 704.
Deviation
This option can be switched on after activating the Save button.
With this checkbutton, the deviation between the current blend curve and the stored variant can be displayed in the graphics. Moreover, if
input curves were modified, the deviation between that modified curves and the original curves will be shown.
TIP:
This option is useful for treating apparently flat spots in the area of the end of the initial curves (see section 29.5 How to deal with
apparently flat spots after Blend creation on page 704.
Shape 1, Shape 2
Using these sliders, the shape of the created blend curve can be modified dynamically at both ends. These options are only available if at
least Tangent is specified for the respective end point.
Ratio 1, Ratio 2
These cursors allow you to control the lengths of the control lines and sides of the control point polygon.
Couple
The sliders for Par 1/2 Shape 1/2, and Ratio 1/2 can be coupled.
The display of the 3D symbols in the graphics area can be switched on and off.
396
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION INTERSECTION POINT
18
Continue
This button is only available if a blend curve has already been created, and can then be re-activated at any time.
Using the button Continue the blend curve can dynamically be modified via the inner control points retaining the existing quality of transition.
Save
With this button, the mathematically exact result can now be saved as reference. Any further modification state of blend curve can be stored
as new reference.
NOTE:
The stored blend curve is always the trimmed version of the blend curve (3 segments).
TIP:
This option is useful for treating apparently flat spots in the area of the end of the initial curves (see section 29.5 How to deal with
apparently flat spots after Blend creation on page 704.
The context menus for the point position

Apart from general options (see section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41), the following options are additionally available
for creating a blend curve:
Direction
The direction for moving a patch point along iso-lines can be defined: both directions U, V, or one direction U or V.
18.6 Curve segment creation Intersection Point

This function can be used to create an intersection point of two geometry objects.
The menu Intersection Point
Select
The intersection point closest to the selection position is calculated and created on the object selected first.
If you do not select a reference object, the object will be intersected with the work plane.
Object, Reference
Object and reference object can be reselected.
Plane
The intersection point will be calculated at the position where object and reference intersect each other in a specified direction.
OFF
The direction corresponds to the view plane normal. The option should be switched off if a linear entity intersects the work plane, a face,
or a patch.
ON
The direction corresponds to the work plane normal. The option Plane is useful if two linear entities are selected that have no real inter-
section point.
18.7 Curve segment creation Design Points

Point sets consist of single points. Points and point sets are especially used as reference data for other functions or for direct design. Point sets
are not structured, they cannot be meshed. To shade a surface which is described by a point set, you have to convert this point set to a scan.
Design points can be created at any position resp. on raw data, curves or edges using this function. Points on objects can be created:
by the generation of planes around a rotation axis or along a coordinate axis and intersection of these planes with the objects,
or depending on the arc length.
The area in which points shall be created is restricted by the specification of a begin and end point.
397
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION LINE
18
The menu Design Points
Select
Object, Begin Point, End Point

The geometry objects as well as begin and end point can be reselected.
Method of point creation

Fan
Starting at the origin of the local coordinate system, planes are generated like a fan by rotation about x, y or z. For this, either the Angle
or the number (Count) of planes, which shall be created between begin and end point, can be specified. Points are created at the posi-
tions where the planes intersect the selected objects.
Increment
Along the x, y or z axis of the local coordinate system, parallel planes are generated whose normal corresponds to the choosen direction.
For this, either the number (Count) or the Distance of the planes which shall be created between begin and end point, can be specified.
Points are created at the positions where the planes intersect the selected objects.
Arc Length
Depending on the arc length, points are regularly distributed along the selected raw data, curves or edges. For this, either the number
(Count) or the Distance of the points can be specified.
Point
Points can be created at any position. For this, the menu Selection (Position) will be activated. No additional options are available for this
method of point creation.
Angle
Specification of the angle for the planes to be created with the option Fan.
Count
Specification of the number of planes to be generated with the options Fan and Increment resp. of points to be created with the option Arc
Length.
Distance
Specification of the distance between the points for the options Increment and Arc Length.
Plane: X, Y, Depth
Definition of the local coordinate axis for generating the planes for the options Fan and Increment.
18.8 Curve segment creation Line

Several different methods are available for the generation of straight lines. Lines can be used for profile curves, or as starting point for more com-
plex curve shapes.
The menu Line
Alternative
If there are several solutions for the execution of a function, they can be displayed alternately via this button. The last selected alternative will
be taken as first alternative for the next line generation.
398
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION LINE
18
Plane X-Axis
Starting at a point to be selected, a straight line is created parallel to the x-axis of the work plane. The function remains active after it has been
executed, in a way that further lines may be created.
Alternatives:
line with the specified length,
line with the specified length in the opposite direction,
line across the whole graphics area, and
line with half the specified length each in the indicated and opposite directions.
Plane Y-Axis
Starting at a point to be selected, a straight line is created parallel to the y-axis of the work plane. The function remains active after it has been
executed, in a way that further lines may be created.
Alternatives: see Plane X-Axis.
Point + Vector
Via the Vector selection (see also page 60), an attachment point and a vector have to be specified to define the straight line. The function
remains active after it has been executed, in a way that further lines may be created.
Alternatives: see Plane X-Axis.
Tangent Vector
A vector must be defined which corresponds to the desired direction of the line. A curve is to be selected afterwards. The program computes
the next point in which the direction of the defined vector coincides with the tangent direction of the curve. The line with the specified length
will begin in that point.
Parallel
A straight line is created as a parallel

to the normal in a patch point, or
to the tangent in a curve point.
The normal or tangent is moved parallel to the work plane by the indicated distance. Generally, the length of the straight line is defined by the
specified value. However, if you have selected a line as reference object, its length will be adopted.
Point + Perpendicular
First, a point is to be selected as beginning of the straight line. Afterwards, select an object on which the perpendicular shall be dropped from
that point to create the straight line.
Normal
A line is created as normal in a patch or face point. If the selected point is not lying on the surface, it will be projected onto it. The line length
is to be specified.
Point + Tangent
First, a point is to be selected as beginning of the straight line. Afterwards, select a curve on which the tangent shall be generated to
create the straight line.
Tangent
A line will be created as tangent in a curve point. If the selected point is not lying on the curve, it will be projected onto it. The line length is to
be specified.
399
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION CIRCLE AND ARC
18
2 Curves
A straight line will be created as tangent on two curves.
Distance
For the function Parallel, the distance between the straight line to be created and the reference object can be specified.
Length
For some functions you must specify the length of the line to be generated. In the other cases, the length will be computed and displayed in
this field.
Modify
Via this button, the function Curve segment modification Line will be activated (see page 414).
18.9 Curve segment creation Circle and Arc

Different methods are available for the creation of circles and arcs. Arcs can be used e. g. for profile curves or as starting point for more complex
curve shapes.
The menu Circle
If there are several solutions for the execution of a function, they can be displayed via the button Alternative.
Centre Point + Radius
The circle is defined by a point and the specified radius.
2 Points + Radius
Two points are projected into the current work plane, where the arc with the determined radius will be created between them.
3 Points
By selecting three points, an arc will be created in the plane which is defined by these points.
2 Points
Two selected points are projected into the work plane. Their connecting line corresponds to the diameter of the created circle.
Centre Point + Curve
A circle is created tangentially at a curve. Its radius corresponds to the minimum distance between the selected centre point and the curve.
You may also select a point instead of a curve. In this case, the circle will be created in the current work plane.
2 Lines + Radius
Two lines to be selected are tangents of the arc to be created. The radius has to be determined.
If the two lines intersect each other, the arc will be created in the plane defined by the lines. If the lines do not intersect each other, they are
projected into the work plane where the arc will be created.
If you have selected curves instead of straight lines, the tangents in the selected curve points will be used (see figure below).
400
18
Figure 190 Circle creation using the radius and two straight lines
g1
t1=
P1
twisted
lines
P2
t2
=
g
2 patch
Ps
r
X work plane
Y
The lines g1 and g2 are the curve tangent vectors t1 and t2 in the
selected patch edge points P1 and P2. They are projected into the
current work plane where they are intersecting in the point PS.
The function remains active after its execution, thus allowing you to select a further line. This line and the last selected one are defining the
next arc taking the same radius. In this way, e. g. polygon lines can easily be filleted (see figure below).
Figure 191 Filleting a polygon line
3 Lines
The creation of a circle from three lines is generally identical to the circle creation from two lines (see function 2 Lines + Radius). The radius
arises from the selection of the geometry.
The solution displayed first after the function execution is influenced by the position at which the lines have been selected (see figure below).
Further variants will be presented via the button Alternative.
Figure 192 Variants of the circle/arc creation from three lines
selection positions
tangent touching points
401
18
Point + Tangent
Starting from a point P1 to be selected, an arc will be created which tangentially runs into the selected curve in the point P2 (see figure below).
The radius is to be determined.
Figure 193 Arc creation using tangent vector and point
curve segment
P2
P1
2 Curves
A circle is created tangentially to two curves.
3 Circles
A circle is created tangentially to three circles or arcs, which have to be located in the same plane.
2 Curves + Radius
An arc with the specified radius is created tangentially to two curves.
2 Lines + Point
The creation of a circle from two lines and a point is generally identical to the circle creation from two lines (see function 2 Lines + Radius).
The selection position on the first line specifies the radius.
Centre Point + Point
The circle will be defined by the selection of two points. The first point represents the centre point and determines the circle plane as parallel
plane to the work plane. The second point is projected into the circle plane and defines the radius.
3 Curves
A circle is created tangentially to three arbitrary curves. The radius arises from the selection of the geometry.
Tangent + Perpendicular
An arc is created that emanates tangentially from a curve and terminates perpendicularly on a second curve.
402
CURVE SEGMENT CREATION CONIC
18
Figure 194 Arc creation using tangent and perpendicular
Arc tangential to the end

point (a) of a curve (1) and
perpendicular to a second
curve (2).
Required input:
End Point of Curve 1
Curve 2
Radius
The specification of a radius is required for some functions. In the other cases, the radius is computed and displayed in this field.
Angle
The segment angle is displayed.
Modify
The function Curve segment modification Circle and Arc will be activated (see page 416).
18.10 Curve segment creation Conic

With this function, NURBS curve segments with the shape of ellipses and hyperbolas are created.
A conic section is a curve which is created if the surface of a cone is intersected by a plane. Different figures can be created this way, a. o. ellipses
and hyperbolas.
Figure 195 Conic sections
Ellipse Hyperbola
An Ellipse is created, if the angle between axis and plane is larger than the cone angle.
A Hyperbola is created, if the angle between axis and plane is smaller than the cone angle.
The menu Conic

The options in this menu offer different methods to create conic sections. In addition, before terminating the function, the parameters can be mod-
ified via the text fields and sliders in the menu or in the graphics area by manipulating the vector symbols.
403
18
IMPORTANT!
The points and tangent vectors selected for the creation of conic section must lie in a plane.
2 Tangents + Point
Two vectors to be defined are the tangents in the start and end point of the conic section segment to be created. An additional point has to be
selected between the tangents, which defines the conic section course.
tangent vector 2
Point
tangent tangent
vector 1 vector 2 Point
tangent vector 1
Ellipse Hyperbola
5 Points
By selecting 5 points, a conic section will be created in the plane which is defined by these points. The points should be positioned in a way
that their connecting line approximately has the shape of the conic section to be created, as otherwise it cannot be computed.
Ellipse Hyperbola
Centre Point + 2 Points
The conic section is created as follows:

Ellipse
An ellipse is defined by selecting the centre point and the start and end point.
End
Centre Point
Begin
404
18
Hyperbola
A hyperbola is defined by selecting the intersection point of the axes and the start and end point. The start point is the vertex of the hyper-
bola.
End
Begin = vertex
intersection point
of the axes
3 Points
The conic section is created by three points as follows:

Ellipse
An ellipse is created with an angle of 180. The two points with the largest distance to each other (Point 1 and 3 in the figure below) are
start and end point of the curve and define one axis (Axis 1). Another point (Point 2) defines the second axis. It only lies on the resulting
curve, if it is positioned on the mid normal of the first axis.
Axis 2
Point 2
Axis 1
Point 1 (Begin) Angle = 180 Point 3 (End)
Hyperbola
The first and third point define the direction of one axis, the second point the vertex of the hyperbola. The second point only lies on the
resulting curve, if it lies on the mid normal to the straight line through Point 1 and 3.
Point 3 (End)
Point 2
Point 1 (Begin)
Conic section type

Ellipse
Creation of an ellipse.
Hyperbola
Creation of an hyperbola.
Fix: Begin, End

These radio buttons allow to specify whether modifications with the options Angle and Parameter shall be carried out at the beginning or end
of created the conic segment.
Parameters
The following options allow to modify the parameters of the created conic section:
Conic section type Ellipse
405
18
Axis 1, Axis 2
Setting the length of the horizontal and vertical axes.
Angle
Setting the start and end angle of the ellipse.
Conic section type Hyperbola
Parameter - <> +
The hyperbola parameter can be extended or reduced at the start and end points.
NOTE:
To guarantee a useful result, the range of values which can be set with the slider is restricted. However, a modification beyond
this range of values is possible by manipulating the vector symbols in the graphics area.
406
CURVE SEGMENT MODIFICATION
19
19 Curve segment modification

For general information on curves, please refer to section 18.1 Curves in ICEM Surf on page 387.
19.2 Curve segment modification Point

The curve is directly modified by moving a curve point. This method allows strong changes of the curve shape. In general, more than one control
point will be modified (see figure 142 on page 347).
As the point modification functions are identical for curve segments and curves, the following description is valid for both object types.
The menu Curve Point

For the description of these options please refer to 13 Point and control point modification on page 347.
Tangent
The tangent at the segment ends will be fixed.
Curvature
The curvature at the segment ends will be fixed.
NOTE:
With the options Tangent and Curvature the transition quality can only be kept if the order is high enough.
For a discrete point modification with the options Point and Delta Vector the options Tangent and Curvature cannot be activated, as
in these cases it is not possible to keep the transition quality.

Order
The order of the curve segment or curve can be modified.
TIP:
and tricks).
19.3 Curve segment modification Control Point

With this function the curve segment is indirectly modified by moving control points. The modification of the curve shape will be smaller than a
point modification (see figure 142 on page 347). This allows a considerably more precise modelling of a curve.
The menu Control Point

407
CURVE SEGMENT MODIFICATION MATCHING
19
Check button Delta

When using the dynamic control point movement function Express, the movement radius of the control points is restricted to the specified
value.
Tangent
Curvature
NOTE:
If the segment end to be fixed is ambiguous, the fixing conditions can be valid at both ends. In this case, the selection position is deciding:
If the Tangent is fixed, the middle control point of a curve segment with the order 3 is moved along the tangent on the selected side of the
control point.
If the Curvature is fixed, the middle control point of a curve segment with the order 5 is moved parallel to the tangent on the selected side
of the control point.
With the following options (Projection, Edge and Diagnosis) you can modify 3D curves on surfaces.

Order
The order of the curve segment can be modified.
TIP:
and tricks).
Projection
The selected curve segment can be projected in view direction onto a patch or surface to be selected. The order of the curve segment will be
preserved.
Edge
The curve control points to be modified can only be moved within the patch or surface boundaries.
Diagnosis
Display of the deviation of the curve segment from the patch or surface.
19.4 Curve segment modification Matching

Two curve segments can be connected with a position, tangent, or curvature continuous transition. For this operation, the curve to be connected
will be modified. The reference curve, however, remains unchanged (see figure below).
When carrying out the function first the curve to be connected has to be selected. The system automatically searches for a reference lying within
a certain distance to the curve to be connected, giving priority to curves, edges, and end points over corner points.
Figure 196 Matching of a curve to a reference curve
reference curve
curve to be
matched
modified
curve
408
MATCHING
19
19.4.1 Matching
Select
Transition Quality: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

The matching can be realized keeping position, tangent, curvature, or torsion continuity.
NOTE:
The order of the curves should be larger than 2 for the transition quality Tangent and larger than 3 for Curvature.
The different matching types shall be explained with two curves. However, this is generally also valid for patches.
If you number the control points of the curves with 1, 2, and 3 beginning at the end to be connected, you will see which control points are deci-
sive for the different matching types.
Position continuous transition
For a position continuous transition, the first control point will be moved until it meets the end of the reference curve. The gap is now
closed. However, there is still a sharp bend.
Figure 197 Position continuous transition
2 2
2 1 1 3
2 1
3
3 3
reference connecting
curve curve
Tangent continuous transition

For a tangent continuous transition, the second control point must also be modified.
The control points 1 and 2 are joined by a line showing the direction of the tangent in the curve end point. If the curve is matched tangent
continuously, the control points 1 and 2 of both curves are lying on one line.
In case of a control point modification, tangent continuity will be preserved if the second control point is only moved on this line.
Figure 198 Tangent continuous transition
2 1 2 2 1 2
3
3
3 3
Curvature continuous transition

If you carry out a curvature diagnosis over the two curves (see function Shape Diagnoses Curvature, page 237), you will see a curva-
ture discontinuity. This discontinuity is caused by different radii at the curve ends. A transition is curvature continuous, if the radii at the
connected curve ends are equal.
The curvature is controlled by the third control point. In case of a control point modification, curvature continuity will be preserved if the
third control point is moved only parallel to the tangent. In this case, only the course of the curvature is modified.
409
MATCHING
19
Figure 199 Curvature continuous transition
curvature discontinuity
1 2 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3
3 3 3 3 3
tangent continuous transition curvature continuous transition curvature continuous transition with
modified curvature shape
Torsion Continuous Transition (Torsion/G)

With this option, a curvature continuous matching with a continuous course of the curvature will be created. This effect is shown by the
course of the curvature grid displayed in the curvature diagnosis.
Figure 200 Curvature continuous transition with continuous curvature course
Matching with transition Matching with transition

quality Curvature quality Torsion/G
Connecting End
Select the curve segment to be matched near the end point. For the connecting curve the following conditions can be set:
Fix Match
(Fix Matching)
According to the transition quality set, the first (Position), the first two (Tangent), the first three (Curvature), or the first four (Torsion/G)
control points will be fixed at the end opposite to the connecting end. This way, e. g. when using the option Blend, the transition quality to
a curve connected at the other end will be preserved (see figure below c)).
Express
The control points of the connecting curve can be modified.
Blend, Without Blend/With Blend
To get a regular control point distribution or to maintain the control point distribution, not only the control points required for alignment are
modified, but the whole control point polygon. The blend can also be controlled via the slider With Blend/Without Blend.
If the option Both is switched on, the control points of the reference curve will also be modified.
NOTE:
If the options Fix Match are switched off, the transition quality will eventually not be kept at the opposite end of curves with low
order (see figure below b)).
410
MATCHING
19
Figure 201 Curve matching with the options Blend and Fix Match
a) curve to be connected
reference curve
curve connected
at opposite end
tangent continuous connection at tangent continuous connection

opposite end Blend and Fix Match Off
b)
transition quality is tangent continuous connection

not kept Blend On and Fix Match Off
c)
transition quality is kept tangent continuous connection

Blend and Fix Match On
Reference
The selection of the reference object will be reactivated. You may either select exactly the end point, or for a matching into the interior of the
curve or surface any position on the curve or surface.
For the reference curve the following conditions can be set:
Fix Match
(Fix Matching)
Only available, if Both is active.
According to the transition quality set, the control points at the end of the reference curve opposite to the connecting end will be fixed.
Linear
The option Linear is only available for connections into the interior of surfaces. This matching type can be compared with a matching into
the interior of a curve.
Depending on the transition quality set, the first two (Tangent), three (Curvature), or four(Torsion/G) control points will be aligned at an
iso-curve of the reference surface. In case of the transition quality Position this option has no effect. Which iso-curve will be used for
matching depends on the direction of the tangent of the connecting curve.
Both
In addition to the connecting curve also the reference curve will be modified. If Both is active, no matching to the interior of the reference
curve can be computed. If a matching position was selected in the interior, the connecting curve will be connected to the end of the refer-
ence curve lying next to the selected position.
Projection
The end point of the curve to be connected is projected in normal direction onto the reference curve.
Swap Sides
Connecting End and Reference are swapped.

The position, tangent, and curvature deviation diagnosis is displayed.
411
PARAMETER
19
Order
The order of the curve segment to be connected can be modified.
TIP:
and tricks).
Deviation
Displays the deviation between original curve and modified curve in the graphics area.
Auto
This option is only available if the option Projection is switched on.
With this option, the matching can automatically be re-executed after each dynamic control point modification.
Check
If the check button is switched on, the transition types are calculated automatically and modified, if required.
If the check button is switched off, the existing parameter settings are taken over for the next curve matching.
With the button Check the calculation of the matching types is activated manually.
Undo, Redo
This slider allows a continuous transition between original and modified geometry.
19.4.2 Parameter
Rigid
The fixed matching quality of the opposite curve end can be controlled while matching.
Tolerances: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

For the automatic calculation of the transition types with Check, the maximum admissible values for position, tangent, curvature, and torsion
deviations can be specified in the text fields.
Reference
If this option is switched on, as reference curve is first used the curve lying within the position and tangent tolerance specified in the text fields.
If within the tolerances specified several references are found, a selection list with the references sorted by tangent deviation is activated.
If no reference is found within the tolerances, the element with the smallest tangent deviation will be selected.
For the automatic reference selection only elements visible in the graphics area are considered.
19.5 Curve segment modification Trim

A curve or raw data segment will be trimmed at the intersection point (trim point) with another object (limitation). For that, the intersection point
next to the selection position will be calculated. If no intersection point exists, the curve or raw data segment will be extrapolated up to the inter-
section point.
The intersection points may also be computed directly on the curve. For this, the number of segments can be determined. In addition, you may
specify whether the curve shall be segmented depending on the arc length, the parameter value or the curvature. The trim operation is carried out
at the points thus created.
The following geometry objects can be selected as limitation:
Surfaces, patches and faces: The intersection point will be calculated.
Curves, raw data contours, and diagnosis lines: The intersection point will be created where the curves intersect each other in view direc-
tion. This direction can be specified.
Point: If a point is selected as limitation object, it will be projected onto the curve, and the trim operation will be carried out.
Current work plane: The intersection point with the plane is calculated. If the curve is split into multiple parts by the plane, the part next to the
selection position is kept, the other parts are cut off.
412
CURVE SEGMENT MODIFICATION TRIM
19
Figure 202 Calculation of the trim point for different limitations
intersection point
point
patch
work plane
raw data segment

(view direction is the work plane)
The menu Trim
Select
A new selection can be carried out.
Limitation
This option can only be activated if Object, Position, or Plane is switched on.
The object or position against which the curve is to be trimmed can be selected.
If Object is switched on and only the active region has been selected, the curve will be trimmed against the current work plane after clicking
onto OK.
Active Region
A new selection of the curve to be trimmed can be carried out.
The selected curve will be trimmed, and another curve can be selected which will also be trimmed at the selected limitation.
Object, Position, Plane

Geometry objects, positions, or the current work plane can be selected as limitation.
Segment
A curve can be segmented (see figure below).
The following options can be set if Segment is active:
Parameter, Arc Length, Curvature

The segments are created depending on the arc length, parameter value or curvature, as well as the number of segments (see Count).
In the case of curvature-dependent segmentation, the segment boundaries will be regularly distributed.
Count
The number of segments to be created may be specified.
413
CURVE SEGMENT MODIFICATION LINE
19
Figure 203 Segmentation of a curve
original curve
segmentation of the curve depending on:
Arc Length
Parameter
Curvature
The options Both and Obj. + Lim. can only be activated for the settings Object or Position.
Duplicate
The object to be trimmed is duplicated before the trim operation is carried out.
Both
Both parts of the trimmed curve will be preserved. If the option is switched off, only the part where the curve has been selected will be pre-
served.
Obj. + Lim.
(Object + Limitation)
Object and limitation will be trimmed simultaneously.
With Obj. + Lim. and Object several intersecting curves can be trimmed in succession one against each other.
Projection Direction: X, Y, Z, Vector, Plane, View, Normal

The intersection point between curves and/or raw data contours will be created where they intersect each other in view direction. The follow-
ing options are available:
in X, Y, or Z direction,
in direction of the selected vector (Vector),
normal to the current work plane (Plane),
normal to the current view plane (View), or
normal to the target object (Normal).
Maximum (UnFace): Deviation, Order

If face edges have been selected, they are re-computed according to the values specified here.
The curves will be created in a way that their deviation from the face edge is not larger than the value determined here. For this, the order will
possibly be increased, but only up to the maximum order specified.
3D-Distance
The distance between object and limitation at the intersection point is displayed.
19.6 Curve segment modification Line

With this function, the length and position of straight lines can be modified in the menu or via graphic symbols.
414
CURVE SEGMENT MODIFICATION LINE
19
The menu Line Modify
Select
The beginning and end point of the line is marked with B and E. The positive and negative direction for an offset are indicated by the signs
+ and .
Segmentation
Via this button, the line will be divided into the specified number of segments with equal lengths.
According to the setting of the option Fix, the segmentation will be carried out starting from the line beginning or end. The last created seg-
ment remains in selected mode in a way that further modifications may be carried out.
Duplicate
The line is duplicated before the function will be carried out.
Symbol
Activation and display of symbols for graphical modification of lines.
Offset
The line will be moved vertically to its direction.
Position
You may define a position through which the line shall pass.
Rotate
The line will be rotated around one of its ends or its midpoint. The rotation axis passes through the start point, midpoint, or end point, which
depends on the setting of Fix, and is normal to the current work plane.
Vector
The new direction of the line can be defined graphically.
IMPORTANT!
Length
The length of the line can be modified. According to the setting of Fix, the line will be extrapolated at its beginning or end point or simultane-
ously at both ends.
Position
A new beginning or end point may be determined. For this, the perpendicular will be dropped from the selected position onto the line.
The values for offset distance, rotation angle and length can either be entered numerically, or modified dynamically using the sliders.
Fix: Begin, MidPt (Midpoint), End

for options Rotate and Length:
The fixed line point is defined.
for option Segmentation:
If a line shall be divided into several segments, you can determine whether the segmentation is to be started at the beginning, midpoint,
or end of the line.
Continue
At the beginning or end of the selected line (according to the setting of Fix: Begin, MidPt (Midpoint), End), a new line with the same length
will be created.
415
CURVE SEGMENT MODIFICATION CIRCLE AND ARC
19
Graphical modification via vector symbol
Modifying the line length via text

field by clicking on the value
Rotating the line by moving the
end handle
Modifying the line length by
scaling the vector symbol
Inverting the line by clicking the
handle
Offsetting the line by moving the

vector origin
NOTE:
According to the setting of the radio box Fix, the vector is located at the start, middle or end of the line.
Context menus are available for the vector symbol which can be activated with the right mouse button when positioning the cursor over a handle.
The options are described in section 2.5.9 The vector symbol on page 38.
19.7 Curve segment modification Circle and Arc

With this function you may modify position, radius and segment angle of circles or arcs in the menu or via graphic symbols.
The menu Circle Modify
Select
The beginning and end point of the circle or arc is marked with B and E.
Centre
The centre point of the circle can be moved.
Circle
Via this button, an arc will be closed to become a circle.
Segmentation
Via this button, the circle or arc will be divided into the specified number of segments with equal lengths.
According to the setting of the option Fix, the segmentation will be carried out starting from the beginning or end of the arc. The last created
segment remains in selected mode in a way that further modifications may be carried out.
Tangent
ON
The end tangents will be fixed when modifying the radius.
OFF
The centre point will be fixed when modifying the radius.
416
19
Figure 204 Modification of the circle radius
Tangent On: Tangent Off:

end tangents are fix centre point is fix
Duplicate
The selected element is duplicated before the function will be carried out.
Symbol
Activation and display of symbols for graphical modification of arcs.
Radius
The radius of the circle may be modified.
Position
You may define a position through which the circle shall pass.
Angle
The segment angle of the arc can be modified. According to the setting of Fix, the arc will be extrapolated at its start or end point or simulta-
neously at both ends.
Position
A new beginning or end point may be determined. For this, the perpendicular will be dropped from the selected position onto the arc.
IMPORTANT!
The values for the radius and the segment angle can either be entered numerically, or modified dynamically using the sliders.
Fix: Begin, MidPt (Midpoint), End

for option Angle:
The fixed arc end is defined.
for option Segmentation:
If an arc or circle shall be divided into several segments, you can determine whether the segmentation is to be started at the beginning,
midpoint, or end of the arc.
Graphical modification via vector and point symbol
Modifying the radius via text

field by clicking on the value
Modifying the radius by scaling
the vector symbol
Inverting the arc by clicking on

the handle
Moving the centre of the arc

by moving the vector origin
Modifying begin and end point

by moving the point symbols
Context menus are available for the vector and point symbols which can be activated with the right mouse button when positioning the cursor over
a handle. The options are described in the following sections.
2.5.9 The vector symbol on page 38
417
19
2.5.8 The point symbol on page 38
418
CURVE CREATION
20
20 Curve creation

20.2 Curve creation Interpolate

A selected point sequence is interpolated using each point as end point of a curve segment (see figure below). Transition conditions can be spec-
ified by defining sharp bends. At these sharp bends, the segments have an order of 3 or 2, at the other positions they are tangent continuous
(order 4).
Figure 205 Interpolation of a raw data contour
curve
raw data contour
The menu Interpolate
Select
A new selection of the raw data contour may be carried out.
Bend: Def, Delete

(Bend: Define, Delete)
Selected segment end points can be defined as sharp bends (Def), and sharp bends redefined as tangent continuous transitions (Delete).
20.3 Curve creation Approximate
20.3.1 General Information

Using this function you may create curves by approximation of raw data.
Figure 206 Creation of a curve by approximation
curve
raw data contour
The segment structure can be defined for globally smoothing a curve. Using the smoothing factor you may realize any level between the best
approximation and the highest smoothing quality.
The menu consists of the tabs Approximate and Parameterisation, which are described in the following sections.
419
APPROXIMATE
20
20.3.2 Approximate
First, the geometry objects to be modified have to be selected depending to the activated geometry function.
Select
The raw data contour may be re-selected.
Deviation
The maximum deviation of the modified or created curve from the original geometry will be displayed.
Delete Raw Data

The raw data contour will be deleted after the approximation.
Segment Boundary
Segment boundaries can be defined and deleted, the transition quality may be changed.
Def
(Define)
A new segment boundary with the determined transition quality will be defined. Thus, an additional segment will be created. It is recom-
mended to place such segment end points at inflection points.
Figure 207 Approximation with definition of a segment boundary
segment boundary
Delete
The selected segment boundary will be deleted, so that the two original segments will be approximated to form one single segment.
All
All segment boundaries are deleted.
Continuity
A new transition quality can be defined for segment boundaries.
Influenced Point
These options are only available for the approximation of raw data.
Points of the raw data contour can be defined as influencing points (fix points). They will then be approximated exactly if the order is high
enough. All segment end points are fix points.
Def
(Define)
Selected points of the raw data contour will be defined as influencing points.
420
PARAMETERISATION
20
Figure 208 Approximation with definition of an influence point
influence point
Delete
Points which have been defined as influencing points can be deleted.
Exclude
Selected points of the raw data contour will not be considered when computing the approximation.

Position, tangent or curvature continuity shall be kept at the selected segment end point. Read also the description of the Transition Quality:
Order: Local, Global

The order of the curve segment (Local) or the whole curve (Global) can be modified.
20.3.3 Parameterisation
Parameterisation Methods
The following parameterisation methods are available for the approximation or smoothing:
Equidistant
The computation is carried out assuming that the given points are distributed regularly according to the curve parameter.
Chordal
The computation is carried out assuming that the distances between the given points also determine their parameterisation.
Mean
A mean control point distribution (geometric mean) between the two types Equidistant and Chordal is computed.
Auto
The parameterisation types Equidistant, Chordal, Mean, and Angle are computed. The program chooses the result delivering the
smallest deviation from the original geometry.
Auto Arc
The parameterisation types Equidistant, Chordal, Mean, and Angle are computed. The program chooses the result producing the
curve with the shortest arc length.
Angle
The control point distribution is computed similar to the function Chordal. Additionally, the angle formed by the adjacent polygon lines
will be taken into account.
Iterations
The approximation result can be improved by executing several computing steps.
Smooth F.
The approximation quality can be influenced by the smoothing factor controlling the length of the polygon lines between the control points.
With a factor of 0, these lengths remain unchanged. A smoothing factor larger than 0 generates almost equal lengths of the polygon lines. The
creation of waves will be reduced, and an oscillating control point polygon will be avoided when setting the smoothing factor to a value larger
than 1.
421
CURVE CREATION 2 X 2D (3D CURVE)
20
20.4 Curve creation 2 x 2D (3D Curve)

This function creates a 3D curve from a planar curve. The coordinate for the depth is determined by a raw data contour lying in another plane. The
respective plane normals are generated in each point of the 2D curve and the 2D raw data contour, their intersection points define the 3D curve
(see figure below).
A 3D point sequence is created first which will be approximated using the specified smoothing factor. When projecting the 3D curve onto the
plane of the 2D curve, the original curve would approximately be created.
Figure 209 Creation of a 3d curve
original curve plane normals
created
3D curve
depth coor-
dinate
raw data contour
The menu 2 x 2D
Select
A new selection may be carried out.
Curve, Raw Data

The planar curve and the raw data contour can be selected separately.
NOTE:
If you select 3D instead of 2D data, an error message will be displayed.
Factor
When the plane normals generated in each point of the 2D curve and raw data contour intersect each other, a 3D point sequence is created
which will then be approximated using the smoothing factor.
This factor allows the desired compromise between an exact approximation and a very smooth curve.
See also Curve Modification Smooth, option Smooth F., page 441.
20.5 Curve creation Development

Curves lying on a flange surface can be developed onto a target surface using this function. For the calculation of the development lengths start-
ing from the bending edge, the bending radii and sheet thickness may be taken into account (Correction of Length). A resulting curve will be
generated as result of the calculated lengths.
422
GENERAL INFORMATION
20
Figure 210 Development of curves
curves to be flange surface

developed
section
length
bending edge = target surface

spine curve
developed
curves
Curves and points are developed separately. At first, they are projected on the flange surface and developed afterwards. For the curves, several
intermediate points are created per segment. After selection of the required geometry objects, the coordinate system that is defined by the set
moving frame will be displayed. For each point, the following steps will be carried out:
1. According to the specified moving frame type, an intersection plane is determined through the considered point radial to the spine curve.
2. The intersection curve between the plane and the flange surface, as well as the intersection point on the bending edge are determined.
3. The length from the intersection point on the bending edge to the point on the intersection curve is calculated. A correction of length is carried
out, if required.
4. The intersection curve between the plane and the target surface is determined.
5. Starting from the intersection point on bending edge, the measured length is marked off along the intersection curve on the target surface. A
correction of length is carried out, if required.
6. The created points define a curve on the target surface.
IMPORTANT!
The function can only deliver a correct result if the bending edge is longer than the curves to be developed. If it is shorter, a warning will be
given: Not all selected entities could be completely developed.
Figure 211 Development without and with warning
curve to be
developed
flange
surface
bending bending edge
result curve result curve

target
surface
a) bending edge is longer than a) bending edge is shorter than
the curve to be developed: the curve to be developed:
correct result without warning faulty result with warning
The main menu and The Parameter menu are described in the following sections.
423
THE MAIN MENU
20
20.5.2 The main menu
Select
Flange, Curves, Points, Target Surface

The flange surface, curves and points on the flange surface, as well as the target surface can be reselected. With the + buttons, additional
objects can be selected.
Side
The development will always be carried out in a way that the normals of flange and target surface coincide. Using the buttons , the surface
normals may be inverted determining the following:
for the Flange:
Which side of the flange surface, starting from the bending edge, will be developed on the target surface?
for the Target Surface:
Onto which side of the target surface, starting from the bending edge, the development will be carried out?
Figure 212 Changing the side of the flange surface
flange surface
direction of
development
surface normals
target surface
b) after clicking onto

a) original situation for Flange
Bending Edge
The bending edge can be reselected. The curve must be located both on the flange surface and on the target surface.
Spine Curve
The spine curve can be reselected. It defines a set of planes. If no spine curve is specified, the bending edge will be used.
Parameter
For calculating the lengths, sections are created according to the specified moving frame. Via this button, the appropriate parameter menu will
be activated (see section 20.5.3 The Parameter menu on page 425).
Correction of Length
For the creation of the development lengths, a correction of length may be carried out. Depending on the sheet thickness, a neutral fibre will
be calculated in the sheet metal and developed afterwards.
424
THE PARAMETER MENU
20
Figure 213 Development with correction of length
theoretical
length
neutral
sheet
thickness
correction
of length
Sheet Thickness
Determination of the material thickness.
Bending Radius
Determination of the bending radius. If flange or target surface have sharp bends, they will be filleted using this radius. The bending
radius is always inside the sheet metal (see figure below).
Figure 214 Bending Radius
sheet bending
thickness radius
neutral fibre
Material Side
With this option you may specify which side of the sheet metal shall be described by the surfaces.
Methods
The position of the neutral fiber between the internal and external radius of the sheet metal can be determine with the following methods:
Percentage
The position of the neutral fiber is given as percentage of the sheet thickness. For the setting 0 %, it lies at the internal radius, for
100 % at the external radius.
Curvature
The position of the neutral fiber is calculated depending on the curvature. In regions with a high curvature it lies at the internal radius,
in flat regions in the middle between internal and external radius.
Delta
The developed lengths are extended or shortened by the value specified here.
20.5.3 The Parameter menu
In the parameter menu of the function Development you will find options for defining a moving frame. The moving frame is used for generating
the intersection curves for the length determination. It determines a local coordinate system that defines the intersection plane through flange and
target surface. By means of the displayed plane symbol you can simulate the movement of the coordinate system along the spine curve. The
intersection curve at the current position will be shown.
Options for the moving frame

The geometry objects required for the moving frame are represented by the following elements:
Spine Curve Spine Curve,

e. g. Bending Edge
425
CURVE CREATION CONNECTING CURVE
20
2nd Curve any curve
Surface any surface,

e. g. Target Surface
The moving frame is used with equal mode of operation in several functions. You will find a detailed description for the function Surface crea-
tion Profiles under the corresponding options on the following pages:
Moving frame type: Parallel to Plane, Radial to Spine Curve, 2nd Curve, Normal to Surface
(see page 523)
Axis: Auto, Vector
(see page 526)
Priority: Tangent, Vector
(see page 526)
20.6 Curve creation Connecting Curve

With this function can be created a curve perpendicular to the planes of a group of curves to be specified. The function is used if for the creation
of a profile surface a spine curve normal to the cross profiles is needed to keep the moving frame. (See also sections 24.6 Surface creation
Profiles on page 522 and 24.6.2.2 Options for the moving frame on page 523.)
The usage of this function will be explained by means of the following example.
To carry out the function you first have to select the cross profiles through the planes of which the spine curve to be created shall pass.
Figure 215 Given geometry
given profile surfaces
cross profiles to
be selected
cross profiles to
be selected
Position and run of the spine curve to be created can be influenced by specifying attachment points. If no or only one attachment point is selected,
a curve will be created which between two cross profiles forms an arc the centre point of which is the intersecting edge of the curve planes (see
figure below). In case of an arc with an apex angle > 30 the curve will be divided into several segments.
Figure 216 Spine curve with one attachment point
profile planes
intersection point
of the profile
created spine curve attachment point
426
CURVE CREATION CONNECTING CURVE
20
If several attachment points are selected, the created spine curve passed through the selected attachment points normal to the profile planes
(see figure below).
Figure 217 Spine Curve with several attachment points
profile planes
attachment points
created spine curve
attachment points
Before the profile surface can be created, a limit curve (see figure 218) between the given surfaces is needed, which can be created with the func-
tion Curve segment creation Styling Corner (see page 391).
To obtain a profile surface with optimal quality should be added two further cross profiles in the with Preview menu of the function Surface crea-
tion Profiles.
Figure 218 Final result: profile surface with the created connecting curve as spine curve
limit curve
spine curve
attachment curve
added cross
profiles
The menu Connecting Curve
Select
Profiles +
At least two cross profiles have to be selected. With the button + can be selected additional profiles.
Points +
To determine position and run of the connecting curve can be selected one or several attachment point.
427
CURVE CREATION CURVE SKETCH
20
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
The minimum order of the connecting curve can be specified.
20.7 Curve creation Curve Sketch

With this function, a curve can be generated from straight lines and arcs. Lines are created between a sequence of selected points at first. The
dimensions of the geometry can then be modified at the points and lines, e. g. length, angle, or radius. Modifications at points have a local effect,
i. e. only the current points is modified. Modifications at lines affect all adjacent points.
The menu Curve Sketch
After activating the function, a plane symbol will be displayed (not manipulable), and you can immediately select point positions in the work plane.
The selection must be terminated with OK in the selection menu or with the Enter button. With the middle mouse button you can deselect the last
selected point position. The curve will be created by pressing OK in the function window or by aborting the function.
The points and lines can be modified graphically by translating the displayed graphics symbols (left or middle mouse button), or via the context
menus (right mouse button). The current segment is marked in green.
Graphical modification (left and middle mouse button)
Figure 219 Graphical modification of the curve
translation of the point

left mouse button: in the direction of the adjacent lines
middle mouse button: free translation in the work plane
radius and angle modifi-

cation via text fields
rotation in the
work plane
length modification
Modification via context menus (right mouse button)

The following options are available in the context menus for this function:
Position
Only available for the point context menu.
Activating the position selection to move the point to another position.
Direction
Only available for the vector context menu.
Activating the vector selection to change the direction of the current vector. Here you can e. g. invert a vector.
Remove Point
Removing a selected point (also with Ctrl/Strg + selection).
Insert Point
Inserting a new point by selecting the desired position.
428
CURVE CREATION OFFSET
20
Save Curves
Saving the curve.
Duplicate Curves
When executing OK in the function window, either:
the existing curve will be modified (Off), or
the curve will be duplicated and then modified (On).
Angle
Changing the angle:
between adjacent segments (point context menu), or
of the current segment with respect to the local y axis (vector context menu).
Radius
Changing the radius between adjacent segments.
Length
Changing the length of the segment.
Dimensions
Choosing the dimensioning of the geometry during the creation:
None
No dimensions.
Current
Dimensions at the current segment.
All
Dimensions at the whole geometry.
Displayed are:
point coordinates (X, Y),
length of lines (L) and their angle with respect to the local y axis (A), as well as
Radius and Angle between adjacent segments.
The remaining options are available in all context menus, and are described in section 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41.
20.8 Curve creation Offset

Using this function, a parallel or offset curve to an arbitrary curve will be generated with the specified distance and in the defined direction. It is
possible to select a target surface on which the offset curve shall be projected. The curve can automatically be trimmed at or extrapolated to the
edges of this surface.
The main menu Offset
Select
A new selection of the geometry objects can be carried out.
Curves +, Surfaces +
The curve for which the offset has to be computed, and a target surface on which the offset curve shall be created if desired, can be selected
separately.
An offset may also be computed simultaneously for several curves.
Point
Selection of a point on a surface through which the offset curve shall pass.
If more than one curve is selected, the one which is closest to that point is used to determine the offset distance.
Distance Begin, Distance End

The offset distance at the beginning of the original curve must always be defined. Additionally, the distance at the end can be specified.
429
CURVE CREATION OFFSET
20
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
Only available for the offset directions Chord and Surface, i. e. if a target surface is selected to create the offset curve on it.
When projecting a curve on a surface, only those points having a distance from the original curve that is smaller than the value specified here
are taken for the computation.
Duplicate
The original curve is duplicated before the function is carried out.
Patch Edge
When computing an offset curve on a target surface, the curve will be extrapolated to or trimmed at the patch or face edges.
Smoothing Implied
ON
A curve will be created by approximation. The parameterisation of the original curve segments will be adopted.
OFF
A raw data contour will be generated first. Via the button Smooth, the function Curve modification Smooth (see page 439) will be
activated for approximating the point sequence.
Smooth
See option Smoothing Implied OFF.
Transition
The offset distance along the curve can be defined using this option (see figure 220).
Linear
The offset will be computed linearly between the specified offset begin and end values. If Distance End is not active, i. e. only the value
for the beginning has been determined, a constant distance will result.
The options Variable and Law can only be used for curve segments and patch edges.
Variable
For a variable offset a mean value is computed out of the specified values for the offset begin and end. This value will be measured at a
position (centre point) to be selected on the curve.
Law
An offset may also be defined by individual points (interpolation points) to be selected on the curve. The corresponding offset values can
be modified in a separate window using sliders.
Figure 220 Variants for defining the offset distance
A=E
A
Linear with Linear
constant distance
E
E
A selected interpola-
selected cen-
tre point tion points
Variable Law
Offset Direction
Generally, the offset direction is normal to the tangent in each curve point. In addition, the direction of the offset vectors is defined by the fol-
lowing options (see also figure 221).
NOTE:
The arrow displayed after the selection points in the positive offset direction.
Plane
The offset vectors are normal to the normal vector of the work plane. The offset distance is measured in the direction of the vectors.
If a target surface has been additionally selected , the generated curve is projected in normal direction onto this surface.
The options Chord and Surface can only be used if you have selected a target surface on which the offset curve is to be created.
430
CURVE CREATION PROJECTION
20
Chord
The direction of the offset vectors is defined by the surface point having the specified distance from the considered curve point.
Surface
The offset distance is measured directly on the surface as arc length.
Figure 221 Variants for defining the offset direction
patch normal
without target patch

Plane
with target patch
Chord Surface
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
For implied smoothing, the order will usually be adopted from the original curve segments. However, this is not useful for straight lines to be
projected onto non-planar surfaces. In this case, a minimum order can be specified for the segments to be created.
Deviation
The maximum deviation of the smoothed offset curve from the exactly computed curve points is displayed.
20.9 Curve creation Projection

Curves and edges, but also single points and raw data, can be projected onto surfaces, scans, or the work plane in any direction. When projecting
onto surface clusters, the projected curve will be segmented at the patch or face edges. The curve can be extrapolated automatically to the near-
est patch or face edge.
NOTES:
The projection of proportionally large curves onto individual small reference surfaces can cause problems. They can be solved by pre-trim-
ming the original curve to a smaller proportion referring to the reference. Use the function Curve segment modification Trim (see
page 412) with the settings Segment and Count: 2.
The function should only be applied to triangulated scans (see function Scan creation Triangulation, page 363). The facet normals are
used for the projection. If you project objects onto scans which are not triangulated, the projected points will be ignored. The nearest scan
points will be used instead.
Figure 222 Projection of a curve onto a patch
original curve
projected
curve
in normal direction of the work in patch normal direction (pro-

plane (projection direction Plane) jection direction Normal)
431
20
The menu Projection
Select
Curves +, Surfaces +
The button Surfaces is only available for the projection on surfaces/scans.
You can separately select the objects to be projected, and, if required, the surfaces or scans on which they are to be projected. Additionally
objects can be selected with the + buttons.
Projection Direction
The projection can either be executed in one of the following fixed directions:
in X, Y, or Z direction,
perpendicular to the current work plane (Plane),
perpendicular to the current view plane (View),
in the direction of a selected vector (Vector),
or perpendicular to the target object (Normal).
NOTE:
The view Standard Perspective is not (yet) considered, a parallel perspective is always executed.
Projection on: Surfaces, Plane (= Target Object)

Curves can either be projected onto a surface/scan, or the current work plane in the specified direction.
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
When projecting a curve on a surface, only those points having a distance from the original curve that is smaller than the value specified here
are taken for the computation.
Patch Edge
This option is only available for the projection on surfaces/scans.
The begin (B) and/or end (E) of the projected curve will automatically be extrapolated up to the nearest patch or face edge. The extrapolation
will not exceed the curves length.
Bezier, B-Spline, Raw Data

The projected curve can either be output directly as Raw Data, or smoothed in Bezier or B-Spline representation. If B-Spline is switched on,
adjacent segments with the same order will be combined to one curve.
Standard
With this option you can influence the parameterisation of the result curve. It has especially an effect on the projection in a fixed direction (see
Projection Direction).
OFF
The program tries to optimally project the curve on the surface. In most cases, the control point distribution of the projected curve will dif-
fer from the distribution of the original curve. But generally, the deviation of the smoothed from the projected curve is smaller than with
Standard ON. This setting is recommended if it is an acute projection, i. e. if the curve touches the target object with a very small angle
(see figure 223).
ON
This option has to be switched on, if the control point distribution of the original curve in the projection plane (= plane perpendicular to the
fixed projection direction) shall be preserved (see figure 224). This setting is suitable if the curve can be projected clearly on the target
object, and if original and projected curve are looking largely similar. If these requirements are not met, you will generally get a worse
result with Standard ON than with Standard OFF (see figure 223).
432
20
Figure 223 Optimal projection with option Standard switched off
Standard OFF Standard ON
a) Bezier rep-
resentation
on
cti
ire
nd
c tio
oje original curve
pr
target surface
The different shape of original

and result curve causes a worse
result with Standard ON.
b) Raw Data
representation
Figure 224 Projection with keeping the parameterisation of the original curve
Standard OFF Standard ON
The control point distri-

bution of the original
curve will be preserved.
projection direction = View
Separate
The curve can either be projected onto the patch cluster as a whole, or separately on each selected patch.
OFF
Projection on the patch cluster as a whole. The curve will always be projected on the next patch. If patches are overlapping each other, for
example, the projection is not done on the underlying patch regions.
ON
Projection on each individual patch of a selected patch cluster. In this case, the curve will also be projected on the underlying patch
regions if patches are overlapping each other. This setting is also suitable for patch clusters having sharp bends.
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
For smoothed result curves (options Bezier or B-Spline) you can specify the minimum order for the segments to be created.
Duplicate
The original geometry will be duplicated before executing the function.
433
CURVE CREATION REAPPROXIMATE
20
Adapt
The parameterisation of the projection curve is adapted to that of the target geometry to realise a better control point distribution. When using
this option, the projection curve should lie nearly isoparametrically on the target geometry.
Figure 225 Curve projection with Adapt
original curve projected curve with projected curve with

Adapt Off Adapt On
Curve
Iso-Curve
control point mesh
Deviation
For a projection with the result type Bezier or B-Spline, the maximum deviation of the smoothed from the projected curves (Raw Data) will be
displayed. If several curve clusters have been projected, the deviation is displayed individually for each curve cluster. The values appear in the
graphics at that positions where the maximum deviations occur.
20.10 Curve creation Reapproximate

With this function you may create a curve by re-approximating a curve, a raw data contour or a patch or face edge. Number and order of the curve
segments can be specified. By setting the segmentation type you may determine by which criterion the segment boundaries are to be computed.
The menu Reapproximate
Select
Curves
The curves or edges can be reselected. Via the button +, additional elements can be selected.
Reference
Order and number of the segments may be adopted from a reference curve.
No. of Segments
The number of segments of the reapproximating curve can be specified.
Order
The order of the segments of the reapproximating curve can be specified.
Smooth Factor
This factor permits the desired compromise between an exact approximation and a very smooth curve.
Segmentation
The segments are created depending on the parameter value or the arc length.
Duplicate
The selected curves will be duplicated before executing the function.
Deviation
The maximum deviation of the reapproximating curve from the original geometry is displayed here.
434
CURVE CREATION EDGE
20
20.11 Curve creation Edge

With this function, you can create curves on patch edges or face edges. Iso-curves will keep their natural parameterisation, i. e. the corresponding
segmentation and orders in the u- and v-directions of the base patch. Each curve segment is assigned to a new curve.
The menu Edge
Select
Reactivates the selection of edges.
The following options are relevant only if the curves are to be approximated on face edges.
Deviation
Tolerance value for the admissible deviation of the new curve from the underlying face edge. The deviation is indicated in the graphics area.
Order
You may specify the order of the curves to be created on face edges.
20.12 Curve creation Technical Edge

With this function a 3D curve, called Technical Edge, is created between two curves or opposite surface edges.
After selection of Edge 1 and Edge 2 a plane is created through corresponding points of the selected edges or curves, whose Z axis is defined by
Edge 1. This plane is displayed in the graphics area as local coordinate system. The symbol can be moved along Edge 1.
Depending on the selected objects types, the technical edge is created as follows:
2 patch edges:
If patch edges are selected, the plane defined by the local coordinate system is intersected with the tangential planes in the points of the
patch edges. The intersection point of the two intersection lines defines a point on the technical edge.
Figure 226 Technical Edge from two patch edges
plane of the local

intersection lines coordinate system
Intersection Point
Edge 1
Edge 2
tangential
planes
Technical Edge
1 Patch Edge, 1 Curve:

If a curve and a patch edge are selected, a connecting curve is created with the intersection line and the corresponding point on Edge 2. The
two lines whose intersection point defines the point of the technical edge, are created with the tangents in the start and end point of the con-
necting curve.
435
CURVE CREATION TECHNICAL EDGE
20
Figure 227 Technical Edge from a patch edge and a curve
Plane of the local

coordinate system
Intersection Point
intersection
line Edge 1
Edge 2
blend curve
tangent of the
blend curve
Technical Edge
2 Curves:
If two curve are selected, the technical edge is created from the centre points.
Figure 228 Technical Edge from two curves
Edge 1
Edge 2
Technical Edge
The menu Technical Edge
Select
Reactivation of the selection.
Edge 1, Edge 2
The edges/curves can be reselected.With the + buttons, additional edges can be selected.
B/E
This button becomes active when both edges are selected. The start and end points of the edges can be set.
Gap
For the selection of several edges/curves, the maximum permissible gap tolerance can be specified with this option.
Projection
With this option, you can additionally select a scan on which the technical edge shall be created. The selected curves are projected onto the
scan, and at the projection position is defined the intersection line via the normal and tangential plane.
436
CURVE MODIFICATION
21
21 Curve modification

21.2 Curve modification Point

The shape of a curve is modified by moving an arbitrary curve point. This modification method has a stronger effect the shape of the curve than
the control point modification.
The menu Curve Point

Begin, End
With this option the modification range can be restricted. As beginning and end of the modification range may be selected arbitrary curve
points. Within this range the curve will be influenced by a bell function. Default setting is beginning and end point of the curve.

Order
Local
The order of a curve segment to be selected will be modified.
Global
For all segments of the selected curve the same order will be set.
21.3 Curve modification Control Point

This modification method allows a more precise modelling of curve segments than the point modification (see figure 142 on page 347).
You may modify curves in two different ways:
When modelling locally each curve segment is modified individually by moving its control points. The transition conditions will be preserved.
When modelling globally the complete curve is modified using a reference curve which is modelled instead of the curve itself.
As reference curve you may select apart from curves also raw data, edges, intersection curves, or diagnosis data.
Reference
With this button you can select a reference curve for a global curve modification.
The following objects can be selected as reference curve:
curves and curve segments,
437
CURVE MODIFICATION MATCHING
21
patch and face edges,

raw data contours, and
diagnostic curves.
After selection of a reference curve the button is highlighted. By reactivating the button you may either select a new reference curve or delete
the selection.
Order
The order of the selected reference curve is displayed and can be modified.
If a raw data contour or diagnostic curve has been selected as reference curve, a bezier curve with the specified order is approximated.

Check Button Delta

When using the dynamic control point movement function Express the movement radius of the control points is restricted to the specified
value.
Tangent
Curvature
NOTE:
Both control point modelling methods (local/global) preserve automatically the internal geometric transitions.


The order of the curve segment or curve can be modified.
After activating the option Local you will be prompted to select the curve segment the order of which shall be modified.
With the option Global you can assign the same order to all curve segments of the selected curve.
NOTE:
In case of tangent continuous transitions between the curve segments, the order should not be set to a value lower than 4.
In case of curvature continuous transitions between the curve segments, the order should not be set to a value lower than 6.
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
If the segments of the selected curve have a lower order than the minimum order specified here, their order will automatically be increased to
this value.
NOTE:
This option is only effective for the global modelling, i. e. if a reference curve is used.
With the following options you can modify 3D curves on surfaces.
Projection
The selected curve can be projected in view direction onto a patch or surface to be selected. The order and segmentation of the curve will be
preserved.
Edge
The curve control points to be modified can only be moved within the patch or surface boundaries.
Diagnosis
Display of the deviation of the curve from the patch or surface.
21.4 Curve modification Matching

Segments of one or several curves can be connected with a position, tangent, or curvature continuous transition. The sequence and orientation of
the curve segments are internally computed. Select the curve segment used as reference at the corresponding end to assign the selected transi-
tion quality. The connected curve segment will be modified to meet the transition quality (see figure 196 on page 408).
438
CURVE MODIFICATION CURVE SKETCH
21
The menu Matching
Select
Transition Quality
The matching can be realized keeping position, tangent or curvature continuity.
NOTE:
The order of the curves should be larger than 2 for the transition quality Tangent and larger than 3 for Curvature.
For detailed information about transition qualities please refer to section 19.4 Curve segment modification Matching on page 408.

The order of a single curve segment (Local) or the complete curve, i. e. all selected curve segments (Global), can be modified.
21.5 Curve modification Curve Sketch

A sequence of straight lines and arcs can be modified with this function. The dimensions of the geometry, e. g. length, angle, or radius, can be
modified at the lines and their begin and end points. Modifications at points have a local effect, i. e. only the current points is modified. Modifica-
tions at lines affect all adjacent points.
The modification possibilities and the options available in the context menus are described in section 20.7 Curve creation Curve Sketch on
page 428.
The menu Curve Sketch
Select
Selection of contiguous lines and arcs.
NOTE:
Circles are divided into 3 segments for the modification.
21.6 Curve modification Smooth

Using this function you may smooth curves.
Figure 229 Smoothing a curve
control point polygon
additionally defined
segment boundaries
The menu consists of the tabs Smooth and Parameterisation, which are described in the following sections.
439
SMOOTH
21
21.6.1 Smooth
Select
Deselection of all selected objects and reactivation of the selection. Using the + button you may select additional curves.
Deviation
The maximum deviation of the modified or created curve from the original geometry will be displayed.
Segment Boundary
Segment boundaries can be defined and deleted, the transition quality may be changed.
Def
(Define)
A new segment boundary with the determined transition quality will be defined. Thus, an additional segment will be created. It is recom-
mended to place such segment end points at inflection points.
Figure 230 Approximation with definition of a segment boundary
segment boundary
Delete
The selected segment boundary will be deleted, so that the two original segments will be approximated to form one single segment.
All
All segment boundaries are deleted.
Continuity
A new transition quality can be defined for segment boundaries.

Position, tangent or curvature continuity shall be kept at the selected segment end point. Read also the description of the Transition Quality:

The order of the curve segment (Local) or the whole curve (Global) can be modified.
Parameterisation Methods
The following parameterisation methods are available for the smoothing:
Equidistant
The computation is carried out assuming that the given points are distributed regularly according to the curve parameter.
440
CURVE MODIFICATION CONVERT
21
Chordal
Mean
Auto
smallest deviation from the original geometry.
Auto Arc
curve with the shortest arc length.
Angle
Iterations
The smoothing result can be improved by executing several computing steps.
Smooth F.
Smooth Factor
The smoothing quality can be influenced by the smoothing factor controlling the length of the polygon lines between the control points.
than 1.
21.7 Curve modification Convert

With this function you may convert between NURBS and Bezier representation of curves. Different results are obtained according to the original
geometry and setting of the option Approximate (see figures below).
Figure 231 Conversion from Bezier to NURBS
curve 1 curve 1
curve 1 curve 1
curve 2
inner NURBS
segment boundaries
Figure 232 Conversion from NURBS to Bezier
curve 1
curve 2
curve 1 Approximate OFF
curve 1
Approximate ON
inner NURBS
segment boundaries
The menu consists of the tabs Conversion and Parameterisation, which are described in the following sections.
441
CONVERSION
21
21.7.2 Conversion
Select
A new selection of the curve segments to be converted can be carried out.
2 Points
This option is only available if a conversion from NURBS to Bezier shall be carried out (option ->Bezier switched on) and Approximate is
active.
If a NURBS curve segment includes several inner segments, you may select segments defining the range to be approximated and converted
to a single Bezier curve segment.
After activating the button 2 Points you have to select two points on the NURBS curve segment. The region of the NURBS curve segment
limited in this way is approximated by a single Bezier segment. If only one point has been selected, only the corresponding segment will be
converted.
> Bezier, > NURBS

Bezier or NURBS curve segments will be generated.
Approximate
Option > Bezier active:
Approximate ON:
The NURBS curve segment will be approximated by one Bezier segment.
Approximate OFF:
The NURBS segment will be converted to Bezier representation segment by segment.
Option > NURBS active:
Approximate ON:
The system checks during conversion which transition quality (position, tangent or curvature continuity) exists at the common end
points of the Bezier curve to be converted. The NURBS curve will be generated in a way that this quality is kept at the inner segment
boundaries.
Deviation
This option is only available for the conversion of NURBS curve segments to Bezier (->Bezier active).
The deviation of the created curve segment from the original segment will be displayed.
Duplicate
The original geometry will be duplicated. New curves will be assigned to the current part.
Order
The approximation is carried out using the specified order.
Several parameters are available for the approximation of NURBS curve segments by a Bezier segment (options ->Bezier and Approximate
active).
Parameterisation Methods: Equidistant, Chordal, Mean, Auto

Different parameterisation methods are available. For a description of these methods please refer to Parameterisation Methods in the func-
tion Curve Modification Smooth (see page 440).
Iterations 3
The approximation result can be improved by executing several computing steps.
Smooth F.
This factor allows the desired compromise between an exact approximation and a very smooth curve (see also option Smooth F. in the func-
tion Curve Modification Smooth on page 441).
442
CONVERTING ARCS
21
21.8 Converting Arcs

Though you can select arcs in some functions of ICEM Surf they are not allowed for executing the function (global modelling and move functions,
Unified Modelling). After confirming the selection with OK, the request appears whether the arcs found shall be converted into curves.
The Menu Convert
Bezier, B-Spline, NURBS

Selection of the curve type.
Specifications for the curve

You define two of the three values for the curve to be created, the third value (the option that you activate) will be calculated from this.
Order
Order of the curve.
Segments
Number of curve segments.
Deviation
Maximum deviation of the curve from the arc geometry.
21.9 Curve modification Invert

With this function, the parameter flow direction of a curve segment or a curve (sequence of the curve segments) can be reversed. However, this
modification does not produce any visible changes in the shape of the curve segment/curve.
Select
Tangent Vector
Display of the tangent vector.
21.10 Curve modification Data Reduction

This function can be used to reduce the segment number of B-Spline curves within a tolerance. Unnecessarily inserted segments can be
removed in this way.
The Menu Data Reduction
Select
CtrlP
The number of control points before and after the reduction will be displayed.
443
CURVE MODIFICATION DATA REDUCTION
21
Maximum Deviation
Control points will only be rearranged if the maximum deviation is smaller than the value specified here.
Maximum Angle
Control points will only be rearranged if the angle difference of the end tangents is smaller than the value specified here.
Duplicate
The original geometry will be duplicated.
Deviation
The deviation can be displayed in the graphics.
Keep Segments
The system tries to reduce the number of control points while keeping the segments.

The order of a single curve segment (Local) or the complete curve, i. e. all selected curve segments (Global), can be modified.
444
PATCH CREATION
22
22 Patch creation
22.1 Surfaces in ICEM Surf

In ICEM Surf surfaces consist of patches and faces. A patch is a part of a surface, which is defined on a rectangular (u,v) parameter region. This
is the reason for a patch normally having exactly four edges. As an exception from this rule there are two-sided and triangular patches (see
Degenerated Patches in the glossary).
On the other hand a face is a trimmed part of a surface, i. e. it is in most cases only a part of the original patch (the base patch), whose parameter
region has been selectively limited. This way you can create parts of a surface with any edges and with holes.
In ICEM Surf you can work with Bezier patches as well as with B-spline and NURBS-Patches. All these patches can be used as base patches for
faces.
Surfaces can be arbitrarily subdivided into parts of the surface. Especially ICEM Surf allows you to edit several patches at the same time. In this
way, even Y-, T-, and K-connections can be processed without any problems (see section 25.4 Surface modification Matching (Multiple Match-
ing) on page 612). In this way, the number of required patches can be minimized. Depending on the requirements, the surface can be structured
in different ways. Surface areas with little curvature changes can often be very well described by only one patch. Surface areas with strong curva-
ture changes should be structured finer.
By means of diagnoses, the transitions of the individual patches of a surface may be checked (see 10 The menu Diagnoses on page 169).
If one of the creating parameters is constant, the other parameter describes an isoparametric curve (iso-line) on the part of the surface (see Iso-
Curve in the glossary). Based on iso-lines you can check the parameterisation of the surface.
The following surface types are distinguished:
Bezier patches
B-Spline and NURBS patches
Trimmed patches (faces)
Recommendations for surface models

Surface models should be constructed using theoretical surfaces. Fillet surfaces are created between the theoretical surfaces. These may be
real fillets or free-form surfaces. The complete computer model consists of theoretical surfaces and fillet surfaces.
To describe a computer model exactly, it may be necessary to use only parts of these surfaces. Faces have to be created to achieve this.
When generating a surface model it is important to determine all theoretical surfaces and their intersection curves. The theoretical intersec-
tion curve is an important curve. It must be a nice flowing line in all three main views, and must not have any inflections or flat areas.
Rules for the surface creation

Create large patches with a small deviation from the original data.
Create patches with a low order (3 x 3, if possible).
Create rectangular, fan shaped, or regular shaped patches.
Patch edges should look nice in all three main views. Use curvature diagnosis to check this.
Control points should be regularly distributed over the patch. If, for example, the top and bottom edges of a patch are horizontal, the control
point rows lying between them should also be horizontal.
Edges and control point rows should flow consistently from patch to patch.
There should not be any unnecessary spikes or waves in the control point mesh.
Patches must have a good curvature connection among each other.
Patches must have a good curvature behaviour across the common boundary.
There should be no flat areas or areas of inflection at the common edge.
A surface which is flat curved flat requires three patches. The common patch edges are located between the flat and the curved areas.
The edge is:
straight line radius straight line, or
large radius small radius large radius.
Patches must have good position and tangent continuity within the tolerance to create a solid model from the surfaces (e. g. position: 0,002,
tangent: 010min).
Do not create three-sided patches. Recreate the patches to avoid this.
The recommended workflow for creating surfaces is as follows:
1. Use the information of the original (scan) data to create a patch.
2. Edges and inner control point rows must look nice in all views.
3. Execute the curvature diagnosis on the patch.
4. Repeat these steps for the adjacent patches.
5. Extrapolate two adjacent patches until they intersect. The patches must not deform during this operation.
445
BEZIER PATCHES
22
6. Trim each patch at the intersection curve.

7. Analyse the patch edges with the curvature diagnosis to guarantee a good curvature flow.
8. Repeat these steps for the adjacent patches.
9. Check position, tangent, and curvature continuity between the initial patch and the adjacent patches.
22.1.2 Bezier patches

A Bezier patch is a single-segment Bezier surface, which is always parameterised using control points without weights. The parameter region is
the standard square [0,1] x [0,1].
A Bezier patch is described by a Bezier mesh. The Bezier mesh consists of strings which connect the control points (Bezier points) in both param-
eter directions. The control point mesh controls the shape of the patch and it indirectly allows to judge its shape. The strings may be interpreted
as Bezier polygons. Especially the edge strings describe the Bezier edge curve segments of the patch.
A patch has an independent order in u and v parameter direction, which must lie between 2 and 16. These two orders determine the number and
order of the strings. Again, the orders should be as low as possible (see section 18.1.2 Bezier curve segments on page 387).
Figure 233 Bezier patch
patch with order

u = 4 and v = 3
Bezier mesh
edge 3
edge 4 edge 2
v
edge 1
u label showing
the u direction
control points
In ICEM Surf you can model a patch by moving control points or patch points. This always modifies the whole patch.
22.1.3 B-Spline and NURBS patches

In ICEM Surf there is a distinction of B-spline patches (patches having control points without weights) and NURBS patches (patches having con-
trol points with weights). In contrast with the single-segment Bzier patches these patches usually have several segments and a comparably low
polynom degree. A B-spline or NURBS patch is described by a de Boor mesh. This mesh consists of strings, which connect the control points (de
Boor points) in both parameter directions. The control point mesh controls and indirectly allow to judge the patch shape. The strings may be inter-
preted as de Boor polygons. Especially the edge strings describe the B-spline or NURBS edge curve segments of the patch.
446
TRIMMED PATCHES (FACES)
22
Figure 234 NURBS/B-Spline patch
patch with order u = 4 and v = 3,

2 x 2 segments and tangent
continuous segment transitions de Boor mesh
edge 3
edge 4 edge 2
v edge 1
inner segment label showing

u boundaries the u direction
control points influencing only one segment

control points influencing several segments
NURBS patches have a polynomial parameterisation which uses control points with weights. This especially provides the opportunity to exactly
describe surfaces of revolution. Surfaces of Revolution can only be approximated with Bezier patches.
You can model a B-spline or NURBS patch by moving control points. This only modifies one segment of the patch. Additionally, surface points
may be moved, thus modifying all segments.
B-spline and NURBS patches which have been created in other systems are often subdivided into many very small segments. Such a mathemat-
ical description results in a rather large amount of data and these data cannot be further edited very easily (see section 18.1.3 B-Spline and
NURBS curve segments on page 387). The segment boundaries of the B-spline or NURBS patches are only displayed, if Segment is switched
on in the display menu.
22.1.4 Trimmed patches (faces)

Patches may be trimmed by two different methods. Either the base patch structure with four edges remains unchanged or it is lost.
If you apply the first method, the trim curve must connect two opposite edge curves. The whole patch area will be re-approximated to become a
new patch. If you trim against an iso-curve, there is no deviation from the original patch.
The second procedure is useful and necessary for the creation of parts of surfaces which have complicated edge curves. The base patch remains
unchanged and the trim curves are additionally saved, so that you can always compute the active part of the patch for the display as well as for
sections and diagnoses. Within ICEM Surf this type of trimmed surfaces is called face.
Thus, a face consists of a base patch (Bezier or NURBS/B-Spline), one or more trim or boundary curves (loops) and the definition of the active
region. You can continue to trim a face against additional trim curves or undo one or all trimming operations (untrim the face), so that you get back
the original patch.
The trim curves mostly divide the original part of the patch into several regions. The active region must be a consistent part of the patch. The non-
active region of the original patch will be blanked. If you need the base patch for further design steps, e. g. for another face, you should duplicate
it during the face creation.
Figure 235 Face
inactive regions of active region of the

the original patch original patch (= face)
boundary of the original patch

trim curves
closed face boundary
Creating faces should normally be the last step of the design work with ICEM Surf, since not all functions allow faces. Otherwise you might be
forced to undo all the trimming operations to gain back the original patches and the trim boundary curves. Then you could modify the base
patches and redo the trimming operation.
447
PATCH CREATION BY 4 POINTS
22
22.2 Patch creation By 4 Points

With this function you may create a patch out of points. For this, select 2 to 4 points as corner points of the patch. The selection direction defines
the orientation of the normals (clockwise selection produces normals in view direction).
According to the number of selected points the patch will be generated as shown in the figure below.
Figure 236 Patch creation using points
1 1 1
2
2 2 3 3
when selecting 2 or 3 points: when selecting 4 points:

creation of a planar parallelogram creation of a general 3D
quadrilateral
selected corner points

created corner points
If you select two points, the remaining two points will be generated by aligning them with the X and Y axis of the current work plane. When design-
ing in the work plane, rectangles located in the main axes will therefore be created.
The order both in cross and longitudinal direction can be specified. The system will make a linear interpolation between the corner points, if
required.
The menu 4 Points
Select
A new selection may be carried out.
The function remains active after its execution, so that you can select further points without having to reactivate the selection.
Order: U, V
The order in U and V direction of the patch can be modified.
Modify
Via this button the function Patch modification Control Point (see page 482) can be activated. In this menu, the created patch can be
modified without reselecting it.
22.3 Patch creation By Raw Data

With this function patches can be created from raw data contours. You have to select at least four contours forming a closed area.
448
RAW DATA
22
Figure 237 Patch from raw data
The menu consists of the tabs Raw Data and Parameterisation, which are described in the following sections.
22.3.2 Raw Data
Select
The selection will be reactivated. According to the setting of the option Sort, the contours my be selected in any order, or separately for the u
and v direction.
At least four contours forming a closed area must be selected.
NOTE:
The contours must not have gaps. The cross and longitudinal contours must not intersect themselves.
When selecting the contours separately for the u and v direction (Sort active), the selection for each direction has to be terminated with OK in
the selection window.
U, V
These buttons can only be activated if Sort is switched on.
The raw data contours in u and v direction can be reselected.
Geometry, Fix
You may select additional geometry within the selected area which shall be included into the approximation. When using the option Fix, com-
pared with Geometry, the program tries to draw the patch nearer to the objects.
Figure 238 Selection of additional geometry
circle as fixed object
449
PARAMETERISATION
22
Sort
ON
The raw data contours have to be selected separately in u and v direction.
OFF
The contours can be selected in any order.
Deviation
The deviation between patch and raw data are computed and displayed.
Order: U, V
The order in u and v direction can be set.
Modify
Via this button, the function Patch modification Control Point (see page 482) will be activated where the crated patch can be modified
without reselecting it.
Parameterisation
The following types of parameterisation in u and v direction are available for the approximation.
Equidistant
The computation is carried out assuming that the given points are distributed regularly according to the patch parameter.
Chordal
Mean
Auto
The parameterisation types Equidistant, Chordal and Mean are computed. The program chooses the result delivering the smallest
deviation from the original geometry.
Auto Arc
The parameterisation types Equidistant, Chordal and Mean are computed. The program chooses the result producing the shortest
arc length.
Iterations 3
By multiple computation according to the specified parameterisation type the program tries to adapt the patch closer to the original data.
Smooth
than 1.
Global Iterations
Iterative improvement of the surface parameters.
Tolerance
Two raw data contours have a common intersection point if the minimum distance between them is smaller than the specified tolerance.
22.4 Patch creation By Curves

With this function surfaces can be created from edge curves. Parameterisation type, smoothing factor and approximation orders can be set for
edges being not in Bzier representation.
450
GENERAL INFORMATION
22
Figure 239 Patch creation by curves
face edge
patch edge
Face 6
25
24
Face 5 CURVE/1
Face 7
CONTOUR/1 curve
segment
raw data
segment
2 to 4 edges must be defined for carrying out the function. The edge lengths may be restricted. The patch will be created considering the option
Adapt, if desired.
Figure 240 Patch creation by 2 edge curves
no intersection point
one intersection point
without Adapt with Adapt
two intersection points
selected edge curves

ordinary corner or intersection point of the edges
edge restriction
degenerated edge
451
GENERAL INFORMATION
22
two intersection points
without Adapt with Adapt
three intersection points

ordinary corner or intersec-
tion point of the edges
degenerated edge
four intersection points

intersection point of the edges
Creation of degenerated patches

In some cases, so-called degenerated patches may be produced. For this, the length of the edges that are not required will be set to 0.001 mm
to avoid singularities.
Figure 243 Triangular patch
0.001 mm
First, the degenerated edge will be generated at the intersection point with the largest deviation. However, using the button Alternative you can
select all three alternatives to define the position of the degenerated edge, e. g. in order to adapt the parameterisation to adjacent patches.
452
CURVES
22
Figure 244 Adapted Parameterisation
degenerated edge
Alternative 1 Alternative 2
Order of the new patch

Both in U- and in V-direction, the new patch adopts the order of the edge curve with the highest order (see figure below). The orders set in the
parameter menu for edges which are not in Bezier representation are taken into consideration.
Figure 245 Order of the new patch
edge curves patch
order = 5
order = 3
order in
v direction= 4
order = 4
order in
order = 6 u direction= 6
The menu consists of the tabs Curves and Parameterisation, which are described in the following sections.
22.4.2 Curves
Select +
A new selection will be carried out. The selection order is not relevant. You may select additional edges using the button +.
The pick position on the input curves determines the part of the curves used for patch creation.
Tangent +
Edges can be determined at which tangent continuity shall additionally be kept. The selection order is not relevant. You may select further
edges using the button +.
Polygon
Temporary polygons can be created for being the edge curves.
Restrict +
Parts of the selected edges can be used for creating the patch. For that, begin and end point of the desired edge curve must be selected. Fur-
ther restrictions can be made using the button +.
Exact
You may choose between mathematically exact and heuristic normal continuous transitions (projection method).
Adapt
If this option is active, the new edge will be created by adjusting the opposite edge. A translation and rotation will be carried out.
453
PARAMETERISATION
22
Gap
This value determines up to which distance the edges are considered to be connected or intersecting each other.
Deviation
Display of the deviation between the created patch and the parts of the selected input curves used for creation.
Order: Arc, NURBS/Raw, Face Edge

(Order: Arc, NURBS/Raw Data, Face Edge)
Orders can be set individually for the approximation of these curve types.
Modify
Via this button the function Patch modification Control Point will be activated where the created patch can be modified without reselecting
it (see page 482).
The parameter menu contains options and settings for controlling the approximation of edges which are not in Bzier representation. They are
described in detail in section 22.3.3 Parameterisation on page 450, in the function Patch creation By Raw Data.
22.5 Patch creation By Patches

Any number of neighboured patches can be approximated by a single patch using this function. The system computes the topological boundary,
as well as the corner points of the selected patch cluster. If the number of corners found is smaller or larger than four, the corners for the new
patch have to be selected individually.
Figure 246 Patch creation from several patches
5.628
The menu consists of the tabs Patches and Parameterisation, which are described in the following sections.
22.5.2 Patches
Select +
The selection will be reactivated. Using the button + you may select additional patches.
Corners
If more or less than four corners have been found, you may reselect the corners of the patch to be created.
454
PARAMETERISATION
22
Duplicate
The original patches are duplicated before executing the function.
Deviation
The maximum deviation of the patch from the original patch cluster is displayed.
Order: U, V
The order in u and v direction may be specified.
Modify
Via this button, the function Patch modification Control Point will be activated where the patch can be modified without reselecting it (see
page 482).
The options and parameters in this menu are described in detail in section 22.3.3 Parameterisation on page 450, in the function Patch creation
By Raw Data.
In addition to the parameters available there, the following option is available for the creation of a patch from several patches:
Adapt
The points created internally for computing the patch are distributed dependent on the curvature. In patch areas with a large curvature, more
points are created. This leads to a greater influence on the approximation.
In order to achieve the highest possible approximation quality, the parameterisation method Auto should be used, and the smoothing factor
reduced.
The option Tolerance has the following meaning in this function:
Tolerance
Two patches are neighboured if their distance from each other is smaller than this value.
22.6 Patch creation Region

This function allows to select geometry objects as a projection base for patch creation.
The menu Region
Select
Reactivates the selection of geometry objects to be used as projection base.
Region
Activates the Selection (Region) (see page 61).
Scan Region
This option is only available if scans have been selected as projection base.
Activates the Selection (Scan Region) (see page 62).
Projection Direction: X, Y, Z, Plane, View, Vector, Normal

The patch will be projected onto the scan in the specified projection direction.
Order
The patch will be created having the defined orders in the u- and v-directions. After having created a patch, you can modify the order and
assign it by reactivating OK.
Modify
If the created patch shall be modified, you can activate the function Patch modification Control Point with this button.
455
PATCH CREATION CORNER BLEND
22
Smooth
The created patch can be smoothed with the specified factor.
Deviation
Displays the deviation of the new patch from the projection base.
22.7 Patch creation Corner Blend

This function creates a corner fillet as blend surface between three intersecting fillets as underlying surfaces.
The corner fillet consists of four edges. Three of them are connected edges to the underlying trimmed surfaces. The fourth edge is connected to
a support surface.
Input geometry Corner Blend with trimmed underlying

fillet surfaces
support surface
Fillet 3
Fillet 1
Fillet 2
After having selected the start curves and confirmed with OK, a preview of the corner fillet is displayed in the graphics area. In the preview, the
corner fillet can be modified via the options in the function window as well as using the following symbols in the graphics area:
The point symbols at the upper blend curve are used to modify the upper corners of the corner fillet.
The vector symbols are used to manipulate the local form of the upper blend curve. This partly influences the fillet corner shape.
Clicking the right mouse button activates the context menu Surface Point. For the description of the context menu options, please refer to the sec-
tion 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41.
22.7.1 Corner
Select
Surface 1-3
Selection of the underlying surfaces.
456
CORNER
22
Support
Selection of a support surface for the upper blend curve of the corner fillet.
With the button +, additional surfaces can be selected.
Transition
As transition quality between fillet surface and underlying surfaces you can select for each side a continuity from Position to Torsion/G.
The continuity of the upper blend curve on the underlying surfaces is determined automatically by the continuity on Surface 1 and Surface 2.
Limitation
Trim
The underlying surfaces are trimmed and additionally reapproximated, so that patches are created.
Face
The trim operation creates faces from the underlying surfaces.
None
The underlying surfaces remain unchanged.
Duplicate
Only available for the options Limitation: Trim and Face.
The underlying surfaces are duplicated when being trimmed.
Auto Lengths
This option automatically specifies the lengths L1 and L3 based on the input geometry and displays the computed values in the text fields.
This allows to create frequently used Corner Blend types without the need of manual post-processing.
Figure 247 Corner Blend with automatically computed lengths
Auto Lengths Off Auto Lengths On
L1, L2
(Length 1, Length 2)
The lengths L1 and L3 derive from the distance between the intersection point of the radius runout lines (RRL) of Surface 1 and Surface 3 and
the upper corner points of the corner fillet surface. For each side can be specified an individual length.
intersection point of the radius runout lines
Surface 3
Surface 1
Length 1
Length 3
radius
runout lines
Surface 2
Ratio
If on length is modified the other one will also be modified keeping the same aspect ratio.
457
APPROXIMATION
22
22.7.2 Approximation
The Approximation tab contains the same options as the Approximation tab of the function Surface Creation Advanced Fillet (see Approxi-
mation on page 596.
22.7.3 Parameter
The Parameter tab contains the same options as the Parameter tab of the function Surface Creation Advanced Fillet (see Parameter on
page 599.
22.7.4 Local Diagnosis

Diagnosis
According the selected options (check buttons Position, Tangent, Curvature, and Torsion/G) the values are displayed in the graphics area.
Surface 1, Surface 2, Surface 3

Indicates the maximum deviation of the corner fillet from the Surface 1, 2, and 3.
Surfaces
Indicates the maximum deviation between corner fillet and underlying surfaces.
22.8 Patch creation Blend (Connecting Patch)

The Blend function generates a blend patch between two curve segments or patch edges (see figure below). If patches edges are selected, the
blend patch can be connected to the adjacent patches with position, tangent, or curvature continuity.
458
BLEND
22
Figure 248 Blend patch between two patches
connecting
edge 2
connecting
edge 1 connecting or
blend patch
A blend patch matched into the interior of a patch can be created using the Offset Law.
NOTE:
If NURBS edges have been selected, the blend patch is also a NURBS patch. No offset will be computed for NURBS edges, the selected
edge is used as connecting edge.
The menu consists of the tabs Blend, Shape, and Offset, which are described in the following sections.
22.8.2 Blend
Select
A new selection of the two curve segments or patch edges between which the blend patch is to be created can be carried out.
Edge 1, Edge 2
The two curve segments or patch edges may be selected separately.
Transition: Position, Tangent, Curvature

These settings can only be made if patch edges have been selected.
The transition quality (position, tangent or curvature continuity) between blend and adjacent patch may be defined for each edge. Read also
the description of the Transition Quality: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G, page 409.
Linear
This option can only be activated if patch edges have been selected.
In addition to adjusting the patch normals, the edge curves meeting at the corner points of the blend patch will be made tangent continuous.
NOTE:
When modifying a control point row, the following behaviour occurs depending on mouse cursor position in the marked areas:
Black: The entire polygon row is moved in cross-tangent direction.
459
SHAPE
22
Green: Only the edge control point is moved in cross-tangent direction, and all other points of that polygon row are blended
properly.
Red: The edge control point is moved in the tangent plane, and all other points of that polygon row are blended properly. The
option Linear has no influence.
Tangent: Constant, Auto

With Constant you will get a constant, with Auto a more regular, variable distribution.
Modify 1, Modify 2
These buttons are available if patch edges are selected.
The function Patch modification Matching (see page 485) is activated to match the created blend patch at the selected edge. Edges and
patch are pre-selected as reference to the matching function. Order of the blend patch and transition conditions at the selected edge are
passed to the matching function.
Diagnosis
If this check button is switched on, the minimum and maximum curvature radius is displayed in the graphics area.
Order
The order in U and V direction of the blend patch can be specified.
U
The minimum order in cross direction of the connecting edges is defined by the specified transition quality (for Position 1, for Tangent 2,
and for Curvature 3 at each edge).
V
The minimum order along the connecting edges is at least equal to the maximum order of the selected edges.
TIP:
and tricks).
Continue
This button is only available if a blend patch has already been created, and can then be re-activated at any time.
Using the button Continue the blend patch can dynamically be modified via the first three inner control point rows parallel to both connecting
edges retaining the specified transition quality.
22.8.3 Shape
The options available here can only be carried out if patch edges have been selected, and if the radio button Iso-Curve on the Offset tab is
active.
Iso 1, Iso 2
(Iso-Curve Parameter 1, Iso-Curve Parameter 2)
These settings can only be carried out if Iso-Curve is active in the parameter menu.
An iso-line on the adjacent patch with the parameter value specified here will be used as connecting edge.
After the function has been carried out, these values are set to Zero, the connecting edges are lying on the selected patch edges. The oppo-
site edges of the adjacent patches correspond to the parameter value One.
The slider is used to move the edges of the blend patch across the adjacent patches, i. e. the blend patch will be extrapolated (see figure
below).
460
OFFSET
22
Figure 249 Extrapolation of the blend patch
1.0
0.0
patch 1
0.0
1.0
patch 2 Iso 1 = 0.75
extrapolated
blend patch Iso 2 = 0.0
Shape 1, Shape 2
These options are available if Tangent or Curvature is set for the corresponding connecting edge.
Using the sliders, the shape of the created blend patch can be modified dynamically at both sides by modifying the stretch factor.
Couple
The sliders for Shape 1 and Shape 2 can be coupled.
Three text fields belong to each slider for Iso 1, Iso 2, Shape 1, and Shape 2. In the last text field the corresponding value can be entered numer-
ically.
In the fields before and directly behind the sliders the extrapolation limits in the respective direction can be determined. If an extrapolation is not
possible in one direction, no value can be entered into the corresponding text field.
Continue
(see page 460)
22.8.4 Offset
The Offset Law can be used to match the blend patch into the interior of an adjacent patch. The connecting edges are defined by several param-
eters.
Per default the selected edge is used, i. e. a linear offset with the value 0 for the offset begin and end is specified. The offset values are measured
in normal direction of the selected patch edge like a chord to the corresponding patch.
B, E
(Begin, End)
For the settings Linear and Variable you may specify the offset begin (B) and end (E) values.
Linear
The offset is computed linearly between the specified offset begin and end values (see figure below).
461
LOCAL DIAGNOSIS
22
Figure 250 Offset variant Linear
adjacent patches
B=5
blend patch
E = 15
Variable
For a variable offset a mean value is computed out of the specified values for the offset begin and end. This value will be measured at a posi-
tion (centre point) to be selected on the patch edge (see figure below).
Figure 251 Offset variant Variable
adjacent patches
B=5
blend patch
selected
E = 15 centre point
Law
An offset may also be defined by individual points (interpolation points) to be selected on the patch edge (see figure below). The corre-
sponding offset values can be modified in a separate window using sliders.
Figure 252 Offset variant Law
adjacent patches
2
3
blend patch
interpolation points
Iso-Curve
An iso-line parallel to the selected edge and defined by the parameter value specified at Iso 1 and Iso 2 in the main menu is used as connect-
ing edge (see figure 249 on page 461).
Continue
(see page 460)
22.8.5 Local diagnosis

In the lower part of the function window, the following diagnosis values are displayed:
the Order in U and V direction,
462
PATCH CREATION OFFSET
22
the No. of Segments (only for NURBS/B-Spline patches), and

the minimum and maximum Curvature Radius (its position is additionally displayed in the graphics area).
22.9 Patch creation Offset

An offset surface with a distance may be computed for a surface. The offset direction corresponds to the normal direction of each patch (see fig-
ure below). A variable distance can be defined additionally for the offset computation of a single patch.
Figure 253 Offset of a surface consisting of three patches
normal vectors of the

offset surface
original patches
original surface
If NURBS-Patches with sharp bends have been selected, possibly no useful result can be computed. In this case, a result is computed, and a
warning is displayed.
The offset surface may differ from the original surface concerning curvature and size. Irregularities in the curvature of the original surface will even
be increased by the offset.
The menu consists of the tabs Offset and Variable, which are described in the following sections.
22.9.2 Offset
NOTE:
Select
The surface for which the offset shall be computed, can be reselected. The vectors of the patch normals are displayed.
Orientation
Via this button, the normal direction of the patches can be inverted by selecting the corresponding vector.
Delta
The offset surface is created with a constant distance from the original surface.
463
VARIABLE
22
Figure 254 Offset with constant distance
offset patch
original patch
Duplicate
The original surface will be duplicated before computation.
Deviation
The deviation of the created surface from the internally computed surface will be displayed.
Order U+, V+
The orders of the offset patches can be increased with respect to the original patches by the specified values.
22.9.3 Variable
These options can only be activated for a single patch.

The offset distance can be defined for each single corner point of the patch. By clicking onto + or , the corresponding patch corner is moved by
the specified value in positive or negative patch normal direction.
Figure 255 Offset with a variable distance
offset patch
A=0 original patch
22.10 Patch creation Ruled Surface

A ruled surface is created by moving a curve along a vector. After having selected the generator curve the vector symbol will be displayed in the
graphic area. The vector origin will be the selected point on the curve.
In addition to the options available in the menu the vector can be modified by graphical manipulation before as well as after the creation of the
ruled surface (see section 2.5.9 The vector symbol on page 38).
464
PATCH CREATION FACE
22
Figure 256 Translation surface
generator curve
translation vector
The menu Ruled Surface
Select
Selection of the curve/edge from which the ruled surface shall be created. By region selection you can select several curves/edges.
Vector
Via the button Vector, the translation vector can be defined. The coordinates are displayed and can be edited. The vector direction can be
inverted with .
Length
The length of the translation vector can be specified.
Appr. Tol.
(Approximation Tolerance)
Approximation tolerance for face edge segments. If this option is switched off, a default value of 0.02 will be used.
Direction
With this popup menu, extent direction and division of the ruled surface can be determined.
One Side
The ruled surface is created in positive vector direction only at one side of the generator curve.
Both Sides - 1 Surface
The ruled surface is created in positive and negative direction.
Both Sides - 2 Surfaces
Two ruled surfaces are created, one in each direction.
22.11 Patch creation Face

This function can be used to create new faces or enlarge existing faces.
Creating a face
For creating a face, one or several curves (3D trim curves) are projected onto a patch (or face). In contrast to trimming with reapproximation (see
section 23.4 Patch modification Trim on page 494), the projected curves (2D trim curves) must not connect two opposite patch edges. Surface
curves are approximated from the projected curves. Connected with the original edges, they form the edges of the face.
After the active region has been selected, the inactive region separated off by the projected curve is only blanked, the original patch and the pro-
jected curves are preserved (see figure below). In contrast to trimming, the original patch will not be reapproximated and not modified concerning
its shape and control point distribution.
465
PATCH CREATION FACE
22
Figure 257 Face creation
3D trim curve
selection of the active projection

region
2D trim curve
created face
blanked region
The selected curves may overlap each other. In this case, the program automatically finds a closed loop to be used as trim curve.
Figure 258 Overlapping trim curves
closed loop
trim curves
If the option Invert is switched on, faces are created from the regions not selected as active region. If Both is active, faces are created from the
active, as well as from the non-active region.
The trimming operation can be undone and the original geometry can be reproduced with the function Patch modification Face Untrim
(see page 502).
The advantages of the face creation compared to trimming with reapproximation
The original patch can be reproduced at any time.
Patch and face are identical concerning their shape, they only differ from each other regarding their edges.
The face edge curves can be created later.
The face edge curves can have any shape, e. g. holes can be cut into a patch.
The disadvantages are:
Faces can only be modified by global modelling.
During modification the edges cannot be fixed.
The face edge curves can be very complicated having a high number of segments. Through this, e. g. patch matchings possibly cannot be
carried out exactly.
For further information on the data type faces please refer to section 22.1 Surfaces in ICEM Surf on page 445.
Enlarging a face
If a face shall be enlarged (partial UnFace), you can select with the button Replace (see page 468) one or several successive face edge seg-
ments. After selection of the active region, the face edge segments will be replaced by the curves selected as Limitation.
466
PATCH CREATION FACE
22
Figure 259 Enlarging a face
curve as new face edge segments

limitation to be replaced
original face enlarged face
In addition to the option to completely replace one or several face edge segments, a face edge segment can also be replaced partially, if the new
limitation is intersecting the face edge segment to be replaced. In this case, the pick position of the face edge segment decides, which part of the
face edge segment divided in this way is to be replaced.
Figure 260 Partially replacing a face edge segment
new limitation pick position of the face edge

segment to be replaced
original face enlarged face
The menu Faces
Select
After pressing the button Select, you will automatically be guided into the selection mode Limitation and subsequently Active Region.
Limitation
Reactivates the selection of the face limitation.
The curves selected here are representing a part of the face edge after function execution (see button Active Region). When selecting sur-
face (patches, faces), an SSI curve (Surface-Surface Intersection) between limitation surface and surface to be modified is computed which is
then used as face limitation.
According to application, the curves are used as follows:
If a new face shall be created from a patch or face, the curves will be used as trim curves.
If an existing face shall be enlarged, the curves will be used as new face limitation to replace a part of the old limitation which is selected
separately (see button Replace). The new limitation is allowed to be outside the active region, but it has to lie on the basic patch.
A curve of type Curve Segment or Edge will automatically be saved in the face as 3D trim curve, provided that the deviation from the cre-
ated 2D trim curve is smaller than the sum of deviation and gap tolerance (see options Deviation and Close Gaps). This 3D trim curve can
be reproduced with the function Patch modification Face Untrim (see page 502).
467
PATCH CREATION FACE
22
Additional curves can be selected using the button +.
Replace
Activates the selection of the face edge segments to be deleted.
You can select one or several successive face edge segments. After selection of the active region (see button Active Region), these face
edge segments will be removed and replaced by the new limitation.
Additional face edge segments can be selected using the button +.
If the option Replace is used, the check buttons Invert and Both will be inactive.
Active Region
Reactivates the selection of the active region. The selection of the active region initiates the function execution.
By setting the options Invert and Both, you may define whether
that region shall be preserved for the face creation which has been selected as active region, or
that region which has not been selected as active region, or
both the selected and the non-selected region shall be preserved.
Type of face limitation

You can choose the type of face limitation for the selection.
Object: curves, edges, raw data, or diagnosis lines.
Iso-Curve: iso-lines in a face or patch point.
Plane: current work plane.
For detailed information on these options, please refer to Type of trim curve in Modify Patch Trim.
Duplicate
The original element is duplicated before executing the function.
Invert
This option is inactive when the button Replace has been used.
The active region can be inverted, i. e. if the option is switched on, instead from the inactive region the faces are created from the inactive
region.
Both
This option is inactive when the button Replace has been used.
The faces are created from both the active and inactive region. The option Invert has no influence in this case.
Reconstruct
Using this option, you can recreate existing faces.
The functionality corresponds to an UnFace with subsequent Reface. The difference: UnFace is done without approximation, Facing without
projection, thus keeping the geometrical surface curve data. Especially gaps can be closed in this way.

Here you can choose, in which direction the selected curves shall be projected on the patch or face to be trimmed.
IMPORTANT!
When projecting a curve in normal direction on a convex surface area, the following problem can occur: surface normals can inter-
sect each other. These intersection points have no unique projection point on the surface when projecting in normal direction
(example: projection of the cylinder axis on the cylinder surface). From such positions, a unique projection is impossible particularly
if the curve has a certain distance from the surface.
We recommend to operate as follows:
Use the normal projection (option Normal) only if the curve is lying almost directly on the surface, or the surface is concave in
the expected projection region.
Use the plane projection (option Plane) if the curve is not lying directly on the surface, or the surface is partly convex in the
expected projection region.
The face creation is influenced by maximum parameter values:
Close Gaps
The created surface curves and the original edge curves are connected to each other in a way that they form closed edges if the gaps
between the curves are smaller than this value. The gap tolerance has influence only if Extrapolate (Tan and Crv) is switched off.
Please note:
The gap distance is not measured in normal direction, but in extrapolation direction of the curves involved.
A gap between surface curves is closed by extrapolating the curves until the common intersection point. If no intersection point exists or
the distance of the intersection point to the curve ends is too large (double gap tolerance approximately), the end control points are pulled
on each other in their common centre point.
468
PATCH CREATION FACE
22
Figure 261 Close gap between surface curves
Close gap: Close gap:

Extrapolation end control points on centre point
TIP:
If closing a gap by means of the centre point method is not desired, and an extrapolation is preferred instead, you can use the func-
tion Curve Segment Modification Trim, option Obj. + Lim. (Object + Limitation) (see page 414). The curves are extrapolated
and trimmed at their common intersection point.
A gap between a surface curve and a patch edge is closed by pulling the end control point along its end tangent onto the patch edge.
Figure 262 Gap between surface curve and patch edge
If you carry out a normal projection (option Normal) across a surface bend, the projection curve is basically not continuous. This disconti-
nuity (gap) is handled as follows:
Gap < gap tolerance: the end points are pulled on each other in their common centre point.
Gap > gap tolerance: an additional face edge segment is inserted between the end points of the surface curves.
This problem will not arise when doing a plane projection (option Plane).
Figure 263 Gap at a surface bend
projection curve
surface bend 3D trim curves
gap < gap tolerance: gap > gap tolerance:

pulling the end points on inserting an additional
the common centre point face edge segment
Deviation
The maximum permissible deviation between the surface curves (created face edge) and the projected trim curves (theoretical curves) is
specified by this value. After face computation, the actual maximum value will be displayed in the menu.
But even if the desired deviation is not kept, the face is created. In this case, the computed maximum deviation will be displayed in red colour
at the associated position in the graphics area.
The definition of the term Deviation depends on the type of the selected limitation which may be curve-like or surface-like. Considering all
kinds of face edge creation, four different situations are found. Please refer to the following table for an overview:
469
PATCH CREATION SURFACE OF REVOLUTION
22
Table 28 Definition of the term Deviation for each kind of face edge creation
Type of face Type A Type B Type C Type D

creation
Limitation type Polygon Curve Curve Surface

(e. g. diagnosis data/raw (e. g. curve segment, (e. g. curve segment, (e. g. patch, face)
data) patch edge, ) patch edge, )
Projection direction Normal Normal Direction No projection
Definition of the Addition of the maximum Maximum deviation Maximum deviation Same as type B using the
term Deviation deviations from steps 1. between the projections between the projections SSI result curve as limita-
and 2. of limitation and surface of limitation and surface tion curve.
curve (onto the plane nor- curve (onto the plane nor-
mal to the local surface mal to the local surface
normal). normal).
Extrapolate (Tan, Crv)

(Extrapolate (Tangent, Curvature))
If the projected curves of the selected limitation neither intersect nor touch the natural boundary of the surface to be trimmed within the gap
tolerance, these options have the following effect:
Tan + Crv OFF: The limitation is extended only within the gap tolerance (see option Close Gaps, page 468).
Tan ON: The concerning curve end is extended linearly in UV parameter space with tangent continuity even if the gap tolerance is widely
exceeded.
Tan + Crv ON: The curvature value at the concerning curve end is kept along the whole extrapolation. The gap tolerance can be widely
exceeded.
Tan + Crv ON and dynamic modification via slider: The curvature value at the concerning curve end is kept, but it is continuously
reduced along the extrapolation so that the extrapolation ends linearly in UV parameter space. Via dynamic modification you can influ-
ence the position, where the transition to the linear extrapolation begins.
In the geometry, the curved region of the extrapolation is displayed in red, the linear region in yellow.
NOTE:
When several patches are selected, the dynamic only affects the last selected patch.
The following diagnosis value is displayed in the lower part of the function window:
Deviation
Maximum deviation value between the surface curves and the projection of the selected trim curves.
22.12 Patch creation Surface of Revolution

The rotation of a planar or 3D curve (generator curve) about an axis traces the shape of a surface of revolution.
In ICEM Surf the creation of surfaces of revolution covers the creation of the shape of spherically symmetric surfaces for which the generator
curve will be provided (surface of revolution types Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Torus and Barrel), as well as the generation of surfaces by rotation
of previously defined curves (Free-Form and Helix).
A surface of the type Helix is created by gradually displacing the generator curve along the rotation axis at the same time as it rotates about this
axis. The resulting surface is referred to as a helicoid. The turn spacing is the distance between the start and end points of the displacement
along the axis after one complete revolution (rotation angle 360) (see figure Helix on page 478).
470
INFORMATION ABOUT THE FUNCTION USAGE
22
Figure 264 Shapes of cylindrical surfaces and corresponding generator curves
Cylinder Cone Sphere Torus
Barrel Free-Form Helix
Axis of rotation
Generatrix
22.12.2 Information about the function usage

When the function is activated, according to the surface of revolution type set in the window Surface of Revolution either the vector selection (sur-
face of revolution types Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, Torus, and Barrel) or the object selection will be activated, allowing to select a freeform curve
to be used as generator curve (surface of revolution types Free-Form and Helix).
After having defined the axis of rotation or the generator curve, a surface of revolution corresponding to the current parameter settings will be cre-
ated and can be modified as long as the function is active or the button New has not been activated.
The temporary surface of revolution can be modified numerically by the text fields, dynamically by the sliders, and graphically by manipulating the
vector symbols displayed in the graphic area. For the graphic manipulation the following vectors are used:
Axis of rotation (yellow) = Z axis of the local rotation coordinate system
By manipulating the vector for the axis of rotation the following parameters can be modified:
The direction of the axis of rotation by rotating the vector symbol.
The Attachment Point of the surface of revolution by moving the origin of the local coordination system of rotation.
The Height of the surface of revolution types Cylinder and Cone and the turn spacing of the surface of revolution type Helix by modifying
the vector length.
Angle of rotation vectors (red/light red)
By manipulating the angle of rotation vectors the following parameters can be modified:
Begin and end angle of the rotation (see option Rotation: B, E) by rotating the vector symbols.
The Radius by modifying the vector length.
Angle range vectors (blue)
By manipulating the angle range vectors the following parameters can be modified:
Begin and end angle of the range (see option Range: B, E) of the surface of revolution types Sphere, Torus, and Barrel by rotating the
vectors.
End, minor, and curve radius (see option Minor) of the surface of revolution types Cone, Torus, and Barrel by modifying the vector
length.
For the description of the manipulation possibilities and context menus of the vector symbol please refer to the sections 2.5.9 The vector symbol
on page 38 and 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41.
471
SURFACE OF REVOLUTION
22
22.12.3 Surface of Revolution
New
When activating this button another surface of revolution according to the current parameter settings, i. e. a copy of the previously created
surface will be created. The last created surface of revolution can be modified in the function Create Patch Surface of Revolution, as long
as it is active.
Axis
Definition of the axis of rotation by the Vector selection.
The button will invert the axis direction.
NOTE:
When manipulating the vector symbol the window Selection (Vector) will be closed. It can be reactivated by pressing again the but-
ton Axis.
Attachment Point
Definition a new origin of the local coordinate system by the Position selection.
Surface type
Bezier
A Bezier surface with the number of patches specified in the text field with an equal rotation angle will be created. This rotation angle
results from the difference between rotation beginning angle and end angle of the whole surface divided by the number of patches.
Example: With a rotation beginning angle = 30 and a rotation end angle = 120 and a segmentation into 3 patches each patch will have
an rotation angle of 30. The first patch will be created between 30 and 60, the second patch between 60 and 90, and the third patch
between 90 and 120.
B-Spline
A B-Spline surface with the number of segments specified in the text field will be created.
NURBS
A NURBS surface will be created. A number of segments cannot be specified.
Radius
According to the selected type of surface of revolution, the following values may be defined:
Type of surface Parameter

of revolution
Cylinder cylinder radius (see figure Cylinder on page 475)
Cone start radius (see figure Cone on page 475)
Sphere sphere radius (see figure Sphere on page 476)
Torus major radius (see figure Torus on page 476)
Barrel rotation radius (see figure Barrel on page 477)
Height
Only for the types Cylinder and Cone.
472
22

of revolution
Cylinder cylinder height (see figure Cylinder on page 475)
Cone height of the frustum of a cone (see figure Cone on page 475)
Helix Turn spacing (= distance between the start and end positions of
a point in the direction of the rotation axis after a 360 revolution
(see figure Helix on page 478)
The context menu Axis for the vector symbols of surfaces of revolution type Helix offers the following special options for the definition of the
turn spacing:
Height by Angle
The turn spacing is defined by specifying an angle. The angle defines the slope of the helical curve (see figure Helix on page 478).
Height by Axis
The turn spacing is defined by computation of the angle between the rotation axis and another axis. This second axis is defined by select-
ing two points on a curve or edge.
Minor
(Minor Radius)
Only for the types Cone, Torus and Barrel.

of revolution
Cone end radius (see figure Cone on page 475)
Torus minor radius (see figure Torus on page 476)
Barrel curve radius (= radius of the generating arc) (see figure Barrel
on page 477)
Diagnosis
Save Axis
For the axis defined with the vector selection is created a line.
Appr. Tol.
Rotation: B, E
(Rotation: Begin, End)
The surface of revolution is defined by start and end angles by which the generator curve is rotated about the Z axis of the local coordinate
system of rotation. Values between 0 and 360 can be specified for the angles. The surface of revolution is always created in positive rota-
tional direction, i. e. from the start to the end angle.
When selecting the buttons B or E, a point has to be selected which will be projected into the plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The
angle between the projected point and the projection of the start point of the generator curve will be used in both cases.
473
22
Figure 265 Rotation angle
Range: B, E
(Range: Begin, End)
Only for the types Sphere, Torus and Barrel.
The values specified here determine the part of the generator curve that is to be used if only a segment of a cylindrical surface is going to be
created (see figure 266). For the range angles can be specified values between -90 and +90.
With the buttons B and E the values can be determined graphically.
Figure 266 Range angle
IMPORTANT!
Please note the notation of angle specifications. Angles can be specified in degrees, minutes, and seconds (e. g. 115 or 1o15 = 1 degree
15 minutes) or decimal numbers with up to 4 decimal places (e. g. 1.25 = 1 degree 15 minutes). Please refer also to section 2.4.3 Notation
of angle specifications on page 27 for further information.
Type of surface of revolution

The following types of surfaces of revolution can be created:
474
22
Cylinder
Generatrix Parameters
straight line parallel to the axis of rotation cylinder radius (option Radius)
cylinder height (option Height)
Cone
straight line radius at bottom (option Radius)

radius at top (option Minor)
height of cone (option Height)
475
22
Sphere
semicircle with centre on the axis radius of sphere (option Radius)

of rotation
Torus
circle major radius (option Radius)

minor radius (option Minor)
476
22
Barrel
Generatrix Parameter
circular arc radius of arc (option Radius)

curve radius (option Minor)
Free-Form
planar or 3D Bezier curve none
generatrix
477
APPROXIMATION
22
Helix
planar or 3D Bezier curve Turn spacing (option Height)
For the description of this tab please refer to section 24.2 Approximation on page 506.

22.13 Patch creation Barrel

This function for the creation of a barrel surface is used to create crowned surfaces, e. g. for car windows. This is realized by a rotation movement
around the axis of rotation. The guide sides of the barrel surface have the same radius as the drop glass guide rails.
478
PATCH CREATION BARREL
22
Figure 267 Creation of a barrel surface for a car window
guide
axis of rotation
In contrast to other methods for creating a surface of revolution the axis of rotation is not supplied as input parameter, but computed automatically,
depending on the selected algorithm.
The menu Barrel
Select
Axis Location
The axis of the barrel surface is more or less parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Parallel
Select first on the basis geometry three points defining the circle of latitude (rotation radius) and then two points defining the meridian
(curve or minor radius) of the barrel.
The axis of the created barrel surface will be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the vehicle.
The selected points are displayed in the graphic area as point symbol and can be manipulated. For the description of the manipulation
possibilities and context menus please refer to sections 2.5.8 The point symbol on page 38 and 2.5.12 General options in the context
menus on page 41
NOTE:
To preserve a useful result, the barrel surface should only slightly be modified by manipulating the point symbols.
479
PATCH CREATION BARREL
22
Figure 268 Barrel surface with netparallel axis of rotation
1 2 3
axis of rotation
2
1
Horizontal
The axis and thus also the barrel surface may be rotated in the horizontal plane.
Two further points have to be selected where the barrel shall have identical diameters.
Figure 269 Barrel surface with horizontally rotated axis
axis of rotation
Oblique
An oblique position of the barrel is defined by an additional point which is to be located on the barrel.
Figure 270 Barrel surface with oblique axis
axis of rotation
Surface type
Bezier
A Bezier surface with the number of patches specified in the text field will be created. The angle of rotation will be divided into equal parts.
Example: With a rotation beginning angle 30 and a rotation end angle 120 and a segmentation into 3 patches the first patch will be cre-
ated between 30 and 60, the second patch between 60 and 90, and the third patch between 90 and 120.
480
LOCAL DIAGNOSIS
22
B-Spline
A B-Spline surface with the number of segments specified in the text field will be created.
NURBS
A NURBS surface will be created. A number of segments cannot be specified.
Diagnosis
Rotation/Segment: A, E
(Rotation/Segment: Begin, End)
With these option the dimensions of the barrel surface are determined. With Rotation the surface area covered by rotation of the generatrix
and with Segment the segment of the generatrix used will be specified (see also options Rotation: B, E and Range: B, E of the function Cre-
ate Patch Surface of Revolution on page 473 and page 474).
The barrel surface can be extrapolated either by selecting points with the position selection (buttons B and E), numerically by specifying
angles in the text fields, or dynamically with the sliders.
IMPORTANT!

481
PATCH MODIFICATION
23
23 Patch modification
23.1 Patch modification Point

The shape of a patch can be modified by moving an arbitrary patch point. Similar to the curve modelling, point modifications have a considerably
stronger effect on the patch shape than control point modifications (see figure 142 on page 347).
Activated diagnosis functions like sections and matching diagnoses are dynamically updated.
The menu Patch Point

Delta, Normal
If the option Express is switched on, the point movement can be fixed in direction of the normal in the selected point position.
Dynamic point movement:
If only Normal is switched on, the point can be moved dynamically. Select the point and move the cursor while keeping the left mouse but-
ton pressed.
NOTE:
Numerical point movement:
If the option Delta is switched on additionally, the point is moved by the specified numerical value.

Order: U, V
The order of the patch in U and V direction may be modified.
TIP:
and tricks).
23.2 Patch modification Control Point

The control point modification allows a more slight and precise modelling than the point modification (see figure 142 on page 347).
Activated diagnosis functions like sections and matching diagnosis are dynamically updated.

Check button Delta

When using the dynamic control point movement function Express the movement radius of the selected control point(s) is restricted to the
specified value.
482
PATCH MODIFICATION CONTROL POINT
23
With the following options the movement direction of the selected control points can be specified.
Tangent
A single control point (option Single active) or a control point row (option Row active) can be moved on the control lines of the control point
mesh.
Figure 271 Control point movement on the control lines
Options Tangent and Options Tangent and

Single active Row active
NOTE:
To move the control point or a control point row into the desired direction, select a point on the side of the control line in the direc-
tion of which the control point or control point row shall be moved
Normal
The normal of the selected control point specifies the movement direction of all other selected control points.
Figure 272 Movement of a control point row with the option Normal
Offset
Movement of the selected control points in direction of their normal vector.
NOTE:
If you activate in addition to Offset also the option All, the offset will be calculated for each control point. However, the result will
not be a real aOffset surface, as the offset is not calculated for the surface points.
Figure 273 Movement of a control point row with the option Offset

483
PATCH MODIFICATION CONTROL POINT
23
Single
A single control point will be moved.
Row
A control point row will be moved. Select the connection line between two control points.
All
All inner control points will be moved.
All control points are moved together with the selected control point according to a curved function. The factor by which the movement of the
next control point shall be reduced can be defined for the U and V direction by entering numerical values in the text fields or dynamically by
using the sliders.
Example: u = 0.5, v = 0.5. The translation will be reduced for each adjacent control point by 0.75, 0.5, 0.25, etc. If the middle control point is
lifted by 10 mm in Z direction, the adjacent control points will be lifted by 7.5 mm, 5 mm, 2.5 mm, etc.
The effects of the control point modification depend on the selection of the control point.
a) Selection of an inner control point:
Only the inner control points are moved, edge and corner control points remain unchanged.
b) Selection of an edge control point:
In addition to the inner control points are moved the inner control points of the edge with the selected point. The corner points remain
unchanged.
c) Selection of a corner control point:
In addition to the inner control points the inner control points of the adjacent edges are moved.
Couple
This option is used to couple the two text fields for the U and V direction of the bell-shaped function (law) when using the option All.
Select
Individual selection of control points for modification.
Auto
Automatic selection of the control points to be modified depending on the selected position.
1. Selection of a single control point:
The selected control point will be modified according to the option Single.
2. Selection of a control point row:
The selected control point row will be modified according to the option Row.
3. Selection of a point which does not lie on a control point or a control point row:
The control points will be modified according to the option All:
a) Select an arbitrary point within the patch boundaries to move the inner control points.
b) Select a point near an edge to move the inner control points of the edge.
c) Select a point near a corner point to move the corner point together with the inner control points of the adjacent edges.
Transition Precedence
For control point modifications via a Row and activated option Tangent, this button guarantees that the rows lying next to the edge do not
destroy a normal continuous transition.
Order: U, V
The order of the patch in U and V direction may be modified.
TIP:
and tricks).
Length
This option takes effect only if the options Tangent and Row have been activated:
On
All control points of the selected row will be moved by the same distance.
Off
When moving the selected row of control points, the length ratio to the adjacent row will be kept.
484
PATCH MODIFICATION MATCHING
23
Figure 274 Effect of the option Length
Original patch Length On Length Off
23.3 Patch modification Matching

For a detailed comparison overview of the previous versions, please refer to Appendix 2: Patch modification Matching Version Compari-
son.
With this function you can connect a patch to a reference object of modify existing matchings. Usually, the patch to be connected is modified by
this operation, whereas the reference object remains unchanged.
Figure 275 Matching a patch with a reference patch
reference edge
reference patch reference patch
patch to be
connecting edge connected patch to be
connected
Start and end points of connected and reference edge are marked with S (Start) and E (End).
NOTE:
For general modelling you may toggle between the functions Patch modification Control Point and Modify Patch Matching without
having to reselect the patches to be connected.
Variant
In the window footer a popup menu is available allowing to activate variants of settings in the following frames:
Transition frame,
Projection frame, and
Mapping frame.
Options frame.
The Editor option activates the Variants window to Save, Rename, and Delete variants.
You can save up to 15 variants.
485
MATCHING
23
23.3.1 Matching
Select
New selection of connecting and reference edge.
Edge
New selection of the connecting edge at the selected patch to be connected.
Reference
New selection of the reference edge. As reference object can be selected patch/face edges or curve segments.
With the button Reference, only one object can be selected. For the selection of several objects the button + must be used.
For matching into the interior patches or faces can be selected, onto which the connecting edge is projected depending on the setting of the
option Projection.
The reference (curve, edge curve, inner surface curve) found depends on the tolerances set in the text fields Gap and Corner Distance.
Swap Sides
Edge and Reference can be swapped if individual patch edges are selected.
Symmetry
As reference geometry can be selected a symmetry plane.
Y=0
The plane Y = 0 (Side View) is defined as symmetry plane.
Plane
The current plane is defined as symmetry plane.
The following options are arranged in frames with respect to their functionality:
Transition frame
The options in the Transition frame define the transition quality required (see also function Modify Curve Segment Matching Transition
Quality: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G, page 409).
Transition
A matching created in a previous step can be selected.
The extendible area of the function window shows the deviation diagnoses Position, Normal, Curvature, and Torsion/G for the corre-
sponding inner Internal transition qualities and Corner Bend for the transition quality Tangent at Begin and End (see Diagnosis on
page 493).
If the deviation value of a diagnosis is 0, the corresponding check button in the matrix is activated. This is also valid for the deviation val-
ues for the transition qualities Curvature and Torsion/G at Begin and End not displayed in the diagnoses area.
If the check button Transition in the Auto Modes frame on the Parameter tab is activated, the selection is done automatically.
The options for defining the transition quality are arranged as a matrix. The matrix columns define the transitions quality from Position to Tor-
sion/G and the rows define where the corresponding transition quality shall be applied.
Position + Internal
The transition will be position continuous and approximates the reference (edge) curve at the edge to be connected. This approximation
will be the new patch edge.
The check buttons Begin and End are not available. The corresponding continuity condition at Begin and End is met automatically.
Tangent
Internal
Tangent continuity for the surface is kept along the interior of the common edges.
486
MATCHING
23
The cross tangents of the patch to be connected lie in the tangential plane of the reference patch. The tangential plane is defined by
the start and end point on the reference and the normal in these points.
If Begin and End are switched off, the cross tangents may point in different directions. The angle between them is the Corner Bend
indicated. In general, tangent continuity between the edge curves is not given.
cross tangents
Normals
Tangent
control point mesh
Iso-Curves
angle between
cross tangents
Begin/End
If Begin and/ or End is switched on, tangent continuity is also kept between both edge curves at the start and/or end points of the
common edges.
All cross tangents of the patch to be connected will be aligned collinear to the cross tangents of the reference patch.
course of the
cross tangents
487
MATCHING
23
Curvature/Torsion/G
Internal
Curvature and torsion continuity are kept along the interior of the common edges.
Begin/End
If in case of curvature and torsion continuous transitions, the options Begin and End are switched on, the continuity is also kept at the
start and/or end points, and the iso-curves are connected with the quality set. Example:
Curvature continuous connection without iso-curves align- Curvature continuous connection with iso-curves alignment
ment (Tangent + Curvature start and end Off) (Tangent + Curvature start and end On)
The cross direction for collinear connection inside a surface is specified with the options U, V, Radial, Begin/End, and Auto in the
lower popup menu in the Mapping frame.
Opp.
If a high transition quality is specified or the option Blend activated, eventually more control point rows as desired are modified. With the
check buttons in the Opp. column you can fix the control point rows 1 (Position) to 4 (Tangent to Torsion/G).
IMPORTANT!
If Fix: Opp. is switched off, the settings in the Internal, Begin, and End columns for the connecting side have priority over the set-
tings in the Opp. columns.
If Fix: Opp. is switched on, the Opp. have priority. Eventually, the required transition quality will not be obtained, as the number of
available control point rows is too small.
The Fix: Opp. settings always have priority over the Blend setting, even if Fix: Opp. is switched off.
Fix
The three check buttons in the lower row have the following meaning:
Fix: Begin/End
Only available if in the Tangent, Curvature, or Torsion/G rows at least on of the three check buttons Internal, Begin, or End is acti-
vated.
With the check buttons in the Begin and End columns the lengths or ratio, respectively, of the given control point distribution is fixed.
Fix: Opp.
The corresponding control points of the opposite matching remain unchanged, i. e. the matching on the opposite side of the con-
nected patch is kept with the continuity set or even fixed.
Transition mode
The options in the following popup menu influence the control point distribution.
488
MATCHING
23
Smooth Iso
(Smooth Iso-Curve)
All control points are aligned and the influence of the given inner control points removed. Therefore, the control points are eventually mod-
ified considerably in order to obtain the required result.
CtrlP Iso
(Control Point Iso-Curve)
Matching is carried out similar as with Smooth, taking into account the control point distribution. This allows to obtain a smoothed regular
control point distribution following the control point structure.
The Fix: Begin/End options are not available.
Minimal
Depending on the projection type used (see Projection frame), the control points are projected into the local tangential planes of the ref-
erence patch. This way, patch modifications are most slightly without implicit smoothing (as it is done with Smooth and CtrlP).
The Fix: Begin/End options are not available.
Smooth Lin, CtrlP Lin
(Smooth Linear, Control Point Linear)
These options are based on the Smooth Iso and CtrlP Iso options and have the additional effect that the control points of the second row
of the connecting patch lie on a straight line with the control points of the reference patch, if
1. the edge curves of the connecting patch are connected position and tangent continuously with the edge curves of the reference
patch, or these continuities are required, and
2. the control points along the connecting edge of both patches lie one on each other by pairs.
For this reason, these options are frequently used with Tangent Begin/End On, as this way, condition 1 is created.
If the edge curves of the connecting edge are connected to the edge curves of the reference patch in a higher transition quality as Tan-
gent, in case of Curvature are influenced three control point rows and in case of Torsion/G four control point rows, respectively. I. e. the
(influenced) control points are aligned in a way that this alignment can be considered as a curvature or torsion continuous continuation of
the corresponding control points of the reference patch.
If the edge curves of the connecting patch are not connected tangent continuously with the edge curves of the reference patch and this
continuity is not required, the control point alignment in the inner of each row is geared to both edge control points, however, without being
linear (to the four edge control points). Also higher transition qualities are not taken into account (as described above).
For both options, the Begin and End check buttons for keeping the selected continuity at the edge curves are not available. For CtrlP Lin,
also the Fix: Begin/End check buttons are not available.
Projection frame
The options of this popup menu determine the projection direction of the control point rows of the patch to be connected which are modified
according to the selected transition quality. As projection direction can be defined either an arbitrary direction (X, Y, Z, Vector, Plane, View)
or normal direction. If Normal is used, every projection is done orthogonally.
The projection direction is used for the following options:
for a partial matching with Partial,
for the transition mode Minimal,
for the mapping type Projection.
NOTE:
In case of using another projection direction than Normal the transition mode is automatically set to Minimal.
Mapping frame
The options in the mapping frame define the parametric matching properties and the cross derivative calculation.
The first popup menu determines the parameter mapping.
Exact
This option is only useful if the length of reference curve is equal to that one of the patch edge according to the permissible Corner Dis-
tance defined in the parameter menu.
In this case, the parameterisation of the reference object can be adopted when executing the function. For that, the order of the patch will
be increased, if required.
489
MATCHING
23
Figure 276 Not exact and exact patch matching
reference patch
patch to be
connected
original geometry Exact Off Exact On
Arc Length
The relative arc length is calculated similarly on both curves.
Projection
The projection direction set in the Projection frame frame is used.
In case of tangent, curvature, and torsion continuous matchings (Tangent, Curvature/Torsion/G) the inner control points are projected
into the specified direction.
The tangent lengths will remain unchanged with regard to the projection direction.
When matching into the interior the projection direction Normal is always used if the option is switched off.
In case of matchings into the interior with transition quality Tangent and higher, the second popup menu determines in which direction the
edge curve of the patch to be connected shall run on the reference patch.
U, V
The edge to be connected is aligned in U or V direction of the reference patch.
Radial
The curve projected onto the reference patch determines the direction of the patch to be connected.
Auto
The optimal direction is calculated internally.
The Auto mode first tries to use a parametric direction. If this is not possible, the Begin-End option will be used.
Begin-End
For the cross tangents calculation, the projected start and end tangents are averaged and calculated in each point.
Options frame
Partial
The reference edge is limited to the specified range. You may determine whether the patch shall be connected to a limited range only or
to the complete reference edge.
NOTE:
In some cases, e. g. in case of very small patches, the Corner Distance has to be changed in the parameter menu.
At the reference edge point symbols are available at start and end points to manipulate the area to be restricted. Clicking right on the
point symbols activates the context menus Corner Begin and Corner End the following options:
Position
Via a temporary point selection, the position on the reference edge is defined most exactly as possible according to the projection
specified.
Parameter:
In Parameter-Begin and Parameter-End submenus, the distance to the corresponding end point of the reference edge can be speci-
fied numerically.
Reset
All manual changes are undone and the point symbols are reset to their start position.
Expand
The selected point symbol is set onto the corresponding end point of the reference edge.
Expand Both
Both point symbols are set onto the corresponding end points of the reference edge.
Mousewarp, Snap
For the description of these options, please refer to 2.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 41.
Extrapolate
If the reference edge is shorter than the connecting edge, this check button allows to specify whether the reference edge shall be extrap-
olated or not.
490
MATCHING
23
NOTE:
This is only supported for contiguous reference edges.
When matching into the interior of a surface, the edge to be connected can be extrapolated to the edge of the reference surface, provided
that the distance is smaller than the value specified in Corner Distance.
Extrapolate Off Extrapolate On
Blend
To get a regular control point distribution or to maintain the control point distribution, not only the control points required for alignment are
modified, but the whole control point polygon, if Blend is switched on. The blend can also be controlled via the slider Without Blend,
With Blend in the Parameter tab.
NOTE:
If the check buttons Opp. are switched off, the transition quality will eventually not be kept on the opposite side of patches with low
order.
In case of matching to a curve using the option Blend, all control points are translated by the same amount as the control point row at the
selected edge.
Figure 277 Blend effect when matching to a curve
original geometry Blend Off Blend On
Base
Base Patch
If the base patch is a face, the edge to be connected is projected onto the underlying surface.
Modification modes
In addition to the connecting patch also the reference patch can be modified. In this case, matching is calculated using mean values of
the properties of both patches along the common edge. Following options can be used:
One-sided
Only the connecting patch is modified.
Both - Mean
Both patches are modified with mean values of the derivatives.
Both - Shape
Both patches are modified with mean values of the shapes.
491
PARAMETER
23
One-sided Both - Mean Both - Shape

O id d
Order: U, V
The order of the patch in U and V direction can be modified.
TIP:
and tricks).
Adapt
If the order of the reference patch in cross direction is higher than the order of the patch to be connected, it will be adopted. A lower order will
not be adopted.
If the check button Adapt in the Auto Modes frame on the Parameter tab is activated, the check is done automatically.
Segmentation
Via this option, additional tangent continuous segment boundaries can be inserted. If you have selected a Bezier patch, the following mes-
sage appears: Bezier Patch found. Convert? In case of a confirmation with Yes, the patch will be converted to B-Spline and segmented.
For this, the selected dividing point is projected onto the nearest edge of the patch to be aligned (see figure 285 on page 501). The segmen-
tation will be carried out at this position.
Carry out the curvature diagnoses before executing the function. It is recommended to insert a segment boundary at that position where the
deviation has its largest value. Through this, a higher matching quality will be achieved, and the patch will become more flexible.
23.3.2 Parameter
Tolerances
Corner Distance
Corner distance for identifying reference objects with equal lengths for which an exact matching is possible.
Gap
Gap tolerance parameter for identifying and assigning the reference geometry.
Display
Count
The number of points specified here will be used for calculating the deviations along the connecting edge and comparing them.
Scaling
Scaling factor for the display of the normal deviation.
Both Sides
This option allows you to display also the control points of the patch of the selected reference edge.
Auto Modes
Transition
If the check button is switched on, the transition quality is checked when carrying out OK. The check buttons in the Internal, Begin, and
End columns in the Transition frame are
492
DIAGNOSIS
23
deactivated if the required corresponding transition quality is not achieved, or,

activated if the corresponding transition quality not required is achieved.
The check buttons in the Opp. column are not influenced.
If the check button is switched off, the existing parameter settings are taken over for the next patch matching.
Adapt
The order of the patch to be connected will be adapted automatically (see also option Adapt in the Order frame on the Matching tab).
This option cannot be used if more than one surface is selected as reference.
Convert
During the adaptation, Bezier Patches/Surfaces can be converted to B-Spline Patches/Surfaces.
If the reference patch is a B-Spline (multi-segment surface), for the optimal position matching the order of the patch to be connected has
to be increased to the reference order with Adapt and additionally, the number of segment boundaries has to be adapted to that of the
reference.
If the patch to be connected is a Bezier patch, Adapt and Convert adapt the order and convert the patch to be connected to a B-Spline,
i. e. the segment boundaries are inserted as existing in the reference. The optimal position matching is possible.
If the patch to be connect is a B-Spline (NURBS), Adapt adapts the order and the segment boundaries are inserted as existing in the ref-
erence. The optimal position matching is possible. A conversion is not necessary, the Convert option needs not to be activated.
This option cannot be used if more than one patch is selected as reference.
Apply
After each control point modification of the patch to be connected the function is carried out again as with OK.
Options
In this check box, the following options for the display of diagnoses in the graphics area are available:
Deviation
The modification of the patch to be connected is displayed in the graphics area.
Normals
The normal deviation is displayed in the graphics area.
Preview
The reference found or generated will be displayed in the graphics area.
Partial
In the diagnoses only the part of the connecting edge for which reference geometry exists is checked. The marker B and E on the con-
necting edge show the diagnosed region.
Continuity tolerances
In the text fields Pos (Position), Tan (Tangent), Crv (Curvature), and Tor (Torsion/G) the tolerance values for the maximal admissible devia-
tion are specified.
NOTE:
These tolerances are used to compute the transition type for Transition. They have no influence on the quality of the transition to
be created.
Undo, Redo
This slider allows a continuous transition between original and modified geometry.
Without Blend, With Blend

This slider allows a continuous transition between modified geometry without and with Blend, if the option Blend is activated.
23.3.3 Diagnosis
In the extendible area the minimum and maximum deviation values of the transition qualities used are displayed.
IMPORTANT!
In case of diagnoses at a symmetry plane (Symmetry) the deviation value corresponds to the half of the value resulting from a diagnosis of
the patch edge with the edge mirrored at the symmetry plane.
For the deviation diagnoses calculation, points on the reference edge are projected onto the connection edge, i. e. each point on the reference
edge is assigned to a corresponding point on the connecting edge.
If the position deviation is zero, both points are matching.
If a position deviation is given or only tangent continuity without position is required, the distance between the corresponding points is measured.
Position
The distance between all corresponding points is measured and the minimum and maximum distance values indicated. The point positions
where these values occur can be displayed in the graphics area.
The corresponding check button in the matrix: Position | Internal
493
PATCH MODIFICATION TRIM
23
Normal
The angle between the surface normals in the corresponding points is measured and the minimum and maximum angle values indicated. The
point positions where these values occur can be displayed in the graphics area.
The corresponding check button in the matrix: Tangent | Internal
Curvature
Indication of the minimum and maximum curvature deviation.
The corresponding check button in the matrix: Curvature | Internal
Torsion/G
Indication of the minimum and maximum torsion deviation.
The corresponding check button in the matrix: Torsion/G | Internal
Corner Bend B:/E:
Minimum and maximum angle deviation at the start and end corners of the common edges, if in the Transition frame the check buttons
Begin and/or End are deactivated.
The corresponding check buttons in the matrix: Tangent | Begin / End
The figure below gives an overview over the matrix check button assignments to the diagnoses:
23.4 Patch modification Trim

For a trim operation, a patch is segmented into two parts at a trim curve (limitation), and reapproximated, i. e. recalculated. Either both sides of
the patch will be preserved, or only that part which has been selected as active region.
If you have selected a curve as limitation, it will be projected onto the patch.
If the patch is to be trimmed at an iso-line, a point has to be selected either directly on the patch, or at any other position. The point position
defines the position of the iso-line.
With the Face Trimming functionality (see section 22.11 Patch creation Face on page 465), in contrast to the Trimming with Reapproximation
described here, the original patch and the projected curve will be preserved.
NURBS patches can also be trimmed. However, if the original patch has bends, possibly no useful result can be computed. In this case, you
should convert the original patch to Bzier representation and trim each segment separately.
The new patch and the patch edges have a certain deviation from the original patch and the trim curve. It depends on the shape of the projected
curve and its course along the patch, as well as on the patch order.
Shape and course of the trim curve

The dependency of the deviation on the shape and course of the curve is displayed in the following figure.
Trimming at an iso-curve does not cause a deviation.
494
PATCH MODIFICATION TRIM
23
Figure 278 Course and shape of the trim curve
small deviation large deviation
course of the curve compared to iso-line
parallel diagonally
shape of the curve
similar to oscillates
iso-line around iso-line
Order of the patch

Small deviations are achieved with a large order of the trimmed patch. Large deviations occur if the trimmed patch has a lower order than the orig-
inal patch. The order should not be smaller than the order of the original patch.
The menu Trim
Select
Limitation +
The trim curves can be reselected according to the setting Object or Iso-Curve. Additional curves can be selected using the button +.
Active Region
The selection of the active region will be reactivated.
Option Multiple ON:
After trimming the patch, another active region can be selected. The limitation defined before will be used again for the trim operation. In
this way, adjacent patches can be trimmed at an iso-line selected once.
Option Multiple OFF:
The patch will remain selected after the computation. In this case, a new selection of the active region must explicitly be activated.
Type of trim curve

You can choose the type of trim curve (limitation) for the selection.
Object
The following objects can be selected as limitation:
curves and curve segments
patch and face edges
raw data contours
diagnostic curves
495
PATCH MODIFICATION REFIT PATCH
23
The projection direction of the curve onto the patch can be set via a pulldown menu.
Iso-Curve
An iso-line can be selected as limitation object. For that, select a point directly on the patch or on any object. In the latter case, the point
will be projected onto the patch. The projection direction can be set via a pulldown menu. The position of the projected point determines
the position of the iso-line(s).
If a patch or patch edge is selected as limitation, the trim curves (iso-curves) are displayed immediately. If an edge is selected, one iso-
curve is displayed, if an inner patch point is selected, two iso-curves are displayed. The user selects the iso-curve, where the patch shall
be divided. The active region of the trimmed patch is determined by the selection position of the iso-curve.
NOTE FOR THE CREATE PATCH FACE FUNCTION:

The handling for the face creation at iso-curves is equal to that of the trimming function. For the selection of faces or face edges as
limitation applies the same method as described above for patches and patch edges.
Plane
The current work plane can be selected as limitation. After activating this option, you have to select the active region of the patch.
NOTE:
When using this option, it is recommendable to activate the plane symbol.

Here you can choose, in which direction the trim curve (option Object) resp. the point (if a point has been selected on an object with the
option Iso-Curve) shall be projected onto the patch to be trimmed.
Duplicate
The original patch will be duplicated before executing the trim operation.
Invert
If the option is switched on, that part of the patch will be preserved which has not been not selected as active region.
Both
If the option is switched on, both parts of the patch will preserved.
Extrapolate
If the trim curve barely fails to connect opposite patch edges, the patch is extrapolated by a small amount in order to increase the probability
that the (extrapolated) trim curve connects opposite edges.
In the case that a curve or a position selected as limitation cannot be projected onto the patch, the procedure is as follows:
Curve as limitation object (limitation type Object):
The patch is internally extrapolated at the edge lying closest to the selected curve. The patch is extrapolated until the limitation curves
projection which is extrapolated as well, if necessary, connects two opposite edges in a way that the patch may be trimmed at this projec-
tion.
The projection of the limitation curve, if required, is extrapolated with tangent continuity and linearly to the surface.
Point for defining an iso-line (limitation type Iso-Curve):
The patch is internally extrapolated at the edge lying closest to the selected position. The trim position is projected onto the patch. One or
two iso-lines are displayed as trim limitations, one if them has to be selected.
NOTE:
The active region must be selected close enough to the limitation to be recognized properly.
Deviation
Patch
Display of the maximum deviation of the new patch from the original patch in normal direction.
Curve
Display of the maximum deviation of the new patch edges from the trim curve.
Multiple
ON
You can select another active region immediately after the execution of the trim operation. The limitation selected before will be used
again.
OFF
The patch remains selected after the computation. A new selection of the active region must explicitly be activated in this case.
Order: U, V
The order of the original patch can be modified, and will be adopted by the new patch.
NOTE:
The order can only be modified after the trim operation has been carried out. For this, execute an Undo, specify the desired order,
and trim again. Read also section Order of the patch on page 495.
23.5 Patch modification Refit Patch

With this function the shape of a patch can be adapted to an arbitrary underlying geometry.
496
PATCH MODIFICATION REFIT PATCH
23
Figure 279 Refit patch to a scan
SCAN/1
SCAN/1
The menu Refit Patch
Select
A new patch to be modified can be selected.
Fixed Edges
The selected patch edges will be fixed when carrying out the function.
Fixed Corners
The selected patch corners will be fixed when carrying out the function.
Geometry
Selection of a new reference geometry.
Scan Region +
Scans selected as reference geometry can be restricted to subsets by selecting a point on the corresponding scan. The system computes the
scan area around this point within which the normals do not deviate from the angle tolerance specified in Max. Angle. The subsets of the
scans will be highlighted.
Using the button + you may select additional scan regions.
NOTE:
The scan functions are only available if you have a license for the Scan Processor.
Deviation
The deviation between the reference geometry and the patch after the refit can be displayed.
You can specify a projection direction for the patch refit:
X-, Y- or Z-direction (X, Y, Z),
the direction of the current work plane normal (Plane),
the direction of the current view plane normal (View),
the direction of a vector (Vector), or
the direction of the patch normal of a selected patch point (Normal).
Smooth Factor
This value allows the desired compromise between an exact approximation and a very smooth patch.
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
This value specifies the maximum distance geometry may have from the patch to be considered as reference geometry.
Max. Angle
(Maximum Angle)
If a subset of the scan has been selected, you can enter in the text field the angle tolerance specifying the maximum deviation of the normals
around the selected point.
497
PATCH MODIFICATION CROP
23
IMPORTANT!
Order: U, V
The order of the patch in u and v direction can be modified.
23.6 Patch modification Crop

With this function you may crop base patches of selected faces to the size of the face. You can crop all base patches by one step (with OK) or
select single faces (option Single).
Figure 280 Crop base patches
Base Patch
Face
The menu Crop
Select
The selection of the faces to be modified is reactivated. The base patches of all selected faces are displayed.
Single
You can select single base patches to be modified.
Colour Base Patch
You can modify the colour of the base patches.
23.7 Patch modification Smooth

By smoothing a patch, a more regular course of the curvature will be achieved.
498
PATCH MODIFICATION ALIGNMENT
23
Figure 281 Smoothing a patch
irregular control point polygon regular control point polygon
The menu Smooth
Fixed Edges +/Tangent +

Patch edges or their tangents can be fixed during the modification.
All: Fixes all patch edges or tangents.
Selected: Fixes the selected patch edges or tangents.
Deviation
Display of the maximum deviation of the modified patch from the original patch.
Factor
The parameter range is between 0 (= no smoothing) and 1 (= maximum smoothing).
U&V, U, V
You can specify if the smoothing operation shall process all control points simultaneously (U&V) or only the control point rows in U or V direc-
tion.
Undo, Redo
The local undo can be executed dynamically via a slider or by entering a value in the text field.
Order: U, V
The order of the patch in u and v direction can be set.
23.8 Patch modification Alignment

A patch can be matched to or aligned with any reference objects. All four patch edges can be modified simultaneously. If your selection is contra-
dictory, the most appropriate alternative will be taken. A symmetry plane can also be selected as matching geometry.
499
ALIGNMENT
23
Figure 282 Aligning a patch
patch to be
aligned
reference edges
The menu consists of the tabs Alignment and Parameter, which are described in the following sections.
23.8.2 Alignment
Select
A new selection of patch and reference objects can be carried out.
Reference
New reference geometry can be selected. However, only those objects will be considered which are not farther away from the patch edges
than the distance specified in the parameter menu.
Segmentation
Via this option, additional tangent continuous segment boundaries can be inserted in NURBS/B-Spline patches. If you have selected a Bzier
patch, the following message appears: Bezier Patch found. Convert?. In case of a confirmation with Yes, the patch will be converted to
NURBS and segmented.
For this, the selected dividing point is projected onto the nearest edge of the patch to be aligned (see figure 285). The segmentation will be
carried out at this position.
Carry out the curvature diagnoses before executing the function. It is recommended to insert a segment boundary at that position where the
deviation has its largest value. Through this, a higher matching quality will be achieved, and the patch will become more flexible.
500
ALIGNMENT
23
Figure 283 Original geometry
patch to be aligned
adjacent
connecting edge with patches
inflection points
Figure 284 Alignment without segmentation
The matching cannot be carried

out with high quality.
Figure 285 Alignment with segmentation
inserted segment
boundary
dividing point
The matching quality is improved

by the segmentation.
Matching types: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

A position, normal, curvature continuous, or torsion continuous matching can be realized between the patch edges and the reference objects.
501
PARAMETER
23
Separate
ON
The reference geometry can be selected individually for each edge. The edges are labelled separately for the selection.
OFF
The selected reference geometry will automatically be assigned to the four patch edges.
Symmetry
The symmetry plane specified in the parameter menu can be selected as reference geometry.
Deviation
The modification of the patch will be displayed.
Exact
This option is only useful if the length of reference curve is equal to that one of the patch edge according to the permissible corner distance
defined in the parameter menu.
In this case, the parameterisation of the reference object can be adopted when executing the function (see also figure 276 on page 490). For
that, the order of the patch will be increased, if required.
Linear
If a normal continuous matching has been realized (matching type Tangent), the iso-lines of the patch can be aligned to be collinear to the
iso-lines of the reference objects.
Blend, Without Blend/With Blend

To get a regular control point distribution, not only the control points required for alignment are modified, but the whole patch if Blend is
switched on. The blend can also be controlled via a slider.
Order: U, V
The order of the patch in U and V direction can be specified.
Diagnosis: Position, Tangent, Curvature

A position, tangent and/or curvature diagnosis can be carried out between the patch edges and the reference objects.
NOTE:
The scaling value for the matching type Tangent is adopted from the diagnosis function Context Diagnoses Matching (see
page 229).
23.8.3 Parameter
Gap
Gap tolerance parameter for identifying and assigning the reference geometry.
Corner Distance
Corner distance for identifying reference objects with equal lengths for which an exact matching is possible.
Symmetry Plane
Definition of the symmetry plane.
Y=0
The plane Y = 0 (side view) is defined as symmetry plane.
Plane
The current plane (see window Plane) is defined as symmetry plane.
23.9 Patch modification Face Untrim

Faces can be untrimmed with this function (see also function Patch creation Face on page 465). The trim operation can be undone step-by-
step or completely for one or several faces. Additionally, curves can be created out of the face boundaries approximating the edges within a spec-
ified tolerance.
502
PATCH MODIFICATION FACE UNTRIM
23
Figure 286 Untrimming a face
original face with two creation of the

closed loops original patch
closed face loops

trim resp. approximating curves
edges of the original patch
The menu Face Untrim
Select +
The selection of any number of faces, face edges or face edge segments will be reactivated. Using the + button you may select additional ele-
ments.
Duplicate
The original face is duplicated before the function execution.
Complete
For each face selected directly or via a face edge (segment) this option has the following effect:
OFF
The function will only be carried out for the selected face edges or edge segments.
ON
The function will be carried out for the complete face.
Approximate
This option can only be used if one of the options Untrim + Curve or Curve is active.
ON
Curves approximating the face boundaries are created.
OFF
Curves are visualized which are possibly saved internally in the face structure. If no curves are saved, they will be created approxima-
tively.
Untrim
The trim operation will be undone for all selected faces, face edges, or face edge segments.
For face edge segments, the program proceeds as follows:
Starting from a selected face edge segment, the program searches in both directions for edge segments which are located on the natural
edge of the underlying surface. The trimming will only be undone for the region between these natural edges (sequential Untrim).
NOTE:
If no face edge segment can be found lying on a natural edge, the function behaves as if the complete face edge is selected. This
is, e. g., always the case for inner boundaries.
Untrim + Curve
In addition to undoing the trim operation (see option Untrim), an approximating curve will be created for each removed face edge segment.
503
PATCH MODIFICATION CURVE
23
Figure 287 Option Untrim + Curve for a face edge segment
face after function

original face execution
selected face edge

created curves
segment
face boundary on natural patch edges

face boundary from trim curves
NOTE:
No curves are created from face edges segments lying on natural patch edges.
Curve
Approximating curves will be created from the selected face boundaries. The face remains unchanged.
The parameters under Maximum control the automatic creation of the approximating curves.
Deviation
Maximum deviation. The curves are created in such a way that their deviation from the face boundary is smaller than the value specified here.
This is achieved by increasing the order until the maximum value is reached.
The actual deviation is numerically displayed.
NOTE:
If the actual deviation exceeds the tolerance value, this will be indicated acoustically and graphically (yellow pair of points per face
connected by a dotted line).
Order
This parameter value defines the maximum order, which can be used for curve generation. The order which is really used and which is as
small as possible derives from the original curves.
23.10 Patch modification Curve

A patch can be modified via a reference curve, i. e. modifications of the reference curve are directly transferred to the patch.
Please note:
The reference curve should lie as near as possible on or above the patch.
It should intersect two opposite edges of the patch.
Its order should not be higher than the patch order in parallel (longitudinal) direction.
Ideally an iso-curve is used as reference curve.
The menu Curve
Select
A new selection of all objects needed can be carried out.
Reference
With this button you can select a reference curve. After selection of a reference curve the button is highlighted. By reactivating the button you
may either select a new reference curve or delete the selection.
The following objects can be selected as reference curve:
curves and curve segments,
patch and face edges,
raw data contours, and
diagnostic curves.
504
PATCH MODIFICATION CURVE
23
Iso-Curve
An iso-curve can be selected as reference curve. To define an iso-curve, select a point on an edge of the selected patch.
Order
The order of the selected reference curve is displayed and can be modified.
If a raw data contour or diagnostic curve has been selected as reference curve, a Bzier curve with the specified order is approximated.

Check Button Delta

specified value.
Tangent
The tangent at the segment ends of the reference curve will be fixed.
Curvature
The curvature at the segment ends of the reference curve will be fixed.

Flexibility
This option controls the effect of the curve modification on the patch diagonally to the curve. The actually possible flexibility is restricted by the
cross order of the patch. The higher the flexibility, the more local is the effect of the reference curve modification onto the patch and the more
edge conditions of the patch can be kept.
Order: U, V
The order of the patch in u- and v-direction can be modified.
505
SURFACE CREATION
24
24 Surface creation

For general information on surfaces, please refer to section 22.1 Surfaces in ICEM Surf on page 445.
24.2 Approximation
24.2.1 General Information about Approximation

In the following addenda functions, an Approximation tab is available:
Patch creation Surface of Revolution
Surface creation Global Blend
Surface creation Profiles
Surface creation Tube
Surface creation Flanges
Surface creation Addenda
Surface creation Gap
The options of this tab allow to compute curve approximation for selected surface edges as well as any curves, depending on the approximation
type set. The approximation has direct influence on the addenda. If, for example, face edge segments are selected as spines, the approximation
allows to reduce the number of segments and thus the postprocessing to smooth the surface matchings.
The approximation is computed in two steps:
1. Creation of an initial B-Spline
With the first step, for each selected curve is created an initial B-Spline, defining the parameterisation and the number of control points, but
not their values. The B-Spline results from the B-Spline of the curve to be approximated as well as from the minimum and maximum values of
the order and the number of segments specified by the user:
Order and number of segments of the B-Spline are taken from the curve to be approximated, if they are within the specified minimum and
maximum ranges. Otherwise, they are increased or reduced to the corresponding minimum or maximum value.
2. Iterations
After the creation of the initial B-Spline, the actual approximation is computed in the second step. This is realized by a three-step iteration:
Iteration (a)
In the first iteration, the (optimal) values of the control points of the B-Spline are computed using a Newton method. The control points
allow the computation of the maximum deviation between the computed approximation curve and the original curve. If this value is
smaller than the tolerance value specified by the user, the iteration is terminated successfully.
Iteration (b) + (c)
If the computed deviation is larger than the tolerance specified, the B-Spline will be modified by increasing order and number of seg-
ments, and the iteration (a) is restarted.
Depending on the approximation type set, either the order or the number of segments is increased first: With Type: Smooth, for example,
the order is increased first to minimize the number of segments of the created curves. With the other types, the number of segments is
increased first (see also column Priority (in case of Iteration (b) + (c)) in Table 29 Functionality of the approximation types on page 509).
The following image shows the work flow of the approximation with the different possibilities:
506
APPROXIMATION
24
Figure 288 Structure view of the approximation
Step 1:
Initial B-Spline from
selected curve (param-
eterisation only)
Step 2
Approximation
Iteration (a)
max. deviation < tolerance calculation of the
control points
max. deviation > tolerance
Exact Smooth Manual
Priority: Priority:
Min. Order Min. Segments
Iteration (b) = Iteration (b) = Iteration (b) = Iteration (b) =

increase no. of increase increase no. of increase
segments order segments order
Iteration (c) = Iteration (c) = Iteration (c) = Iteration (c) =

increase increase no. of increase increase no. of
order segments order segments
all max. not all max.

values values
achieved achieved
End
Input Curve Approx. (Input Curve Approximation)
Type
In this popup menu, you can select the approximation type:
Exact
The number of segments is increased until the tolerance is kept.
The options Max. Order and Max. Segments are inactive, as these parameters cannot arbitrarily be specified. For the maximum order,
the value is internally set to 7, the maximum number of segments is unlimited.
507
APPROXIMATION
24
Figure 289 Flange at a face edge with approximation type Exact
face
segment boundary selected face edge = curve to

be approximated
Smooth
With the option Smooth, preferentially the order is increased, thus favouring the creation of a smooth curve. However, due to the restric-
tion of the number of segments, a deviation from the tolerance specified is possible.
The options Max. Order and Max. Segments are inactive, as these parameters cannot arbitrarily be specified. For the maximum order,
the value is internally set to 7, for the maximum number of segments the value is set to 3.
NOTE:
In the function Create Surface Flanges, the maximum order of the surface can exceed the value 7, if the option Increase Ord.
on the Flanges tab is active.
Figure 290 Flange at a face edge with approximation type Smooth
face
segment boundary selected face edge = curve to

be approximated
Manual
All parameters can be arbitrarily specified. Moreover, for this approximation type can be selected the Priority:
Min. Order
Minimum Order
Priority has a low order, i. e. the number of segments is increased in iteration (b).
Min. Segments
Minimum number of Segments
Priority has a low number of segments, i. e. the order is increased in iteration (b).
508
APPROXIMATION
24
Depending on the setting a deviation from the tolerance specified is possible.
NOTE:
If the approximation type Exact or Smooth is activated after Manual, the settings of the options Max. Order and Max. Segments
are set to the values internally specified for these approximation types. After returning to the approximation type Manual its values
are not restored.
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
Defines the minimum order of the resulting addenda in direction of the spine.
Max. Order
(Maximum Order)
Only available for approximation type Manual.
Defines the maximum order of the resulting addenda in direction of the spine.
Min. Segments
(Minimum number of Segments)
Defines the minimum number of segments in direction of the addenda.
Max. Segments
(Maximum number of Segments)
Only available for approximation type Manual.
Defines the maximum number of segments in direction of the addenda.
Tolerance
Specifies the maximum deviation allowed between the initial B-Spline and the curve to be approximated.
Smooth F.
(Smooth Factor)
As smooth factor can be specified values between 0 and 1. With 0 no smoothing will be computed and with 1 no approximation.
Priority: Min. Order | Min. Segments

Only available for approximation type Manual (see page 508).
The following table gives an overview of the functionality of the approximation types Exact, Smooth and Manual in conjunction with the options
Min. Order, Max. Order, Min. Segments, and Max. Segments:
Table 29 Functionality of the approximation types
Parame- Min. Order Max. Order Min. Max. Tolerance Priority Smooth
ter Segments Segments (in case of Itera- Factor
_______ tion (b) + (c))
Type
Exact arbitrary1 fixed to 71 arbitrary1 unlimited2 arbitrary; minimizing the not availa-
maximum devi- order (number of ble
ation will keep segments is
tolerance increased before
order)
Smooth arbitrary1 fixed to 71 arbitrary1 fixed to 71 arbitrary; minimizing seg- arbitrary

maximum devi- ments (order is
ation can increased before
exceed toler- number of seg-
ance ments)
Manual arbitrary1 arbitrary1 arbitrary1 arbitrary1 arbitrary; Priority arbitrary

maximum devi- Min. Order:
ation can minimizing the
exceed toler- order (number of
ance segments is
increased before
order)
Priority
Min. Segments:
minimizing seg-
ments (order is
increased before
number of seg-
ments)
509
SURFACE CREATION GLOBAL OFFSET
24
1. In step 1 (Creation of an initial B-Spline):

If necessary, reduction (if maximum values are not kept) or increase (if minimum values are not kept).
In step 2 (Iteration (b) + (c)):
Order and number of segments do not fall below the minimum value or exceed the maximum value.
2. In step 1 (Creation of an initial B-Spline):
No reduction.
In step 2 (Iteration (b) + (c)):
Unlimited increase until tolerance is kept.
Diagnosis
If the check button is active, the following diagnoses data are displayed in the function window as well as in the graphics area at the curve
position concerned.
Maximum Deviation
Indicates the maximum deviation between the initial B-Spline and the curve to be approximated.
Maximum Order
Indicates the maximum order of the initial B-Spline.
Max. Segments
Indicates the maximum number of segments of the initial B-Spline.
24.3 Surface creation Global Offset

Using this function you may create an offset surface with constant distance from the original surface. The offset direction corresponds to the nor-
mal direction of each patch.
The system tries to combine the selected surfaces to form common areas, and to keep the transition qualities as far as possible during the offset
computation. If required, the offset surfaces are trimmed or extrapolated (see figure below).
Figure 291 Global Offset
average offset
direction
offset
original surfaces
surfaces
The offset surfaces have been extrapo-

lated to keep the transition quality.
Additionally, connecting surfaces can be generated between original and offset surface (see figure 293).
If it is not possible to generate an offset for a particular surface, this surface will be marked with a red line (see figure below).
Figure 292 Offset without result
original
surfaces
offset
surfaces
510
SURFACE CREATION GLOBAL OFFSET
24
Select
The surfaces for which the offset shall be computed, can be reselected.
Orientation
According to the specified tolerances Distance (Topo) and Angle (Topo), surface areas are created. A vector indicates the average offset
direction of each area.
Via the button Orientation, the average offset direction can be inverted by selecting the vector.
Duplicate
The original surface will be duplicated before computation.
Side Surfaces
Connecting surfaces are generated between original and offset surface.
Figure 293 Creation of connecting surfaces
side surfaces
Deviation
Display of the deviation of the created surfaces from the internally computed surfaces.
Delta
The offset surface is created with the specified distance from the original surface.
Distance (Topo)
All surfaces with a distance from each other which is smaller than the specified tolerance, i. e. which are neighboured, are searched for.
Those areas containing neighboured surfaces (topology regions) are marked with a blue line.
Angle (Topo)
All surfaces with a smooth transition are searched for. Surfaces are considered to be smooth if the angle between them is smaller than the
specified tolerance. If the angle is larger than the specified value, the surfaces are supposed to have a sharp bend.
Appr. Tol.
Approximation tolerance for the offset surface. if this option is switched on, the system tries to generate the offset surface with the highest
grade of accuracy. The deviation of the created surfaces from the internally computed surfaces shall be smaller than this value.
Delta Order
If this option is switched on, the order of the offset surface will be increased compared to the original surface at maximum by the value speci-
fied here to keep the shape of the original surface at the best. The approximation tolerance will be used for orientation.
511
SURFACE CREATION GLOBAL BLEND
24
24.4 Surface creation Global Blend

This function generates one or several blend patches between two connecting edges. The connecting edges may consist of several segments,
i. e. patch or face edges, and/or curve segments. The transition quality between blend and connecting patch may be position, tangent, curvature,
or torsion continuity.
Figure 294 Global blend between patches
connecting edge1
adjacent patches
blend patches
connecting edge 2
Additionally, curves or edges can be projected onto surfaces. In this case, the blend patch will be matched to the projected curves.
The iso-lines of blend can be aligned to be collinear to the iso-lines of the adjacent patches, or defined by a moving frame. For the moving frame,
an edge or any curve can be selected as spine curve.
Depending on the transition quality of the adjacent patches between each other, the blend patches are matched to each other meeting tangent or
curvature continuity. The segmentation of the blend surface depends on the segmentation of the edge selected first.
The shape of the created blend patch(es) can be modified dynamically.
The menu consists of the tabs Blend, Parameter, and Shape, which are described in the following sections.
24.4.2 Blend
If you have once created a blend surface, this surface will be modified as soon as you make different settings and click onto OK. If a new surface
shall be generated, the button Select can be used.
Select
By default, the edge selected first will be used as spine curve for the definition of the moving frame. You can, however, select any other curve
as spine curve (see Parameter tab, section Specification of the spine curve on page 514).
Edge 1 +, Edge 2 +
The two connecting edges can be reselected. Additional edges can be selected using the buttons +.
B/E
(Begin/End)
This button becomes active as soon as both connecting edges are selected. Begin and end point of the edges may be reselected.
Select points on the first or second connecting edge, or on the projection surfaces. If the current begin or end point shall be adopted, the
selection must be cancelled by the middle mouse button.
NOTE:
The direction of the blend surface will be kept. If the new begin and end points are inverse compared to the current ones, they will
be inverted.
Transition: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

The transition quality between blend and adjacent patch(es) may be defined for the two connecting edges. Read also the description of the
Transition Quality: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G, page 409).
512
BLEND
24
The arrows displayed after selection define the direction in which the blend surfaces will be generated. Using the buttons , this direction can
be inverted for both edges.
Gap
For the selection of discontinuous curves as connecting edges, the maximum permissible gap tolerance can be specified with this option.
Appr. Tol.
Linear
The iso-lines of the blend and adjacent patches at Edge 1 and/or Edge 2 are aligned to be collinear.
Figure 295 Linear alignment of the iso-lines
connecting edges
If Linear is active for both edges, no settings of the moving frame can be done. If the option is not active for one connecting edge, the moving
frame can be defined for this edge.
At a face edge, this setting has only an effect if the edge approximately follows an iso-line.
Surfaces 1 +, Surfaces 2 +
For realizing a matching into the interior of a surface (Projection switched on), patches can be selected onto which the curves are to be pro-
jected. The projected curves (= surface curves) will be used as connecting edges for the blend patches (see figure 296).
With the buttons + additional patches can be selected.
Projection
Blend patches into the interior of a surface can be created using this option.
For this, existing curves are projected onto patches in patch normal direction. The generated surface curves will be used as connecting edge.
The patches can be selected via the buttons Surfaces 1 +, Surfaces 2 +.
Figure 296 Projected curve as connecting edge
projected curve
blend patches
3D curve
IMPORTANT!
The selected curve must allow a unique projection and form one connected curve after projection.
Dev
(Deviation)
If a 3D curve is projected onto a surface in order to realize a matching into the interior of the surface, the maximum deviation of the original
from the projected curve will be indicated here.
513
PARAMETER
24
Order: U, V
The order in cross and longitudinal direction of the blend patch(es) can be specified.
U
The minimum order in cross direction of the connecting edges is defined by the specified transition quality (for Position 1, for Tangent 2,
and for Curvature 3 at each edge).
V
The minimum order in longitudinal direction is at least equal to the maximum order at the first connecting edge.
24.4.3 Parameter
On the Parameter tab of the function Global Blend you will find options for determining the spine curve and defining a moving frame. The mov-
ing frame is used for aligning the iso-lines of the blend patch. It defines a local coordinate system that is moved along the spine curve.
NOTE:
If the option Linear is switched off for one or both connecting edges in the main menu of the function Global Blend, a moving frame can be
defined for the corresponding edge. If Linear is switched off for both edges, and a moving frame is used, the iso-lines of the blend patch will
be created as planar curves.
If you have once created a blend surface, this surface will be modified as soon as you make different settings and click onto OK. If a new surface
shall be generated, the button Select on the Blend tab can be used.
Specification of the spine curve

By default, the edge selected first will be used as spine curve for the moving frame. However, another curve can be defined as spine curve
using one of the following options:
Spine Curve
Any other curve can be selected as spine curve via this button.
Edge 2
If this check button is active, the second connecting edge will be used as spine curve.
If, in this case, the moving frame 2nd Curve is used, (see page 525), the first edge assumes the function of the second curve.

The geometry objects required for the moving frame are represented by the following elements:
Spine Curve Edge 1,

Edge 2,
or any other curve
2nd Curve Edge 2,

(Edge 1)
Surface any surface
The moving frame is used with equal mode of operation in several functions. You will find a detailed description for the function Surface crea-
tion Profiles under the corresponding options on the following pages:
(see page 523)
Axis: Auto, Vector
(see page 526)
(see page 526)
The following figures show the effect of different moving frame types in the function Global Blend.
514
PARAMETER
24
Figure 297 Global Blend: Parallel to Plane
iso-lines
connecting edges
Figure 298 Global Blend: Radial to Spine Curve
connecting edge 1 =
spine curve
Figure 299 Global Blend: 2nd Curve
connecting edge 1 =
spine curve
connecting edge 2 =
2nd curve
In addition to the settings of the moving frame, the following options are offered:
Spine Curve Parameter, Graphical

The movement of the local coordinate system along the spine curve can be displayed. For this, you can:
use the slider,
enter a spine curve parameter value into the text field, or
determine a position on the spine curve by graphical selection via the button Graphical.
Patch Type: Bezier, B-Spline, Scan

The type of the created blend surface can be specified here.
515
SHAPE
24
24.4.4 Shape
Preview
This option provides a preview on the blend surface to be created according to the set parameters before the computation. For this, cross
curves are displayed representing the shape of the surface. The number of cross curves can be entered in the text field.
If the check button is switched on, parameter changes only affect the preview. The surface will only be created or modified with OK.
Global and Variable options are only available if Tangent or Curvature is set for at least one connecting edge (see Transition: Position, Tangent,
Curvature, Torsion/G on page 512).
Global
Using this slider, the shape of the created blend patch(es) can be modified dynamically by modifying the global shape parameter. The shape
or extrapolation parameter affects the edge tangent length of the isolines that are joining the connecting edges (= blend curves). Through this,
the shape of the patch is modified (see figure below).
The corresponding value can be entered numerically in the last text field, the extrapolation limits in the fields before and directly behind the
slider.
Figure 300 Effect of the shape parameter
isoline at the con-

necting edge 1
= 1st blend curve
tangent
length
isoline at the con-

necting edge 2
= 2nd blend curve
b) after increasing the
a) original situation shape parameter
Variable
The edge tangent length of the blend curves along the connecting edges can be linear or variable.
OFF
The edge tangent length changes linearly between begin and end of the connecting edge.
ON
The edge tangent length is calculated at each position depending on the distance between the two connecting edges. A short tangent is
created if there is a small distance between connecting edge 1 and 2, a long tangent is created at a large distance.
516
SHAPE
24
Figure 301 Effect of the option Variable
a) considered geometry
top view
b) Variable OFF c) Variable ON

linear change of the non-linear change of
tangent length the tangent length
Figure 302 Application example for the option Variable
a) Variable OFF b) Variable ON

The created blend surface The nose gets flatter, the blend
generates a nose. surface is more regular.
Local
On the first connecting edge, you can define base points where the shape parameter can be changed locally. If a base point is flanked by two
more base points, a local modification of the shape parameter at the middle base point mainly affects the region between the two outer base
points.
Insert
Press this button to select a position for a new base point on the first edge.
517
APPROXIMATION
24
A context menu can be activated with the right mouse button containing, apart from general options for manipulating the point position
(see section 2.5.8 The point symbol on page 38), additionally the option Shape for a local modification of the shape parameter. After
clicking on this option, a submenu will be activated (see section 24.4.6 The Submenu Local on page 518).
Delete All
Using this button, all selected base points can be removed in one step.
Min. Rad.
(Minimum Radius)
Definition of a minimum radius for the blend surfaces. The specification of a mid radius does only make sense if the minimum radius is smaller
than the radius of the fillet fitting between the selected edges. In this case, the created surfaces will have a minimum curvature radius which is
about the given radius.
24.4.6 The Submenu Local

By clicking onto a base point with the right mouse button, a context menu will be activated containing, apart from general options, additionally an
option for a local modification of the shape parameter (see option Local, page 517).
The slider Local has the same effect as the parameter Global (see page 516). The difference: The greatest influence of the modification is at the
selected base point, and it decreases outwards more and more.
24.5 Surface creation By Curves (N-Sided Blend)

Using this function you may create an n-sided blend, e. g. to fill a gap in a surface.
Unlike the function Patch creation By Curves not only a single patch but a patch cluster is created. The number of created patches corre-
sponds to the number of curves or edges selected for the patch creation.
The selected patch edges or curves must form a closed polygon. Intersections are allowed, the intersection points will then be the corners of the
n-sided blend to be created. The polygon must be unambiguous in order to be identified and selected.
The transitions between the patches of the created n-sided blend are tangent continuous, and, if possible, is also created a tangent continuous
transition at the selected edges. However, if the patches of the original surface are not matched tangent continuously, a tangent continuous tran-
sition to the n-sided blend will also not be possible.
The meeting corners of the created patches form the star point (see figure 303).
The shape of the created patches depends on the shape of the polygon:
An angular gap will be filled with normal quadrangular patches (see figure below).
518
SURFACE CREATION BY CURVES (N-SIDED BLEND)
24
Figure 303 Filling an angular area in a patch cluster
created patch
cluster
connecting
edges
star point
In a round gap (collinear transitions between the edges) will be created a patch cluster consisting of degenerated patches (see figure below).
Figure 304 Filling a round area in a patch cluster
degenerated
patches
collinear edge
curve transition
The number of selected edges may be two to twelve. A special case is creating an n-sided blend from a gap consisting of only two edges. In this
case will be created four patches and two star points (see figure below).
Figure 305 Filling a gap between two edges
NOTE:
Creating an n-sided blend from four edge curves will not be useful. In this case you should use the function Patch creation By Curves
(see page 450).
The menu Curves
519
24
Select +
Selection of the edges of the n-sided blend to be created.
At the curve transitions may eventually appear different marker with the following meaning:
L
(Linear)
The corresponding edge curves have a collinear connection.
S
(Singular)
If at least two control points of an edge curve are identical at a corner, the curve has a singular parameterisation in the corner point.
X
The 3-D distance of the selected edge curves in the corners is larger than the value specified at Gap. You can enter a larger gap toler-
ance, click on +, and reconfirm the selection to execute the gap check again.
Additional edges may be selected using the button +.
Curves
After the selection the number of selected edges is indicated. This allows you to verify that only the desired edges have been selected.
Position +
You may select individual edges which shall be connected only with position continuity (position matching).
Additional edges may be selected using the button +.
At the selected edges will no tangent diagnosis be computed and displayed (see option Tangent).
Figure 306 N-sided blend with tangent and position continuous transition
original geometry
n-sided blend with stand-

ard parameter settings
patch edges
n-sided blend with position iso curves
continuous transitions at all connecting edges
four edges
Gap
The selected edge curves should not have a larger 3D distance than the value specified here. Gaps being larger than the gap tolerance will
be marked with X in the graphic area.
You should not choose a too large gap tolerance, as in this case very small edge pieces can be missed when detecting the closed polygon.
The text field works dynamically, e. i. the distances between the selected edge curves is checked immediately. If the admissible distance
specified by the tolerance is exceeded, an error message will be displayed and no blend surfaces can be created. In this case you must either
minimize the corresponding gap or increase the tolerance value. If the tolerance is kept, the text field Gap and the Select-plus-button are
dimmed.
Edge Infl.
(Edge Influence)
This option controls the influence of the cross edge tangents on the patches to be created (see figure below). Values between 0.01 and 3.0
are allowed; default is 1.0.
With larger values (> 1) the influence of the cross tangents towards the centre of the hole will be increased. If you enter smaller values (< 1),
the influence of the cross tangents will be decreased.
This means, that in case of a surface created in a round gap an increased edge influence will keep the edge tangency to a larger extent. The
distance between the two exterior control point rows will increase.
In case of a surface created from an angular gap the first two control point rows will not be changed.
520
24
Figure 307 Effect of the option Edge Influence
n-sided blend with decreased

edge influence
n-sided blend with increased

edge influence
Flatness
This option controls the influence of the tangent plane of the star point (see figure below). High values create a large and very flat region
around the star point, whereas small values create a peak.
Figure 308 Effect of the option Flatness
n-sided blend with

decreased flatness
n-sided blend with

increased flatness
Height
The height of the star point can be modified.
Orders
Specification of the order of the patch cluster to be created. The order can subsequently be modified. If a lower order than suggested by
Adapt is used, an optimal internal and external transition quality cannot be guaranteed.
Adapt
The order used for the creation of the patch cluster will be set to the minimum order necessary for optimum results.
Transition diagnoses
You can activate the following transition diagnoses:
Position
Distance diagnosis. The largest distance deviation along the common edge is displayed.
Tangent
Tangent diagnosis. The largest angle difference of the patch normals along the common edge is displayed.
The tangent diagnosis is not computed at edges where the patch cluster shall match position continuous only, i. e. at curves and patch
edges selected via Position +.
Inner
Diagnosis of the inner transitions of the patch cluster.
Edge
Diagnosis of the exterior transitions of the patch cluster.
521
SURFACE CREATION PROFILES
24
24.6 Surface creation Profiles

A profile surface is created by dragging one or several profile curves along a spine curve. The spine curve may consist of any number of con-
nected curve segments resp. patch or face edges.
The profiles are aligned by means of the local coordinate system, which is defined by a moving frame. They must be connected to the spine curve
at different positions. For each sequence of two profiles is computed the arithmetical mean to merge them.
If an attachment geometry is specified, the intermediate profiles are attached to it. In addition, the profiles may be adapted to additional geometry,
the limit geometry, by rotating or sliding.
The menu consists of the tabs Profiles, Advanced, Preview, Approximation, and Topology which are described in the following sections.
24.6.2 Profiles
24.6.2.1 General options
Options to define the moving frame for the creation of the intermediate profiles are available on this tab (see 24.6.2.2 Options for the moving
frame on page 523).
In addition, the following options are available on the Profiles and Advanced tabs:
Select
The selection of spine curve, profiles, and additional geometry required will be reactivated.
Spine Curve +, Profiles +

Curve segments for spine curve and profiles can be reselected. The curve segments are automatically sorted and connected keeping the fol-
lowing tolerances:
Sharp bends with an angle < 1 are smoothed.
If you want to select several profiles, the following variants can be processed without any problems:
curves without sharp bends and with any number of segments,
curves with the same number of segments, even if they contain sharp bends, or
curves with the same number of sharp bends, even if the number of segments between them is not equal.
Two curve segments are connected if their end points have a distance from each other smaller than 0.02 mm. According to this tolerance,
individual curve segments for the profile selection are automatically connected to form complete profiles which are numbered consecu-
tively. The selection therefore does not has to be confirmed with OK after each complete profile.
When using the profile type Rot No LimitDC (Rotation No Limitation Discontinuous Profiles), non-connected curve segments which are
selected as one profile (discontinuous profile) are considered as being connected.
Using the buttons + you may select more curve segments for the spine curve, and additional complete profiles.
Type of transition
Via a popup menu you may specify the shape of the surface, i. e. the transition type between the individual selected profiles:
Linear Shape
The shape of the surface between two adjacent profiles results from the calculation of a linear average between these profiles.
522
PROFILES
24
Local Shape
At each position where a profile is given, this profile is kept constant in its environment, and is then merged smoothly with the next profile.
Smooth Shape
The transition between two adjacent profiles is additionally defined by the next profiles but one. Through this, an oscillation of the surface
can be avoided.
Global Shape
The shape of the surface between two adjacent profiles is defined by all selected profiles.
OK
If you have just created a profile surface and the geometries are still selected, the previous surface will be deleted and a new one generated
with the current parameter settings by clicking on OK.
Diagnosis: Deviation diagnoses: Profile, Surface, Attach Geo, Limit Geo

(Diagnosis: Profile, Surface, Attach Geometry, Limit Geometry)
The deviation of the created profile surface from the original profile, the sliding surface, the attachment geometry or the limit geometry is dis-
played.
24.6.2.2 Options for the moving frame

In the Profiles function, you will find options for defining a moving frame. The moving frame is used for the creation of intermediate profiles that
will be merged thus generating the profile surface. The geometry objects required for the moving frame are represented by the following elements:
Spine Curve Spine Curve
2nd Curve any curve,

e. g. Limit Curve
Surface any surface,

e. g. Sliding Surface
The moving frame is used with equal mode of operation in the following functions:
Surface creation Profiles (see page 522)
Surface creation Global Blend (see page 512)
Surface creation Tube (see page 534)
Surface creation Addenda (see page 572)
Curve creation Development (see page 422)
Surface modification Addenda (see page 623)
The possible settings of the moving frame for these functions are generally described in the following. The figures are referring to the creation of
intermediate profiles in the function Profiles.
Moving frame type

The moving frame determines a local coordinate system which is moved along the spine curve. By specifying the moving frame and one vec-
tor the axes are aligned. One axis will exactly be determined. This is specified by the setting of the option Priority, depending on the moving
frame. A second axis will be aligned using additional information.
523
PROFILES
24
The following moving frame types are available:

Parallel to Plane
The local coordinate system is moved parallel to the current work plane.
Figure 309 Moving frame: Parallel to Plane
profile curve
spine curve
parallel
coordinate
systems
Since the coordinate system is always defined independently from the tangent of the spine curve in this case, no settings can be made at
Priority.
Radial to Spine Curve
The tangent of the spine curve determines the local z-axis, the specified vector the local y-axis.
Figure 310 Moving frame: Radial to Spine Curve
profile curve
spine curve
tangents of the
spine curve
Priority: Tangent 3D radial

z-axis = tangent of the spine curve
y-axis is determined by the vector
The xy-plane is always perpendicular to the tangent of the spine curve. Within this plane, the y-axis points in the direction of the vec-
tor.
Priority: Vector radial in vector direction
524
PROFILES
24
y-axis = vector
z-axis is determined by the tangent of the spine curve
The xy-plane is not implicitly perpendicular to the spine curve. However, it appears perpendicular when looking in the direction of the
vector.
If the spine curve is plane and the vector perpendicular to it (Auto switched on), both the tangent of the spine curve (local z-axis) and the
vector (local y-axis) are exactly observed. In this case, both settings at Priority will have the same result.
2nd Curve
A 2nd curve has to be selected. This curve can be redefined at any time via the button 2nd Curve.
If the edges have the same number of segments, connecting vectors are generated between corresponding segment boundaries. If the
segment number is not equal, the connecting vectors are generated depending on the arc length.
With this setting, the local x-axis of the coordinate system is dragged along the second curve. In case of profile methods with a limit curve,
this curve will be used as 2nd curve.
Figure 311 Moving frame: 2nd Curve
profile curve
spine curve
2nd curve
one axis of the coordinate

system is dragged along the
2nd curve
The connecting vector to the second curve determines the local x-axis. Either the tangent of the spine curve, or the defined vector is used
for aligning the coordinate system.
Priority: Tangent
x-axis = connection to the corresponding point on the second curve
Priority: Vector
x-axis = connection to the corresponding point on the second curve
y-axis is determined by the vector
Normal to Surface
Surfaces are needed onto which the perpendicular from the spine curve can be dropped. The local y-axis will be aligned at the surface
normal. These surfaces can be redefined at any time via the button Surface.
525
ADVANCED
24
Figure 312 Moving frame: Normal to Surface
patch normals
spine curve
profile curve
section
This setting is especially appropriate for the creation of profile surfaces using the sliding method. In this case, the selected sliding sur-
faces are used directly.
Priority: Tangent
y-axis = patch normal
Priority: Vector
y-axis = patch normal
x-axis is determined by the vector
Reference
2nd Curve +
Selection of curves.
Swap Sides
The 2nd curve is used as spine curve, and the spine curve as 2nd curve.
Surface +
Selection of surfaces.
Axes Alignment
Axis: Auto, Vector
With the vector determined here, one axis of the coordinate system is defined.
Auto ON:
A plane is determined reflecting the position of the spine curve as good as possible, i. e. a plane that has a minimum distance from
the spine curve (see also Display Plane, option Approx, page 267). The y axis of the local coordinate system will then be aligned
normal to this plane.
Auto OFF:
The vector can be specified via the button Vector.
NOTE:
It is important that an appropriate vector is selected, according to the individual moving frames. In the case Radial to Spine
Curve, for example, it should not be parallel to the spine curve tangent at no position.
You may specify which axis of the local coordinate system is exactly determined for the moving frame to be used. The effect of this set-
tings is described at the different moving frames (see Moving frame type, page 523).
24.6.3 Advanced
Options for setting the profile type and for defining the attachment and limit geometry are available on this tab.
526
ADVANCED
24
Some options are also available on the Profiles tab:
Select
(see page 522)
Spine Curve +, Profiles +

(see page 522)
Type of transition: Linear Shape, Local Shape, Smooth Shape, Global Shape
(see page 522)
Profile type
Depending on the set profile type, the required options are highlighted.
Rotate Profile
If a curve has been selected as attachment geometry, the profiles can be adapted by rotation (see figure 313 on page 529).
For this, the intermediate profiles created are subsequently rotated around their attachment point, until they touch another curve or sur-
face. The axis of rotation is parallel to the local z-axis.
The profile may be scaled in a way that it touches the limit curve in the end point.
Rot No Limit DC Selection of an attachment curve. The profiles are moved along this curve. If no attachment curve
Rotation No Limitation Discon- is selected, the profiles are attached to the spine curve.
tinuous Profiles Only the moving frame determines the movement of the profiles.
Non-connected curve segments which are selected as one profile (discontinuous profile) are con-
sidered as being connected. One surface is created for each profile segment.
Rot No Limit Selection of an attachment curve. The profiles are moved along this curve. If no attachment curve
Rotation No Limitation is selected, the profiles are attached to the spine curve.
Only the moving frame determines the movement of the profiles.
Rot Limit Curve The profile will be rotated until it touches the selected limit curve.
Rotation Limit Curve
Rot Surf Tangential The profile will be rotated until it tangentially touches the selected surface, i. e. the tangents of pro-
Rotation Surface tangential file and limit surface are identical.
527
ADVANCED
24
Rot Surf w Point The profile will be rotated until it touches the limit surface with the limit point selected on the profile.
Rotation Surface with Point If this point is not specified by the user, the end of the profile curve will be used.
Slide Profile
If a surface has been selected as attachment geometry, the profiles can be adapted by sliding (see figure 314 on page 529).
The intermediate profiles are attached to the sliding surface, and subsequently moved along the intersection curve of the sliding surface
with the local xy plane, until they touch another curve or surface.
During this movement, an imaginary sliding point remains on the intersection curve, and the profile is rotated in a way that the imaginary
sliding tangent always touches the intersection curve. The axis of rotation is parallel to the local z-axis. Sliding point and sliding tangent
are defined internally.
Slid No Limit Selection of an attachment surface. The profiles are moved across this surface.
Sliding No Limitation Only the moving frame determines the movement of the profiles.
Slid Limit Curve The profile will be moved until it touches the selected limit curve (Curve).
Sliding Limit Curve
Slid Surf Tangential The profile will be moved until it tangentially touches the selected surface, i. e. the tangents of pro-
Sliding Surface tangential file and limit surface are identical.
Slid Surf w Point The profile will be moved until it touches the limit surface with the limit point selected on the profile.
Sliding Surface with Point If this point is not specified by the user, the end of the profile curve will be used.
The following figures demonstrate the principle of Rotation and Sliding:
528
ADVANCED
24
Figure 313 Adaptation to a curve by rotating the profile (type: Rot Limit Curve)
limit curve
rotation
profile curve
spine curve created

profile surface
The adaptation has been

carried out without Scaling.
Figure 314 Adaptation to a surface by sliding the profile (type: Slid Surf Tangential)
limit surface
touching curve
profile curve
sliding
sliding surface
created
profile surface
spine curve section
Attach to: Curve +, Surface +

If no other setting or selection is active, the profiles are attached to the spine curve. However, you may also determine an additional attach-
ment geometry along which the profiles will be moved.
Attach Point
(Attachment Point)
A point can be selected on the profile curve in which the profile is to be connected to the attachment curve or surface.
The profiles are moved along the spine curve according to the defined moving frame. For each intermediate profile created with this operation
will then be generated a target point on the attachment geometry as follows:
For Rotation: Definition of the target point by intersecting the attachment curve with the local xy plane.
For Sliding: Definition of the target point by projecting the attachment point onto the sliding surface in the direction of the local y axis
(see figures below).
Afterwards, the intermediate profile is moved in the local xy plane until its attachment point is located on the attachment geometry in the target
point.
529
ADVANCED
24
Figure 315 Sliding without Attachment Point and Sliding Vector
y original profile
x
attachment point on the

spine curve
sliding surface
tangents in the sliding point

projection in the direction of the local y axis
Figure 316 Sliding with Attachment Point and without Sliding Vector
z original profile
selected attachment point on the

sliding surface

Sliding Vector
A vector is required for the method Sliding. If no other selection has been made, the tangent of the surface in the attachment point is used as
sliding vector (see figures 315 and 316).
Via the button Sliding Vector, you may reselect the vector which will be rotated into the tangential plane of the attachment point (see figure
317).
530
PREVIEW
24
Figure 317 Sliding with Attachment Point and Sliding Vector
x original profile
z
sliding vector
selected attachment point on the

sliding surface

sliding vector
Limit Geometry: Curve +, Surface +

Additional geometry can be selected to which the profiles are adapted by Rotation or Sliding.
NOTE:
If more than one solution is possible, for all limit conditions will be chosen that solution, which is closer to the starting position of the
profile before the rotation.
Limit Point +
Any point on the profile curve can be selected as limit point for the profile types Rot Surf w Point (Rotation Surface with Point) and Slid Surf
w Point (Sliding Surface with Point).
Scale
For the profile type Rot Limit Curve (Rotation Limit Curve), the profile can be scaled and rotated until it touches the limit curve in the end
point.
3D ON:
Scaling the profile in 3D space.
3D OFF:
Scaling the profile in x direction of the local coordinate system.
Figure 318 Scaling of a profile
limit curve
scaled
profile
original
profile
The profile would not touch the limit

curve without scaling.
24.6.4 Preview
After you have selected all required geometry elements, the coordinate system, which is determined by the defined moving frame, is displayed.
This coordinate system will be moved along the spine curve for creating the intermediate profiles. This movement, as well as the current interme-
diate profiles can be displayed with this menu.
531
PREVIEW
24
Position Profile, Graphical

The profile curve can be moved along the spine curve. The local coordinate system and the current profile are displayed. For this, you may:
use the slider,
enter a spine curve parameter value into the text field, or
determine a position on the spine curve by graphical selection via the button Graphical.
Figure 319 Moving the coordinate system (Radial to Spine Curve)
profile
y axis
z axis
spine curve
x axis
If you have additionally selected an attachment and/or limit geometry, the intermediate profiles are attached resp. adapted to these
geometries. The profile can have three different colours:
Blue (a)
A profile surface can be computed at the current position (see figure below, variant a).
Yellow (b)
The profile cannot be adapted to the limit geometry at this position (see figure below, variant b).
Red (c)
The profile cannot be attached at this position (see figure below, variant c).
NOTE:
These preview colours are only displayed after clicking the OK button.
532
APPROXIMATION
24
Figure 320 Display of intermediate profiles
b)
a)
limit curve
spine curve c)
attachment curve
profile curve
Rotate Profile, Slide Profile

With these sliders, the profile can be rotated around the attachment curve or moved along the sliding surface. The corresponding values can
also be entered into the text fields.
Insert Profile
A profile saved in the data base will be inserted at the current position of the preview. This profile must lie in the current work plane and is
transferred into the local coordinate system by a transformation between two planes.
Save Profile
The profile will be saved in the data base at the current position.
Options for approximating the profile surface and the input curves are available on this tab.
Result Tolerances
Approximation tolerances to the underlying surfaces (transition quality Position). The system inserts segments until the tolerance is kept.
The behaviour of the options Order and Segmentation corresponds to the approximation type Manual for curve approximation. The approxima-
tion is calculated with priority order and segmentation.
Order U, V
Order of the profile surface.
Min
The order of the selected geometry being below this value is increased until it reaches this value.
Fix
Increase and/or decrease the order of all selected elements until it meets exactly the order specified here.
For the approximation, the order cannot have another value than the specified one.
533
TOPOLOGY
24
Max
The order of the selected geometry being above this value is reduced until it reaches this value.
For the approximation the order cannot exceed this value.
Segmentation U, V
Segmentation of the profile surface.
Min
Increase the number of segments of the selected geometry which is below this value until it reaches this value.
Fix
Increase and/or decrease the segmentation of all selected elements until it meets exactly the segmentation specified here.
For the approximation, the number of segments cannot have another value than the specified one.
Max
The number of segments of the selected geometry being above this value is reduced until it reaches this value.
For the approximation the number of segments cannot exceed this value.
Output: Bezier, B-Spline, Scan

Type of the created profile surface.
24.6.6 Topology
Options for topology definition of the profile surface are available on this tab.
Topology
Setting the maximum tolerance for gaps (Position) and sharp bends (Tangent).
24.7 Surface creation Tube

With this function, you can create open or closed tube surfaces with a specified radius. The moving frame defines a local coordinate system that
is moved along a spine curve. Different variants can be realised by a combination of options on the Tube tab (see page 538).
534
GENERAL INFORMATION
24
Figure 321 Radius 20, Close and Centre
Creation of a tube surface around

the spine curve.
Figure 322 Radius 20, Blend and Close
Creation of a tube surface touching

the x or y axis of the local coordi-
nate system.
Figure 323 Radius 20 and Blend
Creation of a tube surface touching the x or y axis of

the local coordinate system. The surface begins in the
touching point on the x axis, and ends in the touching
point on the y axis.
535
GENERAL INFORMATION
24
Figure 324 Radius 20, Blend and Distance 10
Creation of a tube surface touching the x axis of

the local coordinate system, and having a dis-
tance 10 from the y axis. The surface begins in
the touching point on the x axis, and ends parallel
to the y axis.
Figure 325 Radius 20
Creation of a tube surface touching the x axis of the

moving frame. The surface begins in the origin on the
x axis, and ends parallel to the y axis.
Figure 326 Radius 20, Blend and Angle E 135

the moving frame. The surface begins in the touching
point on the x axis, and ends when it has an angle of
135 with the y axis.
536
GENERAL INFORMATION
24
Figure 327 Radius 20, Blend and Angle B 135

the moving frame. The surface begins in the touch-
ing point on the y axis, and ends when it has an
angle of 135 with the x axis.
Figure 328 Radius 20 and Reference
Creation of a tube surface lying on the refer-

ence surface. It begins in the projection of the
spine curve in the direction of the y axis, is
tangential to the reference, and ends parallel
to the y axis.
Figure 329 Radius 20, Blend and Reference
Creation of a tube surface lying on the ref-

erence surface.It is tangential to the refer-
ence, and ends at the touching point on the
y axis.
The menu consists of the tabs Tube, Parameter, and Approximation, which are described in the following sections.
537
TUBE
24
24.7.2 Tube
Select
Spine Curve
Selection of the spine curve for the moving frame.
Reference
Selection of a reference surface where the tube surface shall be positioned (see figures 328 on page 537 and 329 on page 537).
Radius
Radius of the tube surface.
The centre point, around which the tube surface will be created, can be positioned by combining the options Centre, Blend, and Distance
accordingly (see also figure 330 on page 539).
Centre
The centre point of the tube surface is moved as follows relating to the origin of the local coordinate system:
OFF
The centre point is moved along the y axis in a way that the surface touches the x axis.
ON
The centre point is lying on the x axis.
Blend
The centre point of the tube surface is moved as follows relating to the origin of the local coordinate system:
OFF
The centre point is lying on the y axis.
ON
The centre point is moved along the x axis.
Distance = 0
The centre point is moved in a way that the surface touches the y axis.
Distance > 0
The centre point is moved in a way that the surface has the specified distance from the y axis.
538
TUBE
24
Figure 330 Positioning the centre point with the options Centre, Blend, and Distance
Blend OFF
Centre OFF
Blend OFF
Centre ON
Blend ON
without Distance
Centre OFF
Blend ON
without Distance
Centre ON
Blend ON
with Distance
Centre OFF
Blend ON
with Distance
Centre ON
The shape of the tube surface is determined with the options Close, B, and E.
Close
An open or closed tube surface can be created.
OFF
Creation of an open tube surface. As start and end angle, the angles between the cross tangents of the start and end edges of the tube
surface and the X axis of the local coordinate system are measured.
If a reference surface is selected, the angle is measured relative to the tangent plane of the reference surface.
539
TUBE
24
Figure 331 Open tube surface with different start and end angles
Close OFF
B = 45, E = 90
B
E
Close OFF
B = 0, E = 135
ON
Creation of a closed tube surface (see figure 321 on page 535).
Appr. Tol.
Tolerance
Approximation tolerance for the tube surface. If this option is switched off, a default value of 0.02 will be used.
Bezier, B-Spline, Scan

You may choose whether a Bezier surface, a B-Spline surface or a scan shall be created. In the text field you can make the following specifi-
cations:
the number of patches of the Bezier surface to be created, or
the number of segments of the B-Spline surface to be created
Duplicate
The created surface is duplicated when changing a parameter and re-executing the function.
Create Curve
Curves will be created in addition to the surface by activating these check buttons. These curves have the shape of the spine curve and run:
along the edge at the surfaces Begin,
along the edge at the surfaces End,
through the surfaces Centre Point, or
through the theoretical Corner.
540
PARAMETER
24
Figure 332 Creation of additional curves
End
Centre Point
Begin
Spine Curve Corner
24.7.3 Parameter

In addition, options for defining a moving frame are available in this menu. The moving frame defines a local coordinate system that is moved
along the spine curve. It is used with equal mode of operation in several functions. You will find a detailed description for the function Surface
creation Profiles under the corresponding options on the following pages:
(see page 523)
Axis: Auto, Vector
(see page 526)
(see page 526)
Order: U, V
Order of the tube surface.
24.8 Surface creation Fillet

With this function you can create fillets between surfaces with a sharp bend at the transitions.
After setting of the parameters and confirmation with OK in the window Fillet will be first created a temporary fillet surface, the parameter of which
still can be modified. Only after terminating the function via the button or activating Select the objects will be created permanently.
541
FILLET
24
24.8.1 Fillet
Select
Reactivates the selection of the required geometry objects.
Surface 1, Surface 2, Surface 3

Selection of topologically contiguous surfaces or surface clusters between which the fillet shall be created. For a corner fillet you have to
select a third surface; in this case the fillet type is set to Corner.
Additional surfaces may be selected using the button +.
Inverting normals:
After selection of the surfaces their normals are displayed as vector symbols and can be inverted by clicking onto the circle symbol in the mid-
dle.
Curve
On Surface 1 can be selected a curve as fillet edge curve. The fillet type is automatically set to Curve.
Additional curves may be selected using the button +.
Fillet Type
The following fillet types are available:
Radius
The fillet surface is created with the specified radius and with tangential transitions to the underlying surfaces (see figure 333).
The temporarily created fillet surface can be modelled using the submenu Fillet Modify (see page 546).
Chord
The fillet surface will be computed in a way that the distance of the opposite points on the profile cross section of the fillet is equal to the
specified value (see figure below).
Figure 333 Creation of a fillet specifying the Radius or Chord
Surface 2
profile cross Radius

section
Surface 1
Chord
Original Geometry Fillet
The temporarily created fillet surface can be modelled using the submenu Fillet Modify (see page 546).
Curve
A fillet edge curve lying on surface 1 has to be specified. The accumulating radii will be automatically computed (see figure below).
542
FILLET
24
Figure 334 Creation of a fillet specifying a fillet edge curve (option Curve)
fillet edge
curve
Corner
At the meeting corner points of three surfaces will be created a corner fillet. The position of the degenerated corner of the triangular patch
will be in direction of the last selected surface 3 (see figure below).
Using the option Active you may optionally match additional fillet surfaces (see figure 343 on page 548).
The temporarily created corner fillet and their connected fillet surfaces can be modelled using Fillet Modify (see page 546).
Figure 335 Corner fillet (option Corner)
Surface 3
Surface 2
degenerated cor-
ner
Surface 1
Approx, Face
Face
The fillets created with edge matching (Matching active) are generated as faces. In case of the fillet type Corner the fillet lying opposite
to the degenerated corner is created as face.
Approx
(Approximate)
The fillet surfaces will be trimmed and additionally reapproximated, so that patches are created.
Profile cross section

For the fillet surface you can define the following cross section types (see also function Curve segment creation Styling Corner on
page 391):
Arc
The cross-section of the fillet surface is an arc (see figure 333 on page 542.
Acc Tangent
(Accumulating Tangent)
The cross section of the fillet surface is equivalent to an accumulating fillet curve connecting the underlying surfaces with tangent continu-
ity.
Acc Curvature
(Accumulating Curvature)
The cross section of the fillet surface is equivalent to an accumulating fillet curve connecting the underlying surfaces with curvature conti-
nuity (see figure below.
543
FILLET
24
Figure 336 Curvature continuous accumulating fillet curve
Profile
You can select a single-segment profile curve as profile cross section of the fillet to be created. The profile curve will be scaled according
to the specified radius. It will be modified in way that the fillet surface has a tangent continuous transition to the underlying surfaces (see
figure below).
NOTE:
To obtain a useful result, the profile curve should have a symmetric cross section.
The edges and corner points of the generated fillet surface can deviate from the profile curve and its end points.
Figure 337 Profile fillet from a modified profile curve with tangent continuous transition
profile curve created on an

arc fillet and modified
Using the option Profile you can create a fillet surface with a one-sided accumulating fillet (see figure below) by creating on the profile
cross section of an arc fillet a curve segment on which you can modify the radius. With the modified profile curve you can create a new fil-
let surface.
Figure 338 Single-sided accumulating fillet from the modified profile curve
curvature diagnosis
profile curve created on an arc

fillet and modified
Edge: B (1,2) E (2,3) (3,1)

(Edge: Begin (1,2) End (2,3) (3,1))
With the following options you may define different conditions at the beginning and end edge curves of the fillet surfaces.
544
FILLET
24
Extended
If the connecting edges of the underlying surfaces are of different lengths, the fillet surface can be extended to the exterior edges of the
underlying surface with the larger extent (see figure below). The extension can be activated for the beginning (B) and/or end edge curve
(E) of the fillet.
Figure 339 Extended fillet surface
ExtendedOff Extended On (B and E)
Matching
The beginning and/or end curve of an extended fillet surface (option Extended switched on) can be matched to the exterior edges of the
underlying surfaces creating a tangent continuous transition (see figure below).
NOTE:
A tangent continuous matching is only created at the boundary edges of the underlying surfaces. The transition quality at the inner
segment boundaries may eventually deviate from the tangent continuity. To avoid deviations from the underlying surfaces, addi-
tional segments can be inserted into the fillet surface. To obtain additional segments, you have eventually to change the tolerance
for the maximum size of the segments to be inserted (see option Segmentation in the parameter tab).
Figure 340 Matched fillet surface
Extended + Matching (B and E)
Underlying Surfaces Face, Approx

Face
The underlying surfaces will be trimmed at the fillet edge curves.
Approx
(Approximate)
The underlying surfaces will be trimmed and additionally reapproximated, so that patches are created.
NOTE:
These options can only be activated after having created a temporary fillet surface with OK.
The trimming operation will only be carried out when terminating the function via the button or activating Select.
545
FILLET
24
After modifying fillet surfaces via the submenu Fillet Modify the existing underlying faces are also extended if the edges of the
fillet surface lie outside the active region.
underlying faces
modified fillet surface
Quality
In this popup menu different settings can be selected to influence the quality of the fillet surfaces. This popup menu as well as the options
used for the different qualities are available in the tab Quality and are described in detail in section 24.8.3 Quality on page 549.
Fillet Modify
In case of the fillet types Radius, Chord, and Corner after the creation of the fillet surface the submenu Fillet Modify is activated by which the
shape of the fillet surface can be modified.
NOTE:
In general, the fillet surface modelled by this submenu will be preserved after changing other parameters and confirming with OK. A new fil-
let surface will only be created, if in the main menu Fillet
the Radius is changed, or
another Fillet Type is selected.
Insert
With this option you can define additional profile cross sections at any position along the fillet edge curve.
Delete
The additionally defined profile cross sections can be deleted.
Corner Only
Only available for the fillet type Corner.
On
The radii of the corner fillet edge curves are modified individually or globally. The modification of a radius is globally transferred to the con-
nected fillet surface.
Off
The radii of the corner fillet edge curves and the connected fillet surfaces are separately modified. Modifications of a radius of the corner
fillet are only locally transferred to the connected fillet.
Slider/Text Fields
With the sliders and text fields you can carry out a dynamic or numerical modification of the individual profile cross sections. The radii and cor-
responding sliders/text fields can be identified by the numbering. The unnumbered slider is used for a global modification of all profile cross
sections.
NOTE:
Modifications in the text fields must be confirmed with OK or the enter key.
546
PARAMETER
24
24.8.2 Parameter
Tolerances
For the computation of the fillet surfaces may be specified the following tolerances:
Deviation
The fillet edge curves will be computed in a way that they are lying on the original patches within the specified tolerance. The required
degrees of freedom will be provided by inserting new segment boundaries (in longitudinal direction).
Segmentation
The segmentation of the fillet surfaces will be computed according to the segmentation of the original patches. A new segment will be cre-
ated when a fillet edge curve touches or intersects a segment boundary.
This tolerance value specifies the minimum distance between two adjacent patch boundaries in the fillet surface, i e. the distance
between the patch boundaries must be larger than the tolerance specified.
NOTE:
In some cases it is desired that a fillet patch boundary is created at each patch boundary of the underlying surfaces. The patch will
only be inserted, if the distance between the patch edges is larger than the minimum value set. Using a larger segmentation toler-
ance you can avoid, for example, the creation of a great number of small patches in case of small offsets of the patch boundaries
of the underlying surfaces.
On the other hand, you may want to insert patches also at closely adjacent patch boundaries. In this case, you should use a
smaller segmentation tolerance.
Figure 341 Segmentation
patch boundary 0,1 mm inserted segment 0,1 mm
Fillet with segmentation tolerance 1 Fillet with segmentation tolerance 0.09
Distance (Topo)
This value determines the admissible distance at the common edge of two patches of a cluster to be still accepted as position continuous
matching.
Angle (Topo)
(Angle (Topology))
This value determines the admissible difference between the patch normals of a cluster to be still accepted as normal continuous match-
ing.
This parameter has only effect if the quality Design or the option Design: Isoparam. are used. In this case a fillet surface can be created
over sharp bends lying within the specified tolerance. Otherwise, a corresponding error message is displayed.
547
PARAMETER
24
IMPORTANT!
Spread
The degenerated corner is spread by the specified value.
NOTE:
This tolerance cannot be changed subsequently after having created a fillet surface with OK.
Figure 342 Spread corner
Spread
Diagnosis
Optionally, when creating fillet surfaces a distance diagnosis between fillet surfaces and underlying surfaces as well as a curvature diag-
nosis can be computed.
If the diagnosis is activated, the distance will only be computed if it is larger than the value specified in the text field.
For the curvature diagnosis the minimum curvature radius CRad:xx.x is calculated and displayed in the graphics area.
Edge: B (1,2) E (2,3) (3,1)

(Edge: Begin (1,2) End (2,3) (3,1))
With the following options you may define further conditions at the beginning and end edge curves of the fillet surfaces.
NOTE:
These parameters cannot be changed subsequently after having created a fillet surface with OK.
Active
To the three edges of the corner fillet can be connected additional fillet surfaces. The connected fillets are created at the transitions
between the underlying surfaces 1 and 2 (1,2), 2 and 3 (2,3) and/or 3 and 1 (3,1) (see figure below).
Figure 343 Corner fillet with active connected fillet surfaces
(2,3)
Surface 2 Surface 3
connected fil-
lets
(1,3)
(1,2)
Surface 1
Corner Fillet
Limit
Within the exterior edges of the underlying surfaces can be selected a patch, edge, or curve segment as limitation for the extent of the fil-
let surface.
548
QUALITY
24
Arc Deformation
Centre Radius
If the profile cross section Acc Tangent or Acc Curvature has been selected, you can determine with this option the radius in the centre
point of the fillet cross section (see also function Curve segment creation Styling Corner on page 391).
If the check button % is switched off, the absolute value of the centre radius is specified in the text field. The centre radius will be pre-
served, if the arc radius is modified during modelling the fillet surface via the menu Fillet Modify.
If the check button % is switched off, the percental value of the centre radius is specified in the text field. In case of modifying the fillet sur-
face, the current percentage of the centre radius will be recomputed.
With Min you can specify as additional constraint the Centre Radius as minimum radius the profile cross section must have. In this case
it has to be observed that the radius specified is large enough to allow actually this value. This depends on the geometry. The approxi-
mate radius value should be 1.5 times larger than the centre radius.
Form Factor
The tangent length of the fillet cross sections is modified, whereas the transitions to the underlying surfaces remain unchanged. Values
< 1 create flat fillets, values > 1 steep fillets.
Order
Longit.
(Longitudinal)
Specification of the order in direction of the fillet edge curve (longitudinal direction)
In case of fillet surfaces with a strong curvature the order in longitudinal direction can influence the number of created segments. The
lower the order, the more segments are needed to create a fillet surface.
Figure 344 Influence of the order in longitudinal direction onto the number of segments
Fillet with order 8 in longitudinal direction Fillet with order 4 in longitudinal direction
= 6 segments = 13 segments
Arc
Specification of the order in direction of the fillet cross section (cross direction).
NOTE:
If the options Acc Tangent and Acc Curvature are switched on, the order must be high enough to keep the corresponding transi-
tion quality.
For Accumulating Tangent and Accumulating Curvature should at least be set the order 5 and 7, respectively, as a tangent con-
tinuous transition needs order 2 and a curvature continuous transition needs order 3 on each side. An additional order is needed to
keep the Centre Radius.
24.8.3 Quality
The settings in this tab can only be modified, if in the popup menu Quality the option Manual is set.
549
QUALITY
24
Internal Transitions
Position
The transition quality between the created fillet surfaces will be position continuous.
Normal
The transition quality between the created fillet surfaces will be normal continuous.
Patch Type
For the creation of the fillet surface you may select the following patch types:
Bezier
Generation of Bzier surfaces. The order along the fillet (in cross direction) is specified at Arc.
B-Spline
Generation of B-Spline surfaces. The order along the fillet (in cross direction) is specified at Arc.
NURBS
Generation of NURBS surfaces. This option is only available if the profile cross section Arc is activated. It generates exact arcs in cross
direction (with the order 3). You may control the order only in longitudinal direction (Longit.).
Design: Isoparam.
(Isoparametric)
The order and control point distribution of the fillet surfaces in longitudinal direction will be adopted from the underlying surfaces.
Figure 345 Fillet with the quality Design: Isoparam.
Design Isoparam. Off Design Isoparam. On
Before computing the fillet surfaces, the system checks the boundary conditions of the underlying surfaces. To create fillet surfaces with the
quality Design: Isoparam., the following conditions have to complied:
In each underlying surface cluster the number of surfaces must be equal.
Bends in the underlying surfaces must be smaller than the topological angle tolerance specified in Angle (Topo).
If the underlying surfaces do not meet the design quality Isoparametric, no fillet surfaces will be calculated and an error message will appear.
The quality of the created surfaces strongly depends on the underlying surfaces. Therefore, this setting should only be used if the quality of
the underlying surfaces guarantees a useful result.
Construction
With the following options inaccuracies in the underlying surfaces will be adjusted. The tolerances may deviate from the specified values.
Gaps and overlaps can be caused in fillet surfaces by outer or inner corners in the underlying surfaces.
No Gaps
If the fillet surface cluster is composed of topologically not contiguous fillet surfaces, gaps produced by inaccuracies in the underlying
surfaces will be removed and the fillet surfaces will be connected topologically contiguous to each other.
In this context, overlaps of topologically not contiguous fillet surfaces are also to be considered as gaps which are closed topologically. In
most cases, these overlaps are also completely removed.
NOTE:
To remove overlaps within topologically contiguous fillet surfaces, you have to use the option No Overlaps.
550
QUALITY
24
Figure 346 Closing gaps with No Gaps
No Gaps Off No Gaps On
Figure 347 Removing overlaps with No Gaps
No Gaps Off No Gaps On
No Overlaps
Overlaps or intersections of topologically contiguous fillet surfaces are removed.
NOTE:
To remove overlaps within topologically not contiguous fillet surfaces, you have to use the option No Gaps.
551
GLOBAL
24
Figure 348 Removing overlaps in topologically contiguous fillet surfaces
No Overlaps Off No Overlaps On
Quality
Manual
With Manual all options in this tab are available for individual quality settings.
Design
The characteristic feature of this quality type is the usage of the option Design: Isoparam. (see page 550) by which order and control
point distribution in longitudinal direction will be adopted from the underlying surfaces.
The Patch Type is set to Bezier, the internal transitions are Position Continuous.
Standard
The fillet surfaces are created in Bezier representation with position continuous internal transitions.
The options Design: Isoparam.and Construction: No Gaps, No Overlaps are inactive, i. e. the order set in the parameter menu will be
used, and inaccuracies in the underlying surfaces will affect the fillet surfaces. All tolerances will be exactly kept.
Construction
The characteristic feature of this quality type is the usage of the options No Gaps and No Overlaps (see page 550) by which gaps and
overlaps in the fillet surfaces produced by inaccuracies in the underlying surfaces will be removed. In this case, deviations from the toler-
ances set are possible.
The Patch Type is set to B-Spline, the internal transitions are Normal Continuous.
NOTE:
Fillet surfaces defined with the quality Construction can also be defined as Bezier surfaces. Create first a temporary fillet surface
in B-Spline representation with the option Construction and activate afterwards the option Design. When terminating the function
with the button , the permanent fillet surface will be created in Bezier representation without losing the Construction quality
The following table gives an overview of the settings used by the predefined quality types:
Standard Design Construction
Internal Transitions Position Continuous Position Continuous Normal Continuous
Patch Type Bezier Bezier B-Spline
No Gaps Off Off On
No Overlaps Off Off On
Design: Isoparam. Off On Off
24.8.4 Global
With this tab you can create with one step fillet surfaces at multiple patch clusters, including at surfaces intersecting each other.
552
GLOBAL
24
Figure 349 Geometry with global fillet
Original Geometry Global Fillet with trimmed underly-

ing surfaces and fillet surfaces
(Face and Edge On)
Figure 350 Global fillet of intersecting surfaces
Original geometry
Fillet surfaces
Select +
Selection of an arbitrary surface cluster, which is processed together with the clusters selected as surface 1, 2, and 3.
Using the button + you can add further objects to the current selection.
Radius
Definition of the fillet radius.
Profile Cross Section

For the fillet surface you can define the following cross section types:
Arc
See page 543.
Acc Tangent
See page 543.
553
DISPLAY
24
Acc Curvature
See page 543.
Fillet Location
Topo Bend
(Topology Bend)
The fillet surfaces are created at the sharp bends lying within the tolerance specified in the surface check (see function Surface Check
on page 176). The fillet quadrants are automatically computed.
All
The fillet surfaces are created in the quadrant into which the normals of the surfaces to be filleted point. No fillet surfaces will be created
where this is not possible due to the normal adjustment.
Trim
The fillet surfaces and/or the underlying original surfaces can be trimmed.
Face
Edge
The fillet surfaces will be created as faces with tangent continuous transitions between the edge matching curves and the edges of the
underlying surfaces.
Figure 351 Surface trimming in the global fillet function
Fillet with underlying underlying surfaces Fillet trimmed underlying surfaces and fil-
surfaces trimmed (Face active) (Fillet active) let trimmed
24.8.5 Display
In this tab, options for the display of the fillet surfaces are available.
24.9 Surface creation Duct Surface

Duct surfaces are tubular profile surfaces without an explicitly specified spine curve. To generate these surfaces, one or more patches are created
between profile curves (see figure below).
554
SURFACE CREATION DUCT SURFACE
24
Figure 352 Duct surface from three cross profiles
patch 2
profile curves
patch 1
The duct surface is generated by adequate mediation between the specified cross profiles. Between each pair of curve segments one patch is
created. If, for example, the profiles have several curve segments, a strip of patches is the result.
The order in cross profile direction will be adopted from the cross profile with the highest order. In longitudinal direction the default order is 4. This
means that a tangent continuous transition between the patches of the duct surface is the highest transition quality which can be achieved.
The menu Duct Surface
Select
Curvature Distribution
One (in case of closed cross profiles) or two (in case of open cross profiles) spine curves connecting the beginning or end points of all cross
profiles are computed internally.
If the transitions between the cross profiles and the spine curve(s) have already been specified via the setting of the option Normal Transi-
tion, the length of the control polygon sides can be additionally modified using the option Curvature Distribution.
Values between 0.0 and 0.5 extend the influence of the last profile, values between 0.5 and 1.0 the influence of the first one.
Figure 353 Influence of the parameter Curvature Distribution
Curvature Distribution = 0.1 Curvature Distribution = 0.9
Normal Transition
The transitions between the cross profiles and the spine curve(s) can be specified here. The spine curve will be perpendicular:
to the first cross profile, if Begin is switched on,
to the last cross profile, if End is switched on, and
to all interior cross profiles, if Inner is switched on.
The following figure shows the result, if all three options are switched off. The cross sections do not pass orthogonally to the spine curve any
more.
555
SURFACE CREATION ACCELERATED SURFACE
24
Figure 354 Duct surface without tangent continuous transitions
computed
spine curve
If the parameter flow of all cross profiles does not have the same direction, the duct surface will be twisted (see figure below). Using the function
Curve modification Invert you can correct the parameter flow (see page 443).
Figure 355 Twisted duct surface
patch 2
patch 1 is
twisted
profile with inverted

parameter flow
24.10 Surface creation Accelerated Surface

With this new function, boundary surfaces of a stamped area are created with a constant given distance from a curve selected as spine curve
(e. g. the edge of a reference surface). The created patches are drawn curvature continuous at edge 1 from the original surface, have the distance
d from the projected spine curve, and a specified curvature radius at edge 2.
Figure 356 Creation of an Accelerated Surface with Start fr. Offset
Spine Curve
(sharp bend or
theoretical edge) Edge 1 of the original patch (= Ref-
distance d accelerated surface erence)
(= Length)
Distance
Radius
Edge 2
The goal of this function is to reduce the time needed for perfecting stamped areas like fuel tank caps, door handles, protective bodyside mould-
ing, etc., to improve the quality and to avoid problems due to very large curvature radii.
556
24
Figure 357 Critical stamped areas
critical areas
After having selected the spine curve and original patch, in the graphics area is displayed the moving frame. The X axis defines the direction of
the length vector, the Y axis the direction of the accelerated surface.
After clicking OK, the accelerated surface first is created temporarily with the parameters specified.
By clicking onto the middle handles on the axes, you can now change the accelerated surface to be created as follows:
X axis: Inverting the length
The accelerated surface is created within the original patch boundaries only.
557
24
Y axis: Inverting the direction of the accelerated surface
Select
Reactivating the selection.
Spine Curve
Selection of the spine curve.
Reference
Selection of the original patch.
Length
Specification of the distance between spine curve and edge 1 of the patch to be created.
Start fr. Offset

(Start from Offset)
From the spine curve projected onto the reference surface is calculated an offset curve on which lies Edge 1 of the accelerated surface.
Spine Curve Edge 1 Reference
Length
Distance Edge 2
Start fr. Spine

(Start from Spine)
Edge 1 of the accelerated surface starts directly from the spine curve projected onto the reference surface.
Spine Curve Edge 1
Length Reference
Distance Edge 2
Transition: Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

You can set the transition quality between accelerated surface and underlying surface.
558
SURFACE CREATION FLANGES
24
Shape
The tangent length of the result can be modified. A small value results in a flat and a big value in an embossed accelerated surface.
Factor = 1 Factor = 0 Factor = 2
Radius
Specification of the curvature radius at edge 2 of the accelerated surface.
TIP:
In case of low radius values, the value eventually must be increased to obtain a result.
Distance
Specification of the distance between spine curve and edge 2 of the accelerated surface.
24.11 Surface creation Flanges

Unlike profile surfaces flange surfaces are composed successively from ruled surfaces. A flange surface can start from the spine curve or from a
target patch (see figure below). Depth and Angle define extent and direction of the flange surface. The basic flange direction is the direction with
a flange angle of 0.
The order of the flange surface in direction of the spine curve will be adopted from the spine curve. The order perpendicular to the spine curve will
always be 2.
Figure 358 Flanges
24.11.1 Flanges
Select
Spine Curve
Selection of the spine curve(s). As spine curve can be selected NURBS- and Bezier curves as well as surface and face edges.
559
FLANGES
24
Target Patch
Selection of a target patch.
If Patch Normal is selected as basic flange direction, the flange can be created at the basic or target patch in direction of the basic patch or
target patch normal, depending on the settings in the Parameter tab (see radio boxes Begin: Starting Curve, Target Patch and Normal
Direction: Target Patch, Base Patch, page 565).
If Plane is selected as basic flange direction, the spine curve will be projected onto the target patch and the flange will be created at the target
patch in direction of the plane normal.
The option Vector cannot be used for the definition of the basic flange direction.
Depending on the value set for the flange angle, the flange directions are displayed after having completed the selection by two (Angle = 0, 90,
180 or 360) or four vector symbols which can directly manipulated (see section 2.5.9 The vector symbol on page 38). The context menus of
the vector symbols include the following special options:
Order
In the window Order you can increase the order of the flange surface. The new value can be set via the popup menu as well as via keyboard.
Via keyboard you can only set values between 2 and 9.
NOTE:
As the order can only be increased, the order set will be ignored, if the value is smaller than the order of the selected element
(eventually plus the order created by the option Increase Ord.).
The manually increased order can be reset to the original value by selecting the smallest value 2.
After activating the window Order the popup menu shows the last selected value and not the current order of the selected
flange surface.
Segmentation
In the window Segments you can specify the number of segments for the flange surface.
Automatic
The number of segments set in the popup menu will be created with equally distributed segment boundaries along the spine curve.
The segmentation can be reset to the original value by selecting the smallest value 1.
Manual
Single segments can be inserted manually by selecting a point on the flange surface. The selected points should be as near as possible
to the flange edges, as the point with the smallest distance to the flange edges defines the segment boundary.
The maximum number of segments which can be inserted is 30 for all selected elements.
Reduction
Manually created segments can be removed individually by selection.
With the button Alternative the different possible flange surfaces can be displayed.
NOTE:
If parts of a curve cluster selected as spine curve are not composite, i. e. between curve segments are gaps larger than the topological tol-
erance, different flange directions can be computed in case of a patch cluster with different normal alignment selected as Target Patch. In
this case, the possible flange vectors are displayed the start point of each topologically composite curve cluster.
To obtain a unique flange direction, you can align the normals of the target patch cluster using the function Surface modification Invert
(see page 621).
Quality
Using this popup menu you can influence the quality of the flange surfaces by different partition of the control points on the flange curves.
Which quality provides the best result, depends on the properties of the spine curve(s) and the specified flange angle.
Design
The parameterisation of the flange curve will be optimised.
560
FLANGES
24
Figure 359 Example for using the quality Design
Standard Design
Flanges
Spine Curve
Control point polygon
Standard
The parameterisation of the flange curve will be adopted from the spine curve. The quality Standard frequently provides good results in
case of a flange angle of 0.
Figure 360 Example for using the quality Standard
Design Standard
Flanges
(flange angle = 0)
Spine Curve
Control point polygon
Construction
The flange curve will be approximated with the parameterisation types Chordal or Mean. Chordal will be used, if the distance between the
points of the flange curve increases compared to the distance between the points on the spine curve. Accordingly, Mean will be used if
the distance minimizes.
In many cases, the quality Construction provides better results than the other qualities if the flange angle is unequal 0.
561
FLANGES
24
Figure 361 Example for using the quality Construction
Standard
Flanges
(flange angle = 3)
Construction
Spine Curve
Control point polygon Flanges
Basic flange direction

With the following options, the basic flange direction (flange angle = 0) is determined.
Patch Normal
If the spine curve is a patch or face edge, the basic flange direction is specified by the basic patch normal, if no target patch is selected.
If a target patch is selected, you can choose in the radio box Normal Direction: Target Patch, Base Patch on the Parameter tab,
whether the normal of the basic patch or of the target patch shall specify the basic flange direction.
If the spine curve is a NURBS or Bezier curve, this option can only be used if a target patch is selected. In this case, the basic flange
direction will automatically be specified by the target patch normal.
The basic flange direction runs in normal direction of the base patch, if patch or face edges have been selected as spine curve or in nor-
mal direction of the target patch, if the spine curve is a curve segment or curve.
Plane
The basic flange direction runs in normal direction of the work plane.
Vector
The basic flange direction is determined by the Vector selection (see page 60).
Connect
With this option the flange surface can be created, which either may end on the target patch or on the current work plane.
Basic flange direction Patch Normal:
A flange surface is created between spine curve and the selected target patch (see figure 362).
Basic flange direction Plane:
A flange surface is created between spine curve and the current work plane (see figure 363).
If a target patch has been selected, a flange surface is created between spine curve and Target Patch.
Basic flange direction Vector:
In case of Vector the options Connect, Appr. Tol. as well as Target Patch and Parameter cannot be activated.
Figure 362 Flange surface between spine curve and target patch
spine curve
target patch
562
FLANGES
24
Figure 363 Flange surface between spine curve and current work plane
spine curve
work plane
Increase Ord.
(Increase Order)
The order of the flange curve will be increased, if the deviation of the flange points to the flange curve is larger than an internally used toler-
ance value.
Gap
Composite curves are considered as one curve, if the distance is smaller than the gap tolerance specified.
One Normal
If the spine curves are lying separately, you can specify a single direction for all flanges created.
Direction
With this popup menu, extent direction and division of the ruled surface can be determined.
One Side
The ruled surface is created in positive vector direction only at one side of the generator curve.
Both Sides - 1 Surface
The ruled surface is created in positive and negative direction.
Both Sides - 2 Surfaces
Two ruled surfaces are created, one in each direction.
Depth
The flange depth defines the patch length in the specified flange direction at the beginning (B) and end (E) of the spine curve.
E inactive
The flange depth is constant at the beginning and end of the spine curve and can be modified dynamically using the slider.
E active
You may define a different flange depth at the end of the spine curve. In this case, a dynamic modification of the flange depth is not pos-
sible.
NOTE:
Setting values in the text fields has to be confirmed by the Enter-key.
Figure 364 Constant and variable flange depth
constant flange depth B=E
End
Spine Curve
B
variable flange depth
Begin BE
End
Spine Curve
Begin
563
PARAMETER
24
Angle
The flange angle defines the flange direction at the beginning and end of the spine curve.
E inactive
The flange angle is constant at the beginning and end of the spine curve and can be modified dynamically using the slider.
E active
You may define a different flange angle at the end of the spine curve. In this case, a dynamic modification of the flange angle is not possi-
ble.
NOTE:
Setting values in the text fields has to be confirmed by the Enter-key.
Please note the notation of angle specifications. Angles can be specified in degrees, minutes, and seconds (e. g. 115 or 1o15
= 1 degree 15 minutes) or decimal numbers with up to 4 decimal places (e. g. 1.25 = 1 degree 15 minutes). Please refer also
to section 2.4.3 Notation of angle specifications on page 27 for further information.
Continue
This button has a special function in this context. It is used to create another flange at a flange just created. The opposite edge is automati-
cally selected as spine curve 2. Starting from this spine curve another flange surface is created in the basic flange direction set.
Figure 365 Adding another ruled surface using Continue
X flange
spine curve 2
flange angle
Y
spine curve 1
current plane
24.11.2 Parameter
B-Spline
If this option is switched on, from single-segment curves will be created Bezier patches and from multi-segment curves will be created B-
Spline surfaces.
If this option is switched off, the flange surfaces will only created in Bezier representation, i. e. selected B-Spline curves will be splitted at the
segment boundaries.
Tangent
At the opposite edge of the flange surface, the tangent of the spine curve will be adopted at both ends.
Appr. Tol.
Deviation
From the spine curve are computed flange points which are then approximated to the flange curve. If this option is switched on, the depth and
angle deviation of the flange points from the flange curve is computed and displayed in the lower part of the window in Deviation: Depth,
Angle.
564
PARAMETER
24
NOTE:
If the flange angle is unequal 0 the flange curve deviates from the spine curve. In case of a multi-segment spine curve this devia-
tion deteriorates the transition quality between the flange surfaces.
Length
Only available for the basic flange directions Patch Normal and Plane.
Computation of the flange depth. If a flange angle unequal zero has been specified in the main menu, the flange surface can be created in
two alternative directions with different flange depths.
Distance
The flange surface will be created in flange direction. The flange depth is measured along the basic flange direction (see figure below).
Figure 366 Flange surface along the basic flange direction
flange direction basic flange

(unequal 0) direction (0)
created
flange
flange
depth
spine curve
Direction
The flange surface will be created in flange direction. The flange depth is measured along the flange direction (see figure below).
Figure 367 Flange surface along the flange direction
basic flange
flange direction direction (0)
(unequal 0)
created
flange
spine curve
flange depth
Begin: Starting Curve, Target Patch

Only available for the basic flange direction Patch Normal.
565
PARAMETER
24
The flange surface can start at the spine curve or at the target patches.
Base Patch Flange Target Patch
Flange at Base Patch Flange at Target Patch

(basic flange direction = target patch normal) (basic flange direction = target patch normal)
Normal Direction: Target Patch, Base Patch

Only available for the basic flange direction Patch Normal.
As basic flange direction can be specified the normal direction of the target or base patch.
Base Patch Normals Flange Target Patch
basic flange direction = base patch normal basic flange direction = target patch normal)
Vector
Only available for the basic flange direction Plane.
The flange direction can be defined by an additional vector.
Lock
The direction of the specified vector will be used (see figure 368).
Norm
The flange vector will be projected into the normal plane of the spine curve (see figure 369).
Figure 368 Flange surface with locked vector (Lock)
basic flange
direction
flange
566
APPROXIMATION
24
Figure 369 Flange surface in the normal plane of the spine curve (Norm)
basic flange
direction
normals
flange
24.12 Surface creation Fill

With this function can be created a filling surface without star point from 1 to 4 one or multi-segment edge curves to be specified. You can influ-
ence the transition quality by selecting adjacent geometry as projection base and/or by adjusting the normals at the transition edges.
A filling surface from 2 to 4 edge curves is created in the background by the function Surface creation Profiles (see page 522). The curve
selected first will be used as spine curve and the other curves as profile curves or limit curve (see figure below).
Figure 370 Filling surface from four edge curves
limit curve
filling surface
1st profile curve

2nd profile curve
spine curve
If only one curve is selected, a theoretical profile surface will be created and approximated to the selected curve.
567
SURFACE CREATION FILLET FLANGE
24
Figure 371 Filling surface from one curve with three segments
2nd edge curve

segment
filling surface
3rd edge curve

segment
1st edge curve

segment
The menu Fill
Select
Curves +
Selection of 2 to 4 curves or surface edges.
ProjBase
(Projection Base)
The surfaces, curves, or edges adjacent to the filling surface can be selected as projection base. On the adjacent geometry will be computed
points to which the filling surface will be approximated.
Normals
The normals at the connecting edges of the filling surface and the adjacent geometry will be roughly adjusted.
Smooth Factor
As smooth factor can be specified values between 0 and 1. With 0 no smoothing will be computed and with 1 no approximation.
Order
For the created patches can be specified a minimum order in u and v direction.
Segments
For the created filling surface can be specified the minimum number of segments in u and v direction.
Deviation: Position, Normal

The highest position and normal deviation along the connecting edges is indicated.
24.13 Surface creation Fillet Flange

This function can be used to create flanges on fillet surfaces. The flange surface will be generated tangentially to the selected patches (see figure
below).
The edges of the patches of the fillet surface at which the flange shall be created are the spine curve. The curve in which the flange surface
touches the fillet surface, i. e. at which the flange begins, is referred to as starting edge.
The fillet surface can be trimmed at or extrapolated up to the starting edge.
568
24
Figure 372 Flange at an arc fillet
fillet
starting edge
fillet flange
spine curve
The menu Fillet Flange
Select
Edges of the patches at which the flange shall be created are to be selected as spine curve.
NOTE:
You should pick on the patches near the edges to be selected.
Target Patch
The target patch can be reselected.
Extrapolation
The patches may have to be extrapolated. Two mechanisms are available:
Parameter
The patches are extrapolated parametrically, i. e., their iso-lines will be extended. This extrapolation method is suited for patches, which
have not been created by an arc fillet operation (free-form surfaces).
Circle
The patches are internally converted to a tube with a circular cross section, which will be used for the computations. This method is suited
for arc fillets.
The options Trim and Tube are available for this extrapolation variant.
Position of the starting edge

The position of the starting edge is determined here. At this edge, the flange will be created tangentially to the fillet surface.
The basic flange direction is defined with an angle of 0.
Angle
The basic flange direction corresponds to the cross tangent direction of the spine curve. By specifying an angle unequal 0, the starting
edge will be moved along the fillet. The flange angle is formed by the cross tangents of spine curve and starting edge (see figure below).
Setting a negative angle will create the starting edge inside, a positive angle outside the fillet surface.
IMPORTANT!
569
24
Figure 373 Definition of the starting edge with the option Angle
starting edge
spine curve
flange angle
0
cross tangents of starting

edge and spine curve
Direction
The basic flange direction corresponds to the cross tangent direction of the silhouette line regarding the selected direction. By specifying
an angle unequal 0, the starting edge will be moved along the fillet. The flange angle is formed by the cross tangents of silhouette line
and starting edge (see figure below).
Figure 374 definition of the starting edge with the option Direction
starting edge
silhouette line
spine curve
flange angle
0
cross tangents of starting

edge and silhouette line
Target Patch
The flange direction corresponds to the normal direction of the target patch. For getting this result, the starting edge is moved along the
fillet until its cross tangent corresponds to the normal of the target patch (see figure below). Through this, the flange angle is deter-
mined and cannot be modified.
The flange ends on the target surface or its extension. By that, the depth is also fixed.
570
24
Figure 375 Definition of the starting edge with the option Target Patch
normal of the tar-

starting edge
get patch
spine curve
cross tangent of the

starting edge
The options Trim and Tube are only available for the extrapolation type Circle.
Trim
The patches of the fillet surface can be trimmed at or extrapolated up to the starting edge (see figure below).
Figure 376 Trimming and extrapolating the fillet surface
trimmed extrapolated fil-

fillet surface let surface
starting edge
Tube
The patches of the fillet surface are replaced by a tubular surface.
The values for Depth and Angle can be specified if the flange shall be created with one of the settings Angle and Direction.
Fix
The direction of the flange is fixed, so that it does no longer run in tangential direction to the fillet surface.
Order: U, V
Only available if Indiv. Order is deactivated.
You can specify the Order in U and V direction for the resulting surfaces. In case of a multiple result all surfaces will have the same order.
Applying a higher order on the resulting surfaces results in smaller deviation and better control point distribution.
Indiv. Order
(Individual Order)
The order in U direction of the resulting surfaces is adopted from the selected curves/edges. The order in V direction has the fixed valued 2.
Depth
The depth of the fillet flange is determined by this value.
Angle
The flange angle which is used for computing the starting edge can be defined.
The basic flange direction (Angle = 0) corresponds to the cross tangent direction
of the spine curve (in the case of Angle) or
of the silhouette line according to the work plane (in the case of Direction).
571
SURFACE CREATION ADDENDA
24
By entering an angle unequal 0, the starting edge will be moved along the fillet. The flange angle is formed by the cross tangents of spine
curve or silhouette lie and starting edge (see figures 373 on page 570 and 374 on page 570).
A dynamic modification of the values after creation of the fillet flange can be done via sliders. A numerical modification of the values in the text
fields has to be confirmed by the Enter-key.
24.14 Surface creation Addenda

With this function you can create addenda surfaces. Addenda surfaces consist of the collar (1st patch of the addenda) and the flange, that are
defined by several parameters, such as length, angle, and radius.
At first, a curve consisting of straight lines and arcs will be generated from these values as in the Curve Sketch function (see figure below). The
dimensions of the geometry can then be modified at the lines and their begin and end points. For a detailed description of the curve creation and
modification please refer to section 20.7 Curve creation Curve Sketch on page 428.
Figure 377 Principle of creating an addenda surface, a) creating the curve
z
y
x
collar angle
y
x
spine
z curve
collar
length
creation of the curve

from the set parameters:
Flange Length = 30.0 Angle = -180

Collar Length = 50.0 Angle = 180 radius
Radius = 30.0
flange
angle flange
length
Once the curve is created, it will be moved along a spine curve by means of the specified moving frame. Through this, the surface will be created
(see figure below).
572
ADDENDA
24
Figure 378 Principle of creating an addenda surface, b) creating the surface
creation of the addenda

surface
collar
fillet
flange
In addition, you can determine a reference surface on which the collar will be positioned (see option Reference +).
The menu consists of the tabs Addenda, Parameter, and Approximation, which are described in the following sections.
24.14.2 Addenda
Select
Spine Curve +
Selection of the spine curve for the moving frame.
Reference +
Selection of a reference surface. If a reference surface is specified, the collar will be positioned on this surface. The collar angle is measured
regarding the reference surface.
The reference surface is intersected with the local coordinate system. The collar is set to the intersection line and aligned with the tangent of
the local section. The flange is aligned with the y axis. When moving the local coordinate system, the opening angle between collar and
flange changes.
573
ADDENDA
24
Figure 379 Addenda with reference surface
Flange Length = 30.0 Angle = 8

Collar Length = 50.0 Angle = 170
Radius = 30.0
spine curve
reference surface
Profile
Selection of profile. With this button, you can select a curve that will define the shape of the addenda surface. The straight lines and arcs of
this curve are identified. The begin tangent of the profile is set to the x axis of the local coordinate system that is defined by the set moving
frame. The coordinate origin is lying in the profiles begin point.
The direction (begin and end) of the profile curve is defined by its parameter flow. It can be made visible and changed with the function Curve
modification Invert (see page page 443).
Figure 380 Addenda with profile
selected profile
The values for Collar Length, Flange Length, Angle of the flange, and Radius are adopted. The Angle of the collar is 0. You can align the pro-
file by inverting the x or y axis via the handles of the vector symbols.
Definition of the flange

Flange Length
Length of the flange.
Angle
Angle of the flange regarding the local y axis.
This angle corresponds to the split angle if the y axis represents the drawing direction.
574
PARAMETER
24
Definition of the collar

Collar Length
Length of the collar.
For a Collar Length = 0, no collar will be created, but only a flange surface.
Angle
Angle of the collar:
regarding the local x axis if no reference surface is selected, or
regarding the tangential plane of a selected reference surface.
Blend
If this option is switched on, the theoretical edge, instead of the collar, will be set to the y axis of the local coordinate system.
In this case, you cannot modify the parameters of collar and flange via the graphic symbols, but only via the text fields. Moreover, points can-
not be deleted here. However, each additional flange can be manipulated in the way described in section 20.7 Curve creation Curve
Sketch on page 428.
Figure 381 Addenda with reference surface with and without Blend
Blend OFF: Blend ON:

the begin point of the collar is the theoretical edge is lying
lying on the y axis on the y axis
Radius
Radius between collar and flange.
Duplicate
The created surface is duplicated when changing a parameter and re-executing the function.

You may choose whether a Bezier surface, a B-Spline surface or a scan shall be created.
Appr. Tol.
24.14.3 Parameter
575
APPROXIMATION
24

In addition, options for defining a moving frame are available in this menu. The moving frame defines a local coordinate system that is moved
along the spine curve. It is used with equal mode of operation in several functions. You will find a detailed description for the function Surface
creation Profiles under the corresponding options on the following pages:
(see page 523)
Axis: Auto, Vector
(see page 526)
(see page 526)
Order: U, V
Order of the addenda surface in cross and longitudinal direction.
24.15 Surface creation Gap

With this function you can create crimp surfaces with a constant gap distance on a underlying surface. The curve selected as guide defines the
gap course.
The crimp or fillet flange surfaces are created on both sides of the guide and lie on the underlying surface. The goal of the function is to reduce
the time for the creation of gap geometry.
The following methods are available for the different application areas:
Flange Flange (e. g. pane rabbet)
Crimp Flange (e. g. door gap)
Crimp Crimp (e. g. headlight outline)
Zero Gap (e. g. transition to plastic material parts)
Flange Bottom
576
GAP
24
Flange Flange
Exceptions
Zero Gap
Crimp Flange
Crimp Crimp
The menu consists of the tabs Gap, Parameter, and Approximation, which are described in the following sections.
24.15.2 Gap
Gap type
In this popup menu you can toggle between the following methods for gap creation:
Crimp Crimp
Crimp Flange
577
GAP
24
Zero Gap
Flange Flange
Flange Bottom
Select
Curve +
Selection of the guide curve. The guide is used as driving curve for gap type elements on either side of the guide curve.
Surface 1 +
Selection of the underlying surfaces on which the gap shall be created.
578
GAP
24
Surface 2 +
Selection of an alternative set of underlying surfaces. The surfaces selected with this option may have a different shape and position as
Surface 1.
Alignment
Alignment of the draft angle.
Normal to Surface 1
The draft angle is measured from the surface normals used in Surface 1.
Direction
The draft angle is calculated from a given direction selected or created by the user. The Vector button becomes active when this option is
chosen.
Vector
Definition of the draft angle direction via the Vector selection (see page 60).
Distance
NOT available for the gap type Zero Gap.
Definition of the distance between the resulting gap surfaces. The gap surfaces are calculated depending on the selected Gap type (see
page 577).
True Distance
Only available for the gap type Crimp Crimp.
Crimp surfaces can be calculated with a constant gap distance.
Off
A crimp surface with a visible gap is created, as before, with the specified gap distance in a defined view direction.
On
A gap surface is created where the centres of the fillet surfaces have the following distance: Radius 1 + Radius 2 + Distance. The true dis-
tance is measured at any position of the guide in the plane of the moving frame.
579
GAP
24
Distance = 1mm, True Distance Off Distance = 1mm, True Distance On
visible gap distance in Centre points of the

specified view direction = 1mm fillet surfaces
Radius 2
Radius 1
True Distance > 1mm

True Distance = 1mm
Position: Center Line, Side 1,Side 2

NOT available for the gap type Zero Gap.
Definition of the gap position relative to the guide curve. The following options are available:

Type of the gap surface.
Order: U, V
Minimum order of the gap surface.
Gap
The smallest and largest gap distance is displayed both in the graphics area and in the function window.
580
PARAMETER
24
24.15.3 Parameter
Variant: Crimp, Crimp Flange, Flange

Only available for the gap types Crimp Crimp and Crimp Flange.
The resulting fillet flange can be altered on one side according to the selected gap type. Only certain options are available depending on the
gap type:
Gap type Crimp Crimp Variant Crimp Crimp
Variant Crimp Crimp Flange
Variant Crimp Flange Crimp Flange
Gap type Crimp Flange Variant Crimp Flange
Variant Crimp Flange Flange
Continuity
NOT available for the gap type Crimp Crimp. For the gap type Crimp Flange, only available for the variant Flange.
There are three continuity settings available to the user for the resultant fillet:
Position: No fillet is created.
Tangent: Tangency continuity is maintained between the fillet and underlying surfaces.
Curvature: Curvature continuity is maintained between the fillet and underlying surfaces.
Radius
Radius value across the full length of the fillet.
Chordal
Only available for the continuities Tangent and Curvature.
A fillet with chordal parameterisation and constant distance across the bi-tangent lines of the fillet is created.
581
APPROXIMATION
24
True Min Rad

(True Minimum Radius)
Only available for the continuity Curvature.
Control of the minimum radius. The guide curves will be computed 1.5 x Mid. Radius value for both Position and Tangent continuity.
Min. Rad.
(Minimum Radius)
Minimum radius across the entire fillet length.
Crimp Angle
Only available for the variants Crimp Crimp and Crimp Flange.
Definition of the angle in which the flange portion of the section is angled. The angle must be greater than 180. If, in case the variant Crimp
Flange is used, the angle is 360 (closed), no flange length can be specified.
Length
Flange length.
Angle
Flange angle.
Draft Direction
NOT available for the gap type Crimp Crimp. For the gap type Crimp Flange the draft direction can only be specified for one side.
Definition of the draft direction via the Vector selection (see page 60).
24.16 Surface creation Global Face

This global face function allows you to trim several intersecting surface and face clusters. The intersecting curve is used as trim curve.
582
SURFACE CREATION GLOBAL FACE
24
Figure 382 Global creation of faces
Active Region
(limitation geometry)
Active Region
(geometry to be trimmed)
Original Geometry Trimmed Geometry
geometry to be trimmed
limitation geometry
Select
Selection of one or several surface/face clusters to be trimmed.
Limitation
Selection of one or several surface/face clusters as limitation.
Active Region
Several active regions can be defined. The number of the possible active regions depends on the number of selected surface/face clusters
and the existing intersecting curves. The active regions can be defined on the objects to be trimmed as well as on the objects selected as lim-
itation, i. e. all objects can be trimmed.
With the options Invert and All you can specify, whether the active or inactive regions or all regions shall be preserved after the face creation.
Surfaces
The surfaces/faces to be trimmed are trimmed at the objects selected as limitation.
Plane
The surfaces/faces to be trimmed are trimmed at the current work plane.
Duplicate
The original surfaces/faces are duplicated before the trim operation. The topological distribution of the resulting faces depends on the setting
of this option:
OFF
The resulting faces are created in the same molecule as the original surfaces and adopt their properties (Material, Colour).
ON
If the original surfaces are on one molecule, a new molecule containing the resulting faces is created.
If the original surfaces are in several molecules, for each original molecule is created a new molecule containing the faces belonging to
the corresponding original surfaces.
Invert
The active region can be inverted, i. e. if the option is switched on, instead from the inactive regions the faces are created from the inactive
regions.
All
The faces are created from both the active and inactive regions. The option Invert has no influence in this case.
Obj. + Lim.
(Object + Limitation)
Both the surfaces/faces to be trimmed and the objects selected as limitation are trimmed.
583
SURFACE CREATION ADVANCED FILLET
24
Base Patches
This option can only be used, if faces are selected as original geometry.
In general, the limitation is calculated from the intersecting curve of the active regions of the original surfaces/faces. If holes occur in the sur-
faces, the limitation cannot be calculated, as no closed intersecting curve exists. However, if faces have been selected as original geometry,
the limitation can be calculated in the inactive regions of the holes on the basis of the intersecting curve of the base patches.
NOTE:
Eventually, using this option will need a considerably longer computing time, e. g. if the base patches of the original faces intersect,
or if in case of overlapping inactive regions more than one intersecting curve are existing.
Figure 383 Computation of the limitation on base patches
Face
Base Patch
Original Geometry Trimmed Geometry
limitation geometry
Gap
If the surfaces/faces of the original geometry are not exactly matched, gaps and/or overlaps may occur in the intersecting curves, so that they
are not closed. Nevertheless, the limitation can be computed if the gaps or overlaps are smaller than the gap tolerance specified.
In the preview you can check whether the gap tolerance is kept. Critical regions of the intersecting curve are marked in red. You can change
the tolerance value and carry out another preview until no critical regions are displayed.
Preview
Before carrying out the trim operation, you can display in the preview the active regions and check whether the gap tolerance is adhered to.
The edges of the active regions are emphasised in blue and critical regions in the intersecting curve in red colour.
Figure 384 Preview
Active Region
(limitation geometry)
limitation geometry
Active Region
(geometry to be trimmed)
critical region of the intersecting curve
24.17 Surface creation Advanced Fillet

This function creates fillet surfaces between sets of surfaces and curves used as underlying elements.
The edges of the fillet surface are defined by the one or several radii, chord lengths, or curves on the underlying surfaces.
With additional radius parameters and options you can influence the shape of the fillet surface.
For the transition between fillet surface and underlying element the transition qualities from Position to Torsion/G are available.
584
FILLET+
24
Moreover, the underlying surfaces can be trimmed at the fillet surface.

As input elements and parameters must be specified at least two surfaces and one radius.
After setting of the parameters and confirmation with OK in the window Advanced Fillet is created an initial fillet surface, whose parameters still
can be modified.
NOTE:
If for the fillet creation only one alternative is possible, the normal alignment of the underlying surfaces is corrected automatically, if it does
not allow a fillet creation.
In case of several possible alternatives, the normal alignment can be changed manually using the vector symbols, thus determining the
quadrant, in which the fillet surface can be created.
After terminating the function via the button or activating Select the objects will be created permanently.
24.17.1 Fillet+
Fillet type
The fillet type defines which criteria to choose as input for the fillet creation.
Depending on the fillet type set, different options for the radius parameter definition are displayed in the Advanced Fillet window.
Radius The fillet surface is defined by two underlying surfaces and the radius.
Surface 1
Radius
Surface 2
585
FILLET+
24
Chord Length The fillet surface is defined by two underlying surfaces and the chord length.
The chord length is the distance between both edges of the fillet surface lying on the underlying surfaces.
Surface 1
Surface 2
Chord Length
Curve The fillet surface is defined by two underlying surfaces and a curve used as fillet surface edge. The radius
value derives from the curve.
Surface 1
Curve
Surface 2
IMPORTANT!
The surface where the curve is lying upon must be selected first as no result can be created other-
wise.
586
FILLET+
24
3 Radii The fillet surface is defined by two underlying surfaces, the radius as well as two accumulating radii.
Depending on the selected radii you can create an asymmetric fillet surface.
R 1 = 500 mm
R 2 = 200 mm
Radius = 300 mm
Surface 1
R1
Radius R2
Surface 2
NOTE:
To be able to create a fillet surface with three different radii, the Radius value must lie between the
values of R 1 and R 2, i. e. either R 1 must be larger and R 2 smaller than Radius, or vice versa.
2 Chord Lengths The fillet surface is defined by two underlying surfaces and two chord lengths.
The chord length is the distance between the theoretical intersection point of the arc tangents and the fillet
surface edge on the corresponding underlying surface.
Chord 1 = 300 mm
Surface 1
Chord 2
= 100 mm
Surface 2
587
FILLET+
24
True Min Rad The fillet surface is defined by two underlying surfaces and the true minimum radius.
(True Minimum Using the true minimum radius guarantees that the radius in the fillet curve will not fall below the specified
Radius) value while keeping the continuity set.
Fillet type True Min Rad Fillet type True Min Rad
Radius = 200 Radius = 200
Matching 1+2 = Tangent Matching 1+2 = Curvature
Surface 1 Surface 1
Surface 2 Surface 2
Var Radius (Variable Radius)

For the fillet surface to be created can be defined several radii.
for detailed information about fillet creation with variable radii, please refer to section Creating fillet surfaces
with variable radii/chord lengths on page 592.
Position Radius E (End)

on the spine curve
surface edge
Surface 1 Radius E used as Spine
Curve
Position Radius B
Radius A (Begin) on the
spine curve
Surface 2
588
FILLET+
24
Var Chord Length (Variable Chord Length)

r the fillet surface to be created can be defined several chord lengths.
for detailed information about fillet creation with variable chord lengths, please refer to section Creating fillet
surfaces with variable radii/chord lengths on page 592.
Table 30 Radius parameter
Fillet type Radius parameters Additional parameters
Radius Radius: Lead-in R 1+2

Definition of the fillet radius between two underlying (Lead-in Radius)(optional)
surfaces. The lead in radius is defined as an arc with tangent
or curvature continuous transition to the underlying
surfaces. The radius value defines the point at which
the lead in radius commences.
Chord Length Chord: Lead-in R 1+2 (optional)

Definition of the chord length.
Curve Lead-in R 1+2 (optional)
3 Radii Radius: R 1+2

Definition the first radius. (Radius)
Definition of the second and third radius.
2 Chord Lengths L 1+2

(Length)
Definition of chord lengths.
True Min Rad (True Radius: Lead-in R 1+2 (optional)

Minimum Radius) Definition of the true minimum radius.
Var Radius Radius B E (Radius Begin End):

Radii definition at the beginning and end of the Spine Couple Radius B/E
Curve.
Var Chord Length Chord B E (Chord Begin End):

Chord lengths definition at the beginning and end of Couple Chord B/E
the Spine Curve.
Radius/Chord B E Couple
Only available for the fillet types Var Radius and Var Chord Length.
Couple Off
You can specify different values in the B and E text fields.
Couple On
In case of closed fillet surfaces, couple unifies begin and end values to obtain better results.
separate definition of equal values for coupled definition of equal values for Radius
Radius B and E B and E
589
FILLET+
24
Select
Surface 1, Surface 2
Selection of the underlying surfaces. With the button +, additional surfaces can be selected.
Curve
Only available for fillet type Curve.
Selection of a curve for defining a fillet surface edge.
Spine Curve
Only available for fillet types Var Radius and Var Chord Length.
For the creation of a fillet surface with variable radii/chord lengths it is necessary to select a spine curve onto which the variable radii/chord
lengths are defined.
In many cases as spine curve can be a curve with similar shape as the intersection curve of Surface 1 and Surface 2.
The active region of the spine curve, i. e. the part to which fillet arcs exist, is marked (see Figure 386 Preview Advanced Fillet with fillet type
Var Radius on page 594).
The length of the spine curve defines the maximum extension of the fillet surface.
A spine curve is used for following reasons:
Radii and chord lengths can be positioned exactly.
The positioning of the specified radii/chord lengths in 3D space becomes more transparent and can be easier adapted.
The result becomes geometrically stable and reproducible.
In some cases it is difficult to determine the spine curve automatically.
Min. Rad.
(Minimum Radius)
Only available if Form Factor is switched off.
For the middle of the arc can be defined a mid radius different from the radius.
The mid radius is specified as true minimum radius the profile cross section must have. In this case it has to be observed that the radius spec-
ified is large enough to allow actually this value. This depends on the geometry. The approximate radius value should be 1.5 times larger than
the centre radius
The continuity is kept when the mid radius is modified.
The mid radius is applied along the centre line of the radius value.
Mid Radius
Radius
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
With this option you can specify the maximum distance between radius position on the spine curve and both assigned points on the RRLs in
the preview, thus avoiding the creation of multiple results. If the distance to one or both of these points exceeds the value specified as Max.
Distance, no fillet surface is created at this position.
590
FILLET+
24
Max. Distance Off Max. Distance On
Distances between radius and fillet position
NOTE:
In the RRL preview, the Max. Distance value is taken into account, so that by means of the preview, the limit value leading to the
desired result can be found without having to completely re-compute the fillet surface.
Transition
As transition quality between fillet surface and underlying surfaces you can select for each side a continuity from Position to Torsion/G.
The minimum order of the fillet surface in arc direction depends on the selected continuity. The order can be increased via the Parameter tab.
In addition, continuity is also used for matching the segment boundaries of the fillet surface to the segment boundaries of the underlying sur-
faces using the RipMatch option on the Approximation tab.
Limitation
Trim
The underlying surfaces are trimmed and additionally reapproximated, so that patches are created.
Face
The trim operation creates faces from the underlying surfaces.
None
Duplicate
Extrapolate
If the connecting edges of the underlying surface surfaces have different lengths, the fillet surface can be extended to the exterior edges of the
underlying surface with the larger extent.
The extrapolation can be activated for the start (Begin) and/or end (End) edge curves of the fillet.
Extrapolate Off Extrapolate Begin On Extrapolate Begin

and End On
Matching
The start (Begin) and/or end (End) curve of an extrapolated fillet surface (option Extrapolate switched on) can be matched to the exterior
edges of the underlying surfaces creating a tangent continuous transition.
591
FILLET+
24
Extrapolate and Match End On

Match End Off Match End Begin On
with trimmed underlying surfaces
Relimitation
Only active if Matching Begin and/or End is ON.
The fillet surface can be trimmed in two different ways:
Face
The result is a face. The basic surface remains unchanged.
Approx
The result is not a face. The basic surface changes.
Form Factor
Only available if Centre Radius is switched off.
With this option you can determine whether the fillet shall be more flat or more copped. The continuity to the underlying surfaces remains
unchanged.
Values smaller than 1 create flat fillets, values higher than 1 steep fillets.
Form Factor Off Form Factor 0,5 Form Factor 2,0
Radius Radius Radius
Individual
You can specify an individual form factor at start and end of the fillet surface.
Shape: Linear Shape, Local Shape, Smooth Shape
When using individual form factors, the inner control point mesh of the fillet surface can be influenced with these options.
Figure 385 Shapes of the inner control point mesh when using individual form factors
Form Factor Begin = 0,5

Form Factor End = 2,1
Linear Shape Local Shape Smooth Shape
24.17.1.1 Creating fillet surfaces with variable radii/chord lengths

After creation of an initial fillet surface with fillet type Var Radius or Var Chord Length with defined start and end radii/chord lengths the window
Variable Radii/Variable Chord Lengths with options for modifying the initial surface is activated.
592
FILLET+
24
The window Variable Radii

The following description of the options in this window refers to the fillet type Var Radius, however, it is also valid for fillet type Var Chord Length.
Insert
Select a point on the spine curve to insert another radius.
Delete
Select the point on the spine curve to which the radius to be deleted belongs to delete the radius from the profile section. A radius can only be
deleted, if at least two radii are still defined.
Weight
The options of this popup menu specify the weight at the transition between the individual radius values.
Local Shape
At each position, the radius is kept constant locally and is then merged smoothly with the next radius.
Smooth Shape
The transition between two adjacent radii is additionally defined by the next radii but one, thus avoiding an oscillation.
NOTE:
This weight function and thus also the RRLs is tangent and not curvature continuous. Therefore, using this option may eventu-
ally lead to unsatisfying results in case of fillet surfaces with curvature tangent transitions.
Global Shape
The radius between two adjacent radius values is defined by all radius values.
Slider/Text Fields
With the sliders and text fields you can modify the individual radii.
Modifications in the text fields must be confirmed with OK or the enter key.
The numbered buttons toggle the colour display of the corresponding radius values between red and green.
The radius value currently modified via a slider or selected with a button is highlighted in white colour in the graphics area. The highlighting
can also be activated by briefly clicking a slider, to identify the corresponding radius without modifying it.
The unnumbered slider is used for a global modification of all radii.
593
FILLET+
24
Dynamic
The preview of the Radius runout lines is updated dynamically in the graphics area when changing the radius values with the sliders.
Preview of the initial fillet surface in the graphics area

After modifications carried out via the Variable Radii/Variable Chord Lengths window, the fillet surface is updated after confirming with OK in the
main menu. In addition to the fillet surface, the preview contains following information:
Figure 386 Preview Advanced Fillet with fillet type Var Radius
4 2
3
2 1 2
1
6
4
5
1. Fillet Begin/End
Begin and End of the created fillet are marked with B and E.
2. Positions of the radius/chord length values
The positions on the spine curve to which a radius/chord length value is attached, are displayed by point symbols which can be moved along
the spine curve to modify the radius/chord length value.
In addition, you can activate a context menu at the point symbols, see Context menu Point on page 594.
3. Active region
The active region, i. e. the region of the spine curve in which pairs of points exist on the radius runout lines (RRL) on Surface 1 and
Surface 2 is highlighted in green.
4. Radius runout lines
Yellow dashed curves display the preview of the radius runout lines automatically updated when changing radius/chord length values, and
thus offering quick feedback of the changes.
5. Assigned points
Yellow circles mark the points on the RRLs of the fillet surface to be created assigned to the radius positions on the spine curve.
6. Marker for the specified radius value
Red arcs on the fillet surface mark the positions at which radius values are defined.
Context menu Point

The context menu Point is activated clicking the right mouse button at the radius/chord length positions. In addition to the standard options (see
General options in the context menus on page 41) the following special options for processing the radius/chord length values and positions are
available:
594
FILLET+
24
Parameter
The radius/chord length position can be defined by specifying the distance to the start point of the spine curve.
Radius/Chord
Radius/chord length values can be specified numerically.
Insert
Position selection is activated for inserting a new value on the spine curve.
Delete
The selected value is deleted.
to Boundary
The radius/chord length value is moved to the nearest end point of the active region.
If at the end point a radius/chord length value is already defined, it will be deleted.
If only two radius/chord length values are defined, the selected value will be moved to the nearest end point at which no value is defined.
TIP:
If different values are used for begin and end radius, this option offers the possibility to create a fillet surface with exactly specified
radii at the edges of the underlying surfaces.
The following steps have to be carried out:
1. First, the fillet surface is created with the first value at the beginning as well as the end. Begin and end value must be coupled.
2. With the option to Boundary the begin value is moved to the begin point of the active region.
3. Without terminating the function, the fillet surface is re-created with the next step using the second value also for begin and
end. This time, the end value is moved to the end point of the active region.
This proceeding is necessary as depending on the geometry different radii can create different active regions and for this rea-
son, the values may eventually not moved to the desired position.
4. Now coupling is deactivated, the begin value reset to the first value and the fillet surface created with exact begin and end val-
ues.
Save
A point is created at the selected radius/chord length position, allowing this way to save the value position in order to eventually restore a par-
ticular construction after a modification.
595
APPROXIMATION
24
Result Tolerances
Approximation tolerances used during approximation of the fillet surface for the transition qualities Position and Tangent to the underlying
surfaces.
The behaviour of the options Order and Segmentation corresponds to the approximation type Manual for curve approximation. The approxima-
tion is calculated with Priority Order.
Order
U: Min
Definition of the order of the created surfaces in U direction until the tolerances for Position and Tangent are achieved.
V:
Definition of the order of the created surfaces in V direction until the tolerances for Position and Tangent are achieved. For the order in V
direction the following conditions can be specified:
Min
The order of the selected geometry being below this value is increased until it reaches this value.
Fix
Increase and/or decrease the order of all selected elements until it meets exactly the order specified here.
For the approximation, the order cannot have another value than the specified one.
Max
The order of the selected geometry being above this value is reduced until it reaches this value.
For the approximation the order cannot exceed this value.
Segmentation V:
Min
Increase the number of segments of the selected geometry which is below this value until it reaches this value.
Fix
Increase and/or decrease the segmentation of all selected elements until it meets exactly the segmentation specified here.
For the approximation, the number of segments cannot have another value than the specified one.
Max
The number of segments of the selected geometry being above this value is reduced until it reaches this value.
For the approximation the number of segments cannot exceed this value.
Output
For the fillet surface can be specified Bezier, B-Spline or Scan representation.
Parameterisation
Specifies how the parameterisation of the fillet surfaces is influenced. The following options are available:
596
APPROXIMATION
24
Reference
Surface 1 + 2
Parameterisation is taken from the 1st or 2nd underlying surface cluster, i. e. the segment boundaries of the underlying surface 1 or 2
determine the segment boundary of the created fillet.
surface cluster 1 surface cluster 1
surface cluster 2 surface cluster 2
Parameterisation of Surface 1 Parameterisation of Surface 2
Both
Parameterisation is taken from both underlying surface clusters. For the definition of the segment boundaries, the following variants are
available:
Merge
At each segment boundary of the underlying surface clusters a segment boundary is inserted in the fillet surface. In this case, very
small segments may eventually be created.
surface cluster 1
surface cluster 2
Stitch
If the distance between two segment boundaries of the underlying surfaces is smaller than the tolerance specified in the text field,
only one segment boundary either from surface 1 or from surface 2 is adopted.
surface cluster 1
surface cluster 2
Average
only one segment boundary is inserted in the middle between the segment boundaries of the underlying surfaces.
surface cluster 1
surface cluster 2
597
APPROXIMATION
24
Rip
only one segment boundary is inserted with position continuous transitions to the segment boundaries of the underlying surfaces.
surface cluster 1
surface cluster 2
Segment boundary created with Rip option with position continuous

transitions independent from the Transition option setting
RipMatch
only one segment boundary is inserted with the transition quality to the segment boundaries of the underlying surfaces also specified
for the fillet surface with Transition on the Fillet+ tab.
According to the Transition setting can be used different transition conditions to the underlying surfaces for each end point of the
segment boundary
surface cluster 1
surface cluster 2
Segment boundary created with the RipMatch option with curvature continuous
transition (Transition: Curvature) at surface cluster 1 and tangent continuous
transition (Transition: Tangent) at surface cluster 2
598
PARAMETER
24
24.17.3 Parameter
Topology
Topology tolerances Position and Tangent used for shell creation and kink detection.
24.17.4 Display

Diagnosis
According the selected options (check buttons Position, Tangent, Curvature, and Torsion/G) the values are displayed in the graphics area.
Indicates the maximum deviation of the fillet surface from the Surface 1 and 2.
Internal
Indicates the maximum deviation between the different fillet surfaces created.
Min. Rad.
(Minimum Radius)
The first check button activates the calculation of the minimum radius.
599
SURFACE CREATION TRI-TANGENT FILLET
24
The second check button activates the display of the minimum radius in the graphics area.
NOTE:
If in case of further limitations, e. g. small values for Order and Segmentation, the Result Tolerances for Position and Tangent are not
kept, the deviations are displayed in the graphics area in red instead of green colour.
24.18 Surface creation Tri-Tangent Fillet

This function allows to create a fillet surface tangent to three surfaces. Specifying a radius is not necessary as the fillet radius is defined by these
surfaces.
NOTE:
If for the fillet creation only one alternative is possible, the normal alignment of the underlying surfaces is corrected automatically, if it does
not allow a fillet creation.
In case of several possible alternatives, the normal alignment can be changed manually using the vector symbols, thus determining the
quadrant, in which the fillet surface can be created.
24.18.1 Fillet3T
600
FILLET3T
24
Fillet Type
3T
The fillet surface is created with distance = 0 from the limit.
3T + Offset
The centre position of the fillet can be moved according to the offset value specified in the text field. A theoretical offset of the limit(s) in
either direction (positive + or negative -) is created.
Offset in positive direction Offset in negative direction
Select
Selection of the underlying surfaces. With the button +, additional surfaces can be selected.
Limit
Specification of the limiting element used for the calculation of the Tri-Tangent fillet.
601
FILLET3T
24
The fillet calculation is based on an imaginary ball rolling at Surface 1 and 2 along the limitation.
Surface 1
Limit
spherical ball fillet radius
Surface 2
Transition
For the transition between fillet surface and underlying surfaces you can select the continuities Tangent, Curvature, and Torsion/G.
Factor
With this option you can specify at the transitions Surface 1 and Surface 2 individual parameter values for each surface. Increasing the factor
moves the fillet edge lying on the underlying surface in direction of the opposite surface direction.
The check buttons toggle the factor usage. If the check button is deactivated, the factor is set to the default value of the current transition qual-
ity.
Tri-Tangent Fillet with transition quality Tangent and Factor
Surface 1 Surface 1
Surface 2 Surface 2
Factor Off Factor On with individual value for Surface 1
Limitation
Face
The underlying surfaces can be trimmed at the corresponding edges of the fillet surface.
None
Extrapolate
If the connecting edges of the underlying surface surfaces have different lengths, the fillet surface can be extended to the exterior edges of the
underlying surface with the larger extent.
The extrapolation can be activated for the start (Begin) and/or end (End) edge curves of the fillet.
Extrapolate Off Extrapolate Begin and End On
602
APPROXIMATION
24
Duplicate
Matching
The start (Begin) and/or end (End) curve of an extrapolated fillet surface (option Extrapolate switched on) can be matched to the exterior
edges of the underlying surfaces creating a tangent continuous transition.
Extrapolate and Matching Begin and End On
Relimitation
Only active if Matching Begin and/or End is ON.
The fillet surface can be trimmed in two different ways:
Face
The result is a face. The basic surface remains unchanged.
Approx
The result is not a face. The basic surface changes.
The Approximation tab contains the same options as the Approximation tab of the function Surface Creation Advanced Fillet (see Approxi-
mation on page 596.
603
PARAMETER
24
24.18.3 Parameter
The Parameter tab contains the same options as the Parameter tab of the function Surface Creation Advanced Fillet (see Parameter on
page 599.

The extendable diagnosis part includes the same options as the area Local Diagnosis of the function Surface Creation Advanced Fillet (see
Local Diagnosis on page 599.
The option Limit is additionally available displaying the maximum deviation of the fillet surface from the limiting element.
24.19 Surface creation Global Fillet

With this tab you can create with one step fillet surfaces at multiple patch clusters, including at surfaces intersecting each other.
Figure 387 Geometry with global fillet
Original Geometry Global Fillet with trimmed underly-

ing surfaces and fillet surfaces
(Face and Edge On)
604
GLOBAL FILLET
24
Figure 388 Global fillet of intersecting surfaces
Original geometry
Fillet surfaces
24.19.1 Global Fillet
Profile cross section

For the fillet surface you can define the following cross section types (see also function Curve segment creation Styling Corner on
page 391):
Arc
The cross-section of the fillet surface is an arc (see figure 333 on page 542.
Acc Tangent
(Accumulating Tangent)
The cross section of the fillet surface is equivalent to an accumulating fillet curve connecting the underlying surfaces with tangent continu-
ity.
Acc Curvature
(Accumulating Curvature)
The cross section of the fillet surface is equivalent to an accumulating fillet curve connecting the underlying surfaces with curvature conti-
nuity (see figure below.
605
GLOBAL FILLET
24
Figure 389 Curvature continuous accumulating fillet curve
Select +
Selection of an arbitrary surface cluster, which is processed together with the clusters selected as surface 1, 2, and 3.
Using the button + you can add further objects to the current selection.
Radius
Definition of the fillet radius.
Centre Radius
If the profile cross section Acc Tangent or Acc Curvature has been selected, you can determine with this option the radius in the centre
point of the fillet cross section (see also function Curve segment creation Styling Corner on page 391).
Internal Transitions
Position
The transition quality between the created fillet surfaces will be position continuous.
Normal
The transition quality between the created fillet surfaces will be normal continuous.
Limitation
The fillet surfaces and/or the underlying original surfaces can be trimmed.
Face
None
No faces will be created from the underlying surfaces.
Edge Matching: Begin/End

The fillet surfaces will be created as faces with tangent continuous transitions between the edge matching curves and the edges of the under-
lying surfaces.
Figure 390 Effect of the options Limitation: Face/None and Edge Matching: Begin/End
Fillet with underlying sur- underlying surfaces Fillet trimmed underlying surfaces and fillet
faces (None active) trimmed (Face active) (Edge Matching active) trimmed (Face and Edge
Matching active)
Fillet Location
Topo Bend
(Topology Bend)
The fillet surfaces are created at the sharp bends lying within the tolerance specified in the surface check (see function Surface Check
on page 176). The fillet quadrants are automatically computed.
All
The fillet surfaces are created in the quadrant into which the normals of the surfaces to be filleted point. No fillet surfaces will be created
where this is not possible due to the normal adjustment.
606
PARAMETER
24
Order
U
Specification of the order in U direction (longitudinal direction)
In case of fillet surfaces with a strong curvature the order in U direction can influence the number of created segments. The lower the
order, the more segments are needed to create a fillet surface.
Figure 391 Influence of the order in U direction onto the number of segments
Fillet with order 3 in U direction Fillet with order 6 in U direction
V
Specification of the order in V direction (cross direction).
NOTE:
If the options Acc Tangent and Acc Curvature are switched on, the order must be high enough to keep the corresponding transi-
tion quality.
For Accumulating Tangent and Accumulating Curvature should at least be set the order 5 and 7, respectively, as a tangent con-
tinuous transition needs order 2 and a curvature continuous transition needs order 3 on each side. An additional order is needed to
keep the Centre Radius.
24.19.2 Parameter
Tolerances
For the computation of the fillet surfaces may be specified the following tolerances:
Deviation
The fillet edge curves will be computed in a way that they are lying on the original patches within the specified tolerance. The required
degrees of freedom will be provided by inserting new segment boundaries (in longitudinal direction).
Segmentation
The segmentation of the fillet surfaces will be computed according to the segmentation of the original patches. A new segment will be cre-
ated when a fillet edge curve touches or intersects a segment boundary.
This tolerance value specifies the minimum distance between two adjacent patch boundaries in the fillet surface, i e. the distance
between the patch boundaries must be larger than the tolerance specified.
NOTE:
In some cases it is desired that a fillet patch boundary is created at each patch boundary of the underlying surfaces. The patch will
only be inserted, if the distance between the patch edges is larger than the minimum value set. Using a larger segmentation toler-
ance you can avoid, for example, the creation of a great number of small patches in case of small offsets of the patch boundaries
of the underlying surfaces.
On the other hand, you may want to insert patches also at closely adjacent patch boundaries. In this case, you should use a
smaller segmentation tolerance.
607
DISPLAY
24
Figure 392 Segmentation
patch boundary 0,1 mm inserted segment 0,1 mm
Fillet with segmentation tolerance 1 Fillet with segmentation tolerance 0.09
Topology
Position
This value determines the admissible distance at the common edge of two patches of a cluster to be still accepted as position continuous
matching.
Angle
This value determines the admissible difference between the patch normals of a cluster to be still accepted as normal continuous match-
ing.
IMPORTANT!
Output
For the creation of the fillet surface you may select the following patch types:
Bezier
Generation of Bzier surfaces. The order along the fillet (in cross direction) is specified at V.
B-Spline
Generation of B-Spline surfaces. The order along the fillet (in cross direction) is specified at V.
NURBS
Generation of NURBS surfaces. This option is only available if the profile cross section Arc is activated. It generates exact arcs in cross
direction (with the order 3). You may control the order only in longitudinal direction (U).
24.19.3 Display
608
SURFACE MODIFICATION
25
25 Surface modification

For general information on surfaces, please refer to section 22.1 Surfaces in ICEM Surf on page 445.
25.2 Surface modification Point

The points of a surface (patch cluster) are modified by using a reference patch which is manipulated instead of the surface. Also other geometry
objects, e. g. curves and raw data, can be modified with this function.
The menu Surface Point
Reference
The modification is not carried out directly on the surface, but on a reference patch from which the modifications are transferred to the surface.
Inactive
When selecting a surface point, a virtual reference patch is created.
Active
After having activated the button Reference you can select a patch as reference. The reference patch should not be smaller than the sur-
face.
If a reference patch has been selected, the button is highlighted. You can deselect the patch by reactivating the button Reference and
aborting the selection in the window Selection (Object).
Fixed Edges
The selected surface edges will be fixed (see figure 393).
NOTE:
Face edges cannot be fixed.
Tangent
The tangents of the selected surface edges will be fixed (see figure 393 d).
Figure 393 Effect of the option Fixed Edges
a) original geometry b) without selection of

fixed edges
c) with selection of fixed d) with selection of fixed

edges and Tangent Off edges and Tangent On
609
SURFACE MODIFICATION CONTROL POINT
25

Delta, Normal
If the option Express is switched on, the point movement can be fixed in direction of the normal in the selected point position.
Dynamic point movement:
If only Normal is switched on, the point can be moved dynamically. Select the point and move the cursor while keeping the left mouse but-
ton pressed.
NOTE:
Numerical point movement:
If the option Delta is switched on additionally, the point is moved by the specified numerical value.

Modification Range
This value defines the range of the surface modifications. The effect of the modification will be more local for greater values and more global
for smaller values.
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
If the selected surfaces have a lower order than the minimum order specified here, their order will automatically be increased to this value.
25.3 Surface modification Control Point

The control points of a surface (patch cluster) are modified by using a reference patch which is manipulated instead of the surface. Also other
geometry objects, e. g. curves and raw data, can be modified with this function.
The menu Surface CtrlP
Reference
A reference patch is selected and modified instead of modelling the surface itself. The modifications carried out on the reference patch are
transmitted to the surface.
Inactive
As reference patch is used a virtual plane patch which according to the normal projection direction may be located in different planes (see
options for Projection direction of the reference patch normal).
Active
After having activated the button Reference you can select a patch as reference. The reference patch should not be smaller than the sur-
face.
If a reference patch has been selected, the button is highlighted. You can deselect the patch by reactivating the button Reference and
aborting the selection in the window Selection (Object).
Fixed Edges
The selected surface edges will be fixed (see figure 393).
NOTE:
Tangent
The tangents of the selected surface edges will be fixed (see figure 393 d).
Projection direction of the reference patch normal

With the following popup menu the reference patch can by aligned by specifying the normal direction:
610
SURFACE MODIFICATION CONTROL POINT
25
X
The reference patch lies in the ZY plane of the model coordinate system, the normal direction is parallel to the X-axis.
Y
The reference patch lies in the ZX plane of the model coordinate system, the normal direction is parallel to the Y-axis.
Z
The reference patch lies in the XY plane of the model coordinate system, the normal direction is parallel to the Z-axis.
Plane
The reference patch is parallel to the current work plane.
View
The reference patch lies in the screen plane.
Vector
The reference patch is aligned in direction of the defined vector.
Normal
The reference patch is aligned in direction of the surface normal in the selected point.

Check button Delta

specified value.
With the following options the movement direction of the selected control points can be specified.
Tangent
A single control point (option Single active) or a control point row (option Row active) can be moved on the control lines of the control point
mesh (see figure 271 on page 483).
Normal
The normal of the selected control point specifies the movement direction of all other selected control points (see figure 272 on page 483).
Offset
Movement of the selected control points in direction of their normal vector (see figure 273 on page 483).

Single
A single control point will be moved.
Row
A control point row will be moved. Select the connection line between two control points.
All
All inner control points will be moved.
All control points are moved together with the selected control point according to a curved function. The factor by which the movement of the
next control point shall be reduced can be defined for the U and V direction by entering numerical values in the text fields.
Example: u = 0.5, v = 0.5. The translation will be reduced for each adjacent control point by 0.75, 0.5, 0.25, etc. If the middle control point is
lifted by 10 mm in Z direction, the adjacent control points will be lifted by 7.5 mm, 5 mm, 2.5 mm, etc.
The effects of the control point modification depend on the selection of the control point.
a) Selection of an inner control point:
Only the inner control points are moved, edge and corner control points remain unchanged.
b) Selection of an edge control point
In addition to the inner control points are moved the inner control points of the edge with the selected point. The corner points remain
unchanged.
c) Selection of a corner control point:
In addition to the inner control points the inner control points of the adjacent edges are moved.
Couple
This option is used to couple the two text fields for the U and V direction of the bell-shaped function (law) when using the option All.
Order: U, V
The order of the reference patch in cross and longitudinal direction may be specified. The default setting is 3 3.
NOTE:
If an existing patch is selected as reference patch (option Select active), the order specified here is assigned temporarily. The orig-
inal patch order will be preserved.
611
SURFACE MODIFICATION MATCHING (MULTIPLE MATCHING)
25
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
25.4 Surface modification Matching (Multiple Matching)

Using this function, a patch transition (matching) for three or four Bezier patches may be created by one step. K- and T-transitions (see figure
below) as well as connections of part edges (neighboured edges not having an equal length) can also be realized with function.
The meeting corners of the created patches form the star point (see figure below).
Figure 394 Valid patch topologies for a multiple blend
Y-transition (e. g. for T-transition chess board K-transition

a corner fillet) topology
= connecting edges
The menu Multi-Matching
Select
Selection of patches to be matched (e. g. via region select across the star point).
If not more than three patches are selected, the selection can be modified with +. After the modification, the reference will automatically be
recognized.
Around the star point must be a closed topology, i. e., each edge beginning in the star point must have an adjacent edge (see figure below).
Figure 395 Invalid patch topology
Reference
Patches may be determined as reference patches; they will remain unchanged.
As reference patch will be automatically selected all patches with at least one edge which can only partially be connected to the opposite
edge of the adjacent patch (see figure below).
612
SURFACE MODIFICATION MATCHING (MULTIPLE MATCHING)
25
Figure 396 Automatic selection of reference patches.
a) b) c)
= reference patches
You may select additional patches as reference patches (see figure 396 a) and b)). However, at least one modifiable patch must remain, oth-
erwise no matching is possible (see figure 395 c)).
Reference patches which are not automatically determined, can be deselected by clicking onto the button Reference and aborting the selec-
tion.
Transition quality: Position, Tangent, Curvature

You may choose the transition quality. Read also the description of the Transition Quality: Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G,
page 409).
The modifiable patches adopt at the connecting edges the transition conditions from the reference patches regarding position, tangent and
curvature continuity. If two adjacent edges are modified, the system computes the mean values of the properties of both patches.
With the options Plane, Projection, and Exact the resulting control point mesh of the modified patches may be influenced.
Plane
Only if Projection is active.
If Plane is switched on, the control points will be projected in the direction of the current work plane normal.
Projection
Off
The control points are modified in a way that the desired transition quality is achieved along the whole edge.
On
The control points are modified in a way that the desired transition quality is achieved only at the base points. The number of base points
is equal to the number of control points of the edge. The base points are distributed regularly along the edge.
The following table shows the advantages and disadvantages of this option:
Advantages Disadvantages Detailed Control Parameters
Multiple blend with Only slight modification Desired transition qual- Plane Off:
projection of the control point ity is only realized at projection of control points in tangent
mesh base points plane normal direction
Plane On:
projection of control points in work plane
normal direction
Multiple blend Desired transition qual- Due to the strong mod- Exact Off:
without projection ity is realized along the ification of the control ratio of the cross tangents at the star
whole edge point mesh a smooth- point and at the outer edge will be pre-
ing and rematching of served, values between these positions
the patches may be are computed using linear interpolation
necessary. Exact On:
ratio of the cross tangents at the star
point is used for the whole edge
Exact
Only if Projection and Plane are inactive.
Off
At the star point is computed a ration of the cross tangents, which in case of a tangent or curvature continuous transition will be used
along the whole edge. The control point mesh can be strongly changed.
On
The cross tangent ratio will be modified from the inner star point to the outside in a way that the ratio will be preserved at both ends. This
way, the control point mesh will only slightly be changed.
613
SURFACE MODIFICATION REFIT SURFACES
25
Figure 397 Influence of the parameter Exact
c:d 1st row c:d=a:b c:d

2nd row
a:b a:b a:b
1st and 2nd control point Exact = On: Exact = Off:

row of the patches to ratio of cross tangents linear interpolation of the
be matched will be preserved ratio of cross tangents
a : b, c : d = ratios of cross tangents
= star point
Gap
With this tolerance two values are computed:
the maximal admissible distance between two adjacent edges,
the maximal admissible length deviation of two adjacent edges.
Adapt
The order of the patches at the connecting edges can be adapted. Only the higher order can be adopted, i. e. a modifiable patch cannot adopt
a lower order from a reference patch.
After clicking on Adapt, the order will be adapted immediately.
If only the check button is switched on, the order will only be adapted when executing the function.
Outer Edges
Fix
The transitions to the exterior patches will be preserved according to the specified transition quality.
Linear
The outer edges will be tangent or curvature continuous according to the specified transition quality.
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
The order of the modifiable patches will be increased to the specified value.
Diagnosis: Position, Tangent, Curvature

Along the transition edges the maximum position, tangent, or curvature deviation will be displayed.
25.5 Surface modification Refit Surfaces

With this function, a patch cluster may be mapped onto digitized data. The patch cluster structure remains unchanged (see figure 397 and
figure 398).
614
SURFACE MODIFICATION REFIT SURFACES
25
Figure 398 Refit surface to raw data
surface projection raw data surface adapted to

direction the raw data
The menu Refit Surfaces
Select
Measured Data
The selection of measured data (raw data or scans) is activated.
Fixed Edges
The selected surface edges will be fixed.
NOTE:
Tangent
The tangents of the selected edges can be fixed.
The influence of the options Fixed Edges and Tangent in global surface modification functions is shown in figure 393 on page 609.
Mod. Range
(Modification Range)
This value defines the range of the surface modifications. The higher the value, the more local is the effect of the modifications and the more
is adapted the surface shape to the measured data.
You can specify a projection direction for the surface refit:
the direction of the current work plane normal (Plane),
the direction of the current view plane normal (View),
the direction of a vector (Vector), or
the direction of the patch normal of a selected patch point (Normal).
Smooth
This value allows the desired compromise between an exact approximation and a very smooth patch.
Express
After activating this button a reference patch having the shape of the resulting surface will be displayed on the measured data. The reference
patch has the order specified in Modification Range. Connecting lines between the control points of the reference patch and the original sur-
face show the projection direction and the amount of difference between original surface and measured data.
At the same time, the window Surface CtrlP is activated. Using this function you may modify the resulting surface (see function Surface mod-
ification Control Point on page 610). The order of the reference patch and the projection direction cannot be changed during the control
point modification.
NOTE:
If Express is switched on, you may activate the context menu Mousewarp by pressing the right mouse button (see page 43).
615
SURFACE MODIFICATION FEATURE DESIGN
25
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
25.6 Surface modification Feature Design

Using this function you may draw and adapt geometry objects to surfaces.
The considered elements have a certain position regarding a reference surface. They can lie directly on the reference surface, but also with a dis-
tance from it. The shape and position of a second surface, the modified reference surface, determines the movement and modification of the
geometry with respect to the reference surface (see figure below). For this modification, the original and end position resp. shape of the geometry
objects is defined through a parametrical surface segmentation.
Figure 399 Adapting several faces with Feature Design
modified
reference surface
reference surface
faces to be
adapted
Two relations will be built up:

1. between the geometry to be modified and the reference surface
2. between the reference surface and the modified reference surface.
The relation between the geometry and the reference surface is established by a Rotation of the geometrys uv parameters onto the reference
patch.
Between the reference surface and the modified reference surface exists a relation of the uv parameters of both patches. If the parameter flow of
the patches is varying, the geometry will be deformed. A different parameter flow can be recognized by a different density of the isolines of both
patches.
If, in addition, the uv orientation of both patches does not correspond, the geometry will be mirrored or flipped during the modification. Therefore,
the orientation of the normals and uv parameters of reference surface and modified reference must be equal. Adjust the orientation, if necessary,
using the function Surface modification Invert (see page 621).
The menu Feature Design
Select +, Ref. Surface, Mod Ref

(Select, Reference Surface, Modified Reference Surface)
Fixed Edges +
You may select patch edges which shall be fixed during the modification. Additional edges can be selected with the button +.
NOTE:
Duplicate
The geometry objects are duplicated before executing the function.
Rotation
At first, the relation between the geometry to be modified, that means the original part, and the reference surface is calculated. With the Rota-
tion option, you then define how this relation shall be kept during the modification, i. e. whether the geometry shall be rotated according to the
reference during the modification or not.
616
SURFACE MODIFICATION CROWNING
25
OFF
The geometry is translated point by point. The angle between geometry and reference may be changed by this.
Figure 400 Feature Design without Rotation
reference
modified
reference
original parallel translation of a point of the geom-

part etry when modifying without Projection
different angle between part and refer-
ence in this point after modification
ON
The geometry is projected onto the reference surface in its normal direction. The geometry is additionally rotated by this. That means that
the angle between geometry and reference will always be kept.
Figure 401 Feature Design with Rotation
reference
modified
reference
original equal angle between part and refer-

part ence in a point of the geometry
Alignment
If this check button is switched on, the U/V and/or normal direction of the modified reference surface is automatically aligned compared to the
initial reference surface.
Tangent
If you have selected fixed edges, tangent continuity will be kept at these edges if the option Tangent is switched on.
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
The minimum order of the modified elements is specified here.
NOTE:
Straight lines (order =2) are only modified if their order was increased before executing the function.
25.7 Surface modification Crowning

Unlike the control point modification with the crowing function the surface shape is modified in a point directly by the specified value (see figure
below). The surface edges can be fixed.
617
SURFACE MODIFICATION CROWNING
25
The function can be used, e. g., in tool manufacturing to compensate the spring-back of the sheet metal for the whole geometry.
Figure 402 Crowning
crowning direction
The menu Crowning
NOTE:
Do all required settings first. The function will be executed after you have selected a surface point.
Select: Fixed Edges

Via this button you can select surface edges which shall be fixed during the modification.
Tangent
The tangents of the selected edges will be fixed.
Crowning Direction
The crowning direction can be defined:
normal direction of the work plane (Plane),
normal direction of the view plane (View),
direction of a vector (Vector), or
normal direction in a patch point to be selected (Normal).
Crowning Value
The amount of crowning has to be defined.
Mod. Range
(Modification Range)
This value specifies the range of the modification. The effect of the modification will be more local for larger values and more global for smaller
values (see figure below).
618
SURFACE MODIFICATION SMOOTH
25
Figure 403 Modification range
original geometry Modification Range = 2

global modification
Modification Range = 10
local modification
Min. Order
(Minimum Order)
The order of the selected surfaces can be determined.
25.8 Surface modification Smooth

Using this function, you can smooth an number of patches and faces at once. In contrast to the smoothing of individual patches with the function
Modify Patch Smooth, however, this function does not allow to modify the order.
The menu Smooth
Select
The selection will be reactivated. The selection set will be kept when switching between functions for global modelling.
Fixed Edges
Patch edges may be fixed during the modification.
Deviation
The maximum deviation of the modified surface from the original surface will be displayed.
Factor
The parameter range is between 0 (= no smoothing) and 1 (= maximum smoothing).
Both, U, V
Selection of the parameter direction(s) to be smoothed.
25.9 Surface modification Convert

With this function, you may convert surfaces from NURBS to Bezier representation, and vice versa. Different results are obtained according to the
original geometry and setting of the option Approximate (see figures below).
619
CONVERSION
25
Figure 404 Conversion from Bezier to NURBS
Patch 1 Patch 1
Patch 1
Patch 1
Patch 2
inner NURBS
segment boundaries
Figure 405 Conversion from NURBS to Bezier
Patch 1 Patch 2
Patch 3 Patch 4
Patch 1
Approximate OFF
Patch 1
Approximate ON
Face 1 Patch 1 Patch 2
Patch 3 Patch 4
Face 1 Face 2
inner NURBS
segment boundaries
NURBS faces can also be converted to Bezier. Faces with edges following exactly the edges of the original patch will be recognized and con-
verted to Bezier patches. In addition, Bezier faces can be converted to NURBS.
The menu consists of the tabs Conversion and Parameterisation, which are described in the following sections.
25.9.2 Conversion
Select
2 Points
This option is only available if a conversion from NURBS to Bezier shall be carried out (option ->Bezier switched on) and Approximate is
active.
If a NURBS surface consists of several inner segments, you may select segments defining the range to be approximated and converted to a
single Bezier patch.
620
PARAMETERISATION
25
After activating the button 2 Points you have to select two points on the NURBS surface. The region of the NURBS surface limited in this way
is approximated by a single Bezier segment. If only one point has been selected, only the corresponding segment will be converted.
> Bezier, > NURBS

Bezier or NURBS surfaces will be generated.
Approximate
Option > Bezier active:
Approximate ON:
The NURBS surface will be approximated by one Bezier surface.
Approximate OFF:
The NURBS surface will be converted to Bezier representation segment by segment.
Option > NURBS active:
Approximate ON:
The system checks during conversion which transition quality (position, tangent or curvature continuity) exists at the common edges
of the Bezier surface to be converted. The NURBS surface will be generated in a way that this quality is kept at the inner segment
boundaries.
Deviation
This option is only available for the conversion of NURBS surfaces to Bezier (->Bezier active).
The maximum deviation of the created surface from the original geometry will be displayed.
Duplicate
The original geometry will be duplicated. New surfaces will be assigned to the current part.
Order: U, V
The approximation will be executed with the order specified.
Several parameters are available for controlling the approximation of a NURBS surface by Bezier segments (options ->Bezier and Approximate
active). The options are described in detail in section 22.3.3 Parameterisation on page 450, in the function Patch Creation By Raw Data.
25.10 Surface modification Invert

The normals of surfaces, patches and faces can be inverted and aligned with this function.
The menu Invert
Select
Reference
For Alignment options you have to select a reference patch or face.
Tolerance
Only available for Alignment options.
Tolerance for the temporary topology computation. If the specified tolerance value for the surface distance is kept, the surfaces are assigned
to the same region.
621
SURFACE MODIFICATION DATA REDUCTION
25
Invert and Alignment

The non-alignment options support the individual manipulation of the patch/face normals or UV direction.
Invert Normal: The normal vectors are shown as red arrows pointing into the local normal direction. The normal direction can be
inverted separately for each single patch/face with the manipulation point in the middle of a normal vector. This does not change the
UV orientation. Pressing OK will execute the operation for all selected patches/faces at once.
Invert UV (Invert U and V): The U direction is shown as a half arrow pointing into the direction of the local U tangent. The U tangent
vector can be rotated in all four possible directions separately for each single patch/face with the manipulation point at the top of the
tangent vector.
The alignment options support the automatic alignment with respect to a reference patch or face. A necessary prerequisite for this is the
creation of a temporary topology from all selected patches and faces which is visualized in the graphics.
Align Normal: The normal vectors can be manipulated in the same way as with Invert Normal. Pressing OK will align all normal vec-
tors with the reference.
Align Normal & UV: The U tangent vectors can be manipulated in the same way as with Invert UV. Pressing OK will align all normals
and all U tangent vectors with the reference. This automatically aligns all V tangent vectors, too.
Displaying/hiding vectors.
Diagnosis
Display of statistic information.
Selected
Number of selected surfaces.
Additionally for alignment options: Number of selected regions.
Adjusted
For non-alignment options: Number of aligned surfaces.
For alignment options: Number of aligned regions. In this case, all surfaces of the aligned regions are marked as modified.
25.11 Surface modification Data Reduction

This function can be used to reduce the segment number of B-Spline surfaces and underlying surfaces of B-Spline faces within a tolerance.
Unnecessarily inserted segments can be removed in this way.
The Menu Data Reduction
Select
The selection will be reactivated. The selection set will be kept when switching between functions for global modelling.
CtrlP
The number of control points before and after the reduction will be displayed.
Maximum Deviation
Control points will only be rearranged if the maximum deviation is smaller than the value specified here.
Maximum Angle
Control points will only be rearranged if the angle difference of the end tangents is smaller than the value specified here.
Duplicate
The original geometry will be duplicated.
Deviation
The deviation can be displayed in the graphics.
Keep Segments
The system tries to reduce the number of control points while keeping the segments.
622
SURFACE MODIFICATION ADDENDA
25
25.12 Surface modification Addenda

With this function you can subsequently modify addenda surfaces. Addenda surfaces consist of the collar (1st patch of the addenda) and the
flange, that are defined by several parameters, such as length, angle, and radius. After selecting the surface, the function Surface creation
Addenda (see page 572) will be activated, by means of which the surface can be modified.
The following parameters will be preset automatically in the menu of this function:
For the moving frame (see section 24.6.2.2 Options for the moving frame on page 523), the type Radial to Spine Curve, as well as the
options Auto OFF and Priority: Tangent for defining the vector are set. With these settings, the y axis is always parallel to the alignment vec-
tor (in tool design: y axis = drawing direction, flange angle = split angle).
The alignment vector is the normal of the selected surface in the begin point of the spine curve.
The values for Flange Length and Flange Angle, as well as Collar Length of the selected surface are automatically inserted in the text
fields. The Collar Angle is set to 0.
The option Blend is switched off.
The spine curve and the profile are automatically identified. The profile, that means the curve defining the shape of the addenda surface, is repre-
sented by a sequence of straight lines and arcs. The modification possibilities and the options available in the context menus are described in the
function Curve creation Curve Sketch (see page 428).
The menu Addenda
Select
25.13 Surface modification Global Trim

The Global Trimming combines the functions Patch creation Face (see page 465) and Patch modification Trim (see page 494). According
to the setting of the option Faces All, either faces are created by the trim operation, or patches are reapproximated.
Additionally, complete patch clusters (which may also consist of faces) can be trimmed at any limitation (curve or iso-line) by one step.
The menu Global Trim
Select
Limitation
The limitations at which the patch shall be trimmed can be selected.
Surfaces
A new selection of the patches and/or faces to be trimmed can be carried out.
This selection also determines the active region (part which will be preserved after the trim operation). The first patch or face must therefore
be selected separately, however, the region selection can be used for the following.
Object, Iso-Curve
Generally, the trimming at a curve and at an iso-curve is distinguished. For detailed information on these options please refer to section 23.4
Patch modification Trim on page 494.
623
SURFACE MODIFICATION GLOBAL TRIM
25
Figure 406 Trimming of several patches at an iso-line
2. select trim point

iso-lines are displayed
3. select iso-line
4. select further
patches to be trimmed
1. select active region =

first patch
5. projection onto
adjacent patches
The options Plane, Patch Edge and Distance are only available if Curve is active as trim limitation type.
Plane
ON
The projection onto the surfaces will be carried out in z-direction of the current work plane.
OFF
The projection will be carried out in the direction of the respective patch normal.
Patch Edge
With this option switched on, the projected curves are automatically extrapolated up to the nearest patch edge.
Distance
A value can be entered into this field only if Plane is not switched on.
If a curve is to be projected onto in surface in normal direction, only those points will be taken having a distance from the original curve which
is not larger than the value specified here.
Faces All
ON
Faces will be the result of the trim operation.
OFF
The patches will be segmented as far as possible. However, if there are already faces, or if the trim curves do not intersect opposite
edges, no faces will be created.
Segmentation
This field is available only if Faces All is active.
During the generation of the surface curves with the maximum order specified, multi-segment curves are created, if necessary, to keep the
determined deviation tolerance. The value specified here defines the maximum number of segments per curve.
Tolerance, Delta Order

The adaptation of the order controlled by the tolerance when trimming at a curve allows to increase the patch order at the respective trim
edge automatically.
If e. g. the deviation between projected curve and trim edge is larger than the tolerance specified, the order will be increased. However, this
will only be carried out until the maximum value determined at Delta Order is reached.
Gap
Adjacent patches are found within the tolerance specified here.
Display, Deviation
Curve
The projected curves can be displayed temporarily. Additionally, the value of the largest deviation of the patch edge from the trim curve
will be displayed.
Surface
For patches, the largest deviation will be displayed. This diagnosis only computes values for segmented patches, there are no deviations
for faces.
624
SURFACE MODIFICATION GLOBAL TRIM
25
Trim Options
Duplicate
The original patch is duplicated before the trim operation will be carried out.
Both
Both parts of the patch will be preserved.
If Both is switched off, only the part selected as active region will be preserved.
Invert
That part which has not been selected as active region will be preserved.
Alternative
Using the button Alternative you may switch between the different trim results, the active region, Both and Invert. The original situation can
be reactivated with an Undo.
625
UNIFIED MODELLING
26
26 Unified Modelling
26.1 General information
This function can be activated with the Icon in the block of geometry functions, as well as via the pull down menu Modify Unified Mod-
elling.
TIP:
The Quick Reference for Unified Modelling (quick_reference_*.pdf) will give you an overview of the principal functionalities and options
of the function. In addition, you will be introduced to the basic work steps for modelling geometry with Unified Modelling.
Unified Modelling is a flexible, object-independent module for modelling geometry by means of a common toolkit. Any combination of geometry is
supported, so that the module is equally applicable to different engineering processes, such as concept or reverse engineering. Unified Modelling
combines in one menu numerous functions for creation, as well as local and global modelling of single or multiple geometries, such as surfaces,
curves and scan data. Traditional ICEM Surf functionalities are accessible without having to leave the module Unified Modelling.
The special possibilities of modelling with Unified Modelling can be realized, among other things, by the following available functionalities:
Topology recognition and generation. Relations between given geometry objects can both be diagnosed and created (continuous transitions).
Processing of NURBS elements also for global modelling. The use of B-Spline curves and patches as reference geometry allows more com-
plex modifications of the geometry.
Dynamic point and control point modifications of the geometry.
Control of the geometry modification by specific laws. Through this, either very local or very smooth modifications can be carried out.
Sucking the geometry to the projection base (surface refit). The objects to be modified will always be adapted to the underlying geometry.
Dynamic movement of the geometry along the projection geometry. The geometry objects can be moved on the underlying geometry via a
reference.
Splitting of the objects into several segments. Through this, the geometry can be refined in particular regions in a way that it can be adapted
more exact. Similarly, the number of segments can also be reduced.
Combining geometry having a very fine structure. An imported hybrid geometry, that means geometry of any structure and composition, or
with a large number of segments, can be transformed into a clean Bezier geometry with new segments.
Easy handling. For example, the order of patches can be modified directly by selecting the desired edge.
Definition of individual objects as being rigid. These objects will then only be moved, and not modified during a global modelling.
26.2 Object types in Unified Modelling and their combinations

The local and global modelling with Unified Modelling is realized by means of three geometry object types combining the objects required for
modelling:
The Geometry includes the geometry objects to be modified.
The Reference represents the control objects needed for a global modelling.
The Projection Base contains the underlying objects onto which the geometry or reference objects can be projected.
The object types are represented by the three lines in the upper part of the main menu. In each line you will find the available functionality for each
object type:
Select (see Selection of Geometry, Reference and Projection Base on page 628)
Display (see Display of the objects on page 630)
Create (see Creation of the objects on page 631)
Projection Direction (see Projection Direction on page 629)
Extended (see Extended options on page 640)
In the following, the relations between these three object types and possible combinations for the geometry modelling shall be illustrated.
626
OBJECT TYPES IN UNIFIED MODELLING AND THEIR COMBINATIONS
26
Geometry
The geometry objects can be modelled directly which corresponds to the standard geometry modelling.
direct modelling
of the geometry
Geometry + Reference
The geometry may also be modified by means of reference objects. This represents a global modelling. Different kinds of objects may be
selected as reference: a curve offers completely different modelling variants compared with a patch or scan.
global modelling of the

geometry via the reference
Geometry + Projection Base

During the modelling, the geometry to be modified can be projected dynamically and in real time onto any other objects, the projection base
(surface refit).
directly modelling the geometry

and simultaneously sucking the
geometry to the projection base
Geometry + Reference + Projection Base

When combining geometry and reference (i. e. global modelling) with the projections base, the geometry can be moved on the projection
base during the modelling.
globally modelling the geometry via the

reference and simultaneously moving the
geometry on the projection base
Figure 407 Application examples
Geometry
Geometry + Reference Geometry + Projection Base
627
THE MAIN MENU
26
26.3 The main menu

The main menu appears after activating the function Unified Modelling. The functionalities available here are described in the following.
Selection of Geometry, Reference and Projection Base

Buttons Geometry, Reference, ProjBase
When activating the function Unified Modelling for the first time after a program start you will be prompted to select geometry objects.
After selection resp. creation of objects, the button Geometry will be highlighted and the corresponding check button will be activated. If,
additionally, reference and/or projection base objects shall be used for the modelling, their selection can be activated individually with the
buttons Reference and ProjBase.
Check Buttons
After selection of objects, the corresponding check button will always be activated initially. Via these check buttons, the individual object
types can be activated and deactivated for the modelling. That means, that you may select elements of all object types, however, switch
them off for the geometry modelling, if necessary, and make them again available for the modelling at any time if required. If geometry,
reference, and/or projection base objects are selected is indicated by a highlight of the corresponding buttons Geometry, Reference,
ProjBase.
NOTE:
If the check button Reference is switched on, the geometry will always be modified via the reference. If the geometry shall be mod-
ified directly, the button has to be switched off.
Selected geometry or reference objects can be modelled by the Point and control point modification. The modification mode is perma-
nently active by default (see setting of the check button Automatic Continue, page 663, in the modification menu).
Button Select
Alternatively, you may also switch on the check buttons of the required object types at first, and activate the button Select. You can then
select the object types that are switched to be active one after another.
TIP:
In sessions (see Saving sessions and variants on page 630), you can also save the settings of the check buttons in the main
menu. By activating a session and clicking the button Select, you can immediately select the object types switched on.
Buttons +
Using these buttons, you may select additional elements or deselect elements (via Ctrl key).
Display
The menu to determine the display of the three object types will be activated (see section 26.4 Display of the objects on page 630).
Create
The menu for creating new geometry, reference or projection base objects will be activated (see section 26.5 Creation of the objects on
page 631).
Extended
The menu Geometry, Reference or Projection will be activated. Different options are available for the three object types:
Geometry
(see section 26.6.1 Extended options for the Geometry on page 640)
definition of topological relations which shall be kept during modelling
diagnoses for topological relations
assignment of properties which shall be kept during the modification
Reference
(see section 26.6.2 Extended options for the Reference on page 647)
definition of topological relations which shall be kept during modelling
diagnoses for topological relations
assignment of properties which shall be kept during the modification
628
THE MAIN MENU
26
definition of the relationship between reference and geometry

Projection Base
(see section 26.6.3 Extended options for the Projection base on page 651)
definition and usage of the projection base
restriction of the projection base to scan regions or feature lines
diagnoses for the projection
The projection direction can be determined via a popup menu:
X, Y or Z direction of the world coordinate system (X, Y, Z)
normal direction of the current work plane (Plane)
current view direction = normal direction of the view plane (View)
direction of a vector (Vector)
direction of the shortest distance (= normal direction) (Normal)
Activation of variants
Saved variants of a session can be activated via a popup menu (see Saving sessions and variants on page 630).
Modelling functions
Several menus for modelling the geometry or reference can be activated via the following icons:
Point/Control Point Modification
This icon will be active if Geometry OR Reference is switched on.

The menu for Point and control point modification will be activated (see page 657).
Feature Design
The icon will be active if Geometry AND Reference are switched on.
The menu Feature Design will be activated (see page 663).
Crowning
The icon will be active if Geometry is switched on.

The menu Crowning will be activated (see page 664).
Move
The icon will be active if Geometry is switched on.

The menu Move will be activated (see page 667).
Volume
The icon will be active if Geometry is switched on and geometry elements are selected.
The menu Volume will be activated (see page 668).
Multiple Undo/Redo
In the window footer you will find options for executing a multiple local Undo/Redo.
Pull-down menu and arrow buttons
Each executed action can be undone and redone via the pull-down menu or the arrow buttons.
629
DISPLAY OF THE OBJECTS
26
Max
(Maximum)
In this text field can be entered the desired maximum number of Undo/Redo steps. The value input has to be confirmed with Enter.
Saving sessions and variants

Options for generating sessions are available in the lower part of the expandible function window. A session can contain several variants. In a var-
iant are combined:
the selected geometry with all assigned properties, for example topology relations, or symmetry properties, as well as
options and parameters in the individual menus of the function, for example activated/deactivated check buttons, settings of popup menus, or
tolerance values.
The current session will be displayed in the window header. The variants of a session can be activated via a popup menu that is located in the
upper part of the function window.
Session
Open
Opens a session which has already been saved.
New
Creates a new session.
Save
Saves the session with the created variants.
Variants
Save
Creating a new variant under any desired name, or overwriting an existing variant. Saved variants can be activated in this list by double-
clicking onto the corresponding name.
NOTE:
The maximum name length is 25 characters. You may generate up to 15 variants.
Newly created variants of a session will get lost when leaving the function Unified Modelling if the session is not explicitly saved.
Rename
Renaming a variant marked in the list.
Delete
Deleting one or several variants.
The submenus activated for saving, renaming, and deleting are described in section 2.4.4 User-defined settings in service functions on page 27.
26.4 Display of the objects
Individual settings for the display of the three object types can be made in this menu which is activated via the buttons in the main menu.
IMPORTANT!
The settings for the display of the objects made in the function Unified Modelling are independent of the settings in the menu Display
Display.
630
CREATION OF THE OBJECTS
26
Colour buttons
Assignment of individual colours to geometry and underlying geometry.
Raw Data
Settings for raw data:
Point
Display of the raw data points.
Segment
Markers of the segment boundaries.
Curve
Settings for curves:
End Point
Display of the curve end points.
CtrlP
(Control Point)
Display of the control point mesh.
Segment
Surface
Settings for surfaces:
Edges
Display of the patch edges.
Iso-Curves
Display of the isolines according to the specified number.
CtrlP
(Control Point)
Display of the control point mesh.
Segment
Shading
Shaded display of the surface.
Scan
Settings of scans:
Flat, Gouraud, Edge, Shad Edge
Faceted display of scans.
Point
Display of the scan points.
Hidden Lines
This option can be used to make curves and raw data always visible, e. g. if they would be hidden by shaded geometry.
26.5 Creation of the objects

Via the buttons Create in the main menu, a menu will be activated where you may create new geometry and reference objects. Curves and
patches (in Bezier or B-Spline representation), as well as raw data and scans can be created. You may specify the order for the generation of
curves and patches, the smoothing factor additionally for patches, and the tessellation value for scans.
TIP:
There are different ways for creating surfaces quickly which are described in section 29.2 How to quickly create surfaces with Unified Mod-
elling on page 698.
631
26
Creation of curves and raw data

According to the setting of the options Bezier, B-Spline, Raw/Scans, you can generate curves or raw data using the icons available here.
NOTE:
Via the context menus (see page 669), you can modify the created objects at any time (e. g. order, segmentation, smoothing fac-
tor).
The submenu Order of curves, patches, faces, and volumes
The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and volumes
The submenu Segmentation of raw data
The submenu Smooth of curves, patches and raw data
The submenu Smooth of raw data
Points
Creation of one or several connected curves or raw data by selecting segment end points or raw data points.
moving a placed placing a new

point point
632
26
Control Point
Creation of one or several connected curves or raw data by selecting control points or raw data points.
moving a placed placing a new con-

control point trol point
NOTE:
For these two options, the order is decisive for the matching quality. With an order 4, the matching will keep tangent continuity,
with an order 6 curvature continuity, and with an order 8 torsion continuity.
The selection of the (control) points will be terminated by OK in the selection window or by pressing the Enter key.
The created (control) points can be moved or deleted, and new (control) points can be inserted subsequently by means of a context menu.
The context menu will be activated by positioning the cursor upon the desired (control) point and pressing the right mouse button. For a
description of the point symbol, as well as the appropriate context menu please refer to section 2.5.8 The point symbol on page 38.
Express
Dynamic creation of a curve or raw data contour by moving the cursor with left mouse button pressed.
without Projection Base:
The raw data points will be projected in view direction onto the current work plane.
with Projection Base:
The raw data points will be projected automatically in view direction onto the projection base. For this, a projection base must be
selected and activated (selection via the button ProjBase in the main menu), and suitable projection options must be set (see
section 26.6.3 Extended options for the Projection base on page 651).
scan =
projection base
dynamic
sketching
The sketching can be interrupted any time, i. e. the left mouse button can be released, without generating a new raw data contour when
starting sketching again. The input will only be terminated by pressing the middle mouse button.
The sketched curves or raw data can be deleted before terminating the input. For this, the cursor has to be moved starting at the last cre-
ated point backwards along the curve or raw data contour with Ctrl key and left mouse button pressed.
After terminating the input, further objects can immediately be created. The begin resp. end points will be snapped to each other within
the selection radius so that no gaps will be generated between the curves or raw data contours. If this does not succeed, the system tries
to snap begin and end point into the interior of the curves or raw data.
633
26
Edge
(Curve Segment/Raw Data Segment from Patch Edge)
Creation of a curve or raw data contour on a patch edge.
selecting
edges
Iso-Curve
(Iso-Curve (Curve Segment/Raw Data Segment) across the Patch Edge)
Creation of a curve or raw data contour on a patch isoline. For this, a point on a patch edge is to be selected.
selecting an
edge point
Curves
(Curve Segment/Raw Data Segment by Curve Approximation)
Creation of an global approximating curve or a raw data from selected curves resp. raw data/diagnosis data.
1. After clicking the icon, the geometry or reference objects to be approximated can be selected.
selecting a
section line
2. If the curves resp. raw data are connected within the specified tolerance (option Gap), a temporary raw data segment will immediately
be generated which will then be approximated for creating a curve.
634
26
3. If one of the object types Bezier or B-Spline is switched on, the approximated Bezier or B-Spline curve will additionally be displayed.
type: B-Spline
Order: 4
Segments: 1
4. The curve order and number of segments can be changed subsequently. Also the object type, as well as the gap tolerance can be
modified.
changing
parameters
Order: 6
Segments: 6
5. The curve will finally be created by pressing the middle mouse button. The selected objects will be deselected and the raw data seg-
ment that was temporarily generated will be deleted.
curve is
created
Taping
Taping is available as additional curve creation function. This functionality is described separately (see page 639).
Creation of patches and scans

According to the setting of the options Bezier, B-Spline, Raw/Scans, you can generate patches or scans using the icons available here.
NOTE:
Via the context menus (see page 669), you can modify the created objects at any time (e. g. order, segmentation, smoothing fac-
tor).
The submenu Order of curves, patches, faces, and volumes
The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and volumes
The submenu Smooth of scans
635
26
4 Points
Creation of a patch or scan by selecting two to four corner points.

scan =
projection base
selecting
points
For this functionality, the option Gap is additionally available.

Edges
(Patch/Scan from Edges)
Creation of a patch by selecting two to four edge curves.
selecting
edges
For this functionality, the option Gap is additionally available

Quick Surfacing
Creation of a patch or scan by selecting any number of edge curves, for example a couple of sections. The curve mesh will be filled with
surfaces of the specified type that are matched to each other position continuity.
selecting x
sections
selecting y
sections
This method allows you to create complex shapes very quickly, but not in class-A quality. For further information, tips and tricks for this
functionality, please refer to section 29.2 How to quickly create surfaces with Unified Modelling on page 698.
636
26
Scan Region
(Patch/Scan from Scan Region)
Creation of a patch or scan on a scan region.

1. For this, a scan must be selected as projection base (via the button ProjBase in the main menu).
2. To select a region from this scan, in the menu Projection the Scan Region tab has to be activated (see page 652). After selection of
the desired region, only this one will be used as projection base.
selecting the scan selecting a region

as projection base of the scan
3. After clicking on the creation icon, the patch will be generated on the active scan region by projecting it onto this region in the projec-
tion direction set in the main menu (see button ProjBase, page 628).
clicking the icon Scan

Region patch is created
4. According to the order specified, only the corner points of the patch are lying on the scan, or the patch is already well adapted to the
scan region. To suck the patch more to the scan, the order can be increased subsequently at any time (see section 29.1 How to
change the order on page 698).
For this functionality, the option Smooth is additionally available.
Region
(Patch/Scan from Region Selection)
Creation of a patch or scan over a region of geometry objects.
637
26
For this, objects must be selected as geometry (via the button Geometry in the main menu). After clicking on the icon Region, the region
selection will be activated.
geometry to be clicking the icon Region patch is created

modified and drawing a region (here: as reference
directly on the geometry)
According to the object type to be created (Bezier, B-Spline, Raw/Scans), choose one of the following modes in the selection menu (see
also section 4.5.1 Selection (Region) on page 61):
Rectangle, to create a patch or a scan, and
Polygon, Ellipse, or Free Style, to create a scan.
For this functionality, the options Smooth (for patches) and Absolute (for scans) are additionally available.
The option Region has a different effect for the creation of geometry and reference objects:
Creation of Geometry:
The selected region will be projected onto the work plane, where the patch or scan will be created.
Creation of Reference:
To generate reference objects, the check button Geometry in the main menu must be active. The selected region will be projected
onto the existing geometry. The created patch or scan is lying directly on the geometry objects.
Auto
Creation of a plane patch or scan over all geometry objects.

For this functionality, objects must be selected as geometry (select objects via the button Geometry in the main menu resp. switch on the
check button). The normal direction of the patch to be created can be choosen via the popup menu below the icon Auto.
After clicking on the icon, you will have to select a point on the geometry that determines the position of the plane where the patch shall
lie in.
clicking the icon Auto

geometry to be plane patch is
and selecting a point on
modified created
the geometry
Duplicate
The geometries selected here will be duplicated. The created objects are not automatically available for the function, but must be selected
separately (see Buttons + on page 628, in the main menu).
638
26
Taping
This functionality offers the option to create curves by simulating the real 2D/3D taping. With 2D taping you can create curves on a back-
ground image (plane), with 3D taping on surfaces or scans as projection base. After clicking the button, the following submenu will be opened:
NOTE:
The preview will automatically be switched on when activating the function Taping.
The required taping method will be set in the pulldown menu.
The method Express corresponds to the functionality for dynamically creating a curve by moving the cursor with left mouse button pressed.
In the other methods, the curve will be created by holding a free piece of the tape (= tangent) and pulling it resp. positioning individual points.
Begin: With this method you hold the beginning of the tangent and pull (or better push) it with left mouse button pressed.
End: In contrast to Begin, you pull at the end of the tangent. This smoothes the curve.
Line: In this method you specify 2 points determining the initial tangent. The free piece of tape is a line. Create a curve by positioning indi-
vidual points.
Curve: Here you also define a tangent by specifying 2 points, but the free piece of tape is a curve. The curve will be created point by
point.
NOTE:
In the modes Line and Curve, the first curve will be created after having fixed all degrees of freedom. The curve will be generated
iteratively: at first as a straight line, then as a parabola, afterwards as a cubic parabola, and at last as a curve of order 4 at maxi-
mum.
The taping will be terminated by choosing a new creation function, by closing the creation window, or as the mouse button assignment
shows by the middle mouse button. Please consider that the Undo function can be assigned to the middle mouse button.
With the colour buttons you can determine the colour of the free piece of tape and the potential curve. The thickness of these elements during
the creation can be set via a pulldown menu.
The option Shape defines the flexibility of the tape, the Arc Length determines the length of the free piece of tape. These values can also be
controlled via keyboard shortcuts. Change Shape with 1 and 2, and Arc Length with 3 and 4.
Order
Order of the curves or patches to be created.
The order can be changes subsequently (see section 26.12.8 The submenu Order of curves, patches, faces, and volumes on page 675).
Segments
Maximum number of segments for the creation of B-Spline curves.
The number of segments can be changes subsequently (see section 26.12.12 The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and
volumes on page 677).
Preview
If this check button is active, the position of the curve (control) point to be selected next, as well as the resulting control point polygon will be
displayed when moving the mouse.
Close
If this check button is active, a closed curve will be created.
Loop
If this option is switched on, the executed creation function will remain active so that you can create more objects without having to click the
icon again. The loop mode will be terminated by switching off the option, cancelling the selection, or activating a new creation function.
Bezier, B-Spline, Raw/Scans

You may choose whether Bezier objects, B-Spline objects or raw data resp. scans shall be created. The order (option Order), the number of
segments (option Segments), resp. tessellation (option Absolute) can be set.
NOTE:
When creating raw data or scans, Bezier objects will be generated first which will then be converted into raw data or scans.
Smooth
The smooth factor will be used for creating a patch with one of the functions Scan Region and Region. Specifying this value allows the
desired compromise between an exact approximation and a very smooth patch.
Absolute
The absolute tolerance specified here will be used for the tessellation of a scan to be created with the function Region (see also option Abso-
lute in the function Scan Creation Object, page 365).
639
EXTENDED OPTIONS
26
Gap
This value will be used for creating a patch/scan with the functions Edges and Quick Surfacing. It determines up to which distance the
edges are considered to be connected or intersecting each other.
26.6 Extended options
26.6.1 Extended options for the Geometry

26.6.1.1 Topology
Transition or edge conditions which shall be kept during the modification can be defined on this tab. Position, tangent, curvature, and torsion/G3
continuities can be realized.
For quickly generating topological relations you can use keyboard shortcuts. The Extended menu need not to be opened for this.
Easy topology generation with shortcuts

To generate transition or edge conditions quickly, only position the mouse cursor above the desired object and use the following shortcuts (capi-
tals):
Shortcut Effect
P sets Position
T sets Position and Tangent
C sets Position, Tangent and Curvature
Y sets Position, Tangent, Curvature and Torsion/G
U deletes the topological relation completely
Topology generation with the options in the menu

The general proceeding for defining topological relations via the menu is as follows:
1. At first you have to decide:
whether the topological relations are to be generated globally for all selected objects, or only for two single objects (options Global, Sin-
gle), and
if they are to represent transition or edge conditions (options Transition, Edge).
2. Afterwards, the required topology settings can be made: definition of the continuity type, consideration of gaps and transition angles, definition
of a partial matching, matching behaviour of curves, etc.
3. At last, the button Generate has to be pressed. The selection menu will then be activated. Here you can select:
either several objects for a global topology generation,
or the 1st and 2nd object for a single matching.
After confirming the selection with OK, the specified topological relations will be generated.
The current transition or edge conditions may be displayed in the graphics (option Display).
4. Topological relations defined in this way can also be deleted globally or individually. For this, activate the button Delete and select objects in
the selection menu.
Generate, Delete
The transition or edge conditions specified in the menu will be generated or deleted.
640
EXTENDED OPTIONS FOR THE GEOMETRY
26
NOTE:
If the options Transition, Global and Delete are combined, all topological information are deleted, including defined edge condi-
tions.
General settings
In the upper part of the menu you will find options which can be used to carry out the following general settings:
Transition, Edge
With these options you can determine whether the topological relations defined in the menu will represent either transition or edge condi-
tions.
Global, Single
With these options you can determine whether the topological relations defined in the menu shall either be carried out globally for all
selected objects, or only for two individual objects. After activating the buttons Generate or Delete, the selection menu will be displayed
where the desired objects can be selected.
Type of topological relation

With these options you may specify the desired transition or edge condition.
Position (position continuous)
Tangent (tangent continuous)
Curvature (curvature continuous)
Torsion/G (torsion continuous)
Transition or edge conditions at natural edges of faces can be kept up to Torsion/G. At trimmed 2D face edges you can at maximum achieve
tangent continuity.
Generally, tolerance values can only be defined for the global topology generation (option Global). Tolerances for tangent and curvature con-
tinuity can only be specified for the option Transition.
Figure 408 Topology: Transition Condition Position + Tangent
PT PT
extrapolation of
the edge transition quality is
kept
Figure 409 Modification of a corner point while keeping the tangent continuity
Topological relations according to the settings and tolerances defined in the menu will automatically be recognized. Depending on the setting
of the general options in the upper part of the menu, the following does apply:
Transition + Global active:
Definition of transition conditions and tolerances. All objects keeping the specified tolerance values will be connected.
641
26
Transition + Single active:

Definition of transition conditions which can be carried out for the selected objects.
Edge + Global/Single active:
Definition of edge conditions which can be carried out globally for all selected objects, or only for two single objects.
Gap
This popup menu is only available for the combination of the options Transition, Single and Position.
No Gap
Generation of a transition without gap.
Keep Gap
An existing gap will be accepted and kept rigid during modifications.
Figure 410 Keep Gap during an extrapolation
Figure 411 Modification of a control point row while keeping the gap between the patches
Set Gap
The menu for vector selection will be displayed where a gap may be defined. This gap can then be assigned via the button Generate.
Plane
Matching to the current work plane representing the symmetry plane.
After activation of the button Generate and selection of a position on the object to be matched, this object will be matched to the plane
with a position continuous transition. When modelling the geometry, the control points will be kept fix in this plane.
If, moreover, Tangent is switched on, a tangent continuous transition will additionally be carried out.
Angle
This popup menu is only available for the combination of the options Transition, Single and Tangent.
No Angle
Generation of a transition without sharp bends.
Keep Angle
An existing transition angle will be accepted and kept rigid during modifications.
642
26
Figure 412 Keep Angle during a control point modification
Figure 413 Modification of a control point row while keeping the angle between the patches
Set Angle
A transition angle may be defined and assigned via the button Generate.
Linear
Generation of a collinear patch transition without sharp bends.
Plane
Matching to the current work plane representing the symmetry plane.
After activation of the button Generate and selection of a position on the object to be matched, this object will be matched to the plane
with a tangent continuous transition. The cross tangents will be aligned orthogonally to the plane.
If, moreover, Position is switched on, a position continuous transition will additionally be carried out.
Modify Both
ON
Both objects are modified for realizing the transition (see figure below).
OFF
Only the object selected first is modified.
NOTE:
This option has also an influence on point/control point modifications (see section General information on page 657).
Partial
This option is only relevant for matchings of patches and faces with Transition and Single.
ON
Partial matchings are possible (see figure below).
643
26
If the distance between the reference edge end and the corner of the connected patch/face is smaller than the tolerance specified under
Position, the patch/face corner will coincide with the end of the reference edge.
OFF
The edges are completely connected to each other.
Figure 414 Effect of the options Partial and Modify Both
original situation
Partial ON Partial OFF

Modify Both OFF Modify Both ON
Automatic
This option is only relevant for matchings of patches and faces with Transition and Single.
ON
The second connecting edge will be found automatically. If Partial is additionally switched on, also the appropriate partial edges are rec-
ognized automatically.
OFF
The second connecting edge must be explicitly selected. If Partial is additionally switched on, the required partial edge must be assigned
by selecting two points on each patch or face edge.
Matching
ON
The objects are always matched, and the diagnoses are calculated.
OFF
Dynamic topology recognition. The matchings are not kept, but only the diagnoses are carried out. In this way, you may recognize how the
specified tolerance values will be kept during the modelling without matching the objects.
For information about the definition of diagnoses, please refer to section 26.6.1.2 Diagnosis on page 645.
B-Spline
Definition of the curve matching behaviour as shown in the following figure:
644
26
Figure 415 Effect of the option B-Spline
B-Spline
OFF (default)
B-Spline ON
movement of the curve control point
Blend
To get or maintain a regular control point distribution, the whole control point polygon is modified, but not only the control points required for
alignment.
Display
The current settings for transition and edge conditions may be displayed in the graphics. The following abbreviation are use:
Abbr. Meaning Description
Transition Conditions:
S symmetry plane matched to symmetry plane
P position position continuous
G gap position dependent via gap vector
T tangent tangent/slope continuous
A angle angle dependent via angle between tangents/normals
L linear collinear, slope continuous
C curvature curvature continuous
Y Torsion/G Torsion/G continuous
Edge Conditions:
p position position fixed
t tangent tangent/normal fixed
c curvature curvature fixed
y Torsion/G Torsion/G fixed
26.6.1.2 Diagnosis
Diagnoses for topological relations can be carried out with this menu.
645
26
Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

Here you may specify the admissible values for the transition or edge conditions. The edges or end points at which these values are not kept
will be marked using the colours which can be set individually.
NOTE:
The values set here are independent from on in the Topology tab.
Display
The display of the diagnoses can be switched on and off.
Diagnosis
With this button you can select an individual object on which a local topology diagnosis shall be executed. The transition values will be dis-
played in the menu.
26.6.1.3 Properties
In this menu, specific properties which shall be kept during the modification can be assigned to objects.
Defining rigid objects

You can define objects which shall be kept rigid during the modification. These objects can no longer be deformed but only moved afterwards.
Rigid +
Objects for the symmetry can be selected with the button Rigid.
With the + button, you can select additional objects, or deselect individual objects by simultaneously keeping the Ctrl key pressed. To
completely undo the selection of rigid objects, press the button Rigid and cancel the selection with .
646
EXTENDED OPTIONS FOR THE REFERENCE
26
Figure 416 Rigid geometry
without definition
of rigid geometry
with definition of rigid geometry reference

rigid geometry objects patch
Colour button
With the colour button , you can assign an individual colour to the rigid objects.
Defining symmetric objects

Inner symmetry can be defined for objects. Each modification at the master side of the geometry will then also be executed at the mirrored
half.
Symmetric +
With the button Symmetric, you can select objects which shall be matched to the defined symmetry plane.
Generally, the symmetry will be realized with the first modelling operation that is carried out after assigning this object property. The mas-
ter side is determined by the pick position for the modelling.
If the symmetry shall be executed immediately, the OK button has to be pressed. In this case, the master side is that side of the geometry
that is determined by the following direction:
for Y=0: negative y direction and
for Plane: z direction of the work plane.
in whose direction the normal of the symmetry plane points to.
With the + button, you can select additional objects, or deselect individual objects by simultaneously keeping the Ctrl key pressed. To
completely undo the selection of symmetric objects, press the button Symmetric and cancel the selection.
To define a new symmetry plane, the selection has to be undone for individual or all objects. With the subsequent selection of objects, the
new plane is used.
Colour button
Assigning an individual colour to symmetric objects.
Symm. Plane
(Symmetry Plane)
Here you can specify the plane to be used as symmetry plane:
the plane Y=0 (side view), or
the current work plane Plane (see also section 11.5 Display Plane on page 265).
26.6.2 Extended options for the Reference

26.6.2.1 Topology
Transition and edge conditions for objects which shall be kept during the modification can be defined in this menu. Please refer to section 26.6.1.1
Topology on page 640 for a description of the available options.
647
26
26.6.2.2 Diagnosis
Diagnoses for topological relations can be carried out with this menu. Please refer to section 26.6.1.2 Diagnosis on page 645 for a description of
the available options.
26.6.2.3 Properties
In this menu, specific properties which shall be kept during the modification can be assigned to objects. Please refer to section 26.6.1.3 Proper-
ties on page 646 for a description of the available options.
26.6.2.4 Options
Options for defining the relation between geometry and reference are available in this menu.
648
26
Translate
Only the region of the geometry covered by the reference is modified. With this option, you may determine how geometry regions which are
not covered by the reference shall behave during the modification.
OFF
The region which is not covered will be stretched or compressed.
ON
The region which is not covered will be translated.
Figure 417 Effect of the option Translate
geometry reference patch

elements
Rotation
This option has only an influence for surfaces.
You may determine whether the geometry shall be rotated according to the reference during the modification or not.
OFF
The geometry will only be translated.
649
26
Figure 418 Relation between geometry and reference without Rotation
Geometry
Reference
Projection translation of the

Base reference patch
ON
The geometry will be rotated additionally. That means that the angle between geometry and reference has always the same value.
Figure 419 Relation between geometry and reference with Rotation
translation of the
reference patch
Control Point
Through this option, only the control points covered by the reference are modified. All parts of the geometry which are lying outside of the ref-
erence will not be modelled. The geometry is not reapproximated with this option.
Figure 420 Effect of the option Control Point
reference patch
after extrapolation
original situation of the reference
modified control points

not modified control points
Projection
The assignment of the points of the reference to the points of the geometry can be specified.
OFF
The assignment is defined by the shortest distance between reference and geometry.
ON
The assignment is carried out in the direction of a selected vector (projection direction). The vector selection menu will be activated.
650
EXTENDED OPTIONS FOR THE PROJECTION BASE
26
The projection direction may be determined via a popup menu (X, Y, Z, Vector).
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
If this option is switched on, modifications of the reference only influence those parts of the geometry having a distance to the reference not
exceeding the value specified. Geometry points lying farther from the reference will be kept.
Smooth Factor
Smoothing can be switched on and off for the approximation.
ON
The smooth factor can be specified.
OFF
A smooth factor of 0 is used for the approximation.
OK
If you press the OK button, the relations between reference geometry and geometry to be modified will be explicitly generated. Through this,
the initial step of the dynamic modification will be accelerated. This is especially useful for large data amounts and complex relations.
26.6.3 Extended options for the Projection base

Options for the definition and usage of the projection base, as well as diagnoses for the projection are available in the menu Projection. By select-
ing a projection base, you benefit from the following advantages for the modelling:
During the dynamic modelling of the geometry/reference, the geometry resp. reference objects are simultaneously sucked to the selected
projection base.
Dynamic surface refits can be carried out.
Any objects can be selected as projection base:
Curves can be sucked to other curves. Moreover, also meshes of curves and raw data, as well as patches, faces and scans may be
selected.
TIP:
For the projection in Unified Modelling you should generally, but especially with the express functions, work in the parallel perspective, and
NOT in the central perspective. The projection in the parallel perspective offers a much higher performance. The perspective can be defined
in the menu Display View/Navigation (see page 253).
The menu is divided into the areas Options, Scan Region, Feature Line and Diagnosis.
26.6.3.2 Options
On this tab you can find general options for the projection. Additionally, you may determine:
1. what shall be projected (Geometry, Reference, Auto), and
2. onto which objects the projection shall be carried out (onto curves or surfaces resp. onto all selected objects), i. e. the Projection Method.
Geometry, Reference, Auto

With these options you determine what shall be projected onto the projection base. The geometry and/or reference will be projected if the
option ProjBase in the main menu Unified Modelling is active (see section 26.3 The main menu on page 628).
only Geometry
The geometry is independent from the reference.
only Reference
The geometry follows the reference during the modelling.
Auto
The geometry will only projected if there is no reference.
Projection Method
With these options you determine onto which objects shall be projected. The following objects can be used as projection base:
651
26
Curves
Curves and raw data can be projected onto curves and raw data. All other combinations will be ignored.
This means that a curve can be projected onto another element with curve properties. For example, a curve can be drawn onto a raw data
contour or a complex face edge and be dynamically smoothed. With the curve creation functions (see Creation of curves and raw data
on page 632) or by setting segment boundaries (see The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and volumes on page 677)
you can quickly build complex and smooth curves.
Surfaces
All object types of the geometry resp. reference can be projected onto patches, faces and scans. All other combinations will be ignored.
Here, in contrast to the option All, the objects will be projected directly onto the selected surfaces.
In this case the scans must be faceted.
All
All remaining combinations are possible.
Scans need not to be faceted. This option also allows the projection of surfaces onto a framework of curves or raw data.
TIP:
The option All should only be used if mixed geometry is available, such as curves, surfaces, and point sets, for example.
Auto
The system chooses from the above options that one that is most suitable in the current situation. The following applies here:
If a feature line is selected and only curves are projected, Curves will be used.
If the projection base contains only curves and no surfaces, Curves will be used if only curves are projected, otherwise All will be
used.
If the projection base contains curves and surfaces, All will be used.
If the projection base contains only surfaces resp. faceted scans, i. e. no mixed geometry is available, Surfaces will be used.
Max. Distance
(Maximum Distance)
ON
The geometry or reference is projected onto the projection base within the specified distance.
OFF
The geometry or reference is projected without consideration of its distance from the projection base.
Smooth F.
The projected parametrical objects are reapproximated. The approximation quality may be defined by the smoothing factor. With a large
value, smooth curves and surfaces are created. A small value effects a small deviation from the projection base.
Edge
This option has only an influence if surfaces have been selected as projection base, and Surfaces or All is defined as projection method.
ON
The control points can only be modified within the boundaries of the projection base, i. e. the movement is restricted by the edges. This
way, the modified control point is always lying on the projection base.
OFF
There is no restriction for the modification. If a complete projection is not possible because the modified object exceeds the projection
base, the object will only be partly projected.
Control Point
The control points may be projected onto the projection base resulting in a faster projection.
Select
OFF
All objects of the geometry and/or reference are projected onto the projection base.
ON
Only single selected objects are projected. For this, you have to activate this option, select the desired objects and click on the OKbutton.
26.6.3.3 Scan Region

If a scan is selected as projection base, it may be restricted to regions. For subsequent modellings, the geometry and/or reference will be pro-
jected only onto this regions as long as the projection base is active (check button in the main menu switched on).
A scan region defined in this way can be used, for example, to create a patch or scan. After region definition, open the menu for the Creation of
the objects and click on the icon Scan Region (see page 637).
For the selection of scan regions, various possibilities are available. The selected regions can be highlighted by choosing a colour and a material.
The scan regions will either be duplicated, so that the original scan will remain unchanged, or the original scan will be divided into several scans.
652
26
Selection mode
According to the setting of the option Deselection, scan regions can be selected or deselected. For a description of the selection modes
please refer to the section Selection modes on page 63.
Max. Angle
(Maximum Angle)
Angle tolerance for the calculation of regions using the option Flat Region.
IMPORTANT!
Radius
Radius for the calculation of regions using the option Express.
Shading
The selected scan regions can be displayed in shaded mode.
Symbols
Setting the point symbol used for the display of scan points.
Colour
Colour setting for scan points. Scan points will only be displayed if Shading is switched off.
Material
Material setting for shaded display of the selected facets (Shading switched on).
Deselection
Selected scan regions can be deselected individually. For the deselection is used the current selection mode.
Create
After having choosen the desired selection mode, this button has to be activated before the graphical selection can be carried out.
Reset
Global deselection of all selected scan regions.
Duplicate
The selected scan regions will be duplicated.
Divide
The original scan will be divided into several scans according to the selected scan regions.
653
26
Figure 421 Divided scan
26.6.3.4 Feature Line

The options available here may be used for creating and removing feature lines, i. e. shape-defining curves on scans, for use as projection base
(see also function Scan creation Feature Line, page 367).
Figure 422 Usage of feature lines (option Sharp Bend) for curve creation
The general proceeding for creating feature lines is as follows:

1. A complete scan or individual scan regions must be pre-selected as projection base. If scan regions are selected (see Scan Region tab,
page 652), only these regions will be used for calculating the feature lines.
2. One of the projection methods Curves or Auto must be activated on the Options tab (see page 652). For subsequent modellings, the curves
and raw data selected as Geometry and/or Reference will then be projected onto the created feature lines as long as the projection base is
active (check button in the main menu switched on, see Selection of Geometry, Reference and Projection Base on page 628).
3. Feature lines are created on the basis of characteristic mesh edges to be choosen via a popup menu. Specify the light vector or split direction,
as well as the split angle, if required.
4. After clicking onto the button Create, the feature lines will be generated either immediately or after selection of a scan point.
5. When using the mesh edge types Sharp Bend, Curvature, and Highlight, the feature lines can be adjusted subsequently with a slider.
6. Created feature lines can be removed with the button Reset.
654
26
Characteristic mesh edges

The mesh edge type for the feature line creation is chosen via a popup menu. For a detailed description of these mesh edges, please refer to
Characteristic Mesh Edges in the function Create Scan Feature Line (see page 367).
When using Sharp Bend, Curvature, or Highlight, the feature lines can be adjusted subsequently with a slider (see Number of characteris-
tic mesh edges, page 655).
Edge
Only mesh edges will be marked.
Sharp Bend
Mesh edges and sharp bends will be marked.
Curvature
Points with the same curvature value are connected to a line.
Highlight
Highlight lines will be marked.
Split Line
Split lines will be marked. The split angle can be specified at Angle.
Angle
This option is only required for the creation of feature lines on split lines. It specifies the split angle (0 to -60).
IMPORTANT!
Direction
The options in this popup menu are only available for the creation of feature lines on highlight and split lines. They represent the light vector or
split direction.
X, Y or Z direction of the work plane (X, Y, Z)
current normal direction of the work plane (Plane)
current view direction = normal direction of the view plane (View)
direction of a vector (Vector)
Create
The feature lines will be created according to the setting in the popup menu. Except for the mesh edge type Edge you have to select a scan
point after activation of this button.
Reset
The created feature lines will be removed.
Save
All visible feature lines are saved to the data base. For each internal feature line, a separate rawdata segment is created under the current
rawdata contour.
Filter
Only feature lines which contain at least the number of points specified here are displayed and recognized during further processing.
Number of characteristic mesh edges

When using the mesh edge types Sharp Bend, Curvature, or Highlight, you may use the slider to control the number and position of the dis-
played characteristic mesh edges. The admissible value range is determined with the text fields.
Sharp Bend, Highlight
For these mesh edge types, a percentage between 0 and 100 is specified with the slider. With the option Sharp Bend, the angle between
the normals of neighbouring facets is considered, and with Highlight the angle of incidence of the light (angle between light direction and
facet normal).
Those mesh edges are marked, where this angle exceeds the value represented by the slider.
The values in the text fields result from the value at the current position 5%.
655
26
Curvature
After clicking onto Create and selection of a scan point, a value will be indicated in the middle of the slider representing the curvature
radius at the selection position. In the left text field is indicated the minimum curvature radius of the scan. The radius value in the right text
field is computed in a way that the slider is located at middle position. The maximum curvature radius is specified in the balloon help of
the right text field.
Mesh edges are marked, if their curvature radius exceeds the value set with the slider.
NOTE:
When changing the value range, the slider must be set to a value lying within the new range to be specified.
26.6.3.5 Diagnosis
Several local diagnoses can be carried out for the projection of surfaces and curves onto surfaces. For this, you have to switch on the projection
method Surfaces on the Options tab (see page 652). The following diagnoses are available:
diagnosis of the deviation between projected objects and projection base (display of the deviation course by vectors or a coloured shading),
diagnosis of gaps between surfaces and overlappings of surfaces, and
diagnosis of the normal deviation between connected surfaces.
Deviation diagnosis
Using the following options you may carry out a deviation diagnosis.
NOTE:
In addition to this functionality, another deviation diagnosis (Diagnosis Context Deviation) is available in ICEM Surf (see section
10.6.2 Context Diagnoses Deviation on page 211). Both diagnoses are using different computation algorithms if non-triangulated scans
are involved, and give therefore different results.
In case of patch/non-triangulated scan, the separate deviation diagnosis creates a plane determined by 3 scan points nearest to the patch
point, and measures the shortest distance between patch point and plane.
The deviation diagnosis in Unified Modelling triangulates the scan internally and measures the shortest distance to the generated facets,
which leads in most cases to a better result.
Distance
Numerical display of the maximum deviation value.
Grid
For the projection of curves onto surfaces, the deviation course (normals) along the curve can be displayed graphically using this option. For
the calculation, the specified number of points will be considered. You may choose between the following display types:
Bar
Display of the absolute deviation values by vectors (see also figure 52 on page 211).
Colour
Display of the course of the deviation by means of a coloured shading (see also figure 53 on page 212).
Count
For the computation of the deviation, the number of points specified here will be regularly distributed along the curve and projected onto the
surface.
Scaling
Scaling factor for the display of the deviation vectors.
Tolerance
A colour scale is available for the display type Colour. Deviation values are assigned to the shading colours. Specify the desired maximum
value of the tolerance range. The same value, but with a minus sign, will be assigned to the lower limit. The positive direction of the deviation
values corresponds to the normal direction.
Check
The settings of the colour scale are updated using this button.
656
26
Additional diagnoses
The following diagnoses can be activated in addition to the deviation diagnosis:
Gap
Display of gaps between two surfaces on which a projected curve is located. The gap tolerance can be specified.
Overlap
Display of overlappings of two surfaces on which a projected curve is located. The tolerance can be specified.
Normal
Display of the normal deviation between two connected surfaces on which a projected curve is located. The admissible deviation can be spec-
ified.
OK
The projection will be carried out immediately.
26.7 Point and control point modification
Modification possibilities
This menu is activated via the button Point/Control Point Modification in the main menu. Options for controlling the point and control point mod-
ification are offered here. You may carry out (control) point movements in the set direction, extrapolate curves and surface edges, create offsets,
as well as rotate objects about an axis. For this, coordinate directions can be locked. For control point modifications you can define which control
points shall be moved. For controlling the range of influence of the modification, different bell-shaped functions are offered.
Settings in the main menu

The setting of the check buttons in the main menu determines which object types are available for the modification (see Selection of Geometry,
Reference and Projection Base on page 628):
Geometry ON + Reference OFF: The geometry objects can be modified directly.
Geometry ON/OFF + Reference ON: The reference objects are modified.
Settings in the Extended menu

The setting of Modify Both on the Topology tab of the Extended menu has the following influence on point/control point modifications of matched
geometry objects:
Modify Both ON: Both objects are similarly modified (symmetric modification).
Modify Both OFF: Only the object selected first is modified. The second object is subsequently adjusted according to the topology definition
(asymmetric modification).
Modification of raw data, scan points, and faces

Raw data and scan points may be handled both via the point and control point modification. Faces which are not in the mode Base Patch or Edge
(see section 26.12.4 The context menu for faces on page 671) can only be modified via the point modification.
Tips and tricks

A creation operation of geometry or reference (see section 26.5 Creation of the objects on page 631) that has not been completed will be termi-
nated by any action in the point/control point modification menu.
If the control points of a surface are not very well distributed, so that the highlight lines are not continuous, the control points have to be aligned at
a plane. For a description, please refer to section 29.3 How to align control points with Unified Modelling on page 701 in Tips and tricks.
26.7.2 The menu Point/Control Point

This menu contains options for controlling the point and control point modification which are described in the following.
657
THE MENU POINT/CONTROL POINT
26
Definition of the movement type and direction

Using the following options you may define the movement type and direction. The direction vector is displayed in red, and the axis of rotation
in yellow on the icons and in the graphics area.
Unlimited
No restriction. (Control) point movements can be carried out in all directions.

Vector
Movement in the direction of a vector. The vector symbol is displayed.
NOTE:
If the vector symbol does not appear after activating the option, it is probable that it cannot be seen only in the current scaling. In
this case, activate the button Auto Min/Max.
The direction vector can be modified as follows:
Manipulation via the handles of the vector symbol and the appropriate context menus. For a description please refer to section 2.5.9
The vector symbol on page 38.
Manipulation via the vector menu. The vector menu will be activated by clicking again the icon Vector. For a description please refer
to section 4.4 Vector selection on page 60.
With this movement type it is also possible to do dynamic modellings in view direction. For defining the direction vector you have to
choose the coordinate systemView, as well as the coordinate direction D (Depth) in the vector selection menu. The desired points or con-
trol points can be modified by vertical mouse movements in the screen plane which will be transferred into a movement in view direction:
moving the mouse up: backward translation of the (control) points, i. e. into the screen plane, or
moving the mouse down: forward translation of the (control) points, i. e. out of the screen plane.
NOTE:
For an improved visibility of modellings in the view direction it is recommended to activate a highlight mode (Display Highlight),
as well as the option Shading in the display menu of Unified Modelling.
658
26
Figure 423 Modelling in view direction
original situation
control point row
to be moved
direction vector
downward direction vec-
mouse movement tor
after modelling
translation in
view direction
Tangent
Movement along an adjacent polygon line.

A local tangent can additionally be used for curves and patches. Switch on the Preview to enable an optimal use of this functionality.
Move the cursor to a control point. A local tangent will be displayed:
for curves: tangent in the curve point on which the control point has the strongest effect, and
for patches: u or v tangent in the patch point on which the control point has the strongest effect.
The keyboard shortcut t can be used as well: If you keep the key pressed, only a modification along the local tangent can be done.
Normal
Movement only in the local (main) normal direction.
NOTE:
Raw data must have a sharp bend in the polygon so that the direction of the main normal can be calculated. The option has no
effect for straight lines.
Extrapolate
Extrapolation of curves and surface edges. Specify for the extrapolation of surface edges the desired Extrapolation Mode.
Offset
Creation of an offset in local (main) normal direction. For curves and surfaces applies:
659
26
for point modifications: creation of a normal offset

for control point modifications: offset calculation for each individual control point
Rotate
Rotation about a selected axis. Note the following when rotating curves and surfaces (except for rigid movements with the top option in
the pull-down menu Law):
for point modifications: The curve or surface points are twisted around the rotation axis, i. e. they will stay on the circle which is
specified by the movement about the axis.
for control point modifications: the control points are twisted around the rotation axis in a way that the or surface points will not stay
on the circle.
The rotation axis is represented by a vector symbol displayed in the graphics.
NOTE:
If the vector symbol does not appear after activating the option, it is probable that it cannot be seen only in the current scaling. In
this case, activate the button Auto Min/Max.
The rotation axis can be modified as follows:
Manipulation via the handles of the vector symbol and the appropriate context menus. For a description please refer to section 2.5.9
The vector symbol on page 38.
Manipulation via the vector menu. The vector menu will be activated by clicking again the icon Rotate. For a description please refer
to section 4.4 Vector selection on page 60.
Restriction of the movement

The point/control point movement can be fixed in one or two coordinate directions. The movement can then only be carried out in the free
coordinate direction.
Plane
The fixed coordinates refer to the work plane.

Model
The fixed coordinates refer to the model coordinate system.

X, Y, Z/D
(X, Y, Z/Depth)
One or two coordinates can be fixed.
Definition of the control points to be moved

These options are only available for control point modifications, except with the movement type Extrapolate (see Modification Mode,
page 661).
Single
Movement of a single control point

Row
surfaces: movement of a control point row

curves, raw data: movement of both end control points of a polygon line
scans: movement of two corner points of a facet
Facet
surfaces: movement of all control points around the mesh of a surface control point net
curves, raw data: movement of both end control points of a polygon line
scans: movement of all corner points of a facet
660
26
Auto
Automatic selection of the control points to be moved depending on the selection position. The movement is carried out using one of the
methods Single, Row or Facet.
Extrapolation Mode
The following options are available for the movement type Extrapolate:
Standard: Extrapolation at one patch or face side along

two opposite edges
Edge: Extrapolation of a single edge
Multiple: Common extrapolation of several selected edges
Law
This pull down menu is not available for the movement types Extrapolation and Offset.
Different bell-shaped functions are offered which control the range of influence of the modification on the whole object (see Modification
Mode, page 661). There are possibilities between a translation of the whole object (rigid movement) and very local modifications.
control point point

modification modification
global
modification
local
modification
With this option for control point modifications, you can influence the effect of the modification separately in u and v direction. For this, vector
symbols are displayed in the graphics at the control point that can be manipulated via the right mouse button. For a description of the manip-
ulation facilities, please refer to section 2.5.9 The vector symbol on page 38.
NOTE:
Context menus are not available here for the vector symbols.
Modification Mode
The following possibilities are available for modifications:
661
26
Express Control Point Modification
Direct Control Point Modification
Express Point Modification
Direct Point Modification
Both
This check button affects the following options for defining the type and direction of movement:
Extrapolate extrapolation modes Standard and Edge:
The opposite end of the selected geometry element will be extrapolated at the same time.
Tangent Row:
The opposite control point row will be moved accordingly.
Single, CtrlP +
(Single, Control Point +)
Additional control points to be moved can be selected by the button CtrlP and +. With the check button Single you may choose whether sin-
gle or region selection shall be used.
Depending on what is activated in the main menu, Geometry or Reference (corresponding check button switched on), either the control
points of the geometry objects or those of the reference objects can be selected. The selected control points are marked by a star. Control
points of the geometry and reference are not selectable and visible simultaneously.
IMPORTANT!
If you use the region selection and want to deselect control points with the Ctrl key, you have to keep the Ctrl key pressed during
the confirmation with OK in the selection window.
Figure 424 Usage of the option CtrlP (option Selected only OFF)
selected control points

are also moved
additionally selected
control points
moved control
point row
Selected only
OFF
The control points additionally selected via CtrlP are moved along with all other control points.
ON
Only the selected control points are moved.
Delta
for the movement types Unlimited, Vector, Tangent, Normal, Extrapolate, Offset:
The range of movement will be restricted to the value specified here. The orientation is not important.
for the movement type Rotate:
The rotation angle will be restricted to the value specified here. The orientation is not important.
IMPORTANT!
662
SHORTCUTS FOR THE POINT AND CONTROL POINT MODIFICATION
26
Mousewarp
Using the slider you may set values between 1 and 100 for the translation ratio between (control) point and mouse cursor movement. The
higher the translation factor, the shorter the point movement towards the cursor movement.
Preview
The points or control points which may be modified according to the current settings will be marked dynamically when moving the mouse
across the objects. This visual help allows a very exact work.
NOTES:
The colour and line width specified in the menu Selection under the option Show is used for the preview (see page 328).
For the movement direction Tangent, also the polygon side defining the direction is displayed if desired. The colour used for
this cannot be changed.
A vector is displayed for Normal or Offset modification of a volume element (see section 26.11 Volume on page 668) pre-
viewing the moving direction of the actual modification.
Object
The reference or geometry objects which may be modified according to the current settings will be marked dynamically when moving the
mouse across the graphic area.
Distance
The current 3D distance between original and modified (control) point is displayed dynamically during the modification.
Automatic Continue
As soon as you have selected or created geometry or reference objects, they can be modelled by the point/control point modification.
ON
If the check button Automatic Continue is switched on, the modification mode is permanently active, even if the menu for the point/con-
trol point modification is not open.
OFF
If the checkbutton is switched off, objects can only be modified with the modification menu open.
26.7.3 Shortcuts for the point and control point modification

The movement types and directions available in the menu Point/Control Point can also be activated with the following shortcuts:
Option Shortcut
Switching between the movement types/directions
Unlimited u
Vector v
Tangent t
Normal n
Extrapolate e
Offset o
Rotate r
Axis a
(Activation of the last coordinate sys-
tem in use: Plane/Model)
Fixing coordinate directions

(Only if Plane or Model is active)
X, Y, Z/D x, y, z
26.8 Feature Design

Geometry objects relating to a reference can be adapted to new reference objects of the same type.
NOTE:
Curves and raw data must be topologically concordant to meet the function requirements.
In case of scans, original scan and modified scan must be derived from each other (e. g. by a projection function), so that they are topolog-
ically concordant, e. g. have the same facet structure.
The selected geometry objects have a certain position regarding the reference. The shape and position of further objects, the modified reference,
determine the movement and modification of the geometry with respect to the reference. For this modification, the original and end position resp.
shape of the geometry objects is defined through a parametrical segmentation.
663
CROWNING
26
Figure 425 Feature Design
modified
reference
reference
adapted
geometry geometry
Between the reference and the modified reference exists a relation of the parameter flow of both objects. If the parameter flow is varying, the
geometry will be deformed. If, in addition, the orientation of the assigned reference objects does not correspond, the geometry will be mirrored or
flipped during the modification. Adjust the orientation of the objects, if necessary, using the function Invert.
The general proceeding for performing Feature Design is as follows:
1. Activate the function Unified Modelling.
2. Select the Geometry to be modified, as well as the Reference. (The modified reference is not yet selected, but at first only the original refer-
ence.)
With the option Rotation in the menu Reference Extended Options (see page 649) you determine how the relation between geometry
and reference will be kept during the modification. The geometry can be either translated only, or additionally rotated according to the refer-
ence.
3. Click on the button Feature Design in the main menu.
4. Successively select a reference object (= original reference) and a second object (= modified reference). As modified reference, you may only
select an object of the same type as the original reference object. An arrow illustrates the assignment of the selected objects in pairs.
In contrast to the conventional function Surface modification Feature Design (see page 616), multi-segment surfaces can be selected as
reference and modified reference.
5. Select further reference objects, if required. This can also be done subsequently with the button +.
6. Confirm with OK in the window Feature Design.
The geometry will be adapted to the new, modified reference. The function is always carried out without duplicate.
Select +
The selection of pairs of reference (original and modified reference) will be reactivated. Using the button +, further pairs can be selected.
Alignm.
(Alignment)
If this check button is switched on, the U/V and/or normal direction of the modified reference surface is automatically aligned compared to the
initial reference surface.
Factor
This option specifies the scaling factor for the modification of the reference surface compared to the modified reference surface.
The Factor = -1.00 is then used to adapt the surface geometry of the deep drawing tool to the simulation result, when the part has been re-
imported in form of STL data after having sprung back in shape.
If the spring back behaviour of the part already has been considered in the STL result (e. g. in Pamstamp/Mashal), the Factor = +1.00 is
used.
26.9 Crowning
With this function, you can modify the shape of a surface cluster directly by a defined value at one or several positions.
664
CROWNING
26
Figure 426 Crowning
achieved
crowning value
0.5
0.48
0.5
specified
crowning value
The general proceeding for performing a crowning is as follows:
2. Select the Geometry to be modified.
3. Click on the button Crowning in the main menu.
4. Select the position(s) on the surface where the crowning shall be applied. At these positions, vectors are placed having a length equal to the
crowning value.
5. To apply the crowning to all selected objects, an internal reference patch is computed. All parameters set in the menu refer to this patch.
6. The crowning value and direction can be modified dynamically as follows via the vector symbol:
Manipulation directly via the handles of vector symbol.
Manipulation via the vector context menu. The context menu will be activated by pressing the right mouse button upon one of the handles
of the vector symbol.
For a description of the vector symbol, as well as the appropriate context menus please refer to section 2.5.9 The vector symbol on page 38.
In addition to the usage of the reference patch that is internally computed, you may also select an existing or generate a new reference patch. If
the selected/created patch is active as reference, all parameters of the crowning function will be applied to this patch instead of the internally com-
puted one. Moreover, the reference patch can be modified while the crowning function is active.
NOTE:
It is not possible to deactivate the reference patch with the corresponding check button in the main menu, but it must be deselected. For
this, click onto the button Reference and cancel the selection.
Select +
Selection of one or several positions where the shape of a surface shall be modified.
Crowning
The crowning value can be specified here. The vectors placed at the crowning positions have a length equal to this value. At the crowning
vectors are displayed the desired crowning value (green) and the value effectively achieved after reapproximation of the surface (red).
Edge
This value determines which region of the reference patch is considered to be the edge.
This is illustrated in the following figure: A value of 0.15 means that the inner region is 15 % away from the outer edge of the reference patch.
Placing the vector in the inner region results in a bell-shaped modification (a). If the vector is placed in the edge region, the corresponding
edge is modified as well (b).
NOTE:
Via the menu Geometry Extended Topology you can fix the edges of the geometry and define transition conditions (see
page 640).
665
CROWNING
26
Figure 427 Effect of the option Edge
a) placing the vector in the

inner region: bell-shaped mod-
ification
Edge = 0.15 (15 %) internal

reference patch
b) placing the vector in the

edge region: the edge is mod-
ified as well
Edge = 0.15 (15 %)
Position, Tangent, Curvature, Torsion/G

The required edge continuity of the underlying reference surface can be set with this popup menu.
NOTE:
Setting the edge continuity only applies to the reference patch used for the computation. Through this will be determined the
course of the modification. The geometry itself is defined in the menu Geometry Extended Topology (see page 640).
Scaling
Scaling factor for the display of the vectors.
Preview
The internal reference patch computed from all selected geometry objects and used as base for executing the function can be displayed.
Diagnosis
The crowning distribution on the surface can be visualized with this option. The colour scale ranges from green showing non-modified surface
areas to red corresponding to the largest crowning value.
Apply
Via this button, you may control whether the crowning shall be executed immediately, or only after definition of suitable vectors and parameter
settings.
Shape
The shape of the crowning can subsequently be modified. A small value causes a local and a large value a global modification. The crowning
value is kept constant during this modelling. The default setting of the shape value is 1, since with this value can be achieved an optimum con-
trol point distribution.
666
MOVE
26
Figure 428 Effect of the option Shape
Shape = 0 Shape = 1
local modification default value
Shape = 3
global modification
26.10 Move
With this menu you may move geometry objects. The general proceeding is as follows:
3. Click onto the button Move in the main menu.
4. Determine with Position an attachment point for the plane by means of which the geometry shall be moved.
5. The defined plane will be used as reference plane. A plane symbol will be displayed on the screen with the colour assigned to the reference,
and the check button Reference will be activated.
6. By moving this plane, the geometry is moved. The movement is always carried out without duplicating. The plane can be manipulated:
Manipulation directly via the handles of plane symbol.
Manipulation via the plane context menu. The context menu will be activated by pressing the right mouse button upon one of the handles
of the plane symbol.
For a description of the plane symbol, as well as the appropriate context menus please refer to section 2.5.4 The Move Symbol on page 31.
Additional features of this function (for this see Selection of Geometry, Reference and Projection Base on page 628):
If you switch OFF the check button Geometry in the main menu, the plane can be modified without modifying the geometry.
If you switch OFF the check button Reference in the main menu, the geometry can be modified (dynamic modelling, crowning, and modifica-
tion via the context menus). The reference plane will not be displayed, and the check button will be deactivated. The plane cannot be modi-
fied.
You may also select a projection base. In this case, the reference plane is permanently projected onto the projection base, in a way that it can
be moved, for example, across a surface or along a curve. If the check button Geometry is switched on in the main menu, the geometry is
also moved. For the movement on the projection base, the parameters set in the menu Projection (activation via the button Extended in the
main menu) are used.
Position
The position of the plane origin can be determined.
667
VOLUME
26
26.11 Volume
26.11.1 The menu Volume

With this function, a volume element is created as temporary reference completely including the selected geometry objects (Min/Max box). By
modelling this volume element you can modify the geometry.
The general proceeding for volume modelling is as follows:
3. Click onto the button Volume in the main menu.
4. A reference volume is created enclosing the selected geometry. The check button Reference will automatically be activated in the main
menu.
5. Modelling this reference volume (menu Point and control point modification, page 657) will modify the geometry (if Geometry AND Refer-
ence are switched on).
6. The order of the reference volume can be modified:
globally for all directions with the option Order in the menu Volume,
globally for all directions or for a single direction via The context menu for volumes (see page 674) or
for a single direction with keyboard shortcuts (see section How to change the order on page 698 in Tips and tricks).
7. When quitting the menu Volume, the temporary reference volume will be removed.
Order
The reference volume will be created with the order specified here.
Display
The menu to determine the display of the reference volume will be activated (see section 26.11.2 The submenu Display on page 668).
Rigid
The reference volume can be kept rigid during the modification. It can no longer be deformed but only moved afterwards.
Symmetric
Inner symmetry can be defined for the reference volume. Each modification at the master side of the reference volume will then also be exe-
cuted at the mirrored half.
The symmetry will be realized with the first modelling operation that is carried out after assigning this property. The master side is determined
by the pick position for the modelling.
As symmetry plane can be used:
the plane Y=0 (side view), or
the current work plane Plane (see also section 11.5 Display Plane on page 265).
NOTE:
Assigning with Plane the current work plane as symmetry plane will not define a symmetry with the current work plane. i. e. later
modifications of the current work plane will not change the symmetry plane. In order to define the new, modified work plane as
symmetry plane, you have to switch the option Symmetric off and on again.
26.11.2 The submenu Display
Individual settings for the display of the reference volume can be made in this menu which is activated via the buttons in the main menu.
IMPORTANT!
The settings for the display of the objects made in the function Unified Modelling (see also section 26.4 Display of the objects on
page 630) are independent of the settings in the menu Display Display.
668
THE CONTEXT MENUS
26
Colour button
Assignment of an individual colour.
Volume
Settings for volumes:
Edges
Display of the edges.
Iso-Curves
Display of the isolines according to the specified number.
CtrlP
(Control Point)
Display of the control point mesh of the edges, the side surfaces, and/or inside the volume.
Segment
Display of the segment boundaries.
26.12 The context menus

Several context menus are available in the function Unified Modelling which can be invoked by pressing the right mouse button. If no object can
be found when pressing the right mouse button, the following general selection menu appears with which all the other menus can be activated:
The context menu for curves on page 669

The context menu for patches on page 670
The context menu for faces on page 671
The context menu for raw data on page 673
The context menu for scans on page 673
The context menu for volumes on page 674
For curves, patches, faces, and scans, there are context menus to activate external geometry functions for modifying the regarding object. In
addition, options for changing the order, as well as for smoothing and segmentation are available for curves, patches and faces. Options for seg-
mentation and smoothing are offered for raw data. For faces, special modification functions and options for topology definition are additionally
offered.
In the header of the object context menus is indicated, whether the context menu refers to geometry or reference objects, e. g. Patch Geometry.
In the submenus Order, Smooth, and Segmentation this specification will only be given if only one object type can be selected, e. g. Order Ref.
If both geometry and reference objects can be selected, both object types can be modified via the activated submenu.
At the first position in the object context menus you will find the last choosen option.
In some functions are used graphic symbols that can be manipulated with the mouse, and for which context menus are additionally available. The
graphic symbols and their manipulation possibilities are described in section 2.5 The symbols in the graphic area on page 28.
Hints for the selection

When modifying objects via the context menus, the selection carried out in the Unified Modelling will not be changed. Elements selected as
geometry or reference remain in selection mode. For the functions in the context menus, the object upon which the cursor is positioned is selected
temporarily. After exiting the function, the temporary selection will be suspended.
It is recommended to switch on the option Object in the menu Point/Control Point (see page 663) to mark the objects dynamically. This makes
sure that the cursor will be positioned exactly on the required object for activating the corresponding context menu.
26.12.2 The context menu for curves

This menu provides several options and functions for manipulating curves.
669
THE CONTEXT MENU FOR PATCHES
26
Order
see section 26.12.8 The submenu Order of curves, patches, faces, and volumes on page 675
Smoothing
see section 26.12.9 The submenu Smooth of curves, patches and raw data on page 675
Segmentation
see section 26.12.12 The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and volumes on page 677
The following external functions can be activated for the modification of a curve:
Symmetry see function Symmetry on page 696
Trim see function Curve segment modification Trim on page 412
Matching see function Curve segment modification Matching on page 408
Blend see function Curve segment creation Blend (connecting curve) on page 394
Rigid On/Off
With this option you can define the selected object to be kept rigid during the modification, resp. remove this property.
26.12.3 The context menu for patches

This menu provides several options and functions for manipulating patches.
Order
670
THE CONTEXT MENU FOR FACES
26
Smoothing
Segmentation
The following external functions can be activated for the modification of a patch:
Symmetry see function Symmetry on page 696
Trim see function Patch modification Trim on page 494
Smooth see function Patch modification Smooth on page 498
Matching see function Patch modification Matching on page 485
Alignment see function Patch modification Alignment on page 499
Multi-Matching see function Surface modification Matching (Multiple Matching) on page 612
Blend see function Patch creation Blend (Connecting Patch) on page 458
Offset see function Patch creation Offset on page 463
Face see function Patch creation Face on page 465
Surface of Revolution see function Patch creation Surface of Revolution on page 470
Fillet see function Surface creation Fillet on page 541
Flanges see function Surface creation Flanges on page 559
Profiles see function Surface creation Profiles on page 522
Scan on Object see function Scan creation Object on page 364
Rigid On/Off
see page 670
26.12.4 The context menu for faces

This menu provides several options and functions for manipulating faces.
Order
Smoothing
671
THE CONTEXT MENU FOR FACES
26
Segmentation
NOTE:
The order or segmentation can only be changed for faces if Base Patch, Base Patch all, or Edge has been activated. The changes will
then be applied to either the base patch or the edge curves.
Topology
see section 26.12.14 The submenu Topology of face edges on page 679
Base Patch, Base Patch all, Edge

Depending on the activated option, either the base patch, in case of several selected faces all base patches, or directly the face edge curves
will be modified to model the face.
Figure 429 Face modification via the base patch
Figure 430 Face modification via face edges
Reset
The activation of the basis patch or the face edges for the modelling will be reset.
Remove
Via this button, the trim operation can be undone for individual face edge segments (see also function Patch modification Face Untrim on
page 502).
Crop
With this option you may crop the base patch of a selected face to the size of the face (active region).
NOTE:
To make the base patch visible for the modification, you have to activate at first the setting Base Patch.
You can modify the colour of the base batch in the menu Display of the objects (see page 630).
672
THE CONTEXT MENU FOR RAW DATA
26
Figure 431 Effect of the option Crop
selected
face
base patch
before cropping after cropping
Crop all
You can crop the base patches of several selected faces.
The following external functions can be activated for the modification of a face:
Face see function Patch creation Face on page 465
Face Untrim see function Patch modification Face Untrim on page 502
Scan on Object see function Scan creation Object on page 364
Rigid On/Off
see page 670
26.12.5 The context menu for raw data

This menu provides several options and functions for manipulating raw data.
Smoothing
see section 26.12.10 The submenu Smooth of raw data on page 676
Segmentation
Rigid On/Off
see page 670
26.12.6 The context menu for scans

This menu provides several options and functions for manipulating scans.
673
THE CONTEXT MENU FOR VOLUMES
26
Smoothing
see section 26.12.11 The submenu Smooth of scans on page 676
The following external functions can be activated for the modification of a scan:
Edit Facets see function Scan modification Edit Facets on page 371
Delete see function Scan modification Delete on page 373
Trim see function Scan modification Trim on page 373
Merge see function Scan modification Merge on page 376
Divide see function Scan modification Divide on page 376
Filter see function Scan modification Filter on page 378
Refine see function Scan Modification Refine on page 377
Replace see function Scan modification Replace on page 381
Invert see function Scan modification Invert on page 382
Facet Modifications see function Scan modification Facet Modifications on page 383
Triangulation see function Scan creation Triangulation on page 363
On Object see function Scan creation Object on page 364
Offset see function Scan creation Offset on page 366
Rigid On/Off
see page 670
26.12.7 The context menu for volumes

This menu provides several options and functions for manipulating volumes.
Order
Segmentation
674
THE SUBMENU ORDER OF CURVES, PATCHES, FACES, AND VOLUMES
26
26.12.8 The submenu Order of curves, patches, faces, and volumes

Via this menu, the order of curves, patches, faces, and volumes can be changed. By increasing the order, a patch can be better adapted to a
scan, for example (see figure below).
TIP:
Apart from using the context menu, the order can also be entered directly via keyboard shortcuts (for this see section How to change the
order on page 698 in Tips and tricks).
Figure 432 Effect of increasing the patch order
Order = 2 Order = 5
Geometry
(patch)
Projection Base
(scan)
Local
After activating this button, the order set here will be assigned to objects to be selected.
NOTE:
Patches and faces must be selected at the edge. The order will be modified in the direction of this edge.
Global
After activating this button, all objects will get the order set here.
Minimum
The order of all objects will be increased to the order set here.
Maximum
The order of all objects will be reduced to the order set here.
26.12.9 The submenu Smooth of curves, patches and raw data

Using this menu, curves, patches, and faces can automatically be smoothed with a pre-defined smoothing factor.
Automatic
Automatic smoothing. The smoothing factor has to be specified.
Alignment
After activating this option, control points can be selected which will be projected into a mean plane.
To define a patch control point row, two control points of this row have to be selected. For curves, only one control point must be selected.
If the option Fixed Edges is additionally switched on, the first and last control point can be kept.
Fixed Edges
When smoothing patches or faces, the edges may be fixed.
675
THE SUBMENU SMOOTH OF RAW DATA
26
26.12.10 The submenu Smooth of raw data

Options for smoothing raw data are available in this menu. Three smoothing methods are provided:
automatic smoothing
dynamic smoothing
smoothing by projection
Automatic
Automatic smoothing. The deviation tolerance has to be specified.
Region OFF
The whole raw data contour will be smoothed.
Region ON
Two points have to be selected defining a region to which the smoothing shall be restricted.
Express
Dynamic smoothing. The deviation tolerance as well as the pick radius have to be specified. Move the cursor along the raw data contour back
and forth with left mouse button pressed. This must be done several times in order to obtain better smoothing results.
Projection
Smoothing by projection on a curve.
Alignment
After activating this option, raw data points can be selected which will be projected into a mean plane.
Fixed Edges
The first and last raw data point can be fixed.
26.12.11 The submenu Smooth of scans

Options for dynamically smoothing scans are available in this menu. After selecting a scan at a certain position, a patch is created on all facets
lying within the defined radius around the selected point. Depending on the specified order, the patch will be sucked to the scan to a greater or
lesser extent. The covered scan points are then projected back to the patch in patch normal direction. The specified tolerance indicates the max-
imum possible modification, i. e. translation, of the points. The scan can be smoothed dynamically by keeping the left mouse button pressed and
moving the patch across the scan.
Express
Reactivates the selection of a position on the scan.
Order
The order of the patch is defined via a popup menu.
Radius
Modification range for smoothing. All facets and points within the radius around the selected position will be covered by the patch and can be
modified.
Tolerance
Maximum possible modification of the scan points. Points not lying within the tolerance value will not be modified. The effect of the tolerance,
i. e. the maximum possible modification, is decreasing towards the patch edges.
676
THE SUBMENU SEGMENTATION OF CURVES, PATCHES, FACES, AND VOLUMES
26
26.12.12 The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and volumes

Options for segmenting and dividing curves, patches, faces, and volumes are available in this menu.
Figure 433 Without segmentation
patch
= geometry scan
or reference = projection base
Figure 434 With segmentation
segment
boundary
677
THE SUBMENU SEGMENTATION OF CURVES, PATCHES, FACES, AND VOLUMES
26
Figure 435 With segmentation and increasing the order
segment
boundary
Segmentation
According to the setting of the option Divide, objects can be segmented or divided. When selecting faces, the base patch and face edge seg-
ments can be modified in this way.
NOTE:
Faces and volumes cannot be divided!
The transition quality of curves and patches for a segmentation (= Divide switched off) can be specified via a popup menu:
Position (Pos)
Tangent (Tan)
Curvature (Crv)
Torsion/G (Tor)
Several possibilities are available for the segmentation/dividing:
Manual
The objects are split up at a position to be selected.
Automatic
The segment which has been selected by picking an object will be split up into the specified number of segments.
Local, Global
One (Local) or all (Global) selected objects are split up into n segments whose maximum chord length permitted is specified in the text
field. It is valid for both options.
NOTE:
Patches, faces, and volumes must be selected at the edge. The segmentation will be modified in the direction of this edge.
Divide
This option influences the execution of Manual and Automatic.
ON
The geometry object will be divided thus generating new objects.
NOTE:
Faces and volumes cannot be divided!
OFF
The geometry object will be segmented.
678
THE SUBMENU SEGMENTATION OF RAW DATA
26
Suspend segmentation
Reduction
Segment boundaries or knots may be removed.
Region
ON
Two point have to be selected which define a region. All segment boundaries located within this region will be deleted.
OFF
Only one segment boundary or knot may be removed at a time.
Smooth
If this check button is switched on, a reapproximation with the specified factor is carried out.
NOTE:
This option has no effect on volumes.
In general, i. e. for geometries with a low order, a satisfactory result will be realized without reapproximation. For B-Spline geometries with
a high segmentation and order it is recommendable to carry out a reapproximation. Otherwise, a wavy, irregular control point polygon can
occur in these cases.
26.12.13 The submenu Segmentation of raw data

Options for segmenting and dividing raw data are located in this menu.
The options in the upper part of the menu are also available for the segmentation of curves, patches, and raw data. They are described in detail
in section 26.12.12 The submenu Segmentation of curves, patches, faces, and volumes on page 677.
Segmentation: Manual, Automatic

(see page 678)
Divide
(see page 678)
Suspend segmentation: Reduction, Region

(see page 679)
The following options are additionally available for raw data:
Refine
If the distance of two neighboured raw data points is larger than the specified value, new points are added until the maximum distance is kept.
Filter
The number of points of a raw data contour can be reduced by filtering. A point is deleted if the distance between the two remaining neigh-
boured points (the gap) is smaller than the specified value.
26.12.14 The submenu Topology of face edges

With this menu you can define conditions for the matching of face edge segments.
679
THE SUBMENU TOPOLOGY OF FACE EDGES
26
The options available here correspond to those in the menu Geometry Extended..., Topology that can also be used for matching faces. For a
description of the individual options please refer to section 26.6.1.1 Topology on page 640. From this menu, the following parameters are taken
over for the face edge matching:
the tolerances for a global matching (see Transition + Global active:, page 641), as well as
the setting of the options B-Spline (see page 644) and Display (see page 645).
680
MOVE
27
27 Move
Apart from the pull down menu the function Modify Move can also be activated by the icon in the geometry functions block.
27.1 Move Rotate

Geometry objects can be rotated and additionally scaled. After selection of the geometry objects the axis of rotation is displayed in the graphic
area as vector symbol and can be manipulated directly (see 15.5.9 The vector symbol on page 194 and 15.5.12 General options in the context
menus on page 198).
The menu Rotate
Select
The selection will be reactivated. Using the button + you may select additional objects.
Axis
Apart from the direct manipulation of the vector symbol in the graphic area the direction of the axis of rotation can also be defined by clicking
onto the button Axis (window Selection (Vector) will be activated) or by entering the coordinate values.
With the button , the axis direction can be inverted.
Attach Point
(Attachment Point)
Apart from the direct manipulation of the vector symbol in the graphic area the origin of the axis of rotation can also be defined by clicking
onto the button Attach Point (window Selection (Position) will be activated) or by entering the coordinate values.
Angle
Definition of the rotation angle. With the button , the angle direction can be inverted.
IMPORTANT!
3 Points
The rotation is defined by following three points:
Original
The original point defines the origin of the axis of rotation.
Centre
The second point defines the centre of rotation.
Target Point
Target and original point define the angle of rotation.
681
MOVE ROTATE
27
Figure 1 Definition of a rotation with three points
target point centre of rotation
angle of rotation
original point
axis of rotation
Original
The selection of the original point will be reactivated.
Target Point
The selection of the target point will be reactivated.
For the description of the manipulation possibilities and context menus of the point symbol please refer to the sections 15.5.8 The point symbol
on page 193 and 15.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 198.
Distribution
On
In case of Count > 1, the objects are distributed around the axis of rotation within the specified angle.
Figure 2 Distribution of objects within an angle
original
element
axis of rotation
Settings: Count: 3
Angle: 90
Distribution: On
Off
The objects are arranged around the axis of rotation by the specified angle.
682
MOVE TRANSLATE
27
Figure 3 Arrangement of the objects by the specified angle
original
element
axis of rotation
Settings: Count: 3
Angle: 90
Distribution: Off
Scale
In addition to a rotation, the objects can be scaled by a factor to be specified.
Duplicate
The geometry objects will be duplicated before the function is carried out.
A new molecule per element type is created for each selected molecule and all atoms of the same element type are assigned to the new mol-
ecule.
Count
The number of geometry objects specified here is created. The elements are arranged according to the setting of the option Distribution.
If Duplicate is switched off, the original geometry will be preserved.
Preview On/Off
Activates/deactivates a preview of the result of the current settings in the graphics area. Settings modifications are adopted in real time.
The Transformation area

In the extendible Transformation area transformations the options Save, Rename and Delete can be used to save, rename, delete, and
invert transformation operations.
A single click on a transformation name in the list activates the preview of the saved transformation in the graphics area. Double-click onto the
transformation name carries out the transformation.
Saved transformations can be used, for example, for the data exchange via the Import/Export ICEM DB functions.
27.2 Move Translate

With this function, objects are translated by one or two translation vectors. After selection of the geometry objects the translation vectors are dis-
played in the graphic area as vector symbol and can be manipulated directly (see 15.5.9 The vector symbol on page 194 and 15.5.12 General
options in the context menus on page 198).
683
MOVE SCALE
27
The menu Translate
Select
Vector
The translation vector can either be defined via the vector selection (buttons 1st Vector/2nd Vector) or by entering the coordinate values.
The button inverts the axis direction.
2nd Vector is only available if Count is > 0.
Distance
After the vector definition, the distance between original and target position of the selected geometry object is displayed. After changing the
distance values, the coordinates in the text fields 1st Vector/2nd Vector are automatically recomputed.
Distribution
ON
In case of Count > 1, the objects are distributed within the specified distance.
OFF
The distance between the objects has the value specified in Distance.
Duplicate
ecule.
Count
The number of geometry objects specified here is created. The distance between the copies depends on the setting of the option Distribu-
tion.
If Duplicate is switched off, the original geometry will be preserved.
Preview On/Off

27.3 Move Scale

Scaling of geometry objects. For each of the three coordinates can be specified different scaling factors and an arbitrary centre of rotation.
NOTE:
You can use this function to map the complete model between different units of measure, if the point (0,0,0) is selected as centre and using
for the three coordinates factors equal to the conversion factor.
684
MOVE MIRROR
27
The menu Scale
Select
Centre Point
The centre can be defined either by clicking onto the button Centre Point (window Selection (Position) will be activated), or by entering the
coordinate values.
Duplicate
ecule.
Factor: X, Y, Z/D
For the X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates different scaling factors can be specified and modified dynamically using the sliders.
With the check buttons the selected geometry can be scaled synchronously, i. e. by the same factor, in two or all three directions.
Duplicate is automatically switched off when using a slider.
Via the Factor button the scaling factors can be defined by selecting pairs of points. The button is only available if at least one of the check
buttons is switched on.
Plane
The scaling factors refer to the coordinate system of the current work plane.
Model
The scaling factors refer to the model coordinate system.
Preview On/Off

27.4 Move Mirror

A mirrored image of geometry objects will be computed. The current work plane is used as mirror-plane.
The menu Mirror
685
MOVE GLOBAL EXTRAPOLATE
27
Select
Invert
The normals on the mirrored geometry are inverted.
Duplicate
Preview On/Off

27.5 Move Global Extrapolate

Curves, patches, and faces can be extrapolated or trimmed. In case of patches, topological contiguous edges can be extrapolated as one edge.
With the right mouse button you can activate the context menu Mousewarp.
The menu Extrapolate
Select
Topology
If with the extrapolation mode Factor or Multiple several topological contiguous edges are selected, the topology conditions will be kept.
Topology On Topology Off
extrapolated edges
Extrapolation mode
All modes can be used for curves and surfaces. However, the modes Standard, Edge, and Multiple have different effects for the extrapola-
tion of surfaces only.
Factor
The geometry is extrapolated by a factor. For this extrapolation mode, the text fields and the slider are used. The text fields specify the
extrapolation limits. With the slider, the factor is set. The factor set is displayed after the right text field.
With a factor < 1 the geometry is trimmed, with a factor > 1 extrapolated.
Method 1:
1. Select the geometry to be modified and set the factor with the slider.
2. Select then the curve end or the surface edge to be extrapolated. The geometry will be extrapolated by the factor set. If a surface cor-
ner has been selected, both adjacent edges are extrapolated.
You can repeat this step or select the other curve end or another edge of the surface.
686
MOVE DYNAMIC
27
3. Afterwards, you can continue the extrapolation of the last modified end/edge using the slider.
Method 2:
1. Select patches to be modified.
2. Select the edges to be modified with the option Edges +. The extrapolation factor is reset to 1.
3. Extrapolate now the edges using the slider.
Standard
Dynamic extrapolation at one patch or face side along two opposite edges.
Edge
Dynamic extrapolation of a single edge.

Multiple
Dynamic extrapolation of several selected edges. Topological contiguous edges are extrapolated together.
Edges +
If the extrapolation mode Factor or Multiple is active, you can select additional edges to be extrapolated. The edges can be extrapolated with
the slider directly after selection. The extrapolation factor previously set will be reset to 1.
If the option Topology is switched on, topological contiguous edges are extrapolated by the same value.
If the extrapolation mode Multiple only topological contiguous edges can be extrapolated.
Delta
Only available for the extrapolation modes Standard, Edge and Multiple.
The geometry object is extrapolated by the value specified in the text field.
Both
Only available for the extrapolation modes Factor and Standard.
The opposite end is extrapolated simultaneously.
Duplicate
Reset
Only available for the extrapolation mode Factor.
With this button, the last selected edge/corner point is detached from the slider, so that you can modify another edge/corner point without hav-
ing to exit the function or to restart the selection.
27.6 Move Dynamic

This function allows to manipulate selected geometry using a special move symbol in the graphics area.
The manipulation types of the move symbol can be activated and deactivated via the menu. At the symbol, only the handles of the activated
manipulation types are available.
At the handles of the manipulation types Translate and Scale you can activate context menus with the right mouse button. For the description of
the options please refer to sections 15.5.3 The plane symbol on page 179 and 15.5.12 General options in the context menus on page 198.
687
MOVE DYNAMIC
27
Translate
Depending on the mouse button used, the geometry is moved along the selected axis (left mouse button) or freely (middle mouse button).
Rotate
Rotates the geometry around the selected axis. Middle mouse button has no function.
Invert
Inverting an axis mirrors the geometry. Middle mouse button has no function.
The mirror plane is formed by the axis (= mirror plane normal) and the symbols origin.
Scale
Two handle types are available for scaling:

Axis handles:
Left mouse button: Scales the geometry in X, Y, or Z direction.
Middle mouse button: Scales the geometry in all directions.
Plane handles: Scales the geometry in the XZ, YZ, or XY plane. Middle mouse button has no function.
In addition, the scaling factor is displayed and updated dynamically when scaling.
NOTE:
The scaling factors value range is from 0.01 to 1000. A scale factor smaller than 1 shrinks, a scale factor larger than 1 extends the
geometry.
The menu Dynamic
688
MOVE 2 PLANES
27
Select
Geometry
If the option is switched off, the Move symbol can be manipulated without moving the geometry.
Duplicate
ecule.
Position
Activates the position selection for selecting a new position of the plane origin.
Reset
Sets the move symbol origin to the centre of gravity of the selected geometry.
Translate, Rotate, Invert, Scale

The manipulation types can be activated and deactivated individually. Only the handles of the activated manipulation types are available at
the move symbol.
The table in the expandible part displays the parameters for Attachment Point, X-Axis, Y-Axis, and Normal as well as the scaling factor in the
Scale column. The values are updated in real time when moving.
27.7 Move 2 Planes

This function allows a complex translation and rotation of the selected elements. Two work planes have to be selected. The transformation is the
result of the translations and the rotations in X, Y and Z direction which are necessary for the translation of the coordinate system of the starting
plane to that one of the target plane (see figure below).
Figure 4 Move (translation) between two pre-defined planes
The menu Move 2 Planes
Select
689
MOVE ADJUST
27
Starting Plane, Target Plane

The starting and target plane can be selected in the list containing the current work plane and user-defined planes. After the selection starting
plane (red) and target plane (green) are displayed in the graphic area.
Duplicate
ecule.
Preview On/Off

27.8 Move Adjust

With this function, a transformation can be computed using a specified number of vectors. This transformation can then be applied to selected
geometry.
This way, geometry can be adjusted whose 3D position does not correspond to the existing geometry. Exact information on the desired transfor-
mation are not needed in this case.
The vectors are defined by pairs of points (start and endpoint.
The available transformation options depend on the number of selected vectors.
The menu Adjust
Objects +
Selection of objects to be adjusted.
With the button +, additional objects can be selected.
Points +
Selection of new pairs of points defining the vectors used for the transformation.
With the + button, additional pairs of points can be selected.
Duplicate
ecule.
690
MOVE ADJUST
27
Defined Pairs of Points

The number of selected pairs of points is displayed. The vectors defined by the pairs of points are displayed in the graphics area.
Transformation
The possible transformations depend on the number of selected pairs of points.
One pair of points
After selection of the first pair of points the Translate option becomes active and cannot be deactivated, as otherwise, no translation is
possible.
The geometry is moved along the Translation vector.
Translate
Two pairs of points

After selection of a second pair of points the geometry to be adjusted can additionally be rotated activating the Translate + Rotate option.
This transformation makes congruent the axes between start/endpoint of the first vector and the start/endpoint of the second vector.
Translate+Rotate
axis between vector

startpoints
axis between vector endpoints
Scale
In addition, with the activated Translate + Rotate option the Scale option is available to scale the transformed geometry.
Translate+Rotate + Scale
NOTE:
The origin of scale is the end point of the 'Translation vector.
The scale factor results the from quotient of the difference between the end points and start points of the Translation and
Rotation vectors.
691
MOVE REGISTER
27
Three pairs of points

After the selection of a third pairs of points for both transformation types Translate and Translate+Rotate the Compensation option is
available.
Compensation
The vector extremities define two planes. In addition to the translation and rotation, the elements are transformed from the start plane
into the end plane.
Translate + Compensation Translate+Rotate + Compensation
If both translation types Translate and Translate+Rotate are switched on, the geometry to be adjusted can additionally be scaled.
Translate+Rotate + Compensation + Scale
Preview On/Off

27.9 Move Register

Registering means adjusting the position of objects to the position of reference objects to be selected.
The function is mainly used to fit scanned 3D data into existing geometry. First, the approximate new position of the geometry to be registered is
determined by selecting at least three pairs of points (original point + reference point). The exact registration will be computed in several iteration
steps until the best possible coincidence with the position of the reference geometry has been achieved.
The function Move Register includes the tabs Register, Iterations, and Progress described in the following sections.
In the window footer and the expandible part, the following options are available:
Preview On/Off

692
REGISTER
27
27.9.1 Register
In this tab the objects are selected and the initial position of the geometry to be registered is determined.
Select
Object
Selection of the objects to be registered.
Region +
Activating the Selection (Scan Region) in case of scans as objects to be registered.
Only the selected regions will be registered. To achieve the best possible result for the registration you should select scan regions with the
best coincidence with the reference geometry (see figure below).
You can select an arbitrary number of regions. Using + you can add further regions to the current selection.
Figure 5 Original geometry with modified and unmodified regions
unmodified region
to be selected for
the registration
modified region compared to

the reference geometry
Reference
Selection of the reference geometry.
Manual +
Manual selection of the initial position of the objects to be registered. At least three pairs of points (original point + reference point) have to be
selected. After confirming with OK a preview of the registration result will be given.
Determining an initial position will reduce the computing time and enhance the exactness of the final position.
693
ITERATIONS
27
Figure 6 Selection of original and reference points
Figure 7 Result of the registration
Duplicate
ecule.
27.9.2 Iterations
In this tab the iteration parameters are set.
Iterations
Specification of the maximum number to be computed for a registration.
Angle, Translation
During the registering operation the objects are rotated and translated. Each iteration step tries to improve this transformation. The registra-
tion will be terminated, when the following iteration step would modify angle and translation by a smaller amount than specified in Angle and
Translation.
27.9.3 Progress
In this tab the status of the registration and the individual iterations are controlled.
694
MOVE EXTRAPOLATE
27
Range
This value defines a range around the reference geometry. The following options display the point rate of the geometry to be registered which
will be within this range after the complete registration operation (Status Bar %) and each iteration step (Delta %).
The smaller the range and the larger the point rate moved into this range during the registration, the more exact will be the result.
Status Bar %
The point rate of the geometry to be registered which has been moved into the defined Range around the reference geometry is displayed
graphically and as percentage.
Delta %
For each iteration step is displayed the percentage of points of the geometry to be registered, which has been newly moved into the defined
Range around the reference geometry.
27.10 Move Extrapolate

Curves and patch edges can be extrapolated or trimmed.
The Menu Extrapolate
Select
Factor
The extrapolation factor can be specified either numerically by entering the value into the text field or dynamically using the slider.
The values indicated in the text fields before and behind the slider are stretch factors which determine the extrapolation limits in the respective
direction.
Duplicate is automatically switched off when a slider is used.
Duplicate
ecule.
When using the sliders, after creation of the copy Duplicate will be switched off and the copy will be modified dynamically.
695
SYMMETRY
28
28 Symmetry
Apart from the pull down menu the function Modify Symmetry can also be activated by the icon in the service functions block.
Selected elements can be matched to the plane Y = 0 or to the work plane. Patch edges and curve end points lying closer to the plane than the
tolerance specified are exactly moved into the plane. The transition of the geometry objects matched with the mirrored half to the symmetry plane
can be position or tangent continuous and additionally be controlled by an alignment tolerance.
In the graphics area, at the position with the largest deviation between modified and original geometry the corresponding deviation value is dis-
played when matching geometry objects to a symmetry plane.
Figure 451 Tangent continuous matching to the symmetry plane
34.68
Symmetry Plane
With this function also NURBS-Patches can be manipulated.
The menu Centerline Symmetry
All
All objects will be matched to the symmetry plane.
Set
Only the objects combined in a set will be matched to the symmetry plane.
Select +
Objects for a new set can be selected using these buttons
Symm. Plane
(Symmetry Plane)
Definition of the symmetry plane.
Y=0
The plane Y = 0 (side view) is used as symmetry plane.
Plane
The current plane (see also function Display Plane on page 265) is used as symmetry plane.
Transition types
Position
The selected objects will be matched with a position continuous transition. All curve and patch edge control points within the Tolerance
will be affected (see figure 452, case b).
Tangent
The selected objects will be modified in a way that they run orthogonally into the symmetry plane. This results in a tangent continuous
transition to the mirrored half of the geometry. This option will only affect the adjacent control points of the edge control points within Tol-
erance (see figure 452, case c).
Alignment
All control points (including inner patch control points) within the Alignment Tolerance will be adjusted in a way that they run orthogo-
nally into the symmetry plane (see figure 452, case d).
696
SYMMETRY
28
Figure 452 Transition types of geometry objects to a symmetry plane
a) original geometry b) position continuous transition
c) tangent continu- d) orthogonal alignment of all

ous transition control points within the align-
ment tolerance
symmetry plane
distance tolerance
alignment tolerance
Tolerance
The curve and patch edge control points lying at the symmetry plane within the specified tolerance will be moved exactly into the plane.
Align. Tol.
(Alignment Tolerance)
Only if Alignment is active.
The control points lying at the symmetry plane within the specified alignment tolerance will be adjusted orthogonally to the symmetry plane.
NOTE:
Adjusted objects will replace the original geometry. No new objects will be created.
The symmetry operation might change tangencies and curvature at the adjusted patch edges or curve end points.
A good method to observe the entity modification is to select a view perpendicular to the selected symmetry plane.
697
TIPS AND TRICKS
29
29 Tips and tricks
29.1 How to change the order

In the functions for the creation and modification of curves, patches, and faces, the order can be specified and changed subsequently. You have
the following options:
In geometry functions In the function window
In the geometry functions you can determine the order via popup menus in the function windows.
In Unified Modelling Via context menus
The geometry or reference object, whose order shall be changed must be selected and activated by switching on the check button in the main
menu (see Selection of Geometry, Reference and Projection Base on page 628).
Position the cursor upon the desired object and click with the right mouse button so that the corresponding object context menu will be
opened. The order can be set locally or globally in the submenu Order (see section 26.12.8 The submenu Order of curves, patches, faces,
and volumes on page 675).
Patches and faces must be selected at that edge in the direction of which the order shall be modified.
Direct change of order Via keyboard
In functions where geometry objects can be modified dynamically, the order can also be modified easily via keyboard shortcuts.
Position the cursor upon the desired object and enter the order value directly via the keyboard (shortcuts 2 to 9). Alternatively, you can use the
keys + and - for increasing or decreasing the order by 1.
For patches and faces, the cursor must be positioned upon that edge in the direction of which the order shall be modified.
If a minimum order is determined by certain geometrical requirements, this order will not be decreased by the input of a smaller value.
29.2 How to quickly create surfaces with Unified Modelling

There are different ways for creating surfaces quickly with the functionality of Unified Modelling:
Via a scan region
Use the menu ProjBase Extended Scan Regionto select some regions on the scan. Then create a surface with the option Scan Region
in the menu Geometry/Reference Create. Increase the order or the number of segments to get a lower deviation. By extrapolating the
patch, you can create intersecting surfaces defining a theoretical line.
This way is suitable for class-A surfaces, but in the early development stage. There is a method implemented in Unified Modelling, through
which you can create complex shapes very quickly, but not in class-A quality (Quick Surfacing).
Via a mesh of curves/raw data
Based on curves that are lying on the input geometry (in most cases scans), you can create a mesh of patches. The curve mesh should
define four-sided areas, however, n-sided areas can also be processed.
The curve mesh can contain all kind of curved data:

raw data,
sections,
diagnosis lines,
curves,
face and patch edges,
curves based on feature lines, or
internal parting curves.
The curve mesh must be consistent, U-turns have to be avoided. For performance reasons, it is strongly recommended to split up the curves
so that they are not too long.
698
HOW TO QUICKLY CREATE SURFACES WITH UNIFIED MODELLING
29
This method of quickly generating surfaces will be described in the following. The curve and patch creating functions are located in the menu
Geometry/Reference Create (see section 26.5 Creation of the objects on page 631).
How to generate patches on curves

If the curve mesh shall be a couple of sections, for example, define some sections in X and Y direction, and select the generated sections using
the option Quick Surfacing.
The program will automatically detect the areas. If two curves are connected tangentially, they will be handled as one curve. If there are intersect-
ing points, the curve will be splitted at these points. The neighbouring patches that will be created are connected automatically.
Initially, the patches will be created temporarily, and can be modified dynamically by changing the order, for example.
How to find the right patch structure

Because of its structure, the following curve mesh would not be suitable for generating good surfaces:
First problem:
The dark arrows show a loop that is not convex. That means, if you walk along the arrows, you would do a U-turn at one of the curves. This
has to be avoided.
Second problem:
The bright arrows show an area that has just two sides, what is not supported yet.
699
HOW TO QUICKLY CREATE SURFACES WITH UNIFIED MODELLING
29
The result would be:
How to avoid bad patch structures

Create an internal curve that splits up the structure in two regions:
It is recommended to terminate the creation of each curve with the middle mouse button in order to verify the result. Moreover, you should work at
first without projection base to check the structure of the curve mesh.
How to deal with gaps

As with Quick Surfacing are detected regions that can be filled automatically, the user has to care about the gap tolerance (option Gap). It has to
be set in a way that even curves that do not match, or curves that are very close together are getting filled correctly.
The below example shows that the gap tolerance has to be set below 5.0 mm to fill the left curve mesh, but it must be greater than 0.5 mm to fill
the right configuration.
How to create curves

You can use the curve sketching functions in Unified Modelling to generate a mesh of curves or raw data, for example:
Free sketching:
Curves can be sketched freely on the scan, maybe with the help of shading. With the option Express you can not only sketch curves contin-
uously, but also point by point, what is often more practical.
700
HOW TO ALIGN CONTROL POINTS WITH UNIFIED MODELLING
29
On sections:
Use the option Curves (Curve Segment/Raw Data Segment by Curve Approximation) to generate an approximating curve on sections.
On feature lines:
First of all, select a scan as projection base, then activate ProjBase Extended Feature Line and create for example edge curves or cur-
vature lines. For curvature lines, the result can be refined via the slider. You can also select a scan region, and create feature lines on this
region instead of the whole scan.
Then use, for example, the option Express to create the curves by sketching on the feature lines. Please have a look which representation is
set (Bezier, B-Spline, Raw/Scans). The curve will automatically be projected onto the feature lines if the new projection method Auto is set in
ProjBase Extended Options.
How to snap curves

When sketching curves or raw data contours, some of the edges may not fit together, especially at T-connections. Therefore, the curves will be
matched after sketching with Express. In the below figures you can see the selection radius. Everything within this radius will be snapped auto-
matically.
How to smooth raw data

Sometimes it is necessary to smooth the raw data contours. This can be done in different ways:
Via context menu:
When you are in the control point modification mode, you will be able to invoke the context menu for smoothing raw data contours (see
section 26.12.10 The submenu Smooth of raw data on page 676). If you try some of the options, you will see immediately how this is chang-
ing the raw data.
By projection on a curve:
For projections, you have to select a curve onto which the raw data will be projected. In this case, the raw data will always lie on the scan, as
they will be projected at first onto the curve and afterwards onto the scan.
NOTE:
Please switch off the feature lines, otherwise the raw data will always be projected onto them.
29.3 How to align control points with Unified Modelling

In some cases, the control points of surfaces are not very well distributed, and the highlight lines are not continuous. Then the control points have
to be aligned into a row that is somehow planar.
701
HOW TO MAKE A WHEEL ARCH WIDER
29
First, define a plane that is tangential to the edge, and position the plane origin in one of the control points of the appropriate row (see function
Display Plane, page 265).
The following figure shows the distances between plane and control points:
In Unified Modelling, activate the menu for the control point modification (see section 26.7.2 The menu Point/Control Point on page 657), fix the
X and Y direction of the plane (see Restriction of the movement on page 660), and select one control point (option Single, see page 660).
You will be asked to select a second point. Select a point on the plane, the control point will then jump into the plane. Do this for all the other con-
trol points of the row. The result will look as follows:
29.4 How to make a wheel arch wider

This is the original data:
original geometry
702
HOW TO MAKE A WHEEL ARCH WIDER
29
First of all create a patch that covers the geometry to be modified. This patch will act as reference patch. Then create a raw data contour along
the wheel arch opening using Raw Data creation On Object (see page 350) and Chain selection (see page 57). Project the contour in Y direc-
tion onto the reference patch with Curve creation Projection (see page 431).
reference patch and raw

data contour
Move the raw data contour in Y direction by the desired amount with Move Translate (see page 683). Duplicate the reference patch also with
this function (Vector = 0). Refit the duplicated patch to the contour using Surface modification Refit Surfaces (see page 614).
NOTE:
For patch refit, Mod. Range and Min. Order must be at least 10 to give the patch enough flexibility. Possibly, the Smooth factor must be
adapted to avoid a bad control point distribution.
translated raw data duplicated and refitted ref-

contour erence patch
Modify the wheel arch with Surface modification Feature Design (see page 616). Here, select the flat patch as reference patch (Ref. Sur-
face), and the patch that has been refit as modified reference patch (Mod Ref).
Feature Design modified wheel arch
703
HOW TO DEAL WITH APPARENTLY FLAT SPOTS AFTER BLEND CREATION
29
Here is the final result:
final result
With Shape Diagnosis Highlight (see page 235), you can compare the modified to the original wheel arch.
original wheel arch modified wheel arch
29.5 How to deal with apparently flat spots after Blend creation
Even if the blend curve provides a mathematically exact result in case of G3 continuity (Create Curve Segment Blend), the created geometry
has a quality problem. A visual check of the curve will show flat spots in the area of the end of the initial curves. They are caused by too hard
acceleration of curvature in a small area. The problem occurs very often in an early stage of design process during definition of the basic shape
and feature line creation.
To solve this design problem, operate as follows:

1. First create a G3 constant blend curve with standard settings on Shape parameter. All visual elements, such as diagnoses, control points,
segment border etc., should be switched off to check the created geometry for problematic areas.
2. With the button Save, the mathematically exact result can now be saved as reference. Any further modification state of blend curve can be
stored as new reference.
704
HOW TO DEAL WITH APPARENTLY FLAT SPOTS AFTER BLEND CREATION
29
NOTE:
The stored blend curve is always the trimmed version of the blend curve (3 segments).
3. Using the check button Deviation which can now be switched on, the deviation between the current blend curve and the stored variant can be
displayed in the graphics. Moreover, if input curves were modified, the deviation between that modified curves and the original curves will be
shown.
4. For a better check of the result, additionally switch on the curvature diagnosis.
5. Now the blend curve can be modified in a way that the increase of curvature will be slower, and apparently flat spots will be improved by
simultaneously keeping the deviation from the reference as small as possible.
6. With the sliders Offset 1 and Offset 2, the last control point of the input curves will be moved in normal direction thus adopting the course of
curvature at the ends of the original curves to the curvature trend of the blend curve (tension).
NOTE:
The options are only available if the check buttons Trim are switched on. If the curves are not trimmed, the sliders will have no effect.
The option Swap Direction is available in the context menu of the manipulators of the blend curve end points. With the setting Normal, also mod-
ifications in principal normal direction of the input curves can be done.
705
GLOSSARY
1
Glossary
administrator
administrator
administrateur
Stands for the Windows user name of the system administrator in a network. This user has unrestricted access permissions.
Angle (between Polygon Lines)

Winkel (zwischen Polygonseiten)
Angle (entre lignes de polygone)
1. Parameterisation type for the approximation of raw data.
See Parameterisation Types.
2. In the diagnosis, the angle between patch normals, tangents and vectors can be measured with this function.
See also Diagnosis.
Angle Of View
Bildwinkel
Angle douverture
The Angle Of View defines the size of the field of view. The smaller the Angle Of View is, the smaller is the detail of the displayed geometry.
The Angle Of View is indicated in X direction.
field of view
Angle Of View
Eye Position
Anti-Alias
Anti-Alias
Anti-Alias
Method which suppresses the so-called staircase effect and creates smoother edges. This effect results from the arrangement of the pixels
at diagonal lines on screens.
Approximation
Approximation
Approximation
Mathematical procedure for approximating data. In ICEM Surf, the term approximation refers to an approximate computation of curves or
patches from input data. Input data can be Curves, Raw Data, or Edges. The function generates geometry which is approximated to the input
data as best as possible.
See also Interpolate.
Approximation Quality
Approximationsgte
Qualit dapproximation
Quality of the approach of the new geometry to the original data. The approximation quality can be controlled by the smoothing factor and the
type of parameterisation.
See also Smooth Factor and Parameterisation.
Associative Diagnosis
Assoziative Diagnose
Diagnostic assiciatif
If geometry data is generated or modified, the active diagnoses will automatically be recomputed afterwards.
See also Diagnosis and Dynamic Diagnosis.
706
GLOSSARY
1
Atom
Atom
Atome
In ICEM Surf, the geometry data are hierarchically divided into parts, molecules and atoms. Atoms are the lowest hierarchy level and
assigned to the molecules. Molecules, in turn, are subordinated to parts, e. g. a particular structural unit.
Example:
Part Molecule Atom
roof scan set scan
raw data contour raw data segment
point set point
curve curve segment
surface patch, face
Auto
Auto
Auto
Parameterisation type for the approximation of raw data.
AutoA (Auto Arc)

AutoB (Auto Bogen)
AutoA (Auto Arc)
Batch Program
Batchprogramm
Programme batch
Program for the sequential processing of single functions. Batch programs are not dialogue-driven, i. e. all required data and parameters must
be available before the program is started.
Bezier Representation
Bezier-Darstellung
Reprsentation Bezier
See section 18.1.2 Bezier curve segments on page 387.
Binary
Binary
Binaire
Images, software, or other data converted to binary data.
Bitplane
Bitplane
Bitplane
A pixel is not necessarily defined with the same resolution on different screens (colour depth). Only a certain amount of memory is granted to
it, so that computer images can vary between two colour display (Black/White) and real colour display (16,7 million). A B/W image will be gen-
erated with a colour depth of 1 bitplane, a 256-colour image with 8 bitplanes, and a real-colour image with 24 bitplanes.
B-Spline Representation
B-Spline-Darstellung
Reprsentation B-Spline
See section 18.1.3 B-Spline and NURBS curve segments on page 387.
Blend
Blend
Raccord
The Blend functions generate a connecting curve or patch between two existing curves or patches.
Body
Body
Body
Cluster of shells in the ICEM DB.
707
GLOSSARY
1
See Shell and ICEM DB.
Buffer
Buffer
Mmoire tampon
Area of memory where data is stored temporarily until it is needed.
See also Double Buffer, Frame Buffer and Z Buffer.
Bug
Bug
Bug
Expression for a computer or software error.
See also Debug, Debugging.
Bump Map
Bump-Map
Bump-Map
In a bump-map the brightness values of the Texture used are interpreted in a way that they are displayed as altitude differences. This effect
provides a realistic display of the surface structure of objects.
Texture Bump Map
Central Perspective
Zentralperspektive
Perspective avec fuyante
View mode creating a perspective view of the geometry. The projection centre has a finite distance to the geometry, so that the projection
beams pass through the plane with unequal angles. The image points are the intersection points of the projection beams with the projection
plane. Parallel horizontal edges of the geometry meet in vanishing points lying on the horizon.
See also Parallel Perspective.
geometry object
Reference Point
intersection points
Z projection beams
X
Y
Eye Position
Up Vector (= focal point)
Projection
Focal Length
Chordal
Chordal
Cordal
708
GLOSSARY
1

2. Tessellation type for the creation of raw data on curves.
See Tessellation Types.
Circular Arc
Kreisbogen
Arc de cercle
In contrast to curve segments, circular arcs are not created in Bezier representation, but they are defined by the following parameters (see
also figure below):
centre point coordinates,
radius, and
begin and end angles related to a local coordinate system.
circular arc
y
traversal angle = 127
end angle = 132
start angle = 5
radius
0
x
centre point
For modifying a circular arc, it is often necessary to convert it into a Bezier curve segment. The definition parameters will then be deleted.
Collinear
Kollinear
Colinaire
See Continuity.
Colour Models
Farbmodelle
Modles de couleurs
For colour definition, in ICEM Surf are used the colour models RGB (Red, Green, Blue) and HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation).
HLS Colour Model
In the HLS colour model a colour is defined by the parameters hue, lightness, and saturation. The HLS colour model is represented by a
hexagonal double pyramid. At the corners of the basic sexangle are the basic colours red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and magenta, at the
pyramids vertices the colours black and white.
white
L (height)
green yellow
S (distance) H (angle)
cyan red
grayscale
blue magenta
black
Hue
The hue value is indicated as angle.
709
GLOSSARY
1
Lightness
The lightness of a colour is defined by the height of the value on the black-white-axis. The colour will be the lighter or darker, the
larger the white or black portion is. The lightness value is indicated in percent. The pure colour without black and white portions will be
obtained with a value of 50 %.
Saturation
The saturation, i. e. the gray and colour portion of a colour, is defined by the distance of the value from the black-white-axis. This
value is also indicated in percent: 0 % = gray, 100 % = pure colour.
RGB Colour Model
In the RGB colour model, a colour is defined by adding the primary colours red, green, and blue to black (additive colour mixing method).
The RGB colour model can be represented as coordinate system forming a cube with the basic colours red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and
magenta at the eight corners, and the origin of which is black with the coordinate values 0, 0, 0. Each colour is defined by three coordi-
nate values for red, green, and blue. The range of values is 0 to 255. Low values create dark colours, high values light colours. If the pri-
mary colours red, green, and blue have the same value, are created the colours black (0, 0, 0), white (255, 255, 255) or gray scales.
cyan (0,255,255) white (255,255,255)
green (0,255,0)
yellow (255,255,0) gray scales
blue (0,0,255)
magenta (255,0,255)
black (0,0,0) red (255,0,0)
Command Shell
Command Shell
Command shell
See Shell.
Continuity
Stetigkeit
Degree of smoothness at the transitions of adjacent curves and patches.
See also Curve Matching and Patch Matching.
Position Continuity
(Lagestetigkeit/Positionsstetigkeit
Continuit en position)
In case of connected curves, a transition is position continuous, if the first control points at the transition between the curves have the
same position.
In case of connected patches, a transition is position continuous, if the edges at the transition between the patches match without gap. In
case of equal order it is sufficient if the edge control point polygons match at the transition.
At a position continuous transitions sharp bends are allowed.
2 2
2 1 1 3
2 1
3
3 3
reference connecting
curve curve
Tangent Continuity/Normal Continuity

(Tangentenstetigkeit/Normalenstetigkeit
Continuit en tangence/continuit en normales)
The transition at two connected curves is tangent continuous, if the first two control points lie on a straight line.
In case of a control point modification, tangent continuity will be preserved if the second control point is only moved on this line.
710
GLOSSARY
1
2 1 2 2 1 2
3
3
3 3
The transition at two connected patches is tangent continuous, if the cross tangents are aligned collinearly, i. e. they lie parallel to each
other.
Movement possibility of the 2nd control

point row preserving tangent continuity
course of the
cross tangents
Tangent continuous matching with collinear

alignment of the cross tangents
If the cross tangents are not aligned collinearly, but lie in one tangential plane, the alignment is called coplanar. A patch matching with
coplanar alignment of the cross tangents is called normal continuous, as the patch normals along the common edge have the same
direction.
Normals
Movement possibility of the 2nd control

point row preserving normal continuity
Normal continuous matching with coplanar

alignment of the cross tangents
In case of patch control point modifications tangent or normal continuity will be preserved, if the second control point row will completely
be moved along the cross polygon control line.
Curvature Continuity
(Krmmungsstetigkeit
Continuit en courbure)
A transition is curvature continuous, if in case of curves the centre points of the osculating circles at the curve ends match or, in case of
patches, match at the ends of the normal intersection curves lying orthogonally to the edge.
In case of curve control point modifications, curvature continuity will be preserved if the third control point is moved parallel to the tangent.
In case of patch control point modifications, curvature continuity will be preserved if the third control point row is completely moved paral-
lel to the first cross tangent control lines.
711
GLOSSARY
1
curvature discontinuity
1 2 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3
3 3 3 3 3
tangent continuous transition curvature continuous transition curvature continuous transition with
modified curvature shape
Torsion Continuous Transition (Torsion/G)

(Torsionsstetigkeit
Continuit en torsion)
A transition is curvature continuous, if the course of the curvature at a curvature continuous transition is also continuous. This effect is
shown by the course of the curvature grid displayed in the curvature diagnosis.
Matching with transition Matching with transition

quality Curvature quality Torsion/G
Control Point
Kontrollpunkt
Ples
Control points define curve segments and patches, and allow their evaluation and modelling. The number of control points determines the
order of the curve segment or patch.
The control points of a curve segment are arranged in a sequence forming the control point polygon. The control points of a patch form the
nodes of a rectangular grid (mesh).
See also Order.
Control Point Distribution

Kontrollpunktverteilung
Rpartition de Ples
Number and distribution of control points determine the shape of a curve segment or patch. The more regular the control point distribution,
the smoother the shape of the curve segment or patch.
Control Point Modification

Kontrollpunktmodifikation
Modification de ples
See Point/Control Point Modification.
Convex Hull
Konvexe Hlle
Enveloppe Convexe
The control points define a convex hull around curves or surfaces. Curves are described by control point rows (control point polygons),
patches by grids of control points.
Coplanar
Komplanar
Coplanaire
See Continuity.
Corners
Ecken
Coins
Corner points of the control point grid. They coincide with the four corner points of a patch.
712
GLOSSARY
1
Corner Fillet
Eckenverrundung
Coin de valise
Fillet between three surfaces sharing a common corner point (similar to a corner of a suitcase).
See also Fillet Surfaces.
Crowning
Bombierung
Galber
Global surface modelling function with which the curvature of a patch cluster can be globally increased or reduced.
See also Global Modelling.
Curvature
Krmmung
Courbure
2. Measure of the local changes in the tangent direction of curves and iso-lines (shape diagnosis).
See also Curvature Radius.
Curvature Continuity
Krmmungsstetigkeit
Continuit en courbure
See Continuity.
Curvature Radius
Krmmungsradius
Rayon de courbure
Radius of the curvature circle, i. e. the circle locally intersecting the curve or iso-line with the same curvature.
See also Curvature.
Curve
Kurve
Courbe
Curves consist of one or several curve segments.
See also Curve Segment.
Curve Composite
Kurvenverband
Courbe Composite
Cluster of topologically contiguous curves in the ICEM DB. A Curve Composite is considered as an individual entity (atom). Curves are con-
sidered as topologically contiguous, if they are connected to each other at their end points within a tolerance specified.
See also ICEM DB.
Curve (Control) Point Modification

Kurven(kontroll)punktmodifikation
Modification des Points/Ples dune Courbe
Curve Join
Kurvenjoin
Ensemble de Courbes
Cluster of topologically contiguous curves in Catia V5 data bases.
Topology conditions see Curve Composite.
Curve Matching
Kurvenanschlu
Connexion de Courbes
Definition of the transition between two curve segments.
The following continuity types can be realized at a curve transition:
position continuity (Position),
tangent continuity (Tangent), or
curvature continuity (Curvature).
713
GLOSSARY
1
curve segments
tangent continuity position continuity, but no

tangent continuity
See also Continuity.
Curve Segment
Kurvenabschnitt
Segment de courbe
Curve segments may be combined to form a curve. Within ICEM Surf, circles, straight lines (Bezier curve segments with order 2), and Bezier
curve segments (up to order 16) can be generated, and additionally B-Spline/NURBS curve segments by conversion. Several Bezier curve
segments can be converted to a B-Spline curve segment.
See also Curve.
Debug, Debugging
Debug, Debugging
Dboguage, dbuggage
Search and elimination of program errors (see Bug).
Degenerated Patches
Degenerierte Patches
Carreaux dgnrs
A patch normally has four edges. In some cases, so-called degenerated patches may be produced. For this, the length of the edges that are
not required will be set to 0.001 mm to avoid singularities.
The degenerated edge will be generated at the intersection point with the largest deviation.
0.001 mm
Device
Device
Priphrique
Peripheral device, e. g. printer.
Diagnosis
Diagnose
Diagnostic
The diagnosis functions can be activated parallel to the geometry functions. They provide statistic information about geometry objects (object
diagnoses), graphically display relations between objects (object diagnoses), and give information on the geometric shape of objects (shape
diagnoses).
See also Associative Diagnosis and Dynamic Diagnosis.
Diagnostic Line
Diagnoselinie
Ligne de diagnostic
Diagnostic lines (e. g. reflection, silhouette or intersection lines) are the result of sections and diagnostic functions.
714
GLOSSARY
1
See also Sections and Diagnosis.
Digital Mock-Up
Digital Mock-Up
Maquette numrique
Digital Mock-Up (DMU) is the computer-aided assembling on the basis of 3D CAD data.
Direct Modelling
Direkte Modellierung
Modlage direct
Direct creation of free-form surfaces from digitised data or from scratch without underlying objects. Surfaces are worked on directly without
the need for a network of curves. Modifications are carried out in real time.
Double Buffer
Double Buffer
Double buffer
A graphics card can have two frame buffers. Thus it is possible to initially generate the next image of an animation, for example, in the invisible
background. When it is ready or demanded, the screen display switches immediately to this image, and the next image will be set up in the
background. In this way, animations are smoother than in single buffer mode.
See also Frame Buffer and Buffer.
Dual Screen
Dual Screen
Doube cran
The computer is equipped with two graphics cards or one graphics card with two graphics processors. Two separate screens are connected in
both cases.
Duct Surface
Kanalflche
Surface tube
Surface which is generated between several profile curves. For this, one or several patches are created between the profiles. Tangent conti-
nuity at the transitions between the patches will be generated automatically. This function is suitable, e. g., for designing pipes with specified
profile cross sections.
Dynamic Diagnosis
Dynamische Diagnose
Diagnostic dynamique
Dynamic update of diagnostics like cross sections, highlights, or split lines in real-time as the surfaces are directly manipulated.
See also Diagnosis and Associative Diagnosis.
Edge Curvature
Randkrmmung
Courbure au bord
The curvature characteristics along the natural edge of a patch are determined by the control points of the first three strings at the respective
edge of the control point grid. When a curvature continuous transition is requested, ICEM Surf computes the required positions of the control
points of these three strings.
Edges
Rnder
Bords
Boundary curves of parts of a surface.
The natural patch edges are the iso-lines of the parameter ranges boundaries, they are completely described by the edge strings of the con-
trol point grid.
The edges of faces are managed as 2D curves in the parameter range of the base patch.
See also Iso-Curve.
Edge Slope
Randsteigung
Pente au bord
The surface normals or slopes along the natural edge of a patch are determined by the control points of the first two strings at the respective
edge of the control point grid. When a normal continuous transition is requested, ICEM Surf computes the required positions of the control
points of these two strings.
Environment Variables
Umgebungsvariablen
Variables denvironnement
Variables defining the basic settings of an operating system (e. g. the path definition), or of an application such as ICEM Surf.
715
GLOSSARY
1
Equidistant
quidistant
Equidistant
Extrapolate
Extrapolieren
Extrapoler
Extension or reduction of the dimensions of a curve or patch. If the extrapolation factor is larger than 1, the geometry will be extended; if it is
smaller than 1, it will be reduced. Large patch clusters can be extrapolated as a whole using the global surface modelling function.
Eye Position
Augenpunkt
Point dobservation
In central perspective views the eye position is the point from which you look onto the geometry.
See also Central Perspective.
Executable
Executable
Excutable
Program file ready to run in a particular environment.
Face
Face
Face
Parts of a patch can be blanked by projecting a curve onto the patch thus creating a face. The patch will not be modified regarding its shape
and control point distribution. See Trim (with Reapproximation) in contrast to this function.
Faces can be untrimmed. Either, the trim operation for the face loops can be undone step by step until the face returns to be the original patch
(Face Untrim). Or, several faces can be completely untrimmed by one step (Global Face Untrim).
Faceting
Facettierung
Facettisation
See Tessellation.
Facets
Facetten
Facettes
1. Scans:
Scans may be triangulated (e. g. for shaded display). During the triangulation process, neighboured scan points are connected in a way
that small planar triangles, so-called facets, are created.
See also Triangulation.
2. Tessellation:
For shaded display of surfaces in ICEM Surf, these surfaces may be subdivided into facets in order to control the display quality and the
graphics performance. This subdivision is called tessellation or faceting.
See also Tessellation.
Fairing
Straken
Profiler
See Smooth.
Feature Design
Feature Design
Conception de Formes
Function which allows structural design elements that have to be matched to aesthetic surfaces to be automatically updated to a modified sur-
face.
Feature Line
Feature Line
Ligne de caractre
Characteristic edges, sharp bends, or areas with a strong change of curvature may be highlighted for scans. For this, scan points lying in the
characteristic areas are selected, and raw data contours or curves are created through these points.
716
GLOSSARY
1
Fillet
Verrunden
Cong
See Fillet Curve and Fillet Surfaces.
Fillet Curve
Kurvenverrundung
Cong Filaire
A fillet curve can be computed between two existing curves. The standard fillet generated is an arc fillet, however, it is also possible to specify
accumulating radii.
Fillet Flange
Fillet Abstellung
Bord de cong
Flanges on existing fillet surfaces.
See also Flanges.
Fillet Surfaces
Verrundungsflchen
Surfaces de cong
The transition between two surfaces forming a sharp bend at their adjacent edges or piercing each other can be filleted. The resulting con-
nection surface is referred to as fillet surface.
Filter
Filter
Function providing the possibility of filtering raw data contours or large scans to receive a useful amount of data.
Raw data contours can be filtered by means of the distance tolerance filter (2D filter), and specifying a maximum point number. This filter
works with an internal tolerance; afterwards, points which are not needed will be deleted. Scans also may be filtered in this way.
Additionally, there are two other methods for filtering scans. The distance tolerance filter can work with user-defined parameters (tolerance,
distance) filtering along scan lines. Using the 3D distance filter, all points within a sphere with the specified tolerance as radius are deleted.
Firewall
Firewall
Pare-feu
Electronic protection system that creates an electronic barrier between an intranet and the internet in order to protect the network and the
computers of a companys network against the access of external users.
Flanges
Abstellungen
Bords tombs
Flange surface created by projecting the spine curve in flange direction. In contrast to profile surfaces, flanges can be composed of ruled sur-
faces step by step.
See also Ruled Surface, Translation Surface and Profile Surface.
Flat Shading
Flat-Schattierung
Ombrage facettis
See Shading.
Focal Length
Brennweite
Distance focale
The focal length is the distance between eye position and reference point or projection plane. The focal length determines the perspective
effect of the central projection. The smaller the focal length, the greater is the perspective effect.
717
GLOSSARY
1
Central Perspective with Central Perspective with

large focal length small focal length
Frame Buffer
Frame Buffer
Frame buffer
Area of the graphics memory where the image that will be displayed next is already building up. Additionally, transparent effects are computed
in the Frame Buffer.
See also Double Buffer and Buffer.
Gamma Correction
Gammakorrektur
Correction gamma
Differences in the colour display of different output devices can be balanced by means of the gamma correction. The gamma value 1 corre-
sponds to the ideal screen producing a linear transition from White through Grey to Black. However, computer screens are more or less not
complying with a strict linear graduation. Gamma values between 1.5 and 2.0 are usual here.
Global Fillet
Globales Verrunden
Cong global
Function of the Global Surface Modelling providing the possibility of filleting several surfaces in a single step. Arc and accumulating fillets can
be created.
Global Modelling
Globale Modellierung
Modlage global
Interactive and dynamic modification of whole detailed models in total. Design changes are possible by simple modification operations with
Global Modelling instead of time consuming creation of a new design. The surface can be modelled across patch boundaries without modify-
ing the patch structure.
Application areas of the global surface modelling are for example:
Styling modifications during the design process, e. g. changes of the global curvature of a surface (Crowning), rescaling (extension or
shrinking) in tangent direction.
Integration of modified digitized data into an existing CAD surface description (Refit Surfaces).
Re-establishing the mountability or, in case of movable parts, their clearance, after a change of the mounting dimensions of units.
Drawing and adapting parts to other surfaces (Feature Design).
GNU GPL
GNU GPL
GNU GPL
GNU General Public License. License condition for Open source GNU software.
See also Open Source.
Gouraud Shading
Gouraud-Schattierung
Ombrage de Gouraud
See Shading.
718
GLOSSARY
1
HDTV
HDTV
TVHD
High-Definition TeleVision. High-resolution television.
Header
Header
En-tte
Area at the beginning of a file where general information on the file are saved.
Highlight Lines
Highlightlinien
Lignes de highlight
See Isophotes.
HLS-Colour Model
HLS-Farbmodell
Modle de couleurs HLS
See Colour Models.
Host
Host
Host
Computer providing services or data.
ICEM CGM Plot Previewer

Plot software for Windows platforms that allows plotting of geometry directly from ICEM Surf.
ICEM DB
ICEM DB
BD ICEM
ICEM data base format generally used in ICEM products except in ICEM Surf. Main differences to the ICEM Surf DB:
Data structure
Management of the geometry objects in groups instead of the part/molecule/atom structure.
Geometry object types
No subdivision into molecule and atom. All geometry objects are considered as individual entities.
Filter
For the creation of display sets of geometry objects are used layer instead of lists.
See also Curve Composite, Shell, Shell
ICEM Installer
ICEM Installer
ICEM Installer
Program for installing the ICEM products for the supported platforms.
ICEM Surf
ICEM Surf
ICEM Surf
CAD software for generating high-quality free-form surfaces for car body design, design of interior parts, body-in-white, press tool design, as
well as industrial design of consumer goods and for high-end visualisation.
ICEM Surf Realtime Renderer

Visualisation tool for assisting the modelling work. The realistic environment of the model will be continuously updated while you dynamically
move or rotate your model or even carry out surface modelling operations.
ICEM Viewer
ICEM Viewer
ICEM Viewer
Freeware for viewing ICEM Surf data bases.
719
GLOSSARY
1
Inflection Line
Wendelinie
Ligne dInflexion
An inflection line connects all surface points with the same curvature value in a specified direction.
Inflection Point
Wendepunkt
Point dInflexion
Curve or surface points with a curvature radius = 0. For a surface, the inflection lines are exactly at the boundary between concave and con-
vex regions in this case.
See also Inflection Line.
Interface
Schnittstelle
Interface
An interface allows the communication between two systems. In a CAD program like ICEM Surf, interfaces are used to exchange data sys-
tem- and program-neutral with other CAD programs. For converting the data the program requires a Translator.
See also Translator.
Interpolate
Interpolieren
Interpoler
Mathematical procedure for a precise computation of curves. A curve can be interpolated on the basis of a raw data contour or a diagnostic
line. The interpolation consists in the generation of one curve segment between each two adjacent raw data points. The curve passes exactly
through every single point of the raw data contour.
See Approximation in contrast to this.
Iso-Curve
Isolinie
Courbe Iso
Patches as parts of a surface are defined on a rectangular (u,v) parameter range. If one of the parameters remains unchanged, the changing
parameter describes an iso-parametric line (also iso-line) on the patch.
Isophotes
Isophoten
Isophotes
Lines of equal brightness connecting those points on a surface in which the light has the same angle of incidence.
K-Connection
K-Anschlu
Connexion en K
If patches with different edge lengths are connected to each other, so-called partial connections may be created. Within ICEM Surf, K- and T-
connections are possible. Short patch edges may be connected to longer patch edges, but not vice-versa.
K-connection
See also T-Connection.
Layer
Layer
Couche
Data filter used in the ICEM DB. The layer structure can be compared to a transparencies lying one upon the other. The geometry objects
assigned to a layer can be blanked by deactivating the layer.
720
GLOSSARY
1
See also ICEM DB.
Lens Flares
Lichtreflexe
Effets de halo
Photographs may show lens flares if incident light reflects between the lenses of a camera objective.
Line
Gerade
Droite
Bezier curve segment with the order 2.
Library
Library
Bibliothque
Set of frequently used software routines (sub-programs, functions) that can be called from different locations of the main program and proc-
essed.
List
Liste
Liste
In the data filter list, the objects of a data base needed for the current work may be included. Other objects are not visible.
User-defined lists can be defined and modified independent from each other. The list DB, which may not be modified or removed, contains the
complete data of the data base.
Log (File)
Logdatei
Fichier protocole
File with a record of the computer activity used for statistical purposes, as well as backup and recovery.
721
GLOSSARY
1
Magnifying Glass
Lupe
Loupe
With the magnifying glass a detail may be reduced or increased in the display. The magnifier can be activated via the key combination
Crtl+Shift.
Matching
Anschlu
Connexion
See Patch Matching and Curve Matching.
Mean
Mittel
Moyen
See also Parameterisation Types.
Metafile
Metafile
Mtafichier
Standardized file which contains commands for drawing graphics and which can be used for most plot devices.
Molecule
Molekl
Molcule
See Atom.
Mount
Mount
Monter
Attaching a file system or a drive to a computer system that is already running.
Normal Continuity
Normalenstetigkeit
Continuit en normales
See Continuity.
N-Sided Blend
N-Eck
Raccord N Bords
A hole in a patch cluster or between curve segments can be filled by a n-sided blend. With this function, a patch cluster is created containing
as many patches as edge curves have been selected.
NURBS Representation
NURBS-Darstellung
Reprsentation NURBS
See section 18.1.3 B-Spline and NURBS curve segments on page 387.
Offset
Offset
Offset
See Offset Curve and Offset Surface.
Offset Curve
Offsetkurve
Courbe Offset
Curve created on an underlying surface or in 3D space at a constant or variable distance from the original curve. In each curve point, the off-
set direction is perpendicular with the curve tangent.
Offset Surface
Offsetflche
Surface Offset
Surface with a constant or variable distance from the original surface. The original surface may consist of any number of patches and faces.
In each point, the offset direction is normal to the original surface.
722
GLOSSARY
1
OpenGL
OpenGL
OpenGL
Open Graphic Language. Programming language for interactive 3D graphics and animations.
Open Source
Open Source
Open Source
Software that can be examined, modified, and also passed on after a modification under the same license both as source code and as Exe-
cutable. The source code is usually publicly available, and can be used by other software engineers.
See also Executable.
Order
Ordnung
Ordre
Number of degrees of freedom (control points) per segment and parameter direction. The order is by 1 larger than the corresponding degree
of the parameter polynom. For patches, the orders in u and v directions are to be distinguished, corresponding to the order of the edge curves
in each direction.
Within B-Spline or NURBS curve segments or patches, all segments of the same curve segment or patch have the same order in each
parameter direction. However, since the control points have an influence across segment boundaries in this case, the order can not be deter-
mined directly out of the number of control points and segments.
In contrast, for Bezier curve segments and patches, the number of control points per parameter direction corresponds exactly to the order.
Valid orders range from 2 to 16. The higher the order of a curve segment or a patch, the more degrees of freedom this object has. If, e. g., a
curve segment is generated by approximation of raw data, a curve segment with a high order will follow the raw data more exactly than a
curve segment with a lower order.
Overlay
Overlay
Overlay
Method to release data, programs, or routines that are not currently needed from the memory if the memory capacity is too low.
Parallel Perspective
Parallelperspektive
Perspective Isomtrique
View mode with a projection centre lying in infiniteness. The projection beams run parallel and pass with an equal angle through the projec-
tion plane. Parallel edges of the geometry remain parallel.

geometry object
intersection points
projection beams
= View Normal
X
Y
Reference Point
Projection
Parallel Surface
Parallelflche
Surface parallle
See Offset Surface.
Parameter Distribution
Parameterverteilung
Evolution du paramtre
723
GLOSSARY
1
Parameterisation
Parametrisierung
Paramtrisation
Ratio between parameter distance and 3D distance of curve and patch points. The parameterisation influences the approximation quality. A
ratio which is almost constant, i. e. a regular parameterisation, causes a regular control point distribution and vice versa.
See also Approximation Quality and Parameterisation Types.
Parameterisation Types
Parametrisierungsarten
Types de Paramtrisation
Determination of the raw data distribution for the approximation of raw data. The following parameterisation types are distinguished (consider-
ing a curve as example):
Equidistant
The approximation is carried out assuming that the given points are distributed regularly according to the curve parameter along the
curve to be created.
Chordal
The approximation is carried out assuming that the distances between the given points also determine their parameterisation on the
curve to be created.
Angle (<)
Mean
A mean control point distribution (geometric mean) between the two types Equidistant and Chordal is computed. This parameterisa-
tion type is most suitable for smoothing digitized data.
Auto
smallest deviation from the raw data.
AutoA (Auto Arc)
curve or patch with the shortest arc length or smallest surface. Compared to the other parameterisation types, this method leads to a flat-
ter control point polygon.
Compare with Tessellation Types.
Part
Teil
Pice
See Atom.
Patch
Patch
Carreau
Surface object with four edges. One edge or two opposite edges may be reduced to a length of approximately 0.001 mm, optically creating a
patch with only two or three edges (degenerated patch).
In ICEM Surf, Bezier as well as B-Spline/NURBS patches can be generated. Several patches can be combined to form a surface.
See also Atom, Subdivision of Surfaces, Patch Matching and Degenerated Patches.
Patch
Patch
Correctif logiciel
Small program that corrects, for example, software errors (see Bug) in large application software.
Patch Matching
Patch-Anschlu
Connextion de carreaux
Definition of the transition between two patches at their adjacent edges and towards the interior of one patch. The following continuity types
can be realized at a patch transition:
position continuity (Position)
normal continuity (Tangent)
In this case, generally, only a common tangential plane along the contact curve exists. As special case, however, also tangent continuity
of the iso-lines at right angles to the common edge is possible.
curvature continuity (Curvature)
724
GLOSSARY
1
curvature continuity
normal continuity
position continuity
path
path
path
Operating system-internal definition of directories which will be searched automatically when a program shall be started.
PDM
PDM
PDM
Product Data Management. PDM is called the software (standard and client solutions) of the system class product data management. A prod-
uct generates a multitude of data throughout its life cycle. This data flow can be optimised for the different business processes by PDM sys-
tems.
See also PLM.
Phong Shading
Phong-Schattierung
Ombrage de Phong
See Shading.
Plane
Ebene
Plan
See Work Plane.
PLM
PLM
PLM
PLM is called the company strategy Product Lifecycle Management: Intelligent management of product data from design, via production,
stock-keeping, quality management, sales, service, up to product disposal. Among others, PLM uses PDM and CPC (Collaborative Product
Commerce) as IT-tools.
See also PDM.
Plot Configuration File

Plot-Konfigurationsdatei
Fichier de configuration de trac
When starting ICEM Surf, the plot configuration file plotter.configuration will be read in, through which the printers and plotters defined in
the file will be made available in ICEM Surf. This file can be configured by the user.
Point Clouds
Punktwolken
Nuages de points
Point data resulting from optically digitizing styling models by means of 3D measuring machines.
See also Scan and Scan Line in the glossary, and section 16.1 Scans in ICEM Surf on page 358.
Point/Control Point Modification

Punkt/Kontrollpunkt-Modifikation
Modification de Point/Ples
Individual curve segments or patches, but also several curve segments or patches simultaneously (e. g. complete curves or surfaces) may be
modified by moving points or control points.
The modification is most marked in the point or in the area closest to the control point, and with increasing distance gradually decreases
according to a bell-shaped function.
725
GLOSSARY
1
Point modifications (a) produce more changes in the shape than control point modifications (b) when moving by the same vector.
a) b)
distance
old position > new position
sections
Point Modification
When moving curve or surface points, the new positions of the neighboured control points of all selected curve segments or patches will
automatically be calculated.
The following figures show a curve point modification within a segment and across segments.
a) within a segment
adjacent control points are

moved
normal continuity
not preserved
adjacent segment
moving the curve point not modified
segment boundary
726
GLOSSARY
1
b) across several segments
all control points (except the end

control points) are moved
normal continuity
preserved
adjacent segment
modified
moving the curve point
segment boundary
Control Point Modification

By moving a control point, individual curve segments or patches are modified only in those segments belonging to them. For Bezier curve
segments or patches consisting only of one segment, a global modification is carried out at any time.
The following figures show a control point modification at a curve segment and a patch.
control point modification
modification of the curve segment
end tangents unchanged
control point modification
iso-line
edge slopes
and edges
unchanged
patch modification
If several curve segments have been selected, control points of the neighboured segment will be moved too, if required, in order to keep
position or tangent continuity.
For a global control point modification, several patches, but also any other geometry objects, may be modified simultaneously. In this
case, a reference Bezier patch, the control points of which can be modified, is used for defining the modification. This modification causes
the control points of all selected geometry objects to be automatically re-computed.
Points
Punkte
Points
Points can be directly used as reference data or for the generation of curves and surfaces.
Point Set
Punktmenge
Jeu de points
A point set can contain several, individual points.
See also Points in the glossary.
727
GLOSSARY
1
Point Sequence
Punktreihe
Suite de points
Point data resulting from mechanically digitizing styling models by means of 3D measuring machines.
See also Raw Data Contour in the glossary, and section 14.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf on page 349.
Port
Port
Port
Generally, the physical or logical connection in a network. TCP/IP applications address the communication partner on the one hand via the IP
address, and on the other hand via a Port number that specifies the service on the target computer.
See also Port Number.
Port Number
Portnummer
Numro de port
Number assigned to an application program running on a computer. The number is included in the transmitted data package to link the incom-
ing data to the correct service.
See also Port.
Position Continuity
Lagestetigkeit
Continuit en position
See Continuity.
PostScript
PostScript
PostScript
PostScript is a page description language which similar to a programming language describes text and graphic with programming commands.
PostScript files can be output on every printer or plotter being able to process PostScript.
Preference Files
Prferenzendateien
Fichiers de prfrenced
In the preferences files, different settings used by ICEM Surf are saved, e. g. options and parameters in the function windows and window
positions. These files are loaded when starting ICEM Surf and used with different priorities.
Profile Surface
Profilflche
Surface profil
Profile curves are swept along one or two spine curves, thus defining a surface. In contrast to translation surfaces or flanges, profile surfaces
are not ruled surfaces; they cannot be composed of several individual surfaces.
See also Ruled Surface, Flanges and Translation Surface.
Project
Projekt
Projet
Projects are required by ICEM Surf for the management of all data. Each project can be assigned a name, e. g. to group or distinguish differ-
ent structural areas within a model, or different model variants. A project includes several subdirectories for the supported file types.
Projection
Projektion
Projection
Curves, points and raw data can be discretely projected onto surfaces and scans in normal direction to the patch or facet, or normal to the
work plane. The resulting point sequence will be segmented according to the underlying geometry and, if desired, trimmed or extrapolated,
and can be approximated (again) as a curve.
See also Parameterisation Types.
Proxy
Proxy
Proxy
Proxies receive demands from a client and pass them on to the original target. The computers of a companys network are connected to the
internet via a Proxy server, for example. The Proxy server can additionally have the function of a Firewall, i. e. it protects the companys
intranet against external access.
See also Firewall.
RAM
RAM
RAM
Random Access Memory. Read-write-memory, e. g. the main memory of a computer or the frame buffer of a graphics card.
728
GLOSSARY
1
Raw Data Contour

Rohdatenkontur
Contour de relev
The data resulting from a mechanical digitizing operation on a 3D model consist of 3D points, which are partly subject to measurement errors.
These points have a line structure. They are referred to as raw data contour.
See also section 14.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf on page 349.
Raw Data Segment

Rohdatenabschnitt
Segment de relev
Raw data contours may be subdivided into any number of segments by defining segment boundaries.
See also Raw Data Contour in the glossary, as well as section 14.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf on page 349.
Ray Trace
Ray Trace
Lan de rayon
See Shading.
Reference Point
Referenzpunkt
Point de Rfrence
In parallel and central perspective views the reference point the origin of the view coordinate system, to which view rotations and scalings
refer (The point onto which you look) and is located in the centre of the view.
See also Central Perspective and Parallel Perspective
Refit Surface
Flchenrckfhrung
Plaquer une surface
Function with which a patch cluster can be mapped onto modified digitized data, the patch cluster structure remaining unchanged.
Reflection Line
Reflexionslinie
Ligne de rflexion
Reflection lines are one type of diagnostic lines in ICEM Surf. The reflection of a rod-shaped light source allows a precise evaluation of an
existing surface. Reflection lines are suitable for the diagnosis of irregularities in the curvature of a surface, as well as the quality of the transi-
tions between adjacent patches. During patch modelling, the reflection lines follow dynamically.
See also Diagnostic Line, Associative Diagnosis, and Dynamic Diagnosis.
RGB-Colour Model
RGB-Farbmodell
Modle de couleurs RGB
See Colour Models.
Ruled Surface
Regelflche
Surface rgle
A ruled surface is created by moving a straight line continuously in 3D space.
See also Translation Surface and Flanges.
Scale
Skalieren
Homothtie
Reduction or extension of the geometry related to individual or all coordinate directions of the world coordinate system or the current plane.
729
GLOSSARY
1
Scan
Scan
Nuage
Point clouds with a very large number of points and an arbitrary structure as result of an optical tracing process. Several scans may be com-
bined to form a scan set. Scans and scan sets may be triangulated in order to allow shaded display or to calculate sections.
See also Point Clouds and Triangulation.
Scan Sections
Schnitte rastern
Echantillonnage de Sections
Geometry function, where points are computed on selected X, Y or Z sections for creating raw data contours. In one coordinate direction,
these points have a specified distance (grid increment) from each other.
See also Sections.
Scan Line
Scanlinie
Ligne de mesure
Point data with a line structure as a result of digitizing design models with mechanical measuring machines, or the creation of scans on exist-
ing geometry objects.
Sections
Schnitte
Sections
Sections are diagnostic lines. They can be generated by intersecting a surface with one or several planes. The creation of sections is a
dynamic diagnostic function, i. e. during a geometry modification the intersection lines are permanently re-computed and displayed. Thus it is
possible to evaluate the characteristics of a geometry object during the surface modelling process.
See also Diagnostic Line.
Shading
Schattierung
Ombrage
For the shading of surfaces and scans as well as for renderings different methods are used:
Flat Shading
(Flat-Schattierung
Ombrage facettis)
Standard shading method for scans. Flat Shading is a simple shading method for scans with little computing time. For each facet only one
brightness and hue value is computed. Therefore, no brightness and colour course is created, so that the transitions between the individ-
ual facets are visible.
Gouraud Shading
(Gouraud Schattierung
Ombrage de Gouraud)
Standard shading method for surfaces. For scans the Gouraud shading is an alternative to flat shading. For this shading method the
brightness and hue values are computed at each corner of the (surface or scan) facet and linear interpolated over the facet edges. The
Gouraud shading needs more computing time but gives a more realistic view of the geometry, as due to the brightness and colour course
are created smooth transitions between the facets.
Phong Shading
(Phong Schattierung
Ombrage de Phong)
Shading method for renderings with little computing time. For a Phong shading is computed apart from the normal vectors at the facet
corners and edges also the angle between the normals and the vector of the light source.
Ray Trace
(Ray Trace
Lan de rayon)
Shading method for renderings with long computing time. In case of ray-tracing the course of the light beams from the light source and the
objects to the eye position is retraced. With ray-tracing a high-quality photo-realistic rendering with shadows, refractions, reflections can
be realized.
Shell
Shell
Shell
1. Cluster of surfaces in an ICEM DB which are topologically contiguous within a tolerance specified. A shell is considered as an individual
entity (atom). In a shell, surfaces are considered as topologically contiguous, if they have at least one contact point. Contrary to a Catia
surface cluster a common edge of more than two surfaces is also allowed.
See also Body, ICEM DB, Surface Join.
2. Non-graphic user interface of an operating system (Unix, DOS) for the command line oriented input.
730
GLOSSARY
1
Silhouette Line
Sichtkante
Ligne silhouette
Silhouette lines are one type of diagnostic lines in ICEM Surf. Regarding a particular view, the silhouette line is the line which separates the
visible part of a model from its invisible part. During patch modelling, the silhouette lines follow dynamically, i. e. they are continuously recom-
puted as the shape of the patch is modified.
Skin
Skin
Skin
Cluster of topologically contiguous surfaces in a Catia V4 data base.
Topology conditions see Surface Join
Smooth
Gltten
Lisser
Bezier patches, curves and curve segments can be smoothed without a change in the order. In general, marked curvature changes and wavy
areas are delimited. Smoothing is also referred to as fairing.
Curve smoothing can be controlled via different parameterisation options.
See also Parameterisation.
Smooth Factor
Glttfaktor
Facteur de lissage
Influences the approximation quality. This factor controls the length of the polygon lines between the control points. With a factor of 0, these
lengths remain unchanged. A smoothing factor larger than 0, however, generates almost equal lengths of the polygon lines. Setting the
smoothing factor to a value larger than 1 will reduce the creation of waves, and avoid an oscillating control point polygon.
a) regular control b) oscillating control

point polygon point polygon
See also Approximation Quality.
Split Line
Entformkante
Ligne de joint
A split line is a diagnosis line. It separates the splittable part of a surface from its non-splittable part. If a surface has no split line, the part is
splittable in the selected direction.
Also a sheet metal is splittable if, after a drawing operation, it can be removed without any difficulty from the metal forming tool, i. e. the sur-
face must not include any undercuts.
Start Options
Aufrufparameter
Paramtres dappel
Already at its start, a program receives information: via parameters from the command line and via environment variables. When starting a
program via a command line, the information behind the program name are interpreted as start options. Start options are evaluated first, they
take precedence over environment variables.
See also Environment Variables.
Surface-Surface Intersection
Flchendurchdringung
Intersection surface-surface
Surface-surface intersections are one type of diagnostic lines in ICEM Surf. They are computed as intersection curves between two surfaces
piercing each other.
731
GLOSSARY
1
Subdivision of Surfaces
Flchenunterteilung
Dcoupage de Surfaces
The subdivision of surfaces into patches and faces is important for a good structure and an easy modification of the model. The designer will
normally model one patch to achieve the desired surface quality (smoothness), and then generate the desired transitions to all other patches.
The patches of a surface do not need to be arranged in a checkered pattern. A patch edge can be adjacent to multiple smaller patches, result-
ing in so-called T- and K-connections.
See also K-Connection, T-Connection, and Patch Matching.
Surface
Flche
Surface
Molecule consisting of an arbitrary number of NURBS/B-Spline and/or Bezier patches and faces. The patches and faces do not need to be
contiguous.
In general, in the documentation the term Surface is used for any cluster of patches or faces.
See also Patch and Face.
Surface Check
Flchenprfung
Vrification de surface
The Surface Check (Topology) is a diagnostic function. It provides neighbourhood information for surfaces, thus allowing to evaluate the qual-
ity of patch transitions or to identify gaps between the patches of a surface, as well as duplicate or very small objects.
The diagnosis generates topology regions using a specified tolerance and checks the patch matchings regarding normal and position continu-
ity using an examination distance and angle.
See also Diagnosis.
Surface (Control) Point Modification

Flchen(kontroll)punkt-Modifikation
Modification des Points/Ples dune Surface
Surface Join
Flchenjoin
Ensemble de Surfaces
Cluster of topologically contiguous surfaces in a Catia V5 data base. In Catia V5 surfaces are not considered as topologically contiguous, if
1. they have only one contact point,
2. more than two surfaces have a common edge.
Surface of Revolution
Rotationsflche
Surface de rvolution
Surface created by rotating a curve around a rotation axis. The following surfaces of revolution can be generated in ICEM Surf:
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Torus
Barrel
In addition, the generator curve may be any free-form curve.
Swap Space
Swap Space
Swap
Swap space is used to virtually increase the main memory. If the system requires more main memory, but the physical memory is full, mem-
ory space will be swapped out to the hard disk and reloaded if required.
732
GLOSSARY
1
Tangent Continuity
Tangentenstetigkeit
Continuit en tangence
See Continuity.
T-Connection
T-Anschlu
Connexion en T
If patches with different edge lengths are connected to each other, so-called partial connections may be created. Within ICEM Surf, K- and T-
connections are possible. Short patch edges may be connected to longer patch edges, but not vice-versa.
T-connection
See also K-Connection.
Tessellation
Diskretisierung
Tesslation
Method of dividing geometry objects in ICEM Surf.
1. Influencing the display quality and performance:
The display quality of shaded surfaces and the performance for geometry manipulations may be controlled with this function. For this, sur-
faces are subdivided into facets (small planar triangles), curves into small straight line segments. Fine tessellation (also referred to as
faceting in this case) improves the display quality, coarse tessellation improves the graphics performance.
2. Creation of raw data:
This method may also be used for the creation of raw data. In this case, tessellation means the distribution of curve points.
See also Tessellation Types.
Tessellation Types
Diskretisierungsarten
Types de tesslation
Determination of the distribution of curve points for creating raw data. The following tessellation types are distinguished (considering a curve
as example):
Equidistant
The points are distributed regularly within the parameter range. The best way to get back a curve which has been subdivided by the tes-
sellation type Equidistant is to approximate a curve again using Equidistant.
Chordal
The points are computed and distributed along the curve in a way that the distance between them is equal (chord lengths).
Curvature
The points are computed curvature dependent along the parameter range.
Compare with Parameterisation Types.
Texture
Textur
Texture
Textures are two-dimensional images (normally with patterns of materials like rock, wood, glass, etc.) which are projected onto three-dimen-
sional CAD objects for a realistic display of their surface character.
See also Bump Map.
Tolerance Deviation Filter

Toleranz-Abweichungsfilter
Filtre de Tolrance de Dviation
See Filter.
733
GLOSSARY
1
Topology
Topologie
Topologie
See Surface Check.
Translation Surface
Schiebeflche
Surface de translation/surface extrude
Surface which is created by swapping a curve along a vector. Translation surfaces are ruled surfaces; in contrast to profile surfaces, flanges
can be composed step by step.
See also Ruled Surface and Profile Surface.
Translator
Translator
Translateur
Converter for the data exchange between different file formats so that they can be read and processed by other programs. The data exchange
is realised via an interface.
See also Interface.
Triangular Patch
Dreieckspatch
Carreau triangle
Patch with one degenerated edges.
See also Degenerated Patches.
Triangulation
Triangulation
Triangulation
Scans with any structure may be triangulated; facets are created. For this, two algorithms are available.
The 2D triangulizer quickly gives a 3D impression of the scan; generally, the generated net will not be very regular.
The 3D triangulizer delivers excellent results, however, it requires more computing time.
See also Scan and Facets.
Trim (with Reapproximation)

Trimmen (mit Reapproximation)
Dcouper (avec Rapproximation)
Curve segments and patches can be further delimited in their extent, i e. trimmed. The selected curve segments or patches will be seg-
mented or split into two parts at the selected trim boundaries. The resulting segments will have the same order as the original object.
Patches can only be trimmed against curves intersecting two opposite patch edges. A patch will be reapproximated after trimming.
See Face in contrast to this function.
Trimmed Surface
Getrimmte Flche
Surface dcoupe
See Face and Trim (with Reapproximation).
Unified Modelling
Unified Modelling
Function which combines all modelling functions in one menu (local and global modelling). Different geometry types like scans, surfaces,
curves and raw data can be processed similarly. New possibilities for modelling can be realized by the following:
Combination of the geometry.
Processing of NURBS elements also for global modelling.
Dynamic extrapolation and dynamic offset, as well as translations of the geometry.
Possibility of very local changes by control of the geometry modification by specific laws.
Dynamic movement of the geometry along the projection geometry.
Refining the geometry by splitting of the objects into several segments.
Improvement of the handling.
Definition of individual objects as being rigid in order to preserve their shape during global modelling operations.
Utility
Dienstprogramm
Utilitaire
Program created for specific tasks. An ICEM utility is e. g. the batch program surfdb_dup_compare for an external comparison of two ICEM
Surf data bases.
See also Batch Program.
734
GLOSSARY
1
Virtual Memory
Virtueller Speicher
Mmoire virtuelle
See Swap Space.
Work Plane
Arbeitsebene
Plan de travail
A work plane provides a local coordinate system which is required as reference in many geometry functions.
Any number of work planes may be defined, however, only one may be selected as current work plane at the moment. Work planes are
completely independent of the current view, but a work plane can be activated as view, and vice versa.
Z Buffer
Z-Buffer
Z buffer
Graphics buffer for accelerating 3D rendering.
See also Buffer.
735
INDEX
Index
Numerics Balloon-Help Assign 284

2D Triangulizer 363 Preferences 326 Delete 284
2nd Curve 525 Window Interactions 26 of Light Sources 303
3D Curve 422 Barrel Surface 478 Command Shell 710
3D Image Centre 34, 294 Horizontal 480 Comment
3D Motion Controller 343 Oblique 480 Data Base 89
3D Symbol 29, 249 Parallel 479 Raw Data Import 104
3D Triangulizer 363 Batch Program 707 Compress 86
3Dconnexion 343 Beamer 262 Conic Section 403
3DPAINT Bewegen-Symbol 687 Connect
Export 140 Bezier Curves 394, 408, 438
File Formats 66 Curve Segments 387 Patches 458, 485
Import 103 Patches 446 Raw Data 355
3DXML Bezier mesh 446 Surfaces 512, 612
Export 126 Bezier Representation Connecting Curve 426
of Curves 441 Connecting Patch 458, 512
of Surfaces 619 Consistency Check 342
A Binary 707 Context Diagnoses 210
Accelerated Surface 556 ICEM DB Format 122 Context Menu
Active Region ICEM Surf DB Format 85 Unified Modeling 669
Trim Curve 413 Bitplane 707 Continuity 710
Trim Patch 465, 494 Blend 707 Contour Tolerance 351, 352
Trim Several Patches 623 Curves 394 Control Keys
Addenda Surface 572, 623 Global 512 Arrow keys 24
Adjust 689 Patches 458 Ctrl 24
administrator 706 Block of Extreme Values 353 Pause 24
Advanced Fillet 584 Body 68, 707 ScrollLock 24
Alignment B-Spline Shift 24
Patch 499 Curve Segments 387 Text Field 25
Surface Normals 621 Patches 446 View Manipulation 42
Ambient Colour 274 Buffer 708 Control Point 712
Ambient Light Source 302 Bug 708 Curve Segments 407
Angle build date 20 Curves 437
between Polygon Lines 706 build number 20 Patches 482
Notation 27 Bump-Map 248, 276 Surfaces 610
Parameterisation 724 Button 25 Control Point Distribution 712
Smoothing Curves 421, 441 Button Box 342 Control Point Modification 727
Angle Of View 256, 706 Unified Modeling 657
Animation 24, 314 Conversion Tables 71
Anti-Alias C
Convert
Definition 706 Calculator 343
Arcs 443
Export TIFF 153 Catia
Curves 441
Full Scene (Graphics Modes) 325 File Formats 66
Surfaces 619
Line (Display Options) 249 Catia V4
Convex Hull 712
Line (Display) 251 Export 127
Coordinate Axes
Apply 27 Import 106
in Special Functions Bar 49
Approximation 506, 706 Catia V5
Symbol 40
Face Edges 503 Export 130
Coplanar 487, 711
Patch Edge Curves 454 Import 108
Corner Blend 456
Patches 499 catiav4_to_kddat.directive 106
Corner Fillet 713
Raw Data 419, 450 catiav5_to_kddat.directive 108, 130
Corner Points 448
Surfaces 619 CDRSS
Corners 712
Approximation Quality 706 Export 142
Crimp surface 576
Arc Length 59 File Formats 66
Crop
Arc Segment 388 Import 105
Patch Modification 498
Arrow keys 24 Centerline Symmetry 696
Unified Modelling 672
ASCII Central Perspective 24, 46, 255, 344, 708
Crowning 713
ICEM DB Format 122 Central Projection 708
Surface Modification 617
ICEM Surf DB Format 85 Centre of Rotation 249, 258
Unified Modeling 664
ASCII Part CGM 86
Ctrl Key 24
Export 140 Chain Selection 54
Curvature
File Formats 66 Chain selection 57
Definition 713
Import 102 Check Box 25
Diagnosis Display 205
Assign Chordal 708
Tesselation 350
Colours 284 Approximation of Raw Data 450
Tesselation Types 733
Material 271, 344 Parameterisation 724
Curvature Continuity 409, 711
Associative Diagnosis 169, 706 Smoothing Curves 421, 441
Curvature Radius 713
Atom 69, 707 Tessellation 350, 733
Diagnosis Display 205
Attachment Geometry 529 Circle 388
Curve 387, 713
Auto 707 Create 400
Segmentation 413
Approximation of Raw Data 450 Modify 416
Curve Check 183
Parameterisation 724 Circular Arc Segment 709
Curve Composite 68, 713
Smoothing Curves 421, 441 Clay 384
Curve Creation
Auto Arc 707 Clean Up 124
2 x 2D (3D Curve) 422
Approximation of Raw Data 450 Clean up 86
Approximate 419
Parameterisation 724 Clearance 215
Connecting Curve 426
Smoothing Curves 421, 441 Clipping Plane 249, 268
Development 422
AutoForm Clipping Plane Symbol 32
Edge 435
Scan Processor 360 Collinear 513, 711
Interpolate 419
Automatic Min/Max 24, 48 Colour Cycles 318
Offset 429
Colour Models 284, 709
Projection 431
Colour Selection 285
B Colour Table 283
Reapproximate 434
Background Image 249, 289, 294 Sketch 428
Coloured Curvature Diagnosis 238, 242
Background Objects 157, 344 Technical Edge 435
Coloured Deviation Diagnosis 211
Backup file 86 Curve Fillet 391
Colours 283
Curve Join 713
736
INDEX
Curve Matching 713 Diagnostic Line 714 Drawing Vector 236

Curve Modification Different Scaling 48 Dual Screen 715
Control Point 437 Diffuse Colour 274 Duct Surface 554, 715
Convert 441 Digital Mock-Up 715 Dynamic Diagnosis 169, 715
Invert 443 Digitizing Step Size 350 Dynamic Distance Diagnosis 201
Matching 438 Direct Modelling 715 Dynamic Move 687
Sketch 439 Directive Files Dynamic Section 172
Smooth 439 Export CatiaV4 127 Dynamics, Fast ~ 322
Curve Segment 387, 714 Export CatiaV5 130
Bezier 387 Export Unigraphics 134 E
NURBS/B-Spline 387 IGES Export 138
EDF 123
Curve Segment Creation IGES Import 100
Export 124
Arc 400 Import CatiaV4 106
File Formats 66
Blend 394 Import CatiaV5 108
Import 117
By 2 Points 389 Import Unigraphics 112
Scan Processor 360
Circle 400 VDA/FS Export 139
Edge Curvature 715
Intersection Point 397 VDA/FS Import 101
Edge Curves 450
Iso-Curve 389 Directory
Edge Slope 715
Line 398 Change 76
Edges 715
Points 397 Discrete 349
Ellipse 403
Styling Corner 391 Display 247
Encapsulated PostScript 146
Curve Segment Modification Animation 314
Environment 286
Arc 416 Background Image 294
Circle 416 Clipping Plane 268
Environment Images 287
Control Point 407 Colours 283
Environment Lighting 249
Invert 443 Depth of Field 316
Environment lighting 290
Line 414 Display 249
Environment Variables 715
Matching 408 Environment 286
EPS 146
Point 407 Graphics Modes 324
Equal Scaling 48
Trim 412 Grid 270
Equidistant 716
Hidden Line 251
Approximation of Raw Data 450
D Highlight 317
Parameterisation 724
Individual 250
Data Base Smoothing Curves 421, 440
Light Sources 300
Export 123 Tessellation 350, 733
Line Anti-Alias 251
Data Base Filters 70 ESF
Material 270
Data Exchange File Formats 67
Mirror 269
Conversion Tables 71 Scan Processor 360
Mirrored 24
Naming Conventions 70 Executable 716
Options 247
DB 66 Exit
Original 24
DB Status 342 ICEM Surf 22, 91
Original + Mirrored 24
de Boor mesh 446 Export 119
Plot Colours 284
Debug 714 3DPAINT 140
selected Control Points 24
Degenerated Patch 452, 714 3DXML 126
Shading 251
Delete ASCII Part 140
Stereo 319
Colour Assignment 284 Catia V4 127
Tessellation 319
File, Project 90 Catia V5 130
Text 322
Objects 158 CDRSS 142
Texture Projection 279
Scan Points 373 Data Base 123
Turn Table 313
User-defined Settings 28 EDF 124
Unified Modeling 630, 668
Depth of Field 316 ICEM DB 119
Variant 250
Deselection 24, 54 IGES 137
View Layout 262
Design Points 397 Inventor 143
View/Navigation 254
Development 422 PostScript 146
Work Plane 265
Diagnosis 169, 714 Raw Data 146
Display Options 247 249
Angle 227 SCAN 148
3D Symbol 249
Associative 169 STL 149
Background Image 249
Check 176 TIFF 150
Centre of Rotation 249
Clearance 215 Unigraphics 134, 136
Clipping Plane 249
Context 210 VDA/FS 139
Environment 247
Curvature 237 Viewer 125
Environment Lighting 249
Curve Check 183 VRML 153
Glow 249
Delete 246 Express
Grid 249
Delete Graphically 246 Raw Data Creation 349
Highlight 249
Deviation 211 External Devices 43
Individual 249
Distance 210 Extrapolate
Lens Flares 249
Dynamic 169 Move 695
Light 247
Dynamic Distance Diagnosis 201 Unified Modeling 659
Light Source Symbol 249
Flat Region 192 Eye Position 256, 716
Line Anti-Alias 249
Global 208
Plane Symbol 249
Head Impact 185 F
Reflection on Environment 247
Highlight 235
Reflection on Material 248 Face 445, 447, 716
Identification 206
Shading 247 Create 465
Inflection Line 245
Shadows on Environment 247 Untrim 502
Levelling 223
in Special Functions Bar 45 Faceting 733
Local 206
Stereo 249 Faceting. See Tessellation
Mass Properties 209
Text 249 Facets 716
Matching 228
Textures 248 Edit 371
Minimum/Maximum Deviation 214
Transparency 249 Modify 383
Nominal Actual Value Comparison 203
Display Variants 250, 344 Fairing 716, 731
Normals 245
Display with Different Scaling 48 Fast Dynamics 322
Object 206
Display with Equal Scaling 47 Favourites 76
On/Off 344
Distance Tolerance Filter 717 Feature Design
Reflection 231
Divide Definition 716
Scan Check 184
Raw Data 355 Surface Modification 616
Sections 169
Scans 376 Unified Modeling 663
Shape 230
Unified Modeling 677, 679 Feature Line
Split Lines 236
Documentation 20 Definition 716
Surface Check 176
Domain Scan Creation 367
Surface-Surface Intersection 230
Scan Processor 360 Unified Modeling 654
Switch On/Off 246
Double Buffer 715 File
Visual Surface Comparison 202
737
INDEX
Comment 89 HLS Colour Model 284, 709 L

Delete 90 Host 719 Law
Exit 91 Hue 285, 709 Blend Surface 462
New 85 Hymarc 360 Curve Offset 430
Open 84 Hyperbola 403 Layer 68
Plot 86 Layer Structure 68
Preview 90 I Lens Flares 249, 309, 721
Protocol 89 Level Of Detail 321
ICEM CGM Plot Previewer 719
Reference Manager 78 Library 721
ICEM DB 66, 67
Rename 90 Textures 276
Export 119
Save 85 License Access 338
Import 92
Save as... 86 License Window 338
ICEM Installer 719
File Formats 66 Licenses 339
ICEM Online 20
Fillet 717 Lichtquelle
ICEM Surf 719
Curve Segments 391 HDR 305
ICEM Surf DB 69
Global 541 Light
ICEM Surf for Academia 341
Surfaces 541 Display Options 247
ICEM Surf Realtime Rendering 719
Fillet Curve 717 HDR 305
ICEM Surf Student Edition 341
Fillet Flange 568, 717 Light Sources 300
ICEM Viewer 719
Fillet Surfaces 717 on Environment 288
ICEM_pdm_request 78
Filter 717 Light File 105, 142
ICEMClient 78
Raw Data 356 Light Source
ICEMServer 78
Scan 378 Ambient 302
Identification 49
Firewall 717 Beam 301
IGES
Fix Point 420 Colour 303
Export 137
Flange 717 Intensity 303, 346
File Formats 66
Flange Surface 559 Model Dependent 303
Import 99
Flat Region 192 Point 302
IGES File 105, 142
Flat Shading 730 Shadow 304
Image center 34
Focal Length 262 in Special Functions Bar 46
Image Centre 294
Footer of Function Windows 26 Spot 302
Image Symbol 34
Format Symbol 249
Image-based Lighting 290
Export Raw Data 147 Symbol Beam 36
Import 92
Import Raw Data 104 Symbol Point 37
3DPAINT 103
Import Scan Preview 360 Symbol Spot 37
ASCII Part 102
Frame Buffer 718 View Dependent 303
Catia V4 106
Freeze 50 Light Source Symbol 36
Catia V5 108
Full Scene Anti-Alias 325 Light Sources 300
CDRSS 105
Function Key Assignment 342 Lightness 285, 710
EDF 117
Function Keys 23 Limit Geometry 531
ICEM DB 92
Function Windows 25 Line 721
IGES 99
Raw Data 103 Line Anti-Alias 249, 251
G Scan 102 Line Font 252
Gamma Correction 153, 718 STL 115 Line Offset 331
Gap surface 576 Unigraphics 112, 114 Line Width 88
Generator Curve 470 VDA/FS 101 Linear
Geometry Functions 45 Increment 86, 353 Blend Surface 461
Geometry Objects 158 Individual Curve Offset 430
Global Blend 512 Display 250 Linear Interpolation 389
Global Extrapolate Display Options 249 List Structure 69
Move 685 Tessellation 322 Lists 156 157
Global Faces 582 Inflection Line 245, 720 Background Objects 157
Global Fillet 718 Inflection Point 720 Definition 721
Global Modelling 718 Influence Point Detail 156
Global Offset 510 Define 420 Selection 156, 344
Global Trim 623 Delete 421 Structure 156
Glow 249, 310 Info-Line 44 local_defaults.txt 328
GNU GPL 718 Input Devices 43 Log File 721
GOM ATOS 360 Interface 720 Logical File Paths 76, 337
Gouraud Shading 730 Interpolate 720
Graphic Area 45 Interpolation 419 M
Graphic Performance 49 Interpolation Points 430, 462 Magnifying Glass 42, 722
Graphics Cache 321 Intersection Curve 230 Matching 722
Graphics Modes 324 Intersection of Two Objects 230 Curves 408, 438
Grid Intersection Point 397 into the Interior of a Patch 461
Display 270 Inventor into the Interior of a Surface 513
Display Options 249 Export 143 Patches 485
Plot Grid 87 File Formats 66 Surfaces 612
Symbol 40 Invert Material 270
Gro-/Kleinsensitiv 326 Curve Parameter Flow 443 Ambient Colour 274
Curve Segment Parameter Flow 443 Assign 271, 344
H Raw Data 357 Diffuse Colour 274
Scan Normals 382 Management 271
Hardware information 332
Surface Normals 621 Reflection 275
HDR
Iso-Curve 720 Selection 344
File Formats 66
Iso-Line Shine Colour 274
Lichtquelle 305
as Connecting Edge 460 in Special Functions Bar 46
HDTV 719
Isophotes 235, 317, 720 Transparency 275
Head Impact 185
Header 719 Material File 105, 142
Raw Data Import 104 J Mean 722
Write VDA/FS 140 JPEG Approximation of Raw Data 450
Helicooid 470 File Formats 67 Parameterisation 724
Helix 470 Smoothing Curves 421, 441
Help 20 Merge Scans 376
K Metafile 722
Hidden Line 251
K-Connection 720 Min/Max Block 173
Highlight 249, 317, 324
kddat_to_catiav4.directive 127 Mirror 269, 685
Highlight Line 235, 720
kddat_to_ug.directive 134 in Special Functions Bar 47
Course 231
Keyboard 342 Model Space 129
Highlights 729
komplanar 487 Modify Surface
738
INDEX
Smooth 619 Operating System Commands 344 Point Symbol 38

Modules Options 25 Points 727
Advanced Tools 341 Order 723 Create 397
Catia V4 Direct Interface 341 of Curve Segments 387 on Curve Segments 407
Magic 340 of Patches 446 Popup Menu 25
Master 340 Overlay 723 Port 728
PLM Link 341 Port Number 728
Professional 339 P Position Continuity 409, 710
Realtime Renderer 340 Position Selection 58
Panel 344
Safety Analysis 341 PostScript 728
Parallel Curve 429
Scan Modelling 341 Export 146
Parallel Light Source 301
Surf Viewer 341 File Formats 67
Parallel Perspective 46, 254
Unigraphics Direct Interface 341 PowerMILL
Parallel Projection 344, 723
Molecule 69, 707 File Formats 67
Parallel Surface 463, 510, 722
Mount 722 Prferenzen
Parallel to Plane 524
Mouse Button Assignment 44, 346 Gro-/Kleinsensitiv 326
Parameter Distribution 724
Mouse buttons 24 Line Offset 331
Parameter Flow Direction, Reverse 443
Mousewarp 43 Preference Files 327, 728
Parameterisation 724
Unified Modeling 663 local_defaults.txt 328
Approximation of Raw Data 450
Move 681 private_defaults.txt 328
Projection of Curves 432
2 Planes 688 site_defaults.txt 327
Smoothing Curves 421, 440
Adjust 689 Preferences 326 336
Parameterisation Types 724
Dynamic 687 Balloon-Help 326
Parameters
Extrapolate 695 Hardware information 332
Function Windows 25
Global Extrapolate 685 Load DB Directly 326
Part 69, 707
Mirror 685 OpenGL 332
Patch 445, 724
Register 692 Realtime Renderer 332
Bezier 446
Rotate 681 Reference Manager 334
NURBS/B-Spline 446
Scale 684 Reminder 326
Patch (Software) 724
Symbol 31, 687 Screen resolution 331
Patch Creation
Translate 683 Selection 328
Barrel 478
Unified Modeling 667 Site Preferences 327
Blend 458
View 41 Style 335
By 4 Points 448
Moving Frame User Preferences 327
By Curves 450
Development 425 View 329
By Patches 454
Moving Frame Type Prefix. See Name Prefix
By Raw Data 448
2nd Curve 525 Preview 77, 86, 90, 125
Corner Blend 456
Global Blend 514 Preview (Scan) 359, 361
Face (Trimmed Patch) 465
Parallel to Plane 524 Previous View 24
Region 455
Patch Normal 525 Print.See Plot
Ruled Surface 464
Profiles 523 private_defaults.txt 328
Surface of Revolution 470
Radial to Spine Curve 524 Profile Surface 522, 728
Patch Matching 724
Multiblend 512 Attachment Geometry 529
Patch Modification
Multiple Selection 51 Duct Surface 554
Alignment 499
Limit Geometry 531
Control Point 482
N Spine Curve 522
Crop 498
Project 728
name length 70 Curve 504
Delete 90
Name Prefix Face Untrim 502
Projected Section 175
Export ASCII Parts 142 Matching 485
Projection 728
Export IGES 138 Point 482
of Curves, Points, Raw Data 431
Export VDA/FS 139 Refit Patch 496
onto Scans 431
Naming Conventions 70 Smooth 498
Navigation 258 Trim 494
Protocol 89
Nominal Actual Value Comparison 203 Patch Normal 525
Proxy 728
Normal Continuity 710 path 725
N-Sided Blend 518, 722 Pause 24
NURBS PDF Documentation 20 R
Curve Segments 387 PDM Radial to Spine Curve 524
Patches 446 Definition 725 Radio Box 25
NURBS Representation ICEM_pdm_request 78 RAM 728
of Curves 441 ICEMClient 78 Raw Data
of Surfaces 619 ICEMServer 78 creation on NURBS curves 351
Start Options 78 Export 146
O Workflow 77 Export Format 147
Phong Shading 730 File Formats 67
O/S Command 345
Photogrammetry 349, 358 Import 103
Object Diagnoses 206
Pixel Lighting 321 Import Format 104
Object Manager 161
Plane Symbol 24, 29 Raw Data Contour 349, 729
Object Selection 53
Plane.See Work Plane Raw Data Creation
Object Selection Table 56
Planes 735 Discrete 349
Object Type List 52
PLM Express 349
Objects 158
Definition 725 On Object 350
Delete 158
PLM.see PDM On Scans 352
Structure Editor 159
Plot 86 89 Scan Sections 351
Offset 722
Plot Colours Sections 352
Curves 429
Display Colours 284 Raw Data Modification
Global 510
File Plot 89 Connect 355
Scan 366
Plot Configuration File Delete Points 354
Surfaces 463
Definition 725 Divide 355
Plot Grid 87 Filter 356
Offset Curve 722
Plot Scaling 86 Insert Points 354
Offset Distance
Select Plotter 86 Invert 357
Law 430
plotter.configuration 86 Move Point 354
Linear 430
Point 397 Refine 355
Variable 430
Point Cloud 359, 725 Raw Data Segment 349, 729
Offset Law 461
Point Light Source 302 Ray Trace 730
Offset Surface 722
Point Modification Realtime Renderer 332, 719
On-line Help 20
Unified Modeling 657 Reapproximation of curves 434
Activation 26
Point Modifications 726 Recovery 22
Open Source 723
Point Sequence 422, 728 Reference Curve
OpenGL 332, 723
Point Set 397, 727 Curve Modification 437
739
INDEX
Patch Modification 504 Facet Modifications 383 Silhouette Line 236, 731
Reference File Paths 337 Filter 378 Site Preferences 327
Reference Manager 78, 334 Invert 382 site_defaults.txt 327
in Special Functions Bar 45 Merge 376 Sketch
Reference Point 257, 729 Refine 377 Curves 428, 439
Refine Scans 377 Replace 381 Skin 731
Refit Trim 373 Slider 26
Patch 496 Scan Previewer 359 Smooth 731
Surface 614 Scan Sections 351, 730 Curves 422, 430, 439
Refit 3D 128, 137 Scan Types 358 Patches 498
Refit Surface 614, 729 Compress 358 Raw Data 349, 450
Reflection Edge Based 358 Surfaces 619
on Environment 247, 288 Point Based 358 Smooth Factor 731
on Material 248, 275 Scene File 105, 142 Snap Radius
Quality 332 Screen Layout 336 Selection Parameter 328
Special Reflection Image 289 Screen resolution 331 Snapshot 327
Spherical ~ 289 ScrollLock 24 SpaceBall 343
Use Specular Colour 333 Section Range 173, 353 SpaceMouse 343
Reflection Diagnosis Section Types 170, 353 Spacing
Light Source 231 Sections 169, 730 Grid 270
Principle 232 2D Projection 174 Special Functions 45, 45
Reflection Line 231, 729 Active 344 Spine Curve
Course 231 at Clipping Plane 269 Fillet Flange 568
Refraction 275 Dynamic 172 Profiles 522
Region Min/Max Block 173 Split
Patch Creation 455 Scale 175 Highlight 318
Unified Modelling 637 True 171 Split Line 236, 731
Region Out 54 Segment Boundary Spot Light Source 302
Region Selection Define 420, 440 Standard Environments 293
General 61 Delete 420, 440 Standard Perspective 329
Scan 62 Insert 355 Standard perspective 46
Register 692 Segment Tolerance 351 Standard views 46
Rename Segmentation Star Point 518, 567, 612
File 90 Arcs 416 Start Options 731
User-defined Settings 28 Curves 413, 434 Start Part 129
Resolution 331 Lines 415 Starting Edge 568
Restore Site Preferences 327 Patch Alignment 500 Status Line 45
Restore User Preferences 327 Patch Matching 492 Status Window 24, 342
Restore Variables 26 Unified Modeling 677, 679 Steinbichler AC 360
Restore Window Position 27 Selection 51 Stereo 249, 261, 324
rfp Arc Length 59 STL
File Formats 67 Chain selection 57 Export 149
RGB Colour Model 284, 710 Colour 55 File Formats 67
Room File 105, 142 Material 54 Import 115
Rotate Object 53 Scan Processor 360
Geometry 681 Object Selection Table 56 Straight Line 388
Unified Modeling 660 Object Type List 52 Create 398
View 41 Parameters 328 Modify 414
Ruled Surface 464, 729 Position 58 Straighten up (Windows) 346
Ruler 49 Region 61 Structure Editor 159
Region Out 54 Catia V4 130
S Scan Region 62 Catia V5 133
Selection Table 56 ICEM DB 160
Saturation 285, 710
Vector 60 Unigraphics 136
Save 85
Selection (Shortcuts) 52 Styling Corner 391
4.12/4.11 85
Selection List 26 Subdivision of Surfaces 732
ASCII 85
Display Variants 250, 344 SURF_AUX
Binary 85
Lists 156, 344 Display variant 251
Freeze 50
Materials 344 Surface 445, 732
Scan 361
View 46, 254, 344 Surface Check 176, 732
User Preferences 327
View Layouts 263, 344 Surface Creation
User-defined Settings 28
Work Planes 46, 266, 344 Accelerated Surface 556
Save as... 86
Selection Sets 58 Addenda 572
Scale 684, 729
Selection Table 26, 56 Advanced Fillet 584
Scaled Section 175
Self Shadows 248, 333 By Curves (N-Sided Blend) 518
Scaling center 34
Service Functions 45, 49 Duct Surface 554
Scaling Centre Point 294
Session Fill 567
SCAN
Unified Modeling 630 Fillet 541
Export 148
Session File 67 Fillet Flange 568
File Formats 67
Set Flanges 559
Scan 730
Diagnoses 172, 231 Gap 576
2D Triangulizer 363
Shading 24 Global Blend 512
3D Triangulizer 363
Display 251 Global Faces 582
Design Process 359
Display Options 247 Global Fillet 541
Import 102
Tessellation 320 Global Offset 510
Preview Directory 360
Shadow Offset 463
Preview Import 360
Light Source 304 Profiles 522
Projection 431
on Environment 247, 288 Tri-Tangent Fillet 600
Tolerance Deviation Filter 378
Quality of Soft Shadows 333 Tube 534
Scan Check 184
Shadow Type 304 Surface Glow 310
Scan Creation
Shadows Surface Join 732
Feature Line 367
on Geometry 248 Surface Modification
Object 364
Shape Diagnoses 230 Addenda 623
Offset 366
Sharp Bend 419 Control Point 610
Preview 361
Shell 68, 730 Convert 619
Triangulation 363
Shift-Taste 24 Crowning 617
Scan Line 364, 730
Shine Colour 274 Feature Design 616
Scan Modification
Shortcuts Global Trim 623
Clay 384
Selection 52 Invert 621
Delete 373
Unified Modeling 663 Matching (Multiple) 612
Divide 376
Shutter Glasses 261 Point 609
Edit Facets 371
740
INDEX
Refit Surface 614 Patchanschlu 486 File Formats 67

Surface of Revolution 470, 732 ug_to_kddat.directive 112 Import/Inlcude 101
Surface-Surface Intersection 731 Undo 50 Vector Selection 60
Swap Space 732 Unified Modeling 626, 734 Vector Symbol 38
Symmetry 696 (De)activating Object Types 628 version number 20
System Abort without Saving 22 Bell-Shaped Function 661 View 254
Context Menus 669 Central Perspective 255
T Control Point Modification 657 Manipulation 41 43
Creation 631 Parallel Perspective 254
Tablet 344
Crowning 664 Rotation 261
Tangent Continuity 409, 710
Curve Context Menu 670 Selection 46, 254, 344
Target Patch
Curve Smooth 675 Standard Views 46
Fillet Flange 570
Curve/Raw Data Creation 632 View Layout 262 265
Target Surface
Diagnoses for Projection 656 Delete View 265
Offset of Curves 429
Diagnoses for Topology 645 Detail 265
T-Connection 733
Direct Control Point Modification 661 Duplicate 265
Technical Edge 435
Direct Modeling 627 Dynamic 263
Temporary Save 50
Direct Modeling with Projection Base 627 Modify Frame 265
Tessellation 319
Direct Point Modification 661 from Plot Function 87
Definition 733
Display 630, 668 Screen 263
Fast Dynamics 322
Divide 677, 679 Selection 263, 344
Global 320
Edge Conditions 640 Translate 265
Graphics Cache 321
Express Control Point Modification 661 View Manipulation 346
Individual 322
Express Point Modification 661 Mouse 346
Level Of Detail 321
Extrapolate 659 Viewer
Projection of Curves 432
Face Context Menu 671 Export 125
Raw Data Creation on Object 350
Face Smooth 675 File Formats 67
Shading 320
Feature Design 663 Virtual Memory 735
Geometry 626 Visual Surface Comparison 202
Tessellation Types 733
Geometry Definition 640 Volume modelling
Topological 321
Geometry-Reference Relation 648 Unified Modeling 668
Wire Frame 320
Global Modeling 627 VRML
Text 249, 322
Global Modeling with Projection Base 627 Export 153
Text Anchor 38
Laws 661 File Formats 67
Text Field 25
Modification Mode 661
Textanker 324
Mousewarp 663 W
Texture Mapping 140, 279, 280
Move 667
Texture Paths 336 Werkzeugleiste 22
Object Relations 626
Texture Projection 140, 276, 279 Window Background Image 289
Object Types 626
Textures 248, 275, 733 Window Position (restore) 27
Offset 659
Thumb Wheel 26 Windows
Order Change 675
TIFF Calculator 343
Patch Context Menu 670
Export 150 Keyboard 342
Patch Smooth 675
File Formats 67 Licenses 338
Patch/Scan Creation 635
Tiff_Library 276 Logical File Paths 337
Point Modification 657
Tolerance Deviation Filter 356, 378, 733 Mouse 346
Projection Base 626
Topological Tessellation 321 Panel 344
Projection Base Definition 651
Topology 176, 732 Preferences 326
Projection Direction 629
Unified Modeling 640 Reference File Paths 337
Projection on Feature Lines 654
Torsion/G3 410, 712 Status 342
Projection on Scan Regions 652
Trace 266 Straighten up 346
Raw Data Context Menu 673
Trace Plane 173, 353 Tablet 344
Raw Data Smooth 676
Tracing Process Texture Paths 336
Reference 626
Mechanical 349, 358 Wire Frame
Reference Definition 647
Optical 349, 358 Colour Display 283
Rigid Geometry/Reference 646
Transition Quality Display 249
Rotate 660
Curve Matching 409, 439 Hidden Line 251
Scan Context Menu 674
Diagnosis 228 Selection 55
Scan Smooth 676
Translate 683 Tessellation 320
Segmentation 677, 679
Translation Surface 734 Work Plane
Selection 628
Translator 734 Definition 735
Session 630
Transparency 249, 275, 318 Depth 267
Shortcuts 663
TriangleStrip 358 Move 688
Special Features 626
Triangular Patch 452, 734 by 3 Points 266
Symmetric Geometry/Reference 647
Triangulation 363, 734 Selection 46, 266, 344
Topology for Face Edges 679
Trim 447 Settings 265 267
Topology Relations 640
Comparison 466 Standard Planes 46
Transition Conditions 640
Curve Segments 412 Symbol 249, 267
Volume Context Menu 674
Facetrimming 465 by Trace Line 266
Volume modelling 668
Global 623
Unigraphics
Patches 465, 494 X
Export 134, 136
Scan 373
File Formats 67 xyz
with Reapproximation 494, 734
Import 112, 114 File Formats 67
Trim Curve 494
Up Vector 257 Scan Processor 360
Trimmed Patch 447, 465
User Interface 44
Trimmed Surface 734
User Preferences 327 Z
Tri-Tangent Fillet 600
Utility 734
True Section 171 Z Buffer 735
Tube Surface 534 Zoom 41, 44
Tubular Surface 571 V Zoom Detail 42
Turn Spacing 470 Variable Zoom Factor 43, 44, 47
Turn Table 313, 346 Blend Surface 462 Zoom In 47
Curve Offset 430 Zoom Out 47
U Variables (restore) 26 Zoomfaktor 327
VDA/FS
bergangsqualitt
Export 139
741

Surf Manual English

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Surf Manual English

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

ICEM Surf 2015.

Dassault Systmes 2015.

Copyright 2015 Dassault Systmes. All Rights Reserved.

Registered Trade Marks of Dassault Systmes or a Subsidiary

Third-Party Trade Marks

Licensed Third-Party Technology Information

WinX11 library license information

TIFF Image I/O library license information

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Dassault Systmes Deutschland GmbH Hannover Dassault Systmes Italia

Phone: +49 (0)511 9848 6 Phone: +39 0 233 43061

Phone: +33 1 6162 7203

USA & Canada: Asia & Pacific:

Dassault Systmes Americas Dassault Systmes K.K.

Phone: +1 248 351 0741 Phone: +81 (0)3 5442 6040

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

1 Documentation and online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

1.1 Documentation in PDF format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

2 General control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

2.1 Starting and terminating ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

3 User interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

3.1 Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

4.1 General information about the selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

4.2.4 Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

5 The menu File General functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

5.1 General information about input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

6 The menu File Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

6.1 Import ICEM DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

6.2 Import IGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

7 eThe menu File Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

7.1 General export options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

7.12 Export ASCII Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

8 The menu List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

9 The menu Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

9.1 Objects Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

10 The menu Diagnoses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

10.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

10.3.1.3 Patches/Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

10.7.4.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

11 The menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

11.1 Display Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

11.14.3 The submenu Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

12 The menu Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

12.1 Windows Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

13 Point and control point modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347

14 Raw Data creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

14.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

15 Raw Data modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

15.1 Raw Data in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354

16 Scan creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

16.1 Scans in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358

17 Scan modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

17.1 Scans in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

18 Curve segment creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

18.1 Curves in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

19 Curve segment modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

19.1 Curves in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407

20 Curve creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

20.1 Curves in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

21 Curve modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

21.1 Curves in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

21.3 Curve modification Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

22 Patch creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445

22.1 Surfaces in ICEM Surf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445